Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
Project Manual
Bassett Associates
Lima, Ohio
GOP Limited
Cincinnati, Ohio
Fanning Howey
Celina, Ohio
Introductory Information
00 01 10 .............. Table of Contents
Procurement Requirements
00 10 00 .............. Solicitation
00 21 13 .............. Instructions to Bidders
00 31 19 .............. Existing Condition Information
00 31 32 .............. Geotechnical Data
............................ Geotechnical Report
00 41 13 .............. Bid Form
00 43 13 .............. Bid Security Form
00 45 13 .............. Bidder’s Qualifications
00 45 39 .............. EDGE Affidavit
Contracting Requirements
00 52 00 .............. Agreement Form
00 52 14 .............. Subcontract Form (OAC 153:1-03-02)
00 61 13 .............. Performance and Payment Bond Form
00 62 43 .............. Certified Payroll Report
00 71 00 .............. Contracting Definitions
00 72 13 .............. General Conditions
00 73 00 .............. Supplementary Conditions
00 73 43 .............. Wage Rate Requirements
............................ Prevailing Wage Rates
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
Division 03 – Concrete
03 30 00 .............. Cast-In-Place Concrete
Division 04 – Masonry
04 20 00 .............. Unit Masonry
.............. UL-U905
Division 05 – Metals
05 12 00 .............. Structural Steel Framing
05 12 13 .............. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing
05 21 00 .............. Steel Joist Framing
05 31 00 .............. Steel Decking
05 50 00 .............. Metal Fabrication
............. UL-C-AJ-3281
............. UL-C-AJ-3282
.............. UL-C-AJ-3283
............ UL-C-AJ-3284
............. UL-C-AJ-3285
............ UL-W-J-3168
............. UL-C-AJ-3298
............. UL-W-J-3167
............ UL-W-J-1215
............ UL-W-J-2229
............ UL-W-J-2230
............. UL-W-L-1441
............. UL-W-L-2537
............ UL-W-L-2538
............ UL-W-L-3334
............ UL-W-L-2541
............ UL-W-L-3395
............ UL-W-J-3200
07 84 43 .............. Joint Firestopping
.............. UL-HW-D-0285 – Joint Systems
.............. UL-HW-D-0295 – Joint Systems
07 92 00 .............. Joint Sealants
Division 08 – Openings
08 11 13 .............. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
08 14 16 .............. Flush Wood Doors
08 41 13 .............. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts
08 71 00 .............. Door Hardware
08 80 00 .............. Glazing
08 88 13 .............. Fire-Resistant Glazing
Division 09 – Finishes
09 22 16 .............. Non-Structural Metal Framing
09 29 00 .............. Gypsum Board
............... UL U419
09 30 13 .............. Ceramic Tiling
09 51 13 .............. Acoustical Panel Ceilings
09 65 13 .............. Resilient Base and Accessories
09 65 16 .............. Resilient Sheet Flooring
09 65 19 .............. Resilient Tile Flooring
09 68 13 .............. Tile Carpeting
09 91 13 .............. Exterior Painting
09 91 23 .............. Interior Painting
Division 10 – Specialties
10 11 00 .............. Visual Display Units
10 21 13.19 ......... Plastic Toilet Compartments
10 22 39 .............. Folding Panel Partitions
10 26 00 .............. Wall and Door Protection
10 28 00 .............. Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories
Division 11 – Equipment
11 52 13 .............. Projection Screens
11 53 13 .............. Laboratory Fume Hoods
Division 12 – Furnishings
12 24 13 .............. Roller Window Shades
12 35 53.13 ......... Metal Laboratory Casework
12 36 61.16 ......... Solid Surfacing Countertops
END OF DOCUMENT
All bids for Project WSU-160027 Agricultural Education and Water Quality Building received and read aloud on
January 25, 2017 were rejected.
Sealed bids for revised scope of work (rebid) will be received by:
Wright State University-Lake Campus
Dean’s Office
108 Dwyer Hall
7600 Lake Campus Drive
Celina, Ohio 45822
Bidders are encouraged to be enrolled in and to be in good standing in a Drug-Free Safety Program (“DFSP”) approved by
the Ohio Bureau of Workers' Compensation (“OBWC”) prior to submitting a Bid and provide, on the Bid Form with its Bid,
certain information relative to their enrollment in such a program; and, if awarded a Contract, shall comply with other DFSP
criteria described in Section 1.6 of the General Conditions.
Bids will be received for:
Trade Estimate
Prime Contract .......................................................... $2,250,000
Concrete Patio and Boot Wash .................................... $3,600
Asphalt Walk to Dwyer ............................................... $3,000
Brick Veneer................................................................ $36,000
Roller Shades............................................................... $7,500
Commercial Hood ....................................................... $21,500
Demand Ventilation Controls ...................................... $14,000
until March 21, 2017, at 2:00 p.m., when all Bids will be opened and read aloud.
Contractor is responsible for scheduling the Project, coordinating the Subcontractors, and providing other services identified
in the Contract Documents. Successful bidder shall begin the Work on receipt of the Notice to Proceed and shall complete the
Work within the Contract Time of 200 consecutive calendar days.
The Contract Documents are available for purchase from:
BlueServ Reprograhics, LLC
3313 Seajay Drive
Beavercreek, Ohio 45430
Phone: 937-426-6410
Fax: 937-426-6420
Contact: Rob Mantia
Email: rmantia@blueservrepro.com
Website: www.blueservplanroom.com
at the non-refundable cost of $145.00 per set, plus shipping, if requested.
The Contract Documents may be reviewed for bidding purposes without charge during business hours at the office of the A/E
and the following locations:
Allied Construction Industries BB-Bid Plan Room
3 Kovach Drive Contractor’s Register
Cincinnati, Ohio 45215 800 East Main Street
Phone: (513) 221-8020 Jefferson Valley, NY 10535
Contact: Candi Oakley Phone: (800) 431-2584 Ext 3618
E-mail: coakley@aci-construction.org Contact: Kathy Stein
Website: www.aci-construction.org E-mail: kstein@thebluebook.com
Website: www.thebluebook.com
The Builder’s Exchange, Inc. (Cleveland) The Builder’s Exchange, Inc. (Dayton)
9555 Rockside Rd., Suite 300 2077 Embury Park Road
Valley View, Ohio 44125 Dayton, Ohio 45414
Phone: (216) 393-6300 Ext 39 / (866) 907-6300 Phone: (937) 278-5723
Contact: Laurel Screptock Contact: John Grandetti [Do not send documents]
E-mail: info@bxohio.com E-mail: jgrandetti@bxohio.com
Website: www.bxcleve.com Website: www.bxohio.com
The Builder’s Exchange, Inc. (Toledo) Builder’s Exchange of East Central Ohio
5555 Airport Highway, Suite 140 5080 Aultman Road
Toledo, Ohio 43615 North Canton, Ohio 44720
Phone: (419) 865-3833 Ext 201 Phone: (330) 452-8039 Ext 104
Contact: Sarah Skiver Contact: Julie Thornberry
E-mail: sskiver@bxohio.com E-mail: jthornberry@buildersexchange.org
Website: www.bxohio.com Website: www.mybx.org
Ohio University Procurement Technical Assistance South Point Procurement Technical Assistance Center
Center Southern Ohio Procurement Outreach Center
Voinovich Center for Leadership and Public Affairs 216 Collins Avenue
The Ridges, Building 20, Suite 143 South Point, Ohio 45680
Athens, Ohio 45701 Phone: (740) 377-4550
Phone: (740) 597-1868 Contact: Jordan Lucas
Contact: Sharon Hopkins E-mail: jordan@sopoc.org
E-mail: ptac@ohio.edu Website: www.sopoc.org
Website: www.ohio.edu/ptac
Mahoning Valley Procurement Technical Assistance Region 1 Minority Business Assistance Center
Center Akron Urban League
Mahoning Valley Economic Development Corporation 440 Vernon Odom Boulevard
4319 Belmont Avenue Akron, Ohio 44307
Youngstown, Ohio 44505 Phone: (234) 542-4149
Phone: (330) 759-3668 x24 Contact: Triva Manley
Contact: Norma Webb E-mail: tmanley@akronurbanleague.org
E-mail: norma@mvedc.com Website: www.akronurbanleague.org
Website: www.mvedc.com
Region 2 Minority Business Assistance Center Region 3 Minority Business Assistance Center
University of Toledo Central Ohio Minority Business Association
2145 East Scott Park Drive 1393 East Broad Street, Floor 2
Toledo, Ohio 43607 Columbus, Ohio 43205
Phone: (419) 530-3344 Phone: (614) 252-8005 Ext. 102
Contact: Jay Black Contact: Averi Frost [Paper + PDF]
E-mail: nwombac@utoledo.edu E-mail: jfrost@comba.com
Website: www.nwombac.com Website: www.comba.com
Region 4 Minority Business Assistance Center Region 5 Minority Business Assistance Center
City of Dayton c/o Human Relations Council Greater Cincinnati African American Chamber
907 West Fifth Street 2945 Gilbert Avenue
Dayton, Ohio 45402 Cincinnati, Ohio 45206
Phone: (937) 333-1002 Phone: (513) 475-7151 Ext. 121
Contact: RoShawn Winburn Contact: Deborah Davis
E-mail: roshawn.winburn@daytonohio.gov E-mail: deborah@african-americanchamber.com
Website: www.african-americanchamber.com
END OF DOCUMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................1
ARTICLE 2 - BIDDING PROCEDURES ................................................................1
ARTICLE 3 - BID OPENING AND EVALUATION.................................................5
ARTICLE 4 - WITHDRAWAL OF BID ...................................................................8
ARTICLE 5 - BID GUARANTY AND BOND ..........................................................9
ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACT AWARD AND EXECUTION ......................................10
KEYWORD INDEX ...............................................................................................12
2.9 Alternates
2.9.1 If an Alternate is listed on the Bid Form, the Bidder shall fill in the applicable blank with an increased or decreased
bid amount and indicate which by circling the word “ADD” or the word “DEDUCT” as applicable. The Contracting
Authority reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bid amounts for Alternates, in whole or in part, and in any order.
2.9.1.1 If no change in the bid amount is required, indicate "No Change" or “$0.”
2.9.1.2 Failure to make an entry or an entry of "No Bid,” “N/A," or similar entry on any Alternate shall cause the
Bid to be rejected as non-responsive if that Alternate is selected.
2.9.1.3 Failure to indicate a negative number by circling “DEDUCT,” preceding the number by a minus sign, or
enclosing the number in parentheses will indicate the Bidder’s intent to increase the Base Bid by the amount entered
in the applicable blank.
2.9.1.4 If an Alternate is not selected, an entry as listed in Section 2.9.1.2 on that Alternate shall not, by itself,
render a Bid non-responsive.
5.4 Bond
5.4.1 Prior to signing the Agreement, the Bidder shall provide the Bond required by law in form and substance
satisfactory to the Contracting Authority, and from a Surety licensed to do business in the state of Ohio and satisfactory
to the Contracting Authority.
5.4.1.1 If the Bidder provided Document 00 43 13 - Bid Security Form, described in Section 5.1.1.1, as its Bid
Guaranty then that form shall be the Bond.
5.4.1.2 If the Bidder provided another form of Bid Guaranty, described in Section 5.1.1.2, then Document 00 61 13
- Performance and Payment Bond Form, described in Section 5.1.6, shall be the Bond.
5.4.1.3 The Bidder shall not be required to provide both forms described above.
5.4.2 The Bond must be in the full amount of the Contract to indemnify the State against all direct and consequential
damages suffered by failure of the Contractor to perform according to the provisions of the Contract and in accordance
with the Plans, Specifications, details, and bills of material therefore and pay all lawful claims of Subcontractors,
Material Suppliers, and laborers for labor performed or materials furnished in performing and completing the Contract.
KEYWORD INDEX
A C
Acceptable Components, 3 Change Order, 1, 11
Addenda, 1, 2 Contract, 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
Addendum, 2, 3, 6 Contract Documents, 1, 2, 3, 6, 8, 9, 10
Affirmative Action, 4, 7, 10 Contract Sum, 1, 4
Agreement, 9, 10, 11
Allowances, 4 D
Alternate, 4, 6, 7
Applicable Law, 2, 6, 10, 12 Drawings, 1, 2, 3
award of the Contract, 1, 6, 7, 11 Drug-Free Safety Program (“DFSP”), 5, 11
B E
Base Bid, 4, 6, 7, 9 Encouraging Diversity Growth and Equity (“EDGE”), 3,
Basis of Design Component, 2, 3 4, 5, 7, 11
Bid, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 Equal Employment Opportunity, 7
Bid Form, 1, 3, 4 Equal Opportunity Coordinator, 4, 10
Bid Guaranty, 4, 7, 9, 10 Estimated Construction Cost, 7
Bidder, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
Bond, 5, 10 I
insurance, 10
J S
joint venture, 3, 11 Schedule of Values, 12
Shop Drawings, 12
N Specifications, 1, 2, 3, 10
State, 1, 6, 9, 10, 11
Notice of Intent to Award, 8, 11 Subcontractor, 1, 3, 5, 7, 10, 11, 12
Notice to Proceed, 12 Substantial Completion, 1, 12
Substitutions, 3
O Surety, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10
END OF DOCUMENT
A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting
Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are
intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of the Bidders' own investigations. They are
made available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing
conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents.
B. Existing drawings for Dwyer Hall that include information on existing conditions including
previous construction at Project site are available for viewing on line at BlueServ
Reprographics, LLC
D. Related Requirements:
A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting
Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are
intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own investigations. They are made
available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing
conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents.
B. Soil-boring data for Project, obtained by CBC Engineers, dated September 26, 2016, is
available for viewing as appended to this Document.
C. A geotechnical investigation report for Project, prepared by CBC Engineers, dated September
26, 2016, is available for viewing as appended to this Document.
D. Related Requirements:
Sealed bids will be received by the Wright State University-Lake Campus at 108 Dwyer Hall, 7600 Lake Campus Drive,
Celina, Ohio 45822 for:
Project WSU-160027
Agricultural Education and Water Quality Building
Wright State University-Lake Campus
at
for the
The time for Substantial Completion of all Work is 200 consecutive days from the Notice to Proceed.
Having read and examined the proposed Contract Documents prepared by the Architect/Engineer for the above-referenced
Project and the following Addenda:
The undersigned Bidder proposes to perform all Work for the applicable Contract in accordance with the proposed Contract
Documents, for the following sum(s):
UNIT PRICES (Include the subtotal of Unit Price extensions in the Base Bid below. Unit prices shall be used solely for the
purpose of determining the adjustment to the Contract Sum for differences between the estimated quantities on the Bid Form
and the actual quantities provided. The Contractor’s Fee on account of Unit Price Work is included in the Base Bid and not in
the Unit Price.)
Estimated Unit of
Item Description Quantity Unit Price / Measure Extension
Unit Price U-1 Removal of unsatisfactory soil 1,500 Cu.Yd. $ __________ / Cu.Yd. $ ______________
BASE BID (Including Allowances and Subtotal of Unit Price Extensions above):
Sum in words:
Alternate 1, Patio and Boot Wash (Circle appropriate choice below and insert amount)
Alternate 2, Walk to Dwyer (Circle appropriate choice below and insert amount)
Alternate 3, Brick Veneer (Circle appropriate choice below and insert amount)
Alternate 4, Roller Shades (Circle appropriate choice below and insert amount)
Alternate 5, Type I Commercial Hood (Circle appropriate choice below and insert amount)
Alternate 6, Demand Ventilation Controls (Circle appropriate choice below and insert amount)
Bidder acknowledges that by signing the Bid Form on the Bidder Signature and Information page, that it affirms,
understands, and will abide by the requirements of Executive Order 2011-12K. If awarded a Contract, the Bidder will
become the Contractor and affirms that both the Contractor and its Subcontractors shall perform no services requested under
this Contract outside of the United States.
The Bidder shall provide the locations where services under this Contract will be performed in the spaces provided below or
by attachment. Failure to provide this information as part of its Bid may cause the Bidder to be deemed non-responsive and
no further consideration will be given to its Bid. If the Bidder will not be using Subcontractors, indicate “Not Applicable” in
the appropriate spaces.
Locations where services will be performed by Subcontractors, if known at time of Bid Opening:
3. Location where state data will be stored, accessed, tested, maintained, or backed-up, by Contractor:
Locations where state data will be stored, accessed, tested, maintained, or backed-up by Subcontractors, if known at
time of Bid Opening:
COMMITMENT TO PARTICIPATE
IN THE
EDGE BUSINESS ASSISTANCE PROGRAM
Option A
Bidder commits to meet or exceed the advertised EDGE Participation Goal of the Contract award
amount, calculated as a portion of the Base Bid plus all accepted Alternates, by using certified EDGE
Business Enterprise(s).
Bidder agrees that if selected for consideration of the Contract, it shall provide (if not provided with the
Bidder’s Bid) to the Contracting Authority, at the location required and within 3 business days after
receiving notice from the Contracting Authority, its fully-completed Bidder’s Qualification Form,
including an EDGE Affadavit form for each certified EDGE Business Enterprise proposed for use by the
Bidder if awarded the Contract for this Project.
Bidder acknowledges it understands the requirement for it to provide and agrees to provide to the
Contracting Authority, if selected for consideration of the Contract, within 3 business days after notice
from the Contracting Authority, a detailed Demonstration of Good Faith form describing its efforts
undertaken prior to submitting its Bid to meet the advertised EDGE Participation Goal percentage for the
Contract for this Project.
Bidder commits to provide to the Contracting Authority at the location required, and within 3 days after
receiving notice from the Contracting Authority, its fully-completed Bidder’s Qualification Form,
including an EDGE Affadavit form for each certified EDGE Business Enterprise proposed for use by the
Bidder if awarded the Contract for this Project.
Option C
Bidder declares that the Bidder is a certified EDGE Business Enterprise and that if awarded this Contract,
the EDGE Participation percentage will be 100 percent of the Contract award amount.
BIDDER'S CERTIFICATIONS
The Bidder hereby acknowledges that the following representations in this Bid are material and not mere recitals:
1. The Bidder has read and understands the proposed Contract Documents and agrees to comply with all requirements
of the proposed Contract Documents, regardless of whether the Bidder has actual knowledge of the requirements
and regardless of any statement or omission made by the Bidder, which might indicate a contrary intention.
2. The Bidder represents that the Bid is based upon the Basis of Design and Acceptable Components specified by the
proposed Contract Documents.
3. The Bidder has visited the Site, become familiar with local conditions, and has correlated personal observations
about the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidder has no outstanding questions regarding the
interpretation or clarification of the proposed Contract Documents.
4. The Bidder understands that the execution of the Project will require sequential, coordinated, and interrelated
operations, which may involve interference, disruption, hindrance, or delay in the progress of the Bidder's Work.
The Bidder agrees that the Contract Sum, as amended from time to time, shall cover all amounts due from the State
resulting from interference, disruption, hindrance, or delay that is not caused by the State or its agents and
employees. The Bidder agrees that any such interference, disruption, hindrance, or delay is within the contemplation
of the Bidder and the State and that the Contractor’s sole remedy from the State for any such interference,
disruption, hindrance, or delay shall be an extension of time in accordance with the proposed Contract Documents.
5. During the performance of the Contract, the Bidder agrees to comply with Ohio Administrative Code (“OAC”)
Chapters 123:2-3 through 123:2-9 and agrees to incorporate the monthly reporting provisions of OAC Section
123:2-9-01 into all subcontracts on the Project, regardless of tier. The Bidder understands the State’s Equal
Opportunity Coordinator or the Contracting Authority may conduct pre-award and post-award compliance reviews
to determine if the Bidder maintains nondiscriminatory employment practices, maintains an affirmative action
program, and is exerting good faith efforts to accomplish the goals of the affirmative action program. For a full
statement of the rules regarding Equal Employment Opportunity in the Construction Industry, see OAC Chapters
123:2-1 through 123:2-9.
6. The Bidder and each Person signing on behalf of the Bidder certifies, and in the case of a Bid by a joint venture each
member thereof certifies as to such member’s entity, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of the undersigned's
knowledge and belief: (a) the Base Bid, any Unit Prices, and any Alternate bid in the Bid have been arrived at
independently without collusion, consultation, communication or agreement, for the purpose of restricting
competition as to any matter relating to such Base Bid, Unit Prices or Alternate bid with any other Bidder; (b) unless
otherwise required by law, the Base Bid, any Unit Prices and any Alternate bid in the Bid have not been knowingly
disclosed by the Bidder and shall not knowingly be disclosed by the Bidder prior to the bid opening, directly or
indirectly, to any other Bidder who would have any interest in the Base Bid, Unit Prices or Alternate bid; (c) no
attempt has been made or shall be made by the Bidder to induce any other Person to submit or not to submit a Bid
for the purpose of restricting competition.
7. The Bidder understands that the Contract is subject to all the provisions, duties, obligations, remedies and penalties
of Ohio Revised Code Chapter 4115 and that the Bidder shall pay any wage increase in the locality during the term
of the Contract.
8. The Bidder shall execute the Agreement with the Contracting Authority, if a Contract is awarded on the basis of this
Bid, and if the Bidder does not execute the Agreement for any reason, other than as authorized by law, the Bidder
and the Bidder's Surety are liable to the State as provided in Article 5 of the Instructions to Bidders.
9. The Bidder certifies that the upon the award of a Contract, as the Contractor it shall make a good faith effort to
ensure that all of the Contractor’s employees, while working on the Site, shall not purchase, transfer, use, or possess
illegal drugs or alcohol or abuse prescription drugs in any way.
11. The Bidder agrees to furnish any information requested by the Contracting Authority or Architect/Engineer to
evaluate the responsibility of the Bidder.
12. The Bidder agrees to furnish the submittals required by Section 6.1 of the Instructions to Bidders for execution of
the Agreement within 10 days of the date of the Notice of Intent to Award.
13. When the Bidder is a corporation, partnership or sole proprietorship, an officer, partner or principal of the Bidder, as
applicable, shall print or type the legal name of the Bidder on the line provided, and sign the Bid Form.
14. When the Bidder is a joint venture, an officer, partner or principal, as applicable, of each member of the joint
venture shall print or type the legal name of the applicable member on the line provided, and sign the Bid Form.
15. Bidder acknowledges that by signing the Bid Form on the following Bidder Signature and Information page that it is
signing the actual Bid and when submitted as a part of its bid package, shall serve as the Bidder’s authorization for
the further consideration and activity in the bidding and contract process.
Telephone Number:
Facsimile Number:
E-Mail Address:
Where Incorporated:
Federal Tax Identification Number:
Date enrolled in an OBWC-approved DFSP (month/date/year): _______ / _______ /
Contact person for Contract processing:
President’s or Chief Executive Officer’s Name / Title:
Telephone Number:
Facsimile Number:
E-Mail Address:
Where Incorporated:
Federal Tax Identification Number:
Date enrolled in an OBWC-approved DFSP (month/date/year): _______ / _______ /
Contact person for Contract processing:
President’s or Chief Executive Officer’s Name / Title:
END OF DOCUMENT
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned ________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________, as Principal,
___________________________ as Obligee(s), in the penal sum of the dollar amount of the Bid submitted by the Principal
The penal sum, referred to herein, shall be the dollar amount of the Principal's Bid to the Obligee, incorporating any
additive alternate Bids made by the Principal on the date referred to above to the Obligee, which are accepted by the Obligee.
In no case shall the penal sum exceed the amount of dollars ($___________________). (If the preceding line is left blank, the
penal sum will be the full amount of the Principal's Bid, including add alternates. Alternatively, if completed, the amount
stated shall not be less than the full amount of the Bid, including Alternates, in dollars and cents. A percentage is not
acceptable.) For the payment of the penal sum well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our
heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns.
THE CONDITION OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the above-named Principal has
submitted a Bid for the above referenced Project;
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee accepts the Bid of the Principal, and the Principal fails to enter into a proper
contract in accordance with the Bid, Plans, Specifications, details, and bills of material; and in the event the Principal pays to
the Obligee the difference, not to exceed ten percent of the penal sum hereof between the amount specified in the Bid and
such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with the Bidder determined by the Obligee to be the
next lowest responsive and responsible to perform the Work covered by the Bid; or in the event the Obligee does not award
the Contract to such next lowest responsive and responsible Bidder and resubmits the Project for bidding, the Principal pays
to the Obligee the difference not to exceed ten percent of the penal sum hereof between the amount specified in the Bid, or
the costs, in connection with the resubmission, of printing new Contract Documents, required advertising and printing and
mailing notices to prospective Bidders, whichever is less, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in
full force and effect. If the Obligee accepts the Bid of the Principal, and the Principal, within 10 days after the awarding of
the Contract, enters into a proper contract and executes the Agreement Form in accordance with the Contract Documents,
including without limitation the Bid, Plans, Specifications, details, and bills of material, which said Contract is made a part of
this Bond the same as though set forth herein; and
NOW ALSO, IF THE SAID Principal shall well and faithfully perform each and every condition of such Contract;
and indemnify the Obligee against all damage suffered by failure to perform such Contract according to the provisions
thereof and in accordance with the Contract Documents, including without limitation Plans, Specifications, details, and bills
of material therefore; and shall pay all lawful claims of Subcontractors, Material Suppliers and laborers for labor performed
and materials furnished in the carrying forward, performing or completing of said Contract; we, agreeing and assenting that
this undertaking shall be for the benefit of any Subcontractor, Material Suppliers or laborer having a just claim, as well as for
the Obligee herein; then this obligation shall be void; otherwise the same shall remain in full force and effect; it being
expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall in no event exceed the
penal amount of this obligation as herein stated.
THE SAID Surety hereby stipulates and agrees that no modifications, omissions or additions, in or to the terms of
said Contract, the Work thereunder or the Contract Documents, including without limitation the Plans and Specifications,
therefore, shall in any way affect the obligations of said Surety on its bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such
modifications, omissions or additions in or to the terms of the Contract, the Work, or the Contract Documents, including
without limitation the Plans and Specifications.
PRINCIPAL:
By:
Title:
x
Street
By:
Attorney-in-Fact City State Zip
Telephone Number
Agency Name
Street
Telephone Number
END OF DOCUMENT
1. Company Name:
Physical Address:
Street, Building, Unit
Email address:
2. Overall Experience. Indicate Bidder’s overall experience performing the trades bid, including the years in business
performing the trade under present and former business names.
3. Financial. The apparent low Bidder shall submit, upon request of the Contracting Authority, either:
a) An annual financial statement prepared within the 12 months prior to the bid opening by an independent licensed
accounting firm; and the name, address, contact person and phone number of the bank normally used by the Bidder
for its primary banking; or,
b) A financial report generated within 30 days prior to the bid opening from Standard and Poor, Dun and Bradstreet or
a similar company acceptable to the Contracting Authority documenting the financial condition of the Bidder; and
the name, address, contact person and phone number of the bank normally used by the Bidder for its primary
banking;
This information is not a public record under Ohio Revised Code Section 149.43; and shall remain confidential,
except under proper order of a court.
5. Ongoing & Relevant Projects. List all ongoing projects and projects completed in the last 5 years, which are similar in
cost and type to the Project. Include scope of Work, Contract value, a description of EDGE participation and
performance, and project name/contact person/address/phone number for each owner and the architect or engineer for
each project.
6. Regulatory / Contractual. Indicate all occurrences of the following in the last 5 years (indicate if none). For
verification, attach documentation, and/or provide sufficient and appropriate detail information such as: project name,
owner, contact person and phone number, amount of contract, etc.
b) Affirmative Action and EDGE program violations (Attach Certificate of Compliance with Affirmative Action
Programs, issued pursuant to Ohio Revised Code Section 9.47)
8. EDGE Participation. Identify EDGE-certified Business Enterprises proposed as Subcontractors and Material Suppliers
for this Project. Attach a fully completed Document 00 45 39 - “EDGE Affidavit” for each EDGE-certified Business
Enterprise.
9. Certification. I hereby certify that the information in this entire Bidder’s Qualifications form, including all attachments
and referenced information, is factual and complete.
END OF DOCUMENT
EDGE PARTICIPATION
Certified Statement of Intent to Contract and Perform
Bidder / Proposer: Submit one fully completed form for each EDGE-certified Business Enterprise
Project: _________________________________________________
Insert a brief description of materials, labor, services, supplies, etc. to be provided (may use industry codes):
C. Certification of Intent
By signing below, the Bidder / Proposer certifies that it intends to contract with the EDGE-certified Business Enterprise
for the portion of the contract described above related to its Contract for this Project and for the estimated cost shown
below. By signing below, the EDGE-certified Business Enterprise certifies that it intends to contract with the Bidder /
Proposer and intends to provide the portion of the contract described above related to the Contract for this Project for the
estimated cost of:
In the event the named Bidder / Proposer is NOT awarded a Contract, this Statement shall be null and void.
Authorized representative name, title (print or type) Authorized representative name, title (print or type)
END OF DOCUMENT
This Agreement is made as of the date set forth below between the State of Ohio, acting by and through the Contracting
Authority, and the Contractor in connection with the Project.
Project Number: WSU-160027
Project Name: Agricultural Education and Water Quality Building
Site Address: 7600 Lake Campus Drive
Celina, Ohio
Mercer County
1.3 The Contractor shall contract with EDGE-certified Business(es) for not less than 5 percent of the Contract Sum.
ARTICLE 2 - COMPENSATION
2.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum for the Contractor’s proper, timely, and complete performance of
the Contract. The Contract Sum is $«insert amount», subject to Modifications as provided in the Contract Documents. The
Contract Sum is comprised of the following:
2.1.1 Base Bid: ..................................................... $«Insert Base Bid Amount»
2.1.2 Alternate «Insert Alternates Awarded»: ...... $«Insert Alternate Amount»
2.1.3 Alternate «Insert Alternates Awarded»: ...... $«Insert Alternate Amount»
2.1.4 Alternate «Insert Alternates Awarded»: ...... $«Insert Alternate Amount»
2.1.5 Alternate «Insert Alternates Awarded»: ...... $«Insert Alternate Amount»
4.2 The Contractor’s key personnel are authorized to act on the Contractor’s behalf with respect to the Project and all matters
concerning the Project.
5.2 Representations.
5.2.1 The Contractor represents and warrants that it is not subject to an unresolved finding for recovery under ORC
Section 9.24. If this representation and warranty is found to be false, the Contract is void, and the Contractor shall
immediately repay to the Owner any funds paid under this Contract.
5.2.2 The Contractor hereby certifies that neither the Contractor nor any of the Contractor’s partners, officers, directors,
shareholders nor the spouses of any such person have made contributions in excess of the limitations specified in ORC
Section 3517.13.
SIGNATURES
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of the date set forth below:
«INSERT CONTRACTOR’S NAME» Owner
{&vend1-sig!] {&ca-sig!]
Signature Signature
Title Title
{&own1-sig!] {&ag-sig!]
Signature Signature
Title Title
{&po-no!]
Purchase Order No. Date
«INSERT CONTRACTOR’S NAME» STATE OF OHIO
by «insert Joint Venturer/Member’s name» by «insert Contracting Authority’s name»
{&vend1-sig!] {&ca-sig!]
Signature Signature
Title Title
OWNER’S CONCURRENCE
by «insert Joint Venturer/Member’s name» by «insert Owner’s name»
{&vend2-sig!] {&own1-sig!]
Signature Signature
Title Title
{&po-no!]
Purchase Order No.
{&ag-sig!]
Signature
Printed Name
Title
Date
END OF DOCUMENT
This Agreement is made as of the date set forth below between the Contractor and the Subcontractor in connection with the
Project.
ARTICLE 2 - COMPENSATION
2.1 The Contractor agrees to pay for the performance of this Subcontract, subject to additions and deductions as provided in
the Contract Documents, the Subcontract Sum of «insert Subcontract Sum», comprised of the following:
«insert Subcontract Sum component» ....................................................... $«insert amount»
«insert Subcontract Sum component» ....................................................... $«insert amount»
«insert Subcontract Sum component» ....................................................... $«insert amount»
«insert Subcontract Sum component» ....................................................... $«insert amount»
4.1.3 The Subcontractor assumes toward the Contractor the rights, remedies, obligations, and responsibilities that the
Contractor assumes toward the Public Authority; and
4.1.4 The Subcontractor agrees to perform its portion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
4.2 The Subcontract and any modifications, amendments, or alterations thereto shall be governed, construed, and enforced by
and under the laws of the State of Ohio.
4.3 If any term or provision of the Subcontract, or the application thereof to any Person or circumstance, is finally
determined, to be invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of the Subcontract or the
application of such term or provision to other Persons or circumstances, shall not be affected thereby, and each term and
provision of the Subcontract shall be valid and enforced to the fullest extent permitted by law.
4.4 The Subcontract shall be binding on the Contractor and Subcontractor, their successors and assigns, in respect to all
respective covenants and obligations contained in the Contract Documents, but the Subcontractor may not assign the
Subcontract without the prior written consent of the Contractor and the Public Authority.
ARTICLE 5 - EFFECTIVENESS
5.1 The Subcontract shall become binding and effective upon execution by the Contractor.
5.2 This Subcontract has been executed in several counterparts, each of which shall constitute a complete original
Subcontract, which may be introduced in evidence or used for any other purpose without production of any other
counterparts.
5.3 Any signatory may deliver a copy of its counterpart signature page to this Subcontract via fax or e-mail. Each signatory
shall be entitled to rely upon a signature of any other signatory delivered in such a manner as if such signature were an
original.
ARTICLE 6 - REPRESENTATIONS
6.1 Contingent Assignment. The Contractor’s contingent assignment of this Subcontract to the Public Authority, as provided
in the Contract, is effective after termination of the Contractor by the Public Authority and the Public Authority’s acceptance
of the assignment in writing to the Subcontractor. The Subcontractor consents to the assignment and shall be bound at the
same price and terms as in the Subcontract to the Public Authority. Unless the Public Authority takes assignment of the
Subcontract, the Subcontractor will not have any contractual rights against the Public Authority.
6.2 Intended Third-Party Beneficiary. The Public Authority is an intended third party beneficiary of the Subcontract, entitled
to enforce any rights thereunder for its benefit.
6.3 Insurance. The Subcontractor shall maintain insurance in accordance with the Contract Documents. Exhibit «N» sets
forth the minimum limits of liability for the insurance required in the Contract Documents.
6.4 Right to Audit. The Subcontractor agrees that the Public Authority or any agents designated by the Public Authority have
access to and the right to audit and the right to copy at the Public Authority’s cost all of the Subcontractor’s books, records,
contracts, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, purchase orders, and memoranda relating to the Work
for a period of not less than 3 years following completion of the Work consistent with Ohio Revised Code (“ORC”) Section
149.43 with regard to the Public Authority’s obligation to maintain confidentiality of trade secrets.
6.5 Indemnity. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Subcontractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the
Public Authority, the Contractor, their consultants and employees from all claims and expenses for bodily injury and property
damage other than to the Work itself that may arise from the performance of the Subcontract Work, including reasonable
attorneys' fees, costs and expenses, but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Subcontractor or a
person or entity for whom the Subcontractor may be liable. This Subcontract does not require a Subcontractor to waive its
immunity under the Workers Compensation laws of Ohio from claims brought against the Subcontractor by the
Subcontractor’s employees.
6.6 Prompt Pay. The Contractor shall at a minimum make payments to the Subcontractor in accordance with Applicable Law,
including ORC Section 4113.61. Progress payments to the Subcontractor for satisfactory performance of Subcontract Work
shall be made no later than 10 days after receipt by the Contractor of payment from the Public Authority for Subcontract
Work.
6.7 Retainage. Subcontractor retainage shall be at a rate equal to the percentage retained from the Contractor’s payment by
the Public Authority for the Subcontract Work, unless a lesser percentage is otherwise specified.
6.7.1 Labor Payments.
6.7.1.1 Partial payments to the Subcontractor for labor performed shall be made at the rate of 92 percent of the
amount invoiced through the Subcontractor’s request for payment that shows the Work of the Subcontractor is
50 percent complete.
6.7.1.2 After the Work of the Subcontractor is 50 percent complete, as evidenced by payments of at least 50 percent
of the total amount due under the Subcontract, no additional funds shall be retained from payments for labor.
6.7.2 Material Payments.
6.7.2.1 The Contractor shall pay the Subcontractor at the rate of 100 percent of the scheduled value for materials
incorporated into the Project.
6.7.2.2 The Contractor shall pay the Subcontractor at the rate of 92 percent of the invoice cost, not to exceed the
scheduled value, for materials delivered to the Site, or other off-site storage location approved by the A/E, provided
the Subcontractor provides the following information with its request for payment:
.1 a list of the fabricated materials consigned to the Project, giving the place of storage, together with copies
of invoices, in order to verify quantity and cost; and
.2 a certification of materials stored off-site, prepared by the Subcontractor and signed by the A/E to evidence
that the materials are in conformity with the Specifications and have been tagged with the Project name and
number for delivery to the Project. The Subcontractor shall reimburse the A/E, through the Contractor, for
all costs incurred to visit a storage site, other than the areas adjacent to the Project.
.3 The Contractor shall pay the balance of the scheduled value when the materials are incorporated into and
become a part of the Project.
6.8 Warranty. The Subcontractor fully warrants, for the benefit of the Public Authority, that all materials and equipment shall
be new unless otherwise specified, of good quality, in conformance with the Contract Documents and free from defective
workmanship or materials.
6.9 Non-Waiver of Lien Rights or Payment Bond Rights. This Subcontract shall not prohibit a Subcontractor from exercising
its rights under ORC Chapter 1311 or under any Contractor-provided payment bond.
6.10 Non-Discrimination. The Subcontractor agrees to fully comply with Applicable Law regarding equal opportunity,
including ORC Section 153.59 and, to the extent applicable, all Executive Orders issued by the Governor of the state of Ohio.
6.11 Dispute Resolution. The supplemental conditions to this Subcontract shall provide for a dispute resolution process
comparable to the Contract’s dispute resolution process in terms of timing, notice, substantiation, and informal dispute
resolution efforts. The dispute resolution process provided in the supplemental conditions shall result in prompt access to the
ultimate dispute resolution mechanism selected by the parties.
6.12 In the event that any supplemental conditions or other Subcontract terms conflict with the State of Ohio Subcontract
Form, the State of Ohio Subcontract Form takes precedence and this Subcontract shall be read and enforced to include the
provisions of the State of Ohio Subcontract Form.
6.13 The following exhibits are attached to and are a part of this Subcontract:
6.13.1 Exhibit A:
6.13.2 Exhibit B:
6.13.3 Exhibit C:
6.13.4 Exhibit D:
SIGNATURES
Signature Signature
Title Title
Date
END OF DOCUMENT
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned ________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________, as Principal,
for the payment of which well and truly to be made, we jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,
THE CONDITION OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the above-named Principal did on the
________ day of ________________________, ________, enter into a Contract with the Obligee, which said Contract is
made a part of this Bond the same as though set forth herein and which is more fully described as:
NOW, THEREFORE, if the above-named Principal shall well and faithfully do and perform the things agreed by the
Obligee to be done and performed according to the terms of said Contract; and shall pay all lawful claims of Subcontractors,
Material Suppliers, and laborers, for labor performed and materials furnished in the carrying forward, performing, or
completing of said Contract; we agreeing and assenting that this undertaking shall be for the benefit of any Subcontractor,
Material Supplier or laborer having a just claim as well as for the Obligee herein; then this obligation shall be void; otherwise
the same shall remain in full force and effect; it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Sureties for
any and all claims hereunder shall in no event exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated.
THE SAID Surety hereby stipulates and agrees that no modifications, omissions, or additions, in or to the terms of
the said Contract or in or to the Plans and Specifications therefor shall in any wise affect the obligations of said Surety on its
bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such modifications, omissions or additions in or to the terms of the Contract, the
Work or the Contract Documents, including without limitation the Plans and Specifications.
PRINCIPAL:
Principal Signature
By:
Title:
By:
Attorney-in-Fact City State Zip
Telephone Number
Agency Name
Street
Telephone Number
END OF DOCUMENT
EMPLOYER NAME AND ADDRESS: Enter the company's full name and address. Indicate if the company is a Subcontractor in the space below, if so list the name of the General or
Prime Contractor. Prime Contractor includes a Construction Manager at Risk or a Design-Build firm.
PROJECT NAME AND LOCATION: Enter the name and location of the Project, including the county or counties where the Project is located.
CONTRACTING AUTHORITY: Enter the name and address of the public authority responsible for maintaining prevailing wage records. This may be the Project Owner.
WEEK ENDING: Indicate month, day, and year for last day of reporting period.
PAYROLL NUMBER: Indicate first, second, third, etc. payroll filed by the company for the project.
PAGE: Indicate number of pages included in the report.
PROJECT / CONTRACT NUMBER: Indicate the Project number or Contract number determined by the public authority. If there is no number leave blank.
1. NAME AND INDIVIDUAL IDENTIFYING NUMBER OF WORKER: Enter the name and a unique number for each employee. The full name, social security number, and address may
be provided on Part B, which must be provided with each report to be considered valid. This information must be provided for all employees that perform physical labor on the Project.
Corporate officers, partners, and salaried employees are considered employees and must be paid the prevailing rate. Individual sole proprietors do not have to pay themselves
prevailing rate but must report their hours on the Project.
2. WORK CLASSIFICATION: List classification of work actually performed by employee. If unsure of work classification, consult the Ohio Department of Commerce, Wage and Hour
Bureau. Employees working more than one classification should have separate line entries for each classification. Indicate what year/level for Apprentices. Be specific when using
laborer and operator classifications; for example, Backhoe Operator or Asphalt Laborer.
3. RACE AND SEX: Provide the race and sex of each worker. This information is requested to facilitate review by the Construction Compliance Unit of the Equal Opportunity Division in
the Ohio Department of Administrative Services pursuant to Chapter 123:2 of the Ohio Administrative Code. This information is not required by Chapter 4115 of the Ohio Revised
4. HOURS WORKED - DAY AND DATE: In the first row of column 4 enter the days of the pay period. For example: S M T W TH F S. The second row is for the date that corresponds
with each day for the pay period. In the employee information section enter the number of hours worked on the prevailing wage Project and which day(s) the hours were worked.
Separate rows are labeled for (ST) straight time hours and (OT) overtime hours. All hours worked beyond 40 hours must be paid at the appropriate overtime rate.
5. TOTAL PROJECT HOURS: Total the hours entered for the pay period.
6. BASE WAGE RATE: Enter actual rate per hour paid to the employee. The overtime hourly rate is time and one-half the base rate listed in the prevailing wage schedule plus fringe
benefits at straight time rate. The prevailing wage schedule lists the base rate plus fringe benefit amounts. These amounts added together equal the total prevailing wage rate.
Employers must pay this total amount in one of three ways: (1) total rate may be paid in entirety in the base rate to the employee; in which case, the cash designation will be checked
for fringe benefits; (2) total rate may be paid as listed in prevailing wage rate schedule with total fringe amounts paid approved plans; or (3) total rate may be paid with a combination of
base rate and fringe payments to approved plans in amounts other than those listed in schedule.
7. PROJECT GROSS: Enter total gross wages earned on the Project for straight time and overtime. Project hours multiplied by base rate should equal the Project gross.
8. FRINGES: If fringe benefits are paid in the hourly base rate, indicate this by marking the cash space. If fringe benefits are paid to approved plans as listed in the prevailing wage rate
schedule, mark the space for Approved Plans. If fringe benefits are paid partially in the base rate and partially to approved plans, mark the space for Cash & Approved plans. List the
hourly amount paid to approved plans for each fringe. If payments are not made on a per-hour basis, calculate the hourly fringe credit by dividing the yearly employer contribution by
the lesser of: hours actually worked in the year (these must be documented) or 2080. Fringe benefits include: Employer's share of health insurance, life insurance, retirement plan,
bonus/profit sharing, sick pay, holiday pay, personal leave, vacation, and education/training programs.
9. TOTAL HOURS ALL JOBS: Total all hours worked during the pay period including non-prevailing wage jobs.
10. TOTAL GROSS ALL JOBS: Gross amount earned in the pay period for all hours worked.
ITEMS 11., 12., AND 13. ARE SELF-EXPLANATORY
1 2 3
F330-03v0912 If Subcontractor, provide Contractor name in space provided. Attach additional pages as necessary. For Public Records Requests, redact Social Security Numbers.
Certified Payroll Report - Part A
State of Ohio Standard Forms for Public Facility Construction
EMPLOYER NAME AND ADDRESS NAME OF GENERAL / PRIME CONTRACTOR PROJECT NAME AND LOCATION (COUNTY) CONTRACTING AUTHORITY (OR OWNER)
CHECK IF SUBCONTRACTOR1 WEEK ENDING PAYROLL NUMBER PAGE2 PROJECT / CONTRACT NUMBER
of
3 4
1. NAME AND INDIVIDUAL 2. WORK 3. 5. 6. 7. 8. FRINGES: CASH 9. TTL 11. 12. 13.
10. TOTAL
IDENTIFYING NUMBER (e.g., LAST CLASS- RACE TOTAL BASE PROJ HRS TAXES OTHER NET
4. HOURS WORKED - DAY AND DATE APPROVED PLANS GROSS
FOUR DIGITS OF SOCIAL IFICA- AND PROJ WAGE GROSS ALL WITH- DEDUC- WAGES
CASH AND APPROVED PLANS ALL JOBS
SECURITY NUMBER) OF WORKER TION SEX HRS RATE WAGES JOBS HELD TIONS PAID
M T W TH F S S
H&W PENS VAC APP OTHER
OT
ST
OT
ST
OT
ST
OT
ST
OT
ST
OT
ST
OT
ST
OT
ST
OT
ST
OT
ST
My signature on this form signifies that I pay, or supervise the payment of the employees shown above. I am certifying: 1) That during the pay period reported on this form, all hours
worked on this Project have been paid at the appropriate prevailing wage rate for the class of work done. 2) That the fringe benefits have been paid as indicated above. 3) That no
rebates or deductions have been or will be made, directly or indirectly from the total wages earned, other than permissable deductions as defined in Ohio Revised Code Chapter 4115.
4) That apprentices are registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. I understand that the willful falsification of any of the above statements
may subject the Contractor or Subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution. In addition, I have submitted the full Name, Social Security Number, and Address of each Worker on a
separate sheet (Part B) to form the entire Certified Payroll Report required by Applicable Law.
CHECK IF SUBCONTRACTOR1 WEEK ENDING PAYROLL NUMBER PAGE2 PROJECT / CONTRACT NUMBER
of
FULL NAME OF WORKER SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER3 STREET ADDRESS CITY, STATE AND ZIP CODE
1 2 3
F330-03v0912 If Subcontractor, provide Contractor name in space provided. Attach additional pages as necessary. For Public Records Requests, redact Social Security Numbers.
Document 00 71 00 - Contracting Definitions (General Contracting Project)
State of Ohio Standard Requirements for Public Facility Construction
Exhibit D
Acceptable Component A component listed in the Specifications after the Basis of Design Component.
Addenda or Addendum Written or graphic instrument issued prior to the bid opening which modifies or
interprets the proposed Contract Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications, or
corrections. Addenda become part of the Contract Documents when the Agreement
is executed.
A/E See “Architect/Engineer.”
Agreement The form furnished by the Contracting Authority (including all of its exhibits) that,
when completed and signed by the Contractor and Contracting Authority evidences
entry into the Contract.
Allowance A sum stipulated in the Contract Documents for a defined scope of the Work that
may not be completely defined at the time of bidding. Allowance amounts do not
include the Contractor’s Fee on account of the associated Work.
Alternate A change in the proposed Project scope, which may include but is not limited to
alternate materials or methods of construction, and an amount stated on the Bid form
to be added to or deducted from the Base Bid if the corresponding Alternate is
incorporated into the Contract.
Alternative Dispute Resolution A voluntary and non-binding process for the administrative review, consideration,
and attempted settlement of a dispute, without resort to judicial process, including
but not limited to partnering, negotiation, mediation, impartial fact-finding, dispute
review board, and mini-trials, but shall not include arbitration.
Applicable Law All federal, state, and local codes, statutes, ordinances, and regulations that apply to
the performance of the Work or the A/E’s Services on the Project.
Architect/Engineer The Person responsible for providing professional design services and construction
contract administration for the Project as provided in the Contract Documents. The
A/E shall be a (1) registered architect holding a license and certificate of
authorization issued by the Ohio Architects Board pursuant to ORC Chapter 4703,
(2) landscape architect holding a license and certificate of authorization issued by the
Ohio Landscape Architects Board pursuant to ORC Chapter 4703, or (3) professional
engineer or professional surveyor holding a license and certificate of authorization
issued by the Ohio Engineers and Surveyors Board pursuant to ORC Chapter 4733.
As-Built Documents Documents, including but not limited to Drawings, Addenda, Specifications,
executed Change Orders, and other elements of the Contract Documents which the
Contractor annotates and otherwise modifies to indicate changes made during the
construction process, the location of concealed and buried items, and other
information useful to the Owner throughout the life of the completed Project.
Base Bid The amount stated in a Bid as the sum for which the Bidder offers to perform the
Work in a particular trade or other category, which is described in the Contract
Documents, excluding Alternates.
Basis of Design A document that records the concepts, calculations, decisions, and product selections
used to meet the Owner’s Project Requirements and to satisfy applicable regulatory
requirements, standards, and guidelines. The document includes both narrative
descriptions and lists of individual items that support the design process.
Basis of Design Component A component listed first in the Specifications.
Bid A written proposal to perform a Contract, submitted on a completed Bid Form,
accompanied by other required documents. The term Bid includes a proposal that has
been digitally signed, encrypted, and submitted through the State’s electronic
bidding application pursuant to OAC Section 153:1-8-01.
END OF DOCUMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ARTICLE 1 - CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES ..........................................1
ARTICLE 2 - STATE’S RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES ................................5
ARTICLE 3 - A/E’S RESPONSIBILITIES ..............................................................6
ARTICLE 4 - SUBCONTRACTORS ......................................................................7
ARTICLE 5 - PRECONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES ................................................9
ARTICLE 6 - CONSTRUCTION AND CLOSEOUT .............................................10
ARTICLE 7 - MODIFICATIONS ...........................................................................29
ARTICLE 8 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION ...............................................................36
ARTICLE 9 - COMPENSATION AND PAYMENT ...............................................42
ARTICLE 10 - BONDS, INSURANCE, AND INDEMNIFICATION ......................46
ARTICLE 11 - SUSPENSION AND TERMINATION ...........................................52
ARTICLE 12 - GENERAL PROVISIONS .............................................................55
KEYWORD INDEX ...............................................................................................59
1.10 Emergency
1.10.1 In the event of an emergency affecting the safety of the Project, other property, or individuals, the Contractor,
without special instruction or authorization, shall act to prevent the threatened damage, injury, or loss.
1.10.2 If the Contractor believes that it is entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Sum or Contract Times, or both, on
account of its actions in response to an emergency, the Contractor may request a Modification by giving written notice
under Section 7.3.2.
2.2 Owner
2.2.1 The Owner shall designate a representative authorized to act on behalf of the Owner during the Project.
2.2.2 The Owner shall furnish information and services required of it in a timely manner.
2.2.3 The Owner shall have access to the Work at all times whenever the Project is in preparation or progress.
2.2.4 Upon issuance of the Notice to Proceed, the Owner shall provide the Site to the Contractor in a condition to permit
the Contractor to perform the Work.
2.2.5 The Owner may request a change in the Work if the A/E recommends and the Contracting Authority approves the
change.
2.2.6 The Owner shall communicate with the Contractor through the Contracting Authority.
2.2.7 The Owner is not responsible for construction means, methods, manners, techniques, sequences, procedures, or for
safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, or for the Contractor’s failure to carry out the Work in
conformity with the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 4 - SUBCONTRACTORS
4.1 Evaluation and Approval
4.1.1 Within 10 days after the Notice to Proceed, or other period as mutually agreed by the Contractor and Contracting
Authority, the Contractor shall submit to the A/E a Subcontractor and Material Supplier Declaration form through
which the Contractor identifies its Subcontractors.
4.1.2 The Contractor’s failure to timely submit the information regarding a proposed Subcontractor may result in
withholding payment in accordance with Section 9.8.
6.12 Labor
6.12.1 The Contractor shall maintain a sufficient workforce and enforce good discipline and order among its employees
and the employees of its Subcontractors. The Contractor shall not permit employment of individuals not skilled in tasks
assigned to them.
6.12.2 The Contractor shall dismiss from the Project any individual employed by the Contractor, or a Subcontractor, who
the Contracting Authority finds, in its sole discretion, to be incompetent, guilty of misconduct, or detrimental to the
Project.
6.12.3 The Contractor shall employ all legal efforts to minimize the likelihood or effect of any strike, Work stoppage, or
other labor disturbance. Informational pickets shall not justify any Work stoppage.
8.12 Delegation
8.12.1 No provision of this Article 8 shall prevent the Executive Director from delegating the duties or authorities of the
Commission to any other person selected at the Executive Director’s sole discretion.
9.7 Retainage
9.7.1 If the total Contract Sum is $15,000 or more, when the Contract is 50 percent complete, all funds retained for
faithful performance of the Work, in accordance with Section 9.5.1, shall be deposited in an escrow account with a bank
in the state in accordance with the terms and conditions provided in an escrow agreement executed by the Contractor,
Contracting Authority, and applicable bank.
9.7.2 When the Contractor has achieved Substantial Completion of all Work, and there is no other reason to retain funds;
upon request of the Contractor, the funds retained in connection with that Work shall be released from escrow and paid
to the Contractor, withholding only that amount necessary to assure faithful completion in the sole discretion of the
Contracting Authority, including but not limited to compliance with Section 6.25.2.
9.7.3 Upon consent by the Contractor’s Surety, the Contracting Authority may reduce the amount of funds retained for
the faithful performance of Work by 50 percent of the amount of funds required to be retained, provided the Contractor’s
Surety remains responsible for all damages that may be caused due to default by the Contractor, including, but not
limited to, the following:
9.7.3.1 completion of the Work;
9.7.3.2 all interference, disruption, hindrance and delay claims;
9.7.3.3 all Liquidated Damages; and
9.7.3.4 all additional expenses incurred by the State.
12.7 Taxes
12.7.1 Only those materials that ultimately become a part of the completed structure or improvement that constitutes the
Project shall be exempt from state sales tax and state use tax.
12.7.2 The purchase, lease, or rental of material, equipment, parts, or expendable items as concrete form lumber, tools,
oils, greases, and fuels, which are used in connection with the Work, are subject to the application of state sales tax and
state use tax.
12.12 Severability
12.12.1 If any term or provision of this Contract or the application thereof to any Person or circumstance, is finally
determined to be invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this Contract or the
application of such term or provision to other Persons or circumstances, shall not be affected thereby, and each term and
provision of this Contract shall be valid and enforced to the fullest extent permitted by Applicable Law.
12.16 No Waiver
12.16.1 The failure of the Contracting Authority or Contractor to insist in any one or more instances upon the strict
performance of any one or more of the provisions of the Contract or to exercise any rights under the Contract or provided
by law will not be construed as a waiver or relinquishment of that provision or right or of the right to subsequently
demand strict performance or exercise the right and the rights will continue unchanged and remain in full force and
effect.
KEYWORD INDEX
Certificate of Substantial Completion, 25, 27
A Change Directive, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 36
change in the Work, 5, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 43
acceleration, 35, 37, 51 Change Order, 14, 16, 22, 24, 25, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34,
Acceptable Components, 18 35, 40, 42, 43, 44, 52
Affirmative Action, 2 Change Order Log, 30
Agreement, 2, 46, 58 Claim, 32, 33, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42
Allowance, 42, 43 Claim Affidavit, 9
Alternative Dispute Resolution (“ADR”), 10, 40, 41 cleaning, 20, 26, 27
antitrust claims, 2 Commissioning, 21
Applicable Law, 1, 2, 4, 7, 8, 9, 16, 18, 19, 21, 22, 25, 34, Commissioning Agent (“CxA”), 9, 15, 21
38, 44, 45, 47, 51, 52, 56, 59 Computer-Aided Design (“CAD”), 15
approval, 3, 5, 7, 8, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 21, 22, 23, 24, construction procedures, 11
25, 27, 30, 33, 52 Construction Progress Schedule, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 24,
Architect/Engineer Agreement, 6 32, 35, 36, 37, 38, 58
As-Built Documents, 26 Construction Specifications Institute (“CSI”), 43
audit, 33, 35, 36, 41 Construction Stage, 10
construction supervision, 12
B Contract, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 16, 24, 25, 29, 31,
33, 36, 37, 38, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 52, 53,
Bankruptcy of Contractor, 54 54, 56, 58, 59
Basis of Design Component, 18 Contract Completion, 10, 11, 13, 25, 26, 27, 28, 38, 51,
Bond, 29, 34, 46 52, 58
builder’s risk, 34, 50, 51 Contract Documents, 5, 6, 7, 8, 11, 12, 13, 15, 16, 17, 20,
Building Information Modeling (“BIM”), 15 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 32, 38, 39, 40,
42, 44, 45, 46, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58
C Contract Sum, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 16, 24, 25, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33,
34, 35, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 49, 52,
capacity charges, 10 53, 54
Certificate of Contract Completion, 25, 26, 28, 46 Contract Times, 4, 6, 16, 24, 29, 30, 31, 32, 35, 37, 38,
certificate of occupancy, 26, 28 39, 40, 41, 45, 52, 53, 57, 58
D L
daily log, 11, 37 labor, 2, 3, 9, 18, 33, 34, 38, 40, 42, 43, 44, 50, 53, 55
default, 45, 53, 54 Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
Defective Work, 7, 16, 18, 24, 25, 27, 44, 45, 52, 53, 54 (“LEED”) Rating System, 5
demonstration and training, 28 legal holiday, 57
Differing Site Conditions, 32, 33, 36 licenses, 10
dispute review board, 41 limited-liability company, 49
Domestic Steel, 2, 23 Liquidated Damages, 35, 38, 39, 45
drainage, 19
Drawings, 12, 26, 52, 55, 56 M
Drug Free Safety Program (“DFSP”), 2, 3
MasterFormat, 43
material, 9, 11, 12, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 26,
E 28, 29, 31, 33, 34, 35, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 50,
electric service, 20 51, 53, 54, 55, 57
electronic signature, 58 Material Safety Data Sheet, 19
emergency, 4, 57 Material Supplier, 8, 9
Encouraging Diversity, Growth and Equity (“EDGE”), 3, mediation, 41
4, 43, 44, 45 Milestone, 13, 14, 35, 38, 39, 58
environmental controls, 19 minor change in the Work, 6, 29, 32
Equal Employment Opportunity, 2 Modification, 4, 29, 30, 35
Equal Opportunity Coordinator (“EOC”), 1, 2, 3, 4
equipment, 11, 14, 15, 17, 19, 20, 22, 23, 24, 34, 40, 41, N
42, 43, 48, 50, 51, 53, 54, 57
Estimated Construction Cost, 13 National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System
explosives, 21 (“NPDES”), 10, 12
negotiation, 41
Neutral Facilitator, 6, 10
F no damage for delay, 38
facilities, 19 Nondiscrimination, 1
Field Conditions, 16 Notice of Commencement, 56
Final Inspection, 27, 28 Notice to Proceed, 5, 7, 10, 13, 43, 58
Fire Marshal, 10, 26 Notice, 5-Day, 54
Notice, 72-Hour, 24, 54
G
O
General Conditions, 56
General Conditions Costs, 34, 43 Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Green Building Certification Institute, 5 (“OSHA”), 17, 18, 19
Ohio Building Code, 7
Ohio Bureau of Workers’ Compensation (“OBWC”), 2, 3
H Ohio Construction Contract Information Report, 2
Hazardous Materials, 18, 48 Ohio Department of Commerce, 2, 33
hoisting facilities, 20 Ohio Environmental Protection Agency, 10
Ohio Facilities Construction Commission, 5, 33, 40, 43,
56
END OF DOCUMENT
Certifications
These Supplementary Conditions amend and supplement the General Conditions and other provisions of the
Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions not amended remain in full force and effect. The terms in
these Supplementary Conditions defined in the Contracting Definitions or the General Conditions shall have the
meanings assigned to them in those documents.
These Supplementary Conditions are authorized, by the Ohio Facilities Construction Commission, for use on
projects constructed by and for Wright State University (“University”).
Contracting Authority
Wright State University
Engineering & Construction
3640 Colonel Glenn Highway
Dayton, Ohio 45435-0001
937.775.4140
http://www.wright.edu
Institutional Designee
Daniel Papay, P.E.
University Engineer
END OF DOCUMENT
END OF DOCUMENT
Prevailing Wage Determination Cover Letter
County: MERCER
Determination Date: 12/28/2016
Expiration Date: 03/28/2017
THE FOLLOWING PAGES ARE PREVAILING RATES OF WAGES ON PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS FAIRLY ESTIMATED
TO BE MORE THAN THE AMOUNT IN O.R.C. SEC. 4115.03 (b) (1) or (2), AS APPLICABLE.
Section 4115.05 provides, in part: “Where contracts are not awarded or construction undertaken within ninety days from the
date of the establishment of the prevailing wages, there shall be a redetermination of the prevailing rate of wages before the
contract is awarded.” The expiration date of this wage schedule is listed above for your convenience only. This wage
determination is not intended as a blanket determination to be used for all projects during this period without prior approval of
this Department.
Section 4115.04, Ohio Revised Code provides, in part: “Such schedule of wages shall be attached to and made a part of the
specifications for the work, and shall be printed on the bidding blanks where the work is done by contract...”
The contract between the letting authority and the successful bidder shall contain a statement requiring that mechanics and
laborers be paid a prevailing rate of wage as required in Section 4115.06, Ohio Revised Code.
The contractor or subcontractor is required to file with the contracting public authority upon completion of the project and
prior to final payment therefore an affidavit stating that he has fully complied with Chapter 4115 of the Ohio Revised Code.
The wage rates contained in this schedule are the “Prevailing Wages” as defined by Section 4115.03, Ohio Revised Code
(the basic hourly rates plus certain fringe benefits). These rates and fringes shall be a minimum to be paid under a contract
regulated by Chapter 4115 of the Ohio Revised Code by contractors and subcontractors. The prevailing wage rates contained
in this schedule include the effective dates and wage rates currently on file. In cases where future effective dates are not
included in this schedule, modifications to the wage schedule will be furnished to the Prevailing Wage Coordinator appointed
by the public authority as soon as prevailing wage rates increases are received by this office.
“There shall be posted in a prominent and accessible place on the site of work a legible statement of the Schedule of Wage
Rates specified in the contract to the various classifications of laborers, workmen, and mechanics employed, said statement
to remain posted during the life of such contract.” Section 4115.07, Ohio Revised Code.
Apprentices will be permitted to work only under a bona fide apprenticeship program if such program exists and if such
program is registered with the Ohio Apprenticeship Council.
Section 4115.071 provides that no later than ten days before the first payment of wages is due to any employee of any
contractor or subcontractor working on a contract regulated by Chapter 4115, Ohio Revised Code, the contracting public
authority shall appoint one of his own employees to act as the prevailing wage coordinator for said contract. The duties of
the prevailing wage coordinator are outlined in Section 4115.071 of the Ohio Revised Code.
Section 4115.05 provides for an escalator in the prevailing wage rate. Each time a new rate is established, that rate is
required to be paid on all ongoing public improvement projects.
A further requirement of Section 4115.05 of the Ohio Revised Code is: “On the occasion of the first pay date under a
contract, the contractor shall furnish each employee not covered by a collective bargaining agreement or understanding
between employers and bona fide organizations of Labor with individual written notification of the job classification to which
the employee is assigned, the prevailing wage determined to be applicable to that classification, separated into the hourly
rate of pay and the fringe payments, and the identity of the prevailing wage Coordinator appointed by the public authority.
The contractor or subcontractor shall furnish the same notification to each affected employee every time the job
classification of the employee is changed.”
Work performed in connection with the installation of modular furniture may be subject to prevailing wage.
THIS PACKET IS NOT TO BE SEPARATED BUT IS TO REMAIN COMPLETE AS IT IS SUBMITTED TO YOU. (Reference
guidelines and forms are included in this packet to be helpful in the compliance of the Prevailing Wage law.)
wh1500
http://198.234.41.198/w3/webwh.nsf/PWDetermination?openform 1/1
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc41 Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc41
Craft : Asbestos Worker Effective Date : 07/27/2016 Last Posted : 07/27/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Asbestos $29.82 $5.84 $4.00 $0.15 $0.00 $3.63 $1.49 $0.00 $0.00 $44.93 $59.84
Insulation
Worker
Special Calculation Note : "Other" Benefits are for Retiree Medical and Pension Rehab.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
3 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, DEFIANCE, MERCER, PAULDING, VAN
WERT, WILLIAMS
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
The removal of all insulation materials, whether they contain asbestos or not, from mechanical systems (pipes,
boilers, ducts, flues, breaching, etc.) is recognized as being the exclusive work of the Asbestos Workers.
On all mechanical systems (pipes, boilers, ducts, flues, breaching, etc.) that are going to be demolished, the
removal of all insulating materials whether they contain asbestos or not shall be the exclusive work of the
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256B67004B03E4?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc41 Page
Laborers.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256B67004B03E4?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc41 Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc41
Craft : Asbestos Worker Effective Date : 07/27/2016 Last Posted : 07/27/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Asbestos $29.82 $5.84 $4.00 $0.15 $0.00 $3.63 $1.49 $0.00 $0.00 $44.93 $59.84
Insulation
Worker
Special Calculation Note : "Other" Benefits are for Retiree Medical and Pension Rehab.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
3 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, DEFIANCE, MERCER, PAULDING, VAN
WERT, WILLIAMS
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
The removal of all insulation materials, whether they contain asbestos or not, from mechanical systems (pipes,
boilers, ducts, flues, breaching, etc.) is recognized as being the exclusive work of the Asbestos Workers.
On all mechanical systems (pipes, boilers, ducts, flues, breaching, etc.) that are going to be demolished, the
removal of all insulating materials whether they contain asbestos or not shall be the exclusive work of the
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256B67004B03E4?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc41 Page
Laborers.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256B67004B03E4?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2012kpLoc 154 Page
Change # : LCN01-2012kpLoc 154
Craft : Boilermaker Effective Date : 03/22/2012 Last Posted : 03/22/2012
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Boilermaker $36.17 $8.57 $11.28 $0.55 $0.00 $4.25 $0.34 $0.00 $1.40 $62.56 $80.65
Trainee $23.25 $8.57 $3.59 $0.55 $0.00 $4.25 $0.34 $0.00 $1.40 $41.95 $53.57
60%
Trainee $27.13 $8.57 $3.59 $0.55 $0.00 $4.25 $0.34 $0.00 $1.40 $45.83 $59.40
70%
Trainee $31.00 $8.57 $3.59 $0.55 $0.00 $4.25 $0.34 $0.00 $1.40 $49.70 $65.20
80%
Trainee $34.88 $8.57 $3.59 $0.55 $0.00 $4.25 $0.34 $0.00 $1.40 $53.58 $71.02
90%
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852569420060FBC0?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2012kpLoc 154 Page
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
5 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice BUTLER, COLUMBIANA, FAYETTE, JEFFERSON,
LAWRENCE, MERCER, WARREN, WASHINGTON
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
Work includes but not limited to: boiler making, acetylene burning, riveting, chipping, caulking, rigging, fitting-
up, grinding, reaming, impact machine operating, unloading, and handling of boilermaker's material and
equipment. Boilermakers, Blacksmiths, Forgers, Iron Shipbuilders
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852569420060FBC0?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2012kpLoc85 Page
Change # : LCN01-2012kpLoc85
Craft : Boilermaker Effective Date : 03/28/2012 Last Posted : 03/28/2012
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Boilermaker $31.01 $6.97 $10.77 $0.35 $0.00 $3.00 $2.09 $0.00 $0.00 $54.19 $69.69
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
5 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, ASHLAND, AUGLAIZE, CRAWFORD,
10 Journeymen to 2 Apprentice DARKE, DEFIANCE, DELAWARE, ERIE, FULTON,
15 Journeymen to 3 Apprentice HANCOCK, HARDIN, HENRY, HURON, KNOX,
LOGAN, LUCAS, MARION, MERCER, MORROW,
OTTAWA, PAULDING, PUTNAM, RICHLAND,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256CA9004CA365?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2012kpLoc85 Page
Helpers will be referred in the event that apprentices are SANDUSKY, SENECA, SHELBY, UNION, VAN
NOT available. WERT, WILLIAMS, WOOD, WYANDOT
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256CA9004CA365?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2015fbLoc22 Page
Change # : LCN01-2015fbLoc22
Craft : Bricklayer Effective Date : 08/21/2015 Last Posted : 08/21/2015
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Bricklayer $24.35 $1.00 $4.37 $0.39 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $30.11 $42.29
Tile Marble
Terrazzo
Finisher
Base $24.85 $1.00 $4.37 $0.39 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $30.61 $43.04
Machine
TMT
Helper-May
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852566FE00567B7B?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2015fbLoc22 Page
enter
Apprentice
Program
after 90 day
completionr
First 90 45.00 $10.96 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $10.96 $16.44
Days
Special Calculation Note : Classification title contains "Bricklayer" because contract originates within
the Bricklayer Local.
Note that the classification description is clarified after the local union number at the top of the page.
***Medical Savings Account***: The Medical Savings Account can only be deducted providing
employee shows proof voluntary enrollment in the program. Minimum contribution of $1.00 per
hourworked with no maximum.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
1 Journeyman 1 Apprentice AUGLAIZE, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK, CLINTON,
5 Journeyman 1 Apprentice DARKE, GREENE, HARDIN, HIGHLAND, LOGAN,
10 Journeyman 2 Apprentice MERCER, MIAMI, MONTGOMERY, PREBLE*,
15Journeyman 3 Apprentice SHELBY
20 Journeyman 4 Apprentice
25 Journeyman 5 Apprentice
8 Employees 1 Helper
Special Jurisdictional Note : In Preble County the following townships are included: (Jackson,
Monroe, Harrison, Twin and Washington)
Details :
Tile Layer Finishers shall do mixing of mortars & adhesives,cleaning & grouting of tile,unloading of all
trucks,unpacking & handling of all tile & materials such as sand,lime,cement,tile,& all types of tile panels,
prefabricated on job site. Marble Setter Finishers shall do all cleaning,waxing & polishing,grouting and
pointing.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852566FE00567B7B?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc35 Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc35
Craft : Bricklayer Effective Date : 07/19/2016 Last Posted : 07/19/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Bricklayer $26.53 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $40.01 $53.28
Stone $26.53 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $40.01 $53.28
Masons
Marble
Masons
Pointer $26.53 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $40.01 $53.28
Caulker
Cleaner
Refractory $26.53 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $40.01 $53.28
Worker
Improvers
1st 6 $15.92 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $29.40 $37.36
Months
1200-1800
Hrs
2nd 6 $18.57 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $32.05 $41.34
Months
1801-2400
3rd 6 $19.90 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $33.38 $43.33
Months
2401-3000
Hrs
4th 6 $21.22 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $34.70 $45.31
Months
3001-3600
5th 6 $23.88 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $37.36 $49.30
Months
3601-4200
6th 6 $25.20 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $38.68 $51.28
Months
4201-4800
Hrs
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256B8E0057EC4F?opendocument 1/3
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc35 Page
1st 6
months
2nd 6 55.00 $14.59 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $28.07 $35.37
months
3rd 6 60.00 $15.92 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $29.40 $37.36
months
4th 6 70.00 $18.57 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $32.05 $41.34
months
5th 6 75.00 $19.90 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $33.38 $43.33
months
6th 6 80.00 $21.22 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $34.70 $45.32
months
7th 6 90.00 $23.88 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $37.36 $49.30
months
8th 6 95.00 $25.20 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $38.68 $51.29
months
Mason 45.00 $11.94 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $11.94 $17.91
Finisher 1-
90 days
Mason 45.00 $11.94 $7.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $18.94 $24.91
Finisher
91-365
days
Mason 50.00 $13.27 $7.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $20.26 $26.90
Finisher
2nd year
Special Calculation Note : Light Commercial Apprentices are 50% of Journeyman's rate plus full
fringes
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
5 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, MERCER, VAN WERT
8 Journeymen to 2 Apprentice
13 Journeymen to 3 Apprentice
18 Journeymen to 4 Apprentice
23 Journeymen to 5 Apprentice
28 Journeymen to 6 Apprentice
MASON FINISHER RATIO:
1 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice
permits 1 Mason Finisher
2-6 Journeymen to 2 Apprentices
permits 1 Mason Finishers
7-12 Journeymen to 3 Apprentices
permits 2 Mason Finishers
13-18 Journeymen to 4 Apprentices
permits 2 Mason Finishers
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256B8E0057EC4F?opendocument 2/3
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc35 Page
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
BAT registered Apprentices must be employed prior to hiring Mason Finisher (s).
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256B8E0057EC4F?opendocument 3/3
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc35 Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc35
Craft : Bricklayer Effective Date : 07/19/2016 Last Posted : 07/19/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Bricklayer Tile $26.53 $7.00 $5.84 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $40.01 $53.28
Setter/Terrazzo
Worker
Tile Finisher
Assistant
1st Year $13.26 $7.00 $1.35 $0.54 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $22.15 $28.78
2nd Year $17.24 $7.00 $1.35 $0.54 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $26.13 $34.75
3rd Year $21.22 $7.00 $1.35 $0.54 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $30.11 $40.72
Special Calculation Note : Light Commercial Apprentices are 50% of Journeyman's rate plus full
fringes
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
1 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, MERCER, VAN WERT
8 Journeymen to 2 Apprentice
13 Journeymen to 3 Apprentice
18 Journeymen to 4 Apprentice
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257FE80069F834?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc35 Page
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
BAT registered Apprentices must be employed prior to hiring Mason Finisher (s).
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257FE80069F834?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN02-2016fbLocNW372 Page
Change # : LCN02-2016fbLocNW372
Craft : Carpenter Effective Date : 05/20/2016 Last Posted : 05/20/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Carpenter $24.54 $6.45 $7.88 $0.48 $0.00 $3.50 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $42.85 $55.12
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
2 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, HARDIN, MERCER,
not to exceed 5 apprentices PUTNAM, VAN WERT
per entire job or employer
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
Special Work Rates:
40-100 foot free fall - $ .50 per hour above scale
Over 100 foot free fall - $1.00 per hour above scale
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525660C004274F2?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN02-2016fbLocNW372 Page
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525660C004274F2?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN02-2016fbLoc1090mil Page
Change # : LCN02-2016fbLoc1090mil
Craft : Carpenter Effective Date : 05/20/2016 Last Posted : 05/20/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Carpenter $28.62 $6.45 $8.99 $0.53 $0.00 $5.03 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $49.62 $63.93
Millwright
Pile Driver
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
3 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, HARDIN, MERCER,
PUTNAM, VAN WERT, WYANDOT
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525781600726EFA?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN02-2016fbLoc1090mil Page
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525781600726EFA?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2014fbCarpNEStatewide Page
Change # : LCN01-2014fbCarpNEStatewide
Craft : Carpenter Effective Date : 03/05/2014 Last Posted : 03/05/2014
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Carpenter $19.70 $5.05 $1.00 $0.15 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $25.90 $35.75
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
1 Journeymen to 1 Trainee ADAMS, ALLEN, ASHLAND, ASHTABULA,
ATHENS, AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN,
BUTLER, CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK,
CLERMONT, CLINTON, COLUMBIANA,
COSHOCTON, CRAWFORD, CUYAHOGA, DARKE,
DEFIANCE, DELAWARE, ERIE, FAIRFIELD,
FAYETTE, FRANKLIN, FULTON, GALLIA,
GEAUGA, GREENE, GUERNSEY, HAMILTON,
HANCOCK, HARDIN, HARRISON, HENRY,
HIGHLAND, HOCKING, HOLMES, HURON,
JACKSON, JEFFERSON, KNOX, LAKE,
LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, LORAIN, LUCAS,
MADISON, MAHONING, MARION, MEDINA,
MEIGS, MERCER, MIAMI, MONROE,
MONTGOMERY, MORGAN, MORROW,
MUSKINGUM, NOBLE, OTTAWA, PAULDING,
PERRY, PICKAWAY, PIKE, PORTAGE, PREBLE,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852577C90051DAF8?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2014fbCarpNEStatewide Page
PUTNAM, RICHLAND, ROSS, SANDUSKY,
SCIOTO, SENECA, SHELBY, STARK, SUMMIT,
TRUMBULL, TUSCARAWAS, UNION, VAN WERT,
VINTON, WARREN, WASHINGTON, WAYNE,
WILLIAMS, WOOD, WYANDOT
Special Jurisdictional Note : Industrial Dock and Door is the installation of overhead doors, roll up
doors and dock leveling equipment
Details :
10/27/10 New Contract jc
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852577C90051DAF8?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN02-2007LocNW248 Page
Change # : CN02-2007LocNW248
Craft : Carpenter Effective Date : 09/06/2007 Last Posted : 09/06/2007
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Carpenter $20.00 $0.00 $1.00 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $21.20 $31.20
Mechanic
Intermediate $15.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $16.05 $23.97
Mechanic
Level 2
Mechanic $12.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $12.20 $18.20
Level 1
Special Calculation Note : Fully paid reasonable & customary comprehensive medical/surgical
insurance shall be provided for employee,spouse and dependent children by employer.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
1 Journeymen Mechanic to 1 Mechanic Level 1 ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, CRAWFORD, DEFIANCE,
or Intermediate Mechanic Level 2 FULTON, HANCOCK, HARDIN, HENRY, LUCAS,
MERCER, OTTAWA, PAULDING, PUTNAM,
SANDUSKY, SENECA, VAN WERT, WILLIAMS,
WOOD, WYANDOT
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
All work related to the repair, transportation, installation and servicing of doors and gates of any type: and
repair, transportation and servicing of any and all items related to doors and gates: and the preparation of any
openings, passageways and/or access where a door and/or gate will be installed.
Including but not limited to: Upward acting doors, horizontally sliding doors, rapid roll fabric doors, overhead
chain gates, sliding grills, air doors, fire doors and any other doors/or gates which are used to gain access to or
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256BE30049E9A3?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN02-2007LocNW248 Page
prevent access to any area, enclosed or otherwise and Dock Levers. Also any devices and/or items used to
operate, open or close doors.
Journeyman Mechanic - an individual that has adequately demonstrated his knowledge and proficiency at all
parts of the trade, who has 3 years documented experience at that trade, or who has been certified by a bona fide
apprenticeship program, registered with the US Dept of Labor/Bureau of Apprenticeship.
Intermediate Mechanic Level 2- an employee who has performed work as a junior mechanic at least 3 years.
Mechanic Level 1- the employer may hire persons who are not journeypersons. These employees will start at
60% of the journeypersons wage rate and the employer is not required to pay fringe benefits, until the Mechanic
becomes a Journeyman Mechanic.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256BE30049E9A3?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbHvyHwy Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbHvyHwy
Craft : Bricklayer Effective Date : 06/29/2016 Last Posted : 06/29/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Cement $28.55 $7.75 $5.48 $0.42 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $42.20 $56.48
Mason
Bricklayer
Sewer
Water
Treatment
A
Special Calculation Note : NOT FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
3 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ADAMS, ALLEN, ASHLAND, ASHTABULA,
6 Journeymen to 2 Apprentice ATHENS, AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN,
9 Journeymen to 3 Apprentice BUTLER, CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK,
12 Journeymen to 4 Apprentice CLERMONT, CLINTON, COLUMBIANA,
15 Journeymen to 5 Apprentice COSHOCTON, CRAWFORD, CUYAHOGA, DARKE,
DEFIANCE, DELAWARE, ERIE, FAIRFIELD,
FAYETTE, FRANKLIN, FULTON, GALLIA,
GEAUGA, GREENE, GUERNSEY, HAMILTON,
HANCOCK, HARDIN, HARRISON, HENRY,
HIGHLAND, HOCKING, HOLMES, HURON,
JACKSON, JEFFERSON, KNOX, LAKE,
LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, LORAIN, LUCAS,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525709000576B31?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbHvyHwy Page
MADISON, MAHONING, MARION, MEDINA,
MEIGS, MERCER, MIAMI, MONROE,
MONTGOMERY, MORGAN, MORROW,
MUSKINGUM, NOBLE, OTTAWA, PAULDING,
PERRY, PICKAWAY, PIKE, PORTAGE, PREBLE,
PUTNAM, RICHLAND, ROSS, SANDUSKY,
SCIOTO, SENECA, SHELBY, STARK, SUMMIT,
TRUMBULL, TUSCARAWAS, UNION, VAN WERT,
VINTON, WARREN, WASHINGTON, WAYNE
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
(A) Highway Construction, Sewer, Waterworks And Utility Construction, Industrial & Building Site Heavy
Construction, Airport Construction Or Railroad Construction Work.
(B) Power Plant, Tunnels, Amusement Park, Athletic Stadium Site Work ,Pollution Control,Sewer Plant, Waste
Plant, & Water Treatment Facilities, Construction.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525709000576B31?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbHvyHwy Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbHvyHwy
Craft : Bricklayer Effective Date : 06/29/2016 Last Posted : 06/29/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Cement $29.54 $7.75 $5.48 $0.43 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $43.20 $57.97
Mason
Bricklayer
Power
Plants
Tunnels
Amusement
Parks B
Special Calculation Note : NOT FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
3 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ADAMS, ALLEN, ASHLAND, ASHTABULA,
6 Journeymen to 2 Apprentice ATHENS, AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN,
9 Journeymen to 2 Apprentice BUTLER, CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK,
12 Journeymen to 4 Apprentice CLERMONT, CLINTON, COLUMBIANA,
15 Journeymen to 5 Apprentice COSHOCTON, CRAWFORD, CUYAHOGA, DARKE,
DEFIANCE, DELAWARE, ERIE, FAIRFIELD,
FAYETTE, FRANKLIN, FULTON, GALLIA,
GEAUGA, GREENE, GUERNSEY, HAMILTON,
HANCOCK, HARDIN, HARRISON, HENRY,
HIGHLAND, HOCKING, HOLMES, HURON,
JACKSON, JEFFERSON, KNOX, LAKE,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852577070068E248?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbHvyHwy Page
LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, LORAIN, LUCAS,
MADISON, MAHONING, MARION, MEDINA,
MEIGS, MERCER, MIAMI, MONROE,
MONTGOMERY, MORGAN, MORROW,
MUSKINGUM, NOBLE, OTTAWA, PAULDING,
PERRY, PICKAWAY, PIKE, PORTAGE, PREBLE,
PUTNAM, RICHLAND, ROSS, SANDUSKY,
SCIOTO, SENECA, SHELBY, STARK, SUMMIT,
TRUMBULL, TUSCARAWAS, UNION, VAN WERT,
VINTON, WARREN, WASHINGTON, WAYNE
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
(A) Highway Construction, Sewer, Waterworks And Utility Construction, Industrial & Building Site Heavy
Construction, Airport Construction Or Railroad Construction Work.
(B) Power Plant, Tunnels, Amusement Park, Athletic Stadium Site Work ,Pollution Control,Sewer Plant, Waste
Plant, & Water Treatment Facilities, Construction.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852577070068E248?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN01-2011jcCementHevHwy886 Page
Change # : CN01-2011jcCementHevHwy886
Craft : Cement Mason Effective Date : 09/21/2011 Last Posted : 09/21/2011
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Cement $25.59 $6.09 $4.00 $0.40 $0.00 $2.10 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $38.18 $50.97
Mason
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
5 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, HARDIN, LOGAN, MERCER,
VAN WERT
Special Jurisdictional Note : Water and Sewage Treatment Plant, Amusement Parks, ETC
Details :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579100077AD45?opendocument 1/1
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN01-2011jcCementHevHwy886 Page
Change # : CN01-2011jcCementHevHwy886
Craft : Cement Mason Effective Date : 09/21/2011 Last Posted : 09/21/2011
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Cement $25.43 $6.09 $4.00 $0.40 $0.00 $2.10 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $38.02 $50.74
Mason
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
5 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, HARDIN, LOGAN, MERCER,
VAN WERT
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579100078314A?opendocument 1/1
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN01-2016fbLoc886Lima Page
Change # : CN01-2016fbLoc886Lima
Craft : Cement Effective Date : 07/01/2016 Last Posted : 06/29/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Cement $26.60 $7.40 $6.35 $0.20 $0.00 $4.05 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $44.60 $57.90
Mason
Cement $14.63 $7.40 $6.35 $0.20 $0.00 $4.05 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $32.63 $39.95
Mason
Shophand
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
5 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, HARDIN, LOGAN, MERCER,
VAN WERT
Special Jurisdictional Note :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256609005B72B0?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN01-2016fbLoc886Lima Page
Details :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256609005B72B0?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCR01-2016fbLoc32 Page
Change # : LCR01-2016fbLoc32
Craft : Electrical Effective Date : 08/17/2016 Last Posted : 08/17/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Electrician $28.57 $7.85 $3.90 $1.14 $0.00 $2.95 $0.86 $0.00 $0.00 $45.27 $59.56
Special Calculation Note : OTHER IS: Voluntary Employees Beneficiary Association.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
Each Job Site shall be allowed 3 ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, HARDIN, LOGAN, MERCER,
Journeymen to 2 Apprentices as SHELBY, VAN WERT, WYANDOT*
illustrated below:
1 to 3 Journeymen to 2 Apprentices
4 to 6 Journeymen to 4 Apprentices
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852577D1006DB0A4?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCR01-2016fbLoc32 Page
7 to 9 Journeymen to 6 Apprentices
The first person assigned to any job site shall be a
Journeyman Wireman.
Special Jurisdictional Note : In Wyandot County the following townships are included: Crawford,
Jackson, Marseilles, Mifflin, Ridgeland, Ridge and Salem.
Details :
A Certified Welder will receive $1.50 per hour above the Journeyman rate. Welders welding on galvanized shall
receive $1.50 per hour above the Journeyman rate.
All work over 35 feet but less than 60 feet shall receive $.75 per hour above the Journeyman rate.
All work 60 feet or over shall receive $1.50 per hour above the Journeyman rate.
When using a JLG-typ equipment or bucket truck is used there will be no high pay unless the work is over 60
feet.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852577D1006DB0A4?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2014fbLoc32 Page
Change # : LCN01-2014fbLoc32
Craft : Electrical Effective Date : 03/05/2014 Last Posted : 03/05/2014
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Electrician $26.75 $6.30 $3.70 $0.80 $0.00 $2.50 $1.00 $0.00 $0.00 $41.05 $54.42
CE-3 $20.11 $4.62 $0.60 $0.64 $0.00 $0.60 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $26.67 $36.73
12,001-
14,000 Hrs
CE-2 $15.80 $4.62 $0.47 $0.64 $0.00 $0.47 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $22.10 $30.00
10,001-
12,000
CE-1 $14.37 $4.62 $0.43 $0.64 $0.00 $0.43 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $20.59 $27.78
8,001-
10,000 Hrs
CW-4 $12.93 $4.62 $0.39 $0.64 $0.00 $0.39 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $19.07 $25.54
6,001-
8,000 Hrs
CW-3 $11.49 $4.62 $0.34 $0.64 $0.00 $0.34 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $17.53 $23.28
4,001-
6,000 Hrs
CW-2 $10.06 $4.62 $0.30 $0.64 $0.00 $0.30 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $16.02 $21.05
2,001-
4,000 Hrs
CW-1 0- $10.06 $4.62 $0.30 $0.64 $0.00 $0.30 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $16.02 $21.05
2,000 Hrs
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579900049A8DA?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2014fbLoc32 Page
5th period 75.00 $20.06 $6.30 $2.78 $0.60 $0.00 $1.88 $1.00 $0.00 $0.00 $32.62 $42.65
5000-
6500 hrs
6th period 85.00 $22.74 $6.30 $3.15 $0.68 $0.00 $2.13 $1.00 $0.00 $0.00 $36.00 $47.37
6500-
8000 hrs
Special Calculation Note : OTHER IS: Voluntary Employees Beneficiary Association.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
Each Job Site shall be allowed 3 ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, HARDIN, LOGAN, MERCER,
Journeymen to 2 Apprentices as SHELBY, VAN WERT, WYANDOT*
illustrated below:
1 to 3 Journeymen to 2 Apprentices
4 to 6 Journeymen to 4 Apprentices
7 to 9 Journeymen to 6 Apprentices
The first person assigned to any job site shall be a
Journeyman Wireman.
Construction Electrician and Construction Wireman
Ratio
There shall be a minimum ratio of one inside
Journeyman to every (4) employees of different
classification per jobsite. An inside Journeyman
Wireman is required on the project as the fifth (5th)
worker or when apprentices are used.
Special Jurisdictional Note : In Wyandot County the following townships are included: Crawford,
Jackson, Marseilles, Mifflin, Ridgeland, Ridge and Salem.
The scope of work for the light commercial agreement shall apply to the following facilities not to
exceed 200,000 square feet; office buildings, shopping centers, auto sales agencies and garages,
churches, funeral homes, nursing homes, hotels, retail and wholesale facilities, small stand-alone
manufacturing facilities when free standing and not part of a larger facility (not to exceed 50,000
square fee), solar projects (500 panels or less) unless otherwise covered under the agreement,
lighting retrofits (when not associated with remodels involving branch re-circuiting) lighting retrofits
shall be defined as the changing of lamps and ballasts in existing light fixtures and shall also include
the one for one replacement of existing fixtures, warehouses, gas stations, food service centers,
restaurants, entertainment facilities, hospitals, clinics, motels, residential buildings.
Details :
A Certified Welder will receive $1.50 per hour above the Journeyman rate. Welders welding on galvanized shall
receive $1.50 per hour above the Journeyman rate.
All work over 35 feet but less than 60 feet shall receive $.75 per hour above the Journeyman rate.
All work 60 feet or over shall receive $1.50 per hour above the Journeyman rate.
When using a JLG-typ equipment or bucket truck is used there will be no high pay unless the work is over 60
feet.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579900049A8DA?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCR02-2012fbLoc32VDV Page
Change # : LCR02-2012fbLoc32VDV
Craft : Voice Data Video Effective Date : 07/11/2012 Last Posted : 07/11/2012
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Electrical $22.00 $5.50 $0.66 $0.42 $0.00 $2.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $30.98 $41.98
Installer
Technician
A
Electrical $20.90 $5.50 $0.63 $0.40 $0.00 $2.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $29.83 $40.28
Installer
Technician
B
JW $19.80 $5.50 $0.59 $0.38 $0.00 $2.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $28.67 $38.57
Installer
Technician
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525660B0044654B?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCR02-2012fbLoc32VDV Page
1 Technician to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, HARDIN, LOGAN, MERCER,
SHELBY, WYANDOT*
Special Jurisdictional Note : In Wyandot County the following townships are included: (Crawford,
Jackson, Marseilles, Mifflin, Ridgeland, Ridge and Salem)
Details :
Installer Technician A: has 5 years of experience and training, successfully completed classroom and OJT
requirements of the JATC Administered Apprenticeship Program, pass and maintained BICSI Installer Level 1,
BICSI Installer Level 2 and BICSI Technician level. A Journeyman Installer/Technician "A" is a Journeyman
Installer/Technician B with 5 years experience & training and who holds a current BICSI Technician
Certification.
Installer Technician B; shall have 4 years of experience & training, successfully completed Classroom & OJT
requirements of JATC Administrated Apprenticeship Program, pass and maintained BICSI Installer Level 1 and
BICSI Installer Level 2 or has passed & maintained BISCI Installer Level 2.
An Apprentice/Installer shall be an individual currently participating in the JATC Administered Apprenticeship
Program completing classroom and OJT requirements as specified by JATC.
An employee who is required to wear a pager after hours will receive an additional 1.00 per hour for all hours
worked.
Work covers but not limited to: low voltage construction, installation, maintenance, and removal of teledata
facilities (voice, data,video) including outside plant, telephone and data inside wire, interconnect, terminal
equipment, central offices, PABX, fiber optic cable and equipment, railroad communications, micro waves, V-
sAT, by-pass, CATV, WAN, wide area networks, LAN and ISDN.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525660B0044654B?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled OCN1-2015fbLoc71DOTClev Page
Change # : OCN1-2015fbLoc71DOTClev
Craft : Lineman Effective Date : 12/28/2015 Last Posted : 03/11/2015
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Electrical $35.82 $5.25 $1.07 $0.36 $0.00 $6.45 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $49.01 $66.92
Lineman
Traffic $34.48 $5.25 $1.03 $0.34 $0.00 $6.21 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $47.37 $64.61
Signal &
Lighting
Journeyman
Equipment $32.24 $5.25 $0.97 $0.32 $0.00 $5.80 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $44.64 $60.76
Operator
Groundman $19.70 $5.25 $0.59 $0.20 $0.00 $3.55 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $29.35 $39.20
0 to 1 Year
Groundman $23.28 $5.25 $0.70 $0.23 $0.00 $4.19 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $33.71 $45.35
1 Year or
more
Traffic
Apprentice
1st 1000 hrs $20.69 $5.25 $0.62 $0.21 $0.00 $3.72 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $30.55 $40.90
2nd 1000 $22.41 $5.25 $0.67 $0.22 $0.00 $4.03 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $32.64 $43.85
hrs
3rd 1000 $24.14 $5.25 $0.72 $0.24 $0.00 $4.35 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $34.76 $46.83
hrs
4th 1000 $25.86 $5.25 $0.78 $0.26 $0.00 $4.65 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $36.86 $49.79
hrs
5th 1000 $27.58 $5.25 $0.83 $0.28 $0.00 $4.96 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $38.96 $52.75
hrs
6th 1000 $31.03 $5.25 $0.93 $0.31 $0.00 $5.59 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $43.17 $58.69
hrs
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257A0700589960?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled OCN1-2015fbLoc71DOTClev Page
3rd 1,000 70.00 $25.07 $5.25 $0.75 $0.25 $0.00 $4.51 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $35.89 $48.43
Hours
4th 1,000 75.00 $26.87 $5.25 $0.81 $0.27 $0.00 $4.84 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $38.10 $51.53
Hours
5th 1,000 80.00 $28.66 $5.25 $0.86 $0.29 $0.00 $5.16 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $40.28 $54.60
Hours
6th 1,000 85.00 $30.45 $5.25 $0.91 $0.30 $0.00 $5.48 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $42.45 $57.67
Hours
7th 1,000 90.00 $32.24 $5.25 $0.97 $0.32 $0.00 $5.80 $0.06 $0.00 $0.00 $44.64 $60.76
Hours
Special Calculation Note : Other is for Safety and Education Fund
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
1 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice AUGLAIZE, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK, CLINTON,
DARKE, GREENE, LOGAN, MERCER, MIAMI,
MONTGOMERY, PREBLE, SHELBY
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
A groundman when directed shall assist a Journeymen in the performance of his/her work on the ground,
including the use of hand tools. Under no circumstances shall this classification climb poles, towers, ladders, or
work from an elevated platform or bucket truck. This classification shall not perform work normally assigned to
an apprentice lineman. No more than three (3) Groundmen shall work alone. Jobs with more that three
Groundmen shall be supervised by a Groundcrew Foreman, Journeyman Lineman, Journeyman Traffic Signal
Technician or an Equipment Operator.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257A0700589960?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc7 Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc7
Craft : Lineman Effective Date : 03/10/2016 Last Posted : 03/10/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Electrical $40.37 $5.25 $1.21 $0.40 $0.00 $8.88 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $56.46 $76.64
Lineman
Certified $40.37 $5.25 $1.21 $0.40 $0.00 $8.88 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $56.46 $76.64
Lineman
Welder
Certified $40.37 $5.25 $1.21 $0.40 $0.00 $8.88 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $56.46 $76.64
Cable
Splicer
Operator A $36.28 $5.25 $1.09 $0.36 $0.00 $7.98 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $51.31 $69.45
Operator B $32.21 $5.25 $0.97 $0.32 $0.00 $7.09 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $46.19 $62.29
Operator C $26.10 $5.25 $0.78 $0.26 $0.00 $5.74 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $38.48 $51.53
Groundman $20.19 $5.25 $0.61 $0.20 $0.00 $4.44 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $31.04 $41.14
0-12
months
Exp
Groundman $22.20 $5.25 $0.67 $0.22 $0.00 $4.88 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $33.57 $44.67
0-12
months
Exp w/CDL
Groundman $22.20 $5.25 $0.67 $0.22 $0.00 $4.88 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $33.57 $44.67
1 yr or
more
Groundman $26.24 $5.25 $0.79 $0.26 $0.00 $5.77 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $38.66 $51.78
1 yr or
more
w/CDL
Equipment $32.21 $5.25 $0.97 $0.32 $0.00 $7.09 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $46.19 $62.29
Mechanic
A
Equipment $29.16 $5.25 $0.87 $0.29 $0.00 $6.42 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $42.34 $56.92
Mechanic
B
Equipment $26.10 $5.25 $0.78 $0.26 $0.00 $5.74 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $38.48 $51.53
Mechanic
C
X-Ray $40.37 $5.25 $1.21 $0.40 $0.00 $8.88 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $56.46 $76.64
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257745004D91C8?opendocument 1/3
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc7 Page
Technician
Special Calculation Note : Other is Health Retirement Account
Operator "A"
John Henry Rock Drill, D-6 (or equivalent) and above, Trackhoe Digger, (320 Track excavator),
Cranes (greater then 25 tons and less than 45 tons).
Operator "B"
Cranes (greater than 6 tons and up to 25 tons), Backhoes, Road Tractor, Dozer up to D-5, Pressure
Digger- wheeled or tracked, all Tension wire Stringing equipment.
Operator "C"
Trench, Backhoe, Riding type vibratory Compactor, Ground Rod Driver, Boom Truck (6 ton & below),
Skid Steer Loaders, Material Handler.
*All Operators of cranes 45 ton or larger shall be paid the journeyman rate of pay. $0.30 is for Health
Retirement Account.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
1 Journeyman to 1 Apprentice ADAMS, ASHLAND, ASHTABULA, ATHENS,
AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN, BUTLER,
CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK, CLERMONT,
CLINTON, COLUMBIANA, COSHOCTON,
CRAWFORD, CUYAHOGA, DARKE, DELAWARE,
FAIRFIELD, FAYETTE, FRANKLIN, GALLIA,
GEAUGA, GREENE, GUERNSEY, HAMILTON,
HARRISON, HIGHLAND, HOCKING, HOLMES,
JACKSON, JEFFERSON, KNOX, LAKE,
LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, LORAIN,
MADISON, MAHONING, MARION, MEDINA,
MEIGS, MERCER, MIAMI, MONROE,
MONTGOMERY, MORGAN, MORROW,
MUSKINGUM, NOBLE, PERRY, PICKAWAY, PIKE,
PORTAGE, PREBLE, RICHLAND, ROSS, SCIOTO,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257745004D91C8?opendocument 2/3
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc7 Page
SHELBY, STARK, SUMMIT, TRUMBULL,
TUSCARAWAS, UNION, VINTON, WARREN,
WASHINGTON, WAYNE
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
Heli - Arc Welding will be paid $.30 above Journeyman rate. Additional compensation of 10% over the
Journeyman Lineman and Journeyman Technician for performing work on structures outside of buildings such
as water towers, smoke stacks, radio and television towers, more than 75' above the ground.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257745004D91C8?opendocument 3/3
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc7 Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc7
Craft : Lineman Effective Date : 03/10/2016 Last Posted : 03/10/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Electrical $38.29 $5.25 $1.15 $0.38 $0.00 $8.42 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $53.84 $72.98
Lineman
Substation $38.29 $5.25 $1.15 $0.38 $0.00 $8.42 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $53.84 $72.98
Technician
Cable $40.06 $5.25 $1.20 $0.40 $0.00 $8.81 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $56.07 $76.10
Splicer
Operator A $34.42 $5.25 $1.03 $0.34 $0.00 $7.57 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $48.96 $66.17
Operator B $30.54 $5.25 $0.92 $0.31 $0.00 $6.72 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $44.09 $59.36
Operator C $24.73 $5.25 $0.74 $0.25 $0.00 $5.44 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $36.76 $49.13
Groundman $19.15 $5.25 $0.57 $0.19 $0.00 $4.21 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $29.72 $39.29
0-12
months
Exp
Groundman $21.06 $5.25 $0.63 $0.21 $0.00 $4.63 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $32.13 $42.66
0-12
months
Exp w/CDL
Groundman $21.06 $5.25 $0.63 $0.21 $0.00 $4.63 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $32.13 $42.66
1 yr or
more
Groundman $24.89 $5.25 $0.75 $0.25 $0.00 $5.48 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $36.97 $49.42
1 yr or
more
w/CDL
Equipment $30.54 $5.25 $0.92 $0.31 $0.00 $6.72 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $44.09 $59.36
Mechanic
A
Equipment $27.65 $5.25 $0.83 $0.28 $0.00 $6.08 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $40.44 $54.26
Mechanic
B
Equipment $24.73 $5.25 $0.74 $0.25 $0.00 $5.44 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $36.76 $49.13
Mechanic
C
Line Truck $27.24 $5.25 $0.82 $0.27 $0.00 $5.99 $0.35 $0.00 $0.00 $39.92 $53.54
w/uuger
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852573600050A24D?opendocument 1/3
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc7 Page
Special Calculation Note : Other is Health Retirement Account
Operator "A"
John Henry Rock Drill, D-6 (or equivalent) and above, Trackhoe Digger, (320 Track excavator),
Cranes (greater then 25 tons and less than 45 tons).
Operator "B"
Cranes (greater than 6 tons and up to 25 tons), Backhoes, Road Tractor, Dozer up to D-5, Pressure
Digger- wheeled or tracked, all Tension wire Stringing equipment.
Operator "C"
Trench, Backhoe, Riding type vibratory Compactor, Ground Rod Driver, Boom Truck (6 ton & below),
Skid Steer Loaders, Material Handler.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
(1) Journeyman Lineman to (1) Apprentice ADAMS, ASHLAND, ASHTABULA, ATHENS,
AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN, BUTLER,
CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK, CLERMONT,
CLINTON, COLUMBIANA, COSHOCTON,
CRAWFORD, CUYAHOGA, DARKE, DELAWARE,
FAIRFIELD, FAYETTE, FRANKLIN, GALLIA,
GEAUGA, GREENE, GUERNSEY, HAMILTON,
HARRISON, HIGHLAND, HOCKING, HOLMES,
JACKSON, JEFFERSON, KNOX, LAKE,
LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, LORAIN,
MADISON, MAHONING, MARION, MEDINA,
MEIGS, MERCER, MIAMI, MONROE,
MONTGOMERY, MORGAN, MORROW,
MUSKINGUM, NOBLE, PERRY, PICKAWAY, PIKE,
PORTAGE, PREBLE, RICHLAND, ROSS, SCIOTO,
SHELBY, STARK, SUMMIT, TRUMBULL,
TUSCARAWAS, UNION, VINTON, WARREN,
WASHINGTON, WAYNE
Special Jurisdictional Note : 0.30 is for Health Retirement Account.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852573600050A24D?opendocument 2/3
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc7 Page
Details :
Heli - Arc Welding will be paid $.30 above Journeyman rate. Additional compensation of 10% over the
Journeyman Lineman and Journeyman Technician for performing work on structures outside of buildings such
as water towers, smoke stacks, radio and television towers, more than 75' above the ground.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852573600050A24D?opendocument 3/3
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2014fbLoc44 Page
Change # : LCN01-2014fbLoc44
Craft : Elevator Effective Date : 01/01/2015 Last Posted : 11/26/2014
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Elevator $44.77 $13.58 $8.46 $0.60 $3.58 $5.75 $1.38 $0.00 $0.00 $78.12 $100.50
Mechanic
Assistant $35.82 $13.58 $8.46 $0.60 $2.15 $5.75 $1.10 $0.00 $0.00 $67.46 $85.37
Mechanic
Mechanic $50.37 $13.58 $8.46 $0.60 $4.03 $5.75 $1.55 $0.00 $0.00 $84.34 $109.52
in Charge
0-6 50.00 $22.39 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $22.39 $33.58
months
Probation
1st year 55.00 $24.62 $13.58 $8.46 $0.60 $1.48 $5.75 $0.76 $0.00 $0.00 $55.25 $67.57
2nd year 65.00 $29.10 $13.58 $8.46 $0.60 $1.75 $5.75 $0.90 $0.00 $0.00 $60.14 $74.69
3rd year 70.00 $31.34 $13.58 $8.46 $0.60 $1.88 $5.75 $0.96 $0.00 $0.00 $62.57 $78.24
4th year 80.00 $35.82 $13.58 $8.46 $0.60 $2.15 $5.75 $1.10 $0.00 $0.00 $67.46 $85.36
Helper 70.00 $31.34 $13.58 $8.46 $0.60 $1.88 $5.75 $0.96 $0.00 $0.00 $62.57 $78.24
Special Calculation Note : OTHER IS :HOLIDAY & VACATION PAY
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
The total number of Helpers & Apprentices and ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, CRAWFORD, DEFIANCE,
Assistant Mechanic employed shall not exceed the ERIE, FULTON, HANCOCK, HARDIN, HENRY,
number of Mechanics on any one job, except on jobs HURON, LUCAS, MERCER, OTTAWA, PAULDING,
where (2) teams or more are working, (1) extra Helper, PUTNAM, SANDUSKY, SENECA, VAN WERT,
Apprentice or Assistant Mechanic may be employed for WILLIAMS, WOOD, WYANDOT
the first (2) teams and an extra Helper, Apprentice or
Assistant Mechanic for each additional (3) teams.
Further, the Company may use as many Helpers,
Apprentices and Assistant Mechanics as best suits his
convenience under the direction of a Mechanic in
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256CD3006F6F0C?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2014fbLoc44 Page
wrecking old plants and in handling and hoisting
material, and on foundation work. When removing old
and installing new cables on existing elevator
installations, the Company may use two (2) Helpers,
Apprentices or Assistant Mechanics to one (1)
Mechanic.
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
A Helper or Apprentice certified to weld shall be paid mechanic's rate when performing welding (excluding tack
welding).
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256CD3006F6F0C?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2013fbLoc1020 Page
Change # : LCN01-2013fbLoc1020
Craft : Glazier Effective Date : 02/06/2013 Last Posted : 02/06/2013
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Glazier $19.90 $1.96 $2.43 $0.10 $0.00 $0.00 $4.00 $0.00 $0.00 $28.39 $38.34
Special Calculation Note : Other is: In lieu of paid holidays and paid vacations $4.00 per hour
premium is added
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
1Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, HANCOCK, HARDIN,
LOGAN, MERCER, PAULDING, PUTNAM,
SHELBY, VAN WERT, WYANDOT
Special Jurisdictional Note :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525692300462250?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2013fbLoc1020 Page
Details :
Journeymen in charge of 6 or more men shall receive $1.00 an hour premium.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525692300462250?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc147 Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc147
Craft : Ironworker Effective Date : 06/29/2016 Last Posted : 06/29/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Ironworker $25.39 $7.10 $9.50 $0.57 $0.00 $4.05 $0.27 $0.00 $0.00 $46.88 $59.58
Special Calculation Note : Other is Building Industry.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
4 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN*, DEFIANCE, MERCER, PAULDING,
PUTNAM*, VAN WERT*, WILLIAMS*
Special Jurisdictional Note : Allen County Twps included: Monroe, Richland. Putnam County Twps
included: Jennings, Sugar Creek, Pleasant, Union, Jackson, Monterey, Perry, Greensburg, Ottawa,
Palmer, Monroe. VanWert County Twps included: York, Liberty, Willshire, Harrison, Pleasant, Ridge,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852578CC0070A2CD?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc147 Page
Washington, Jackson, Hoaglin, Union, Tully. Williams County Twps included: Pulaski, Center, St.
Joseph, Florence, Superior, Jefferson, Northwest, Bridgewater, Springfield.
Details :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852578CC0070A2CD?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2015fbLoc147HevHwy Page
Change # : LCN01-2015fbLoc147HevHwy
Craft : Ironworker Effective Date : 10/07/2015 Last Posted : 10/07/2015
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Ironworker $25.39 $6.60 $9.20 $0.42 $0.00 $3.80 $0.62 $0.00 $0.00 $46.03 $58.73
Special Calculation Note : *Pension & Health and Welfare are paid on hours worked. **Annuity will
be based on hours paid (time and a half = $4.88 per hour and double time = $6.50 per hour).
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
4 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN*, DEFIANCE, MERCER, PAULDING,
PUTNAM*, VAN WERT*, WILLIAMS*
Special Jurisdictional Note : Allen County Twps included: Monroe, Richland. Putnam County Twps
included: Jennings, Sugar Creek, Pleasant, Union, Jackson, Monterey, Perry, Greensburg, Ottawa,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852575BD0050B447?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2015fbLoc147HevHwy Page
Palmer, Monroe. VanWert County Twps included: York, Liberty, Willshire, Harrison, Pleasant, Ridge,
Washington, Jackson, Hoaglin, Union, Tully. Williams County Twps included: Pulaski, Center, St.
Joseph, Florence, Superior, Jefferson, Northwest, Bridgewater, Springfield.
Details :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852575BD0050B447?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLocalHevHwy3 Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLocalHevHwy3
Craft : Laborer Group 1 Effective Date : 05/20/2016 Last Posted : 05/20/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Laborer $29.22 $6.70 $3.20 $0.45 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $0.00 $39.67 $54.28
Group 1
Group 2 $29.39 $6.70 $3.20 $0.45 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $0.00 $39.84 $54.54
Group 3 $29.72 $6.70 $3.20 $0.45 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $0.00 $40.17 $55.03
Group 4 $30.17 $6.70 $3.20 $0.45 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $0.00 $40.62 $55.71
Watch $21.95 $6.70 $3.20 $0.45 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.10 $0.00 $32.40 $43.38
Person
Special Calculation Note : Watchmen have no Apprentices. Tunnel Laborer rate with air-pressurized
add $1.00 to the above wage rate.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
1 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ADAMS, ALLEN, ASHLAND, ATHENS,
3 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice thereafter AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN, BUTLER,
CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK, CLERMONT,
CLINTON, COLUMBIANA, COSHOCTON,
CRAWFORD, DARKE, DEFIANCE, DELAWARE,
FAIRFIELD, FAYETTE, FRANKLIN, FULTON,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579C10069857F?opendocument 1/3
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLocalHevHwy3 Page
GALLIA, GREENE, GUERNSEY, HAMILTON,
HANCOCK, HARDIN, HARRISON, HENRY,
HIGHLAND, HOCKING, HOLMES, JACKSON,
JEFFERSON, KNOX, LAWRENCE, LICKING,
LOGAN, MADISON, MARION, MEIGS, MERCER,
MIAMI, MONROE, MONTGOMERY, MORGAN,
MORROW, MUSKINGUM, NOBLE, PAULDING,
PERRY, PICKAWAY, PIKE, PREBLE, PUTNAM,
RICHLAND, ROSS, SCIOTO, SENECA, SHELBY,
TUSCARAWAS, UNION, VAN WERT, VINTON,
WARREN, WASHINGTON, WAYNE, WILLIAMS,
WYANDOT
Special Jurisdictional Note : Hod Carriers and Common Laborers - Heavy, Highway, Sewer,
Waterworks, Utility, Airport, Railroad, Industrial and Building Site, Sewer Plant, Waste Water
Treatment Facilities Construction
Details :
Group 1
Laborer (Construction); Plant Laborer or Yardman, Right-of-way Laborer, Landscape Laborer, Highway
Lighting Worker, Signalization Worker, (Swimming) Pool Construction Laborer, Utility Man, *Bridge Man,
Handyman, Joint Setter, Flagperson, Carpenter Helper, Waterproofing Laborer, Slurry Seal, Seal Coating,
Surface Treatment or Road Mix Laborer, Riprap Laborer & Grouter, Asphalt Laborer, Dump Man (batch
trucks), Guardrail & Fence Installer, Mesh Handler & Placer, Concrete Curing Applicator, Scaffold Erector, Sign
Installer, Hazardous Waste (level D), Diver Helper, Zone Person and Traffic Control.
*Bridge Man will perfomr work as per the October 31, 1949, memorandum on concrete forms, byand between
the United Brotherhood of Caprpenters and Joiners of Americ and the Laborers' International Union of North
America, which states in; "the moving, cleaning, oiling and carrying to the next point of erection, and the
stripping of forms which are not to be re-used, and forms on all flat arch work shall be done by memebers of the
Laborers' International Union of North America."
Group 2
Asphalt Raker, Screwman or Paver, Concrete Puddler, Kettle Man (pipeline), All Machine-Driven Tools (Gas,
Electric, Air), Mason Tender, Brick Paver, Mortar Mixer, Skid Steer, Sheeting & Shoring Person, Surface
Grinder Person, Screedperson, Water Blast, Hand Held Wand, Power Buggy or Power Wheelbarrow, Paint
Striper, Plastic fusing Machine Operator, Rodding Machine Operator, Pug Mill Operator, Operator of All
Vacuum Devices Wet or Dry, Handling of all Pumps 4 inches and under (gas, air or electric), Diver, Form Setter,
Bottom Person, Welder Helper (pipeline), Concrete Saw Person, Cutting with Burning Torch, Pipe Layer, Hand
Spiker (railroad), Underground Person (working in sewer and waterline, cleaning, repairing and reconditioning).
Tunnel Laborer (without air),Caisson, Cofferdam (below 25 feet deep), Air Track and Wagon Drill, Sandblaster
Nozzle Person, Hazardous Waste (level B), ***Lead Abatement, Hazardous Waste (level C)
***Includes the erecting of structures for the removal, including the encapsulation and containment of Lead
abatement process.
Group 3
Blast and Powder Person, Muckers will be defined as shovel men working directly with the miners, Wrencher
(mechanical joints & utility pipeline), Yarner, Top Lander, Hazardous Waste (level A), Concrete Specialist, Curb
Setter and Cutter, Grade Checker, Concrete Crew in Tunnels. Utility pipeline Tappers, Waterline, Caulker,
Signal Person will receive the rate equal to the rate paid the Laborer classification for which the Laborer is
signaling.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579C10069857F?opendocument 2/3
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLocalHevHwy3 Page
Group 4
Miner,Welder, Gunite Nozzle Person
A.) The Watchperson shall be responsible to patrol and maintain a safe traffic zone including but not limited to
barrels, cones, signs, arrow boards, message boards etc.
The responsibility of a watchperson is to see that the equipment, job and office trailer etc. are secure.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579C10069857F?opendocument 3/3
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc329 Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc329
Craft : Laborer Effective Date : 05/01/2016 Last Posted : 04/28/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Laborer $24.36 $6.70 $3.20 $0.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $34.81 $46.99
Group 1
Group 2 $24.51 $6.70 $3.20 $0.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $34.96 $47.22
Group 3 $24.66 $6.70 $3.20 $0.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $35.11 $47.44
Group 4 $24.86 $6.70 $3.20 $0.40 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.15 $0.00 $35.31 $47.74
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852570A50058A7BE?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc329 Page
1 Journeyman to 1 Apprentice then ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, MERCER, PAULDING,
4 to 1 thereafter per project PUTNAM, SHELBY, VAN WERT
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
Group 1
Building Laborer, Carpenter Tender, Flagman, Signal Man, Rigging/Hooking/unhooking of construction
material, utility construction laborer, guardrail erector, fence installer, landscape laborer, laser beam set-up man,
grade checker, power wheelbarrow or power buggy, removal of asbestos, hazardous waste (Levels C & D),
drinking water supplier, warehouse/tool man, safety man, confined space/hole watch attendant, fire watch,
parking attendant, watchman, time/bookkeeper.
Group 2
Vibrators, Cement Finisher Helper, cement Raker, pump hose nozzle man, Asphalt Raker, Tamper & Packer,
Pump Man Under 4'', Discharge, Caisson, Cofferdam, Tunnel, Spiker Railroad (By Hand), Pot Tender, Torch
Man, Demolition, All Machine Driven Tools (Gas, Electric, Air).
Group 3
Plaster Tender, Mortar Mixer, Cylinder, Shaft, Sewer, Water Conduit, Gas, Oil, Pipeline, Except Mainlines,
Sewer Bottom Man, Sewer Pipe Layer, Manhole Builder, Blaster Helper, air track/Wagon Drill Helper, Jack
Hammer, Gunnite Operator, Mucker (Tunnel & Caisson) Free Air, Miner, Sand Blaster, Blaster-Powder Man,
Wagon drill/Operator, The removal of Lead or Toxic and Hazardous Waste materials (Level A & B).
Group 4
Mason Tender, scaffold builder, truck driver with CDL, welder, skid loader, forklift operator and man lifts.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852570A50058A7BE?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc18zone3 Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc18zone3
Craft : Operating Engineer Effective Date : 06/01/2016 Last Posted : 06/01/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Operator $33.84 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $48.34 $65.26
Class 1
Class 2 $32.72 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $47.22 $63.58
Class 3 $32.68 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $47.18 $63.52
Class 4 $31.50 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $46.00 $61.75
Class 5 $26.04 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $40.54 $53.56
Class 6 $34.09 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $48.59 $65.64
Class 7 $34.34 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $48.84 $66.01
Class 8 $34.84 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $49.34 $66.76
Class 9 $35.09 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $49.59 $67.14
Special Calculation Note : Other: Education & Safety
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
For every (3) Operating Engineer Journeymen ADAMS, ALLEN, ASHLAND, ATHENS,
employed by the company ,there may be employed (1) AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN, BUTLER,
Registered Apprentice. An apprenice, while employed CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK, CLERMONT,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579EA00739A8E?opendocument 1/3
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc18zone3 Page
as part of a crew per Article VIII, paragraph 77, will not CLINTON, COSHOCTON, CRAWFORD, DARKE,
be subject to the apprenticeship ratios in this collective DEFIANCE, DELAWARE, FAIRFIELD, FAYETTE,
bargaining agreement. On jobs where maintenance FRANKLIN, FULTON, GALLIA, GREENE,
engineers are to be employed, for every (2) Class 2 GUERNSEY, HAMILTON, HANCOCK, HARDIN,
Mechanics there may be (1) Mechanic Trainee & so HARRISON, HENRY, HIGHLAND, HOCKING,
fourth. HOLMES, JACKSON, JEFFERSON, KNOX,
LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, MADISON,
MARION, MEIGS, MERCER, MIAMI, MONROE,
MONTGOMERY, MORGAN, MORROW,
MUSKINGUM, NOBLE, OTTAWA, PAULDING,
PERRY, PICKAWAY, PIKE, PREBLE, PUTNAM,
RICHLAND, ROSS, SANDUSKY, SCIOTO,
SENECA, SHELBY, STARK, TUSCARAWAS,
UNION, VAN WERT, VINTON, WARREN,
WASHINGTON, WAYNE, WILLIAMS, WYANDOT
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
**Apprentices will receive a 10% increase on top of the percentages listed above provided they are operating
mobile equipment. Mechanic Trainees will receive 10% increase if required to have CDL
Class 1 - Barrier Moving Machine; Boiler Operators or Compressor Operators, when compressor or boiler is
mounted on crane (Piggyback Operation); Boom Trucks (all types); Cableways Cherry Pickers; Combination -
Concrete Mixers & Towers; All Concrete Pumps with Booms; Cranes (all types) Derricks (all types); Draglines
Dredges (dipper, clam or suction) 3-man crew; Elevating Graders or Euclid Loaders; Floating Equipment;
Gradalls; Helicopter Operators; hoisting building materials; Helicopter Winch Operators, Hoisting building
materials; Hoes (All types); Hoists (with two or more drums in use): Hydraulic Gantry (lift system); Laser
Finishing Machines; Lift Slab or Panel Jack Operators; Locomotives (all types); Maintenance Engineers
(Mechanic and/or Welder); Mixers, paving (multiple drum); Mobile Concrete Pumps, with booms, Panelboards,
(all types on site); Pile Drivers; Power Shovels; Prentice Loader; Rail Tamper (with automatic lifting and
aligning device);' Rotary Drills (all) used on caissons for foundations and sub-structure work; Side Booms; Slip
Form Pavers; Straddle Carriers (Building Construction on site); Tug Boats. Horizontal Directional Drill, Rough
Terrain Fork-lift with Winch/Hoist, Laser Screed, and Like equipment;Compact Cranes,track or rubber over
4,000 pound capacity,self-erecting cranes:stationary,track or truck (all configurations) bucket trench machines
(over 24 " wide).
Class 2 - Asphalt Pavers; Bobcat-type and/or skid steer loader with hoe attachment greater than 7000 lbs.
Bulldozers; CMI type Equipment; Endloaders; Hydro Milling Machine; Kolman-type Loaders (Dirt Loading);
Lead Greasemen; Mucking Machines; Pettibone-Rail Equipment; Power Graders; Power Scoops; Power
Scrapers; Push Cats; Vermeer Type Concrete Saw;All rotomills, grinders & planers of all types. Articulating/end
dumps (minus $4.00/hour from Class 2 rate)
Class 3 - A Frames; Air Compressors, Pressurizing Shafts or Tunnels; All Asphalt Rollers; Bobcat-type and/or
skid steer loader with or without attachments; Boilers (15 lbs pressure and over); All concrete Pumps (without
booms with 5 inch system); Fork Lifts (except masonry); Highway Drillers - all types (with integral power);
Hoists (with one drum); House Elevators (except those automatic call button controlled); Man lifts; Mud Jacks;
Pressure Grouting; Pump Operators (installing or operating Well Points or other types of Dewatering Systems);
Pumps (4 inches and over discharge); Railroad Tie Inserter/Remover; Rotator (Lime-Soil Stabilizer);
Submersible Pumps (4 inches and over discharge); Switch & Tie Tampers (without lifting and aligning device);
Trench Machines (24 inches and under); Utility Operators; Material hoist/elevators.
Class 4 - Ballast Re-locator; Backfillers and Tampers; Batch Plant Operators; Bar and Joint Installing Machines;
Bull Floats; Burlap and Curing Machines; Clefplanes; Compressors, on building construction; Concrete
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579EA00739A8E?opendocument 2/3
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc18zone3 Page
Spreader; Conveyors, used for handling building materials; Concrete Mixers, one bag capacity (side loader);
Concrete Mixers, capacity more than one bag; Crushers; Deck Hands; Drum Fireman (in Asphalt Plant); Farm
type tractors pulling attachments; Finishing Machines; Form Trenchers; Generators: Gunite Machines; Hydro-
Seeders; Pavement Breakers (hydraulic or cable); Post Drivers; Post Hole Diggers; Pressure Pumps (over 1/2
inch discharge); Road Widening Trenchers; Rollers (except asphalt); All Concrete pumps (without Boom with 4
inch or smaller systems); Self-Propelled Power Spreaders; Concrete Spreaders; Self-Propelled Sub-graders;
Shotcrete Machines; Tire Repairmen; Tractors, pulling sheepfoot rollers or graders; VAC/ALLS; Vibratory
Compactors, with integral power; Welder Operators.
Class 5 - Boilers (less than 15 lbs. pressure); Inboard/outboard Motor Boat Launches; Light Plant Operators;
Masonry Fork Lifts; Oilers/Helpers; Power Driven Heaters (oil fired); Power Scrubbers; Power Sweepers;
Pumps (under 4 inch discharge); Signalmen, Submersible Pumps (under 4 inch discharge). Directional Drill
Locator and Allen Screed Concrete Paver. Fueling and greasing (plus $3.00), compact cranes; track or rubber
under 4,000 pounds.
Class 6 - Master Mechanic
Class 7 - Boom & Jib 150 - 180 feet
Class 8 - Boom & Jib 180 - 249 feet
Class 9 - Boom & Jib 250 - or over
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579EA00739A8E?opendocument 3/3
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc18hevhwyII Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc18hevhwyII
Craft : Operating Engineer Effective Date : 06/01/2016 Last Posted : 06/01/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Operator $33.84 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $48.34 $65.26
Class 1
Class 2 $33.72 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $48.22 $65.08
Class 3 $32.68 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $47.18 $63.52
Class 4 $31.50 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $46.00 $61.75
Class 5 $26.04 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $40.54 $53.56
Class 6 $34.09 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $48.59 $65.64
Class 7 $34.09 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $48.59 $65.64
Class 8 $34.34 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $48.84 $66.01
Great
Lakes
Floating
Agreement
Class 1 $41.90 $7.41 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $56.15 $77.10
Class 2A $40.40 $7.41 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $54.65 $74.85
Class 2B $40.40 $7.41 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $54.65 $74.85
Class 3 $35.95 $7.41 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $50.20 $68.18
Class 4 $29.90 $7.41 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $44.15 $59.10
Field Mech
Trainee
Class 2
1st year 49.82 $16.86 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $31.36 $39.79
2nd year 59.78 $20.23 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $34.73 $44.84
3rd year 69.73 $23.60 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $38.10 $49.89
4th year 79.73 $26.98 $7.66 $6.00 $0.75 $0.00 $0.00 $0.09 $0.00 $0.00 $41.48 $54.97
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579EA0071D69A?opendocument 1/3
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc18hevhwyII Page
Special Calculation Note : Other: Education & Safety Fund is $0.09 per hour.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
For every (3) Operating Engineer Journeymen ADAMS, ALLEN, ASHLAND, ATHENS,
employed by the company , there may be employed (1) AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN, BUTLER,
Registered Apprentice. An apprentice, while employed CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK, CLERMONT,
as part of a crew per Article VIII paragraph 65, will not CLINTON, COSHOCTON, CRAWFORD, DARKE,
be subject the apprenticeship ratios in this collective DEFIANCE, DELAWARE, FAIRFIELD, FAYETTE,
bargaining agreement. On jobs where maintenance FRANKLIN, FULTON, GALLIA, GREENE,
engineers are to be employed, for every (2) Class 2 GUERNSEY, HAMILTON, HANCOCK, HARDIN,
Mechanics there may be (1) Mechanic Trainee & so HARRISON, HENRY, HIGHLAND, HOCKING,
fourth. Mechanic Trainee rate is a percentage of Class 2 HOLMES, HURON, JACKSON, JEFFERSON,
rate. KNOX, LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, LUCAS,
MADISON, MARION, MEIGS, MERCER, MIAMI,
MONROE, MONTGOMERY, MORGAN, MORROW,
MUSKINGUM, NOBLE, OTTAWA, PAULDING,
PERRY, PICKAWAY, PIKE, PREBLE, PUTNAM,
RICHLAND, ROSS, SANDUSKY, SCIOTO,
SENECA, SHELBY, STARK, TUSCARAWAS,
UNION, VAN WERT, VINTON, WARREN,
WASHINGTON, WAYNE, WILLIAMS, WOOD,
WYANDOT
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
**Apprentices will receive a 10% increase on top of the percentages listed above provided they are operating
mobile equipment. Mechanic Trainees will receive 10% increase if they are required to have CDL.
Class 1 - Air Compressors on Steel Erection; Barrier Moving Machine; Boiler Operators, on Compressors or
Generators, when mounted on a rig: Cableways, Combination Concrete mixers & Towers; Concrete Pumps;
Concrete Plants ( over 4 yd capacity); Cranes (all types, including Boom Trucks, Cherry Pickers); Derricks;
Draglines, Dredgers (dipper, clam or suction); Elevating Graders or Euclid Loaders; Floating Equipment (all
types); Gradalls, Helicopter Crew (Operator- hoist or winch); Hoes (all types); Hoisting Engines, on shaft or
tunnel work; Hydraulic Gantry (lifting system); Industrial - Type Tractors; Jet Engine Dryers (D8 or D9), Diesel
Tractors; Locomotives (standard gage); Maintenance Operators (class A); Mixers, paving (single or double
drum); Mucking Machines; Multiple Scrapers; Piledriving Machines (all types); Power Shovels, Prentice
Loader; Quad 9 (double pusher); Rail Tamper (with automatic lifting and aligning device); Refrigerating
Machines (freezer operation); Side Booms; Slip Form Pavers; Tower Dericks; Tree Shredders; Truck Mounted
Concrete Pumps; Tug Boats; Tunnel Machines and /or Mining Machines; Wheel Excavators. Rough Terrain
Fork-lift with Winch/Hoist; Compact Cranes, track rubber over 4,000 pound capacity, self-erecting cranes;
stationary, track or truck (all configurations) Bucket trench machines (over 24 inches wide).
Class 2 - Asphalt Pavers; Automatic Subgrade Machines, self-propelled (CMI-type); Bobcat-type and /or skid
steer loader with hoe attachment greater than 7000 lbs.; Boring Machine Operators (more than 48 inches);
Bulldozers; Endloaders; Hydro Milling Machine; Kolman-type Loaders (production type-dirt); Lead
Greasemen; Maintenance Operators, Class B (Portage and Summit Counties only); Pettibone-Rail Equipment;
Power Graders; Power Scrapers; Push Cats; Lighting and Traffic Signal Installation Equipment includes all
groups or classifications; Trench Machines (24inch wide and under); Vermeer Type Concrete saw. Material
Transfer Equipment (Shuttle buggy) Asphalt; All rotomills,grinders and planers of all types. Horizontal
Directional Drill (Over 50,000 ft.lbs.thrust and over)
Class 3 - A-Frames; Air Compressors, on tunnel work (low Pressure); Asphalt Plant Engineers; Bobcat-type
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579EA0071D69A?opendocument 2/3
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc18hevhwyII Page
and/or skid steer loader with or without attachments; Power Boilers (15 lbs pressure and over); Highway Drills
(all types); Rollers, asphalt; Pump Operators (installing or operating well Points); Pumps (4 inch and over
discharge); Railroad Tie Inserter/Remover; Rotator (lime-soil Stabilizer), Switch & Tie Tampers (without lifting
and aligning device); Locomotives (narrow gage); Mixers, concrete (more than one bag capacity); Mixers, one
bag capacity (side loader); Utilities Operators, (small equipment); Welding Machines; Material hoist/elevators.
Articulating/straight bed end dumps if assigned (minus $4.00 per hour).
Class 4 -Ballast Re-locator; Backfillers, Batch Plants; Bar and Joint Installing Machines; Boring Machine
Operators (48 inch or less); Bull Floats; Burlap and Curing Machines; Concrete Plants (capacity 4 yd and
under); Conveyors (highway); Concrete Saws (multiple); Crushers; Deckhands; Farm type tractors, with
attachments (highway), except masonry; Finishing Machines; Firemen, Floating Equipment (all types); Fork
Lifts (highway); Form Trenchers; Hydro Hammers; Hydro Seeders; Pavement Breakers; Plant Mixers; Post
Drivers; Post Hole Diggers (power auger); Power Brush Burners; Power Form Handling Equipment; Road
Widening Trenchers; Rollers (brick, grade, macadam); Self-Propelled Power Spreaders; Self-Propelled Sub-
Graders; Tractors, pulling sheepsfoot rollers or graders; Steam Firemen; Vibratory Compactors, with integral
power.
Class 5 - Compressors (portable, Sewer, Heavy and Highway); Generators; Inboard-Outboard Motor Boat
Launches; Masonry Fork Lifts; Oilers/Helpers; Power Driven Heaters; Power Scrubbers; Power Sweepers;
Pumps (under 4 inch discharge); Signalmen; Drum Fireman (in Asphalt Plant); Oil Heaters (Asphalt Plant); Tire
Repairmen; VAC/ALLS; Fueling and greasing (plus $3.00), compact cranes: track or rubber under 4,000
pounds.
Class 6 - Master Mechanic
Class 7 - Crane Boom 150 ft - 180 ft
Class 8 - Crane Boom over 180 ft .
GREAT LAKES FLOATING AGREEMENT:
Class 1 - Diver,Wet Tender, Engineer, (Hyd.Dredge), Craft Foreman ( Master Mechanic)
Class 2A - Crane Backhoe Operator,Mechanic/Welder,Assistant Engineer (Hyd. Dredge), Leverman (Hyd
Dredge) Diver Tender, Tug Operator ( Tug 70T and over)
Class 2B - Friction Crane, Lattice Boom or any Crane Certification.
Class 3 - Deck Equipment Operator, (Machineryman), Maint. of Crane, Tug/Launch Operator, Loader/Dozer on
Barge, Deck Machinery, Maintenance of Crane ( over 50T capacity), or Backhoe (115,000lbs or more)
Loaders/Dozer and like equipment on Barge, Breakwater Wall, Slip/Dock Scow.
Class4 - Deck Equipment Operator, (Machineryman/Fireman)(4 equipment Units or more), Deck Hand, Tug
Engineer, Crane Maintenance, 50T and under/Backhoe 115,000lbs or less, Assistant Tug Operator, add off Road
Truck.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852579EA0071D69A?opendocument 3/3
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc1020Com Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc1020Com
Craft : Painter Effective Date : 05/25/2016 Last Posted : 05/25/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Painter Brush $20.98 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $32.98 $43.47
Roll
Spray Water $20.98 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $32.98 $43.47
Borne
Products
Sandblaster $21.73 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $33.73 $44.60
Pressure
Cleaning and
Spray of
alkyd,
epoxy's, and
petroleum
base
products
Wallcovering $21.43 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $33.43 $44.14
Lead $25.58 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $37.58 $50.37
Abatement
Special Calculation Note : APPRENTICE PAY BASED ON % OF EACH CLASSIFICATION ABOVE
PLUS FULL FRINGES.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256FEE0051D262?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc1020Com Page
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
1 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, CHAMPAIGN, DEFIANCE,
HARDIN, LOGAN, MERCER, PAULDING,
PUTNAM, SHELBY, VAN WERT, WILLIAMS
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
All surfaces 40 feet or over where material is applied to or labor performed on above the ground level (exterior),
floor level (interior), $0.50 per hour shall be applied to the prevailing rate of the classification involved.
Journeymen and apprentices applying Coal Tar products shall have $1.00 per hour added to the prevailing rate
of the classification involved.
Journeymen and apprentices working with a spray painter as a rigger, picker, or blow down man shall receive
spray painter wages.
Swing stage, Chair, Spiders and Cherry Pickers shall have $.25 added to the prevailing rate of the classification
involved.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256FEE0051D262?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc1020Com Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc1020Com
Craft : Drywall Finisher Effective Date : 05/25/2016 Last Posted : 05/25/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Painter $22.53 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $34.53 $45.80
Drywall
Finisher
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
1 Journeymen employed to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, CHAMPAIGN, DEFIANCE,
HARDIN, LOGAN, MERCER, PAULDING,
PUTNAM, SHELBY, VAN WERT, WILLIAMS
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
All surfaces 40 feet or over where material is applied to or labor performed on above the ground level (exterior),
floor level (interior), $0.50 per hour shall be applied to the prevailing rate of the classification involved.
Swing stage, Chair, Spiders and Cherry Pickers shall have $0.25 added to the prevailing rate of the classification
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525771C00653E4F?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc1020Com Page
involved.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525771C00653E4F?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc1020Ind Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc1020Ind
Craft : Painter Effective Date : 05/25/2016 Last Posted : 05/25/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Painter $23.83 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $35.83 $47.75
Brush Roll
Spray $24.58 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $36.58 $48.87
Painter
Sandblasting
Pressure
Cleaning
Refinery
Wall $21.43 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $33.43 $44.14
Coverings
Lead $25.58 $6.50 $5.22 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $37.58 $50.37
Abatement
(plus .75
premium
when
blasting)
6th 6 months
7th 6 months
8th 6 months
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256FEB004E0E1C?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc1020Ind Page
Special Calculation Note : APPRENTIC PAY BASED ON % OF EACH CLASSIFICATION ABOVE
PLUS FULL FRINGES.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
1 Journeymen employed to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, CHAMPAIGN, DEFIANCE,
HARDIN, LOGAN, MERCER, PAULDING,
PUTNAM, SHELBY, VAN WERT, WILLIAMS
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
All surfaces 40 feet or over where material is applied to or labor performed on above the ground level (exterior),
floor level (interior), $0.50 per hour shall be applied to the prevailing rate of the classification involved.
Journeymen and apprentices applying Coal Tar products shall have $1.00 per hour added to the prevailing rate
of the classification involved.
Journeymen and apprentices working with a spray painter as a rigger, picker, or blow down man shall receive
spray painter wages.
Swing stage, Chair, Spiders and Cherry Pickers shall be paid $0.25 added to the prevailing rateof the
classification involved.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256FEB004E0E1C?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCNO1-2015fbLoc639 Page
Change # : LCNO1-2015fbLoc639
Craft : Painter Effective Date : 06/10/2015 Last Posted : 06/10/2015
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Painter Metal
Finisher/Helpers
Top Helper $19.09 $3.65 $0.00 $0.00 $0.66 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $23.40 $32.94
Class A
Top Helper $19.09 $3.65 $0.65 $0.00 $1.03 $0.00 $0.37 $0.00 $0.00 $24.79 $34.33
Class B
Top Helper $19.09 $3.65 $1.00 $0.00 $1.76 $0.00 $0.37 $0.00 $0.00 $25.87 $35.41
Class C
Helper Class A $14.69 $3.65 $0.00 $0.00 $0.51 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $18.85 $26.19
Helper Class B $14.69 $3.65 $0.65 $0.00 $0.79 $0.00 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $20.06 $27.40
Helper Class C $14.69 $3.65 $1.00 $0.00 $1.64 $0.00 $0.28 $0.00 $0.00 $21.26 $28.60
New Hire 90 $11.00 $3.65 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $14.65 $20.15
Days
Special Calculation Note : Other is Sick and Personal Time
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
ADAMS, ALLEN, ASHLAND, ASHTABULA,
ATHENS, AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN,
BUTLER, CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK,
CLERMONT, CLINTON, COLUMBIANA,
COSHOCTON, CRAWFORD, CUYAHOGA, DARKE,
DEFIANCE, DELAWARE, ERIE, FAIRFIELD,
FAYETTE, FRANKLIN, FULTON, GALLIA,
GEAUGA, GREENE, GUERNSEY, HAMILTON,
HANCOCK, HARDIN, HARRISON, HENRY,
HIGHLAND, HOCKING, HOLMES, HURON,
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257E5F00500355?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCNO1-2015fbLoc639 Page
JACKSON, JEFFERSON, KNOX, LAKE,
LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, LORAIN, LUCAS,
MADISON, MAHONING, MARION, MEDINA,
MEIGS, MERCER, MIAMI, MONROE,
MONTGOMERY, MORGAN, MORROW,
MUSKINGUM, NOBLE, OTTAWA, PAULDING,
PERRY, PICKAWAY, PIKE, PORTAGE, PREBLE,
PUTNAM, RICHLAND, ROSS, SANDUSKY,
SCIOTO, SENECA, SHELBY, STARK, SUMMIT,
TRUMBULL, TUSCARAWAS, UNION, VAN WERT,
VINTON, WARREN, WASHINGTON, WAYNE,
WILLIAMS, WOOD, WYANDOT
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
Top Helper: Shall perform the responsibilities of a Helper and be responsible for the setup, break down, safety
and quality of the company's product.
Helper : Shall be responsible for performing tasks in refinishing, compliance with safety procedures, setting up
and breaking down job sites, scaffolding and swing stages and preparing surfaces for refinishing including but
not limited to, masking and stripping and cleaning, oxidizing, polishing and scratch removal on various surfaces
.
Class A Workers: Less than 1 Year of Service.
Class B Workers: More than 1 and less than 8 Years of Service.
Class C Workers: More than 8 Years of Service.
Metal Polisher Scope of Work: Polishing, buffing, stripping, coloring, lacquering, spraying, cleaning and
maintenance of ornamental and architectural metals, iron, bronze, nickel, aluminum and stainless steel and in
mental specialty work, various stone finishes, stone specialty work and any other work pertaining to the
finishing of metal, stones, woods, and any window washing/cleaning done in conjunction with this work, using
chemicals, solvents, coatings and hand applied lacquer thinner, removing scratches from mirrow finished metals,
burnishing of bronze, statuary finishes on exterior and interior surfaces and the use of all tools required to
perform such work, including but not limited to polishes, spray equipment and scaffolding.
Swing State Rate: All work on scaffold 4 sections or higher, including any boom lifts and swing stage scaffolds
including the rigging and derigging of hanging/suspended swing stage systems and rappelling/bolson chair
work, ADD $1.50 per hour.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257E5F00500355?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc639 Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc639
Craft : Painter Effective Date : 08/03/2016 Last Posted : 08/03/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Painter Sign $21.25 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.57 $0.00 $0.00 $23.29 $33.92
Journeyman
Tech/Team
Leader
Class A
Painter Sign $21.25 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.41 $0.00 $0.57 $0.00 $0.00 $23.70 $34.32
Journeyman
Tech/Team
Leader
Class B
Painter Sign $21.25 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.82 $0.00 $0.57 $0.00 $0.00 $24.11 $34.74
Journeyman
Tech/Team
Leader
Class C
Painter Sign $21.25 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $1.23 $0.00 $0.57 $0.00 $0.00 $24.52 $35.14
Journeyman
Tech/Team
Leader
Class D
Sign $20.98 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.56 $0.00 $0.00 $23.01 $33.50
Journeyman
Class A
Sign $20.98 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.40 $0.00 $0.56 $0.00 $0.00 $23.41 $33.90
Journeyman
Class B
Sign $20.98 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.81 $0.00 $0.56 $0.00 $0.00 $23.82 $34.31
Journeyman
Class C
Sign $20.98 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $1.21 $0.00 $0.56 $0.00 $0.00 $24.22 $34.71
Journeyman
Class D
Tech Sign $15.90 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.43 $0.00 $0.00 $17.80 $25.75
Fabrication/
Erector
Class A
Tech Sign $15.90 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.31 $0.00 $0.43 $0.00 $0.00 $18.11 $26.06
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285258003005752C2?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc639 Page
Fabrication/
Erector
Class B
Tech Sign $15.90 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.61 $0.00 $0.43 $0.00 $0.00 $18.41 $26.36
Fabrication/
Erector
Class C
Tech Sign $15.90 $1.33 $0.14 $0.00 $0.92 $0.00 $0.43 $0.00 $0.00 $18.72 $26.67
Fabrication/
Erector
Class D
Special Calculation Note : Other is for paid holidays.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
ADAMS, ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, BROWN, BUTLER,
CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK, CLERMONT,
CLINTON, COLUMBIANA, COSHOCTON,
CRAWFORD, DARKE, DEFIANCE, DELAWARE,
ERIE, FAIRFIELD, FAYETTE, FRANKLIN,
FULTON, GREENE, HAMILTON, HANCOCK,
HARDIN, HENRY, HIGHLAND, HOLMES, HURON,
JACKSON, KNOX, LICKING, LOGAN, LORAIN,
LUCAS, MADISON, MAHONING, MARION,
MERCER, MIAMI, MONTGOMERY, MORROW,
MUSKINGUM, OTTAWA, PAULDING, PERRY,
PICKAWAY, PIKE, PREBLE, PUTNAM, ROSS,
SANDUSKY, SCIOTO, SENECA, SHELBY, STARK,
TRUMBULL, TUSCARAWAS, UNION, VAN WERT,
WARREN, WAYNE, WILLIAMS, WOOD,
WYANDOT
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
Class A: less that 1 year.
Class B: 1-3 years.
Class C; 3-10 years.
Class D: More than 10 years.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285258003005752C2?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN01-2016fbLoc886 Page
Change # : CN01-2016fbLoc886
Craft : Plasterer Effective Date : 08/03/2016 Last Posted : 08/03/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Plasterer $27.81 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $45.04 $58.94
Drywall $25.80 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $43.03 $55.93
Drywall
Apprentice
Drywall $12.90 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $30.13 $36.58
50%
Drywall r $14.19 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $31.42 $38.52
55%
Drywall $15.48 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $32.71 $40.45
60%
Drywall $18.06 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $35.29 $44.32
70%
Drywall $19.35 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $36.58 $46.26
75%
Drywall $20.64 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $37.87 $48.19
80%
Drywall $23.22 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $40.45 $52.06
90%
Drywall $24.51 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $41.74 $54.00
95%
Drywall $18.06 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $35.29 $44.32
Shophand
Plasterer 70.00 $19.47 $7.30 $5.60 $0.30 $0.00 $4.00 $0.03 $0.00 $0.00 $36.70 $46.43
Shophand
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
1 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice for 1st Apprentice only ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, DEFIANCE, ERIE, FULTON,
Then 3 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice thereafter HANCOCK, HARDIN, HENRY, HURON, LOGAN,
LUCAS, MERCER, OTTAWA, PAULDING,
PUTNAM, SANDUSKY, SENECA, VAN WERT,
WILLIAMS, WOOD
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
****Improvers receive no fringe benefits for the first 90 days. Then $3.75 Health & Welfare
Workers on Swing Stage will be paid ($.25) per hour above journeyman rate.
Nozzelmen or Operators of the Plastering Browning Gun shall receive ($.75) per hour above journeyman rate.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256EF300504F16?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc776 Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc776
Craft : Plumber/Pipefitter Effective Date : 10/05/2016 Last Posted : 10/05/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Plumber $34.00 $9.86 $7.06 $0.92 $0.00 $4.50 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $56.34 $73.34
Pipefitter
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
2 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, HARDIN, LOGAN, MERCER,
SHELBY, VAN WERT
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
$0.14 under "Other" is Labor Management Corporation Committee.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256609005D73A3?opendocument 1/1
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc75 Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc75
Craft : Roofer Effective Date : 05/20/2016 Last Posted : 05/20/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Roofer $23.08 $7.68 $7.28 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $38.68 $50.22
Slate and $23.30 $7.68 $7.28 $0.64 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $38.90 $50.55
Tile
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
3 Journeymen to 2 Apprentices ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, CLARK, CLINTON, DARKE,
GREENE, MERCER, MIAMI, MONTGOMERY,
PREBLE, SHELBY, VAN WERT
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852571790051861D?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc75 Page
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852571790051861D?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCR01-2016fbLoc24(Day) Page
Change # : LCR01-2016fbLoc24(Day)
Craft : Sheet Metal Worker Effective Date : 11/09/2016 Last Posted : 11/09/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Sheet Metal $26.54 $7.91 $12.65 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $47.95 $61.22
Worker
5th Year B 80.00 $21.23 $7.67 $10.12 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $39.87 $50.49
5th Year A 75.00 $19.91 $7.61 $9.49 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $37.86 $47.81
4th Year B 70.00 $18.58 $7.55 $8.85 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $35.83 $45.12
4th Year A 65.00 $17.25 $7.50 $8.22 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $33.82 $42.45
3rd year B 60.00 $15.92 $7.44 $7.59 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $31.80 $39.77
3rd Year A 55.00 $14.60 $7.38 $6.96 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $29.79 $37.09
2 Year B 52.00 $13.80 $7.34 $6.58 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $28.57 $35.47
2 Year A 50.00 $13.27 $7.32 $6.33 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $27.77 $34.41
Probationary 47.50 $12.61 $7.29 $6.01 $0.85 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $26.76 $33.06
1 Year
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
1 Journeyman to 1 Apprentice then, ALLEN, AUGLAIZE, BUTLER, CHAMPAIGN,
1 Apprentice for every 2 Journeymen thereafter CLARK, CLINTON, DARKE, GREENE, HARDIN,
LOGAN, MERCER, MIAMI, MONTGOMERY,
PREBLE, SHELBY, VAN WERT, WARREN,
WYANDOT
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525660A003CB72B?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCR01-2016fbLoc24(Day) Page
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B8007069328525660A003CB72B?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN03-2016fbLoc669 Page
Change # : LCN03-2016fbLoc669
Craft : Sprinkler Fitter Effective Date : 08/17/2016 Last Posted : 09/08/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Sprinkler $35.08 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $4.72 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $55.07 $72.61
Fitter
Indentured
prior to
April 2010
45% $15.79 $7.45 $0.00 $0.45 $0.00 $0.69 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $24.38 $32.28
50% $17.54 $7.45 $0.00 $0.45 $0.00 $0.74 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $26.18 $34.95
55% $19.29 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $0.53 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $35.09 $44.74
60% $21.05 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $0.58 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $36.90 $47.42
65% $22.80 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $1.13 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $39.20 $50.60
70% $24.56 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $1.18 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $41.01 $53.29
75% $26.31 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $1.23 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $42.81 $55.96
80% $28.06 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $1.28 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $44.61 $58.64
85% $29.82 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $1.32 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $46.41 $61.32
90% $31.57 $8.77 $6.05 $0.45 $0.00 $1.37 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $48.21 $64.00
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852573300068D774?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN03-2016fbLoc669 Page
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
note ) :
1 Journeyman to 1 Apprentice ADAMS, ALLEN, ASHLAND, ASHTABULA,
ATHENS, AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN,
BUTLER, CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK,
CLERMONT, CLINTON, COLUMBIANA,
COSHOCTON, CRAWFORD, DARKE, DEFIANCE,
DELAWARE, ERIE, FAIRFIELD, FAYETTE,
FRANKLIN, FULTON, GALLIA, GREENE,
GUERNSEY, HAMILTON, HANCOCK, HARDIN,
HARRISON, HENRY, HIGHLAND, HOCKING,
HOLMES, HURON, JACKSON, JEFFERSON,
KNOX, LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, LUCAS,
MADISON, MAHONING, MARION, MEDINA,
MEIGS, MERCER, MIAMI, MONROE,
MONTGOMERY, MORGAN, MORROW,
MUSKINGUM, NOBLE, OTTAWA, PAULDING,
PERRY, PICKAWAY, PIKE, PORTAGE, PREBLE,
PUTNAM, RICHLAND, ROSS, SANDUSKY,
SCIOTO, SENECA, SHELBY, STARK, SUMMIT,
TRUMBULL, TUSCARAWAS, UNION, VAN WERT,
VINTON, WARREN, WASHINGTON, WAYNE,
WILLIAMS, WOOD, WYANDOT
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
Sprinkler Fitter work shall consist of the installation,dismantling,maintenance,repairs,adjustments,and
corrections of all fire protection and fire control systems including the unloading,handling by hand,power
equipment and installation of all piping or tubing,appurtenances and equipment pertaining thereto,including both
overhead and underground water mains,fire hydrants and hydrant mains,standpipes and hose connections to
sprinkler systems used in connection with sprinkler and alarm systems. Also all tanks and pumps connected
thereto,also included shall be CO-2 and Cardox Systems, Dry Chemical Systems,Foam Systems and all other
fire protection systems.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852573300068D774?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCON1-2015fbBldgHevHwy Page
Change # : LCON1-2015fbBldgHevHwy
Craft : Truck Driver Effective Date : 05/01/2015 Last Posted : 03/31/2015
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Truck $25.28 $6.81 $6.70 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $38.99 $51.63
Driver
CLASS 1 4
wheel
service,
dump, and
batch
trucks, Oil
Distributor
- Asphalt
Distributor-
Tandems
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257E19004BBE71?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCON1-2015fbBldgHevHwy Page
note ) :
3 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ADAMS, ALLEN, ASHLAND, ASHTABULA,
per company/project ATHENS, AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN,
BUTLER, CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK,
CLERMONT, CLINTON, COLUMBIANA,
COSHOCTON, CRAWFORD, DARKE, DEFIANCE,
DELAWARE, ERIE, FAIRFIELD, FAYETTE,
FRANKLIN, FULTON, GALLIA, GREENE,
GUERNSEY, HAMILTON, HANCOCK, HARDIN,
HARRISON, HENRY, HIGHLAND, HOCKING,
HOLMES, HURON, JACKSON, JEFFERSON,
KNOX, LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, LORAIN,
LUCAS, MADISON, MAHONING, MARION,
MEDINA, MEIGS, MERCER, MIAMI, MONROE,
MONTGOMERY, MORGAN, MORROW,
MUSKINGUM, NOBLE, OTTAWA, PAULDING,
PERRY, PICKAWAY, PIKE, PORTAGE, PREBLE,
PUTNAM, RICHLAND, ROSS, SANDUSKY,
SCIOTO, SENECA, SHELBY, STARK, SUMMIT,
TRUMBULL, TUSCARAWAS, UNION, VAN WERT,
VINTON, WARREN, WASHINGTON, WAYNE,
WILLIAMS, WOOD, WYANDOT
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
** Asphalt - Oil spray bar man when operating from cab shall receive $0.20 cents per hour above their Basic
Hourly Rate.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285257E19004BBE71?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN1-2015-fbBldgHevHwy Page
Change # : CN1-2015-fbBldgHevHwy
Craft : Truck Driver Effective Date : 05/01/2015 Last Posted : 03/31/2015
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Truck Driver CLASS 2 $25.70 $6.81 $6.70 $0.20 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $39.41 $52.26
Tractor Trailer-Semi
Tractor Trucks-Pole
Trailers-Ready Mix
Trucks-Fuel Trucks-
Asphalt-Oil Spray bar
men- 5 Axle & Over -
Belly Dumps-End
Dumps-Articulated
Dump Trucks- Low
boys-Heavy duty
Equipment(irrespective
of load carried) when
used exclusively for
transportation-Truck
Mechanics (when
needed)
Special Calculation Note : No special calculations for this skilled craft wage rate are required at this
time.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852573140053CFF2?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled CN1-2015-fbBldgHevHwy Page
note ) :
3 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ADAMS, ALLEN, ASHLAND, ASHTABULA,
per company/project ATHENS, AUGLAIZE, BELMONT, BROWN,
BUTLER, CARROLL, CHAMPAIGN, CLARK,
CLERMONT, CLINTON, COLUMBIANA,
COSHOCTON, CRAWFORD, DARKE, DEFIANCE,
DELAWARE, ERIE, FAIRFIELD, FAYETTE,
FRANKLIN, FULTON, GALLIA, GREENE,
GUERNSEY, HAMILTON, HANCOCK, HARDIN,
HARRISON, HENRY, HIGHLAND, HOCKING,
HOLMES, HURON, JACKSON, JEFFERSON,
KNOX, LAWRENCE, LICKING, LOGAN, LORAIN,
LUCAS, MADISON, MAHONING, MARION,
MEDINA, MEIGS, MERCER, MIAMI, MONROE,
MONTGOMERY, MORGAN, MORROW,
MUSKINGUM, NOBLE, OTTAWA, PAULDING,
PERRY, PICKAWAY, PIKE, PORTAGE, PREBLE,
PUTNAM, RICHLAND, ROSS, SANDUSKY,
SCIOTO, SENECA, SHELBY, STARK, SUMMIT,
TRUMBULL, TUSCARAWAS, UNION, VAN WERT,
VINTON, WARREN, WASHINGTON, WAYNE,
WILLIAMS, WOOD, WYANDOT
Special Jurisdictional Note :
Details :
** Asphalt - Oil spray bar man when operating from cab shall receive $0.20 cents per hour above their Basic
Hourly Rate.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B800706932852573140053CFF2?opendocument 2/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc290 Page
Change # : LCN01-2016fbLoc290
Craft : Ironworker Effective Date : 06/01/2016 Last Posted : 06/01/2016
BHR Fr inge Benefit Payments Ir r evocable Total Over time
Fund PWR Rate
H&W Pension App Vac. Annuity Other LECET MISC
Tr. (*) (*)
Classification
Ironworker $27.00 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $48.18 $61.68
Structural
Welder $27.00 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $48.18 $61.68
Fence $27.00 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $48.18 $61.68
Erector
Reinforcing $27.00 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $48.18 $61.68
Rods
Machinery $27.00 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $48.18 $61.68
Mover
Sheeter $27.00 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $48.18 $61.68
Metal $27.00 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $48.18 $61.68
Building
Erector
Rigger & $27.00 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $48.18 $61.68
Erector
1st Year 65.00 $17.55 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $38.73 $47.51
Rodman
2nd Year 80.00 $21.60 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $42.78 $53.58
Rodman
3rd Year 90.00 $24.30 $7.10 $9.50 $0.45 $0.00 $3.88 $0.25 $0.00 $0.00 $45.48 $57.63
Rodman
Special Calculation Note : Other is for Industry Fund.
Ratio : Jurisdiction ( * denotes special jurisdictional
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256D3300508C75?opendocument 1/2
12/28/2016 PW Rate Skilled LCN01-2016fbLoc290 Page
note ) :
3 Journeymen to 1 Apprentice ALLEN*, AUGLAIZE, BUTLER*, CHAMPAIGN*,
CLARK, CLINTON, DARKE, FAYETTE*, GREENE,
HARDIN*, HIGHLAND*, LOGAN*, MADISON*,
MERCER*, MIAMI, MONTGOMERY, PREBLE,
SHELBY, VAN WERT*, WARREN*
Special Jurisdictional Note : Allen County Twps included are: Auglaize, Perry, Shawnee, Amanda,
Spencer, Marion, Sugar Creek, American, Bath, Jackson. Butler County Twps included are: Milford,
Wayne, Madison, Lemon. Champaign Cnty Twps included are: Union, Urbana, Jackson, Concord,
Salem, Mad River, Johnson, Harrison, Adams. Fayette County Twps included are: Green, Jasper,
Concord, Jefferson. Hardin County Twps included are: Round Head, Marion, Liberty. Highland County
Twps included are: Fairfield, Penn, Union, Marshall, Liberty, Paint, Brush Creek. Logan County Twps
included are: Richland, Stokes, Bloomfield, Washington, Harrison, McArthur, Lake, Liberty, Pleasant,
Miami. Madison County Twps included are: Stokes. Mercer County Twps included are: Dublin,
Washington, Jefferson, Recovery, Gibson, Union, Liberty, Butler, Granville, Center, Hopewell, Franklin,
Marion. VanWert County Twps included are: Jennings. Warren County Twps included are: Franklin,
Clear Creek, Turtle Creek, Wayne, Massie, Washington, Salem, Union.
Details :
Structural Iron Work but not limited to:field fabrication, all loading to and including the
erecting,rigging,assembly,dismantling, placing, temporary and permanent securing by any means of all
structural iron,steel,ornamental lead,bronze,brass,copper,aluminum,glass all ferrous and non ferrous metal and
composite material, precast prestressed and post-stressed concrete structures. Bridges and bridge rails,bridge
viaducts,bucks bulkheads,bumper and bumper post,canopies and unistrut canopies,corrugated ferrous and non
ferrous sheets when attached to steel frames,columns,beams,bar-joists,trusses,grinders,roof decking,electrical
supports,elevator cars,elevator fronts and enclosures,erection of steel towers,flag poles, gymnasium
equipment,stadium and arena seating,jail cell work,jail cell beds,benches,bunks,chairs,tables,mirrors,jail cell
access doors,rigging and installation of machinery and equipment(erecting,aligning,anchoring and dismantling,
erection and dismantling of tower cranes,derrick monorail systems, Chicago booms,overhead
cranes,gantries,material and personnel hoists,tanks,hoppers and conveyors. All pre-engineered metal buildings
and their entirety including siding,roofing, gutters, downspouts and erection of all.
Ornamental Iron Work but not limited to:all work in connection with field fabrication,handling including
loading/off loading,sorting,cutting,fastening,anchoring,bending,hoisting,placing,burning,welding,and
tying,dismantling of all materials used in miscellaneous iron or steel, for stairs,hand railings,rolling doors,
rolling gates,rolling shutters,fence,windows,curtain wall,erection and welding of all metal, sash,architectural and
ornamental treatments, but not necessarily limited to all sizes and types of ornamental,steel
iron,lead,bronze,brass,copper,aluminum,all ferrous and non ferrous metals and composite materials
.
Fence Erector Iron Worker but not limited to: All work in connection with the field fabrication and erection of
chain link fence,which includes but not limited to the loading and of the fence fabric and posts also the
installation of the above.
http://198.234.41.198/w3/Webwh.nsf/$docUniqIDAll/852565B80070693285256D3300508C75?opendocument 2/2
Project No. WSU-160027
Agricultural Education and Water Quality Building
Wright State University, Lake Campus
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Project information.
2. Work covered by Contract Documents.
3. Work by Owner.
4. Work under separate contracts.
5. Future work.
6. Owner-furnished products.
7. Access to site.
8. Coordination with occupants.
9. Work restrictions.
10. Specification and Drawing conventions.
11. Miscellaneous provisions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures
governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
A. Project Identification: Project Number WSU-160027, Agricultural Education and Water Quality
Building
1. Project Location: Wright State University, Lake Campus, 7600 Lake Campus Drive,
Celina, Ohio 45822
1. Owner's Representative:
Mr. Robert Thompson
Architect
Wright State University,
2455 Executive Blvd., Sutie 11
Fairborn, Ohio 45324
Ph: (937) 775-2035
Fax: (937) 775-3513
Rob.thompson@wright.edu
C. A/E:
SPGB Architects, LLC
Ms. Michelle Shumaker, AIA
4333-B Tuller Road
Dublin, Ohio 43017
Ph: (614) 771-8963
Fax: (614) 522-6763
mshumaker@spgbarch.com
D. A/E's Consultants: The A/E has retained the following design professionals who have prepared
designated portions of the Contract Documents:
1. Civil Site Engineering
Access Engineering Solutions
Nancy Tobe, PE
1200 Irmscher Blvd, Suite B
Celina, Ohio 45822
Ph: (419) 586-1430
Fax: (419) 586-4833
nkt@accessengllc.com
2. Landscaping
Bassett Associates
Pat Beam, RLA, ASLA, CLARB
4010 Ada Road
Lima, Ohio 45801
Ph: (419) 221-0181
Fax: (419) 221-0743
pjbeam@bassettassociates.com
3. Structural Engineering
GOP Limited
Doug Crawford, PE
644 Linn Street, Suite 936
Cincinnati, Ohio 45203
Ph: (513) 621-7073
Fax: (513) 621-0434
dcrawford@gopltd.com
A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:
1. The Project is to build a new 7,589 square foot one story building on a green field to the
east of Wright State University Lake Campus. The work includes site grading,
landscaping, masonry walls (brick and CMU), aluminum storefront, hollow metal and
wood doors, door hardware, cold form metal stud framing, gypsum board walls, lay-in
acoustical ceilings, resilient flooring and accessories, ceramic wall and floor tile, wall
base, carpet, painting, laboratory metal casework, fume hood, fire protection, HVAC, and
electrical, and other Work indicated in the Contract Documents.
B. Type of Contract:
A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering
with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this
Contract with work performed by Owner.
B. Subsequent Work: Owner will perform the following work using either their staff or third-party
contractors. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory
Work under this Contract (unless otherwise noted).
A. The Contract Documents include requirements that will allow Owner to carry out future work
following completion of this Project; provide for the following future work:
1. Technology infrastructure for distance learning, including but not limited to projectors,
cameras and sound system components.
A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling,
storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services
connections.
B. Owner-Furnished Products:
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during
construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform
work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb
portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises
clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times.
Do not use these areas for parking or for storage of materials.
1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of
7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.
3. Utility shut downs to be scheduled after hours 11:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m. or weekends as
coordinated with the Owner.
D. Restricted Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site
is not permitted.
E. Music: Use of radios, tape decks, compact disk players and similar devices are not permitted on
University property.
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.
C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are
described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to
identify materials and products:
A. Additional Milestone: The milestone dates are in addition to the mile stones located in
Document 00 52 00 “Agreement Form” and are as follows:
Scope Item Disciplinary Responsibility
Owner General Plumbing and HVAC Electrical
(Architecture) Fire Protection
Laboratory Casework
Utility Rough‐In Layout in the Field Provide
Utility Space Framing Casework Utility Cores Provide
Piping Clips to Utility Racks Provide
Conduit Clips to Utility Racks Provide
Laboratory Casework Provide
Adjustable Laboratory Shelving Provide
Cabinet & Shelving Accommodations for Piping,
Provide
Conduit & Surface Mtd. Raceways
Countertops Provide
Sinks & Carriages Provide
Sink Outlets Provide
Tailpieces Furnish Install
Traps & Drain Piping Provide
Plumbing Fittings at Lab Casework Furnish Install
Plumbing Fittings at Bld'g. Walls Furnish Install
Shut‐off Valves at Movable Lab Equipment Provide
Eye & Face Washes ‐ Countertop Mtd. Provide
Deluge Showers ‐ Floor & Ceiling Mtd. Provide
Plumbing Fitting Connections Provide
Elec. Devices at Cabinets, Countertops & Reagent
Shelving ‐ Incl. Switches, Receptacles & Data Provide
Jacks
Elec. Device Cover Plates Provide
Elec. Device Identification Plaques Provide
Elec. Pathways & Circuiting to Lab Casework
Provide
Mounted Devices
Elec. Device Connections Provide
Elec. Backboxes, Devices, Cover Plates, Plaques,
Pathways, Circuiting & Connections at Bld'g. Provide
Walls
Laboratory Hoods
Base Cabinets & Stands Provide
Cabinet Vents into Superstructure Provide
Countertop Provide
Superstructure Enclosures Provide
Closure Panels to Ceilings Provide
Filler Panels to Walls Provide
Sinks Provide
Sink Outlets Provide
Tailpieces Furnish Install
Traps & Drain Piping Provide
Specification Coordination Table
Scope Item Disciplinary Responsibility
Owner General Plumbing and HVAC Electrical
(Architecture) Fire Protection
Plumbing Fittings Provide
Service Piping Within Superstructure to Single
Provide
Point of Connection
Service Piping Beyond Hoods Provide
Service Piping to Single Point Connections Provide
Fume Hood Knock‐Outs for Monitors & Alarms
Provide
Monitors & Alarms Provide
Sash Sensors Provide
Occupancy Sensors Provide
Exhaust Controls & Circuiting Inside and Outside
Provide
of the Fume Hood
Exhaust Duct Collars Provide
Duct Transition ‐ Collar to Exhaust Duct Provide
Exhaust Ducts & Connections Provide
Airflow Control Valves Provide
Exhaust Fans Provide
Fan Support Structures, Curbs & Roofing Provide
Elec. Backboxes Provide
Elec. Receptacles Provide
Elec. Device Cover Plates Provide
Elec. Device Identification Plaques Provide
Light Fixtures & Lamps Provide
Light Switches Provide
Elec. Pathways & Circuiting Within
Provide
Superstructure to Single Point Connection
Elec. Pathways & Circuiting Beyond Fume Hoods
Provide
Single Point Power Connections Provide
Exhaust Fan Power Circuits, Complete Provide
Air Balancing Provide
ASHRAE In‐Place Performance Testing Provide
Training & Startup Provide
Miscellaneous
Exhaust Canopies (heat, steam, etc.), Compl. Provide
Definitions:
Provide: Responsible for all work ‐ furnish and install.
Responsible for materials ‐ turn over to Contractor responsible
Furnish:
for installing the work.
Install: Responsible for labor and tools.
Project No. WSU-160027
Agricultural Education and Water Quality Building
Wright State University, Lake Campus
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Unit price is an amount incorporated into the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the
Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of
the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope
of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or
decreased.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,
overhead, and profit.
B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires
establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified
in those Sections.
C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use
of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an
independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections
referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Unit Price No. 1: Removal of unsatisfactory soil and replacement with satisfactory soil material.
1. Description: Unsatisfactory soil excavation and disposal off-site and replacement with
satisfactory fill material or engineered fill from off-site, as required, according to
Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic yard of soil excavated, based on in-place surveys of volume
before and after removal.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if the
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.
1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the
Agreement.
2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternates into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work
of the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
B. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
C. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections
referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work
described under each alternate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1. Base Bid: Provide concrete frost slabs and walks as shown on the L sheets.
2. Alternate:
a. Provide 29’x 16’ concrete patio on the south side of the building as shown on
sheets L-102 “Enlarged Phase 1 Site Layout Plan-Materials” and L-202
“Enlarged Site Phase 1 Grading/Drainage Plan” and associated drawings.
b. Provide 20’x 8’-8” concrete slab as shown on sheets L-102 “Enlarged Phase 1
Site Layout Plan-Materials” and L-202 “Enlarged Site Phase 1
Grading/Drainage Plan” and associated drawings.
1. Base Bid: Provide asphalt walk from the west front entrance to west edge of new drive.
2. Alternate: Provide side walk from the edge of the new drive to west to the main drive as
shown on L-202 “Enlarged Site Phase 1 Grading/Drainage Plan” and associated
drawings.
1. Base Bid: No work required for the Type I Commercial Kitchen hood as described in the
Mechanical Drawings.
2. Alternate: Provide a Type I Commercial Kitchen hood in the Ag Lab as indicated on the
Mechanical Drawing H101 and associated drawings and as specified in Section 23 38 13
“Commercial Kitchen Hoods."
1. Base Bid: No work required for demand ventilation controls as described in the
Mechanical Drawings.
2. Alternate: Provide demand ventilation controls as described in the Mechanical Drawings.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Related Requirements:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, A/E, or Contractor seeking information
required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.
A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Use Subcontractor & Material Supplier Declaration F310-01 found at
http://ofcc.ohio.gov
B. Key Personnel Names: Within 7 days of notice to proceed, submit a list of key personnel
assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify
individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and cellular telephone numbers
and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned
as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and in prominent
location in built facility. Keep list current at all times.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at
meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of
visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan
drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.
2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical
and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within plenums to
accommodate layout of light fixtures and other components indicated on Drawings.
Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.
3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans
and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical
equipment.
4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door
floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and
similar items.
6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:
a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including
insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.
b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access
doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.
c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.
a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger.
b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-
alarm locations.
c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor-
control center locations.
d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.
a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler
heads.
9. Review: A/E will review coordination drawings to confirm that in general the Work is
being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's
responsibility. If A/E determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in
sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor,
who shall make suitable modifications and resubmit.
10. File Preparation Format: DWG, operating in Microsoft Windows operating system.
11. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using PDF format.
12. A/E will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing
coordination digital data files.
1. A/E will return without response those RFIs submitted to A/E by other entities controlled
by Contractor.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
C. RFI Forms: Fill out completely the Request for Interpretation F340-01 from http://ofcc.ohio.gov
D. A/E's Action: A/E will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. RFIs received
by A/E after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
2. A/E's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's
time for response will date from time of receipt by A/E of additional information.
E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Include the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of A/E.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date A/E's response was received.
F. On receipt of A/E's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to
affected parties.
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and A/E of scheduled meeting
dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions
and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned,
including Owner and A/E, within two days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: A/E will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before
starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 after
execution of the Agreement.
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related RFIs.
d. Related Change Orders.
e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries.
g. Submittals.
h. Review of mockups.
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility requirements.
k. Time schedules.
l. Weather limitations.
m. Manufacturer's written instructions.
n. Warranty requirements.
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.
u. Installation procedures.
v. Coordination with other work.
w. Required performance results.
x. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel.
E. Project Closeout Conference: The A/E shall conduct a project closeout conference.
F. Progress Meetings: The A/E shall Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.
1. Attendees: Each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with
current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities
shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar
with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. Advise Owner and
A/E of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for
discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site use.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Work hours.
10) Hazards and risks.
11) Progress cleaning.
12) Quality and work standards.
3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to
others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
Please submit an itemized proposal for changes in the Contract Sum and Contract Time for proposed
modifications to the Contract Documents described herein. Within Ten (10) days, the Contractor must submit
this proposal or notify the A/E in writing, of the date on which proposal submission is anticipated.
THIS IS NOT A CHANGE ORDER, A CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE, OR A DIRECTION
TO PROCEED WITH THE WORK DESCRIBED IN THE PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS.
Page 1 of 2
Project No. WSU-160027
Agricultural Education and Water Quality Building
Wright State University, Lake Campus
REQUESTED BY A/E:
Page 2 of 2
Contractor / Subcontractor Proposal Request Detail Summary
State of Ohio Standard Forms and Documents
Project Name Contractor's
Contract No.
Project No. Phase Contr. No.
County Change Order No. 0 0
Contractor / Subcontractor Name and Address I.D. No. Phase Contr. No.
Type of Contract
A. Labor Summary (excluding fringe benefits). Check box for overtime rate.*
hours x /hour = 0.00
hours x /hour = 0.00
hours x /hour = 0.00
hours x /hour = 0.00
hours x /hour = 0.00
hours x /hour = 0.00 Total (A) $ 0.00
B. Fringes:
hours x /hour = 0.00
hours x /hour = 0.00
hours x /hour = 0.00
hours x /hour = 0.00
hours x /hour = 0.00
hours x /hour = 0.00 Total (B) $ 0.00
I. Subcontractor (attach Change Order Detail Summary and quotes / invoices) Total (I) $
K. Miscellaneous
1. Additional bond/insurance cost $
2. Fees for permits, licenses, inspection, tests, etc. (attach supporting
documentation)
$
3. Overnight lodging, travel and food (prior approval from State Architect
required)
$
Total (K) $ 0.00
A. Labor Summary (excluding fringe benefits). Check box for overtime rate.*
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour = Total (A) $
B. Fringes:
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour =
hours x /hour = Total (B) $
I. Subcontractor (attach Change Order Detail Summary and quotes / invoices) Total (I) $
K. Miscellaneous
1. Additional bond/insurance cost $
2. Fees for permits, licenses, inspection, tests, etc. (attach supporting
documentation) $
3. Overnight lodging, travel and food (prior approval from State Architect
required) $
Total (K) $
Grand Total (A+B+C+D+E+F+G+H+I+J+K) $
* Enter Overtime labor rates separately from regular labor rates.
** Percentage shown is maximum allowed on contracts awarded under the Standard Requirements, 2007 Edition. For contracts awarded
under the Standard Conditions (May 2003 Lead Contractor or March 2000 Construction Manager), the maximum allowable percentage is
10 for each category.
This Change Order identifies and provides full and complete satisfaction for all direct and indirect costs, including interest and all related
extensions to the time for Contract Completion, for the described changes in the Scope of the Work.
Your company is authorized and directed to proceed with the following (attach additional sheets if needed):
Justification
Special Notice: This Change Directive identifies satisfaction of all compensation and time adjustments related to this change in the Work.
F340-06v1012 Page 1 of 1
Project No. WSU-160027
Agricultural Education and Water Quality Building
Wright State University, Lake Campus
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction Project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned
early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for completing an activity as scheduled.
The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum.
C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for completing an
activity as scheduled.
1. PDF file.
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule
for entire construction period.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,
submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and
reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities
involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
A. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has
been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of
final completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
C. Activities: Treat each floor or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
3. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery
date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the
earliest possible delivery date.
4. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Subcontract awards.
b. Purchases.
c. Mockups.
d. Installation.
e. Tests and inspections.
f. Startup and placement into final use and operation.
5. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of
the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be
sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a. Structural completion.
b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.
c. Permanent space enclosure.
d. Completion of mechanical installation.
e. Completion of electrical installation.
f. Substantial Completion.
E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.
F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 7 or more calendar days
behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by
which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working
hours, working days, crew sizes, equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which
recovery will be accomplished.
1. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received
since the start of Project.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.
1.10 REPORTS
A. Weekly Construction Reports: Prepare a weekly construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site. Submit copies of report at the weekly Progress
Meetings:
B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of
materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials
previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on
and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project
site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:
C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for
Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
D. Unusual Event Reports: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project
site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain
of events, persons participating, responses by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or
effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are
known or predictable.
1. Submit unusual event reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence.
Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Preconstruction photographs.
2. Periodic construction photographs.
3. Final completion construction photographs.
4. Preconstruction video recordings.
5. Periodic construction video recordings.
6. Construction webcam.
B. Related Requirements:
A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked
for location and direction of each photograph and video recording. Indicate elevation or story of
construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation.
1. Submit photos. Include copy of key plan indicating each photograph's location and
direction.
2. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file
metadata tag:
a. Name of Project.
b. Name and contact information for photographer.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Date photograph was taken.
f. Description of location, vantage point, and direction.
g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.
1. Submit video recordings on CD-ROM or thumb drive. Include copy of key plan
indicating each video's location and direction.
2. Identification: With each submittal, provide the following information in file metadata
tag:
a. Name of Project.
b. Name and address of photographer.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Date video recording was recorded.
f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point).
A. Digital Photographs: Provide color images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with
minimum sensor size of 12 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by
2400 pixels. Use flash in low light levels or backlit conditions.
B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video in MPEG format, produced by
a digital camera with minimum sensor resolution of 12 megapixels and capable of recording in
full high-definition mode. Provide supplemental lighting in low light levels or backlit
conditions.
C. Digital Images: Submit digital media as originally recorded in the digital camera, without
alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.
D. Metadata: Record accurate date and time and GPS location data from camera.
E. File Names: Name media files with date, Project area, and sequential numbering suffix.
1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each
photographic location.
B. Preconstruction Photographs: Before site disturbance, take photographs of Project site and
surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different
vantage points.
B. Preconstruction Video Recording: Before disturbance of site record video recording of Project
site and surrounding properties from different vantage points.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require A/E's
responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification
Sections as "action submittals."
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require A/E's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification
Sections as "informational submittals."
A. Submit all shop drawings and samples as part of the O&M manauals.
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and
Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include
submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required
to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead
time for manufacture or fabrication.
3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
construction schedule.
a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing
for submittals.
1. Project name.
2. Date.
3. Name of A/E.
4. Name of Contractor.
C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from
requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include
relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by A/E on previous
submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet.
D. PDF Submittals: Prepare submittals as PDF package, incorporating complete information into
each PDF file. Name PDF file with submittal number.
1. Remote Server: Prepare submittals as PDF package, and transmit to A/E by sending
email transmittal. Include PDF transmittal form. Include information in email subject line
as requested by A/E.
a. A/E will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as a digital
Project Record Document file.
5. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related parts of the Work specified in different
Sections so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals
concurrently for coordination.
B. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on A/E’s receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract
Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the
Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time
if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. A/E will advise Contractor when a
submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as
initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by A/E's consultants, Owner,
or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.
C. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
E. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action
submittals that are marked with approval notation from A/E's action stamp.
A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrent with Samples.
B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other materials.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the
following:
3. Email Transmittal: Provide PDF transmittal. Include digital image file illustrating Sample
characteristics, and identification information for record.
4. Paper Transmittal: Include paper transmittal including complete submittal information
indicated.
5. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
6. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern,
texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's
product line. A/E will return submittal with options selected.
7. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. A/E will retain two sets;
remainder will be returned.
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract
Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
3. Number and name of room or space.
4. Location within room or space.
E. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
F. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance with
indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include list of
assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and
version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of submittal.
G. Certificates:
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other
required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF file and paper copies of certificate, signed and
sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned
to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
A. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for
coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents.
Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to A/E.
B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's approval for each submittal with a uniform
approval stamp. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement
certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the
Contract Documents.
1. A/E will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have Contractor's
review and approval.
A. Action Submittals: A/E will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisions
required, and return it.
1. PDF Submittals: A/E will indicate, via markup on each submittal, the appropriate action.
B. Informational Submittals: A/E will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it
if it does not comply with requirements. A/E will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
submittals has received prior approval from A/E.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
for resubmittal without review.
E. A/E will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor.
F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by A/E without action.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further
described means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in
nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and
having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Field Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of
the Work and for completed Work.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or
that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
D. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site either as freestanding
temporary built elements or as part of permanent construction. Mockups are constructed to
verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities
of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface
between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation
tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish
the standard by which the Work will be judged.
E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance
with specified criteria.
F. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to
NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency
qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
G. Source Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for
example, plant, mill, factory, or shop.
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
J. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not
include contract administration activities performed by A/E.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to A/E.
A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or
requirements are specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting
requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent
requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect
for direction before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
1. Include plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup
construction.
2. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.
3. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.
B. Delegated-Design Services Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other
required submittals, submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible design
professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or
certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance
with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors
used in performing these services.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
D. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports and documents as specified.
E. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed,
and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to
A/E. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used
to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through
review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible
for submittal review.
F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of
approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or
defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with
requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspection.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of technical representative making
report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they are engaged to
perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or
not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required
by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor
by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
2. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspection will be performed.
4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
5. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with A/E and Contractor in performance of duties.
Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-
control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-
control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Update as the Work progresses.
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, A/E, testing agencies, and each party
involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector
to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the
responsibility of Owner, as indicated in the drawings, and as follows:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and
inspection log for A/E's reference during normal working hours.
A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to
dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on
which Project is to be built.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the
Contract Documents.
B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This
information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.
2. Section 312319 "Dewatering" for disposal of ground water at Project site.
A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in
the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities engaged in the Project to use
temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's
construction forces, A/E, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction
operations.
C. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction
operations.
D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all
entities for construction operations.
A. Site Utilization Plan: Show temporary facilities, temporary utility lines and connections, staging
areas, construction site entrances, vehicle circulation, and parking areas for construction
personnel.
C. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Show fabrication and installation details, including
plans, elevations, details, layouts, typestyles, graphic elements, and message content.
D. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having
jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention
program.
E. Moisture- and Mold-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials
and construction from water absorption and damage and mold.
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
B. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool;
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, A/E, and
construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other
Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan
racks, and bookcases.
2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide
electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one
receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot-square
tack and marker boards.
3. Drinking water and private toilet.
4. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68
to 72 deg F.
5. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.
C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Conservation: Coordinate construction and use of temporary facilities with consideration given
to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to
minimize waste.
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,
number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
E. Temporary Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by
construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed
construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that
will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
F. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,
capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
H. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install one land-based telephone line(s) for each field office.
1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction
area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136.
Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until A/E schedules Substantial Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial
Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to
Owner.
B. Temporary Use of Planned Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and
paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain
temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads
and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.
1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and
paved areas.
2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas
according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
3. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until
immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course
pavement before installation of final course according to Section 321216 "Flexible
Paving."
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
D. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.
E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and
other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be
removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root
systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
E. Site Enclosure Fence: Prior to commencing earthwork, furnish and install site enclosure fence in
a manner that will prevent people from easily entering site except by entrance gates.
F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of
construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and
similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each workday.
G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
H. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and
as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.
B. Exposed Construction Period: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject
to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:
C. Partially Enclosed Construction Period: After installation of weather barriers but before full
enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration
of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with
high organic content, into partially enclosed building.
2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.
4. Discard or replace water-damaged material.
5. Do not install material that is wet.
6. Discard and replace stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
7. Perform work in a sequence that allows wet materials adequate time to dry before
enclosing the material in gypsum board or other interior finishes.
D. Controlled Construction Period: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but
prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:
1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.
2. Use temporary or permanent HVAC system to control humidity within ranges specified
for installed and stored materials.
3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and
exposure to water limits.
a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and
gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and
remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective and require replacing.
b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during
construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of
exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture
levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.
c. Remove and replace materials that cannot be completely restored to their
manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,
when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial
Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been
delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed
surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration
into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove
soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove
materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and
other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace
street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and comparable products.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
C. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance with
requirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual Specification Section,
provide products qualified under the specified product procedure. In the event that a named
product or product by a named manufacturer does not meet the other requirements of the
specifications, select another named product or product from another named manufacturer that
does meet the requirements of the specifications. Submit a comparable product request, if
applicable.
A. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable
product. Identify basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced.
Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
B. Identification of Products: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or
imprint manufacturer or product names or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products or
equipment that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.
1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or, where
required for observation following installation, on a visually accessible surface that is not
conspicuous.
2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-
connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on a visually accessible but
inconspicuous surface. Include information essential for operation, including the
following:
3. See individual identification sections in Divisions 21, 22, 23, and 26 for additional
identification requirements.
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are
undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," A/E will make selection.
5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or
approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"
Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for
Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match A/E's sample," provide a
product that complies with requirements and matches A/E's sample. A/E’s decision will be final
on whether a proposed product matches.
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by A/E
from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.
A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: A/E will consider Contractor's request
for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions
are not satisfied, A/E may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
these requirements:
1. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is
consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is
compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities
of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant product qualities
include attributes such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties,
weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other specific features and
requirements.
2. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
3. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
4. Samples, if requested.
B. Submittal Requirements: Approval by the A/E of Contractor's request for use of comparable
product is not intended to satisfy other submittal requirements. Comply with specified submittal
requirements.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. Installation of the Work.
4. Cutting and patching.
5. Coordination of Owner-installed products.
6. Progress cleaning.
7. Starting and adjusting.
8. Protection of installed construction.
B. Related Requirements:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
installation of subsequent work.
1. Prior to commencing work requiring cutting and patching, review extent of cutting and
patching anticipated and examine procedures for ensuring satisfactory result from cutting
and patching work. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cutting
and patching to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Trade supervisor responsible for cutting operations.
c. Trade supervisor(s) responsible for patching of each type of substrate.
d. Mechanical, electrical, and utilities subcontractors' supervisors, to the extent each
trade is affecting by cutting and patching operations.
B. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential
conflicts before proceeding.
B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of
improvements comply with requirements.
C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time
cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:
1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.
2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance
and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform
patching work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting
and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be
relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time
permanent services and systems will be disrupted.
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying
services of the kind indicated.
B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.
1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify A/E of
locations and details of cutting and await directions from A/E before proceeding. Shore,
brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch
structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase
deflection.
2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that result in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in
reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or
decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not
limited to the following:
C. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence
of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in
Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction
that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of
in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting
the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services;
and other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the
Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to
adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control
of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify A/E promptly.
B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish limits on use of Project site.
3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
6. Notify A/E when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.
7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and
duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by A/E.
A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of A/E. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points
promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to A/E
before proceeding.
2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction
to its original condition.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction
items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F. Tools and Equipment: Where possible, select tools or equipment that minimize production of
excessive noise levels.
G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to
confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with
indicated requirements.
H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size
and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with
other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size
and type required for load conditions.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions
for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
1. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for repairing or removing and
replacing defective Work.
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
D. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free
passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to
requirements in Section 011000 "Summary."
E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where
required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration
into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching
and refinishing.
a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and
intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final
paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional
coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.
B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by
Owner's construction personnel.
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials
down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation
without binding.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.
2. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and
removal of above- and below-grade improvements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling,
reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another
facility.
A. General: Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work.
Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and
incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials.
A. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste
by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets,
receipts, and invoices.
B. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills
and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and
invoices.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in
this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and
cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure
throughout waste management plan.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,
signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan
during the entire duration of the Contract.
1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal
return.
2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review
plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.
C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that
are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
2. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust
and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. All recyclable plastic
containers, glass bottles and cans shall be collected from construction site by contractor and
placed in Owner’s recycling bins.
B. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or
reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum
contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.
C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate
recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved
construction waste management plan.
1. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if
found.
2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place,
grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or
processor.
A. Packaging:
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry
location.
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from
Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood
pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements
for recycling wood.
B. Wood Materials:
a. Comply with requirements in Section 329300 "Planting" for use of clean sawdust
as organic mulch.
C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry
location.
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
B. Related Requirements:
B. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at final completion signed by contracto.
B. Affidavit of Prevailing Wage: Provide original copy of signed and notarized affidavit of
prevailing wage for Contractor and each Subcontractor employed on project.
A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in
other Sections.
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of A/E.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial
Completion, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under
warranty.
C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project
Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are not planted, mulched, or paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean
according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of
Substantial Completion.
B. Repair, or remove and replace, defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,
provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.
Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified
condition.
1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other
damaged transparent materials.
2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and
identification.
3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and
noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for
new fixtures.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation
and maintenance manuals.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as
specified in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time of
Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by
this Section.
C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing
demonstration and training. A/E will comment on whether general scope and content of manual
are acceptable.
D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training.
A/E will return copy with comments.
E. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.
A. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard-copy, bound and labeled volumes.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual.
Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components
of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. Enclose title pages and
directories in clear plastic sleeves.
4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
A. Organization of Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate
section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not
part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to
the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,
identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the
Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to
ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building
Systems."
A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides
an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. List items and their
location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include the following:
1. List of contractors, subcontractors and suppliers with contact information and item they
installed/supplied.
2. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to
operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
3. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system.
For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
4. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and
maintenance manual.
B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
C. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1. Fire.
2. Flood.
3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
D. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
A. Systems and Equipment Operation Manual: Assemble a complete set of data indicating
operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include
information required for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine and
special operating procedures.
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and
equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract
Documents.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.
F. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color coding where required for
identification.
A. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of data indicating
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include
manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance procedures and frequency,
repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare parts, and warranty information.
B. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service
contracts, and warranties and bonds as described below.
C. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,
list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or
schedule designation or identifier where applicable.
1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to product
or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component
incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,
identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify
data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
E. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
F. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
G. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
H. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
I. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and
maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include
source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources,
and warranties and bonds, as described below.
C. Shop drawings and samples: Include all shop drawings and product samples as part of the
manual.
D. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation
or identifier where applicable.
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
G. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,
including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Miscellaneous record submittals.
B. Related Requirements:
a. Initial Submittal:
b. Final Submittal:
B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda
and contract modifications.
C. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-
keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit
one paper copy of each submittal.
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record
prints.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
A. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the
Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for
construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible
condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for
A/E's reference during normal working hours.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,
including the following:
A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training,
including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of
instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and
outline for each training module.
C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of
instruction time.
D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and
documentation of performance-based test.
1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.
2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,
instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.
3. Review required content of instruction.
4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions
and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.
1.5 COORDINATION
C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data
have been reviewed and approved by Architect.
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules
for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections.
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a
description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each
module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or
component:
1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
a. Emergency manuals.
b. Systems and equipment operation manuals.
c. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
d. Product maintenance manuals.
e. Project Record Documents.
f. Identification systems.
g. Warranties and bonds.
h. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
a. Startup procedures.
b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
c. Routine and normal operating instructions.
d. Regulation and control procedures.
e. Control sequences.
f. Safety procedures.
g. Instructions on stopping.
h. Normal shutdown instructions.
i. Operating procedures for emergencies.
j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
m. Special operating instructions and procedures.
a. Alignments.
b. Checking adjustments.
c. Noise and vibration adjustments.
d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
a. Diagnostic instructions.
b. Test and inspection procedures.
a. Inspection procedures.
b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d. Procedures for routine cleaning.
e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f. Procedures for routine maintenance.
g. Instruction on use of special tools.
a. Diagnosis instructions.
b. Repair instructions.
c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
1.7 PREPARATION
A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training
module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with
requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."
1.8 INSTRUCTION
A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires
seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1. Schedule training with Owner, through A/E, with at least seven days' advance notice.
C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully
operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation
and maintenance data submittals.
D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's
mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.
E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove
instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial
training use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Related Requirements:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: fly ash.
1. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality
control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures,
curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips,
vapor-retarder installation, steel reinforcement installation, and concrete protection.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,
and supports for concrete reinforcement.
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Form materials and form-release agents.
4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.
5. Curing compounds.
6. Vapor retarders.
7. Semirigid joint filler.
8. Joint-filler strips.
9. Repair materials.
B. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:
C. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified
tolerances.
A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage.
A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three
successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature
range required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1. ACI 301.
2. ACI 117.
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic,
paper, or fiber tubes that produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding
specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic
concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
D. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient
to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.
E. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.
F. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
G. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed
concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete
surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing
or waterproofing.
C. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-
drawn steel wire into flat sheets.
A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with
ends square and free of burrs.
B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater
compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use
CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from
single source from single manufacturer.
B. Cementitious Materials:
C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source.
A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive
or pressure-sensitive tape.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
D. Water: Potable.
B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a
Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 according to ASTM D 2240.
C. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch thick, with bent
tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or
debris.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from
1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent
loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and
other debris just before placing concrete.
K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.
2. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by
form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.
1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved its 28-day design compressive
strength.
2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without
loosening or disturbing shores.
B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new
form-release agent.
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces
unless approved by Architect.
A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Bituminous Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair bituminous vapor retarder according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
reduce bond to concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld
crossing reinforcing bars.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
3.6 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.
1. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.
2. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and
girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting
action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops
random contraction cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below
finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections are completed.
B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to
limitations of ACI 301.
C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit
concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have
begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to
consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded
items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits
on formed-surface irregularities.
C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-
floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch
in one direction.
1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious
floor finishes.
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by
hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,
carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-
finish coating system.
2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly
trafficked floor surface:
a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-
grade.
E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere
as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Architect before application.
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in
place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-
place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete the Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
2. Construct concrete bases 4 inches high unless otherwise indicated, and extend base not
less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported
equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support.
3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete substrate.
6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper
attachment to supported equipment.
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather
protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder
of curing period.
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere
with bonding of floor covering used on Project.
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity
of coating and repair damage during curing period.
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least two month(s). Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joints clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed
joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and
replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2
parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of
cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes
and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding
agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place
with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color.
Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before
proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than
surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges
to match adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor
elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,
by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,
square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.
Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.
Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without
coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and
loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to A/E's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
A. Contractor will engage a qualified testing inspecting agency to perform field tests and
inspections and prepare test reports to measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to
ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of finishing.
B. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
C. Inspections:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50
cu. yd. or fraction thereof.
a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for
each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional
tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one
test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each
concrete mixture.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.
a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured
specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength
and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by
more than 500 psi.
8. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency
may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.
11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply
with the Contract Documents.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
C. Related Requirements:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing
bars. Comply with ACI 315. Show elevations of reinforced walls.
3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:
1. Masonry units.
C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water
retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content.
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with
compressive strength requirement.
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate
aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 60 inches long by 60
inches high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories.
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units
become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry
mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered
weatherproof dispensing silos.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely
in place.
2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,
secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe, and hold
cover in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least
three days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
coverings on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost
or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days
after completing cleaning.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source
from single manufacturer for each product required.
B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such
defects are exposed in the completed Work.
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces
of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units.
1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does
not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested
according to ASTM E 514/E 514M as a wall assembly made with mortar containing
integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24
hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.
1) ACM Chemistries.
2) BASF Corporation; Construction Systems.
3) Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 2150 psi.
2. Density Classification: Normal weight unless otherwise indicated.
3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 2150 psi.
2. Density Classification: Normal weight.
3. Size (Actual Dimensions):
a. CMU-1 & CMU-3: 3-5/8 inches wide by 7-5/8 inches high by 15-5/8 inches long.
b. CMU-2: 3-5/8 inches wide by 3-5/8 inches high by 15-5/8 inches long.
6. Special Aggregate: Provide units made with aggregate matching aggregate in A/E's
sample.
B. Masonry Lintels: Built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs matching
adjacent CMUs in color, texture, and density classification, with reinforcing bars placed as
indicated and filled with coarse grout. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and
color of exposed faces of adjacent units:
1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose
unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces
finished.
2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special
conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels.
3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on
exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.
4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in
sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
B. BR-1 Clay Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216.
1. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide the following product or A/E
approved product meeting but not limited to color, texture and size.
2. Grade: SW.
3. Type: FBX.
4. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested according to
ASTM C 67.
5. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated
"not effloresced."
6. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 15-5/8 inches long.
7. Application: Use where brick is exposed unless otherwise indicated.
C. BR-2 Clay Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216.
1. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide the following product or A/E
approved product meeting but not limited to color, texture and size.
a. Bases of design: The Belden Brick Company; Modular No. 8530 A; Velour finish.
2. Grade: SW.
3. Type: FBX.
4. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested according to
ASTM C 67.
5. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated
"not effloresced."
6. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long.
7. Application: Use where brick is indicated as BR-2.
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-
weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C 114.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing
no other ingredients.
E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use
in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments with a record of
satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
a. Davis Colors.
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
c. Lanxess Corporation.
F. Colored Cement Products: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime and
mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other
ingredients.
1) Essroc.
2) Holcim (US) Inc.
3) Lafarge North America Inc.
2. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected
from manufacturer's standard colors.
3. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
4. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of mortar cement by weight.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or
crushed stone.
2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce
required mortar color.
1. Fine Aggregates: ASTM C404, clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay lumps, or
other deleterious substances.
2. Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C404, clean, uncoated, pea gravel containing no clay, mud,
loam, or foreign matter. Maximum aggregate size ¾ inch.
J. Water: Potable.
2.7 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.
C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder type with single pair of side
rods.
1. Ladder type with one side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4
inches wide, plus side rods at each wythe of masonry 4 inches wide or less.
2. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face
shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections
having a maximum horizontal play of 1/16 inch and maximum vertical adjustment of 1-
1/4 inches. Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-
inch cover on outside face. Ties have hooks or clips to engage a continuous horizontal
wire in the facing wythe.
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that
comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:
2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,
with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" and as follows:
1. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12
feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.
2. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated
to receive counterflashing.
3. Fabricate metal drip edges from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2
inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.
4. Solder metal items at corners.
b. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and
seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer.
1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended
by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing urethane sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and remain
watertight.
E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products
or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other
and to substrates.
F. Termination Bars for Flexible Flashing: Stainless steel bars 0.075 inch by 1 inch.
G. Termination Bars for Flexible Flashing: Stainless-steel sheet 0.019 inch by 1-1/2 inches with a
3/8 inch sealant flange at top.
H. Termination Bars for Flexible Flashing: Aluminum sheet 0.064 inch by 1-1/2 inches with a 3/8-
inch sealant flange at top.
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, or
urethane.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I
(No. 15 asphalt felt).
E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade
within the wall cavity.
a. Sheets or strips not less than 3/4 inch thick and installed to full height of cavity,
with additional strips 4 inches high at weep holes and thick enough to fill entire
depth of cavity and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.
D. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and
natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour
height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day
compressive strength indicated, but not less than 3000 psi.
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of the Work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness
shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths
indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening.
D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut
units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.
3.3 TOLERANCES
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or
minus 1/4 inch.
2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/2 inch.
3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus
or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet ,
3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet,
1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8
inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch,
with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more
than 1/8 inch.
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8
inch or minus 1/4 inch.
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than
1/8 inch.
5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line
by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
running bond pattern; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions
at corners or jambs.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less
than 4 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with
less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in
course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive
mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh
masonry.
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of
metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.
H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and
similar items unless otherwise indicated.
I. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof
structure above unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above.
2. Wedge nonload-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate,
or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches
final position.
3. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above to comply with Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping."
1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.
4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where
cells are not grouted.
5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed
anchors and ties in mortar.
B. Set stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and similar
holes.
1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear
water.
2. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.
3. Rake out mortar joints for pointing with sealant.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than
paint) unless otherwise indicated.
E. Cut joints flush where indicated to receive cavity wall insulation and air barriers unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less
than one metal tie for 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 16 inches o.c.
horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide
additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36 inches apart
around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more
than 24 inches o.c. vertically.
a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type) ties.
a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending
across both wythes.
b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type)
reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.
B. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using bonding system indicated on Drawings.
C. Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and shoving
units of other wythe into place.
D. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at
juncture, bond walls together as follows:
A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:
1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less
than one metal tie for 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 16 inches o.c.
horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide
additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36 inches apart
around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more
than 24 inches o.c. vertically.
a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type) ties.
b. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use
adjustable-type (two-piece-type) ties to allow for differential movement regardless
of whether bed joints align.
a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending
across both wythes.
b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type)
reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.
c. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use
adjustable-type (two-piece-type) reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in
B. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using bonding system indicated on Drawings.
C. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds
away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or
remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.
D. Installing Cavity Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches
o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for
this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in
cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry
or other construction as shown.
1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and
masonry.
A. Anchor masonry veneers to concrete and masonry backup with masonry-veneer anchors to
comply with the following requirements:
1. Fasten screw-attached anchors to concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of
type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.
2. Embed tie sections and connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints.
3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and
down.
4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and horizontally.
Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 24
inches, around perimeter.
B. Provide not less than 2 inches of airspace between back of masonry veneer and face of
insulation.
1. Keep airspace clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel
beds away from airspace, to minimize mortar protrusions into airspace. Do not attempt to
trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into airspace.
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8
inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces structural steel
or concrete, to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch wide between masonry and structural steel or
concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid
materials.
2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c.
horizontally.
A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.
Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-
plane wall or partition movement.
1. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8
inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants."
3.12 LINTELS
B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick-size
units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting
lintels.
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,
other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install cavity vents
at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where
indicated.
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on
sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer.
2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across airspace behind veneer,
and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under water-resistive
barrier, lapping at least 4 inches.
3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each
end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches
to form end dams.
4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2
inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric
sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application
indicated.
5. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking
hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with
requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.
6. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to
top of metal flashing termination.
7. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is
completed.
C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be
built into masonry.
D. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of masonry
immediately above embedded flashing.
E. Place pea gravel in cavities as soon as practical to a height equal to height of first course above
top of flashing, but not less than 2 inches, to maintain drainage.
F. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity
drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.
G. Install cavity vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified
weep/cavity vent products to form cavity vents.
1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install
through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections
and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform
tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall
be done at Contractor's expense.
1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-
prepared mortar.
2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades,
sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for
compressive strength.
F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to
ASTM C 780.
G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test
mortar for compressive strength.
H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar
fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes
or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking
tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical
Notes 20.
6. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A.
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling.
C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's
property.
See General Information for Fire Resistance Ratings - CAN/ULC-S101 Certified for Canada
This design was evaluated using a load design method other than the Limit States Design Method (e.g., Working Stress Design Method). For jurisdictions
employing the Limit States Design Method, such as Canada, a load restriction factor shall be used — See Guide BXUV or BXUV7
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification (such as Canada), respectively.
2. Mortar — Blocks laid in full bed of mortar, nom. 3/8 in. thick, of not less than 2-1/4 and not more than 3-1/2 parts of clean sharp sand to 1 part
Portland cement (proportioned by volume) and not more than 50 percent hydrated lime (by cement volume). Vertical joints staggered.
3. Portland Cement Stucco or Gypsum Plaster — Add 1/2 hr to classification if used. Where combustible members are framed in wall, plaster or
stucco must be applied on the face opposite framing to achieve a max. Classification of 1-1/2 hr. Attached to concrete blocks (Item 1).
4. Loose Masonry Fill — If all core spaces are filled with loose dry expanded slag, expanded clay or shale (Rotary Kiln Process), water repellant
vermiculite masonry fill insulation, or silicone treated perlite loose fill insulation add 2 hr to classification.
5. Foamed Plastic* — (Optional-Not Shown) — 1-1/2 in. thick max, 4 ft wide sheathing attached to concrete blocks (Item 1).
ATLAS ROOFING CORP — "EnergyShield Pro Wall Insulation" and "EnergyShield Pro 2 Wall Insulation"
FIRESTONE BUILDING PRODUCTS CO L L C — "Enverge™ CI Foil Exterior Wall Insulation" and "Enverge™ CI Glass Exterior Wall
Insulation"
THE DOW CHEMICAL CO — Types Thermax Sheathing, Thermax Light Duty Insulation, Thermax Heavy Duty Insulation, Thermax Metal
Building Board, Thermax White Finish Insulation, Thermax ci Exterior Insulation, Thermax XARMOR ci Exterior Insulation, Thermax IH Insulation,
Thermax Plus Liner Panel, Thermax Heavy Duty Plus (HDP) and TUFF-R™ ci Insulation
5A. Building Units — As an alternate to Items 5, min. 1-in thick polyisocyanurate composite foamed plastic insulation boards, nom. 48 by 48 or 96
in.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/ulweb/LISEXT/1FRAME/FireResistanceWizard.html?utm_... 12/8/2016
BXUV.U905 - Fire-resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 Page 2 of 2
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification (such as Canada),
respectively.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/ulweb/LISEXT/1FRAME/FireResistanceWizard.html?utm_... 12/8/2016
Project No. WSU-160027
Agricultural Education and Water Quality Building
Wright State University, Lake Campus
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Structural steel.
2. Grout.
B. Related Requirements:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in
AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Include embedment Drawings.
3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed
and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
2. Shear stud connectors.
3. Shop primers.
4. Nonshrink grout.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural steel
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
1. AISC 303.
2. AISC 360.
3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or
overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
structures as directed.
B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes
repackaging and seals containers.
2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating
ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.
A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural
bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened
carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.
B. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel
structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436,
Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.
C. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished
carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.
1. Configuration: Straight.
2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 hex carbon steel.
3. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
4. Finish: Plain or Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C if exposed to
exterior in final condition.
2.3 PRIMER
2.4 GROUT
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according
to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.
C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-
SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to
pass through steel members.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes
or enlarge holes by burning.
2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to
steel surfaces.
3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes
without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter,
slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:
2.8 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel
according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as
weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
2. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in
exterior walls.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.
1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being
fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.
D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to
requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces
and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with
requirements.
1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods,
bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and
elevations.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural
steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in
intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,
connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC 303 and AISC 360.
B. Baseplates, Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces
of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface
of plates.
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before
packing with grout.
3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.
Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with
manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in
permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut
sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary
connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.
3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes
without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following
special inspections:
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
E. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to
requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or
missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1
for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Related Requirements:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AESS: Structural steel designated as "architecturally exposed structural steel" or "AESS" in the
Contract Documents.
B. Category 2 AESS: AESS that is within 20 feet vertically and horizontally of a walking surface
and that is visible to a person standing on that walking surface or is designated as "Category 2
architecturally exposed structural steel" or "AESS-2" in the Contract Documents.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of AESS components. Shop Drawings for structural steel
may be used for AESS provided items of AESS are specifically identified and requirements
below are met for AESS.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Include embedment Drawings.
3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed
and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
4. Indicate exposed surfaces and edges and surface preparation being used.
5. Indicate special tolerances and erection requirements.
A. Use special care in handling to prevent twisting, warping, nicking, and other damage. Store
materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground
and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and
packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or
overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
structures as directed.
A. Field Measurements: Where AESS is indicated to fit against other construction, verify actual
dimensions by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FILLER
A. Filler: Polyester filler intended for use in repairing dents in automobile bodies.
2.2 PRIMER
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate and assemble AESS to the maximum extent possible. Locate field joints at
concealed locations if possible. Detail assemblies to minimize handling and to expedite
erection.
B. In addition to special care used to handle and fabricate AESS, comply with the following:
1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including
pitting, rust, scale, and roughness.
2. Grind sheared, punched, and flame-cut edges of AESS to remove burrs and provide
smooth surfaces and edges.
3. Fabricate AESS with exposed surfaces free of mill marks, including rolled trade names
and stamped or raised identification.
4. Fabricate AESS with exposed surfaces free of seams to maximum extent possible.
5. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning,
treating, and shop priming.
6. Fabricate with piece marks fully hidden in the completed structure or made with media
that permits full removal after erection.
7. Fabricate AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is not designated
AESS.
C. Coping, Blocking, and Joint Gaps: Maintain uniform gaps of 1/8 inch with a tolerance of 1/32
inch for AESS.
D. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to
pass through steel members.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter,
slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and
locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with
requirements.
B. Examine AESS for twists, kinks, warping, gouges, and other imperfections before erecting.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep AESS
secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in
intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,
connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
1. If possible, locate welded tabs for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling where
they will be concealed from view in the completed Work.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set AESS accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and
AISC 360.
1. Erect AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is not designated AESS.
B. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut
sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
inspect AESS as specified in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing." The testing agency is
not responsible for enforcing requirements relating to aesthetic effect.
B. Architect will observe AESS in place to determine acceptability relating to aesthetic effect.
A. Remove welded tabs that were used for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling and that
are exposed to view in the completed Work. Grind steel smooth.
B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099123 "Interior
Painting."
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry.
2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for field-welded shear connectors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. SJI's "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight
Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."
B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support
nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's
"Specifications."
B. Shop Drawings:
B. Welding certificates.
C. Manufacturer certificates.
E. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for its preparation.
B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling.
1.8 SEQUENCING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specification for Open Web
Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord
members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord.
B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel
Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members.
C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.
D. Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top-chord extensions
where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."
E. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated,
complying with SJI's "Specifications."
F. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications." Equip bearing ends of joists with
manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12
inches.
2.3 PRIMERS
A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance
requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.
B. Fabricate steel bearing plates from ASTM A 36/A 36M steel with integral anchorages of sizes
and thicknesses indicated. Shop prime paint.
D. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist
manufacturer to complete joist assembly.
A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and
accessories by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.
B. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a
continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting
construction according to SJI's "Specifications,” joist manufacturer's written instructions, and
requirements in this Section.
1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.
3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that
joists are stabilized during construction.
4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead
loads are applied.
C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding
sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and
procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting
welding work.
D. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are
applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or
beams.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
1. In addition to visual inspection, test field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the
following procedures, at testing agency's option:
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field
connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates, abutting
structural steel, and accessories.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof deck.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors.
2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel
shapes.
3. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting
of deck.
A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans,
cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.
A. Welding certificates.
C. Product Test Reports: For tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of
the following complies with requirements:
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof
covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to
AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members."
B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI
Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the
following:
1. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS),
Grade 33, G60 zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's standard
baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with
requirements indicated.
E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000
psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of
profile indicated or required for application.
F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of
same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile indicated.
G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material,
finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.
H. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as
deck, with 3-inch- wide flanges and level recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch minimum depth. For
drains, cut holes in the field.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in
SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.
D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned
and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract
side-lap interlocks.
E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.
F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting
through or adjacent to deck.
G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of deck, and support of other work.
H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface
diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches
long, and as follows:
B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between
supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of one-half of the span or 36 inches, and as
follows:
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2
inches, with end joints as follows:
D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and
mechanically fasten flanges to top of deck. Space mechanical fasteners not more than 12 inches
apart with at least one fastener at each corner.
1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and mechanically
fasten.
E. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end
closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld
or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.
1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck
with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of
prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.
1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of
deck exposed to view.
2. Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of bottom deck surfaces are included in
Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves,
slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.
2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items
built into unit masonry.
3. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing."
1.3 COORDINATION
D. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
E. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections,
and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
Provide Shop Drawings for the following:
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563, Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers.
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and,
where indicated, flat washers.
1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being
fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
E. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or
ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip
galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1
stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.
B. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal
and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or
welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally
welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch
hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise
indicated.
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent
construction.
C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes indicated with
attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as recommended by partition manufacturer. Drill or
punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where
indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete
framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6
inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and
concrete.
E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-
place concrete.
A. General:
B. Steel Ladders:
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown
with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed
field splices where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with
other work.
1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry
construction.
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for
each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit
where indicated.
B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span,
but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated.
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from
concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than
two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into
surrounding surface.
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for
steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
adhesion.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of
grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.
C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded
in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning" Or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning”
E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with
edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for
use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and
other connectors.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,
including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure.
C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders
with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of
pipe columns.
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or
masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal
size in least dimension.
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency.
3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before
and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.
4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
1. Preservative-treated wood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
3. Power-driven fasteners.
4. Post-installed anchors.
5. Metal framing anchors.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-
retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is
representative of the material tested.
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide
for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece.
3. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of
each piece.
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with
requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-
test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of
each piece.
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Cants.
4. Furring.
5. Grounds.
6. Utility shelving.
B. Dimension Lumber Items: Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used
provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and
purpose.
C. Utility Shelving: Lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of any of the following
species and grades:
1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Standard or
No. 3 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Mixed southern pine or southern pine No. 1 grade; SPIB.
3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or No. 2 Common grade;
NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
D. Concealed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content of any of the following species and
grades:
E. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber
of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will
interfere with its attachment and purpose.
F. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
G. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this article for material and manufacture.
C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954 as appropriate for
substrate, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to
comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
B. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install
fasteners through each fastener hole.
D. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where
framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips
not more than 16 inches o.c.
E. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and
as follows:
1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96
inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to
close furred spaces.
2. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more
than 20 feet o.c.
F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
I. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying
with the following:
J. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails
snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces
unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough
carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by
spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for bituminous vapor retarders under slabs-on-
grade.
2. Section 071326 "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing" for waterproofing.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written
instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from single source
from single manufacturer. Provide protection course auxiliary materials recommended in
writing by manufacturer of primary materials.
A. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction
unless otherwise indicated.
E. Protection Course: Smooth-surfaced roll roofing complying with ASTM D 6380/D 6380M,
Class S, Type III.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for surface smoothness, maximum surface moisture content, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been
completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for dampproofing application.
B. Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated
with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes
and drains.
C. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to dampproofing work; fill voids,
seal joints, and remove bond breakers if any.
D. Apply patching compound to patch and fill tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other
imperfections.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for dampproofing application, cure time
between coats, and drying time before backfilling unless otherwise indicated.
B. Where dampproofing footings and foundation walls, apply from finished-grade line to top of
footing; extend over top of footing and down a minimum of 6 inches over outside face of
footing.
1. Extend dampproofing 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend
onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed.
2. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes
in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where indicated as "reinforced," by embedding
an 8-inch-wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing.
Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required.
A. Concrete Foundations: Apply two brush or spray coats at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. for
first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. for second coat.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Correct dampproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, and reapply
dampproofing.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes penetrating water-repellent treatments for the following vertical and horizontal
surfaces:
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for integral water-repellent admixture for unit masonry
assemblies.
B. Mockups: Prepare mockups of each required water repellent on each type of substrate required
to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
A. Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted weather
and substrate conditions permit water repellents to be applied according to manufacturers'
written instructions and warranty requirements:
1. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for not less than 28 days.
2. Building has been closed in for not less than 30 days before treating wall assemblies.
3. Ambient temperature is above 40 deg F and below 100 deg F and will remain so for 24
hours.
4. Substrate is not frozen and substrate-surface temperature is above 40 deg F and below
100 deg F.
5. Rain or snow is not predicted within 24 hours.
6. Not less than seven days have passed since surfaces were last wet.
7. Windy conditions do not exist that might cause water repellent to be blown onto
vegetation or surfaces not intended to be treated.
1.8 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Water Absorption: Minimum 80 percent reduction of water absorption after 24 hours for treated
compared to untreated specimens when tested according to the following:
C. Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: Minimum 90 percent reduction in leakage
rate of treated compared to untreated specimens, according to ASTM E 514/E 514M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent manufacturer's
requirements. Check moisture content in three representative locations by method
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be trapped
beneath the application of water repellent.
3. Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water repellent.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. New Construction and Repairs: Allow concrete and other cementitious materials to age before
application of water repellent, according to repellent manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could impair
penetration or performance of product according to water-repellent manufacturer's written
instructions and as follows:
1. Concrete Unit Masonry: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other substances
that inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents according to ASTM E 1857.
C. Protect adjoining work, including mortar and sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over
of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the
possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live vegetation.
D. Coordination with Mortar Joints: Do not apply water repellent until pointing mortar for joints
adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment has been installed and cured.
E. Coordination with Sealant Joints: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent
to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured.
1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and
compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant
materials identical to those required.
3.3 APPLICATION
B. Apply coating of water repellent on surfaces to be treated using 15 psi-pressure spray with a
fan-type spray nozzle to the point of saturation. Apply coating in dual passes of uniform,
overlapping strokes. Remove excess material; do not allow material to puddle beyond
saturation. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application procedure unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Apply a second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of
surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions
are not applicable to Project conditions.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by
water-repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades caused
by water-repellent application, as approved by Architect.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 075419 "Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing and Ethylene Interpolymer (KEE)
Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction.
2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sound attenuation blanket used as acoustic
insulation.
A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project
site until just before installation time.
3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each
area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Extruded polystyrene boards in this article are also called "XPS boards." Roman numeral
designators in ASTM C 578 are assigned in a fixed random sequence, and their numeric order
does not reflect increasing strength or other characteristics.
B. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type VI: ASTM C 578, Type VI, 40-psi minimum compressive
strength; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per
ASTM E 84.
a. DiversiFoam Products
b. Dow Chemical Company (The)
c. Owens Corning
d. Soprema, Inc.
A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.
a. CertainTeed Corporation
b. Johns Manville, a Berkshire Hathaway company
c. Knauf Insulation
d. Owens Corning
2.4 ACCESSORIES
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.
2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier
materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without
damaging insulation and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections
capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,
rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill
voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths,
and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or
required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.
A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's
recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c.
both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation
between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units
firmly against inside substrates.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and
other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse
and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Building paper.
2. Flexible flashing.
1. For building wrap, include data on air and water-vapor permeance based on testing
according to referenced standards.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of building paper at terminations, openings, and penetrations.
Show details of flexible flashing applications.
A. Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier and flexible flashing, from ICC-ES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1 No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), unperforated.
C. Nails and Staples: Product recommended in writing by flexible flashing manufacturer and
complying with ASTM F 1667.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water-resistive barrier securely fastened to
framing immediately after sheathing is installed.
1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion-
or control-joint locations.
2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten to
sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Meet with Owner, A/E, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal composite material panel
Installer, metal composite material panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support
Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal composite material
panels, including installers of doors, windows, and louvers.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
3. Review methods and procedures related to metal composite material panel installation,
including manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment
between and attachment to structural members.
5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of
other construction that affect metal composite material panels.
6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and
inspections if applicable.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal composite material panel assembly
during and after installation.
8. Review procedures for repair of panels damaged after installation.
9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish
copy of record to each participant.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal composite material panels; details of
edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment assembly, trim,
flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.
2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim and anchorage, at a scale of not less than
1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal composite material panel indicated with
factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below.
1. Metal Composite Material Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include
fasteners, closures, and other metal composite material panel accessories.
B. Product Test Reports: For each product, tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
A. Maintenance Data: For metal composite material panels to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
A. Deliver components, metal composite material panels, and other manufactured items so as not
to be damaged or deformed. Package metal composite material panels for protection during
transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal composite material panels in a manner to prevent bending,
warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack metal composite material panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with
suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal composite material panels to ensure
dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal composite material panels
in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal composite material panels during installation.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal composite material panels to be performed according to
manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate metal composite material panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim,
construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
1.11 WARRANTY
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
C. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Metal composite material wall panel system passes NFPA 285
testing.
A. Metal Composite Material Wall Panel Systems: Provide factory-formed and -assembled, metal
composite material wall panels fabricated from two metal facings that are bonded to a solid,
extruded thermoplastic core; formed into profile for installation method indicated. Include
attachment assembly components and accessories required for weathertight system.
A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel
sheet ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50
aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's
standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal composite material panel
system.
B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system
including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets,
fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal composite material
panels unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal composite
material panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance.
Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed
openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with
same finish system as adjacent metal composite material panels.
D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed
fasteners with heads matching color of metal composite material panels by means of plastic
caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.
E. Panel Sealants: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class,
and use classifications required to seal joints in metal composite material panels and remain
weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal composite material panels and accessories at the factory, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance
requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with
dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and
seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-
lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
4. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant
and to comply with SMACNA standards.
5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored
or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel
manufacturer.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal composite material panel supports, and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural
panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances
required by metal composite material wall panel manufacturer.
B. Examine roughing-in for components and assemblies penetrating metal composite material
panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal composite
material panels before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support
members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal composite material panel
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Fasteners:
1. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the
exterior; use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect
against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal composite material panel
manufacturer.
E. Track-Support Installation: Install support assembly at locations, spacings, and with fasteners
recommended by manufacturer. Use manufacturer's standard horizontal tracks and vertical
tracks that provide support and secondary drainage assembly, draining to the exterior at
horizontal joints through drain tube. Attach metal composite material wall panels to tracks by
interlocking panel edges with manufacturer's standard "T" clips.
F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight
mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other
components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal composite material panel assembly
including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure
strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal composite material panel
manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended in writing by metal
composite material panel manufacturer.
G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,
and seams that are permanently watertight.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks and that is true
to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet
metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof performance.
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal composite material wall panel units within
installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines
as indicated, and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching
profiles.
B. Metal composite material wall panels will be considered defective if they do not pass test and
inspections.
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal composite
material panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions. On completion of metal composite material panel installation, clean finished
surfaces as recommended by metal composite material panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean
condition during construction.
B. After metal composite material panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of
obstructions, dirt, and sealant.
C. Replace metal composite material panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking;
and for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels.
2. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck.
3. Section 077100 "Roof Specialties" for manufactured copings and roof edge flashings.
4. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.
5. Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for roof drains.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA
Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems" apply to Work of this Section.
1. Meet with Owner, A/E and Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency
representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck
Installer, air barrier Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing,
including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,
including flatness and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including
the following:
D. Wind Uplift Resistance Submittal: For roofing system, indicating compliance with wind uplift
performance requirements.
B. Manufacturer Certificates:
2. Special Warranty Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying that all
materials supplied under this Section are acceptable for special warranty.
C. Product Test Reports: For roof membrane and insulation, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, indicating compliance with specified requirements.
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or
listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid
material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated
shelf life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Special warranty includes roof membrane, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, and
other components of roofing system.
2. Warranty Period: 20 years (no dollar limit) from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this
Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of
roofing system such as roof membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, and walkway
products, for the following warranty period:
1. Roof Contractor: Submit the signed Special Project Warranty Roofing, on the form shon
in Section 075419GF “TPO Roofing Special Warranty.” Submit this guarantee through
the A/E to the Owner.
2. Guarantee to include, but not limited to roof membrane system, roof insulation, vapor
barrier, sheeting metal flashings and gravel stops, scuppers, flexible flashings, control
joints, saddles and fasteners.
3. Guarantee period begins on the date of Substantial Completion of the roof for the Project
or such date what the A/E and Owner accept the roof, if the date is after the dare of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General Performance: Installed roofing system and flashings shall withstand specified uplift
pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roof system
and flashings shall remain watertight.
1. Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when
tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.
2. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to
ASTM D 3746, ASTM D 4272, or the "Resistance to Foot Traffic Test" in FM
Approvals 4470.
B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent
materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roof
membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C. Wind Uplift Resistance: Design roofing system to resist the following wind uplift pressures
when tested according to FM Approvals 4474, UL 580, or UL 1897:
D. FM Approvals' RoofNav Listing: Roof membrane, base flashings, and component materials
shall comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 or FM Approvals 4470 as part of a
roofing system, and shall be listed in FM Approvals' RoofNav for Class 1 or noncombustible
construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals Certification markings.
E. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes
indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
A. TPO Sheet: ASTM D 6878/D 6878M, internally fabric- or scrim-reinforced, TPO sheet.
2. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from roof membrane
manufacturer.
3. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal.
4. Exposed Face Color: White.
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with other roofing components.
1. Adhesive and Sealants: Comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 60-mil thick,
minimum, of same color as TPO sheet.
G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless steel or aluminum bars,
approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
I. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-
resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roofing components to
substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
J. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings,
preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination
reglets, and other accessories.
A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured by TPO roof membrane manufacturer.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 2, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber
mat facer on both major surfaces.
a. Roof Field: 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
b. Saddles and Crickets: 1/2 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use
and compatibility with other roofing system components.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners with metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-
resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate,
and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
2.6 WALKWAYS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and
roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation
3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with
requirements in Section 053100 "Steel Decking."
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing system
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp
projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.
B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when rain is forecast.
Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning Work on adjoining roofing.
B. Comply with roofing system and roof insulation manufacturer's written instructions for
installing roof insulation.
1. Install base layer of insulation with end joints staggered not less than 12 inches in
adjacent rows and with long joints continuous at right angle to flutes of decking.
2. Install upper layers of insulation and tapered insulation with joints of each layer offset not
less than 12 inches from previous layer of insulation.
a. Staggered end joints within each layer not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows.
b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to
intersecting sloping roof decks.
c. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width.
d. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each
side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.
A. Adhere roof membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's
written instructions.
D. Accurately align roof membrane, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
E. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roof membrane at rate required by
manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roof membrane. Do not apply to splice
area of roof membrane.
G. Apply roof membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
H. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roof membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roof
membrane and sheet flashings, to ensure a watertight seam installation.
1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut
edges of roof membrane and sheet flashings.
2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas.
3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roof membrane that do not comply with
requirements.
I. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roof membrane in
place with clamping ring.
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow
to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet
flashing.
D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side
and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
A. Flexible Walkways:
A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect
roofing installation on completion, in presence of Architect, and to prepare inspection report.
B. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that
they do not comply with specified requirements.
A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When
remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing system, inspect roofing system for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair
substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration
at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a
subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and
workmanship for designated Warranty Period,
C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein
set forth, that during Warranty Period Roofing Installer will, at Roofing Installer's own cost and
expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are
necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a
watertight condition.
1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the
building, and to building contents, caused by:
a. lightning;
b. peak gust wind speed exceeding <Insert mph (m/sec)>;
c. fire;
d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive
deflection, deterioration, and decomposition;
e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents,
equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work;
f. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and
g. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance
personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by
Owner.
2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and
void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense
thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.
3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not
liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or
faults or defects of work.
4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than
Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with
penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this
Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent
said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer
to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing
Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing
reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work,
thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty.
5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but
was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded
basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall
become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects
work covered by this Warranty.
6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks,
defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to
inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration.
7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work
and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources
lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall
not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work
according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract
was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.
E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this ___________ day of
___________________, ________________.
Whereas,
Of
Herein called the “Contractor”, has completed application of the following roof:
Owner:
Address of Owner:
Location:
Type of Roof:
Whereas, at the inception of such work, the Contractor agreed to guarantee the aforesaid roof against
faulty materials or workmanship for a limited period and subject to the conditions herein set forth:
Now, therefore, the Contractor hereby guarantees, subject to the conditions herein set forth, that during a
period of two (2) years from the date of Contract Completion of said roof he will, at his own cost and ex-
pense, make or cause to be made such repairs to said roof resulting solely from faults or defects in materi-
al or workmanship applied by or through the Contractor as may be necessary to maintain said roof in wa-
tertight condition. Guarantee shall include, but not be limited to, metal roof, roof insulation, sheet metal
fascia and soffits, sheet metal closures, trim and flashings, curbs at roof openings, gutters and down-
spouts, coping caps, and counter-flashings.
1. Specifically excluded from this Guarantee is any and all damage caused by lightning, windstorm,
hailstorm, or other unusual phenomena of the elements; foundation settlement; failure or cracking
of the roof deck; defects or faulty construction and/or leakage due to erosion and/or porosity of
chimneys, skylights, vents, supports, or other parts of the building, or fire. The gutters and valleys,
etc., must be kept clear and free of dirt and debris. The roof is not to be used as a promenade deck,
work deck, or sprayed or flooded, unless specifically agreed upon or specified at time of application
of roofing. If the roof is damaged by reason of any of the foregoing, this Guarantee shall thereupon
become null and void for the balance of the guarantee period unless such damage is repaired by the
Contractor at the expense of the party requesting such repairs.
2. Nothing in this instrument shall render the Contractor liable for consequential damages to the build-
ing or contents resulting from any defects in said roof.
3. No work shall be done on said roof including, but without limitation, openings made for flues,
vents, drains, sign braces, or other equipment fastened to or set on the roof unless the Contractor
shall be first notified, shall be given the opportunity to make the necessary roofing application rec-
ommendations with respect thereto, and such recommendations are complied with. Failure to ob-
serve this condition shall render this Guarantee null and void. The Contractor shall be paid for time
and material expended in making recommendations or repairs occasioned by the work of others on
said roof.
4. Repairs required under this Guarantee, either permanent of temporary, shall be made within three
(3) days after notice of the need for repairs. Should the Contractor fail to make such repairs within
the time period, the Owner may have such repairs made and charge the cost to the Contractor.
5. Guarantee period shall begin on the date of Contract completion for the Project or such date of roof
acceptance by the A/E and the Owner, if the date is after the date of Contract Completion.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Copings.
2. Roof-edge specialties.
3. Roof-edge drainage systems.
4. Reglets and counterflashings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
2. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof
hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.
3. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants between roof specialties and
adjacent materials.
1. Meet with Owner, A/E, Owner's insurer if applicable, roofing-system testing and
inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing-system manufacturer's
representative, Installer, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces
with or affects roof specialties, including installers of roofing materials and accessories.
2. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and
attachment to structural members.
3. Review special roof details, roof drainage, and condition of other construction that will
affect roof specialties.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of roof specialty indicated with factory-applied
color finishes.
1. Include Samples of each type of roof specialty to verify finish and color selection, in
manufacturer's standard sizes.
2. Include copings, roof-edge specialties reglets and counterflashings made from 12-inch
lengths of full-size components in specified material, and including fasteners, cover
joints, accessories, and attachments.
C. Product Test Reports: For copings and roof-edge flashings, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting,
or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high
humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof-specialty installation.
B. Coordination: Coordinate roof specialties with flashing, trim, and construction of parapets, roof
deck, roof and wall panels, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof
specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified
warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally
induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
B. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings and roof-edge specialties tested
according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures:
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components,
failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that
resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 COPINGS
A. Metal Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of metal coping cap in section lengths
not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; with corner units, end cap units, and concealed
splice plates with finish matching coping caps.
2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Coping Caps: Aluminum sheet, thickness as required to meet
performance requirements.
3. Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded or mechanically clinched and sealed
watertight as indicated on the drawings.
4. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Snap-on or face leg hooked to continuous cleat with
back leg fastener exposed, fabricated from coping-cap material.
A. Canted Roof-Edge Fascia and Gravel Stop: Manufactured, two-piece, roof-edge fascia
consisting of snap-on metal fascia cover in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet a continuous
formed galvanized-steel sheet cant, 0.028 inch thick, minimum, with extended vertical leg
terminating in a drip-edge cleat. Provide matching corner units.
2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Fascia Covers: Aluminum sheet, thickness as required to meet
performance requirements.
B. Roof-Edge Fascia: Manufactured, two-piece, roof-edge fascia consisting of snap-on metal fascia
cover in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet and a continuous metal receiver with integral
drip-edge cleat to engage fascia cover and secure single-ply roof membrane. Provide matching
corner units.
2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Fascia Covers: Aluminum sheet, thickness as required to meet
performance requirements.
C. One-Piece Gravel Stops: Manufactured, one-piece, metal gravel stop in section lengths not
exceeding 12 feet, with a horizontal flange and vertical leg fascia terminating in a drip edge, and
concealed splice plates of same material, finish, and shape as gravel stop. Provide matching
corner units.
2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Gravel Stops: Aluminum sheet, thickness as required to meet
performance requirements.
B. Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, with matching corner
units, ends, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch above front
edge. Furnish flat-stock gutter straps, gutter brackets, expansion joints, and expansion-joint
covers fabricated from same metal as gutters.
C. Downspouts: Corrugated rectangular complete with mitered elbows, manufactured from the
following exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and
anchors.
D. Parapet Scuppers: Manufactured with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch-wide wall flanges
to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof.
B. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and
counterflashing pieces, from the following exposed metal:
D. Accessories:
2.6 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with
temper to suit forming operations and performance required.
2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M; stable after testing at 240 deg F.
B. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
A. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet
performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color
of sheet metal.
2. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
3. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
4. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip
zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant of type, grade, class,
and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.
D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
E. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.9 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations
in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved
Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
1. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.
C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage where applicable, and
securely anchored.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Apply continuously under copings roof-edge specialties and reglets and counterflashings
and as indicated.
2. Coordinate application of self-adhering sheet underlayment under roof specialties with
requirements for continuity with adjacent air barrier materials.
B. Felt Underlayment: Install with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of
mechanical fasteners under roof specialties. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped
joints of not less than 2 inches.
A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof
specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use
fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, underlayments, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.
1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning
and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant.
3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in weathertight performance. Verify
shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.
4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted.
5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from
contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel roof specialties with
bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious
construction.
2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of
roof specialties for waterproof performance.
2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint
members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures.
D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by
fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
F. Seal joints as required for weathertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in
joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.
A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with
concealed fasteners.
B. Anchor copings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet
performance requirements.
1. Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anchor plates
anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance
requirements.
2. Interlock face-leg drip edge into continuous cleat anchored to substrate at manufacturer's
required spacing that meets performance requirements. Anchor back leg of coping with
screw fasteners and elastomeric washers at manufacturer's required spacing that meets
performance requirements.
A. Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed
fasteners.
B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to
meet performance requirements.
B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly
anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 24 inches apart. Attach ends with rivets and seal
with sealant to make watertight. Slope to downspouts.
1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet apart.
Install expansion-joint caps.
C. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers
with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch away from walls;
locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.
1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts at grade to direct water away from building.
D. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low-slope roofs. Set in asphalt roofing
cement.
E. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers through parapet where indicated. Continuously support
scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered
edge strips, and under roofing membrane.
1. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and seal or solder to scupper.
2. Loosely lock front edge of scupper with conductor head.
B. Embedded Reglets: See Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installation of reglets.
C. Surface-Mounted Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without embedded
reglets is indicated on Drawings. Install at height so that inserted counterflashings overlap 4
inches over top edge of base flashings.
D. Counterflashings: Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers; ensure that
counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a
minimum of 4 inches and bed with butyl sealant. Fit counterflashings tightly to base flashings.
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On
completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal
filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition
during construction.
D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof hatches.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and stairs
for access to roof hatches.
2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-formed metal
flashing, roof-drainage systems, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet
metal trim and accessories.
3. Section 233423 "HVAC Power Ventilators" for power roof-mounted ventilators.
4. Section 237413 "Packaged, Outdoor, Central-Station Air-Handling Units" for standard
curbs specified with rooftop units.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing
and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
1. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate
dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- and field-
assembled work.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, prepared on
Samples of size to adequately show color.
A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-
mounted items. Show the following:
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally
induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
A. Roof Hatches: Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated double-walled curbs, welded or
mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing and
weathertight perimeter gasketing, straight sides, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at
perimeter bottom.
C. Loads: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. external live load and 20-lbf/sq. ft. internal uplift load.
E. Construction:
F. Hardware: Spring operators, hold-open arm, stainless-steel spring latch with turn handles,
stainless-steel butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.
G. Safety Railing System: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard system including rails, clamps,
fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and accessories required for a complete installation;
attached to roof hatch and complying with 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements and authorities having
jurisdiction.
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, manufacturer's standard alloy for finish required, with temper
to suit forming operations and performance required.
1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for
type of use, finished to match assembly where used; otherwise mill finished.
C. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M
unless otherwise indicated.
E. Galvanized-Steel Tube: ASTM A 500/A 500M, round tube, hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
B. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity
of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F, thickness as indicated.
C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for
aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or
chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.
D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
E. Underlayment:
1. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt,
nonperforated.
2. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.
3. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of
slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified
asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
4. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application
and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being
fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the
following unless otherwise indicated:
5. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: Series 300 stainless
steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
6. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
7. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586/D 4586M, asbestos free, of consistency required for
application.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without warping, jogs
in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads.
3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete
installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or
loosening of fasteners and seals.
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from
contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating
where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with manufacturer's recommended
slip sheet.
3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of
roof accessories for waterproof performance.
C. Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level.
D. Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with each
other.
E. Roof-Hatch Installation:
1. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating
mechanism and hardware.
2. Attach safety railing system to roof-hatch curb.
3. Attach ladder-assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:.
B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of
firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
D. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a
qualified testing agency.
A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been
installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using
natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.8 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other
gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration
firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming
openings, and with penetrating items if any.
D. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to
install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by
penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting
agency for conditions indicated.
B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during
exposure to moisture.
C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with
intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil
on one side.
G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,
fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a
nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.
I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand
and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
2.4 MIXING
A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application,
comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate
proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer
speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce
products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings
immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following
requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials
that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable
of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose
particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
3.3 INSTALLATION
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths
required to achieve fire ratings.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of
firestopping.
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and
penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with
the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering
not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes.
1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, at 15 feet from end of wall and at
intervals not exceeding 30 feet.
B. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out
and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials
to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
T Rating — 0 , 1/2 and 1 (See Items 2 and 3) FT Rating — 0 , 1/2 and 1 (See Items 2 and 3)
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-8086 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 3
1. Wall Assembly — The 1 or 2 hr fire-rated gypsum board/stud wall assembly shall be constructed of the materials and
in the manner described within the individual U300, U400, V400 or W400 Series Wall or Partition Designs in the UL Fire
Resistance Directory and shall incorporate the following construction features:
A. Studs — Wall framing shall consist of either wood studs or steel channel studs. Wood studs to
consist of nom 2 by 4 in. (51 by 102 mm) lumber spaced max 16 in. (406 mm) OC. Steel studs to
be min 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) wide and spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
B. Gypsum Board* — Nom 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick gypsum board as specified in the individual
Wall and Partition Design. Opening in gypsum board to be max 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) diam for 2"
device and max 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) diam for 4" device.
The F, FH Ratings of the firestop system are dependent upon the hourly rating of the
wall in which it is installed.
2. Cables — Within the loading area for each firestop device, the cables may represent a 0 to 100 percent visual fill.
Cables to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. Any combination of
the following types of cables may be used:
A. Max 100 pair No. 24 AWG (or smaller) copper conductor telecommunication cable with
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing and insulation.
B. Max 7/C No. 12 AWG copper conductor control cable with PVC or XLPE jacket and insulation.
E. Max RG 6/U coaxial cable with fluorinated ethylene insulation and jacketing.
F. Fiber optic cable with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene (PE) jacket and insulation having
a max diam of 1/2 in. (13 mm).
G. Max 20/C No. 22 AWG shielded printer cable with PVC jacket.
H. Through-Penetrating Product* — Two copper conductors No. 18 AWG (or smaller) Power or
Non Power Limited Fire Alarm Cable with or without a jacket under a metal armor.
I. Max. 1/4 in. (6 mm) diameter S-Video Cable consisting of 2 max 24 AWG 75 ohm coax or
twisted pair cable with PE insulation and PVC jacket .
K. Through Penetrating Product* — Any cables, Armored Cable+ or Metal Clad Cable+
currently Classified under the Through Penetrating Product category. See Through Penetrating
Product (XHLY) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of manufacturers.
For openings with cables, the T, FT, FTH Ratings are 0 hr for 1 hr rated wall assemblies.
For 2 hr rated wall assemblies, the T, FT, FTH Ratings are 1 hr (see Item 3 and 4 also).
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-8086 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 3 of 3
3. Metallic Penetrants — One pipe or tube to be installed in opening. The following types and sizes of through
penetrants may be used:
A. Steel Pipe — Nom 2 in. (51 mm) diam (or smaller) Schedule 5 (or heavier) steel pipe.
B. Iron Pipe — Nom 2 in. (51 mm) diam (or smaller) cast or ductile iron pipe.
C. Copper Pipe — Nom 2 in. (51 mm) diam (or smaller) Regular (or heavier) copper pipe.
D. Copper Tube — Nom 2 in. (51 mm) diam (or smaller) Type L (or heavier) copper tube.
E. Conduit — Nom 2 in. (51 mm) diam (or smaller) steel conduit, nom 2 in. (51 mm) diam (or
smaller) steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or nom 1 in. (25 mm) diam (or smaller) flexible
steel conduit.
For openings with metallic penetrants the hourly T, FT, FTH Ratings are 1/2 hr.
4. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings, tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not shown). Firestop device to be
installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into wall such that ends project an
equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. The annular space between the device and the
periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with flanges that are spun clockwise onto
device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of wall. As an alternate to gasket material, sealant
(Item 5) may be used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
5. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Sealant — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 1/2 in. (13 mm)
thickness of fill material applied within the annulus between firestop device and wall, flush with both surfaces of wall, and
an additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead applied around periphery of device.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — FS-ONE, FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant or CP 606
Sealant
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-8085 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 2
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
T Rating — 0 and 3/4 Hr (See Item 1) FT Rating — 0 and 3/4 Hr (See Item 1)
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-8085 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 2
1. Wall Assembly — The 1 or 2 hr fire-rated gypsum board/stud wall assembly shall be constructed of the materials and
in the manner described within the individual U300, U400 or V400 Series Wall or Partition Designs in the UL Fire
Resistance Directory and shall incorporate the following construction features:
A. Studs — Wall framing shall consist of either wood studs or steel channel studs. Wood studs to
consist of nom 2 by 4 in. (51 by 102 mm) lumber spaced max 16 in. (406 mm) OC. Steel studs to
be min 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) wide and spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
B. Gypsum Board* — Nom 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick gypsum board as specified in the individual
Wall and Partition Design. Opening in gypsum board to be max 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) diam for 2 in.
(51 mm) device and max 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) diam for 4 in. (102 mm) device.
The hourly F, FH Rating of the firestop system is dependent upon the hourly rating of the wall in which
it is installed. The T, FT and FTH Rating is 0 and 3/4 hr for 1 and 2 hr rated wall assemblies,
respectively.
2. Air Conditioning (AC) Line Sets — AC line set consists of two pipes or tubes (Item 2A), tubing insulation (Item 2B)
and a thermostat cable (Item 2C). The AC line sets shall be rigidly supported on both sides of the floor or wall assembly.
2A. Metallic Penetrants — A max of two pipes or tubes to be installed in each AC line set. Of the two pipes or tubes,
only one may have a nom diam greater than 3/4 in. (19 mm). The following types and sizes of through penetrants may
be used:
A. Steel Pipe — Nom 1 in. (25 mm) diam (or smaller) Schedule 5 (or heavier) steel pipe.
B. Iron Pipe — Nom 1 in. (25 mm) diam (or smaller) cast or ductile iron pipe.
C. Copper Pipe — Nom 1 in. (25 mm) diam (or smaller) Regular (or heavier) copper pipe.
D. Copper Tube — Nom 1 in. (25 mm) diam (or smaller) Type L (or heavier) copper tube.
2B. Tube Insulation - Plastics# — Nom 3/4 in. (19 mm) thick acrylonitrile butadiene/polyvinyl chloride (AB/PVC)
flexible foam furnished in the form of tubing. The tube insulation may be installed on one max 1 in. (25 mm) diam pipe or
tube in each AC line set. The space between the insulated and uninsulated pipes or tubes within each AC line set shall be
0 in. (point contact).
See Plastics# (QMFZ2) category in the Plastics Recognized Component Directory for names of manufacturers. Any
Recognized Component tube insulation meeting the above specifications and having a UL 94 Flammability Classification of
945VA may be used.
2C. Cable — One 4 pair No. 18 AWG (or smaller) thermostat cable with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) insulation and jacket
materials may be installed with each AC line set.
3. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings, tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not shown). Firestop device to be
installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into wall such that ends project an
equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. The annular space between the device and the
periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with flanges that are spun clockwise onto
device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of wall. As an alternate to gasket material, sealant
(Item 4) may be used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Sealant — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 1/2 in. (13 mm)
thickness of fill material applied within the annulus between firestop device and wall, flush with both surfaces of wall, and
an additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead applied around periphery of device.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — FS-ONE, FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant or CP 606
Sealant
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-3335 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 3
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
T Ratings - 0, 1/2 and 1 Hr (See Item 2) FT Ratings - 0, 1/2 and 1 Hr (See Item 2)
L Ratings At 400 F - See Items 2 and 4 FTH Ratings - 0, 1/2 and 1 Hr (See Item 2)
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-3335 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 3
1. Wall Assembly — The 1 or 2 hr fire rated gypsum board/stud wall assembly shall be constructed of the materials and
in the manner described within the individual U300, U400, V400 or W400 Series Wall and Partition Designs in the UL Fire
Resistance Directory and shall incorporate the following construction features:
A. Studs — Wall framing shall consist of either wood studs or steel channel studs. Wood studs to
consist of nom 2 by 4 in. (51 by 102 mm) lumber spaced max 16 in. (406 mm) OC. Steel studs to
be min 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) wide and spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC. Steel studs to be min 3-1/2
in. (89 mm) wide when 3/4 in. (19 mm) thick gypsum board is used (see Item 1B).
B. Gypsum Board* — Nom 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick gypsum board as specified in the individual
Wall and Partition Design. Alternately, min one layer of nom 3/4 in. (19 mm) thick gypsum board
on each side of wall as specified in the individual Wall and Partition Design may be used. Opening
in gypsum board to be max 3 in. (76 mm) diam for 2" device and max 5 in. (127 mm) diam for 4"
device.
The hourly F and FH Ratings of the firestop system are dependent upon the hourly rating of the wall in
which it is installed.
2. Cables — Within the loading area for each firestop device, the cables may represent a 0 to 100 percent visual fill.
Cables to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. Any combination of
the following types of cables may be used:
A. Max 100 pair No. 24 AWG (or smaller) copper conductor telecommunication cable with
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing and insulation.
B. Max 7/C No. 12 AWG copper conductor control cable with PVC or XLPE jacket and insulation.
E. Max RG 6/U coaxial cable with fluorinated ethylene insulation and jacketing.
F. Fiber optic cable with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene (PE) jacket and insulation having
a max diam of 1/2 in. (13 mm).
G. Max 20/C No. 22 AWG shielded printer cable with PVC jacket.
H. Through-Penetrating Product* - Two copper conductors No. 18 AWG (or smaller) Power or
Non Power Limited Fire Alarm Cable with or without a jacket under a metal armor.
I. Max. 1/4 in. (6 mm) diameter S-Video Cable consisting of 2 max 24 AWG 75 ohm coax or
twisted pair cable with PE insulation and PVC jacket .
K. Through Penetrating Product* — Any cables, Armored Cable+ or Metal Clad Cable+
currently Classified under the Through Penetrating Product category. See Through Penetrating
Product (XHLY) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of manufacturers
When the hourly rating of the wall assembly is 1 hr, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 0 hr.
When the hourly rating of the wall assembly is 2 hr, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1 hr
except that, when Item 2J or 2K is used, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1/2 hr
L Ratings vary depending on whether the gasketing material (see Item 3) or the sealant
(Item 4) is used. See Table below for L Ratings.
100% Item 2D 4.9 4.9 1.3 3.5 Less Less Less Less
only than 1 than 1 than 1 than 1
100% Any cables 9.2 9.2 9.6 11.8 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.6
(Item 2) in
any
combination
3. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings, twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not shown). Firestop device to be installed
in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. As an option, the inner fabric seal may remain open except
that, to attain the L Rating, the inner fabric seal shall be twisted to completely close off the opening within device. Device
slid into wall such that ends project an equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. Device
provided with flanges that are spun clockwise onto device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of
wall. The annular space between the device and the periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device
flanges are to be secured to wall with min two 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) long drywall screws except that for blank devices,
minimum four screws shall be used. . As an alternate to gasket material, fill material (Item 4) may be used.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-3335 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 3 of 3
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 5/8 in. (16 mm) thickness of fill
material applied within the annulus between firestop device and wall, flush with both surfaces of wall. When sealant is
used, for L Ratings, apply an additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead of FS-ONE or CP 606 at the device/wall interface
on both sides of wall prior to installing flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — FS-ONE Sealant, FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant, CP
606 Sealant or CP 618 Putty
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-3189 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 3
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
F Rating - 2 Hr F Rating - 2 Hr
T Ratings - 1/2 and 1-1/2 Hr (See Item 2) FT Ratings - 1/2 and 1-1/2 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At Ambient - 1.2 and Less Than 1 CFM per Device (See FH Rating - 2 Hr
Items 2, 3A and 3A1)
L Ratings At 400 F - 1.3, 1.6 and Less Than 1 CFM per Device FTH Ratings - 1/2 and 1-1/2 Hr (See Item 2)
(See Items 2, 3A and 3A1)
L Rating At Ambient - Less Than 1.2 and CFM per Device (See
Items 2, 3A and 3A1)
L Ratings At 400 F - 1.3, 1.6 and Less Than 1 CFM per Device
(See Items 2, 3A and 3A1)
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-3189 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 3
1. Wall Assembly — Minimum 5 in. (127 mm) thick reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or 1600-2400
3
kg/m ) concrete wall. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Maximum five individual
openings may be provided (see Item 3A). Diam of opening for each firestop device shall not exceed 4-1/2 in. (114 mm)
and shall be sized to the OD of the firestop device.
See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of
manufacturers.
2. Cables — The aggregate cross-sectional area of cables in firestop devices to be min 0 percent (blank) to max 100
percent visual fill. Cables to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. Any
combination of the following types and sizes of cables may be used:
A. Max 100 pair No. 24 AWG (or smaller) copper conductor telecommunication cable with
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing and insulation.
B. Max 7/C No. 12 AWG copper conductor control cable with PVC or XLPE jacket and insulation.
E. Max RG 6/U coaxial cable with fluorinated ethylene insulation and jacketing.
F. Fiber optic cable with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene (PE) jacket and insulation having
a max diam of 1/2 in. (13 mm).
G. Max 20/C No. 22 AWG shielded printer cable with PVC jacket.
H. Through-Penetrating Product* - Two copper conductors No. 18 AWG (or smaller) Power or
Non Power Limited Fire Alarm Cable with or without a jacket under a metal armor.
I. Max. 1/4 in. (6 mm) diameter S-Video Cable consisting of 2 max 24 AWG 75 ohm coax or
twisted pair cable with PE insulation and PVC jacket .
K. Through Penetrating Product* — Any cables, Armored Cable+ or Metal Clad Cable+
currently Classified under the Through Penetrating Product category. See Through Penetrating
Product (XHLY) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of manufacturers.
For opening with cables, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1/2 hr. For blank opening (no
cables), the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1-1/2 hr.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-3189 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 3 of 3
L Ratings vary depending on whether the gasketing material (see Item 3) or the sealant
(Item 4) is used. See Table below for L Ratings.
A. Firestop Device* — Maximum five firestop devices grouped in two row configuration as
depicted. The individual openings in the wall for each device are spaced min 2-7/16 in. (62 mm)
apart such that the device flanges of adjacent devices are no closer than point contact. Firestop
device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent material
rings, twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not shown). Firestop device
to be installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. As an option, the
inner fabric seal within each device may remain open except that, for all blank devices (no
cables), the inner fabric seal shall be twisted to completely close the device. In addition, to attain
the L Rating, the inner fabric seal must also be twisted to completely close the opening within
each device. Device slid into wall such that ends project an equal distance from the approximate
centerline of the wall assembly. Device provided with flanges that are spun clockwise onto device
threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of wall. The annular space between
each device and the periphery of the opening shall be nom 0 in. (point contact). Device flanges
are to be secured to wall with min two 1-1/4 in. (32 mm) long masonry screws or anchors. As an
alternate to gasket material, sealant (Item 3B) may be used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed
Sleeve, CP 653 and CP 653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
A1. Firestop Device* — Same as Item A above except maximum four firestop devices grouped
in one row as depicted. The individual openings in the wall for each device are spaced min 1-7/16
in. (36.5 mm) apart. Device flanges may overlap one another. As an option, the inner fabric seal
may remain open except that, to attain the L Rating, the inner fabric seal shall be twisted to
completely close off the opening within each device.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed
Sleeve, CP 653 and CP 653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
B. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3A), min 1/4 in.
(6 mm) bead of fill material applied around periphery of each device to wall interface on both
sides of wall prior to installing device flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 606 or FS-ONE Sealant or FS-
ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant.
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-3384 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 4
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
T Ratings - 1/2 and 1 Hr (See Item 2) FT Ratings - 1/2 and 1 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At Ambient - 1.2 and Less Than 1 CFM per Device (See FH Ratings - 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1)
Items 2, 3A and 3A1)
L Ratings At 400 F - 1.3, 1.6 and Less Than 1 CFM per Device FTH Ratings - 1/2 and 1 Hr (See Item 2)
(See Items 2, 3A and 3A1)
L Ratings At 400 F - 1.3, 1.6 and Less Than 1 CFM per Device
(See Items 2, 3A and 3A1)
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-3384 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 4
1. Wall Assembly — The 1 or 2 hr fire rated gypsum board/stud wall assembly shall be constructed of the materials and
in the manner described in the individual U400, V400 or W400 Series Wall and Partition Designs in the UL Fire Resistance
Directory and shall include the following construction features:
A. Studs — Wall framing shall consist of steel channel studs. Steel studs to be min 3-1/2 in. (89
mm) wide and spaced 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
B. Gypsum Board* — The gypsum board type, thickness, number of layers, fastener type and
sheet orientation shall be as specified in the individual U400, V400 or W400 Series Designs in the
UL Fire Resistance Directory. Maximum five individual openings may be provided (see Item 3A).
Diam of opening for each firestop device shall not exceed 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) and shall be sized to
the OD of the firestop device.
The hourly F and FH Ratings of the firestop system are equal to the hourly fire rating of
the wall assembly in which it is installed.
2. Cables — The aggregate cross-sectional area of cables in firestop device to be min 0 percent (blank) to max 100
percent visual fill. Cables to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. Any
combination of the following types and sizes of cables may be used:
A. Max 100 pair No. 24 AWG (or smaller) copper conductor telecommunication cable with
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing and insulation.
B. Max 7/C No. 12 AWG copper conductor control cable with PVC or XLPE jacket and insulation.
E. Max RG 6/U coaxial cable with fluorinated ethylene insulation and jacketing.
F. Fiber optic cable with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene (PE) jacket and insulation having
a max diam of 1/2 in. (13 mm).
G. Max 20/C No. 22 AWG shielded printer cable with PVC jacket.
H. Through-Penetrating Product* - Two copper conductors No. 18 AWG (or smaller) Power or
Non Power Limited Fire Alarm Cable with or without a jacket under a metal armor.
I. Max. 1/4 in. (6 mm) diameter S-Video Cable consisting of 2 max 24 AWG 75 ohm coax or
twisted pair cable with PE insulation and PVC jacket .
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-3384 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 3 of 4
K. Through Penetrating Product* — Any cables, Armored Cable+ or Metal Clad Cable+
currently Classified under the Through Penetrating Product category. See Through Penetrating
Product (XHLY) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of manufacturers.
For opening with cables, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1/2 hr. For blank opening (no
cables), when the hourly rating of the wall assembly is 2 hr, the T, FT and FTH Ratings
are 1 hr. For blank opening (no cables), when the hourly rating of the wall assembly is 1
hr, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1/2 hr.
L Ratings vary depending on whether the gasketing material (see Item 3) or the sealant
(Item 4) is used. See Table below for L Ratings.
L Rating, CFM
A. Firestop Device* — Maximum five firestop devices grouped in two row configuration as
depicted (Configuration A). The individual openings in the wall for each device are spaced min
2-7/16 in. (62 mm) apart such that the device flanges of adjacent devices are no closer than point
contact. Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing,
intumescent material rings, twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not
shown). Firestop device to be installed in accordance with the accompanying installation
instructions. As an option, the inner fabric seal within each device may remain open except that,
for all blank devices (no cables), the inner fabric seal shall be twisted to completely close the
device. In addition, to attain the L Rating, the inner fabric seal must also be twisted to
completely close the opening within each device. Device slid into wall such that ends project an
equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. Device provided with flanges
that are spun clockwise onto device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides
of wall. The annular space between each device and the periphery of the opening shall be nom 0
in. (point contact). Device flanges are to be secured to wall with min two 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) long
drywall screws. As an alternate to gasket material, sealant (Item 3B) may be used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed
Sleeve, CP 653 and CP 653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
A1. Firestop Device* — Same as Item A above except maximum four firestop devices grouped
in one row as depicted (Configuration B). The individual openings in the wall for each device are
spaced min 1-7/16 in. (36.5 mm) apart. Device flanges may overlap one another. As an option,
the inner fabric seal may remain open except that, to attain the L Rating, the inner fabric seal
shall be twisted to completely close off the opening within each device.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed
Sleeve, CP 653 and CP 653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
B. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3A), min 1/4 in.
(6 mm) bead of fill material applied around periphery of each device to wall interface on both
sides of wall prior to installing device flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 606, FS-ONE Sealant or FS-ONE
MAX Intumescent Sealant
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-3384 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 4 of 4
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.C-AJ-3281 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 3
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
F Rating — 2 Hr F Rating — 2 Hr
T Ratings — 0 and 3/4 Hr (See Item 2) FT Ratings — 0 and 3/4 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At 400 F — Less Than 1 CFM (See Item 2) FTH Ratings — 0 and 3/4 Hr (See Item 2)
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.C-AJ-3281 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 3
1. Floor or Wall Assembly — Min 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) thick reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or
3
1600-2400 kg/m ) concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Floor may also be
constructed of any min 6 in. thick UL Classified hollow-core Precast Concrete Units*. Opening in floor or wall to be max
3 in. (76 mm) diam for 2" device and max 5 in. (127 mm) diam for 4" device.
See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) and Precast Concrete Units (CFTV) categories in the Fire
Resistance Directory for names of manufacturers.
2. Cables — Within the loading area for each firestop device, the cables may represent a 0 to 100 percent visual fill.
Cables to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both sides of floor or wall assembly. Any
combination of the following types of cables may be used:
A. Max 100 pair No. 24 AWG (or smaller) copper conductor telecommunication cable with
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing and insulation.
B. Max 7/C No. 12 AWG copper conductor control cable with PVC or XLPE jacket and insulation.
E. Max RG 6/U coaxial cable with fluorinated ethylene insulation and jacketing.
F. Fiber optic cable with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene (PE) jacket and insulation having
a max diam of 1/2 in. (13 mm).
G. Max 20/C No. 22 AWG shielded printer cable with PVC jacket.
H. Through-Penetrating Product* - Two copper conductors No. 18 AWG (or smaller) Power or
Non Power Limited Fire Alarm Cable with or without a jacket under a metal armor.
I. Max. 1/4 in. (6 mm) diameter S-Video Cable consisting of two max 24 AWG 75 ohm coax or
twisted pair cable with PE insulation and PVC jacket.
See Through Penetrating Product (XHLY) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names
of manufacturers.
The T, FT and FTH Ratings for the firestop system are 1/2 hr except that when cable
types 2J or 2K are used, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 0 hr.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.C-AJ-3281 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 3 of 3
3. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings and tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasket material (not shown). Firestop device to be
installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into floor or wall such that ends project
an equal distance from the approximate centerline of the assembly. The annular space between the device and the
periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with flanges that are spun clockwise onto
device threads, and gasket material butting tightly to both sides of floor or wall. As an alternate to gasket material,
sealant (Item 4) may be used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — Sealant — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 1/2 in. (13 mm)
thickness of fill material applied within the annulus between firestop device and periphery of opening, flush with top
surface of floor or both surfaces of wall, and an additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead applied at the device/floor or wall interface
on top side of floor or both sides of wall assembly prior to installing flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — FS-ONE, FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant or CP 606
Sealant
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.C-AJ-3282 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 3
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
F Rating — 2 Hr F Rating — 2 Hr
T Ratings — 0, 3/4 and 1 Hr (See Item 2) FT Ratings — 0, 3/4 and 1 Hr (See Item 2)
FH Rating — 2 Hr
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.C-AJ-3282 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 3
1. Floor or Wall Assembly — Min 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) thick reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or
3
1600-2400 kg/m ) concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Opening in floor or
wall to be max 4 in. (102 mm) diam for 2" device and max 6 in. (152 mm) diam for 4" device.
See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of
manufacturers.
1A. Floor Assembly — (Not Shown) — As an alternate to Item 1, fire-rated unprotected concrete and steel floor
assembly may be used. Floor assembly to be constructed of the materials and in the manner described in the individual
D900 Series Floor-Ceiling Design in the UL Fire Resistance Directory and shall include the following construction features:
A. Concrete — Min 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) thick reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf
3
or 1600-2400 kg/m ) concrete.
B. Steel Floor and Form Units — Composite or noncomposite max 3 in. (76 mm) deep fluted
galv units as specified in the individual Floor-Ceiling design. Opening in floor or wall to be max 4
in. (102 mm) diam for 2" device and max 6 in. (152 mm) diam for 4" device.
2. Cables — Within the loading area for each firestop device, the cables may represent a 0 to 100 percent visual fill.
Cables to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both sides of floor or wall assembly. Any
combination of the following types of cables may be used:
A. Max 100 pair No. 24 AWG (or smaller) copper conductor telecommunication cable with
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing and insulation.
B. Max 7/C No. 12 AWG copper conductor control cable with PVC or XLPE jacket and insulation.
E. Max RG 6/U coaxial cable with fluorinated ethylene insulation and jacketing.
F. Fiber optic cable with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene (PE) jacket and insulation having
a max diam of 1/2 in. (13 mm).
G. Max 20/C No. 22 AWG shielded printer cable with PVC jacket.
H. Through-Penetrating Product* — Two copper conductors No. 18 AWG (or smaller) Power or
Non Power Limited Fire Alarm Cable with or without a jacket under a metal armor.
I. Max. 1/4 in.(6 mm) diameter S-Video Cable consisting of 2 max 24 AWG 75 ohm coax or
twisted pair cable with PE insulation and PVC jacket.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.C-AJ-3282 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 3 of 3
See Through Penetrating Product (XHLY) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names
of manufacturers.
The T, FT and FTH Ratings for the firestop system are 3/4 hr except that for blank
openings with no cables, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1 hr, and when cable types 2J or
2K are used, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 0 hr.
3. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings, tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not shown, optional). Firestop
device to be installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into floor or wall such that
ends project an equal distance from the approximate centerline of the assembly. The annular space between the device
and the periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with flange(s) that are spun clockwise
onto device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to top side of floor or both sides of wall.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — Mortar — Min 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) thickness of fill material applied within the annulus
between firestop device and periphery of opening, flush with bottom surface of floor or both surfaces of wall.
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.C-AJ-3283 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 3
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
F Rating — 2 Hr F Rating — 2 Hr
T Ratings — 0 and 1/2 Hr (See Item 2) FT Ratings — 0 and 1/2 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At 400 F — Less Than 1 CFM (See Item 2) FTH Ratings — 0 and 1/2 Hr (See Item 2)
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.C-AJ-3283 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 3
1. Floor or Wall Assembly — Min 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) thick reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or
3
1600-2400 kg/m ) concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Opening in floor or
wall to be max 3 in. (76 mm) diam for 2" device and max 5 in. (127 mm) diam for 4" device.
See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of
manufacturers.
1A. Floor Assembly — (Not Shown) — As an alternate to Item 1, fire-rated unprotected concrete and steel floor
assembly may be used. Floor assembly to be constructed of the materials and in the manner described in the individual
D900 Series Floor-Ceiling Design in the UL Fire Resistance Directory and shall include the following construction features:
A. Concrete — Min 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) thick reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf
3
or 1600-2400 kg/m ) concrete.
B. Steel Floor and Form Units — Composite or noncomposite max 3 in. (76 mm) deep fluted
galv units as specified in the individual Floor-Ceiling design. Opening in floor or wall to be max 3
in. (76 mm) diam for 2" device and max 5 in. (127 mm) diam for 4" device.
2. Cables — Within the loading area for the firestop device, the cables may represent a 0 to 100 percent visual fill. Cables
to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both sides of floor or wall assembly. Any combination of
the following types of cables may be used:
A. Max 100 pair No. 24 AWG (or smaller) copper conductor telecommunication cable with
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing and insulation.
B. Max 7/C No. 12 AWG copper conductor control cable with PVC or XLPE jacket and insulation.
E. Max RG 6/U coaxial cable with fluorinated ethylene insulation and jacketing.
F. Fiber optic cable with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene (PE) jacket and insulation having
a max diam of 1/2 in. (13 mm).
G. Max 20/C No. 22 AWG shielded printer cable with PVC jacket.
H. Through-Penetrating Product* — Two copper conductors No. 18 AWG (or smaller) Power or
Non Power Limited Fire Alarm Cable with or without a jacket under a metal armor.
I. Max 1/4 in. (6 mm) diameter S-Video Cable consisting of 2 max 24 AWG 75 ohm coax or
twisted pair cable with PE insulation and PVC jacket.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.C-AJ-3283 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 3 of 3
See Through Penetrating Product (XHLY) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names
of manufacturers.
The T, FT and FTH Ratings for the firestop system are 1/2 hr except that when cable
types 2J or 2K are used, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 0 hr.
3. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings, tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasket material (not shown). Firestop device to be
installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into floor or wall such that ends project
an equal distance from the approximate centerline of the assembly. The annular space between the device and the
periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with flange(s) that are spun clockwise onto
device threads, over gasket material butting tightly to top side of floor or both sides of wall. In floors, when FS-ONE
Sealant is used and installed flush with bottom of floor, device flange shall be threaded tightly to bottom side of floor. In
floors, device flange to be secured to floor with min two 1-1/4 in. (32 mm) long steel masonry screws or anchors. As an
alternate to gasket material, sealant (Item 4) may be used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 1/2 in. (13 mm) thickness of fill
material applied within the annulus between firestop device and periphery of opening, flush with top surface of floor or
both sides of wall. As an option, when FS-ONE Sealant is used, the fill material can be installed flush with bottom of floor.
For L Ratings when sealant is used, an additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead of fill material is applied at the
device/floor or device/wall interface on top or bottom side of floor or both sides of wall assembly prior to
installing flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 618 Firestop Putty, FS-ONE Sealant or FS-ONE MAX
Intumescent Sealant.
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.C-AJ-3284 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 3
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
F Rating — 3 Hr F Rating — 3 Hr
T Ratings — 0 and 1/2 Hr (See Item 2) FT Ratings — 0 and 1/2 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At 400 F — Less Than 1 CFM (See Item 2) FTH Ratings — 0 and 1/2 Hr (See Item 2)
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.C-AJ-3284 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 3
1. Floor or Wall Assembly — Min 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) thick reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or
3
1600-2400 kg/m ) concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Floor may also be
constructed of any min 6 in. thick UL Classified hollow-core Precast Concrete Units*. Opening in floor or wall to be max
3 in. (76 mm) diam for 2" device and max 5 in. (127 mm) diam for 4" device.
See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) and Precast Concrete Units (CFTV) categories in the Fire
Resistance Directory for names of manufacturers.
2. Cables — Within the loading area for each firestop device, the cables may represent a 0 to 100 percent visual fill.
Cables to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both sides of floor or wall assembly. Any
combination of the following types of cables may be used:
A. Max 100 pair No. 24 AWG (or smaller) copper conductor telecommunication cable with
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing and insulation.
B. Max 7/C No. 12 AWG copper conductor control cable with PVC or XLPE jacket and insulation.
E. Max RG 6/U coaxial cable with fluorinated ethylene insulation and jacketing.
F. Fiber optic cable with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene (PE) jacket and insulation having
a max diam of 1/2 in. (13 mm).
G. Max 20/C No. 22 AWG shielded printer cable with PVC jacket.
H. Through-Penetrating Product* — Two copper conductors No. 18 AWG (or smaller) Power or
Non Power Limited Fire Alarm Cable with or without a jacket under a metal armor.
I. Max 1/4 in. (6 mm) diameter S-Video Cable consisting of 2 max 24 AWG 75 ohm coax or
twisted pair cable with PE insulation and PVC jacket.
See Through Penetrating Product (XHLY) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names
of manufacturers.
The T, FT and FTH Ratings for the firestop system are 1/2 hr except that when cable
types 2J or 2K are used, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 0 hr.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.C-AJ-3284 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 3 of 3
3. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings, tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasket material (not shown). Firestop device to be
installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into floor or wall such that ends project
an equal distance from the approximate centerline of the assembly. The annular space between the device and the
periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with flange(s) that are spun clockwise onto
device threads, over gasket material butting tightly to bottom side of floor or both sides of wall. In floors, device flange to
be secured to floor with min two 1-1/4 in. (32 mm) long masonry screws or anchors. As an alternate to gasket material,
sealant (Item 4) may be used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 1/2 in. (13 mm) thickness of
FS-ONE Sealant or min 1 in. (25 mm) thickness of CP 618 Putty applied within the annulus between firestop device and
periphery of opening, flush with bottom surface of floor or both sides of wall. For L Rating when sealant or putty is
used, an additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead of fill material shall be applied at the device/floor or device/wall
interface on bottom side of floor or both sides of wall assembly prior to installing flange(s).
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 618 Firestop Putty, FS-ONE Sealant or FS-ONE MAX
Intumescent Sealant.
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.C-AJ-3285 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 3
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
F Rating — 3 Hr F Rating — 3 Hr
T Ratings — 0, 1, 1-1/2 and 3 Hr (See Item 2) FT Ratings — 0, 1, 1-1/2 and 3 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At 400 F — Less Than 1 CFM (See Items 2 and 4) FTH Ratings — 0, 1, 1-1/2 and 3 Hr (See Item 2)
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.C-AJ-3285 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 3
3
1. Floor or Wall Assembly — Reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or 1600-2400 kg/m ) concrete. Min
4-1/2 in. (114 mm) thick floors and min 5 in. (127 mm) thick walls. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified
Concrete Blocks*. Floor may also be constructed of any min 6 in. (152 mm) thick UL Classified hollow-core Precast
Concrete Units*. Opening in floor or wall to be max 3 in. (76 mm) diam for 2 in. (51 mm) device and max 5 in. (127
mm) diam for 4 in. (102 mm) device.
See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) and Precast Concrete Units (CFTV) categories in the Fire
Resistance Directory for names of manufacturers.
2. Cables — Within the loading area for each firestop device, the cables may represent a 0 to 100 percent visual fill.
Cables to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both sides of floor or wall assembly. Any
combination of the following types of cables may be used:
A. Max 100 pair No. 24 AWG (or smaller) copper conductor telecommunication cable with
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing and insulation.
B. Max 7/C No. 12 AWG copper conductor control cable with PVC or XLPE jacket and insulation.
E. Max RG 6/U coaxial cable with fluorinated ethylene insulation and jacketing.
F. Fiber optic cable with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene (PE) jacket and insulation having
a max diam of 1/2 in. (13 mm).
G. Max 20/C No. 22 AWG shielded printer cable with PVC jacket.
H. Through-Penetrating Product* — Two copper conductors No. 18 AWG (or smaller) Power or
Non Power Limited Fire Alarm Cable with or without a jacket under a metal armor.
I. Max. 1/4 in. (6 mm) diam S-Video Cable consisting of two max No. 24 AWG 75 ohm coax or
twisted pair cable with PE insulation and PVC jacket.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.C-AJ-3285 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 3 of 3
The hourly T, FT and FTH Ratings for blank opening (no cables) are 3 hr. The hourly T,
FT and FTH Ratings for opening with cables are 1-1/2 hr except that, when cable type
2A, 2B, 2C, 2E or 2H is used, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1 hr, and when cable types
2J or 2K are used the T, FT, and FTH Ratings are 0 hr. See Table below for L Ratings.
3. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings, tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasket material (not shown). Firestop device to be
installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into floor or wall such that ends project
an equal distance from the approximate centerline of the assembly. As an option, in floors, steel sleeve of device may be
installed flush with bottom of floor. The annular space between the device and the periphery of the opening shall be min 0
in. (point contact). Device provided with flange(s) that are spun clockwise onto device threads, over gasket material
butting tightly to top side of floor or both sides of floor or wall. In floors, when one device flange is used, device flange to
be secured to floor with min two 1-1/4 in. (32 mm) long masonry screws or anchors. As an alternate to gasket material,
sealant (Item 4B) may be used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
B. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — Sealant — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3),
min 1/2 in. (13 mm) thickness of fill material applied within the annulus, flush with top surface of
floor or with both surfaces of wall. For L Ratings when sealant is used, an additional 1/4 in.
(6 mm) bead of fill material is required at the device/floor or device/wall interface on
top side of floor or both sides of wall assembly prior to installing flange(s).
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP601S Sealant, CP 606 Sealant,
CFS-S SIL GG, CFS-S SIL SL (floors only), FS-ONE Sealant or FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant.
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-3168 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 3
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
F Rating — 2 Hr F Rating — 2 Hr
T Ratings — 0, 1/2 and 1 Hr (See Item 2) FT Ratings — 0, 1/2 and 1 Hr (See Item 2)
L Ratings At 400 F — See Items 2 and 4 FTH Ratings — 0, 1/2 and 1 Hr (See Item 2)
1. Wall Assembly — Min 5 in. (127 mm) thick reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or 1600-2400
3
kg/m ) concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Opening in wall to be max 3 in.
(76 mm) diam for 2" device and max 5 in. (127 mm) diam for 4" device.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-3168 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 3
See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of
manufacturers.
2. Cables — Within the loading area for each firestop device, the cables may represent a 0 to 100 percent visual fill.
Cables to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. Any combination of
the following types of cables may be used:
A. Max 100 pair No. 24 AWG (or smaller) copper conductor telecommunication cable with
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing and insulation.
B. Max 7/C No. 12 AWG copper conductor control cable with PVC or XLPE jacket and insulation.
E. Max RG 6/U coaxial cable with fluorinated ethylene insulation and jacketing.
F. Fiber optic cable with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene (PE) jacket and insulation having
a max diam of 1/2 in. (13 mm).
G. Max 20/C No. 22 AWG shielded printer cable with PVC jacket.
H. Through-Penetrating Product* - Two copper conductors No. 18 AWG (or smaller) Power or
Non Power Limited Fire Alarm Cable with or without a jacket under a metal armor.
I. Max 1/4 in. (6 mm) diameter S-Video Cable consisting of 2 max 24 AWG 75 ohm coax or
twisted pair cable with PE insulation and PVC jacket.
The T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1 hr except that, when Item 2J or 2K is used, the T, FT
and FTH Ratings are 1/2 hr .
L Ratings vary depending on whether the gasketing material (see Item 3) or the sealant
(Item 4) is used. See Table below for L Ratings.
100% Item 2D 4.9 4.9 1.3 3.5 Less Less Less Less
only than 1 than 1 than 1 than 1
100% Any cables 9.2 9.2 9.6 11.8 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.6
(Item 2) in
any
combination
3. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings, twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not shown). Firestop device to be installed
in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. As an option, the inner fabric seal may remain open except
that, to attain the L Rating, the inner fabric seal shall be twisted to completely close off the opening within device. Device
slid into wall such that ends project an equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. Device
provided with flanges that are spun clockwise onto device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of
wall. The annular space between the device and the periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device
flanges are to be secured to wall with min two 1-1/4 in. (32 mm) long masonry screws or anchors. As an alternate to
gasket material, fill material (Item 4) may be used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 5/8 in. (16 mm) thickness of fill
material applied within the annulus between firestop device and wall, flush with both surfaces of wall. When sealant is
used, for L Rating, apply an additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead of FS-ONE or CP 606 at the device/wall interface
on both sides of wall prior to installing flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — FS-ONE Sealant, FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant, CP
606 Sealant or CP 618 Putty
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-3168 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 3 of 3
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.C-AJ-3298 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 3
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
F Rating — 2 Hr F Rating — 2 Hr
T Rating — 2 Hr FT Rating — 2 Hr
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.C-AJ-3298 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 3
3
1. Floor or Wall Assembly — Reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or 1600-2400 kg/m ) concrete. Min
4-1/2 in. (114 mm) thick floors and min 5 in. (127mm) thick walls. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified
Concrete Blocks*. Floor may also be constructed of any min 6 in. thick UL Classified hollow-core Precast Concrete
Units*. Opening in floor or wall to be max 3 in. (76 mm) diam for 2 in. (51 mm) device and max 5 in. (127 mm) diam for
4 in. (102 mm) device.
See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) and Precast Concrete Units (CFTV) categories in the Fire
Resistance Directory for names of manufacturers.
2. Cables — Within the loading area for each firestop device, the cables may represent a 0 to 100 percent visual fill.
Cables to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both sides of floor or wall assembly. Any
combination of the following types of cables may be used:
A. Max 100 pair No. 24 AWG (or smaller) copper conductor telecommunication cable with
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing and insulation.
B. Max 7/C No. 12 AWG copper conductor control cable with PVC or XLPE jacket and insulation.
E. Max RG 6/U coaxial cable with fluorinated ethylene insulation and jacketing.
F. Fiber optic cable with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene (PE) jacket and insulation having
a max diam of 1/2 in. (13 mm).
G. Max 20/C No. 22 AWG shielded printer cable with PVC jacket.
H. Through-Penetrating Product* — Two copper conductors No. 18 AWG (or smaller) Power or
Non Power Limited Fire Alarm Cable with or without a jacket under a metal armor.
I. Max. 1/4 in. (6 mm) diameter S-Video Cable consisting of 2 max 24 AWG 75 ohm coax or
twisted pair cable with PE insulation and PVC jacket.
0% — 1 2
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.C-AJ-3298 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 3 of 3
3. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings, tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasket material (not shown). Firestop device to be
installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into floor or wall such that ends project
an equal distance from the approximate centerline of the assembly. As an option, in floors, steel sleeve of device may be
installed flush with bottom of floor. The annular space between the device and the periphery of the opening shall be min 0
in. (point contact) to max 1/2 in. (13 mm). Device provided with flange(s) that are spun clockwise onto device threads,
over gasket material butting tightly to top side of floor or both sides of floor or wall. In floors, when one device flange is
used, device flange to be secured to floor with min two 1-1/4 in. (32 mm) long masonry screws or anchors. As an
alternate to gasketing material, sealant (Item 4B) may be used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
B. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — Sealant — As an alternate to gasketing material (see Item
3), min 1/2 in. (13 mm) thickness of fill material applied within the annulus, flush with top surface
of floor or with both surfaces of wall. For L Ratings when sealant is used, an additional 1/4 in. (6
mm) bead of fill material shall be applied at the device/floor or device/wall interface on top side of
floor or both sides of wall assembly prior to installing flange(s).
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 606 Sealant, FS-ONE Sealant or
FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant.
C. Cable Wrap Materials* — Nom 1-1/2 in. or 2 in. (38 or 51 mm) thick blanket, faced on one
side or two with a foil facing. The cables shall be wrapped with one layer of cable wrap. Cable
wrap is to extend a minimum of 12 in. (305 mm) from top surface of floor or both sides of wall
assembly. The ends are to be tightly butted together and taped. The exposed edges of the faced
blankets are taped with 4 in. (102 mm) wide pressure-sensitive aluminum foil tape.
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-3167 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 3
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
T Ratings — 0, 1/2, 1-1/2 and 2 Hr (See Items 2 and 3) FT Ratings — 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, and 2 Hr (See Items 2 and 3)
L Ratings At 400 F — See Item 2 FTH Ratings — 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, and 2 Hr (See Items 2 and 3)
1. Wall Assembly — Min 5 in. (127 mm) thick for 2 hr wall assembly, min 5-5/8 in. (142 mm) thick for 3 hr wall
assembly, min 6-1/2 in. (167 mm) thick for 4 hr wall assembly, reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-3167 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 3
3
1600-2400 kg/m ) concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Opening in wall to be
max 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) diam for 2" device and max 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) diam for 4" device.
See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of
manufacturers.
2. Cables — Within the loading area for each firestop device, the cables may represent a 0 to 100 percent visual fill.
Cables to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. Any combination of
the following types of cables may be used:
A. Max 100 pair No. 24 AWG (or smaller) copper conductor telecommunication cable with
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing and insulation.
B. Max 7/C No. 12 AWG copper conductor control cable with PVC or XLPE jacket and insulation.
E. Max RG 6/U coaxial cable with fluorinated ethylene insulation and jacketing.
F. Fiber optic cable with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene (PE) jacket and insulation having
a max diam of 1/2 in. (13 mm).
G. Max 20/C No. 22 AWG shielded printer cable with PVC jacket.
H. Through-Penetrating Product* - Two copper conductors No. 18 AWG (or smaller) Power or
Non Power Limited Fire Alarm Cable with or without a jacket under a metal armor.
I. Max 1/4 in. (6 mm) diameter S-Video Cable consisting of 2 max 24 AWG 75 ohm coax or
twisted pair cable with PE insulation and PVC jacket.
When the hourly rating of the wall assembly is 2 hr, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1 hr
except that, when Item 2J or 2K is used, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1/2 hr . When
the hourly rating of the wall assembly is 3 or 4 hr, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1-1/2
and 2 hr, respectively.
L Ratings apply only when device flanges are used. L Ratings vary depending on
whether the gasketing material (see Item 3) or the sealant (Item 4) is used. See Table
below for L Ratings.
100% Item 2D 4.9 4.9 1.3 3.5 Less Less Less Less
only than 1 than 1 than 1 than 1
100% Any cables 9.2 9.2 9.6 11.8 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.6
(Item 2) in
any
combination
3. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings, twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not shown). Firestop device to be installed
in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. As an option, the inner fabric seal may remain open except
that, to attain the L Rating, the inner fabric seal shall be twisted to completely close off the opening within device. Device
slid into wall such that ends project an equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. The annular
space between the device and the periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with
flanges that are spun clockwise onto device threads, over gasketing material , butting tightly to both sides of wall. Device
flanges are optional except for 3 and 4 hr fire rating, flanges are required. When the device flanges are not
used, the T, FT and FTH Ratings for the firestop system are 0 hr. For blank opening (no cables), the T, FT and
FTH Ratings for the firestop system are 2, 3 or 4 hr only when the device flanges are used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Sealant — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 1/2 in. (13 mm)
thickness of fill material applied within the annulus between firestop device and wall, flush with both surfaces of wall, and
an additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead applied around periphery of device. Sealant is required when device flanges are not
used (see Item 3).
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — FS-ONE or FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant, or CP 606
Sealant
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-3167 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 3 of 3
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-1215 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 2
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
F Rating — 2 Hr F Rating — 2 Hr
FH Rating — 2 Hr
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-1215 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 2
3
1. Wall Assembly — Min 5-5/8 in. (143 mm) reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or 1600-2400 kg/m )
concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Opening in wall to be 2-1/2 in. (64 mm)
diam for nominal 2 in. (51 mm) firestop device and 4 1/2 in. (114 mm) diam for nominal 4 in. (102 mm) firestop device.
See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of
manufacturers.
2. Through Penetrant — One metallic pipe, conduit or tubing to be installed concentrically within the firestop system.
Pipe, conduit or tubing to be rigidly supported on both sides of the wall assembly. The following types and sizes of
metallic pipes, conduits and tubes may be used:
A. Steel Pipe — Nom 3 in. (76 mm) diam (or smaller) Schedule 5 (or heavier) steel pipe.
B. Iron Pipe — Nom 3 in. (76 mm) diam (or smaller) cast or ductile iron pipe.
C. Conduit — Nom 3 in. (76 mm) diam (or smaller) rigid steel conduit or steel electrical metallic
tubing (EMT).
3. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings, tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not shown). Firestop device to be
installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into wall such that ends project an
equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. The annular space between the device and the
periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with flanges that are spun clockwise onto
device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of wall. As an alternate to gasket material, sealant
(Item 4) may be used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Sealant — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 1/2 in. (13 mm)
thickness of fill material applied within the annulus between firestop device and wall, flush with both surfaces of wall. An
additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead shall be applied around periphery of device on each side of wall prior to securing device
flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 606 or FS-ONE Sealant or FS-ONE MAX Intumescent
Sealant
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-2229 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 2
F Rating — 2 Hr
T Rating — 1/4 Hr
3
1. Wall Assembly — Min 5-5/8 in. (143 mm) reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or 1600-2400 kg/m )
concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Opening in wall to be 2-1/2 in. (64 mm)
diam for nominal 2 in. (51 mm) firestop device and 4 1/2 in. (114 mm) diam for nominal 4 in. (102 mm) firestop device.
See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of
manufacturers.
2. Cross Linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing — Nom 1 in. diam (or smaller) SDR9 PEX tubing for use in closed (process
or supply) or vented (drain, waste or vent) piping systems. Within the loading area for each firestop device, the PEX tubes
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-2229 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 2
may represent a 0 to 100 percent visual fill. Tubing to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both
sides of wall assembly.
3. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings, tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not shown). Firestop device to be
installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into wall such that ends project an
equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. The annular space between the device and the
periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with flanges that are spun clockwise onto
device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of wall. As an alternate to gasket material, sealant
(Item 4) may be used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Sealant — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 1/2 in. (13 mm)
thickness of fill material applied within the annulus between firestop device and wall, flush with both surfaces of wall. An
additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead shall be applied around periphery of device on each side of wall prior to securing device
flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 606 or FS-ONE Sealant or FS-ONE MAX Intumescent
Sealant.
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-2230 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 2
F Rating — 2 Hr
T Rating — 0 Hr
3
1. Wall Assembly — Min 5-5/8 in. (143 mm) reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or 1600-2400 kg/m )
concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Opening in wall to be 2-1/2 in. (64 mm)
diam for nominal 2 in. (51 mm) firestop device and 4 1/2 in. (114 mm) diam for nominal 4 in. (102 mm) firestop device.
See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of
manufacturers.
2. Through Penetrant — Nom 2 in. (51 mm) diam (or smaller) Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing+ formed from polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) and installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70). One or more tubes to be
installed within the firestop system. Tubing to be rigidly supported on both sides of wall.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-2230 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 2
See Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (FKHU) category in the Electrical Construction Materials
Directory for names of manufacturers.
3. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings, tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not shown). Firestop device to be
installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into wall such that ends project an
equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. The annular space between the device and the
periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with flanges that are spun clockwise onto
device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of wall. As an alternate to gasketing material, sealant
(Item 4) may be used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Sealant — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 1/2 in. (13 mm)
thickness of fill material applied within the annulus between firestop device and wall, flush with both surfaces of wall. An
additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead shall be applied around periphery of device on each side of wall prior to securing device
flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 606 or FS-ONE Sealant or FS-ONE MAX Intumescent
Sealant.
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-1441 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 2
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
T Ratings — 1/2 and 3/4 Hr (See Item 1) FT Rating —1/2 and 3/4 Hr (See Item 1)
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-1441 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 2
1. Wall Assembly — The 1 or 2 hr fire-rated gypsum board/stud wall assembly shall be constructed of the materials and
in the manner described within the individual U300, U400, V400 or W400 Series Wall and Partition Designs in the UL Fire
Resistance Directory and shall incorporate the following construction features:
A. Studs — Wall framing shall consist of either wood studs or steel channel studs. Wood studs to
consist of nom 2 by 4 in. (51 by 102 mm) lumber spaced max 16 in. (406 mm) OC. Steel studs to
be min 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) wide and spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
B. Gypsum Board* — Nom 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick gypsum board as specified in the individual
Wall and Partition Design. Opening in gypsum board to be 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) diam for nominal 2
in. (51 mm) firestop device and 4 1/2 in. (114 mm) diam for nominal 4 in. (102 mm) firestop
device.
The hourly F, FH Ratings of the firestop system is dependent upon the hourly rating of the wall in
which it is installed. The hourly T, FT, FTH Ratings of the firestop system are ½ hr for 1 hr rated walls
and ¾ hr for 2 hr rated walls.
2. Through Penetrant — One metallic pipe, conduit or tubing to be installed concentrically within the firestop system.
Pipe, conduit or tubing to be rigidly supported on both sides of the wall assembly. The following types and sizes of
metallic pipes, conduits and tubes may be used:
A. Steel Pipe — Nom 3 in. (76 mm) diam (or smaller) Schedule 5 (or heavier) steel pipe.
B. Iron Pipe — Nom 3 in. (76 mm) diam (or smaller) cast or ductile iron pipe.
C. Conduit — Nom 3 in. (76 mm) diam (or smaller) rigid steel conduit or steel electrical metallic
tubing (EMT).
3. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings, tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not shown). Firestop device to be
installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into wall such that ends project an
equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. The annular space between the device and the
periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with flanges that are spun clockwise onto
device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of wall. For blank devices, flanges shall be secured to
gypsum wall with min two 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) long drywall screws. As an alternate to gasket material, sealant (Item 4)
may be used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Sealant — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 1/2 in. (13 mm)
thickness of fill material applied within the annulus between firestop device and wall, flush with both surfaces of wall. An
additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead shall be applied around periphery of device on each side of wall prior to securing device
flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 606, FS-ONE Sealant or FS-ONE MAX Intumescent
Sealant
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-2537 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 2
1. Wall Assembly — The 1 or 2 hr fire-rated gypsum board/stud wall assembly shall be constructed of the materials and
in the manner described within the individual U300, U400, V400 or W400 Series Wall and Partition Designs in the UL Fire
Resistance Directory and shall incorporate the following construction features:
A. Studs — Wall framing shall consist of either wood studs or steel channel studs. Wood studs to
consist of nom 2 by 4 in. (51 by 102 mm) lumber spaced max 16 in. (406 mm) OC. Steel studs to
be min 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) wide and spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-2537 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 2
B. Gypsum Board* — Nom 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick gypsum board as specified in the individual
Wall and Partition Design. Opening in gypsum board to be 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) diam for nominal 2
in. (51 mm) firestop device and 4 1/2 in. (114 mm) diam for nominal 4 in. (102 mm) firestop
device.
The hourly F Rating of the firestop system is dependent upon the hourly rating of the wall in which it
is installed. The hourly T Rating of the firestop system is 0 hr in 1 hr fire rated walls and 1/4 hr in 2 hr
fire rated walls.
2. Cross Linked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing — Nom 1 in. diam (or smaller) SDR9 PEX tubing for use in closed (process
or supply) or vented (drain, waste or vent) piping systems. Within the loading area for each firestop device, the PEX tubes
may represent a 0 to 100 percent visual fill. Tubing to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both
sides of wall assembly.
3. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings, tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not shown). Firestop device to be
installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into wall such that ends project an
equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. The annular space between the device and the
periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with flanges that are spun clockwise onto
device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of wall. As an alternate to gasket material, sealant
(Item 4) may be used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Sealant — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 1/2 in. (13 mm)
thickness of fill material applied within the annulus between firestop device and wall, flush with both surfaces of wall. An
additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead shall be applied around periphery of device on each side of wall prior to securing device
flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 606 or FS-ONE Sealant, FS-ONE MAX Intumescent
Sealant
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-2538 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 2
T Rating — 0 Hr
1. Wall Assembly — The 1 or 2 hr fire-rated gypsum board/stud wall assembly shall be constructed of the materials and
in the manner described within the individual U300, U400, V400 or W400 Series Wall and Partition Designs in the UL Fire
Resistance Directory and shall incorporate the following construction features:
A. Studs — Wall framing shall consist of either wood studs or steel channel studs. Wood studs to
consist of nom 2 by 4 in. (51 by 102 mm) lumber spaced max 16 in. (406 mm) OC. Steel studs to
be min 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) wide and spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
B. Gypsum Board* — Nom 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick gypsum board as specified in the individual
Wall and Partition Design. Opening in gypsum board to be 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) diam for nominal 2
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-2538 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 2
in. (51 mm) firestop device and 4 1/2 in. (114 mm) diam for nominal 4 in. (102 mm) firestop
device.
The hourly F Rating of the firestop system is dependent upon the hourly rating of the wall in which it
is installed.
2. Through Penetrant — Nom 2 in. (51 mm) diam (or smaller) Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing+ formed from polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) and installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70). One or more tubes to be
installed within the firestop system. Tubing to be rigidly supported on both sides of wall.
See Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (FKHU) category in the Electrical Construction Materials
Directory for names of manufacturers.
3. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings, tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not shown). Firestop device to be
installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into wall such that ends project an
equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. The annular space between the device and the
periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with flanges that are spun clockwise onto
device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of wall. As an alternate to gasket material, sealant
(Item 4) may be used.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Sealant — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 1/2 in. (13 mm)
thickness of fill material applied within the annulus between firestop device and wall, flush with both surfaces of wall. An
additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead shall be applied around periphery of device on each side of wall prior to securing device
flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 606 or FS-ONE Sealant or FS-ONE MAX Intumescent
Sealant
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-3334 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 3
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
T Ratings - 0, 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, 2 Hr (See Items 2 and 3) FT Ratings - 0, 1/2, 1-1/2, and 2 Hr (See Items 2 and 3)
L Ratings At 400 F - See Item 2 FTH Ratings - 0, 1/2, 1, 1-1/2, and 2Hr (See Items 2 and 3)
1. Wall Assembly — The 1, 2, 3 or 4 hr fire rated gypsum board/stud wall assembly shall be constructed of the materials
and in the manner described within the individual U300, U400, V400 or W400 Series Wall and Partition Designs in the UL
Fire Resistance Directory and shall incorporate the following construction features:
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-3334 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 3
A. Studs — Wall framing shall consist of either wood studs or steel channel studs. Wood studs to
consist of nom 2 by 4 in. (51 by 102 mm) lumber spaced max 16 in. (406 mm) OC. Steel studs to
be min 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) wide and spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC for 1 and 2 hr wall
assemblies. Steel Studs to be 3-5/8 in. (92 mm) for 3 and 4 hr wall assemblies. Steel studs to be
min 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) wide when 3/4 in. (19 mm) thick gypsum board is used (see Item 1B).
B. Gypsum Board* — Nom 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick gypsum board as specified in the individual
Wall and Partition Design. Alternately, for 1 and 2 hr rated walls only, min one layer of nom 3/4
in. (19 mm) thick gypsum board on each side of wall as specified in the individual Wall and
Partition Design may be used. Opening in gypsum board to be max 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) diam for 2"
device and max 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) diam for 4" device.
The hourly F and FH Ratings of the firestop system are dependent upon the hourly rating of the wall in
which it is installed.
2. Cables — Within the loading area for each firestop device, the cables may represent a 0 to 100 percent visual fill.
Cables to be tightly bundled within the device and rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. Any combination of
the following types of cables may be used:
A. Max 100 pair No. 24 AWG (or smaller) copper conductor telecommunication cable with
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing and insulation.
B. Max 7/C No. 12 AWG copper conductor control cable with PVC or XLPE jacket and insulation.
E. Max RG 6/U coaxial cable with fluorinated ethylene insulation and jacketing.
F. Fiber optic cable with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene (PE) jacket and insulation having
a max diam of 1/2 in. (13 mm).
G. Max 20/C No. 22 AWG shielded printer cable with PVC jacket.
H. Through-Penetrating Product* - Two copper conductors No. 18 AWG (or smaller) Power or
Non Power Limited Fire Alarm Cable with or without a jacket under a metal armor.
I. Max. 1/4 in. (6 mm) diameter S-Video Cable consisting of 2 max 24 AWG 75 ohm coax or
twisted pair cable with PE insulation and PVC jacket .
K. Through Penetrating Product* — Any cables, Armored Cable+ or Metal Clad Cable+
currently Classified under the Through Penetrating Product category. See Through Penetrating
Product (XHLY) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of manufacturers.
When the hourly rating of the wall assembly is 1 hr, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 0 hr.
When the hourly rating of the wall assembly is 2 hr, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1 hr
except that, when Item 2J or 2K is used, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1/2 hr . When
the hourly rating of the wall assembly is 3 or 4 hr, the T, FT and FTH Ratings are 1-1/2
and 2 hr, respectively.
L Ratings apply only when device flanges are used. L Ratings vary depending on
whether the gasketing material (see Item 3) or the sealant (Item 4) is used. See Table
below for L Ratings.
100% Item 2D 4.9 4.9 1.3 3.5 Less Less Less Less
only than 1 than 1 than 1 than 1
100% Any cables 9.2 9.2 9.6 11.8 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.6
(Item 2) in
any
combination
3. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings, twisted inner fabric smoke seal, flanges and gasketing material (not shown). Firestop device to be installed
in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. As an option, the inner fabric seal may remain open except
that, to attain the L Rating, the inner fabric seal shall be twisted to completely close off the opening within device. Device
slid into wall such that ends project an equal distance from the approximate centerline of the wall assembly. The annular
space between the device and the periphery of the opening shall be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with
flanges that are spun clockwise onto device threads, over gasketing material butting tightly to both sides of wall. As an
alternate to gasket material, sealant (Item 4) may be used. Device flanges are optional, except that when ¾ in. (19
mm) gypsum board (see Item 1B) is used, device flanges shall be used and for 3 and 4 hr fire rating, device
flanges shall be used. When the device flanges are not used, the T, FT and FTH Ratings for the firestop
system are 0 hr.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-3334 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 3 of 3
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 and CP 653 BA 2" Speed Sleeve, CP 653 and CP
653 BA 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Sealant — As an alternate to gasket material (see Item 3), min 1/2 in. (13 mm)
thickness of fill material applied within the annulus between firestop device and wall, flush with both surfaces of wall, and
an additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead applied around periphery of device. When device flanges are used, gypsum drywall
compound may be used in place of the fill material. Sealant is required when device flanges are not used (see Item 3).
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — FS-ONE, FS-ONE MAX Intumescent Sealant, or CP 606
Sealant
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-2541 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 2
1. Wall Assembly — The 1 or 2 hr fire-rated gypsum board/stud wall assembly shall be constructed of the materials and
in the manner described within the individual U300, U400, V400 or W400 Series Wall and Partition Designs in the UL Fire
Resistance Directory and shall incorporate the following construction features:
A. Studs — Wall framing shall consist of either wood studs or steel channel studs. Wood studs to
consist of nom 2 by 4 in. (51 by 102 mm) lumber spaced max 16 in. (406 mm) OC. Steel studs to
be min 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) wide and spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-2541 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 2
B. Gypsum Board* — Nom 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick gypsum board as specified in the individual
Wall and Partition Design. Opening in gypsum board to be 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) diam for nominal 2
in. (51 mm) firestop device and 4 1/2 in. (114 mm) diam for nominal 4 in. (102 mm) firestop
device.
The F Rating of the firestop system is dependent upon the hourly rating of the wall in which it is
installed. The T Rating of the firestop system is 0 and 1-1/2 hr for 1 and 2 hr rated walls, respectively.
2. Through Penetrants — One nonmetallic pipe or conduit to be centered within the firestop system. Pipe to be rigidly
supported on both sides of wall. The following types and sizes of pipes may be used:
A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe — Nom 3 in. (76 mm) diam (or smaller) Schedule 40 cellular
or solid core PVC pipe for use in closed (process or supply) or vented (drain, waste, or vent)
piping systems.
B. Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipe — Nom 3 in. (76 mm) diam (or smaller) SDR
13.5 CPVC pipe for use in closed (process or supply) piping systems.
3. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic housing, intumescent
material rings and tightly twisted inner fabric smoke seal. Firestop device to be installed in accordance with the
accompanying installation instructions. Device slid into wall such that ends project an equal distance from the
approximate centerline of the wall assembly. The annular space between the device and the periphery of the opening shall
be min 0 in. (point contact). Device provided with flanges that are spun clockwise onto device threads, butting tightly to
both sides of wall.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 2" Speed Sleeve and CP 653 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Sealant — Min 1/2 in. (13 mm) thickness of fill material applied within the annulus
between firestop device and wall, flush with both surfaces of wall. An additional 1/4 in. (6 mm) bead shall be applied
around periphery of device on each side of wall prior to securing device flanges.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 606, FS-ONE Sealant or FS-ONE MAX Intumescent
Sealant
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-3395 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 4
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
F Ratings - 1 and 2 Hr (See Items 1 and 2) F Ratings - 1 and 2 Hr (See Items 1 and 2)
1. Wall Assembly — The 1 or 2 hr fire rated gypsum board/stud wall assembly shall be constructed of the materials and
in the manner described within the individual U400, V400 or W400 Series Wall and Partition Designs in the UL Fire
Resistance Directory and shall incorporate the following construction features:
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-3395 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 4
A. Studs — Wall framing shall consist of steel channel studs. Steel studs to be min 3-1/2 in. (89
mm) wide and spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
B. Gypsum Board* — Nom 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick gypsum board as specified in the individual
Wall and Partition Design. Maximum size of opening in gypsum board is dependent on the
mounting of the gangplate firestop device (Item 2). Openings for gangplates that are surface
mounted to the gypsum board may be oriented vertically or horizontally. Openings for gangplates
that are stud mounted direct to the wall studs prior to gypsum board layers are oriented
horizontally. Maximum opening sizes are specified in Table below.
Firestop Device Maximum Opening Size, in. (mm)
(Item 2) Gangplate Mounting
24" Gangplate:
16" Gangplate:
The hourly F and FH Ratings of the firestop system are dependent upon the hourly
rating of the wall in which it is installed.
2. Firestop Device* — The firestop device consists of a steel plate sandwich construction with three (16" device size) or
four (24" device size) circular opening ports which are each nom 4 in. (102 mm) diam. The firestop device is intended to
be oriented vertically or horizontally and mounted to the face of the opening on both sides of wall. The 16" and 24"
firestop devices when oriented horizontally are attached to the 16 in. (406 mm) and 24 in. (610 mm), respectively, center
to center spaced wall studs at each side of opening, over the gypsum board. As an option, up to two devices may be
installed adjacent to each other with a nom 13/16 in. (2 cm) overlap to protect larger sized openings (see Item 1B,
double device). As an option, single and double 16" and 24" gang plates may be attached directly against the studs prior
to installation of the gypsum board layers. When 16" gang plate is installed horizontally in 24" stud cavity, attachment of
plate to wall studs is optional. As an option, two devices may be installed end to end in adjacent stud cavities, over the
gypsum board layers or directly attached to the wall studs when installed in accordance with the Hilti Installation
Instructions and min one layer of gypsum board each side of wall is continuous across the two stud cavities. Each device
shall be secured to gypsum board with min No. 10 by 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) steel drywall screws through prepunched holes
around periphery of steel device plates; min three (16" gang plate) or four (24" gang plate) screws are used at each long
dimension and three screws at each end. When device is secured direct to studs prior to installation of gypsum board
layers, the fasteners along each long dimension of opening are spaced max 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) from corners and max 6 in.
(152 mm) on center unless otherwise noted in Hilti Installation Instructions. Min screw length is 3/4 in. (19 mm) where
device is secured direct to studs and at the overlapping plate to plate joint for double devices. The device shall be
installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions. When the hourly rating of the wall assembly
is 1 hr, blank gang plates (no cables) may be installed vertically or horizontally for single gang plate
openings only, and double gang plates are limited to installation horizontally with fasteners at ends of plates
penetrating into wall studs.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-SL GP 16" and 24" Firestop Gangplate
3. Firestop Device — Within each circular opening port of the CFS-SL GP firestop gang plates (Item 2), one of the
following firestop devices shall be installed. Any combination of these firestop devices may be used within each gang
plate.
3A. Firestop Device* — Rectangular steel plate designed to close port openings with no
penetrants. Plate is field installed in accordance with Hilti Installation Instructions. Flanges of gang
plate over port opening are removed by loosening GP nuts, the steel plate cap installed with
prepunched holes aligned with GP fasteners, and the flanges of GP then reinstalled and nuts
reinstalled to tighten the plates in position.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-SL GP CAP Firestop Gangplate
CAP
3B. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube. The device flanges
are removed by spinning counterclockwise and are not used. Device tube slid into gang plate port
opening and centered within wall such that ends of device tube project an approximate equal
distance from the gang plate on each side of wall. The two integral screws within the flange of the
gang plate port at each side of wall are tightened to firmly bear against the device sleeve to retain
it in position. Device is designed to allow installation before or after the cable penetrants (if
employed) are in place. Device is used in combination with the firestop plugs described in Item 4.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-SL RK 4" Firestop Sleeve
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-3395 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 3 of 4
3C. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube. The device flanges
are removed by spinning counterclockwise and are not used. Device tube slid into gang plate port
opening and centered within wall such that ends of device tube project an approximate equal
distance from the gang plate on each side of wall. The two integral screws within the flange of the
gang plate port at each side of wall are tightened to firmly bear against the device sleeve to retain
it in position. Device is used in combination with the firestop plugs described in Item 4.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-SL SK 4" Firestop Retrofit
Sleeve
3D. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic
housing, intumescent material rings and twisted inner fabric smoke seal. The device flanges are to
be spun counterclockwise and removed since they are not used. Device tube slid into gang plate
port opening and centered within wall such that ends of device tube project an approximate equal
distance from the gang plate on each side of wall. The two integral screws within the flange of the
gang plate port at each side of wall are tightened to firmly bear against the device sleeve to retain
it in position. The inner fabric seal shall be twisted to completely close off any unused opening
within the device.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 4" Speed Sleeve
4 Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Plug — Plugs are required to be used with the CFS-SL RK and SK firestop devices
(Items 3B and 3C). Nom 4" diam plug friction fit within the device sleeve flush with each end of the device on both sides
of wall. Plug cut to fit around the cable bundle (if used) and installed tightly within the device sleeve.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-PL Firestop Plug 4"
5. Cables — Within the loading area for each firestop device (Items 3B through 3D), a tightly bundled cable may be
installed. The aggregate cross-sectional area of cables shall be min 0 to max 60 percent fill for each CFS-SL RK and CFS-
SL SK firestop device (Items 3B and 3C). For the CP 653 Speed Sleeve firestop device (Item 3D), the cables can be used
for a 0 to 100 percent visual fill. Cables to be rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. Any combination of the
following types of cables may be used:
A. Max 100 pair No. 24 AWG (or smaller) copper conductor telecommunication cable with
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing and insulation.
B. Max 7/C No. 12 AWG copper conductor control cable with PVC or XLPE jacket and insulation.
E. Max RG 6/U coaxial cable with fluorinated ethylene insulation and jacketing.
F. Fiber optic cable with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene (PE) jacket and insulation having
a max diam of 1/2 in. (13 mm).
The L Ratings are dependent on the type and number of devices within the gang plate
and the cable type and fill. For devices with cable bundle, the cable bundle shall be
nominally centered within the device to attain the L Ratings. The L Ratings in CFM per
2
GP device (Table 1) and in CFM per ft of opening (Table 2) are specified below:
CAP
CAPs (Opt)
and CAP(s) and
CAPs One and Two Three Four
only Device Devices Devices Devices
Openings with — 2 4 6 8
any combination
of Item 5 cables
for max 33%
aggregate fill in
device types 3B
and 3C, and/or
max 100%
visual cable fill
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-L-3395 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 4 of 4
in device type
3D.
CAP
CAPs (Opt)
and CAP(s) and
One CP and Two Three Four CP
653 CP 653 CP 653 653
Device Devices Devices Devices
CAPs (Item (Item (Item (Item
only 3D) 3D) 3D) 3D)
2
Table 2 - CFM per FT of Opening at Ambient and 400F
CAP
CAPs (Opt)
and CAP(s) and
CAPs One and Two Three Four
only Device Devices Devices Devices
CAP
CAPs (Opt)
and CAP(s) and
One CP and Two Three Four CP
653 CP 653 CP 653 653
Device Devices Devices Devices
CAPs (Item (Item (Item (Item
only 3D) 3D) 3D) 3D)
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-3200 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 1 of 4
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems Certified for Canada
F Rating - 2 Hr F Rating - 2 Hr
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-3200 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 2 of 4
1. Wall Assembly — Min 6 in. (152 mm) thick reinforced lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf or 1600-2400
3
kg/m ) concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*. Maximum opening sizes are
specified in Table below. Opening may be oriented vertically or horizontally.
Firestop Device (Item 2) Maximum Opening Size, in. (mm)
24" Gangplate:
16" Gangplate:
See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of manufacturers.
2. Firestop Device* — The firestop device consists of a steel plate sandwich construction with three (16" device size) or
four (24" device size) circular opening ports which are each nom 4 in. (102 mm) diam. The firestop device is intended to
be oriented vertically or horizontally and mounted to the face of the opening on both sides of wall. As an option, up to two
devices may be installed adjacent to each other with a nom 13/16 in. (2 cm) overlap to protect larger sized openings (see
Item 1 for double device). Each device shall be secured to wall with min 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) long masonry screws or
anchors through prepunched holes around periphery of steel device plates; min three (16" gang plate) or four (24" gang
plate) fasteners are used at each long dimension and three fasteners at each end. For double plate installations, four min
No. 10 by 3/4 in. (19 mm) steel screws are used to secure the plate to plate joint through prepunched holes in the plate.
The device shall be installed in accordance with the accompanying installation instructions.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-SL GP 16" and 24" Firestop Gangplate
3. Firestop Device — Within each circular opening port of the CFS-SL GP firestop gang plates (Item 2), one of the
following firestop devices shall be installed. Any combination of these firestop devices may be used within each gang
plate.
3A. Firestop Device* — (Not Shown) Rectangular steel plate designed to close port openings
with no penetrants. Plate is field installed in accordance with Hilti Installation Instructions. Flanges
of gang plate over port opening are removed by loosening GP nuts, the steel plate cap installed
with prepunched holes aligned with GP fasteners, and the flanges of GP then reinstalled and nuts
reinstalled to tighten the plates in position.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-SL GP CAP Firestop Gangplate
CAP
3B. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube. The device flanges
are removed by spinning counterclockwise and are not used. Device tube slid into gang plate port
opening and centered within wall such that ends of device tube project an approximate equal
distance from the gang plate on each side of wall. The two integral screws within the flange of the
gang plate port at each side of wall are tightened to firmly bear against the device sleeve to retain
it in position. Device is designed to allow installation before or after the cable penetrants (if
employed) are in place. Device is used in combination with the firestop plugs described in Item
3D.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-SL RK 4" Firestop Sleeve
3C. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube. The device flanges
are removed by spinning counterclockwise and are not used. Device tube slid into gang plate port
opening and centered within wall such that ends of device tube project an approximate equal
distance from the gang plate on each side of wall. The two integral screws within the flange of the
gang plate port at each side of wall are tightened to firmly bear against the device sleeve to retain
it in position. Device is used in combination with the firestop plugs described in Item 3D.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-SL SK 4" Firestop Sleeve
3D. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Plug — Plugs are required to be used with the CFS-SL RK
and SK firestop devices (Items 3B and 3C). Nom 4" diam plug friction fit within the device sleeve
flush with each end of the device on both sides of wall. Plug cut to fit around the cable bundle (if
used) and installed tightly within the device sleeve.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CFS-PL Firestop Plug 4"
3E. Firestop Device* — Firestop device consists of a corrugated steel tube with an inner plastic
housing, intumescent material rings and twisted inner fabric smoke seal. The device flanges are to
be spun counterclockwise and removed since they are not used. Device tube slid into gang plate
port opening and centered within wall such that ends of device tube project an approximate equal
distance from the gang plate on each side of wall. The two integral screws within the flange of the
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-3200 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 3 of 4
gang plate port at each side of wall are tightened to firmly bear against the device sleeve to retain
it in position. The inner fabric seal shall be twisted to completely close off any unused opening
within the device.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP 653 4" Speed Sleeve
4. Cables — Within the loading area for each firestop device (Items 3B through 3E), a tightly bundled cable may be
installed. The aggregate cross-sectional area of cables shall be min 0 to max 60 percent fill for each CFS-SL RK and CFS-
SL SK firestop device (Items 3B and 3C). For the CP 653 Speed Sleeve firestop device (Item 3E), the cables can be used
for a 0 to 100 percent visual fill. Cables to be rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. Any combination of the
following types of cables may be used:
A. Max 100 pair No. 24 AWG (or smaller) copper conductor telecommunication cable with
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing and insulation.
B. Max 7/C No. 12 AWG copper conductor control cable with PVC or XLPE jacket and insulation.
E. Max RG 6/U coaxial cable with fluorinated ethylene insulation and jacketing.
F. Fiber optic cable with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene (PE) jacket and insulation having
a max diam of 1/2 in. (13 mm).
The L Ratings are dependent on the type and number of devices within the gang plate
and the cable type and fill. For devices with cable bundle, the cable bundle shall be
nominally centered within the device to attain the L Ratings. The L Ratings in CFM per
2
GP device (Table 1) and in CFM per ft of opening (Table 2) are specified below:
CAP
CAPs (Opt)
and CAP(s) and
CAPs One and Two Three Four
only Device Devices Devices Devices
Openings with — 2 4 6 8
any combination
of Item 5 cables
for max 33%
aggregate fill in
device types 3B
and 3C, and/or
max 100%
visual cable fill
in device type
3D.
CAP
CAPs (Opt)
and CAP(s) and
One CP and Two Three Four CP
653 CP 653 CP 653 653
Device Devices Devices Devices
CAPs (Item (Item (Item (Item
only 3D) 3D) 3D) 3D)
2
Table 2 - CFM per FT of Opening at Ambient and 400F
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
XHEZ.W-J-3200 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems Page 4 of 4
CAP
CAPs (Opt)
and CAP(s) and
CAPs One and Two Three Four
only Device Devices Devices Devices
CAP
CAPs (Opt)
and CAP(s) and
One CP and Two Three Four CP
653 CP 653 CP 653 653
Device Devices Devices Devices
CAPs (Item (Item (Item (Item
only 3D) 3D) 3D) 3D)
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with
permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the
following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=... 12/16/2016
Project No. WSU-160027
Agricultural Education and Water Quality Building
Wright State University, Lake Campus
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for firestop tracks for metal-framed
partition heads.
B. Product Test Reports: For each joint firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that joint firestopping systems have been
installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install joint firestopping systems when ambient or substrate
temperatures are outside limits permitted by joint firestopping system manufacturers or when
substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Install and cure joint firestopping systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural
means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that joint firestopping systems can be installed
according to specified firestopping system design.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
A. Joint Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases,
and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which joint firestopping
systems are installed. Joint firestopping systems shall accommodate building movements
without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.
i. RectorSeal
j. Roxul, Inc.
k. Specified Technologies, Inc
l. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owe Corning company
m. Tremco, Inc.
2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor,
or roof in or between which it is installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing fire-resistive joint systems, clean joints immediately to
comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with
adhesion of elastomeric fill materials or compromise fire-resistive rating.
2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum
bond with elastomeric fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning
operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support elastomeric fill
materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and
depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1. After installing elastomeric fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove
combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent
components of fire-resistive joint system.
C. Install elastomeric fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce
the following results:
1. Elastomeric fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to
achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply elastomeric fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.
3. For elastomeric fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish
to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
A. Clean off excess elastomeric fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by joint firestopping system
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure joint
firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If
damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-
resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.
A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN.
System No. HWD0285
XHBN.HWD0285
Joint Systems
Page Bottom
Design/System/Construction/Assembly Usage Disclaimer
Authorities Having Jurisdiction should be consulted in all cases as to the particular requirements covering the installation and use of UL
Certified products, equipment, system, devices, and materials.
Authorities Having Jurisdiction should be consulted before construction.
Fire resistance assemblies and products are developed by the design submitter and have been investigated by UL for compliance with
applicable requirements. The published information cannot always address every construction nuance encountered in the field.
When field issues arise, it is recommended the first contact for assistance be the technical service staff provided by the product
manufacturer noted for the design. Users of fire resistance assemblies are advised to consult the general Guide Information for each
product category and each group of assemblies. The Guide Information includes specifics concerning alternate materials and alternate
methods of construction.
Only products which bear UL's Mark are considered Certified.
XHBN Joint Systems
See General Information for Joint Systems
System No. HWD0285
June 04, 2010
Assembly Rating — 2 Hr
Nominal Joint Width — 2 In.
L Rating At Ambient — Less Than 1 CFM/Lin Ft
L Rating At 400°F — Less Than 1 CFM/Lin Ft
Class II Movement Capabilities — 12.5% Compression or Extension
http://database.ul.com/cgibin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=XHBN.HWD0285&ccnshorttitle=Joint+Systems&objid=1076104161&cf… 1/3
12/2/2016 XHBN.HWD0285 Joint Systems
1. Floor Assembly — The fire rated fluted steel unit/concrete floor assembly shall be constructed of the materials and
in a manner described in the individual D900 FloorCeiling Design in the UL Fire Resistance Directory and shall include
the following construction features:
A. Steel Floor and Form Units* — Max 3 in. (76 mm) deep galv steel fluted floor units.
B. Concrete — Min 21/2 in. (64 mm) thick reinforced concrete as measured from top plane of
the floor units.
1A. Roof Assembly — (Not Shown) —As an alternate to the floor assembly, a fire rated fluted steel deck roof
assembly may be used. The roof assembly shall be constructed of the materials and in the manner described in the
individual P900 Series RoofCeiling Design in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. The hourly rating of the roof assembly
shall be equal to or greater than the hourly rating of the wall assembly. The roof assembly shall include the following
construction features:
A. Steel Roof Deck — Max 2 in. (51 mm) deep galv steel fluted roof deck.
B. Roof Insulation — Min 21/4 in. (57 mm) thick poured insulating concrete, as measured
from the top plane of the floor units.
2. Wall Assembly — Min 8 in. (203 mm) thick steelreinforced lightweight or normal weight (100150 pcf or 1600
2400 kg/m3) structural concrete. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*.
See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of
manufacturers.
3. Joint System — Max separation between bottom of floor or roof and top of wall at time of installation of
joint system is 2 in. (51 mm). The joint system is designed to accommodate a max 12.5 percent
compression or extension from its installed width. The joint system shall consist of the following:
A. Forming Material — Nom 4 pcf (64 kg/m3) mineral wool batt insulation, min 2 in. (51 mm)
wide, compressed and firmly packed to fill the flutes and the gap between the top of the wall
and bottom of the floor or roof as a permanent form on one side of the wall. Batt insulation cut
to the shape of the fluted steel deck, approx 33 percent larger than the flutes. Pieces
compressed and installed cut edge first into the flutes above the top of the wall. Additional
pieces of batt insulation, min 2 in. wide, installed edgefirst into joint opening between bottom
of fluted steel deck and top of wall, parallel with joint direction, such that batt sections are
compressed min 33 percent in thickness. Compressed batt sections are flush with one surfaces
of wall. Adjoining lengths of batt to be tightly butted with butted seams spaced min 48 in. (1.22
m) apart along the length of the joint.
ROCK WOOL MANUFACTURING CO — Delta Board
B. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — Min 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) wet thickness (min 1/16 in. or 1.6
mm dry thickness) of fill material sprayed or troweled into the joint to completely cover mineral
wool forming material and to overlap a min of 1/2 in. (13 mm) onto wall and steel deck, within
joint cavity.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP672 Firestop Spray
C. Forming Material — Nom 4 pcf (64 kg/m3) mineral wool batt insulation, min 6 in. wide,
compressed and firmly packed to completely fill the flutes and the gap between the top of the
wall and bottom of the floor or roof as a permanent form. Batt insulation cut to the shape of
the fluted steel deck, approx 33 percent larger than the flutes. Pieces compressed and installed
cut edge first into the flutes above the top of the wall. Additional pieces of batt insulation, min
6 in. (152 mm) wide, installed edgefirst into joint opening between bottom of fluted steel deck
and top of wall, parallel with joint direction, such that batt sections are compressed min 33
percent in thickness. Compressed batt sections are flush with one surface of wall. Adjoining
lengths of batt to be tightly butted with butted seams spaced min 48 in. (1.22 m) apart along
the length of the joint.
ROCK WOOL MANUFACTURING CO — Delta Board
C1. Forming Material*Plugs — (OptionalNot Shown) Performed mineral wool plugs, formed
to the shape of the fluted floor units, friction fit to completely fill the flutes. The plugs shall be
tight to the mineral wool, Item 3A, and flush with one wall surface. Additional forming material,
described in Item 3C, to be used in conjunction with the plugs to fill the gap between the top of
the wall and the bottom of the steel floor units.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP777 Speed Plugs
D. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — Min 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) wet thickness (min 1/16 in. or 1.6
mm dry thickness) of fill material sprayed or troweled on one side of the wall to completely
cover mineral wool forming material and to overlap a min of 1/2 in. (13 mm) onto wall and
steel deck on accessible side of wall.
http://database.ul.com/cgibin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=XHBN.HWD0285&ccnshorttitle=Joint+Systems&objid=1076104161&cf… 2/3
12/2/2016 XHBN.HWD0285 Joint Systems
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP672 Firestop Spray or CFSSP
WB Firestop Joint Spray
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
Last Updated on 20100604
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's FollowUp Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's FollowUp
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory
with permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in
the following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgibin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=XHBN.HWD0285&ccnshorttitle=Joint+Systems&objid=1076104161&cf… 3/3
12/2/2016 XHBN.HWD0295 Joint Systems
System No. HWD0295
XHBN.HWD0295
Joint Systems
Page Bottom
Design/System/Construction/Assembly Usage Disclaimer
Authorities Having Jurisdiction should be consulted in all cases as to the particular requirements covering the installation and use of UL
Certified products, equipment, system, devices, and materials.
Authorities Having Jurisdiction should be consulted before construction.
Fire resistance assemblies and products are developed by the design submitter and have been investigated by UL for compliance with
applicable requirements. The published information cannot always address every construction nuance encountered in the field.
When field issues arise, it is recommended the first contact for assistance be the technical service staff provided by the product
manufacturer noted for the design. Users of fire resistance assemblies are advised to consult the general Guide Information for each
product category and each group of assemblies. The Guide Information includes specifics concerning alternate materials and alternate
methods of construction.
Only products which bear UL's Mark are considered Certified.
XHBN Joint Systems
XHBN7 Joint Systems Certified for Canada
See General Information for Joint Systems
See General Information for Joint Systems Certified for Canada
System No. HWD0295
March 23, 2012
ANSI/UL2079 CAN/ULC S115
Assembly Ratings — 1, 2, 3 and 4 Hr (See Item 2) F Ratings — 1, 2, 3 and 4 Hr (See Item 2)
Nominal Joint Width 1 In. FT Ratings — 1, 2, 3 and 4 Hr (See Item 2)
Class II Movement Capabilities —12.5% Compression or FH Ratings — 1, 2, 3 and 4 Hr (See Item 2)
Extension
L Rating At Ambient — Less Than 1 CFM/lin ft FTH Ratings — 1, 2, 3 and 4 Hr (See Item 2)
L Rating At 400 F — Less Than 1 CFM/lin ft Nominal Joint Width 1 In.
Class II Movement Capabilities — 12.5% Compression or
Extension
L Rating At Ambient — Less Than 1 CFM/lin ft
L Rating At 400 F — Less Than 1 CFM/lin ft
http://database.ul.com/cgibin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=XHBN.HWD0295&ccnshorttitle=Joint+Systems&objid=1077655006&cf… 1/3
12/2/2016 XHBN.HWD0295 Joint Systems
1. Floor Assembly — The firerated fluted steel floor unit/concrete floor assembly shall be constructed of the
materials and in the manner described in the individual FloorCeiling Design in the Fire Resistance Directory. The hourly
rating of the floor assembly shall be equal to or greater than the hourly rating of the wall assembly. The floor assembly
and shall include the following construction features:
A. Steel Floor and Form Units* — Max 3 in. (76 mm) deep galv steel fluted floor units.
B. Concrete — Min 21/2 in. (64 mm) thick reinforced concrete, as measured from the top
plane of the floor units.
2. Wall Assembly — The 1, 2, 3 or 4 h fire rated gypsum board/stud wall assembly shall be constructed of the
materials and in the manner specified in the individual U400, V400 or W400 Series Wall and Partition Design in the UL
Fire Resistance Directory and shall include the following construction features:
A. Steel Floor and Ceiling Runners — Floor and ceiling runners of wall assembly shall consist
of min No. 25 gauge galv steel channels sized to accommodate steel studs (Item 2B). Flange
height of ceiling runner shall be min 1/4 in. (6 mm) greater than max extended joint width.
Ceiling runner installed parallel to and centered directly beneath valleys of fluted steel floor
units and secured to valleys with steel fasteners or by welds spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
A1. Light Gauge Framing*Slotted Ceiling Runner — As an alternate to the ceiling runner in
Item 2A, slotted ceiling runner to consist of galv steel channel with slotted flanges sized to
accommodate steel studs (Item 2B). Slotted ceiling runner installed parallel to and centered
directly beneath valleys of fluted steel floor units and secured to valleys with steel fasteners
spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
CALIFORNIA EXPANDED METAL PRODUCTS CO — CST
BRADY CONSTRUCTION INNOVATIONS INC, DBA SLIPTRACK SYSTEMS — SLPTRK
MARINO/WARE, DIV OF WARE INDUSTRIES INC — Type SLT
A2. Light Gauge Framing*Vertical Deflection Ceiling Runner — As an alternate to the
ceiling runners in Item 2A and 2A1, vertical deflection ceiling runner to consist of galv steel
channel with slotted vertical deflection clips mechanically fastened within runner. Slotted clips,
provided with step bushings, for permanent fastening of steel studs. Flanges sized to
accommodate steel studs (Item 2B). Vertical deflection ceiling runner installed parallel and
http://database.ul.com/cgibin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=XHBN.HWD0295&ccnshorttitle=Joint+Systems&objid=1077655006&cf… 2/3
12/2/2016 XHBN.HWD0295 Joint Systems
centered directly beneath valleys of fluted steel floor units and secured to valleys with steel
fasteners spaced max 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
THE STEEL NETWORK INC — VertiTrack VTD358, VTD400, VTD600 and VTD800
B. Studs — Steel studs to be min 31/2 in. (89 mm) wide. Studs cut 1/2 in. (13 mm) to 3/4
in. (19 mm) less in length than assembly height with bottom nesting in and resting on the floor
runner and with top nesting in ceiling runner without attachment. When slotted ceiling runner is
used, steel studs secured to slotted ceiling runner with No. 8 by 1/2 in. (13 mm) long wafer
head steel screws at midheight of slot on each side of wall. When vertical deflection ceiling
runner is used, steel studs secured to slotted vertical deflection clips, through bushings, with
steel screws at midheight of each slot. Stud spacing not to exceed 24 in. (610 mm) OC.
C. Gypsum Board* — Nom 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick gypsum board with square or tapered edges.
The gypsum board type, number of layers, fastener type and sheet orientation shall be as
specified in the individual Wall and Partition Design, except that a nom 1 in. (25 mm) gap shall
be maintained between top of gypsum board and the lower surface of the steel floor units. The
screws attaching the gypsum board to the studs at the top of the first layer shall be located 4
in. (102 mm) from the steel floor unit valleys. The screws attaching the second layer to the
steel studs shall be located 31/2 in. (89 mm) from the valleys of the steel floor units. The
screws attaching the gypsum board to the studs at the top of the third layer shall be located 3
in. (76 mm) from the steel floor unit valleys. The screws attaching the fourth layer to the steel
studs shall be located 21/2 in. (64 mm) from the valleys of the steel floor units.
The hourly ratings of the joint system are dependent on the hourly rating of the wall.
3. Joint System — Max separation between bottom of floor units and top of gypsum board at time of
installation is 1 in. (25 mm). The joint system is designed to accommodate a max 12.5 percent compression
or extension from its installed width. The joint system shall consist of a forming material and a fill material as
follows:
A. Forming Material* — Nom 4 pcf (64 kg/m3) density mineral wool batt insulation cut into
strips having a width equal to the total thickness of gypsum board layers, to fill the gap
between the top of the gypsum board and bottom of the steel deck. The strips of mineral wool
are compressed 50 percent and tightly packed, cut edge first, into the gap on both sides of the
wall.
ROCK WOOL MANUFACTURING CO — Delta Board
ROXUL INC — SAFE
THERMAFIBER INC — Type SAF
B. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* — Min 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) wet thickness (min 1/16 in. or 1.6
mm dry thickness) of fill material sprayed or troweled on each side of the wall to completely
cover mineral wool forming material and to overlap a min of 1/2 in. (13 mm) onto gypsum
board and steel deck on both sides of wall.
HILTI CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS, DIV OF HILTI INC — CP672 Firestop Spray or CFSSP
WB Firestop Joint Spray
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification
(such as Canada), respectively.
Last Updated on 20120323
© 2016 UL LLC
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's FollowUp Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and covered under UL's FollowUp
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non
misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory
with permission from UL" must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in
the following format: "© 2016 UL LLC".
http://database.ul.com/cgibin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showpage.html?name=XHBN.HWD0295&ccnshorttitle=Joint+Systems&objid=1077655006&cf… 3/3
Project No. WSU-160027
Agricultural Education and Water Quality Building
Wright State University, Lake Campus
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into
masonry construction.
2. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.
3. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in hollow metal doors.
4. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
5. Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow
metal doors and frames.
6. Division 28 Section "Access Control" for access control devices installed at door
openings and provided as part of a security access control system.
C. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
2. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for
Steel Doors, Frames, Frames Anchors and Hardware Reinforcing.
3. ANSI/SDI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel
Doors and Frames.
4. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
5. ANSI/SDI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.
6. ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
7. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
8. ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-
Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
9. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies
by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus.
10. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames.
11. ANSI/SDI 122 - Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames.
12. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection
Association.
13. ANSI/NFPA 105: Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
14. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection
Association.
15. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
16. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, core descriptions, hardware reinforcements, profiles, anchors, fire-resistance
rating, and finishes.
B. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical
hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive
the finish hardware items.
1. Samples are only required by request of the architect and for manufacturers that are not
current members of the Steel Door Institute.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single
manufacturer wherever possible.
B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, latest
edition, "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames".
C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to UL10C (neutral pressure at 40” above sill) or UL 10C.
1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies Construction: For units exceeding sizes of tested
assemblies, attach construction label certifying doors are built to standard construction
requirements for tested and labeled fire rated door assemblies except for size.
2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell
openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted
temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30
minutes of standard fire-test exposure.
3. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105.
a. Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear “S” label, and include smoke and draft control
gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors.
D. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.
Provide labeled glazing material.
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit
and Project site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a
vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking.
Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
Door and frames to be stacked in a vertical upright position.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.8 WARRANTY
B. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement
of defective doors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable
for exposed applications.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
A. General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated;
fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 867.
B. Exterior Doors (Energy Efficient): Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot-dipped zinc
coated steel that complies with ASTM A924 A60. Provide doors complying with requirements
indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model, ANSI/SDI A250.4 for
physical performance level, and HMMA 867 for door construction.
2. Core Construction: Foamed in place polyurethane and steel stiffened laminated core with
no stiffener face welds, in compliance with HMMA 867 “Laminated Core”.
a. Provide 22 gauge steel stiffeners at 6 inches on-center internally welded at 5" on-
center to integral core assembly, foamed in place polyurethane core chemically
bonded to all interior surfaces. No stiffener face welding is permitted.
b. Thermal properties to rate at a fully operable minimum U-Factor 0.29 and R-Value
3.4, including insulated door, thermal-break frame and threshold.
c. Kerf Type Frames: Thermal properties to rate at a fully operable minimum U-
Factor 0.36 and R-Value 2.7, including insulated door, kerf type frame, and
threshold.
3. Level/Model: Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Minimum
16 gauge (0.053 inch - 1.3-mm) thick steel, Model 2.
4. Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to be mechanically interlocked with hairline seam.
Beveled Lock Edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
5. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel
channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the
face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw
attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or
composite channel fillers are not acceptable.
6. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9".
7. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing
plates from same material as door face sheets.
C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality cold rolled steel that complies with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by
referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical
performance level:
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated of hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM
A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60.
C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet that complies with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
D. Fire rated frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated.
A. Jamb Anchors:
B. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb, formed from A60 metallic coated
material, not less than 0.042 inches thick.
C. Mortar Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.
A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for
adjoining hollow metal components.
2.7 LOUVERS
A. Metal Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard metal louvers unless otherwise indicated.
B. Louvers for Fire Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and
labeled for use in doors with fire protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less.
A. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints at fabricator’s shop. Fixed
and removable stops to allow multiple glazed lites each to be removed independently.
Coordinate frame rabbet widths between fixed and removable stops with the type of glazing and
installation indicated.
B. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors and Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 20
gauge thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.
C. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16
mm) high unless otherwise indicated. Provide fixed frame moldings and stops on outside of
exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.
D. Preformed Metal Frames for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-
inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or powder coated finish; and approved for
use in doors of fire protection rating indicated. Match pre-finished door paint color where
applicable.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate,
frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by
others.
1. Shipping Limitations: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness
metal as frames.
2. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
a. Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to
the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling.
Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame opening.
3. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face
seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings
and to jambs by butt welding.
4. High Frequency Hinge Reinforcement: Provide high frequency hinge reinforcements at
door openings 48-inches and wider with mortise butt type hinges at top hinge locations.
5. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge straps for
continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
6. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated for removable stops, provide security screws at exterior
locations.
7. Mortar Guards: Provide guard boxes at back of hardware mortises in frames at all hinges
and strike preps regardless of grouting requirements.
8. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
9. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
b. Stud Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
10. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped or gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door
silencers. Silencers to be supplied by frame manufacturer regardless if specified in
Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door
Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware."
A. Prime Finishes: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum
finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory
applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate free primer
complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; and compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. General Contractor to verify the accuracy of dimensions given to the steel door and frame
manufacturer for existing openings or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back
set, etc.).
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for square, level,
twist, and plumb condition.
C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and
Frames."
D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.11 and NFPA 80 at fire rated openings.
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, leveled, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete and frames properly set and
secured, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,
and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.
3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with mortar.
4. Grout Requirements: Do not grout head of frames unless reinforcing has been installed in
head of frame. Do not grout vertical or horizontal closed mullion members.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
D. Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with
hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after
installation.
C. Prime-Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or
damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply touchup of compatible air drying,
rust-inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section “Door Schedule”.
2. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames".
3. Division 08 Section "Glazing".
4. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
5. Division 28 Section "Access Control".
C. Standards and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge
construction, louvers, trim for openings, and WDMA I.S.1-A classifications. Include factory
finishing specifications.
1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for
each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of
three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished
work.
2. Corner sections of doors, 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual
materials to be used.
3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer
wherever possible.
B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, latest
edition, "Industry Standard for Architectural Wood Flush Doors’.
C. Fire Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated,
based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40” above sill)
or UL10C.
1. Oversize Fire Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies
provide manufacturer’s construction label, indicating compliance to independent 3rd party
certification agency’s procedure, except for size.
2. Temperature Rise Limit: Where required and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell
openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted
temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30
minutes of standard fire test exposure.
1) Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear “S” label, and include smoke and draft
control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors.
B. Package pre-finished doors individually in plastic bags and wrap bundles of doors in plastic
sheeting.
C. Mark each door on top rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the
remainder of the construction period.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.
b. Telegraphing of core construction in wood face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-
inch span.
2. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty; Aesthetic Grade: Premium.
B. Fire Rated Doors: Provide construction and core as needed to provide fire ratings indicated.
1. Category A Edge Construction: Provide fire rated door edge construction with
intumescent seals concealed by outer stile (Category A) at 45, 60, and 90 minute rated
doors. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
2. Pairs: Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified
requirements for exposed edges.
a. Provide fire retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated
without formed steel edges and astragals.
1. Particleboard: Wood fiber based materials complying with ANSI A208.1 Particleboard
standard. Grade LD-2.
3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated edge construction with improved
screw holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for
exposed edges.
2.3 BLOCKING
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Faces: Veneer grades as noted below; veneer minimum 1/50-inch (0.5mm) thickness at
moisture content of 12% or less.
a. Running Match.
5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by
mullions.
7. Vertical Edges: Matching same species as faces. Wood or composite material, one piece,
laminated, or veneered. Minimum requirements per WDMA section P-1, Performance
Standards for Architectural Wood Flush Doors.
8. Horizontal Edges: Solid wood or structural composite material meeting the minimum
requirements per WDMA section P-1, Performance Standards for Architectural Wood
Flush Doors
9. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit sanded
before applying face veneers.
10. At doors over 40% of the face cut-out for lights and or louvers, furnish engineered
composite lumber core.
A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors up to and including 20-minute rating:
a. M1 Flush Bead.
b. At wood core doors with 20-minute fire protection ratings, provide wood beads
and metal glazing clips approved for such use.
B. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire Rated Doors over 20-minute Rating: Manufacturer's
standard frame formed of 0.048-inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or
powder coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire protection rating indicated.
1. Manufacturers:
C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with the
flush wood door manufacturer's written instructions.
2.6 FABRICATION
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Comply with final hardware
schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment
before factory machining.
2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed steel edges for hardware for pairs
of fire rated doors.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Glazing: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
D. Electrical Raceways: Provide flush wood doors receiving electrified hardware with concealed
wiring harness and standardized Molex™ plug connectors on both ends to accommodate up to
twelve wires. Coordinate connectors on end of the wiring harness to plug directly into the
electrified hardware and the through wire transfer hardware or wiring harness specified in
hardware sets in Division 08 "Door Hardware". Wire nut connections are not acceptable.
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,
including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,
before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be
omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Transparent Finish: Provide a clear protective coating over the wood veneer allowing the
natural color and grain of the selected wood species to provide the appearance specified. Stain is
applied to the wood surface underneath the transparent finish to add color and design flexibility.
1. Finish: Meet or exceed WDMA I.S. 1A TR8 UV Cured Acrylated Polyester finish
performance requirements.
2. Staining:
3. Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors and frames to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Factory Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
D. Factory Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Project site.
E. Field modifications to doors shall not be permitted, except those specifically allowed by
manufacturer or fire rating requirements.
3.3 ADJUSTING
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or
refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations,
sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining
moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.
2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-
framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following:
3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor
barriers.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-
framed entrance and storefront.
C. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by a
qualified testing agency.
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by A/E, except with A/E's
approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to A/E for
review.
1.8 WARRANTY
B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or
replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period.
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
C. Structural Loads:
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or
permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
2. Entrance Doors:
G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:
1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested
according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-
load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
H. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Test according to AAMA 501.1 as follows:
1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested at
dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less
than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
2. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating assemblies or water
appearing on assemblies' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than
condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters, or
water that is drained to exterior.
I. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor
of not more than 0.45 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100.
2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain
coefficient of no greater than 0.45 as determined according to NFRC 200.
3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified
condensation resistance rating of no less than 15 as determined according to NFRC 500.
J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface
temperature changes:
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system,
including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer.
2.3 FRAMING
B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not
integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
D. Materials:
1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.
A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 087100
"Door Hardware."
B. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners
on mounting strip.
2.6 GLAZING
2.7 ACCESSORIES
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate
fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials
and recommended by manufacturer.
2.8 FABRICATION
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.
F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest
extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying
finishes.
H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion
coating, and applying and baking finish.
1. Color and Gloss: A/E to select from manufacturer’s full range of colors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose
or by installing nonconductive spacers.
2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200
"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
F. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the
following maximum tolerances:
3. Alignment:
4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Swinging doors.
2. Sliding doors.
3. Other doors to the extent indicated.
B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
C. Related Sections:
D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and
finishes.
B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication
and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door
Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand,
function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and
Format for the Hardware Schedule."
2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating
complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door
hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals
that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected
and subject to resubmission.
a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware
item.
b. Manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor
plans and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
f. Mounting locations for door hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Warranty information for each product.
4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date,
particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of
other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data,
Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information
essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.
C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following:
1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring
diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access
control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and
field-installed wiring. Include the following:
2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details
required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.
D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate
keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format.
Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and
special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of
permanent cylinders/cores.
E. Informational Submittals:
1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on
evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section
from a single source unless otherwise indicated.
E. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced
standards.
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware
delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or
accessories at Project site without prior authorization.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware
Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software
and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service.
Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other
work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check
Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and
installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled
electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to
source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware,
and fire and detection alarm systems.
C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced
and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring,
signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified
in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions
of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware
Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.
B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other
distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at
the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
C. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door
hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are
abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
D. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in
writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01,
Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and
their designated consultants.
A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified
in the Door Hardware Sets.
2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized
for door thickness and clearances required:
3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on
Drawings:
a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened
into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for
the all out-swinging lockable doors.
5. Acceptable Manufacturers:
B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 certified continuous geared
hinge. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a
minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to
template screw locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut-
outs.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Ives (IV).
b. McKinney Products (MK).
c. Stanley Hardware (ST).
A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified.
1. Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device
location approximately six feet from the floor.
2. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts.
3. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L.
listed for windstorm components where applicable.
4. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for
appropriate installation and operation.
5. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
b. Ives (IV).
c. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
C. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANS/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and
design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as
required where conflicting hardware dictates.
1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with
beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated.
2. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers:
A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured
master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source
manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application.
2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised
trim ring.
3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.
4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be
flush and be free spinning with matching finishes.
5. Keyway: Match Facility Standard.
1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing
into key control software.
2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.
H. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with
self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent
markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of
150% of the number of locks required for the project.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
P. Electronic Key Management System: Provide an electronic key control system with Stand-alone
Plug and Play features including advanced RFID technology. Touchscreen interface with PIN
access for keys individually locked in place. Minimum 1,000 system users and 21 iFobs for
locking receptors. System shall have a minimum 250,000 audit events screen displayed or
ability to be exported via USB port.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Medeco (MC).
b. Traka (TA).
A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational
Grade 1 certified. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be
field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
A. Mortise Deadlocks, Small Case: ANSI/BHMA A156.36, Grade 1, small case mortise type
deadlocks constructed of heavy gauge wrought corrosion resistant steel. Steel or stainless steel
bolts with a 1" throw and hardened steel roller pins. Deadlocks to be products of the same
source manufacturer and keyway as other specified locksets.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise
indicated, and as follows:
A. Standard Electric Strikes: Heavy duty, cylindrical and mortise lock electric strikes conforming
to ANSI/BHMA A156.31, Grade 1, UL listed for both Burglary Resistance and for use on fire
rated door assemblies. Stainless steel construction with dual interlocking plunger design tested
to exceed 3000 lbs. of static strength and 350 ft-lbs. of dynamic strength. Strikes tested for a
minimum 1 million operating cycles. Provide strikes with 12 or 24 VDC capability and supplied
standard as fail-secure unless otherwise specified. Option available for latchbolt and latchbolt
strike monitoring indicating both the position of the latchbolt and locked condition of the strike.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. HES (HS).
B. Provide electric strikes with in-line power controller and surge suppressor by the same
manufacturer as the strike with the combined products having a five year warranty.
A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following
criteria:
1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed
and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as
required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the
Hardware Sets.
2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with
NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the
proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s
catalog and template book for specific requirements.
3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the
pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on
devices where specified in Hardware Sets.
4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging
of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light
extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration.
5. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's
heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts.
6. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used
at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated.
Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor.
8. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.
9. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.
10. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.
B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified
panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets.
Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with
the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size.
Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting
information on inside of cover.
2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L.
listed for use of fire rated doors.
3. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door
closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use.
Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically
handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.
4. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in
Hardware Sets.
5. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install
closers on door for optimum aesthetics.
6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special
mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide
through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.
B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Large Body Cast Iron): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface
mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and
fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers
to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron body construction, with adjustable backcheck and
separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the
Hardware Sets.
2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door
width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and
not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width
and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in
the Hardware Sets.
3. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop),
fabricated from the following:
4. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the
Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.
5. Acceptable Manufacturers:
A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware
Sets.
B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall
bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated,
unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor
stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide
overhead type stops and holders.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified
below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and
provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior
applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.
B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by
a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control
ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.
C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.
1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure
Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies.
D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency, for sound ratings indicated.
E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers:
2.14 FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.
2.15 FINISHES
A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes
complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes
indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition,
hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than
specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and
other conditions affecting performance.
B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types,
drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been
resolved in writing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Shop Installation: Install hardware on the doors prior to shipment to the jobsite. Field installed
hardware will only be permitted as itemized below. Comply with all other Part 3 installation
requirements.
1. Extent of shop installed hardware shall include, but is not limited to:
a. Hanging devices.
b. Latching devices.
c. Operating trim.
d. Through-door wiring cables.
e. Door closers and overhead stops.
f. Flush bolts, surface bolts, and coordinating accessories.
g. Protective trim – protection plates, edge guards, trim protectors.
h. Coat hooks, viewers, and all other door mounted accessories.
3. Bench test shop installed work. This includes both mechanical and electrical
components. Replace defective items.
4. Ship field installed hardware items clearly labeled with the door number and attached to
the door using shrink wrap. Include all templates and instructions which are required to
complete the installation.
B. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment
to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.
1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and
adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking
devices; closing devices; and seals.
C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable
publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1
"Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware
is located.
D. Integrated Wiegand access control products are required to be installed through current
members of the ASSA ABLOY "Certified Integrator" (CI) program.
E. Power Operator products and accessories are required to be installed through current members
of the manufacturer's "Power Operator Preferred Installer" program.
F. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and
written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into
surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and
reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9
Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates
involved.
G. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying
with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
H. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed.
Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will
not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in
report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door
hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed
hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the
latest possible time frame.
C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and
maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of
owner occupancy.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware.
1. IV - Ives
2. HA - Hager
3. RO - Rockwood
4. VD - Von Duprin
5. RU - Corbin Russwin
6. HS - HES
7. LC - LCN Closers
8. RF - Rixson
9. PE - Pemko
10. MK - McKinney
11. SU - Securitron
Hardware Schedule
Set: 1.0
Doors: X100A
Description: Exterior Aluminum Egress Pair x Auto-Door Operator
Set: 2.0
Doors: 100A
Description: Interior Aluminum Egress Pair x Auto-Door Operator
Set: 3.0
Doors: X100
Description: Exterior Aluminum Egress
Set: 3.1
Doors: X100B
Description: Exterior HM Egress
Set: 4.0
Doors: X112
Description: Exterior HM Pair - Storeroom Function
Set: 5.0
Doors: 100B
Description: Corridor Pair - Fire Rated
Set: 6.0
Doors: 101
Description: Storeroom Pair - Fire Rated
Set: 7.0
Doors: 103, 105
Description: Storeroom Function 1 - Fire Rated
Set: 8.0
Doors: 113
Description: Storeroom Function 2
Set: 9.0
Doors: 114
Description: Card Reader Function - Fire Rated
Notes: Entry by valid credential to reader or mechanical key override. Free egress at all times.
Reader, controllers, software & credentials by Division 28.
Coordinate with electrical and alarm/security contractor(s).
Set: 9.1
Doors: 110
Description: Card Reader Function
Notes: Entry by valid credential to reader or mechanical key override. Free egress at all times.
Reader, controllers, software & credentials by Division 28.
Coordinate with electrical and alarm/security contractor(s).
Set: 10.0
Doors: 116
Description: Classroom Function 1 - Fire Rated
Set: 11.0
Doors: 102, 104
Description: Classroom Function 2
Set: 12.0
Doors: 112A, 112B
Description: Classroom Function 3 - HW Hinges
Set: 13.0
Doors: 116A, 116B, 116C, 116D
Set: 14.0
Doors: 109, 111
Description: Push / Pull 1 - Lockable
Set: 15.0
Doors: 109A, 111A
Description: Push / Pull 2
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and
face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.
B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches square.
1. Insulating glass.
C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated,
low-E coatings.
C. Product Test Reports: For coated glass, insulating glass, and glazing sealants, for tests
performed by a qualified testing agency.
1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations
within previous 36-month period.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who
are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant,
gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with
elastomeric glazing sealants.
1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant
products and glazing materials matching those submitted.
2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass,
tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.
3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
4. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.
B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to
avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
1.12 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™.
2. Pilkington North America.
3. Viracon, Inc.
B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each
glass type.
C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer for each product and installation method.
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to
the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to
remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in
construction.
B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and
under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.
C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with
16 CFR 1201, Category II.
D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated
below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.
2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall
unit and for each lite.
3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's
WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F
4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,
according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing
Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with
certification label of the SGCC. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass,
thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-
strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass. Where heat-strengthened float glass is
indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass. Where fully
tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.
A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.
B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated)
unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.
C. Ceramic-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2
(tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3; and complying with Specification No. 95-1-31 in GANA's
"Engineering Standards Manual."
1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants.
2. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact,
including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates,
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by A/E from manufacturer's full range.
B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric
tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer
rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and
complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with
a full bead of liquid sealant.
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for
application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in
installation.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on
glass framing members and glazing components.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so
that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible
marks in the completed Work.
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or
impair appearance.
C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances
and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of
tape.
G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
J. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and
installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners
and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without
developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket
manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and
press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-
glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to
produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding
into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and
backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance
for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry
surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of
dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.
1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,
remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.
D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for
inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in
writing by glass manufacturer.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire-protection-rated glazing.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and
face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of glass and glazing product, from manufacturer.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who
are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install fire-resistant glazing until spaces are
enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient
temperature conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each
glass type.
B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer for each product and installation method.
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and impact loads
(where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the
following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; deterioration of glazing materials;
or other defects in construction.
B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glazing with certification label of the Safety
Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, glass thickness, and safety
glazing standard with which glass complies.
A. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated)
unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated, Quality-Q3.
C. Film-Faced Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic flat glass; 5-mm thickness; faced on one surface
with a clear glazing film; and complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.
A. Provide glazing gaskets, glazing sealants, glazing tapes, setting blocks, spacers, edge blocks,
and other glazing accessories that are compatible with glazing products and each other and are
approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which
products are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.
B. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant
complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. Comply with sealant and
glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications
indicated.
2. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by A/E from manufacturer's full range.
C. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric
tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer
rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and
complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
D. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with
a full bead of liquid sealant.
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that
listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-
protection rating indicated.
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with
manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at
corners, and for compliance with minimum required face and edge clearances.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Examine glazing units to locate fire side and protected side. Label or mark units as needed so
that fire side and protected side are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible
marks in the completed work.
A. Use methods approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products.
B. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
H. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face fire side or protected side as
specified.
I. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop, so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and
installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners
and work toward centers of openings.
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances. Secure spacers or spacers and backings
in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for
optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry
surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of
dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.
1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,
remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and
exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof
trusses.
A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks.
B. Evaluation Reports: For firestop tracks and post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES or other
qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Horizontal Deflection: For wall assemblies, limited to 1/240 and 1/360 at walls with tile of the
wall height based on horizontal loading of 10 lbf/sq. ft.
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 and ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 at walls
with tile hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.
2. Double-Track System: ASTM C 645 top outer tracks, inside track with 2-inch-deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer track
sized to friction-fit over inner track.
C. Firestop Tracks: Top track manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated;
in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
H. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment
flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit
insulation thickness indicated.
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,
and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in
advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply
to framing installation.
B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely
fastened.
C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports
or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at
suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install
track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
E. Direct Furring:
1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in
place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall
with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven
fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring
channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more
than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.
G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:
A. Mockups: Build mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
B. Notify A/E and Owner when gypsum board is completely hung and finish compound is sanded
smooth. A/E and Owner shall review gypsum wall board installation before priming and
painting. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected. This review does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents
unless A/E’s specifically approves such deviations in writing.
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack
panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
that correspond with support system indicated.
a. American Gypsum.
b. CertainTeed Corporation.
c. Georgia-Pacific Building Products.
d. National Gypsum Company.
a. American Gypsum.
b. CertainTeed Corporation.
c. Georgia-Pacific Building Products.
d. National Gypsum Company.
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or ASTM C 1325, with
manufacturer's standard edges.
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Custom Building Products.
c. National Gypsum Company.
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
B. Joint Tape:
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type,
sandable topping compound.
2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer.
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance
of the Work.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels
not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to
open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
B. Single-Layer Application:
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with
no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a
uniform plane across panel surfaces.
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior
Painting."
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior
Painting."
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other
non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
See General Information for Fire Resistance Ratings - CAN/ULC-S101 Certified for Canada
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification (such as Canada), respectively.
1. Floor and Ceiling Runners — (Not shown) — For use with Item 2 - Channel shaped, fabricated from min 25 MSG corrosion-protected steel, min
depth to accommodate stud size, with min 1-1/4 in. long legs, attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners 24 in. OC max.
1A. Framing Members* - Floor and Ceiling Runner — Not shown - In lieu of Item 1 — For use with Item 2B, proprietary channel shaped runners,
3-5/8 in. deep attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners 24 in. OC max.
1B. Framing Members* - Floor and Ceiling Runner — Not shown - In lieu of Item 1 — For use with Item 2C, proprietary channel shaped runners,
1-1/4 in. wide by 3-5/8 in. deep fabricated from min 0.020 in. thick galv steel, attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners spaced 24 in. OC max.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/ulweb/LISEXT/1FRAME/FireResistanceWizard.html 7/10/2015
BXUV.U419 - Fire-resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 Page 2 of 9
1C. Framing Members*— Floor and Ceiling Runners — (Not shown) — In lieu of Item 1 - Channel shaped, attached to floor and ceiling with
fasteners 24 in. OC. max.
CONSOLIDATED FABRICATORS CORP, BUILDING PRODUCTS DIV — Type SUPREME Framing System
1D. Floor and Ceiling Runners — (Not shown)—For use with Item 2A- Channel shaped, fabricated from min 20 MSG corrosion-protected or galv
steel, min depth to accommodate stud size, with min 1 in. long legs, attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners spaced max 24 in. OC.
1E. Framing Members*— Floor and Ceiling Runners — (Not shown, As an alternate to Item 1) — For use with Items 2E, 5F or 5G or 5I only,
channel shaped, fabricated from min. 0.015 in. (min bare metal thickness) galvanized steel, attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners 24 in. OC. max.
DMFCWBS L L C — ProTRAK
1F. Framing Members* - Floor and Ceiling Runner — Not shown - In lieu of Item 1 — For use with Item 2F, proprietary channel shaped runners,
minimum width to accommodate stud size, with 1- 1/8 in. long legs fabricated from min 0.015 in. (min bare metal thickness) galv steel, attached to floor
and ceiling with fasteners spaced 24 in. OC max.
1G. Framing Members* - Floor and Ceiling Runner — For use with Item 2G, proprietary channel shaped runners, minimum width to accommodate
stud size attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners 24 in. OC max.
1H. Floor and Ceiling Runners — (Not shown) — Channel shaped, fabricated from min 0.02 in. galv steel, min width to accommodate stud size, with
min 1 in. long legs, for use with studs specified below and fabricated from min 0.02 in. galv steel or thicker, attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners
spaced max 24 in. OC.
1I. Framing Members*— Floor and Ceiling Runners — (Not shown, As an alternate to Item 1) — For use with Items 2H, channel shaped, fabricated
from min. 0.015 in. (min bare metal thickness) galvanized steel, attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners 24 in. OC. max.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/ulweb/LISEXT/1FRAME/FireResistanceWizard.html 7/10/2015
BXUV.U419 - Fire-resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 Page 3 of 9
1J. Framing Members* - Floor and Ceiling Runner — Not shown - In lieu of Item 1 — For use with Item 2I, proprietary channel shaped runners,
3-5/8 in. deep attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners 24 in. OC max.
1K. Framing Members* - Floor and Ceiling Runner — Not shown - In lieu of Item 1 — For use with Item 2J, proprietary channel shaped runners,
1-1/4 in. wide by 3-5/8 in. deep fabricated from min 0.020 in. thick galv steel, attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners spaced 24 in. OC max.
2. Steel Studs — Channel shaped, fabricated from min 25 MSG corrosion-protected steel, min depth as indicated under Item 5, spaced a max of 24 in.
OC. Studs to be cut 3/8 to 3/4 in. less than assembly height.
2A. Steel Studs — (As an alternate to Item 2, For use with Items 5B, 5E, 5H, 5J and 5K) Channel shaped, fabricated from min 20 MSG corrosion-
protected or galv steel, 3-1/2 in. min depth, spaced a max of 16 in. OC. Studs friction-fit into floor and ceiling runners. Studs to be cut 5/8 to 3/4 in. less
than assembly height.
2B. Framing Members* - Steel Studs — (As an alternate to Item 2, For use with Items 5C, 5I or 5K) - Proprietary channel shaped studs, 3-5/8 in. deep
spaced a max of 24 in. OC. Studs to be cut 3/4 in less than the assembly height and installed with a 1/2 in. gap between the end of the stud and track at
the bottom of the wall. For direct attachment of gypsum board only.
2C. Framing Members* - Steel Studs — Not shown - In lieu of Item 2 — proprietary channel shaped steel studs, min depth as indicated under Item 5,
spaced a max if 24 in. OC, fabricated from min 0.020 in. thick galv steel. Studs cut 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. less in lengths than assembly heights.
2D. Framing Members*— Steel Studs — In lieu of Item 2 - Channel shaped studs, min depth as indicated under Item 5, spaced a max of 24 in. OC.
Studs to be cut 3/4 in. less than assembly height.
CONSOLIDATED FABRICATORS CORP, BUILDING PRODUCTS DIV — Type SUPREME Framing System
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/ulweb/LISEXT/1FRAME/FireResistanceWizard.html 7/10/2015
BXUV.U419 - Fire-resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 Page 4 of 9
2E. Framing Members*— Steel Studs — (Not shown, As an alternate to Item 2) —For use with Items 5F or 5G or 5I or 5K only, channel shaped studs,
min depth as indicated under Item 5F, 5G or 5I, fabricated from min. 0.015 in. (min bare metal thickness) galvanized steel, spaced a max of 24 in. OC.
Studs to be cut 3/4 in. less than assembly height.
DMFCWBS L L C — ProSTUD
2F. Framing Members* - Steel Studs — Not shown - In lieu of Item 2 — proprietary channel shaped steel studs, minimum width indicated under Item
5, 1-1/4 in. deep fabricated from min 0.015 in. (min bare metal thickness) galvanized steel. Studs 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. less in lengths than assembly heights.
2G. Framing Members* - Steel Studs — Not shown - In lieu of Item 2 - proprietary channel shaped studs, minimum width indicated under Item 5,
Studs to be cut 3/8 to 3/4 in less than the assembly height.
2H. Framing Members*— Steel Studs — (Not shown, As an alternate to Item 2) — Fabricated from min. 0.015 in. (min bare metal thickness)
galvanized steel, spaced a max of 24 in. OC. Studs to be cut 3/4 in. less than assembly height.
2I. Framing Members* - Steel Studs — (As an alternate to Item 2, For use with Items 5C or 5L or 5K) - Proprietary channel shaped studs, 3-5/8 in.
deep spaced a max of 24 in. OC. Studs to be cut 3/4 in less than the assembly height and installed with a in. gap between the end of the stud and track
at the bottom of the wall. For direct attachment of gypsum board only.
2J. Framing Members* - Metal Studs — Not shown - In lieu of Item 2 — proprietary channel shaped steel studs, min depth as indicated under Item 5,
spaced a max if 24 in. OC, fabricated from min 0.020 in. thick galv steel. Studs cut 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. less in lengths than assembly heights
2K. Framing Members*— Steel Studs — As an alternate to Item 2 - For use with Item 1, channel shaped studs, fabricated from min 25 MSG
corrosion-protected steel, min depth as indicated under Item 5, spaced a max of 24 in. OC. Studs to be cut 3/8 to 3/4 in. less than assembly height.
2L. Framing Members* — Steel Studs — As an alternate to Item 2 - For use with Item 1, channel shaped studs, fabricated from min 25 MSG
corrosion-protected steel, min depth as indicated under Item 5, spaced a max of 24 in. OC. Studs to be cut 3/8 to 3/4 in. less than assembly height.
2M. Framing Members* — Steel Studs — As an alternate to Item 2 - For use with Item 1, channel shaped studs, fabricated from min 25 MSG
corrosion-protected steel, min depth as indicated under Item 5, spaced a max of 24 in. OC. Studs to be cut 3/8 to 3/4 in. less than assembly height.
3. Wood Structural Panel Sheathing — (Optional, For use with Item 5 Only.) - (Not Shown) - 4 ft wide, 7/16 in. thick oriented strand board (OSB) or
15/32 in. thick structural 1 sheathing (plywood) complying with DOC PS1 or PS2, or APA Standard PRP-108, manufactured with exterior glue, applied
horizontally or vertically to the steel studs. Vertical joints centered on studs, and staggered one stud space from wallboard joints. Attached to studs with
flat-head self-drilling tapping screws with a min. head diam. of 0.292 in. at maximum 6 in. OC. in the perimeter and 12 in. OC. in the field. When used,
fastener lengths for gypsum panels increased by min. 1/2 in.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/ulweb/LISEXT/1FRAME/FireResistanceWizard.html 7/10/2015
BXUV.U419 - Fire-resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 Page 5 of 9
4. Batts and Blankets* — (Required as indicated under Item 5) — Mineral wool batts, friction fitted between studs and runners. Min nom thickness as
indicated under Item 5. See Batts and Blankets (BKNV or BZJZ) Categories for names of Classified companies.
4A. Batts and Blankets* — (Optional) — Placed in stud cavities, any glass fiber or mineral wool insulation bearing the UL Classification Marking as to
Surface Burning Characteristics and/or Fire Resistance. See Batts and Blankets (BKNV or BZJZ) Categories for names of Classified companies.
4B. Batts and Blankets* — For use with Item 5K. Placed in stud cavities, any min. 3-1/2 in. thick glass fiber insulation bearing the UL Classification
Marking as to Surface Burning Characteristics and/or Fire Resistance. See Batts and Blankets (BKNV or BZJZ) Categories for names of Classified
companies.
5. Gypsum Board* — Gypsum panels with beveled, square or tapered edges, applied vertically or horizontally. Vertical joints centered over studs and
staggered one stud cavity on opposite sides of studs. Vertical joints in adjacent layers (multilayer systems) staggered one stud cavity. Horizontal joints
need not be backed by steel framing. Horizontal edge joints and horizontal butt joints on opposite sides of studs need not be staggered. Horizontal edge
joints and horizontal butt joints in adjacent layers (multilayer systems) staggered a min of 12 in. The thickness and number of layers for the 1 hr, 2 hr, 3
hr and 4 hr ratings are as follows:
CGC INC — 1/2 in. thick Type C, IP-X2 or IPC-AR; WRC, 5/8 in. thick Type AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, WRX or WRC; 3/4
in. thick Types IP-X3 or ULTRACODE
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO — 1/2 in. thick Type C, IP-X2, IPC-AR or WRC; 5/8 in. thick Type SCX, SGX, SHX, WRX, IP-X1, AR, C, WRC,
FRX-G, IP-AR, IP-X2, IPC-AR ; 3/4 in. thick Types IP-X3 or ULTRACODE
USG MEXICO S A DE C V — 1/2 in. thick Type C, IP-X2, IPC-AR or WRC; 5/8 in. thick Type AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX,
WRX, WRC or; 3/4 in. thick Types IP-X3 or ULTRACODE
When Item 7B, Steel Framing Members*, is used, Nonbearing Wall Rating is limited to 1 Hr. Min. stud depth is 3-1/2 in., min. thickness of insulation
(Item 4) is 3 in., and two layers of gypsum board panels (1/2 in. or 5/8 in. thick) shall be attached to furring channels as described in Item 6. One layer of
gypsum board panels (1/2 in. or 5/8 in. thick) attached to opposite side of stud without furring channels as described in Item 6.
5A. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Item 5) — 5/8 in. thick, 24 to 54 in. wide, applied horizontally as the outer layer to one side of the assembly.
Secured as described in Item 6.
5B. Gypsum Board* — (Not Shown) - As an alternate to Item 5 when used as the base layer on one or both sides of wall when 5/8 in or in. thick
products are specified. For direct attachment only to steel studs Item 2A, (not to be used with Item 3) - Nom 5/8 in. or in. may be used as alternate to
all 5/8 in. or in. shown in Item 5, Wallboard Protection on Each Side of Wall table. Nom 5/8 in. or in. thick lead backed gypsum panels with
beveled, square or tapered edges, applied vertically. Vertical joints centered over studs and staggered min 1 stud cavity on opposite sides of studs.
Gypsum board secured to 20 MSG steel studs Item 2A with 1-1/4 in. long Type S-12 steel screws spaced 8 in. OC at perimeter and 12 in. OC in the field.
To be used with Lead Batten Strips (see Item 11) or Lead Discs or Tabs (see Item 12).
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/ulweb/LISEXT/1FRAME/FireResistanceWizard.html 7/10/2015
BXUV.U419 - Fire-resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 Page 6 of 9
5C. Gypsum Board* — (For Use With Item 2B) Rating Limited to 1 Hour. 5/8 in. thick, 48 in. wide, Gypsum panels with beveled, square or tapered
edges, applied vertically or horizontally. (Vertical Application) - The gypsum board is to be installed on each side of the studs with 1 in. long Type S
coated steel screws spaced 8 in. OC starting 4 in. from the edge of the board at the vertical edges and 12 in. OC starting 6 in. from the edge of the board
at the center of each board. Gypsum boards are to be secured to the top and bottom track with screws spaced 8 in. OC starting 4 in. from the board edge.
Fasteners shall not penetrate through both the stud and the track at the same time. Vertical joints are to be centered over studs and staggered one stud
cavity on opposite sides of studs. (Horizontal Application) - The gypsum board is to be installed on each side of the studs with 1 in. long Type S coated
steel screws spaced 8 in. OC starting 4 in. from the edge of the board at the vertical edges and 12 in. OC starting 6 in. from the edge of the board at the
center of each board. Gypsum boards are to be secured to the top and bottom track with screws spaced 8 in. OC starting 4 in. from the board edge.
Fasteners shall not penetrate through both the stud and the track at the same time. All horizontal joints are to be backed as outlined under section VI of
Volume 1 in the Fire Resistive Directory.
5D. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Item 5) — 5/8 in. thick, 48 in. wide, applied vertically or horizontally. Secured as described in Item 6. For
use with Items 1 and 2 only.
5E. Gypsum Board* — (Not Shown) - (As an alternate to Item 5 when used as the base layer on one or both sides of wall when 1/2 in. or 5/8 in thick
products are specified, For direct attachment only to steel studs Item 2A, not to be used with Item 3). Nominal 5/8 in. thick lead backed gypsum panels
with beveled, square or tapered edges, applied vertically. Vertical joints centered over studs and staggered min 1 stud cavity on opposite sides of studs.
Wallboard secured to studs with 1-1/4 in. long Type S-12 (or No. 6 by 1-1/4 in. long bugle head fine driller) steel screws spaced 8 in. OC at perimeter
and 12 in. OC in the field.
5F. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Item 5) — For use with Items 1E and 2E and limited to 1 Hour Rating only, Gypsum panels with beveled,
square or tapered edges, applied vertically, and fastened to the steel studs with 1 in. long Type S screws spaced 8 in. OC along vertical and bottom edges
and 12 in. OC in the field. Vertical joints centered over studs and staggered one stud cavity on opposite sides of studs. Steel stud depth shall be a
minimum 3-5/8 in.
5G. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Item 5) — For use with Items 1E and 2E only, Gypsum panels with beveled, square or tapered edges,
applied vertically or horizontally, as specified in the table below and fastened to the steel studs as described in Item 6. Vertical joints centered over studs
and staggered one stud cavity on opposite sides of studs. Vertical joints in adjacent layers (multilayer systems) staggered one stud cavity. Horizontal
joints need not be backed by steel framing. Horizontal edge joints and horizontal butt joints on opposite sides of studs need not be staggered. Horizontal
edge joints and horizontal butt joints in adjacent layers (multilayer systems) staggered a min of 12 in. The thickness and number of layers for the 2 hr, 3
hr and 4 hr ratings are as follows:
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/ulweb/LISEXT/1FRAME/FireResistanceWizard.html 7/10/2015
BXUV.U419 - Fire-resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 Page 7 of 9
CGC INC — 1/2 in. thick Type C, IP-X2 or IPC-AR;, 5/8 in. thick Type AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, or; 3/4 in. thick Types IP-
X3 or ULTRACODE
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO — 1/2 in. thick Type C, IP-X2, IPC-AR or; 5/8 in. thick Type SCX, SGX, SHX, IP-X1, AR, C, , FRX-G, IP-AR, IP-
X2, IPC-AR ; 3/4 in. thick Types IP-X3 or ULTRACODE
USG MEXICO S A DE C V — 1/2 in. thick Type C, IP-X2, IPC-AR or; 5/8 in. thick Type AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, or; 3/4
in. thick Types IP-X3 or ULTRACODE
5H. Gypsum Board* — (Not Shown) - (As an alternate to Item 5 when used as the base layer on one or both sides of wall when 5/8 or 3/4 in thick
products are specified. For direct attachment only to steel studs Item 2A, (not to be used with Item 3) - Nom 5/8 or 3/4 in. may be used as alternate to all
5/8 or 3/4 in. shown in Item 5, Wallboard Protection on Each Side of Wall table. Nom 5/8 or 3/4 in. thick lead backed gypsum panels with beveled,
square or tapered edges, applied vertically. Vertical joints centered over 20 MSG steel studs and staggered min 1 stud cavity on opposite sides of studs.
Wallboard secured to studs with 1-1/4 in. long Type S-12 steel screws spaced 8 in. OC at perimeter and 12 in. OC in the field. Gypsum board secured to
20 MSG steel studs Item 2B with 1-1/4 in. long Type S-12 steel screws spaced 8 in. OC at perimeter and 12 in. OC in the field. For Joint Compound see
Item 5. To be used with Lead Batten Strips (see Item 11A) or Lead Discs (see Item 12A).
5I. Gypsum Board* — (As an alternate to Item 5) - Nom. 5/8 in. thick gypsum panels with beveled, square or tapered edges installed as described in
Item 5. Steel stud minimum depth shall be as indicated in Item 5.
5J. Gypsum Board* — (Not Shown) - (As an alternate to Item 5 when used as the base layer on one or both sides of wall when 1/2 in. or 5/8 in thick
products are specified, For direct attachment only to steel studs Item 2A, not to be used with Item 3). Nom 5/8 in. thick lead backed gypsum panels with
beveled, square or tapered edges, applied vertically. Vertical joints centered over studs and staggered min 1 stud cavity on opposite sides of studs.
Wallboard secured to studs with 1-1/4 in. long Type S-12 steel screws gypsum panel steel screws spaced 8 in. OC at perimeter and 12 in. OC in the field.
Lead batten strips required behind vertical joints of lead backed gypsum wallboard and optional at remaining stud locations. Lead batten strips, min 2 in.
wide, max 8 ft long with a max thickness of 0.14 in. placed on the face of studs and attached to the stud with construction adhesive and two 1 in. long
Type S-12 pan head steel screws, one at the top of the strip and one at the bottom of the strip. Lead discs, nominal 3/8 in. diam by max 0.085 in. thick.
Compression fitted or adhered over the screw heads. Lead batten strips and discs to have a purity of 99.9% meeting the Federal specification QQ-L-201f,
Grade "C".
5K. Gypsum Board* — (Not Shown) - (As an alternate to Item 5) - Nom. 5/8 in. thick gypsum panels with beveled, square or tapered edges, applied
vertically or horizontally. Vertical joints centered over studs and staggered one stud cavity on opposite sides of studs. Vertical joints in adjacent layers
(multilayer systems) staggered one stud cavity. Horizontal joints need not be backed by steel framing. Horizontal edge joints and horizontal butt joints on
opposite sides of studs need not be staggered. Horizontal edge joints and horizontal butt joints in adjacent layers (multilayer systems) need not be
staggered. The number of layers for the 1 hr, 2 hr, 3 hr and 4 hr ratings are as follows:
6. Fasteners — (Not shown) — For use with Items 2 and 2F - Type S or S-12 steel screws used to attach panels to studs (Item 2) or furring channels
(Item 7). Single layer systems: 1 in. long for 1/2 and 5/8 in. thick panels or 1-1/4 in. long for 3/4 in. thick panels, spaced 8 in. OC when panels are
applied horizontally, or 8 in. OC along vertical and bottom edges and 12 in. OC in the field when panels are applied vertically. Two layer systems: First
layer- 1 in. long for 1/2 and 5/8 in. thick panels or 1-1/4 in. long for 3/4 in. thick panels, spaced 16 in. OC. Second layer- 1-5/8 in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in.
thick panels or 2-1/4 in. long for 3/4 in. thick panels, spaced 16 in. OC with screws offset 8 in. from first layer.Three-layer systems: First layer- 1 in.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/ulweb/LISEXT/1FRAME/FireResistanceWizard.html 7/10/2015
BXUV.U419 - Fire-resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 Page 8 of 9
long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 24 in. OC. Second layer- 1-5/8 in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 24 in. OC. Third layer- 2-1/4
in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels or 2-5/8 in. long for 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 12 in. OC. Screws offset min 6 in. from layer below. Four-layer
systems: First layer- 1 in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 24 in. OC. Second layer- 1-5/8 in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 24
in. OC. Third layer- 2-1/4 in. long for 1/2 in. thick panels or 2-5/8 in. long for 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 24 in. OC. Fourth layer- 2-5/8 in. long for 1/2
in. thick panels or 3 in. long for 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 12 in. OC. Screws offset min 6 in. from layer below.
6A. Fasteners — (Not shown) - For use with Item 5K- Type S or S-12 steel screws used to attach panels to studs or furring channels (Item 7). Single
layer systems: 1 in. long screws, spaced 8 in. OC when panels are applied horizontally, or 8 in. OC along vertical and bottom edges and 12 in. OC in the
field when panels are applied vertically. Two layer systems: First layer- 1 in. long screws, spaced 16 in. OC. Second layer- 1-5/8 in. screws, spaced 8 in.
OC with screws offset 8 in. from first layer. Three-layer systems: First layer- 1 in. long screws, spaced 24 in. OC. Second layer- 1-5/8 in. long screws,
spaced 24 in. OC. Third layer- 2-5/8 in. long screws, spaced 8 in. OC. Screws offset min 6 in. from layer below. Four-layer systems: First layer- 1 in.
long screws, spaced 24 in. OC. Second layer- 1-5/8 in. long screws, spaced 24 in. OC. Third layer- 2-5/8 in. long screws, spaced 24 in. OC. Fourth layer-
3 in. long screws, spaced 8 in. OC. Screws offset min 6 in. from layer below.
7. Furring Channels — (Optional, not shown, for single or double layer systems) — Resilient furring channels fabricated from min 25 MSG corrosion-
protected steel, spaced vertically a max of 24 in. OC. Flange portion attached to each intersecting stud with 1/2 in. long Type S-12 steel screws. Not for
use with Item 5A and 5E.
7A. Framing Members* — (Optional on one or both sides, not shown, for single or double layer systems) — As an alternate to Item 7, furring channels
and Steel Framing Members as described below:
a. Furring Channels — Formed of No. 25 MSG galv steel. 2-9/16 in. or 2-23/32 in. wide by 7/8 in. deep, spaced max. 24 in. OC
perpendicular to studs. Channels secured to studs as described in Item b. Gypsum board attached to furring channels as described in
Item 6. Not for use with Item 5A and 5E.
b. Steel Framing Members* — Used to attach furring channels (Item 7Aa) to studs (Item 2). Clips spaced max. 48 in. OC. RSIC-1
and RSIC-1 (2.75) clips secured to studs with No. 8 x 1-1/2 in. minimum self-drilling, S-12 steel screw through the center grommet.
RSIC-V and RSIC-V (2.75) clips secured to studs with No. 8 x 9/16 in. minimum self-drilling, S-12 steel screw through the center
hole. Furring channels are friction fitted into clips. RSIC-1 and RSIC-V clips for use with 2-9/16 in. wide furring channels. RSIC-1
(2.75) and RSIC-V (2.75) clips for use with 2-23/32 in. wide furring channels.
PAC INTERNATIONAL INC — Types RSIC-1, RSIC-V, RSIC-1 (2.75), RSIC-V (2.75).
7B. Framing Members* — (Optional, Not Shown) — As an alternate to Item 7, for single or double layer systems, furring channels and Steel Framing
Members on only one side of studs as described below:
a. Furring Channels — Formed of No. 25 MSG galv steel, spaced 24 in. OC perpendicular to studs. Channels secured to studs as
described in Item b. Batts and Blankets placed in stud cavity as described in Item 5. Two layers of gypsum board attached to furring
channels as described in Item 5. Not for use with Item 5A and 5E.
b. Steel Framing Members* — Used to attach furring channels (Item 7Ba) to one side of studs (Item 2) only. Clips spaced 48 in.
OC., and secured to studs with two No. 8 x 2-1/2 in. coarse drywall screws, one through the hole at each end of the clip. Furring
channels are friction fitted into clips.
7C. Framing Members* — (Not Shown) — (Optional on one or both sides, not shown, for single or double layer systems) — As an alternate to Item 7,
furring channels and Steel Framing Members as described below:
a. Furring Channels — Formed of No. 25 MSG galv steel. 2-3/8 in. wide by 7/8 in. deep, spaced max. 24 in. OC perpendicular to
studs. Channels secured to studs as described in Item b. Gypsum board attached to furring channels as described in Item 6. Not for use
with Item 5A and 5E.
b. Steel Framing Members* — Used to attach furring channels (Item 7Aa) to studs (Item 2). Clips spaced max. 48 in. OC.
GENIECLIPS secured to studs with No. 8 x 1-1/2 in. minimum self-drilling, S-12 steel screw through the center grommet. Furring
channels are friction fitted into clips.
7D. Steel Framing Members — (Optional, Not Shown)* - Furring channels and resilient sound isolation clip as described below:
a. Furring Channels — Formed of No. 25 MSG galv steel. Spaced 24 in. OC perpendicular to studs. Channels secured to studs as
described in Item b. Ends of adjoining channels overlapped 6 in. and secured together with four self-tapping No. 8x1/2 Self Drilling
screws (2 per side 1 in. and 4 in. from overlap edge). Gypsum board attached to furring channels as described in Item 4. Side joint
furring channels shall be attached to studs with RESILMOUNT Sound Isolation Clips - located approximately 2 in. from each end of
length of channel. Both Gypsum Boards at side joints fastened into channel with screws spaced 8 in. OC, approximately 1/2 in. from
joint edge. Not for use with Item 5A and 5E.
b. Steel Framing Members* — Resilient sound isolation clip used to attach furring channels (Item 7Da) to studs. Clips spaced 24 in.
OC., and secured to studs with No. 10 x 2-1/2 in. coarse drywall screw through the center hole. Furring channels are friction fitted into
clips.
STUDCO BUILDING SYSTEMS — RESILMOUNT Sound Isolation Clips - Type A237 or A237R
8. Joint Tape and Compound — Vinyl or casein, dry or premixed joint compound applied in two coats to joints and screw heads of outer layers. Paper
tape, nom 2 in. wide, embedded in first layer of compound over all joints of outer layer panels. Paper tape and joint compound may be omitted when
gypsum panels are supplied with a square edge.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/ulweb/LISEXT/1FRAME/FireResistanceWizard.html 7/10/2015
BXUV.U419 - Fire-resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 Page 9 of 9
9. Siding, Brick or Stucco — (Optional, not shown) — Aluminum, vinyl or steel siding, brick veneer or stucco, meeting the requirements of local code
agencies, installed over gypsum panels. Brick veneer attached to studs with corrugated metal wall ties attached to each stud with steel screws, not more
than each sixth course of brick.
10. Caulking and Sealants* — (Optional, not shown) — A bead of acoustical sealant applied around the partition perimeter for sound control.
11. Lead Batten Strips — (Not Shown, For Use With Item 5B) - Lead batten strips, min 1-1/2 in. wide, max 10 ft long with a max thickness of 0.125 in.
Strips placed on the interior face of studs and attached from the exterior face of the stud with two 1 in. long Type S-12 pan head steel screws, one at the
top of the strip and one at the bottom of the strip. Lead batten strips to have a purity of 99.9% meeting the Federal specification QQ-L-201f, Grade "C".
Lead batten strips required behind vertical joints of lead backed gypsum wallboard (Item 5B) and optional at remaining stud locations. Required behind
vertical joints.
11A. Lead Batten Strips — (Not Shown, For Use With Item 5H) Lead batten strips, 2 in. wide, max 10 ft long with a max thickness of 0.140 in. Strips
placed on the face of studs and attached to the stud with two min. 1 in. long min. Type S-8 pan head steel screws, one at the top of the strip and one at the
bottom of the strip or with one min. 1 in. long min. Type S-8 pan head steel screw at the top of the strip. Lead batten strips to have a purity of 99.5%
meeting the Federal specification QQ-L-201f, Grades "B, C or D". Lead batten strips required behind vertical joints of lead backed gypsum wallboard
and optional at remaining stud locations.
12. Lead Discs or Tabs — (Not Shown, For Use With Item 5B) - Used in lieu of or in addition to the lead batten strips (Item 11) or optional at other
locations - Max 3/4 in. diam by max 0.125 in. thick lead discs compression fitted or adhered over steel screw heads or max 1/2 in. by 1-1/4 in. by max
0.125 in. thick lead tabs placed on gypsum boards (Item 5B) underneath screw locations prior to the installation of the screws. Lead discs or tabs to have
a purity of 99.9% meeting the Federal specification QQ-L-201f, Grade "C".
12A. Lead Discs — (Not Shown, for use with Item 5H) Max 5/16 in. diam by max 0.140 in. thick lead discs compression fitted or adhered over steel
screw heads. Lead discs to have a purity of 99.5% meeting the Federal Specification QQ-L-201f, Grades "B, C or D".
13. Lead Batten Strips — (Not Shown, For Use With Item 5E) Lead batten strips, 2 in. wide, max 10 ft long with a max thickness of 0.142 in. Strips
placed on the face of studs and attached to the stud with two min. 1 in. long min. Type S-8 pan head steel screws, one at the top of the strip and one at the
bottom of the strip or with one min. 1 in. long min. Type S-8 pan head steel screw at the top of the strip. Lead batten strips to have a purity of 99.9%
meeting the Federal specification QQ-L-201f, Grade "C". Lead batten strips required behind vertical joints of lead backed gypsum wallboard (Item 5E)
and optional at remaining stud locations.
14. Lead Tabs — (Not Shown, For Use With Item 5E) 2 in. wide, 5 in. long with a max thickness of 0.142 in. Tabs friction-fit around front face of stud,
the stud folded back flange, and the back face of the stud. Tabs required at each location where a screw (that secures the gypsum boards, Item 5E) will
penetrate the steel stud. Lead tabs to have a purity of 99.9% meeting the Federal specification QQ-L-201f, Grade "C". Lead tabs may be held in place
with standard adhesive tape if necessary.
* Indicates such products shall bear the UL or cUL Certification Mark for jurisdictions employing the UL or cUL Certification (such as Canada),
respectively.
http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/ulweb/LISEXT/1FRAME/FireResistanceWizard.html 7/10/2015
Project No. WSU-160027
Agricultural Education and Water Quality Building
Wright State University, Lake Campus
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Porcelain tile.
2. Glazed wall tile.
3. Stone thresholds.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and
isolation joints in tile surfaces.
2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1
apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.
B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B,
ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9,
ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14,
ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications
for Installation of Ceramic Tile."
1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and
locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished
tile surfaces.
1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.
3. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.
B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile
manufacturer and Installer.
D. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products and certified porcelain tile.
A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type,
composition, and color indicated.
A. Installer Qualifications:
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination can be avoided.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile from single source or producer.
1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent
quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate
from single source or producer.
1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and
aggregate, from single manufacturer.
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,
compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with
ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced
by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements
specified.
C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and
package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved Samples.
D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard
with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile
assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is
suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.
a. Wainscot Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 4 by
16 inches.
a. Base for Thinset Mortar Installations: Straight, module size 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches.
b. Wainscot Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 4-1/4
by 4-1/4 inches.
2.4 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between
adjacent floor finishes.
1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above
adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of
threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.
B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503/C 503M, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 according
to ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241/C 241M and with honed finish.
1. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin liquid-latex additive at
Project site.
2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging
mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
a. Bostik, Inc.
b. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC.
c. MAPEI Corporation.
2. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout
mix.
B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other
substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances
required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with
surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically
scarified.
b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or
grinding.
3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.
4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset
mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-
setting material manufacturer.
B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and
packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to
manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA
installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the
ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA
installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and
grouting materials used.
1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile
installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for
straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other
penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize
the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise
indicated.
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within
tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same
size, align joints.
3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on
floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.
F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting
materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above
them.
I. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless
otherwise indicated.
A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written
instructions for type of application indicated.
A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new
matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to
prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral
protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.
B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed.
C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from
tile surfaces.
1. Ceramic Tile Installation [CT-1 & CT-5]: TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F; thinset
mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings.
B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling
attachment devices to be cast in concrete.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Diffusers.
c. Grilles.
d. Speakers.
e. Sprinklers.
B. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
C. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system, from ICC-ES.
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and
store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage
from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and
other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before
beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and its supporting suspension
system from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E 1264
and designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted.
2. Pattern: CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured).
D. Color: White.
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; basis of design Cirrus High NRC Tegular
2. CertainTeed Corporation.
3. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E 1264
and designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 1, nodular.
2. Pattern: E (lightly textured)
D. Color: White.
H. Thickness: 7/8-inch.
B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E 1264
and designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, water
felted; with vinyl overlay on face.
2. Pattern: GH (smooth and printed).
D. Color: White.
A. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip
galvanized, G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M,
Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
2. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but
not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified
in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel
ceilings.
B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture
damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless
otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye
screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not
deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or
power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,
install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from
hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of
each member.
10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards.
C. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
D. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide precise
fit.
2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
suspension-system runners and moldings.
3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of
reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
4. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped flanges, install
panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel
faces flush with bottom face of runners.
A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet,
non-cumulative.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage.
B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rubber base.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12
inches long.
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each
type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following
periods:
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid,
homogeneous).
D. Height: 4 inches.
C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish, nominal 2 inches wide, of height
required to protect exposed edges of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to minimize
running joints.
D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient stair-
tread manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are
to be installed.
D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
products.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would
otherwise be exposed.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.
C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Include sheet flooring layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing
partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
2. Show details of special patterns.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color, texture, and pattern specified, in
manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections.
1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches
long, of each color required.
D. Welded-Seam Samples: For seamless-installation technique indicated and for each resilient
sheet flooring product, color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center
of 6-by-9-inch Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of resilient sheet flooring to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Resilient Sheet Flooring: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or
fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each type, color, and pattern of
flooring installed.
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in
techniques required by manufacturer for resilient sheet flooring installation and seaming method
indicated.
1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by
resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for installation techniques required.
A. Store resilient sheet flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather,
with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store rolls upright.
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient sheet flooring during the
following periods:
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after resilient sheet flooring installation.
E. Install resilient sheet flooring after other finishing operations, including painting and casework
installation, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
1. Flexco.
2. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company.
3. Nora Systems, Inc. basis of design noraplan valua
F. Colors and Patterns: Match A/E's samples: basis of design noraplan value Clear Sky.
C. Seamless-Installation Accessories:
D. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:
1. Cove Strip: 1-inch radius provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer.
2. Corners: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by resilient
sheet flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient sheet flooring.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by resilient sheet flooring
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range
on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9
pH.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and
perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly
spaced in installation areas.
a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only
after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000
sq. ft. in 24 hours.
b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity
level measurement.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install resilient sheet flooring until materials are the same temperature as space where
they are to be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move flooring and installation materials into
spaces where they will be installed.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
sheet flooring.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring.
B. Unroll resilient sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
D. Scribe and cut resilient sheet flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and
permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend resilient sheet flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on resilient sheet flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent marking device.
G. Adhere resilient sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate
to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
H. Seamless Installation:
1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with
welding bead to fuse sections permanently into a seamless flooring installation. Prepare,
weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.
I. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove resilient sheet flooring 6 inches up vertical surfaces. Support
flooring at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient sheet
flooring.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient sheet flooring
installation:
C. Protect resilient sheet flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of
construction period.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in
furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
2. Show details of special patterns.
C. Samples: Full-size units of each color, texture, and pattern of floor tile required.
D. Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color,
and pattern of floor tile installed.
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in
techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated.
1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by
floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.
A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient
temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50
deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following periods:
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
E. Size: 12 by 12 inches.
F. Colors and Patterns: Match A/E's samples; basis of design Mannington Essentials:
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit
floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion
of resilient products.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor
tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale
recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and
perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly
spaced in installation areas.
a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only
after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000
sq. ft. in 24 hours.
b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity
level measurement.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor tiles until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be
installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation
materials into spaces where they will be installed.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
floor tile.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using
cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent
fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles
to center of door openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking
device.
G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers,
and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between
pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that
abut covers and to cover perimeters.
H. Adhere floor tiles to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a
completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing
of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:
C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying
liquid floor polish.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories
installed with carpet tile.
1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not
limited to, the following:
B. Shop Drawings: For carpet tile installation, plans showing the following:
1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet tiles.
2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.
3. Type of installation.
4. Pattern of installation.
5. Pattern type, location, and direction.
6. Pile direction.
C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each
Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated
on Drawings and in schedules.
D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,
but not less than 10 sq. yd.
A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and
ventilation limitations.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the
construction period.
C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to
bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles,
install carpet tiles before installing these items.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of
carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
2. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
C. Pattern: Match A/E's samples: basis of design: Vertical layers, tinge 5T156
F. Fiber Type: Meets equivalent performance/standards or exceeds that of Dupont Antron Legacy,
1. Dimensional stability
2. Seam pass lateral seam stress resistance test
N. Size: 9 by 36 inches.
O. Applied Treatments:
a. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive
bacteria, not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no
fungal growth, according to AATCC 174.
3. Fiber Technology: Permanent Stain Resistance as passed by GSA using AATCC Test
Method
F. Fiber Type: Meets equivalent performance/standards or exceeds that of Dupont Antron Legacy,
1. Dimensional stability
2. Seam pass lateral seam stress resistance test
N. Size: 18 by 36 inches.
O. Applied Treatments:
a. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive
bacteria, not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no
fungal growth, according to AATCC 174.
3. Fiber Technology: Permanent Stain Resistance as passed by GSA using AATCC Test
Method
C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown,
of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize
running joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting carpet tile performance.
B. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.
C. Concrete Slabs: Verify that finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000
"Cast-in-Place Concrete" and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits.
1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and
perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly
spaced in installation areas.
a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only
after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000
sq. ft. in 24 hours.
b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity
level measurement.
c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet
tile manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile manufacturer's
written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile.
C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that
are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using
solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile
manufacturers.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet"
and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.
E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut
edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
1. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by
carpet tile manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standard," Section 20,
"Protecting Indoor Installations."
C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.
B. Related Requirements:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
C. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
F. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in the
Exterior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.
A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its
"MPI Approved Products Lists."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
C. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do
not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content
or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written
instructions.
E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacture but not less than the following:
1. SSPC-SP 3.
2. SSPC-SP 11.
F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop
paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply
with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by
mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of
subsequently applied paints.
3.3 APPLICATION
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final
installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door
frames.
4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
1) Benjamin Moore
2) PPG Architectural
3) Sherwin-Williams
1) Dunn Edwards
2) PPG Architectural
3) Sherwin-Williams
B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1) Benjamin Moore
2) PPG Architectural
3) Sherwin-Williams
c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #11.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1. Meet with Owner, A/E and Painter to review substrate and finish locations and transition.
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
B. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in the
Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.
A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its
"MPI Approved Products Lists."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.
3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing
finishes and primers.
E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do
not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content
or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written
instructions.
F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.
G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop
paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply
with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by
mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of
subsequently applied paints.
3.3 APPLICATION
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
D. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety
and Security Work:Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:
3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by A/E, and leave in
an undamaged condition.
a. First Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, matching topcoat.
b. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99.
c. Color to be gray as selected by A/E.
B. CMU Substrates:
C. Steel Substrates:
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.
D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
E. Plastic Substrates:
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Visual Display Panel: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches, with facing, core, and backing
indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required.
2. Trim: 6-inch-long sections of each trim profile.
D. Product Schedule: For visual display units. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
A. Deliver factory-fabricated visual display units completely assembled in one piece. If dimensions
exceed maximum manufactured unit size, or if unit size is impracticable to ship in one piece,
provide two or more pieces with joints in locations indicated on approved Shop Drawings.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display units until spaces are
enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is
complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and
humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display unit from single source from single
manufacturer.
1. Assembly: Markerboard.
2. Corners: Square.
3. Width: As indicated on Drawings.
4. Height: Four-feet or as indicated on Drawings.
5. Mounting Method: Direct to wall.
1. Color: White.
D. Aluminum Frames: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch-thick, extruded aluminum; slim
size and standard shape.
a. Color: As selected by A/E from full range of industry colors and color densities.
E. Joints: Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate
with minimum number of joints, balance around center of board, as acceptable to A/E.
1. Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and cast-aluminum end
closures.
1. Color: White.
D. Aluminum Frames: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch-thick, extruded aluminum; slim
size and standard shape.
a. Color: As selected by A/E from full range of industry colors and color densities.
E. Joints: No joints allowed. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of
board, as acceptable to A/E.
2.6 MATERIALS
A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: PEI-1002, with face sheet manufacturer's standard two- or three-
coat process.
D. Adhesives for Field Application: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive for use with specific
type of panels, sheets, or assemblies; and for substrate application; as recommended in writing
by visual display unit manufacturer.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations
in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved
Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
B. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603, except with a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion
coating, and applying and baking finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of connections
before installation of motorized, sliding visual display units.
C. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display units.
D. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth where sliding visual display units will
be installed.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
B. Clean substrates of substances, such as dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the
performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards.
C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings,
cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual
display units and wall surfaces.
D. Prime wall surfaces indicated to receive direct-applied visual display assemblies and as
recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and visual display unit manufacturer.
E. Prepare recesses for sliding visual display units as required by type and size of unit.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on
Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level,
and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and
accessories necessary for complete installation.
1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate
with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to A/E.
2. Where size of visual display board assemblies or other conditions require support in
addition to normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as
C. Factory-Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Adhere to wall surfaces with egg-size
adhesive gobs at 16 inches o.c., horizontally and vertically.
D. Visual Display Board Assembly Mounting Heights: Install visual display units at mounting
heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below.
1. Mounting Height 36 inches above finished floor to top of chalktray unless indicated
otherwise on the drawings.
A. Clean visual display units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one
removable cleaning instructions label to visual display unit in each room.
C. Cover and protect visual display units after installation and cleaning.
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of toilet compartment material indicated.
1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared on 6-
inch-square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
2. Each type of hardware and accessory.
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents and source.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and
other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before
fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with NFPA 286; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. During the 40kW exposure, flames shall not spread to the ceiling.
2. During the 160kW exposure, the interior finish shall comply with the following:
a. Flame shall not spread to the outer extremity of the sample on any wall or ceiling.
b. Flashover, as defined in NFPA 286, shall not occur
3. The peak rate of heat release throughout the NFPA 286 test shall not exceed 800kW.
4. The total smoke released throughout the NFPA 286 test shall not exceed 1,000m2
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1 for toilet
compartments designated as accessible.
1. Bradley Corporation.
2. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.
3. Scranton Products.
4. Accurate Partition Corp.
D. Door, Panel and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material,
not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern
throughout thickness of material.
E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.
F. Brackets (Fittings):
D. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished
to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for
through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel,
or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related materials.
2.4 MATERIALS
2.5 FABRICATION
D. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide, in-swinging doors for
standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-
wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance
of the Work.
1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring
devices.
1. Maximum Clearances:
2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-
height brackets.
a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters
with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise
indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster
with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and
adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.
C. Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches into
structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb,
and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters
when doors are in closed position.
D. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and
plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.
3.3 ADJUSTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach supporting tracks to
overhead structural system.
2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sound barrier construction above the ceiling at
track.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing,
prepared on Samples of size indicated below:
1. Textile Facing Material: Full width by not less than 36-inch-long section of fabric from
dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern
repeat.
2. Panel Edge Material: Not less than 3 inches long.
3. Hardware: One of each exposed door-operating device.
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Partition track, track supports and bracing, switches, turning space, and storage layout.
2. Suspended ceiling components.
3. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
5. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. HVAC ductwork, outlets, and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Smoke detectors.
f. Access panels.
B. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support-
beam, mounting-hole template.
E. Product Test Reports: For each operable panel partition, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable panel partitions to include in maintenance
manuals.
a. Panel finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include
precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to
finishes and performance.
b. Seals, hardware, track, track switches, carriers, and other operating components.
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same production run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Panel Finish-Facing Material: Furnish full width in quantity to cover both sides of two
panels when installed.
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages and
panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on
panels.
1.11 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency
for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated:
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes complying with one of the
following as determined by testing identical products by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
2. Fire Growth Contribution: Complying with acceptance criteria of local code and
authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265 Method B Protocol or
NFPA 286.
A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension
system, operators, and accessories.
a. Hufcor, Inc.
b. KWIK-WALL Company.
c. Panelfold.
C. Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and with
reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed
fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with
tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and
finish irregularities.
2.3 SEALS
A. Description: Seals that produce operable panel partitions complying with performance
requirements and the following:
B. Horizontal Top Seals: Continuous-contact, resilient seal exerting uniform constant pressure on
track or resilient, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal exerting uniform constant
pressure on track when extended.
1. Mechanically Operated for Acoustical Panels: Extension and retraction of bottom seal by
operating handle or built-in operating mechanism, with operating range not less than 1-
1/2 inches between retracted seal and floor finish.
A. Description: Finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire-test-response
characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate backing,
using mildew-resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by facing manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Apply one-piece, seamless facings free of air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other
defects, with edges tightly butted, and with no gaps or overlaps. Horizontal seams are not
permitted. Tightly secure and conceal raw and selvage edges of facing for finished
appearance.
2. Where facings with directional or repeating patterns or directional weave are indicated,
mark facing top and attach facing in same direction.
3. Match facing pattern 72 inches above finished floor.
B. Fabric Wall Covering: Manufacturer's standard fabric, from same dye lot, treated to resist stains.
D. Cap-Trimmed Edges: Protective perimeter-edge trim with tight hairline joints concealing edges
of panel and finish facing, finished as follows:
E. Trimless Edges: Fabricate exposed panel edges so finish facing wraps uninterrupted around
panel, covering edge and resulting in an installed partition with facing visible on vertical panel
edges, without trim, for minimal sightlines at panel-to-panel joints.
A. Tracks: Steel or aluminum with adjustable steel hanger rods for overhead support, designed for
operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size track to support partition
operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable panel partitions, or
adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 inch between bracket
supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate
configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage.
1. Panel Guide: Aluminum guide on both sides of the track to facilitate straightening of the
panels; finished with factory-applied, decorative, protective finish.
2. Head Closure Trim: As required for acoustical performance; with factory-applied,
decorative, protective finish.
B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for
easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine flooring, floor levelness, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of operable panel partitions.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including
painting, have been completed in area of partition installation.
D. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not
acceptable.
E. Light-Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and
top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full closure of vertical joints
and full closure along top and bottom seals.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operable panel partitions, hardware, and other moving parts to function smoothly, and
lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Corner guards.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for metal protective trim units, according to
BHMA A156.6, used for armor, kick, mop, and push plates.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall and door protection showing locations and extent.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall-protection unit indicated, in
each color and texture specified.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following products, prepared
on Samples of size indicated below:
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of wall and door protection product to include in maintenance
manuals.
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
A. Store wall and door protection in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-
ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the period
plastic materials are stored.
2. Keep plastic materials out of direct sunlight.
3. Store plastic wall- and door-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until
plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wall- and door-
protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall-protection products from single source from single
manufacturer.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Plastic Materials: Chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant plastic with integral color
throughout; extruded and sheet material as required, thickness as indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION
C. Quality: Fabricate components with uniformly tight seams and joints and with exposed edges
rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other
imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline
joints.
2.6 FINISHES
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine walls to which wall and door protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and
other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of
support fasteners.
1. For wall and door protection attached with adhesive, verify compatibility with and
suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall and door protection.
B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Installation Quality: Install wall and door protection according to manufacturer's written
instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips,
cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.
B. Mounting Heights: Install wall and door protection in locations and at mounting heights
indicated on Drawings.
C. Accessories: Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, trim, joint moldings, and other
accessories required for a complete installation.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a
standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 093013 "Ceramic Tiling" for ceramic toilet and bath accessories.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,
cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.
B. Samples: Full size, for each exposed product and for each finish specified.
1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.
C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, visible silver spoilage defects.
2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Owner-Furnished Materials: Toilet paper dispenser (TPD), Sanitary napkin dispenser (SN),
Paper towel dispenser (PT), Soap dispenser (SD), and Trash/recycling containers (WR).
A. Source Limitations: Obtain public-use washroom accessories from single source from single
manufacturer.
3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated
below.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain childcare accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
2. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with
child-protection strap.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches from wall when
closed.
4. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism.
5. Material and Finish: HDPE in manufacturer's standard color.
6. Liner Dispenser: Built in.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain custodial accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf.
3. Length: 36 inches.
4. Hooks: Four.
5. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type.
6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-
inch minimum nominal thickness.
C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.
E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-
theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
G. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and
access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with
corrosion-resistant backing plates.
B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to
ASTM F 446.
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Review methods and procedures related to fire-protection cabinets including, but not
limited to, the following:
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel
style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semirecessed-, or surface-
mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
1.7 SEQUENCING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
D. Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
I. Accessories:
1. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,
size, spacing, and location.
J. Materials:
2. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm
thick, Class 1 (clear).
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated
and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2
inch thick.
2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
B. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed
cabinets will be installed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of
cabinet and trim style.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not
indicated, at heights indicated below:
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral
locking devices operate properly.
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-
finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-
protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
C. Related Requirements:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting
bracket indicated.
C. Purple-K Dry-Chemical Type in Aluminum Container [FE-2]: UL-rated 30-B:C, 5-lb nominal
capacity, with potassium bicarbonate-based dry chemical in enameled-aluminum container.
B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
a. Orientation: Horizontal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard size:
A. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching
mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Full-size units of the following metal locker hardware items equal to 10 percent of
amount installed for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than five units:
a. Locks.
b. Identification plates.
c. Hooks.
A. Do not deliver metal lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for their
installation.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that metal lockers can be supported and
installed as indicated.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal lockers that
fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period.
a. Structural failures.
b. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain metal lockers and accessories from single source from single locker
manufacturer.
B. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed into
channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at horizontal
edges.
C. Body: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from unperforated
steel sheet with thicknesses as follows:
1. Tops, Bottoms, and Intermediate Dividers: 0.024-inch nominal thickness, with single
bend at sides.
2. Backs and Sides: 0.024-inch nominal thickness, with full-height, double-flanged
connections.
3. Shelves: 0.024-inch nominal thickness, with double bend at front and single bend at sides
and back.
D. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; lapped and
factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main
frames. Form continuous, integral, full-height door strikes on vertical main frames.
1. Cross Frames between Tiers: Channel formed and fabricated from same material as main
frames; welded to vertical main frames.
E. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory-installed
rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is closed;
fabricated to swing 180 degrees.
1. Knuckle Hinges: Steel, full loop, five or seven knuckles, tight pin; minimum 2-inches
high. Provide no fewer than three hinges for each door more than 42-inches high.
F. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless-steel cup with integral door pull, recessed so
locking device does not protrude beyond door face; pry and vandal resistant.
1. Multipoint Latching: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with built-in combination
locks, built-in key locks, or padlocks; positive automatic latching and prelocking.
a. Latch Hooks: Equip doors 48 inches and higher with three latch hooks and doors
less than 48 inches high with two latch hooks; fabricated from 0.105-inch nominal-
thickness steel sheet; welded or riveted to full-height door strikes; with resilient
silencer on each latch hook.
b. Latching Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard, rattle-free latching mechanism and
moving components isolated to prevent metal-to-metal contact, and incorporating a
prelocking device that allows locker door to be locked while door is open and then
closed without unlocking or damaging lock or latching mechanism.
H. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type hooks, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.
I. Legs: 6 inches high; formed by extending vertical frame members, or fabricated from 0.075-
inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to bottom of locker.
1. Closed Front and End Bases: Fabricated from 0.036-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.
N. Materials:
1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B,
suitable for exposed applications.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of dents
or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs.
1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for complete
installation.
B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and
back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame
members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.
C. Equipment: Provide each locker with an identification plate and the following equipment:
1. Double-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook and two single-prong wall hooks.
D. Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets for
preassembly at plant prior to shipping.
F. Recess Trim: Fabricated with minimum 2-1/2-inch face width and in lengths as long as
practical; finished to match lockers.
G. Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers. Provide slip-
joint filler angle formed to receive filler panel.
H. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated with 1-inch-wide edge dimension, and designed for concealing
fasteners and holes at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.
I. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for
perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.
J. Center Dividers: Full-depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf; finished to match
lockers.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with self-locking nuts
or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.
B. Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install lockers level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.
1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more
than 36 inches o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing
plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion.
2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top of lockers and to floor.
B. Knocked-Down Lockers: Assemble with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on door
faces or face frames.
C. Equipment:
a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two aluminum
rivets.
D. Trim: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight,
hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without
binding.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit use during
construction.
B. Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished
appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker
manufacturer.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for metal support framing for front-projection
screens.
2. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood backing for screen
installation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gain: Ratio of light reflected from screen material to that reflected perpendicularly from a
magnesium carbonate surface as determined per SMPTE RP 94.
B. Half-Gain Angle: The angle, measured from the axis of the screen surface to the most central
position on a perpendicular plane through the horizontal centerline of the screen where the gain
is half of the peak gain.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts and types of front-projection screens. Include the following:
1. Drop lengths.
2. Location of seams in viewing surfaces.
3. Location of screen centerline relative to ends of screen case.
4. Anchorage details, including connection to supporting structure for suspended units.
5. Accessories.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install front-projection screens until spaces are
enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC
system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy
levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.7 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Projection Screens: Obtain front-projection screens from single
manufacturer. Obtain accessories, including necessary mounting hardware, from screen
manufacturer.
1. Screen Mounting: Top edge securely anchored to a 3-inch-diameter, rigid steel roller;
bottom edge formed into a pocket holding a tubular metal slat, with ends of slat protected
by plastic caps, and with a saddle and pull attached to slat by screws.
Tab tensioning is standard with Stewart Filmscreen Corporation, optional with Draper and Da-Lite Screen
Company, and unavailable from both BEI Audio/Visual Products and Bretford.
2. Tab Tensioning: Provide units that have a durable low-stretch cord, such as braided
polyester, on each side of screen that is connected to edge of screen by tabs to pull screen
flat horizontally.[ In lieu of tab tensioning, screens may be constructed from vinyl-
coated screen cloth that contains horizontal stiffening monofilaments to resist edge
curling.]
extrusions; with vinyl covering or baked-enamel finish and matching end caps. Provide
mounting brackets unless otherwise indicated.
A. Matte-White Viewing Surface: Peak gain of not less than 0.9, and gain of not less than 0.8 at an
angle of 50 degrees from the axis of the screen surface.
D. Flame-Spread Index: Not greater than 75 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
1. Color: Black.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Install front-projection screens with screen cases in position and in relation to adjoining
construction indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner that produces a
smoothly operating screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing surface flat when screen is
lowered.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring fume
hoods.
2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for reinforcements in metal-framed
partitions for anchoring fume hoods.
3. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for field quality-control
testing of fume hoods.
4. Section 230993 "HVAC Sequence of Operation" for VAV controls for fume hood
exhaust.
5. Division 23 Section for fume hood duct connections, including ducts, control valves and
exhaust fans.
6. Section 230995 “Laboratory Airflow Control System” for air flow control and safety
alarms.
7. Division 22, 23 and 26 Sections for connecting service utilities at back of fume hoods.
Piping and wiring within fume hoods are specified in this Section.
8. Division 26 Sections for electrical device identification plaques.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for lateral support of fume
hoods.
B. Coordinate installation of fume hoods with laboratory casework and other laboratory
equipment.
A. Product Test Reports: Showing compliance with specified performance requirements for as-
manufactured containment and static pressure loss, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests
performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of fume hood finish provided. Include
fillers, primers, paints, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to damaged
fume hood finish.
A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of
polyethylene film or another suitable material.
B. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support fume hoods by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Constant Volume Fume Hoods with VAV Control and Steel Exterior:
1. Obtain laboratory fume hoods from same source from same manufacturer as laboratory
casework.
A. Containment: Provide fume hoods that comply with the following when tested according to
ASHRAE 110 as modified below:
7. Test Setup Modifications: Conduct tests with a minimum of three and a maximum of five
people in the test room and with two 1-gal. round paint cans, one 12-by-12-by-12-inch
cardboard box, and three 6-by-6-by-12-inch cardboard boxes in the fume hood during the
test. Position items from 6 to 10 inches behind the sash, randomly distributed, and
supported off the work surface by 2-by-2-inch blocks.
8. Walk-by Test: At the conclusion of containment test, execute three rapid walk-bys at 30-
second intervals, 12 inches behind the mannequin. Test-gas concentration during each
walk-by shall not exceed 0.1 ppm and shall return to specified containment value within
15 seconds.
B. Static-Pressure Loss: Not more than 1/2-inch wg at 100-fpm face velocity with sash 18-inch
open when measured at four locations 90 degrees apart around the exhaust duct and at least
three duct diameters downstream from duct collar.
2.4 MATERIALS
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled
standard of flatness.
D. Epoxy: Factory molded, modified epoxy-resin formulation with smooth, nonspecular finish.
1. Physical Properties:
a. No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28 percent),
benzene, carbon tetrachloride, dimethyl formamide, ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol,
ethyl ether, methyl alcohol, nitric acid (70 percent), phenol, sulfuric acid (60
percent), and toluene.
b. Slight Effect: Chromic acid (60 percent) and sodium hydroxide (50 percent).
E. Glass: Clear, laminated tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1172, Kind LT, Condition A,
Type I, Class I, Quality-Q3; with two plies not less than 3.0 mm thick and with clear, polyvinyl
butyral interlayer.
1. Ultraclear Glass: Glass plies each have visible light transmission not less than 91 percent.
2. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for
Category II materials.
3. Permanently mark safety glass with certification label of the SGCC or another
certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate
manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which
glass complies.
F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Assemble fume hoods in factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble fume hoods
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Fume hoods shall be capable of being
partly disassembled as necessary to permit movement through a 35-by-79-inch door opening.
B. Steel Exterior: Fabricate from steel sheet, 0.048 inch thick, with component parts screwed
together to allow removal of end panels, front fascia, and airfoil and to allow access to
plumbing lines and service fittings. Apply chemical-resistant finish to interior and exterior
surfaces of component parts before assembly.
C. Ends: Fabricate with double-wall end panels without projecting corner posts or other
obstructions to interfere with smooth, even airflow. Close area between double walls at front of
fume hood and as needed to house sash counterbalance weights, utility lines, and remote-control
valves.
D. Splay top and sides of face opening to provide an aerodynamic shape to ensure smooth, even
flow of air into fume hood.
F. Molded Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Lining: Molded unit consisting of end panels, back
panel, preset rear baffle, and top bonded together into a single piece; reinforced to form a rigid
assembly to which exterior is attached.
1. Punch fume hood lining side panels to receive service fittings and remote controls.
Provide removable plug buttons for holes not used for indicated fittings.
G. Rear Baffle: Unless otherwise indicated, provide baffle, of same material as fume hood lining,
at rear of hood with openings at top and bottom. Secure baffle to cleats at rear of hood with
stainless-steel screws. Fabricate baffle for easy removal for cleaning behind baffle.
1. Provide adjustable baffles with control adjustment strips at top and bottom with plastic or
stainless-steel knobs unless otherwise indicated.
H. Exhaust Plenum: Full width of fume hood and with adequate volume to provide uniform airflow
from hood, of same material as hood lining, and with duct stub for exhaust connection.
1. Fabricate from 0.050-inch-stainless steel. Form into four-sided frame with bottom corners
welded and finished smooth. Make top member removable for glazing replacement. Set
glazing in chemical-resistant, U-shaped gaskets.
2. Glaze with laminated safety glass.
3. Counterbalance vertical-sliding sash with sash weight and stainless-steel cable system to
hold sash in place regardless of position. Provide ball-bearing sheaves, plastic glides in
stainless-steel guides, and stainless-steel lift handles. Provide rubber bumpers at top and
bottom of each sash unit.
J. Airfoil: Unless otherwise indicated, provide airfoil at bottom of fume hood face opening with 1-
inch space between airfoil and work top. Sash closes on top of airfoil, leaving 1-inch opening
for air intake. Airfoil directs airflow across work top to remove heavier-than-air gases and to
prevent reverse airflow.
K. Light Fixtures: Provide vaporproof, two-tube, rapid-start, fluorescent light fixtures, of longest
practicable length; complete with tubes at each fume hood. Shield tubes from hood interior with
1/4-inch-thick laminated glass or 3-mm-thick tempered glass, sealed into hood with chemical-
resistant rubber gaskets. Provide units with fluorescent tubes easily replaceable from outside of
fume hood.
1. Provide fluorescent tubes with color temperature of 3500 K and minimum color-
rendering index of 85.
L. Ceiling Extensions: Provide filler panels matching fume hood exterior to enclose space above
fume hoods at front and sides of fume hoods and extending from tops of fume hoods to ceiling.
M. Finished Back Panels: Where rear surfaces of fume hoods are exposed to view, provide finished
back panels matching rest of fume hood enclosure.
N. Pre-wire and pre-plumb fume hood for single point of connection for each utility. Comply with
requirements in other Sections for installing water and laboratory gas service fittings, piping,
electrical devices, and wiring. Install according to Shop Drawings. Securely anchor fittings,
piping, and conduit to fume hoods unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 FUME HOOD BASE STANDS, WORK TOPS, SINKS, AND SERVICE FITTINGS
1. Work-Top Configuration: Raised (marine) edge with beveled edge and corners.
2. Where epoxy sinks occur in epoxy work tops, provide integral sinks bonded to tops with
invisible joint line.
D. Fume Hood Base Stands: Welded steel tubing legs, not less than 2 inches square with channel
stretchers and aprons. Weld or bolt stretchers to legs and cross-stretchers, and bolt legs to
aprons. Provide leveling device welded to bottom of each leg.
1. Structural Performance: Capable of withstanding 50-lb/ft. work top, 75 lb/ft. on work top,
plus weight of hood, without permanent deformation or excessive deflection.
2. Knee Space: Provide clear floor space not less than 36 inches wide by 25 inches deep by
27 inches high within fume hood base stands unless otherwise indicated.
3. Leg Shoes: Black vinyl or rubber, open-bottom, slip-on type.
A. General: Prepare, treat, and finish welded assemblies after welding. Prepare, treat, and finish
components that are to be assembled with mechanical fasteners before assembling. Prepare,
treat, and finish concealed surfaces same as exposed surfaces.
B. Preparation: Clean steel surfaces, other than stainless steel, of mill scale, rust, oil, and other
contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be
applied over it.
C. Chemical-Resistant Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply fume hood
manufacturer's standard two-coat, chemical-resistant, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat
and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for
applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
1. Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish System: Finish complies with acceptance
levels of cabinet surface finish tests in SEFA 8M. Acceptance level for chemical spot test
shall be no more than four Level 3 conditions.
2. Colors for Fume Hood Finish: As selected by A/E from manufacturer's full range.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Sash Stops: Provide fume hoods with sash stops to limit hood opening to 18-inch high. Sash
stops can be manually released to open sash fully for cleaning fume hood and for placing large
apparatus within fume hood.
A. Demonstrate fume hood performance before shipment by testing one fume hood for each type
required according to ASHRAE 110 as modified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
Provide testing facility, instruments, equipment, and materials needed for tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fume hoods.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fume hoods according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install level,
plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims, and securely anchor to building and
adjacent laboratory casework. Securely attach access panels but provide for easy removal and
secure reattachment. Where fume hoods abut other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe
for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 123553.13 "Metal Laboratory Casework" for installing
fume hood base cabinets, work tops, and sinks.
C. Comply with requirements for installing water and laboratory gas service fittings and electrical
devices.
1. Install fittings according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2.3, and
manufacturer's written instructions. Set bases and flanges of sink and work top-mounted
fittings in sealant recommended by manufacturer of sink or work-top material. Securely
anchor fittings to fume hoods unless otherwise indicated.
A. Field test installed fume hoods according to "Flow Visualization and Velocity Procedure"
requirements in ASHRAE 110.
1. Test one installed fume hood, selected by Architect, for each type of hood installed,
according to ASHRAE 110 as modified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
B. Field test installed fume hoods according to ASHRAE 110 as modified in "Performance
Requirements" Article to verify compliance with performance requirements.
1. Adjust fume hoods, hood exhaust fans, and building's HVAC system, or replace hoods
and make other corrections until tested hoods perform as specified.
2. After making corrections, retest fume hoods that failed to perform as specified.
A. Adjust moving parts for smooth, near silent, accurate sash operation with one hand. Adjust
sashes for uniform contact of rubber bumpers. Verify that counterbalances operate without
interference.
B. Clean finished surfaces, including both sides of glass; touch up as required; and remove or
refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for
mounting roller shades and accessories.
2. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for
light-blocking shades with a sealant.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband
materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of shadeband material.
1. Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches square. Mark interior face of material if
applicable.
2. Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches long.
C. Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color,
and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than two units.
A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and
location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in
spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed
units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from
Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer.
1. Draper Inc.
2. Hunter Douglas Contract.
3. MechoShade Systems, Inc.
B. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that
stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.
D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller
assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions
indicated.
E. Shadebands:
F. Installation Accessories:
1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and
operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.
a. Shape: L-shaped.
b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband
assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches.
A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including
requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.
B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74
deg F:
1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4,
provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure
shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion
of the material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, locations of connections to
building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
A. Clean roller shade surfaces, after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, which ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by A/E, before
time of Substantial Completion.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring
laboratory casework.
2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for reinforcements in metal-framed
partitions for anchoring laboratory casework.
3. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base applied to metal
laboratory casework.
4. Section 115313 "Laboratory Fume Hoods" for fume hoods.
5. Section 224500 “Emergency Plumbing Fixtures” for emergency showers, eyewashes and
drench hoses.
6. Division 22 and 26 sections for installing service fittings specified in this Section,
including connecting service utilities.
7. Division 26 sections for electrical cover-plate identification.
1. Meet with Owner, A/E, agency representative, casework installer, roofing system
manufacturer’s representative, installers whose work interfaces with or affects laboratory
casework, including plumbing, electrical and HVAC.
2. Review status of submittals
3. Review mock-up requirements
4. Review Inspection requirements
5. Review Environmental requirements for staring and installing casework
6. Review general, mechanical and electrical trades work that are complete prior to
installation.
7. Review Protection for casework
8. Review coordination and sequencing of trades
9. Review acceptance of room conditions.
10. Review keying requirements
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for support of laboratory
casework.
B. Coordinate installation of laboratory casework with installation of fume hoods and other
laboratory equipment.
A. Product Data: Include sufficient documentation show full compliance with the specifications for
each type of product. Cross out all no-relevant data. Cross reference all service fittings and sink
data to the Architect’s schedules.
B. Shop Drawings: For laboratory casework. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment
details.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-applied finishes and other materials requiring color
selection.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of cabinet finish and each type of countertop material,
in manufacturer's standard sizes.
F. Samples for Verification: Unless otherwise directed, approved full-size Samples may become
part of the completed Work, if in an undisturbed condition at time of Substantial Completion.
Notify Architect of their exact locations. If acceptable full-size Samples at Project site are not
incorporated into the Work, retain and remove them when directed by Architect.
1. One full-size, finished base cabinet complete with hardware, doors, drawers and
adjustable shelving.
2. One Sample each of hinged doors.
3. One Sample each of lipped shelves.
4. 6-inch-square Samples for each type of countertop material.
5. One of each service fitting specified, complete with accessories and specified finish.
6. One of each type of sink and accessory item specified.
7. One of each type of hardware item specified.
8. One Sample each of utility-space framing.
B. Product Test Reports for Casework: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified independent testing agency, indicating compliance of laboratory casework with
requirements of specified product standard.
C. Product Test Reports for Countertop Surface Material: Based on evaluation of comprehensive
tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency, indicating compliance of laboratory
countertop surface materials with requirements specified for chemical and physical resistance.
D. Detrimental Chemical List: Include list of chemicals detrimental to cabinet finish and epoxy
resin.
A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of metal laboratory casework provided.
Include fillers, primers, paints, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to
damaged laboratory casework finish.
B. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of
polyethylene film or other suitable material.
B. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support casework by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.11 WARRANTY
1. Special Warranty includes the following defect but are not limited to: ruptured, cracked
or stained coatings; discoloration or lack of finish integrity; cracking or peeling of finish;
slippage, shift, or failure of attachment to wall ,floor or ceiling; weld or structural failure;
waroping or unloaded deflections of components; failure of hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Obtain countertops, sinks, accessories and service fitting from casework manufacturer.
A. Casework Product Standard: Comply with SEFA 8 M, "Laboratory Grade Metal Casework."
B. Flammable Liquid Storage: Where cabinets are indicated for solvent or flammable liquid
storage, provide units that are listed and labeled as complying with requirements in NFPA 30 by
FM Approvals.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
A. Metal: Unless indicated otherwise, Cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M; matte finish; suitable for exposed applications and ASTM A240, type
304 or 316 alloy.
a. Durcon Incorporated.
b. Prime Industries, Inc.
c. Kewaunee
a. No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28 percent),
benzene, carbon tetrachloride, dimethyl formamide, ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol,
ethyl ether, methyl alcohol, nitric acid (70 percent), phenol, sulfuric acid (60
percent), and toluene.
b. Slight Effect: Chromic acid (60 percent) and sodium hydroxide (50 percent).
4. Color: Gray
a. Arborite.
b. Formica Corporation.
c. Nevamar; a Panolam Industries International, Inc. brand.
d. Trespa; basis of design
2. Chemical Resistance: Composite countertop material has the following ratings when
tested with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5:
a. No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28 percent),
ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol, formaldehyde (37 percent), furfural, nitric acid (30
percent), phosphoric acid (85 percent), sodium hydroxide (20 percent), sulfuric
acid (33 percent), toluene, and zinc chloride.
A. Fabrication: Assemble and finish units at point of manufacture. Use precision dies for
interchangeability of like-size drawers, doors, and similar parts. Perform assembly on precision
jigs to provide units that are square. Reinforce units with angles, gussets, and channels. Except
where otherwise specified, integrally frame and weld cabinet bodies to form dirt- and vermin-
resistant enclosures. Where applicable, reinforce base cabinets for sink support. Maintain
uniform clearance around door and drawer fronts of 1/16 to 3/32 inch.
B. Flush Doors: Outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with full-height channel
reinforcements at center of door. Fill doors with noncombustible, sound-deadening material.
C. Hinged Doors: Mortise for hinges and reinforce with angles welded inside inner pans at hinge
edge.
E. Adjustable Shelves: Unless noted otherwise on drawings, provide shelves with front, back, and
ends formed down, with edges returned horizontally at front and back to form reinforcing
channels. Shelves to have a one- inch upturn lip at locations noted on the drawings.
F. Toe Space: Fully enclosed, 4 inches high by 3 inches deep, with no open gaps or pockets.
G. Tables: Welded tubing legs, not less than 2 inches square with channel stretchers as needed to
comply with product standard. Weld or bolt stretchers to legs and cross-stretchers, and bolt legs
to table aprons. Provide leveling device welded to bottom of each leg.
H. Utilities: Provide space, cutouts, and holes for pipes, conduits, and fittings in cabinet bodies to
accommodate utility services and their support-strut assemblies.
1. Provide base cabinets with removable backs for access to utility space.
I. Utility-Space Framing: Steel framing units consisting of two steel slotted channels complying
with MFMA-4, not less than 1-5/8 inches square by 0.105-inch nominal thickness, that are
connected at top and bottom by U-shaped brackets made from 1-1/4-by-1/4-inch steel flat bars.
Framing units may be made by welding specified channel material into rectangular frames
instead of using U-shaped brackets.
J. Filler and Closure Panels: Provide where indicated and as needed to close spaces between
cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with
same finish as cabinets and with hemmed or flanged edges unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide knee-space panels (modesty panels) at spaces between base cabinets, where
cabinets are not installed against a wall or where space is not otherwise closed, indicated
and as required to conceal utilities and framing. Fabricate from back-to-back panels or of
hollow construction to eliminate exposed hemmed or flanged edges.
2. Provide 3-sided fillers at wall cabinets.
3. Provide 2-sided fillers at tall base cabinets.
4. Provide 1-sided fillers as base cabinet.
5. Provide utility-space closure panels at spaces between base cabinets where utility space
would otherwise be exposed, including spaces below countertops.
6. Provide closure panels at ends of utility spaces where utility space would otherwise be
exposed.
A. Provide casework manufacturer's standard integrated system that includes support framing,
suspended modular cabinets, filler and closure panels, wall panels, countertops, and fittings
needed to assemble system. System includes hardware and fasteners for securing support
framing to permanent construction.
B. Support Framing: Casework manufacturer's standard system consisting of vertical supports and
connecting braces and rails as follows:
1. Cabinets, shelves, and countertops are supported from vertical supports except where
floor-supported base cabinets are indicated. Vertical positioning of supported cabinets,
shelves, and countertops can be varied in 1-inch increments through full height of
supports.
2. Vertical supports rest on adjustable leveling bases and are secured to floor with metal
clips fastened to floor.
3. Vertical supports are installed with braces and rails, connecting them to each other and to
permanent building walls to create a stable, rigid structure with framed utility spaces
where indicated.
2.8 METAL CABINET FINISH FOR COLD ROLLED AND STAINLESS STEEL
A. General: Prepare, treat, and finish welded assemblies after assembling. Prepare, treat, and finish
components that are to be assembled with mechanical fasteners before assembling. Prepare,
treat, and finish concealed surfaces same as exposed surfaces.
B. Preparation: After assembly, clean surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, and other contaminants. After
cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.
1. Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish System: Finish complies with acceptance
levels of cabinet surface finish tests in SEFA 8 M. Acceptance level for chemical spot
test shall be no more than four Level 3 conditions.
2. Colors for Metal Laboratory Casework Finish: Match A/E’s sample; basis of design Mott
Manufacturing, Bright White 693226.
2.9 HARDWARE
B. Hinges: Epoxy-coated-steel, five-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with
antifriction bearings and rounded tips. Provide two for doors 48 inches high or less and three for
doors more than 48 inches high.
C. Hinged Door and Drawer Pulls: Black ABS recessed channel, 4 inch, with no horizontal lips to
hold foreign matter. Provide two pulls for drawers more than 24 inches wide.
D. Pulls: Full-width, recessed channel pulls; integrally formed from front pan of doors and drawer
fronts.
E. Door Catches: Nylon-roller spring catches. Provide two catches on doors more than 48 inches
high.
F. Drawer Slides: Side mounted, epoxy-coated steel, self-closing; designed to prevent rebound
when drawers are closed; complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05091.
G. Label Holders: Stainless steel, aluminum, or chrome plated; sized to receive standard label
cards approximately 1 by 2 inches attached with screws or rivets. Provide where indicated.
H. Locks: Cam or half-mortise type with five-pin tumbler, brass with chrome-plated finish;
complying with BHMA A156.11, Type E07281, Type E07261, Type E07111, or Type E07021.
1. Provide a minimum of two keys per lock and two master keys.
2. Provide on all drawers and doors.
3. Keying: Key locks alike within each room; key each room separately.
4. Master Key System: Key all locks to be operable by master key.
1. Support shelves from vertical supports. Vertical positioning of shelves can be varied in 1-
inch increments through full height of supports. Provide double slotted supports.
2. Color and finish to match cabinetry.
A. Countertops, General: Provide units with smooth surfaces in uniform plane, free of defects.
Make exposed edges and corners straight and uniformly beveled. Provide front and end
overhang of 1 inch, with continuous drip groove on underside 1/2 inch from edge.
B. Sinks, General: Provide sizes indicated or laboratory casework manufacturer's closest standard
size of equal or greater volume, as approved by Architect.
1. Outlets: Provide with strainers and tailpieces, NPS 1-1/2, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Epoxy Sinks:
1. Sink Fabrication: Molded in one piece with smooth surfaces, coved corners, and bottom
sloped to outlet; 1/2-inch minimum thickness.
1. Countertop Fabrication: Fabricate with cutouts for sinks, holes for service fittings and
accessories, and butt joints assembled with epoxy adhesive and concealed metal splines.
a. Countertop Configuration: Flat, 1 inch thick, with beveled edge and corners, and
with drip groove and integral coved backsplash.
b. Countertop Configuration: As indicated.
2. Tabletop Fabrication:
a. Tabletop Configuration: Flat, 1 inch thick, with beveled edge and corners, and with
drip groove at perimeter.
3. Shelf Configuration: Flat, 3/4 inch thick, with beveled edge and corners.
E. Stainless-Steel Countertops: Made from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.062-inch nominal
thickness, with No. 4 satin finish.
1. Extend top down 1 inch at edges with a 1/2-inch return flange under frame. Apply heavy
coating of heat-resistant, sound-deadening mastic to undersurface.
2. Form backsplash coved to and integral with top surface.
3. Provide raised (marine) edge around perimeter of countertops containing sinks.
4. Factory punch holes for service fittings.
5. Reinforce underside of countertop with channels, or use thicker metal sheet where
necessary to ensure rigidity without deflection.
6. Weld shop-made joints.
7. Where field-made joints are required, provide hairline butt joints mechanically bolted
through continuous channels welded to underside at edges of joined ends. Keep field
jointing to a minimum.
8. Where stainless-steel sinks or cup sinks occur in stainless-steel countertops, factory weld
into one integral unit.
9. After fabricating and welding, grind surfaces smooth, and polish as needed to produce
uniform, directionally textured finish with no cross scratches or evidence of welds.
Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces clean.
F. Stainless-Steel Sinks: Made from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.050-inch nominal
thickness. Fabricate with corners rounded and coved to at least 5/8-inch radius. Slope sink
bottoms to outlet. Provide double-wall construction for sink partitions, with top edge rounded to
at least 1/2-inch diameter. Provide continuous butt-welded joints. After fabricating and welding,
grind surfaces smooth, and polish as needed to produce uniform finish with no cross scratches
or evidence of welds. Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove embedded foreign matter and leave
surfaces clean.
A. Upright Rod Assembly and Metal Crossbar: Aluminum or stainless steel. Two vertical rods and
one horizontal crossbar, 3/4 inch in diameter and 36 inches long unless otherwise indicated; two
flush socket receptacles and two crossbar clamps. Ends of vertical rods are tapered to fit
receptacles; all other rod ends are rounded.
A. Corrosive Safety Cabinets shall be constructed similar to base cabinet with a molded
polyethylene interior liner.
1. Case: shall be a double-walled 18 gauge steel, provided internal backing surface for
corrosion resistant inner liner. There shall be a perforated at rear for use of venting
apparatus; no penetration of liner at vent opening.
2. Liner: One-piece welded polypropylene, secured to case with nylon screws. The lining on
the back of the doors shall be fitted so that it overlays the flange on the front of the
molded cabinet liner to protect all metal areas of the cabinet. Molded liner shall
incorporate a 1 inch hip lip along bottom edge to contain spills.
3. Doors: Polypropylene lined with an entirely plastic door catch.
4. Shelf: Acid storage cabinet shall contain one full-width manufacturer’s standard shelf
with 1 inch lip. Shelf support shall be integrally molded into cabinet liner.
5. Labels: Provide the door with a decal signifying “ACID” storage. On acid cabinets with
two doors, provide one decal signifying “ACID” on each door.
A. Flammable Safety Cabinets shall meet OSHA 29 CFR 1910.106, considered as organized
storage centers for flammable and combustible liquids. Cabinets shall comply with NFPA
flammable and combustible liquids Code #30 and #45, 1996. Provide grounding screw log in
accordance with codes. Cabinet shall be listed and labelled to the UL1275 standard, “Standards
for Flammable Liquid Storage Cabinets”
1. Case: Double-walled 18 gauge steel with min. 1 ½ inch air space between panels on top,
bottom, sides, back and door.
a. Air spaces shall be filled with min. manufacturer’s required blanket of high-temp
fiberglass to meet NFPA and UL.
b. Bottom floor plan shall provide a 2 inch deep liquid tight pan to contain liquid
spills and prevent leaks.
c. Provisions for attaching grounding wire at base of the cabinet on the outside rear
panel.
2. Doors:
3. Shelves: Provide adjustable galvanized sheet steel shelves with four edges turned down 1
inch and additionally returned under 5/8 inch on all edges. Provide ½ inch incremental
shelf adjustment.
4. Mobile: Four casters (2-locking), swivel-type. Vent holes factory plugged. Cabinets shall
be ADA compliant for height, width and load capacity.
5. Labels: “FLAMMABLE-KEEP FIRE AWAY” shall be silk-screened onto door,
appearing as red lettering on a bright yellow background.
1. Broen A/S.
2. Chicago Faucets; Geberit Company.
3. Watersaver Company, Inc.
B. Service Fittings: Provide units that comply with SEFA 7, "Laboratory and Hospital Fixtures -
Recommended Practices." Provide fittings complete with washers, locknuts, nipples, and other
installation accessories. Include wall and deck flanges, escutcheons, handle extension rods, and
similar items.
C. Materials: Fabricated from cast or forged red brass unless otherwise indicated.
D. Finish: Chromium plated or with clear epoxy Acid- and solvent-resistant powder coating
complying with requirements in SEFA 7 for corrosion-resistant finishes at locations indicated
on drawings.
E. Water Valves and Faucets: Provide units complying with ASME A112.18.1, with renewable
seats, designed for working pressure up to 80 psig.
F. Ball Valves: Chrome-plated ball and PTFE seals. Handle requires no more than 5 lbf to operate.
Provide units designed for working pressure up to 75 psig, with serrated outlets.
G. Needle Valves: Provide units with renewable, self-centering, floating cones and renewable seats
of stainless steel or Monel metal, with removable serrated outlets.
H. Hand of Fittings: Furnish right-hand fittings unless fitting designation is followed by "L."
I. Remote-Control Valves: Provide needle valves, straight-through or angle type as indicated for
fume hoods and where indicated.
J. Handles: Provide wrist handles, foraged brass handles for valves unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide lever-type handles for ball valves unless otherwise indicated. Lever handle aligns
with outlet when valve is closed and is perpendicular to outlet when valve is fully open.
2. Provide heat-resistant plastic handles for steam valves.
3. Provide knurled, molded-plastic handles for needle valves.
2.15 SEALANT
A. Provide manufacturer’s recommended epoxy adhesive around sinks, at back-splash to wall and
other permanent construction and at locations indicated on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, location of reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work
including but not limited to the following:
1. Do not install laboratory casework until all overhead work is complete including lighting,
HVAC and ceiling finish.
2. Do not install laboratory casework until finish flooring is complete and wall finishes
applied.
3. Do not install laboratory casework until major overhead work is complete (including
mechanical rough-in, ceiling suspension systems & lighting.
4. Do not install laboratory casework until dusty operations are completed room has been
cleaned and concealed utility spaces can be protected.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.3. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as
required, using concealed shims. Where laboratory casework abuts other finished work, apply
filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical. Do not exceed
the following tolerances:
B. Utility-Space Framing: Secure to floor with two fasteners at each frame. Fasten to partition
framing, wood blocking, or metal reinforcements in partitions and to base cabinets. Space no
more than 36 inches off center.
1. Provide supplemental framing at peninsula benches where no base cabinets are located at
intersection with wall and bench.
1. Where base cabinets are installed away from walls, fasten to floor at toe space at not
more than 24 inches o.c. and at sides of cabinets with not less than two fasteners per side.
D. Wall Cabinets: Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, partition framing, blocking, or reinforcements
in partitions. Fasten each cabinet through back, near top, at not less than 16 inches o.c.
E. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises.
F. Adjust laboratory casework and hardware so doors and drawers align and operate smoothly
without warp or bind and contact points meet accurately. Lubricate operating hardware as
recommended by manufacturer.
A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.3. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true
plane with flush hairline joints and with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. Locate
joints only where indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in same manner as shop-made joints, using dowels,
splines, fasteners, adhesives, and sealants recommended by manufacturer. Shop prepare edges
for field-made joints.
C. Fastening:
1. Secure countertops, except for epoxy countertops, to cabinets with Z-type fasteners or
equivalent, using two or more fasteners at each cabinet front, end, and back.
2. Secure epoxy countertops to cabinets with epoxy cement, applied at each corner and
along perimeter edges at not more than 48 inches o.c.
3. Where necessary to penetrate countertops with fasteners, countersink heads
approximately 1/8 inch, and plug hole flush with material equal to countertop in chemical
resistance, hardness, and appearance.
E. Seal unfinished edges and cutouts in plastic-laminate countertops with heavy coat of
polyurethane varnish.
F. Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of countertop, curb, and splash with walls as
recommended by manufacturer for materials involved. Match materials and finish to adjacent
laboratory casework. Use chemical-resistant, permanently elastic sealing compound where
recommended by manufacturer.
1. Flood test sinks for 24 hours, with water filled to top of countertops.
C. Drop-in Installation of Epoxy Sinks: Rout groove in countertop to receive sink rim if not shop
prepared. Set sink in adhesive and fill remainder of groove with sealant or adhesive. Use
procedures and products recommended by sink and countertop manufacturers. Remove excess
adhesive and sealant while still wet and finish joint for neat appearance.
A. Install accessories according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2.3, and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Securely fasten adjustable shelving supports, stainless-steel shelves, and pegboards to partition
framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions. Fasten shelving system to support
uniform live load of 100 pounds per linear foot of shelf, with shelves at 12 inches on center full
height of pilasters.
C. Install shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves. Install
shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated. Install standards
(pilasters) as 24 inches, 30 inches or 36 inches on center so modular metal shelves can be added
in the future.
A. Comply with requirements in other Sections for installing water and laboratory gas service
fittings and electrical devices.
B. Install fittings according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2.3, and
manufacturer's written instructions. Set bases and flanges of sink- and countertop-mounted
fittings in sealant recommended by manufacturer of sink or countertop material. Securely
anchor fittings to laboratory casework unless otherwise indicated.
A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to
match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.
B. Protect countertop surfaces and concealed space from dust during construction with 6-mil
plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum
of 48 inches o.c.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
B. Shop Drawings: For countertops and window sills. Show materials, finishes, edge and
backsplash profiles, and methods of joining.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.
A. Maintenance Data: For solid surface material countertops to include in maintenance manuals.
Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses,
and telephone numbers of local sources for products.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops
similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-
service performance.
1.8 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1.
a. Avonite Surfaces.
b. Formica Corporation.
c. Meganite Inc.
d. Wilsonart Solid Surface
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and
to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
1. Grade: Premium.
B. Countertop Configuration:
1. Front: Beveled.
2. Backsplash: None.
E. Countertops: 3/4-inch-thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.
H. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges and backsplashes unless otherwise indicated. Comply
with solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers,
fabrication, and finishing.
B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to receive solid surface material countertops and conditions under which
countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install solid surface material level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet, 1/4 inch maximum. Do not
exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.
B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of
countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces
and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire
surface.
C. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask
areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.
D. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes
adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing. Predrill
holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer.
E. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
Bassett Associates
Lima, Ohio
GOP Limited
Cincinnati, Ohio
Fanning Howey
Celina, Ohio
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
Division 22 – Plumbing
22 05 00 .............. Common Work Results for Plumbing
22 05 01 .............. Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods
22 05 13 .............. Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment
22 05 19 .............. Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping
22 05 23 .............. General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping
22 05 29 .............. Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
22 05 53 .............. Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
22 07 00 .............. Plumbing Insulation
22 11 13 .............. Facility Water Distribution Piping
22 11 16 .............. Domestic Water Piping
22 11 19 .............. Domestic Water Piping Specialties
22 11 23 .............. Domestic Water Pumps
22 11 24 .............. Facility Natural Gas Piping
22 13 16 .............. Sanitary, Waste, and Vent Piping System
22 14 13 .............. Facility Storm Drainage Piping
22 34 00 .............. Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters
22 40 00 .............. Plumbing Fixtures
22 45 00 .............. Emergency Plumbing Fixtures
22 47 00 .............. Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers
22 61 13 .............. Compressed-Air Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
22 61 19 .............. Compressed-Air Equipment for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
22 62 13 .............. Vacuum Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
22 62 19 .............. Vacuum Equipment for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
22 66 00 .............. Acic Waste and Vent Systems
Division 26 – Electrical
26 00 01 .............. Electrical Specification
26 00 50 .............. General Electrical Requirements
26 05 05 .............. Electrical Testing
26 05 19 .............. Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
26 05 26 .............. Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
26 05 29 .............. Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
26 05 33 .............. Conduit and Boxes for Electrical Systems
26 05 36 .............. Ladder Type Cable Trays
26 05 43 .............. Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems
26 05 53 .............. Identification for Electrical Systems
26 05 72 .............. Overcurrent Protective Device Short-Circuit Study
26 05 73 .............. Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study
26 05 74 .............. Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash Study
26 08 00 .............. Commissioning of Electrical Systems
26 09 23 .............. Lighting Control Devices
26 22 00 .............. Low-Voltage Transformers
26 24 16 .............. Panelboards
26 27 13 .............. Utility Electric Metering
26 27 26 .............. Wiring Devices
26 32 13 .............. Engine Generators
26 36 00 .............. Transfer Switches
26 43 13 .............. Surge Protective Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits
26 51 00 .............. Interior Lighting
26 56 00 .............. Exterior Lighting
Division 31 – Earthwork
31 10 00 .............. Site Clearing
31 20 00 .............. Earth Moving
31 25 00 .............. Erosion Control
Division 33 – Utilities
33 05 00 .............. Common Work Results for Utilities
33 05 10 .............. Utilities Services
END OF DOCUMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated
spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Welding certificates.
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for fire-suppression installations.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire-suppression items requiring access
that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in
Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face
or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated
finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type.
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings
below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board
partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
O. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07
Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
R. Do not support components of the fire-suppression system from steel roof decks. In locations
where structural framing members are not available, provide intermediate structural supports
spanning between closest structural framing members.
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
3.3 PAINTING
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. The fire protection contract shall include all labor and materials as required for the complete
installation of this classification of the Work as hereinafter specified and as shown by all of the
accompanying Drawings. The Contractor shall examine all Drawings, including Equipment
Drawings and those which are intended primarily for other classifications as such items will be
considered a part of the Contract.
C. The materials and workmanship throughout shall be first class in every detail, to the best
modern practice. All fixtures shall be first quality of their respective kinds and grades, free
from defects, furnished and set up complete in every detail and in accordance with all codes and
regulations governing the Work. All piping shall be concealed, unless otherwise distinctly
specified or shown on the Drawings.
D. The sprinkler systems shall be zoned on a square foot basis with no zones exceeding 52,000 SF.
Each zone shall be provided with all necessary valves, valve tamper switches, water flow
alarms, and drains as required by NFPA 13.
E. Provide Knox boxes at the main entrances to the building as indicated on the Drawings.
F. Refer to Section 01230 for Alternates that may affect the Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following fire-suppression piping inside the building:
1. Wet-pipe sprinkler systems.
A. The fire protection system is a standard installation of automatic sprinklers arranged as a wet
pipe system employing automatic sprinklers attached to a piping system containing water and
connected to a water supply main in the street so that water discharges immediately from
sprinklers opened by fire, which is required throughout the new building. The Contractor shall
provide a hydraulically calculated wet-pipe automatic fire sprinkler system designed and
installed to produce densities of not less than 0.10 gpm/sq.ft. over the hydraulically most remote
1,500 sq. ft. area based on the use of 165 degrees F. temperature rated heads spaced at a
maximum of 225 sq.ft. per head for all light hazard occupancy areas. Automatic sprinkler
protection throughout all ordinary hazard group 1 occupancies, including but not necessarily
limited to, the mechanical and electrical equipment rooms and storage rooms shall be designed
and installed to produce densities of not less than 0.16 gpm/sq.ft. over the hydraulically most
remote 1,500 sq. ft. area based on 165 degrees F. temperature rated heads spaced at a maximum
of 130 sq.ft. per head. Automatic sprinkler protection throughout all ordinary hazard group
occupancies shall be designed and installed to produce densities of not less than 0.19 gpm/sq.ft.
over the hydraulically most remote 1,500 sq. ft. area based on 165 degrees F. degrees F.
temperature rated heads spaced at a maximum of 130 sq. ft. per head.
B. Electrical Contractor shall provide, install, and wire alarm bell on exterior of building that will
sound upon flow in the fire protection system.
A. Public Safety
1. Fire Prevention and Building Safety Commission Compliance: Install fire protection
systems in accordance with local regulations of Fire Marshal.
2. Screw Thread Connections: Comply with local Fire Department/Marshal regulations for
sizes, threading and arrangement of connections for Fire Department equipment to
standpipe systems
a. Ohio Building Code currently enforced edition.
b. Ohio Mechanical Code currently enforced edition.
c. Ohio Fire Protection Code currently enforced edition.
d. Ohio Plumbing Code currently enforced edition.
3. Insurance Purposes
a. Factory Mutual (FM): Comply with Factory Mutual’s regulations pertaining to
fire protection systems.
A. Standard Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for at least 175 psig.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
B. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations, if
applicable.
C. Welding certificates.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
F. Test Reports and Certificate: Submit test reports and certificates including “Contractor’s
Material & Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping” and “Contractor’s Material & Test
Certificate for Underground Piping” as described in NFPA 13.
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include hydraulic calculations, fabricating, and installing fire-
suppression systems. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX.
D. The sprinkler designer shall be state certified and meet all NFPA state and local requirements.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting, steel cabinet with hinged cover, with space
for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers
required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and
wrench for each type of sprinkler on Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
A. General: Provide, at the Contractor’s option, pipe and pipe fittings complying with NFPA 13,
in accordance with one or a combination of the following listings and as a minimum meet
specifications ASTM A53 GR.B, A106 GR.B, A135 GR.B, A795, type E, GR.A.
B. Black Steel Pipe: Threaded Ends; Schedule 40 for all sizes; conforming to ANSI B1.20.1.
C. Black Steel Pipe: Cut Groove Ends; Schedule 40 for 2 inches through 6 inches.
D. Galvanized Steel Pipe: Threaded Ends; Schedule 40 for all; conforming to ANSI B1.20.1. (For
aboveground fire protection service piping upstream of double check valve assembly and fire
department connection supply piping only).
E. Sprinkler Head Pipe Drops: Schedule 40, black steel threaded both ends.
F. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe and fittings of the
following:
1. Allied Tube and Conduit, Division of Grinnell Co.
2. American Tube and Pipe Co.
3. Bullmoose Tube Co.
4. Grinnell Co.
5. Tyler Gustin-Bacon
6. Vitaulic
7. Wheatland Tube Co.
2.3 FITTINGS
A. Cast-Iron Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4, Class 125, Class 250, standard pattern, for
threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.
B. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, Class 300, standard pattern, for
threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.
C. Ductile – Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, Class 300, Standard pattern, for
threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.
D. Steel Fittings: UL listed/FM approved ASTM A106 GR B, ANSI 16.9 or ASTM A234,
seamless or welded for welded joints.
E. Grooved Mechanical Fittings: ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A47
Grade 32510 malleable iron; or ASTM A53, Type F or Types E or S, Grade B fabricated steel
fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings.
L. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 250; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.
M. Cast Bronze Flanges: ANSI B16.24, Class 300; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.
A. Assembly shall be copper alloy, ferrous, and insulating materials with ends matching piping
system.
B. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with
combination of plain, threaded, or grooved ends and 300-psig working-pressure rating at
225 deg F.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Perfection Corporation.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c. Victaulic Co. of America.
A. Valves shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating. Valves
shall have 300-psig pressure rating if valves are components of high-pressure piping system.
B. Ball Valves: Comply with UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc.
1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2: Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile-iron body with
grooved ends.
3. NPS 3: Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
4. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. NIBCO.
b. Victaulic Co. of America.
4) Mueller Company.
5) NIBCO.
6) Pratt, Henry Company.
7) Victaulic Co. of America.
D. Check Valves NPS 2 and Larger: UL 312, swing type, cast-iron body with flanged or grooved
ends.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Central Sprinkler Corp.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Grinnell Fire Protection.
d. Hammond Valve.
e. Mueller Company.
f. NIBCO.
g. Potter-Roemer; Fire Protection Div.
h. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
i. Star Sprinkler Inc.
j. Stockham.
k. Victaulic Co. of America.
l. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
F. Indicating Valves: UL 1091, with integral indicating device and ends matching connecting
piping.
1. Indicator: Electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, single-circuit, supervisory switch.
2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball or butterfly valve with bronze body and threaded ends.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Milwaukee Valve Company.
2) NIBCO.
3) Victaulic Co. of America.
3. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Butterfly valve with cast- or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with
flanged or grooved ends.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Central Sprinkler Corp.
2) Grinnell Fire Protection.
3) McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
2.6 SPRINKLERS
A. Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating.
Sprinklers shall have 300-psig pressure rating if sprinklers are components of high-pressure
piping system.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Central Sprinkler Corp.
2. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.
3. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
4. Grinnell Fire Protection.
5. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
6. Star Sprinkler Inc.
7. Victaulic Co. of America.
8. Viking Corp.
D. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice for "Ordinary" temperature
classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
a. Orifice: 1/2 inch, with discharge coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8.
b. Orifice: 17/32 inch, with discharge coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2.
H. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting
applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with
sprinklers.
I. Automatic Sprinklers Types and Locations: Provide automatic sprinkler as listed by UL and
F.M.
1. Provide brass upright pendant and side wall sprinklers as required on exposed piping in
unfinished spaces.
2. Provide brass exposed pendant sprinkler heads in finished areas such as storage rooms
and janitor closets.
3. Provide concealed ceiling sprinklers with white cover plate in all finished spaces, unless
noted otherwise.
4. Sprinkler heads shall be centered in square ceiling tiles or centered or at quarter points in
rectangular ceiling tiles.
5. Sidewall sprinkler heads shall be utilized in Communications/Data Rooms. No sprinkler
piping shall be routed through Communications/Data Rooms.
6. Sidewall sprinkler heads shall be utilized in Vestibules. No sprinkler piping shall be
routed through Vestibules.
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Central Sprinkler Corp.
2. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
3. Guardian Fire Equipment Incorporated.
4. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div.
5. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
B. Five inch Storz fire department connection. Size and style as required by the local fire chief.
Refer to Plumbing Site Utility Drawings for further information.
D. Valve Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with normally
closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
b. Potter Electric Signal Company.
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. AGF Manufacturing Co.
2. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.
3. Brecco Corporation.
4. Dresser Equipment Group; Instrument Div.
5. Marsh Bellofram.
6. WIKA Instrument Corporation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system
design calculations required in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.3 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations of piping
connections before installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thicknesses, fire- and smoke-rated construction,
framing for hose-station cabinets, and other conditions where hose connections and stations are
to be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish and
pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground
applications, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight
steel pipe with cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings joints.
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for applications where
required by NFPA 13.
a. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or gate valves.
A. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for basic piping
joint construction.
B. Threaded Joints: Comply with NFPA 13 for pipe thickness and threads. Do not thread pipe
smaller than NPS 8 (DN 200) with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 unless approved by
authorities having jurisdiction and threads are checked by a ring gauge and comply with
ASME B1.20.1.
C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with listed coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts.
1. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Radius-cut-groove ends of piping. Use grooved-end fittings and
grooved-end-pipe couplings.
2. Steel Pipe: Square-cut or roll-groove piping as indicated. Use grooved-end fittings and
rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Test each groove for proper depth and width with manufacturers approved tape measure.
If groove does not meet the manufacturers requirement, regroove pipe as required.
D. Dissimilar-Metal Piping Joints: Construct joints using dielectric fittings compatible with both
piping materials.
A. Connect fire-suppression piping to water-service piping of size and in location indicated for
service entrance to building. Refer to Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping"
for exterior piping.
B. Install double check valve assembly pressure gauge and other accessories indicated at
connection to water-service piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties" for backflow preventers.
A. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for basic piping
installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating
from approved working plans.
D. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions
in pipe sizes.
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. Unions are not required on
flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
F. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and
larger connections.
G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,
sized and located according to NFPA 13.
I. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes
when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
K. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves.
Drain to floor drain or outside building.
O. Install pressure gauges on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of
each standpipe. Include pressure gauges with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft
metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to
permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, specialty valves and trim,
controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water
supply except from fire department connections. Install permanent identification signs
indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C. Specialty Valves:
1. Alarm Check Valves: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including
bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection.
2. Dry-Pipe Valves: Install trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections,
ball drip valves, pressure gauges, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment.
a. Air-Pressure Maintenance Devices for Dry-Pipe Systems: Install shutoff valves to
permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler system; bypass valve for quick
system filling; pressure regulator or switch to maintain system pressure; strainer;
pressure ratings with [14- to 60-psig] adjustable range; and [175-psig] maximum
inlet pressure.
b. Install air compressor and compressed-air supply piping.
A. Install Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 2 inch and smaller.
B. Install Schedule 40 steel pipe with roll-grooved ends and grooved mechanical couplings for
2-1/2 inches to 6 inches.
C. Comply with requirements of ANSI/NFPA #13 for installation of fire sprinkler piping materials.
Install fire sprinkler piping products where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written
instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that fire sprinkler
piping complies with requirements and serves intended purposes.
D. Coordinate with other work including but not limited to plumbing piping, ductwork, equipment,
as necessary to interface components of fire sprinkler piping properly with other work.
E. Install supports, anchors, seals, valves, meters, and gauges per NFPA #13.
F. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead-in connections,
and control portions of sprinkler piping. After sprinkler piping installation has been completed
and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove
foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI/NFPA #13. Continue flushing until
water is clean and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers.
G. After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for a period of 2 hours, at not
less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static
pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic
pressure at low point of system.
I. Sprinkler Head Cabinet and Wrench: Finished steel baked red enamel cabinet, suitable for wall
mounting, with hinged cover and space for 12 spare sprinkler heads plus sprinkler head wrench.
Provide a separate cabinet for each style sprinkler head on the Project.
J. Piping which passes through a non-sprinklered area shall be adequately protected by fire
resistive construction as specified by the Owner and/or code.
K. Cross mains or feed mains which pass through electrical switchgear room(s) shall be double
piped (sleeve) unless the pipe is a branch line serving heads in said rooms. Sleeve shall be set
in such a manner as to avoid joints in the room. If a joint is required in the room, it shall be a
welded joint. Pipe shall be of Schedule 40, black steel. Avoid installing any fire protection
piping in electrical rooms, elevator equipment rooms, switch gear rooms unless absolutely
necessary. Contact Engineer prior to any of these installations.
L. Drains shall terminate at an open-site drain, or outside of the building. Location of drains to
building exterior shall be approved by the Owner/Architect.
M. System main drain shall be piped to the exterior of the building unless noted otherwise.
O. In general, sprinkler riser pipe routing has been shown on plans. Integrate spinkler piping with
ducts, lights, diffusers and other mechanical work. All sprinkler head locations shall be
integrated with reflected ceiling plans.
P. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general
location and arrangement of piping systems. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.
1. Deviations from approved “Working Plans” for sprinkler piping, require written approval
of the authority having jurisdiction. Written approval shall be on file with the Architect
prior to deviating for the approved “Working Plans”.
Q. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13.
R. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and
reductions in pipe sizes.
S. There shall be no sprinkler piping or equipment installed within a minimum of 12’-0” of any
building wall opening which communicates with the outdoors
1. Install protective pipe bollards on three sides of each fire department connection. Refer
to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for pipe bollards.
B. Install ball drip valve at each check valve for fire department connection.
C. Pitch fire department connection piping from buildings to FDC. Provide means for drawings of
this piping in accordance with NFPA 13.
3.12 CONNECTIONS
D. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor drain
or outside building.
E. Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections, and
accessories.
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13
B. This Contractor shall identify all piping installed by him, exposed or concealed, with a marker
consisting of an arrow indicating direction of flow and an abbreviation of the service. Piping
shall be labeled close to valves, at changes in direction, at branches, at access panels, where
pipes pass through the floor before going through the floor), and at entry point into rooms,
however, spacing of markers shall not exceed twenty feet. Markers shall be in contrasting color,
such as black or white placed conspicuous location subject to approval by the Engineer. The
marker shall consist of an arrow, approximately six inches in length with the width to be
determined by letter height, and an abbreviation of the service (FL) for Fireline).
The following table of letter sizes shall apply.
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
4. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.
5. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
6. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
3.16 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated
spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Welding certificates.
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code – Steel.”
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Store PVC plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for plumbing installations.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that
are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08
Section "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face
or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with
ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Fernco
b. Mission
2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.
3. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling.
4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition and Adaptor Fittings: PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's
Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-
cement-joint end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Fernco
b. Mission
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-
joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Link Seal
c. Metraflex Co.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to
sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.7 SLEEVES
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
2.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination
Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated
finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-
brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting,
cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring
clips.
h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate
type.
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, foundation walls, and
concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
N. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07
Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
E. If equipment selected is other than the basis of design, and is chosen from the list of acceptable
manufactures, the contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary connections,
materials, and serviceability clearance shop drawings for engineers review prior to start of
work.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in
Division 03 Section.
8. All concrete pads shall be 6” thick.
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. The Drawings prepared for this Project are an outline to show where pipes, ducts, and
apparatus must go in order to harmonize with the building and installations of the various
trades. Work must be installed in accordance with the Drawings insofar as possible.
Drawings shall be carefully checked during the course of bidding and construction. If
discrepancies, errors, or omissions are discovered prior to or during the construction phase,
notify the Engineer immediately for interpretation or correction. Take necessary
measurements and be responsible for same, including clearances for equipment that is to be
furnished. The A/E shall reserve the right to make minor location changes of piping and
equipment where such adjustments are deemed desirable from an appearance or operational
standpoint. Such changes will be anticipated sufficiently in advance to avoid extra work or
unduly delay progress on the Project.
C. The general building drawings shall be used to obtain dimensions and exact locations and as a
check with other Contractors to avoid interferences with their Work. Refer to applicable
Drawings on branches of the Work where other trades are involved on the Project so that
added field work and job delays resulting from conflicts between crafts can be avoided.
Piping or ductwork that is prefabricated before coordinating with the other trades may have to
be redone at no additional cost if conflicts are encountered.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. The Contractor(s) shall provide the labor, materials, equipment, appliances, services and
transportation, and perform the operations in connection with the construction and installation
of the Work. Work shall be as herein specified and as denoted on the accompanying
Drawings.
C. The Contractor(s) shall arrange and pay for permits and inspections required in connection
with the Work. The Contractor shall apply for and pay for meters, regulators, recorders, and
gauges required. The Contractor must present to the Owner through the A/E, properly signed
certificates of final inspection by the governing authorities when they become due and shall
not cover up Work until approved by those authorities.
D. The Contractor(s) shall make arrangements for connection of the permanent utilities; include
connection costs as part of the Work under his Contract. Verify exact requirements of the
utility with regard to such service; and include in the Work costs related to same.
E. Materials or labor obviously required to fully complete the Work shall be included, even
though each item necessarily involved is not specifically mentioned or shown. Such Work
and materials shall be furnished and shall be of the same grade or quality as the parts actually
specified and shown. Should there be a conflict between the plans and Specifications, the
greater quantity and better quality shall be furnished.
F. Should an overlap of Work between the various trades become evident, the Engineer shall be
notified. Such an event shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for the Work
called for under his branch of the Specifications until a written clarification or directive is
issued concerning the matter.
I. Cutting of water lines, electric conduit, or similar service lines in the course of Work
performed under this Section shall be immediately repaired as part of the Work of this
Section.
1.3 REFERENCE
A. Standards are described by reference to various associations. These are in addition, but not
limited to, to those listed in:
AGA American Gas Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
B. Work shall be in complete accordance with codes, rules, and ordinances, regulations of
authorities, bodies, associations, and governments, having proper or legal jurisdiction.
Specifically, the following requirements shall be met in their entirety.
1. State and Local Rules, Regulations, Codes, Statutes, and Ordinances
2. National Fire Protection Association - applicable requirements
3. National Board of Fire Underwriters
4. National Electric Code - applicable requirements
5. Other Codes and Standards as specifically noted in each Section of the
Specifications.
6. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
C. References made to codes and standards, in these Specifications or on the Drawings, shall be
taken to mean the latest edition, amendment, or revision of such reference in effect as of the
date indicated on the Bid Documents unless otherwise noted.
A. Instruments used by the Contractor shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good
working condition.
C. Products and test instruments used shall be provided by each respective Contractor.
D. Note that systems involved under this Contract heading shall be in accordance with applicable
requirements listed in NFPA Standard 90A.
E. Materials used in this Contract shall be those specified herein unless proposals for the use of
alternate materials have been submitted and accepted in writing, as provided hereinbefore.
Materials shall be strictly first grade of their kind and shall be new and in first-class condition
when installed. Damaged materials will be rejected and must be replaced by proper and
acceptable materials. Materials shall be similar and in accordance with the provisions of this
Specification.
F. No materials or equipment may be installed under this contract heading which do not meet the
approval of the authorities having jurisdiction. Specific materials may have certain
restrictions or exclusions as to their usage, including where they may not be located. Such
regulations shall be adhered to where applicable. The requirements and regulations of the
local and state building codes and regulations currently adopted shall be adhered to.
G. Piping systems shall be installed by workmen having skills acquired by working at the trade
which is recognized as necessary for competency.
H. Pressure piping systems installed shall conform to the requirements of the State piping and
welding codes where applicable.
A. Unless otherwise stipulated under a particular heading, the following rules relative to
responsibilities of the several Contractors and subcontractors will apply.
1. Each Contractor shall install roughing-in work pertaining to his trade for connection
of Work performed under other Sections of these Specifications.
B. Certain areas will be designated for the storage of materials and equipment and cooperation
with the Owner in minimizing interference with existing operations will be mandatory.
1. Where possible, store materials inside and protected from weather. Where necessary
to store outside, elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping.
2. Follow manufacturer's instructions for receiving, inspecting, handling, storage, and
protection of products prior to final installation
D. In general, the piping and ductwork shown on the Drawings shall be considered as
diagrammatic for clearness in indicating the general run and connections required, and may
not be shown in its true position. The piping and ductwork and equipment may have to be
offset, lowered or raised, as required, or as directed at the site in order to accommodate field
conditions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
D. Pipe Sleeves: Install pipe sleeves where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings, and
roofs.
1. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work, except as detailed on
Drawings, or as reviewed and approved by A/E.
2. Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs.
3. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in sleeve,
including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than
piping run.
4. Where insulation includes vapor barrier jacket, provide sleeve with sufficient
clearance for installation.
5. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, and finish flush
to surface; except floor sleeves.
6. Extend floor sleeves 1/4 inch above level floor finish, and 3/4 inch above floor finish
sloped to drain unless otherwise noted.
7. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work
around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other
materials from entering sleeves.
8. Where insulated piping passes through fire barriers, stop insulation at barrier for fire
barrier penetration seal.
9. Where piping passes through nonfire rated, or nonwaterproof, partitions, floors, and
walls, apply pipe insulation continuous through pipe sleeves.
10. Do not install sleeves through suspended ceilings.
11. Caulk nonfire rated sleeves with sealant.
E. Protection
1. Provide proper protection to the building during the execution of Work involved
under this contract heading.
2. This protection shall include covering apparatus, building surfaces, and other
materials to protect same from dirt; adequate temporary connections to protect
apparatus from damage and required shielding to protect finished parts of the
building. The following shall apply where applicable:
a. Protect finished floors from chips and cutting oil by the use of metal chip
receiving pans and oilproof floor covers.
b. Protect equipment and finished surfaces from welding and cutting spatters
with baffles and spatter blankets.
c. Protect equipment and finished surfaces from paint droppings, insulation
adhesive, and sizing droppings, etc., by use of drop cloths.
3. Pumps, motors, fans, and other rotating/reciprocating equipment stored for this
Project shall be adequately protected with openings, bearings, etc., covered to
exclude dust and moisture. Stock piled pipe, valves, fittings, ductwork, etc., shall be
placed on dunnage and protected from weather and from entry of foreign material.
4. During installation and until final connections are made, piping and ductwork shall
be protected against entry of foreign matter. Equipment connections shall be
carefully sealed until the actual time of system tie-in.
F. Accessibility
1. Provide a union or flange in the piping at each screwed or welded valve, device, or
item of equipment, and elsewhere as required for accessibility of repair. Each union
shall be so installed as to permit the removal of item without disconnection of any
piping except at the union.
A. Disinfect new domestic water service piping and at connections to existing piping in
accordance with Local or State Board of Health Regulations. Also follow notes as listed
below.
1. Before water system is turned over for use, this Contractor shall have the entire
system thoroughly disinfected.
2. Disinfecting shall be by the introduction of a hypochlorite solution of calcium
hypochlorite powder containing 65 percent to 70 percent free chlorine, through
gravity injection or a suitable pump feeder. Flush throughout the system until
approximately 50 P.P.M. is obtained at outlets, faucets, and hydrants. The solution
shall stand in the system for 24 hours or more and then be flushed out of lines until
not over .2 P.P.M. residual remains.
3. After disinfecting and final flushing, several samples from the various ends of lines
shall be drawn and tested by the State or Local Board of Health or Health Authority
or an independent laboratory approved by the Department of Health, using their own
containers. Such sampling and testing shall be repeated 3 times at 24-hour intervals.
4. Disinfection shall be repeated until the findings of all 3 tests are satisfactory and
approved in writing by the official health authority.
5. During the disinfecting period, warning signs shall be posted at each outlet and
fixture indicating water should not be drawn or consumed.
6. Furnish A/E and Owner with a certificate certifying disinfection was conducted in
accordance with the Specifications, together with a report from health authority of the
water sample analysis and approval.
A. Upon completion of each respective piping system, but prior to insulating, covering, or
backfilling, each system shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed to remove construction dirt
and foreign matter.
5. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been
completed.
6. Pressure for Testing of Piping/Ductwork Systems shall be as follows:
a. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping
1) Piping shall be tested and results approved by A/E prior to
application of insulation.
2) Piping system shall be capped and subjected to a static water
pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure and a minimum of 125
psig, and pressure maintained for 4 hours with no leaks or loss in
pressure.
3) Test source shall be isolated before conducting pressure tests.
4) Isolation of tested equipment.
b. Sewer, Soil, and Waste Piping
1) Soil and waste piping shall be plugged and subjected to not less
than a 10 foot head of water. Water column shall be maintained for
2 hours with no leaks.
2) Where subject to freezing, use air or smoke test for not less than
30 minutes and as required by code.
c. Natural Gas Piping
1) Per NFPA #54, state and local utility codes.
d. Fire Protection Piping System (Interior)
1) Per NFPA #13, state and local codes.
7. Accurately record and report methods of testing, times, and dates of test, witnesses to
the test, and the results of the test. Test reports shall be neatly typewritten on
standard 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch sheets and submitted in 5 copies to A/E for approval
within 5 days after test has been performed.
C. Damage resulting from tests shall be repaired or damaged materials replaced, to satisfaction of
A/E, and at no cost to Owner.
A. The Owner reserves the right to make emergency repairs and protection of the equipment and
systems in operation without voiding the Contractor's guarantee bond or relieving the
Contractor of his responsibility during the bonding period.
A. Where work cannot be installed as the structure is being erected, the Contractor for such work
shall provide and arrange for the building-in of boxes, sleeves, inserts, fixtures, and devices
necessary to permit installation of the omitted work during later phases of construction. The
Contractor shall arrange for layout, chases, holes, and other openings which must be provided
in masonry, concrete, and other work.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for becoming informed of the nature and arrangement of
the materials and construction to which his work attached or passes through.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in
plumbing equipment schedules or Sections.
D. The contractor shall coordinate all Division 22 motor locations, quantities and electrical
characteristics with corresponding electrical drawings and verify that connections for motors are
indicated on the electrical drawings during the bid phase of the project and notify engineer if
discrepancies exist.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Thermometers.
2. Gauges.
3. Test plugs.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for domestic and fire-protection
water service meters outside the building.
2. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for domestic and fire-protection water
service meters inside the building.
3. Division 23 Section "Facility Natural-Gas Piping" for gas meters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
E. Window: Glass.
F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device.
G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit
installation.
H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range.
2.2 THERMOWELLS
B. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type,
diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.
C. Pressure-Gauge Fittings:
1. Valves: 1/4 inch brass or stainless-steel needle type.
2. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, 1/4 inch brass bushing with corrosion-resistant, porous-metal
disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Install thermometers in the outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank, thermostatic mixing
valves, inlet hot water return pump, and all balancing stations indicated on the plumbing
drawings.
A. Install dry-case-type pressure gauges at the incoming water main, on the inlet and outlet of the
reduced pressure backflow preventer, on the inlet and outlet of the water heater tank(s),
upstream and down stream of the domestic water meters, on the inlet and outlet of thermostatic
mixing valves, the inlet and outlet of domestic hot water recirculating pumps and each hot water
return balancing station indicated on the plumbing drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATIONS
B. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid and in vertical
position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated.
C. Install direct-mounting pressure gauges in piping tees with pressure gauge located on pipe at
most readable position.
D. Install needle-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gauge.
E. Install thermometers and gauges adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance for thermometers, gauges, machines, and equipment.
F. Adjust faces of thermometers and gauges to proper angle for best visibility.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Drain valves.
2. Ball valves.
3. Check valves.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections
only.
2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags
and schedules.
3. Division 33 water distribution piping Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for
site construction piping.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance:
1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
2. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Two Piece Ball Valves 2 inches and Smaller: 600 WOG, 150 SWP, cast bronze body,
ASTM B-584, B-62 or B61 teflon seats, full port, blow-out proof stem, adjustable packing
gland, stainless steel ball and stem, threaded, solder ends, or press fit ends.
A. Comply with MSS SP-71 for design, workmanship, material, and testing. Construct pressure
containing parts of valves as follows:
B. Swing Check Valves 2 inches and Smaller: Class 150, 300 PSI WOG, cast iron bronze body
and cap conforming to ASTM B62. Valves shall be swing type design, threaded or solder ends.
C. Swing Check Valves 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Class 125, 200 PSI WOG, cast iron body, bronze
trim and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class B. Flanged ends, swing type disk.
D. Grooved Grooved End 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Ductile iron body to ASTM A536, elastomeric
encapsulated disc, Grade "E" EPDM, type 416 stainless steel shaft, nonslamming spring of
304 stainless steel, working pressure of 300 psi.
E. Unless a composition disc is specified, swing check valves 2 inches and smaller shall be bronze,
regrinding, with seating angle 40 to 45 degrees. A stop plug is required as a renewable stop for
the hanger, unless otherwise specified. Disc and hanger shall be separate parts, and the disc
shall be free to rotate. Hanger pins shall be supported on both ends by removable side plug(s).
F. Lift Check Valves 3 inches and Smaller: Bronze or forged steel, to suit the service.
G. Check Valves 4 inches and Larger: Flanged, swing type, unless otherwise specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
E. Provide a line size main valve on the incoming domestic water service where it enters the
building at a point +/- 6” above finished floor and upstream of the domestic water meters.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and
equipment:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Fastener systems.
5. Pipe stands.
6. Equipment supports.
A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Welding certificates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Manufacturers:
a. Copper B-Line, Inc., Highland, Illinois
b. Erico International Corp., Salon, Ohio
c. PHD Manufacturing, Columbiana, Ohio
e. Amber Booth, Houston, Texas
B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or
exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. Requests for
A/E’s approval must be accompanied by the “Substitution Request Form” and complete
technical data for evaluation. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project
Manager and Specification Department at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional
approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum.
A. Beam Clamps: Anvil C-Clamp with retaining clip, Fig. #87 for 3/8 inch to 3/4 inch diameter
rod.
B. Beam Clamps: Anvil forged steel beam clamp with upper nut, Fig. #228 for 5/8 inch to 7/8 inch
diameter rod.
C. Beam Clamps: Anvil Fig. #227 for 3/8 inch and 1/2 inch diameter rod (attachment to top
members of angle iron trusses or to top flanges of I-Beams).
D. Hanger Rod: Carbon steel material of size/diameter required, threaded one end, both ends,
and/or continuous thread. Provide threaded swivel connections to maintain the threaded rod in
a vertical position. Bending threaded rod is not acceptable.
E. Trapeze Type Hangers: Use structural angle, channel, beams, unistrut or equivalent support
and/or framing. Provide proper attachment for service listed below.
F. Pipe Attachment: Anvil split pipe ring Fig. #108 and turnbuckle adjuster Fig. #114 (for pipe
size 3/8 inch to 8 inch, noninsulated).
G. Pipe Attachment for Hot and Cold Service: Anvil adjustable clevis Fig. #260 for 1/2 inch to
30 inches noninsulated, stationary pipe lines. Size Clevis for outer insulation diameter. Provide
with galvanized insulation shield Fig. #167.
H. Pipe Attachment for Independent Support of Hot Service: Anvil Fig. #181, (2-1/2 inch to 20
inch pipe insulated) adjustable steel yoke pipe roll.
I. Trapeze supported for hot and cold service 2 inch to 12 inch insulated Anvil Fig. #175 pipe roll.
Roller sized for insulated diameter.
J. Copper tubing 1/2 inch to 2 inch: When attached directly to copper piping or tubing, hangers
shall be equipped with permanently attached factory liner of high compression factor,
chemically treated to resist moisture, abrasion, heat, cold, and vermin. Liner shall be felt or
equally approvable material, or hangers shall be equal to copper plated Anvil Fig. # CT-99.
Lined or plated hangers not required when hanger is oversized to cover an insulated line.
K. Pipe Attachment: Anvil adjustable clevis for storm sanitary and vent Fig. #260, for 4 inch to
24 inch pipe. Size for insulation as required. Provide galvanized insulation shield Fig. #167.
L. Pipe Attachment: Anvil adjustable clevis for insulated, steel hot pipe, Fig. #300, for 3/4 inch to
2 inch pipe size.
M. Pipe Attachment: Anvil riser clamp Fig. #261 (for either insulated or bare steel pipe, cast iron
or conduit) or Fig. #261c (for glass, copper, brass and/or aluminum pipe), for 3/4 inch to 20
inches and 3/4 inch to 6 inches respectively
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Pipe attachments shall be located adjacent to fittings at each offset or change in direction, at
ends of branches over 5 feet long, at riser pipes, and along piping where necessary to prevent
sags, bends, or vibration. Piping risers shall be supported at each floor level.
C. Hanger rod must hang perpendicular before and after pipe covering or insulation is applied.
1. Support piping from rolled steel beams or channels from any point on either top or
bottom flanges.
2. Support piping from open web steel joists from hangers connected to either top or bottom
chords within 3 inches of center of chord panel points (intersection of diagonal or vertical
chord with top or bottom chord). Joist reinforcement will be required if hangers are not
installed at panel points. Refer to structural details.
3. In addition to maximum spacing of hangers or supports specified below, the number and
spacing of hangers and supports shall be such as to equally distribute loads to all
structural members in the system.
4. Connections to structural members shall be clamping devices which do not damage or
deform structural elements. Welding to or drilling holes in structural members is not
permitted unless specifically approved by Architect.
5. Hanger rods cannot be bent.
D. The maximum horizontal spacing between hangers or supports, measured along the piping for
steel pipe, shall be as follows:
E. The maximum spacing between hangers or supports, measured along the piping for plastic
DWV pipe, shall be 4 feet on center and, at end of branches change in direction and trap arms,
3 feet or greater.
F. The maximum horizontal hanger space for water CPVC distribution piping shall not exceed
3 feet
G. The maximum horizontal spacing between hangers or supports, measured along the piping for
copper tubing, shall be as follows:
H. Where vertical support locations are not indicated on the Drawings, support cast iron soil pipe,
steel, and copper pipe at every floor. Use friction clamps anchored to building construction
with not less than two-point bearing.
I. Where several pipes occur at the same elevation, trapeze type hangers may be used. For parallel
runs, use unistrut or equivalent capped pipe and approved supports and/or framing. The follow-
ing general rules shall be followed for attachment:
1. Uninsulated steel piping, use clamps. For copper tubing, the clamps shall be copper plat-
ed or lined.
2. Insulated piping 2 inches and smaller, use 18 gauge galvanized steel shield over the insu-
lation in 180 degree segments, minimum 12 inches long with clamp.
3. Insulated piping 2-1/2 inches and larger, use pipe covering protection saddle with roller
supports.
4. Cold water piping 2-1/2 inches and larger, use hard block nonconducting type saddles in
90 degree segments and minimum 12 inches long.
5. Where piping is racked on multiple hangers supported with the use of prefabricated struc-
tural support channels, the piping attachments shall be as specified for trapeze hangers.
6. Trapezing is not allowed for 8 inch diameter and larger pipes. These pipes must be sup-
ported individually.
7. The load on the end of any trapeze shall not be greater than 600 pounds when supported
from steel open web joists and 1000 pounds when supported from rolled beams.
J. Hangers for pipe shall be of a compatible material or coating. Where pipe insulation is continu-
ous through hangers, insulation blocks shall be of compressed insulation material of the same
thickness as the specified covering and will be equal to or larger in size than the metal insula-
tion protector saddle specified to be installed. Hangers will be isolated from dissimilar metal
unless they are of a compatible material.
K. Continuous threaded rod may be used wherever possible. No chain, wire, or perforated strap
shall be used. Threaded rod may not be bent. Threaded swivel connections shall be utilized for
attachment to sloping structure.
M. Clamp connection on sloped structure shall be provided with swivels so threaded pad will hang
vertically.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Ceiling tags.
5. Valve tags.
6. Warning tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed
content for each label.
1.4 COORDINATION
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Brady USA
B. 3M
C. Seton
D. Connecticut
E. Bran Ford
D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2 by 11-inch
bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where
equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number
and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and
maintenance data.
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-
1/2 inches by 3/4-inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4-inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,
1/2-inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal
lettering.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
instructions.
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of pipe service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate
both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
3. Included piping labels are cold water, hot water, hot water return, sanitary, storm, and
gas.
A. Additional location and identification of plumbing system valves shall be accomplished using
1/2 inch diameter colored, pressure-sensitive, adhesive circles. Apply circles to ceiling grid
below location of system valves per following color code:
Domestic Cold Water = Blue
Domestic Hot Water = Red
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and
1/2-inch numbers.
1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped
holes for attachment hardware.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2 by 11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or
space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-tag schedule shall be located on the Plumbing Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe
labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded bands on each
piping system.
1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.
2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.
C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering
hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List
tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a. Cold Water: 2 inches, round.
b. Hot Water: 2 inches, round.
c. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: 2 inches, round.
d. High-Pressure Compressed Air: 2 inches, round.
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulation Materials for Piping:
a. Provide the labor, materials, equipment, appliances, services and transportation,
and perform operations in connection with the construction and installation of the
Work. Work shall be as herein specified and as denoted on the accompanying
Drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and
jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and
equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop
Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-
applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Insulating and covering materials have been selected on the basis of mechanical strength, sound
transmission characteristic, durability under adverse conditions, vapor impermeability, and
appearance, in addition to thermal insulating value. Materials of lesser performance than
specified or materials of less thickness than specified, will be ordered removed and replaced
with acceptable materials.
B. The use of wheat paste, in lieu of lagging adhesives specified, is absolutely forbidden. Vapor
barriers on cold surfaces and piping must be continuous through sleeves, hangers, supports, etc.
Stapling of vapor barrier jackets shall be permitted only if staples are sealed with an approved
vapor barrier mastic or vapor barrier tape. Maintain the vapor barrier seal throughout each
system. No clips or other attachments shall be used that require the perforation or puncturing of
any duct or plenum panel. The Insulating Contractor is hereby notified that any duct or panel
found punctured or penetrated by clips, screws, or any other device for holding insulating
materials, even though penetration is not complete, shall be removed and replaced with new
duct or panel at his expense.
D. Vapor Barriers - General: Vapor barrier facings shall have a maximum flame spread rating of
25 and smoke developed rating not exceeding 50.
E. Flame Spread and Smoke Ratings: Components of the insulation for piping, including
coverings, mastics, and adhesives shall have a flame spread rating of not over 25 and the smoke
development rating of not over 50. Rating shall be established by tests conducted in accordance
with ASTM E84 - Surface Burning characteristics of building materials, NFPA 255 - Surface
burning characteristics of building materials, and UL 723 - Surface burning characteristics of
building materials.
F. Jacketing: It is imperative that the jacketing used throughout the systems shall have the flame
spread ratings and smoke development ratings herein specified as a maximum limit. Where
canvas is required to be used as jacketing, the Contractor must include the cost in his bid for
finishing with suitable mastics, finishing coats, etc., as required to provide fire resistance.
B. Type A; Glass Fiber: Johns-Manville Micro-Lock meeting ASTM C547; Class 1, rigid molded,
nonflammable.
1. “K” Value: 0.23 at 75 deg F.
2. Maximum Services Temperature: 850 deg F.
3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: AP-T PLUS White kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn
and bonded to aluminum foil, secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips or
AP jacket with outward clinch expanding staples or vapor barrier mastic as needed.
E. Type D; Cellular Glass: ASTM C552; "k" value of 0.35 at 75 degrees F; 8.0 lb/cu ft density.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a
corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an
epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F.
Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods
for operating temperature range.
2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300
deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating
materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and
specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of
roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for
above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION."
Match size and color of pipe labels.
B. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gauges, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,
and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the
connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing
sealant.
C. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-
steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
A. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation of the following:
1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
2. Underground piping.
3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
B. Insulation shall extend through all hangers and shall not be interrupted by any clamps.
Notes:
1. Vapor barrier is not required for elastomeric foam insulation.
2. Vapor barrier and waterproof adhesive are required for Type A glass fiber piping
insulation.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for
combined water service and fire-service mains.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same
area, drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations,
and elevations.
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water
mains and backflow prevention.
2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping,
including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.
3. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-
service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.
B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. Comply with ASTM F 645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water piping.
E. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-
service-main products.
F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and
valve and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression.
G. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic potable-water-service piping.
2. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic
water.
A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:
1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.
B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:
1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.
2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-
point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when
outdoor storage is necessary.
C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift.
Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or
rigging points.
D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and
handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural
capacity of floor when storing inside.
G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company. Provide tapping valve, sleeve, and
connect to water main if work is not provided by the utility company.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS (PIPE SIZES 2-1/2 INCHES AND SMALLER)
A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, drawn temper.
C. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if
required to match piping.
2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS (PIPE SIZES 3 INCHES AND LARGER)
A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot
end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard
pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.
2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end
unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard
pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.
2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for commonly used
joining materials.
A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least
equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
D. Flexible Connectors:
1. Nonferrous-Metal Piping: Bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid; with copper-
tube, pressure-type, solder-joint ends or bronze flanged ends brazed to hose.
2. Ferrous-Metal Piping: Stainless-steel hose covered with stainless-steel wire braid; with
ASME B1.20.1, threaded steel pipe nipples or ASME B16.5, steel pipe flanges welded to
hose.
E. Dielectric Fittings: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, or plain end
types; and matching piping system materials.
1. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipples with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic
lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types, and 300-psig minimum
working pressure at 225 deg F.
A. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary.
b. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc.
c. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
d. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.
e. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.
2. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine.
a. Standard: MSS SP-60.
b. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron or stainless-steel, two-piece bolted sleeve
with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and
type of pipe material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve.
c. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valve with one
raised face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.
B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section,
adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering
"WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately
5 inches in diameter.
1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate
deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.
C. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FMG-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench,
extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div.
b. Master Meter, Inc.
c. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.
B. Service-Saddle Assemblies: Comply with AWWA C800. Include saddle and valve compatible
with tapping machine.
1. Service Saddle: Copper alloy with seal and AWWA C800, threaded outlet for
corporation valve.
2. Corporation Valve: Bronze body and ground-key plug, with AWWA C800, threaded
inlet and outlet matching service piping material.
C. Curb Valves: Comply with AWWA C800. Include bronze body, ground-key plug or ball, and
wide tee head, with inlet and outlet matching service piping material.
D. Service Boxes for Curb Valves: Similar to AWWA M44 requirements for cast-iron valve
boxes. Include cast-iron telescoping top section of length required for depth of burial of valve,
plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over curb valve and with a
barrel approximately 3 inches in diameter.
1. Shutoff Rods: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest
buried valve, and slotted end matching curb valve.
A. Alarm Devices, General: UL 753 and FMG approved, of types and sizes to mate and match
piping and equipment.
B. Water-Flow Indicators: Vane-type water-flow detector, rated for 250-psig working pressure;
designed for horizontal or vertical installation; with 2 single-pole, double-throw circuit switches
to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete
with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover
that sends signal when cover is removed.
C. Supervisory Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal valve in other than fully
open position.
D. Pressure Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal increase in pressure.
A. Pipe and pipe fitting materials shall be compatible with each other. Where more than one type
of material or product is indicated, selection is Installer’s option.
C. Ductile-Iron and Cast-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile-iron or cast-iron, or AWWA C153
ductile-iron compact fittings, of dimension to match pipe outside diameter.
1. Lining: AWWA C104, cement mortar, sealcoated.
2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
3. Bells: ASTM D3139.
4. Gaskets: ASTM F477.
D. Couplings: Iron body sleeve assembly fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes to be
joined.
1. Sleeve: ASTM A126, Class B, gray iron.
2. Followers: ASTM A47, Grade 32510 or ASTM A536 ductile iron.
3. Gaskets: Rubber.
4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.
5. Finish: Enamel paint.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following
applications.
B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure
rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flanges, unions, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints
indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults.
A. General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for NPS 3 and larger underground
installation. Use threaded- or flanged-end valves for installation in vaults. Use UL/FMG,
nonrising-stem gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use corporation valves and
curb valves with ends compatible with piping, for NPS 2 and smaller installation.
B. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Underground Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, high-
pressure, resilient-seated gate valves with valve box.
A. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping-system common
requirements.
A. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company
and of size and in location indicated.
B. Make connections larger than NPS 2 with tapping machine according to the following:
1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP-60.
2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve.
3. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main.
Remove tapping machine and connect water-service piping.
4. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP-60. Install valve with stem
pointing up and with valve box.
C. Make connections NPS 2 and smaller with drilling machine according to the following:
1. Install service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves in size, quantity, and
arrangement required by utility company standards.
2. Install service-saddle assemblies on water-service pipe to be tapped. Position outlets for
corporation valves.
3. Use drilling machine compatible with service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves.
Drill hole in main. Remove drilling machine and connect water-service piping.
4. Install corporation valves into service-saddle assemblies.
5. Install manifold for multiple taps in water main.
6. Install curb valve in water-service piping with head pointing up and with service box.
E. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.
H. Sleeves are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
I. Mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for
Plumbing."
J. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction.
Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.
L. See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for potable-water piping inside the building.
M. Provide line size offset fittings as required to avoid conflicts with all other site utilities, i.e.,
sanitary and storm sewer piping, gas piping, manholes, inlets, and structures. Refer to Site
Utility Drawings during bid phase for coordination.
A. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint
construction.
A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each
underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.
B. AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44.
C. UL/FMG, Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in
vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post.
D. UL/FMG, Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24.
F. Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed
up and with service box.
A. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection to mains.
B. Install protective pipe bollards on four sides of each fire department connection. Pipe bollards
are specified in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications."
C. Pitch piping from connection to low point with accessible means of draining in accordance with
NFPA 13 and 24.
A. General: Comply with NFPA 24 for devices and methods of valve supervision. Underground
valves with valve box do not require supervision.
C. Pressure Switches: Drill and thread hole in exposed barrel of fire hydrant. Install switch.
D. Water-Flow Indicators: Install in water-service piping in vault. Select indicator with saddle
and vane matching pipe size. Drill hole in pipe, insert vane, and bolt saddle to pipe.
E. Coordinate connection of alarm devices to building fire alarm system. Wiring and fire-alarm
devices are specified in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm."
3.10 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping connections to
valves and equipment.
A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks
have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to
stabilize system. Use only potable water.
B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours.
1. Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold
at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test pressure and
hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints.
Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed
limits.
3.12 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install continuous underground warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground
water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground
warning tapes are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3.13 CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes domestic water piping and water meters inside the building.
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems with
125 psig, unless otherwise indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings and water meters, if provided by the
Contractor.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOMESTIC WATER (COLD WATER, HOT WATER, HOT WATER RETURN,
TEMPERED WATER, TRAP PRIMER WATER)
A. Piping shall be copper tube complying with ANSI/ASTM B88, Type “L” (above floor) and
Type “K” (below floor). Fittings shall be wrought copper, solder-joints conforming to
ANSI B16.22.
C. Piping fittings for pipe sizes 1/2 inch through 4 inch shall be Type “L” (above floor) and Type
“K” (below floor) copper tube complying with ANSI/ASTM B88. Fittings shall be as described
in subparagraph below:
1. Fittings for pipe sizes 4 inch and smaller shall be Type “L” (above floor) and Type “K”
(below floor). Piping and fittings shall be joined by a crimping process.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving.”
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground
copper tubing.
A. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each
pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball
type valves. Balancing valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties."
1. Manual balancing devices shall be calibrated balance or venturi type. Devices shall be
precision machined and calibrated for an accuracy of 3 percent full scale. The induced
differential reading shall be greater than one foot water column at the specified flow with
the valves in the wide open position. The valves shall have differential read-out ports
fitted with check valve and protective cap.
2. Devices are to have a memory stop to allow complete shut off and return to set position
without readjustment.
3. Construction
a. For 3/4 inch through 2-1/2 inch pipe size: Bronze or brass body with full port ball
valve construction and TFE seat rings.
b. For 3 inches and larger flange connections: Brass, cast iron or ductile iron body
with bronze or stainless steel components.
c. Conventional port valves and valves 1/2 inch or smaller are not acceptable.
4. Minimum Ratings
a. Devices with sweat connections: 200 psig at 250 deg F.
b. Devices with NPT connections: 400 psig at 250 deg F.
c. Devices with flanged connections: 175 psig at 250 deg F.
B. Shut Off Duty: Use bronze ball valves. Use flanged and ball valves with flanged ends for
piping 2-1/2 inches and larger.
D. Balancing devices shall be manufactured by Bell & Gossett, Flow Design, Taco, Nexus,
Griswold, Tour and Anderson, Preso Inc., or Armstrong.
F. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures
that do not have supply stops. Use ball valves.
G. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,
and where required to drain water piping.
1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."
C. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gauge, and test tee with valve,
inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Pressure gauges are specified in
Division 22 Section "Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping," and drain valves and strainers
are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialities."
E. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing.”
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and
connect to the following:
1. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for 2-1/2 inches and larger.
A. Check the domestic hot water return pump for specified flow.
B. Domestic hot water return balancing shall be performed in accordance with Division 23 Section
“Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.”
3.10 ADJUSTING
3.11 CLEANING
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least
200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall provide labor, materials, equipment, appliances, services and
transportation, and perform operations in connection with construction and installation of the
Work. Work shall be as herein specified and as denoted on the accompanying Drawings.
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9."
C. Devices shall be included in the list of Approved Backflow Prevention Devices of the USC
Foundation for Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research and The American National
Standard Institute A112.1.2-1942 (1979).
D. All thermostatic mixing valves shall comply with National, State, and Local Codes or
Requirements.
E. Thermostatic mixing valves shall meet OBBC, Plumbing Code, Section 4101:2-58-12.
F. All thermostatic mixing valves installed for handicapped usage must comply with the
Americans with Disabilities Act and American National Standard Institute A117, Standard for
Building Requirements for Handicapped People.
G. Thermostatic mixing valve must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s specific
instructions for type of valve used. Installation must take into consideration location of
thermostatic mixing valve to water heater, temperature differences of hot and cold water,
pressure drop across valve. Capacity of valve shall be as denoted on the Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Approved Manufacturers
1. Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventer: Ames, Febco, Watts, Wilkins, Zurn
2. Double-Check Valve Assemblies: Ames, Febco, Watts, Wilkins, Zurn
3. Pressure Type Vacuum Breaker: Ames, Febco, Watts, Wilkins, Zurn
4. Shock Absorbers: Mifab, PPP Products, Wade, Josam, J.R. Smith, Watts, Zurn
5. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Bradley, Lawler, Leonard, Symmons
6. Adapter Fittings: Fernco
7. Exterior Wall Hydrant: Mifab, Watts, Wade, Josam, J.R. Smith, Zurn
8. Refrigerator Connection: Guy Gray, PPP Products, Acorn
9. Hose Bibb: Mifab, Watts, Wade, Josam, J.R. Smith, Zurn
A. The reduced pressure principle backflow preventer shall consist of two independently operated
spring loaded poppet guided check valves and an easily removable pressure differential relief
control. The device shall be so constructed that it will reduce the pressure in the zone between
the two check valves. If either check valve should leak at the static condition, the pressure
differential relief control shall open and discharge to atmosphere, maintaining the zone pressure
less than the supply pressure. Also, the device shall be constructed so it can be disassembled
and repaired without removing the main body from the line. Further, it shall consist of two
shut-off valves and four test cocks located properly to assist in testing the unit.
A. The main line unit shall consist of two internally spring loaded “Y”-figure check valves having
cast iron bodies, bronze replaceable seat rings, and 300 series stainless steel stems. The stems
shall be guided with replaceable bushings in the cover and seat ring to assure positive check
seating. All internal cast iron parts shall be epoxy coated.
B. The by-pass line unit shall consist of two bronze bodies, internally spring loaded poppet type
check valves, and a total type water meter with registration between 1 and 20 GPM flow rates.
C. Check valve internal parts shall be easily accessible without removing the check valve body
from the line. The assembly shall be suitable for installation in any position, rated to 175 psi
working pressure, and water temperatures from 32 deg F to 140 deg F.
A. Pressure type vacuum breaker shall incorporate one spring loaded check valve which closes
tightly when pressure in the device drops below one psi and an air relief valve that opens to
break a siphon when the pressure drops to one psi. The check and air relief valves shall be
constructed so they may be serviced without removing the assembly from the line. Pressure
vacuum breakers shall be rated to 150 psi working pressure and water temperatures between 32
deg F and 180 deg F.
A. Factory permanently sealed air chamber sized per method established in accordance with
Plumbing and Drainage Institute "Standard P.D.I.-WH201."
A. The main thermostatic mixing valve shall be assembled with the following features:
1. Thermostatic mixing valve which functions to meet both high and low demand for
tempered water. The thermostatic water mixing valves shall be powered by advanced
thermal actuation thermostat to regulate water temperature.
2. Valve to include integral check stops, and outlet dial thermometer and a ball valve
shut-off.
3. Valve to include spare thermostatic cartridge.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to
other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap
fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe
diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or
under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
4. Install backflow preventers and double-check valve assemblies at 4’-0” to centerline of
device.
C. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets
and with shutoff valve on outlet.
1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties.
B. Test each pressure vacuum breaker, reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer, and double-
check, detector-assembly backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and
the device's reference standard.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified
above.
A. Upon completion of each respective piping system, but prior to insulating, covering, or
backfilling, each system shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed to remove construction dirt
and foreign matter.
C. Damage resulting from tests shall be repaired or damaged materials replaced, to satisfaction of
A/E, and at no cost to the Owner.
3.6 ADJUSTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following all-bronze and bronze-fitted centrifugal pumps for domestic
cold- and hot-water circulation:
1. Close-coupled, in-line, seal-less centrifugal pumps.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic water pump specified. Include certified
performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of selected
models, furnished specialties, and accessories.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of domestic
water pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Product Requirements."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: In-Line Circulating Pumps: Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Taco.
A. Domestic hot water system in-line recirculating pump(s) shall be of the horizontal in-line, all
bronze, oil lubricated type, suitable for 125# working pressure. Pump body shall be bronze
with brass impeller, heat treated carbon steel shaft, mechanical seal, bronze sleeve-oil
lubricated bearings, flexible spring coupler, and ring mounted nonoverloading motor. Motor
shall be open, dripproof, sleeve bearing, quiet operating, rubber mounted construction, having
built-in thermal overload protection.
B. Each circulating pump shall have sufficient capacity to circulate the scheduled GPM against the
scheduled external head (feet) with the horsepower and speed as scheduled or as denoted on the
Drawings. Motors shall be of electrical characteristics as scheduled, denoted or as indicated on
the electrical plans and Specifications. Pump characteristics shall be such that the head of the
pump, under varying conditions, shall not exceed the rated horsepower of the drive motor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
B. Install in-line, seal-less, centrifugal pumps with motor and pump shafts horizontal.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or
greater than size of pump nozzles. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."
1. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of pumps, and check valve and throttling
valve on discharge side of pumps. Install valves same size as connected piping. Refer to
Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valves
for domestic water piping and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties"
for strainers.
2. Install pressure gages at suction and discharge of pumps. Install at integral pressure-gage
tappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge
piping around pumps. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing
Piping" for pressure gages and gage connectors.
D. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.
2. Piping specialties.
3. Piping and tubing joining materials.
4. Valves.
5. Pressure regulators.
6. Mechanical sleeve seals.
7. Concrete bases.
B. Provide new piping for the natural gas service which shall be installed in strict accordance with
the latest edition of the Pressure Piping Code, NFPA Code #54, and in confirmation with the
local gas utility company requirements, as approved by the A/E.
C. Contractor shall make his own arrangements with local gas utility company for connection on
house side of gas meter or regulator.
D. This Contractor is responsible for all work on the gas system which occurs downstream of the
gas meter. This includes all valves, gas pressure regulators inside or outside of the building, gas
pressure regulator vents for a complete and operational system. The Contractor shall review the
Site Utility Drawings for any additional work required to complete work entirely to the point
just downstream of gas meter.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
A. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig but not more than 2 psig.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging
coating, and protect from direct sunlight.
A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact
utility-locating service for area where Project is located.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind
finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and
Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Gas piping for pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller may be Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded
malleable iron fittings in compliance with NFPA 54 (1988) Section 2.6.8. Gas piping and
fittings for pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be welded Schedule 40 black steel. Piping
smaller than 1/2 inch NPS will not be allowed.
B. Fittings shall be standard weight welding fittings, Nibco, Tubeturns, Allied, or approved equal.
C. Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing: Comply with ANSI/IAS LC 1. (Pipe sizes 2 inches and
smaller.)
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a. OmegaFlex, Inc.
2. Tubing: ASTM A 240/A 240M, corrugated, Series 300 stainless steel.
3. Coating: PE with flame retardant.
a. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products
according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1) Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2) Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
4. Fittings: Copper-alloy mechanical fittings with ends made to fit and listed for use with
corrugated stainless-steel tubing and capable of metal-to-metal seal without gaskets.
Include brazing socket or threaded ends complying with ASME B1.20.1.
5. Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations.
6. Manifolds: Malleable iron or steel with factory-applied protective coating. Threaded
connections shall comply with ASME B1.20.1 for pipe inlet and corrugated tubing
outlets.
B. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire
screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end
connection.
B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with
AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are
prohibited.
A. See "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is
applied in various services.
B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, 2 inches and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.
1. CWP Rating: 125 psig.
2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.
4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"
Articles.
5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for
valves 1 inch and smaller.
6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to 2 inches shall have initials "WOG" permanently
marked on valve body.
C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Comply with
ASME B16.38.
1. CWP Rating: 125 psig.
2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.
3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"
Articles.
4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.
D. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.
4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.
5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.
6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.
7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
9. Listing: Valves 1 inch and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
A. General Requirements:
1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas.
2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.
3. Elevation compensator.
4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators 2 inches and smaller; flanged for regulators
2-1/2 inches and larger.
5. Each regulator shall be vented independently to the outside atmosphere with an approved
vent cap. Verify sizes and venting requirements with the gas company.
6. Gas piping installed in a ceiling air plenum area shall not contain any valves or unions.
2.6 SLEEVES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick,
continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective
jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches
deep; colored yellow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.
B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code to
determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.
C. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of
accidental ignition.
A. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of
natural-gas piping.
D. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall and Slab Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
E. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
F. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for
pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and
install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that
cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
G. Install pressure gauge upstream and downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gauges
are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping."
A. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of
natural-gas piping.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to
layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.
L. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements
in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
N. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for
roughing-in requirements.
O. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including
service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install
where condensate is subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and
same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or
cap.
P. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure
protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
Q. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or
floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.
R. Concealed Gas Supply Piping Locations: A Schedule 40 plastic coated or mill wrapped welded
gas casing vent that is a minimum of two times the pipe diameter larger than the supply pipe
shall be installed on all concealed gas supply piping, i.e., below floors, in walls, and vented full
size directly to atmosphere and terminated with a 90 degree gooseneck fitting and bug screen.
The vent pipe shall be sealed around the supply pipe at each point where pipe enters and exits
the concealed space. All fittings shall be coated and a test of 50 psi for 10 minutes be made
before covering. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel
Gas Code.
S. All gas valves installed shall be accessible below ceilings outside of concealed areas and no
higher than 54 inches AFF.
T. All gas piping and equipment regulator vent piping from a point downstream of the gas meter to
the final connection to equipment shall be painted yellow like Porter Paints No. D6209-4.
1. Prohibited Locations:
a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash
chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator
shafts.
b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.
U. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side
down.
W. Install unions in pipes 2 inches and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each
piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.
Z. Install pressure gauge upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gauges are
specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping."
AA. Horizontal runs shall grade down to riser at a pitch of 1/4 inch in 15 feet.
BB. At each point where gas piping connects to equipment and at the bottom of each riser, furnish
and install suitable drip leg or moisture pocket comprising drip pocket not les than 12 inches
long, unless otherwise indicated, with reducer and 125 lb. black malleable cap for blowing out
drip pockets.
CC. Piping systems for natural gas shall be electrically continuous and properly bonded to an
approved grounding electrode in accordance with the National Electrical Code, NFPA No. 70.
DD. Gas lines shall be purged to the outside atmosphere before being put into service. Purging must
be witnessed by the Architect or an authorized person to witness purging of the lines.
A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel
tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.
B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate
for servicing and testing.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C. Threaded Joints:
1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.
2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.
4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal
threading is specified.
5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
D. Welded Joints:
1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and
welding operators.
2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds
and where damage to coating occurs during construction.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter.
F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas
service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.
G. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare
dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not
overtighten.
A. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod sizes:
1. 1 inch and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2. 1-1/4 inches: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3. 1-1/2 and 2 inches: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. 2-1/2 to 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
5. 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.
B. Install hangers for horizontal, corrugated stainless-steel tubing with the following maximum
spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. 3/4 inch and Larger: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment
grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.
D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within
72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and
appliances or equipment.
E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as
practical to inlet of each appliance.
A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" for piping and valve identification.Install detectable warning tape directly above
gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements
and slabs.
E. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
A. Valves for pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following:
1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
2. Bronze plug valve.
B. Valves for pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger at service meter shall be one of the following:
1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
2. Bronze plug valve.
3. Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve.
C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:
1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.
2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
3. Bronze plug valve.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.
2. Floor drains.
3. Cleanouts.
4. Trap Primers
5. Adapter fittings.
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
2. Sanitary Sewer, Force-Main Piping: 150 psig.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, couplings, floor drains, and trench drains.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for selecting
seismic restraints.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. All cast iron soil piping and fittings shall comply with ASTM A 888 (or A 74) and be marked
with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and be listed by NSF
International.
C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping;
"NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and
"NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Cleanouts and Floor Drains: Wade, Josam Company, Zurn, J. R. Smith, Mifab, Watts,
Blucher/Josam
2. Trap Primers: PPP Products, Sioux Chief, Watts
3. Adapter Fittings: Fernco
4. Pipe Tube and Fittings: Tyler, Charlotte, AB&I
2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. Floor: Cast iron, inside caulking, with adjustable nickel-bronze round tops; Josam No. 55000-1.
Provide Josam “-CFC” carpet cleanout flange in carpeted areas. Review Finish Schedule for
locations.
B. Wall: Concealed screw plug with countersunk wrench hole and stainless steel flush cover and
frame with tamper-proof screw. Josam No. 58600-PLG.
A. Adaptor fittings shall be used where changing from one type of material to another such as:
"DWV" to cast iron soil pipe shall be with an approved brass adapter ferrule and caulk "DWV"
into cast iron hub. Leaded joint against "DWV" copper is not permitted. Cast iron soil pipe to
vitrified tile connection shall be made using ABS "Fernco Donut" gasket.
B. Floor Drain "FD": Ground floor and above ground floor conditions. Cast iron body and
flashing color, nickel bronze round adjustable strainer head with secured square hole grate;
Josam No. 30000-E.
C. Floor Drain “FDSK”: Provide a 12 inch by 12 inch by 8 inch floor drain sink with a square
nickel bronze top with deep seal ‘P’ trap, full grate, aluminum sediment bucket. Josam No.
49340A-NB-3-31.
H. Flashing Rings: Nonpuncture clamping rings are required wherever membrane waterproofing
occurs.
I. Traps: All traps shall be cast iron, deep seal (4 inches minimum seal).
K. Trap Primers:
1. Prime-Time Electronic Trap Priming Manifold Kit as manufactured by PPP Products
shall be installed in the cold water piping serving the laboratory areas. Trap primer water
service shall then be extended and connected to all floor drain traps in laboratories. Refer
to Drawings for location of trap primer valve assembly.
2. Oregon #1 Trap Primer as manufactured by PPP Products shall be installed in the cold
water piping serving the water closets. Trap primer water service shall then be extended
and connected to all floor drains in the toilet and mechanical rooms. Refer to the
Drawings for location of trap primer valve assembly.
A. Aboveground Piping:
1. Pipe size 1-1/2 inches through 15 inches: Hubless cast iron soil pipe, service weight;
hubless cast iron soil pipe fittings, hubless joints, ASTM A-74; CISPI 301. All cast iron
soil pipe and fittings shall bear the collective mark of the cast iron soil pipe institute.
Copper D.W.V., ASTM B306 piping and fittings is also acceptable.
2. Hubless cast iron soil pipe shall be joined using “Heavy Weight” couplings torqued to
80 inch/lbs meeting the requirements of ASTM by Clamp-All, Mission or Husky.
Couplings shall be constructed of type 304 stainless steel with 305 Stainless Steel worm
drive screws; 4 bands 4 inch and below, 6 bands 5 inch and above. The gasket material
shall be neoprene and conform to ASTM C-564.
3. Heavy Duty couplings as described above may be provided by the pipe manufacturer for
fitting locations only. All straight runs of pipe must be joined.
4. An option shall be Schedule 40 PVC with solvent joints per ASTM per D2665/D2564.
Installation shall be per ASTM D2321 for locations not in communication with the return
air plenum.
B. Underground Piping:
1. Pipe size 2 inches through 15 inches: Cast iron hub and spigot soil pipe service weight;
Cast iron hub and spigot soil pip fittings, ASTM A-74; CISPI 301; compression gasket
joints, ASTM C564-70, or lead and oakum joints are acceptable. All cast iron soil pipe
and fittings shall bear the collective mark of the cast iron soil pipe institute.
2. Hubless cast iron soil pipe shall be joined using “Heavy Weight” couplings torqued to
80 inch/lbs meeting the requirements of ASTM by Clamp-All, Mission or Husky.
Couplings shall be constructed of type 304 stainless steel with 305 Stainless Steel worm
drive screws; 4 bands 4 inch and below, 6 bands 5 inch and above. The gasket material
shall be neoprene and conform to ASTM C-564.
3. Heavy Duty couplings as described above may be provided by the pipe manufacturer for
fitting locations only. All straight runs of pipe must be joined.
4. An option shall be Schedule 40 PVC with solvent joints per ASTM per D2665/D2564.
Installation shall be per ASTM D2321.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to 4 inches. Use 4 inches for larger drainage piping
unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
D. Install floor drains as noted on the Drawings. Set grates of drains 1/2 inch below finished floor,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
3. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.
H. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.
J. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
K. All sanitary vent piping, including acid vent piping, which terminates to any exterior point, shall
extend to a point 2’-0” above any outdoor air intake which are located within 10’-0” of the
intake opening.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
A. Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Sanitary
Sewers."
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."
C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers.
D. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping.
E. Install mechanical sleeve (in basement conditions). Select number of interlocking rubber links
required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in
Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
F. Install wall-penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make
installation watertight.
G. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
H. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used
on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,
double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side
with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.
I. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past
each joint as completed.
J. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 1/4 inch per foot downward in direction of flow for piping
2 inches and smaller; 1/8 inch per foot downward in direction of flow for piping 3 inches
and larger.
2. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
K. Install underground soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
L. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common
Work Results for Plumbing."
B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
C. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.
D. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
E. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints Below Underground Slab: Join piping according to
ASTM D 2665.
A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:
a. MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
3. Support stacks at each floor with two-piece risers clamps.
B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment."
3.8 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction
or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed
before it was tested.
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with
water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes
before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect
joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps
filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-
stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into
piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap
of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.10 CLEANING
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex
paint.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building:
1. Pipe, tube, couplings, and fittings.
2. Cleanouts.
3. Adaptor fittings.
4. Roof drains/overflow drains.
5. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties.
6. Flashing materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipes, tubes, fittings, couplings, roof drains/overflow drains, trench drains,
cleanouts, and storm drainage piping specialties.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with “NSF-DWV” for plastic sanitary and storm drainage
pipe and fittings, "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Aboveground Piping:
1. Pipe size 1-1/2 inches through 15 inches: Hubless cast iron soil pipe, service weight;
hubless cast iron soil pipe fittings, hubless joints, ASTM A 888; CISPI 301. All cast iron
soil pipe and fittings shall bear the collective mark of the cast iron soil pipe institute.
2. Hubless cast iron soil pipe shall be joined using “Heavy Weight” couplings torqued to
manufacturer’s recommended torque using a calibrated torque wrench meeting the
requirements of ASTM C 1540 by Clamp-All, Mission, Husky or approved equal.
Couplings shall be constructed of type 304 stainless steel with 305 Stainless Steel worm
drive screws; 4 bands 4 inch and below, 6 bands 5 inch and above. The gasket material
shall be neoprene and conform to ASTM C 564.
3. Couplings from pipe manufacturer are not acceptable.
4. An option shall be Schedule 40 PVC with solvent joints per ASTM per D2665/D2564.
Installation shall be per ASTM D2321 for locations not in communication with the return
air plenum.
B. Underground Piping:
1. Pipe size 2 inches through 15 inches: Cast iron hub and spigot soil pipe service weight;
Cast iron hub and spigot soil pip fittings, ASTM A 74; CISPI 301; compression gasket
joints, ASTM C 564, or lead and oakum joints are acceptable. All cast iron soil pipe and
fittings shall bear the collective mark of the cast iron soil pipe institute.
2. Hubless cast iron soil pipe shall be joined using “Heavy Weight” couplings torqued to
manufacturer’s recommended torque using a calibrated torque wrench meeting the
requirements of ASTM C 1540 by Clamp-All, Mission or Husky. Couplings shall be
constructed of type 304 stainless steel with 305 Stainless Steel worm drive screws;
4 bands 4 inch and below, 6 bands 5 inch and above. The gasket material shall be
neoprene and conform to ASTM C 564.
3. Couplings from pipe manufacturer are not acceptable.
4. An option shall be Schedule 40 PVC with solvent joints per ASTM per D2665/D2564.
Installation shall be per ASTM D2321.
2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. Floor: Cast iron, inside caulking, with adjustable nickel-bronze round tops; Josam No. 55000-1.
Provide Josam No. 55000-1-14 carpet marker in carpeted areas. Review Finish Schedule for
locations.
B. Wall: Concealed screw plug with countersunk wrench hole and stainless steel screwed flush
cover and frame; Josam 58600-PLG. Review Finish Schedule for locations.
A. Adaptor fittings shall be used where changing from one type of material to another such as:
"DWV" to cast iron soil pipe shall be with an approved brass adapter ferrule and caulk "DWV"
into cast iron hub. Leaded joint against "DWV" copper is not permitted. Cast iron soil pipe to
vitrified tile connection shall be made using ABS "Fernco Donut" gasket.
B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch
minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized,
mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum
thickness.
E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785 and ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.
C. Cellular-Core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Series PS 100.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns and to fit Series PS 100 sewer and drain pipe.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."
B. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in
absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed
before it was tested.
3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping on completion of roughing-in. Close
openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-
foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection,
water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
C. Install cast iron soil piping according to CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,”
Chapter IV, “Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.”
D. Install plastic pipe below grade in accordance with ASTM D 2321 “Underground Installation of
Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Installations.”
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker.
Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheet.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors
and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and
skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
around specialty.
3.3 CLEANING
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial and instantaneous water heater, signed by
product manufacturer.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water
heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product
Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9" for all components that will be in contact with potable water.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings.
1.6 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The water heater shall be a high-efficiency, condensing, tank type water heater having a
modulating input rating and recovery capacity as denoted on the Drawings, and shall be
operated on Natural Gas. The water heater shall be capable of full modulation firing down to
20% of rated input with a turn down ratio of 5:1.
B. The water heater shall consist of a direct fired stainless steel heat exchanger mounted on top of
a glass lined storage tank in a fashion that will reduce the amount of scale build-up that is
known to reduce efficiency. The water heater shall have no visible pipes that connect the heat
exchanger to the storage tank. There shall be no banding material, bolts, gaskets or "O" rings in
the header configuration. The stainless steel combustion chamber shall be designed to drain
condensation to the bottom of the heat exchanger assembly. A built-in trap shall allow
condensation to drain from the heat exchanger assembly. The water heater shall carry a three (3)
year warranty.
C. The tank shall be glass lined and fired to 1600°F to ensure a molecular fusing of glass and steel.
The tank shall be completely encased in high density insulation of sufficient thickness to meet
the energy efficiency requirements of the latest edition of the ASHRAE 90.1 Standard. The
tank shall be fitted with a brass drain valve.
D. The water heater shall be certified and listed by C.S.A. International under the latest edition of
the harmonized ANSI Z21.10.3 test standard for the US and Canada . The water heater shall
comply with the energy efficiency requirements of the latest edition of the ASHRAE 90.1
standard. The water heater shall operate at a minimum of 96% thermal efficiency. The water
heater shall be certified for indoor installation. The water heater’s efficiency shall be verified
through third party testing by AHRI and listed in the AHRI Certification Directory.
E. The water heater shall be constructed with a heavy gauge steel jacket assembly, primed and pre-
painted on both sides. The combustion chamber shall be sealed and completely enclosed,
independent of the outer jacket assembly, so that integrity of the outer jacket does not affect a
proper seal. A burner/flame observation port shall be provided. The burner shall be a premix
design and constructed of high temperature stainless steel with a woven metal fiber outer
covering to provide modulating firing rates. The water heater shall be supplied with a gas valve
designed with negative pressure regulation and be equipped with a variable speed blower
system, to precisely control the fuel/air mixture to provide modulating water heater firing rates
for maximum efficiency. The water heater shall operate in a safe condition at a de-rated output
with gas supply pressures as low as 4 inches of water column.
F. The water heater shall utilize a 24 VAC control circuit and components. The control system
shall have an electronic display for water heater set-up, status, and diagnostics. All electronic
circuitry shall be easily accessed and serviceable from the front of the jacket. The water heater
shall be equipped with; an all-bronze circulating pump; high limit temperature control; ASME
certified temperature and pressure relief valve; inlet & outlet water temperature sensors; flue
temperature sensor; runtime contacts; alarm contacts; low water flow protection, contacts for
louvers, security protection, adjustable pump delay, enable/disable contacts and built-in freeze
protection. The manufacturer shall verify proper operation of the burner, all controls and the
heat exchanger by connection to water and venting for a factory fire test prior to shipping.
G. The water heater shall feature a SMART Control with an LCD display with soft key pad, pump
delay with freeze protection and pump exercise. The water heater shall be equipped with an
eight foot power cord. Supply voltage shall be 120 volt / 60 hertz / single phase.
H. The water heater shall be installed and vented with a direct vent vertical system with a vertical
roof top termination of both the vent and combustion air. The flue shall be AL29-4C sealed
vent material terminating at the roof top with the manufacturers specified vent termination. A
separate pipe shall supply combustion air directly to the water heater from the outside. The air
inlet pipe may be insulated galvanized sealed pipe. The air inlet must terminate on the roof top
with the manufacturer’s specified air inlet cap. The water heater’s total combined air intake
length shall not exceed 100 equivalent feet. The water heater’s total combined exhaust venting
length shall not exceed 100 equivalent feet. Foam Core pipe is not an approved material for
exhaust piping.
J. The water heater shall have an independent laboratory rating for Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) of
20 ppm or less, corrected to 3% O2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install and place in operation the water heater system as shown on the Drawings, complete with
piping, supports, circulating pumps, etc., and as recommended by the manufacturer. System
shall meet or exceed state and local codes.
B. Provide shut-off valves and unions entering and leaving heater. In addition, provide for
multiple heaters, balancing valves in entering line with entering and leaving gauges, and
balance for equal flow through each heater.
B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.
D. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters without shutoff valves.
E. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas water heaters without gas pressure
regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner.
F. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters, if required for operation of
safety control.
G. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use
relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater,
relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward
pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
H. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or
over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters
that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties"
for hose-end drain valves.
I. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and
Gauges for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.
J. Install pressure gauge(s) on inlet and outlet piping of commercial, fuel-fired water heater
piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping" for pressure
gauges.
K. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without
integral or fitting-type heat traps.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for
easy removal of water heaters.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified
above.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components:
1. Flushometers.
2. Toilet seats.
3. Fixture supports.
4. Water closets.
5. Urinals.
6. Lavatories.
7. Floor service sinks.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim,
fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials
and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category
through one source from a single manufacturer.
1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single
manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that
category.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public
Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with
disabilities.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy
Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing
fixtures:
1. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory
and sink faucets:
1. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
2. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
4. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
5. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.
6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
7. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.
8. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for shower
faucets:
1. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets:
ASSE 1016.
2. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
3. High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices:
ASTM F 445.
4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
5. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.
6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
7. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings:
1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.
3. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
4. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
5. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
K. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430.
2. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.
3. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3.
4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Warranty Period for Commercial Applications: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lavatories
1. American Standard, Kohler, Crane, Eljer, Zurn
2. Trim: Zurn Aquaspec, T & S Brass, Chicago, Speakman
C. Mop Basin
1. Sink: Fiat, Swan, Acron, Mustee
2. Trim: Zurn Aquaspec, T & S Brass, Chicago, Speakman
A. Exposed connections and trim to fixtures shall be chromium plated. Trim shall be
chrome-plated brass, unless otherwise specified. Each fixture shall have chrome plated stops in
the supplies and escutcheons at wall.
B. Unless otherwise specified, lavatory and sink connections to include Chicago No. 1017 supply
with 1/2 inch female inlet, 12 inches long, 3/8 inch OD flexible riser and wall flange. Finish to
be polished chromium plate. "P" trap shall be 1-1/2 inches chrome-plate cast brass #8-394 with
cleanout made by Brass Craft Manufacturing Co., Zurn, or McGuire.
C. Flow restriction devices shall be used on plumbing fixtures (other than units used for safety
reasons) to meet the requirements as set forth in the State and Local Building Codes for new
building construction.
D. All handicap fixtures and trim shall meet ADA Requirements. Exposed supplies and trap on all
fixtures with exposed supplies and drain shall be wrapped with insulation equal to Trap Wrap
by Brocar Products, Inc.
F. Provide offset grid strainer and tailpiece for ADA accessible lavatories and sinks.
H. Refer to Architectural drawings for sinks that are to be furnished and installed as part of the
casework. This Contractor to provide trim, supplies, stops, escutcheons, plates, traps, and the
like for complete plumbing installation for all plumbing fixtures shown on the Plumbing and
Architectural Drawings. See Equipment Schedules and Drawings for types and locations.
I. All faucets shall be heavy duty and be provided with ceramic disc valving.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.
B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be
installed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers'
written instructions.
C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
G. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
1. Exception: Use ball valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture. Valves are
specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
H. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to
sanitary drainage system.
I. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture designated to be indirectly connected
to drainage system.
J. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide
side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with
disabilities to reach.
M. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
N. Set service basins in leveling bed of cement grout. Grout is specified in Division 22 Section
"Common Work Results for Plumbing."
O. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.
Q. Pipes shall be jointed to plumbing fixtures with screwed tailpiece couplings and unions so that
fixtures can be easily removed and reset.
R. An escutcheon plate to match the pipe shall be used around waste and supply piping wherever
same passes through floors, walls, or ceilings.
S. Provide adjustable lavatory, urinal, and water closet carriers to support each independently of
wall. Carriers shall be complete with feet and vertical or horizontal style waste fittings to
comply with waste and vent arrangement indicated on the accompanying Drawings and as
required by construction. Supporting feet must be located within wall or in pipe space without
damage to wall face. Manufacturer shall provide suitable template frames for mounting on
carriers before tiling of wall for adjustment.
T. Furnish vacuum breakers on fixtures or equipment having under-rim supply or hose connection,
as furnished or installed under this Contract.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping for all fixtures shown on the Plumbing and Architectural Drawings. Use size fittings
required to match fixtures.
A. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified
components.
B. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
C. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
properly.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings,
and controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.
C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods
and materials. Do the following:
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers
and spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect
exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
3.7 PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include flow rates and capacities, furnished
specialties, and accessories.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For emergency plumbing fixtures to include in maintenance
manuals.
A. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z358.1, "Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment."
C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Emergency Showers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Bradley Corporation.
b. Encon Safety Products.
c. Guardian Equipment Co.
d. Haws Corporation.
e. Speakman Company.
f. WaterSaver Faucet Co.
2. Description: Plumbed, single-shower-head horizontal, wall-mounted, emergency shower.
a. Capacity: Deliver tepid water at rate not less than 20 gpm for at least 15 minutes,
minimum.
b. Supply Piping: 1-1/4 copper with stay-open control valve.
c. Control-Valve Actuator: Pull rod.
d. Shower Head: 8-inch minimum diameter, stainless steel.
A. Emergency Eyewash:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Bradley Corporation.
b. Encon Safety Products.
c. Guardian Equipment Co.
d. Haws Corporation.
e. Speakman Company.
f. WaterSaver Faucet Co.
2. Description: Plumbed, accessible, wall-mounted eye and face wash equipment with
receptor and wall bracket.
a. Capacity: Deliver tepid water at rate not less than 0.4 gpm for at least 15 minutes.
b. Supply Piping: 1/2" inch copper (concealed) with stay-open control valve.
c. Counter-top mounted, behind sink.
d. Control-Valve Actuator: Swing down from storage position.
e. Construction: Chrome plated brass
a. Bradley Corporation.
b. Encon Safety Products.
c. Guardian Equipment Co.
d. Haws Corporation.
e. Speakman Company.
f. WaterSaver Faucet Co.
2. Description: Plumbed, freestanding, emergency shower and eye/face wash equipment.
3. Description: Plumbed, accessible, eyewash bowl, push paddle, and pull rod actuator.
a. Unit Supply: 1-1/4 inch minimum
b. Unit Drain: Outlet at side near bottom. Extend over to floor drain.
c. Shower Capacity: Deliver potable water at rate not less than 20 gpm for at least
15 minutes.
1) Control-Valve Actuator: Pull rod.
2) Shower Head: 8 inch minimum diameter, stainless steel.
d. Eyewash Equipment: With capacity to deliver tepid water at rate not less than 0.4
gpm for at least 15 minutes.
1) Control-Valve Actuator: Paddle.
2) Receptor: Stainless Steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before plumbed emergency plumbing fixture installation.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Assemble emergency plumbing fixture piping, fittings, control valves, and other components.
D. Install shutoff valves in water-supply piping to fixtures. Use ball, gate, or globe valve if
specific type valve is not indicated. Install valves chained or locked in open position if
permitted. Install valves in locations where they can easily be reached for operation. Valves
are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
E. Install dielectric fitting in supply piping to fixture if piping and fixture connections are made of
different metals. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."
G. Install trap and waste to wall on drain outlet of fixture receptors that are indicated to be directly
connected to drainage system.
H. Install indirect waste piping to wall on drain outlet of fixture receptors that are indicated to be
indirectly connected to drainage system. Drainage piping is specified in Division 22 Section
"Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."
I. Install escutcheons on piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations.
Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
J. Install equipment nameplates or equipment markers on fixtures and equipment signs on water-
tempering equipment. Identification materials are specified in Division 22 Section
"Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect cold-water-supply piping to plumbed emergency plumbing fixtures not having water-
tempering equipment.
C. Connect hot and cold water supply piping to hot and cold water-tempering equipment. Connect
output from water-tempering equipment to emergency plumbing fixtures.
D. Directly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors with trapped drain outlet to sanitary
drainage and vent piping.
E. Indirectly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors without trapped drain outlet to
sanitary drainage piping.
A. Mechanical-Component Testing: After plumbing connections have been made, test for
compliance with requirements. Verify ability to achieve indicated capacities and temperatures.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements
are made.
3.5 ADJUSTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following drinking fountains and water coolers and related
components:
1. Drinking water coolers.
2. Fixture supports.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each fixture indicated. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
D. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water Coolers" for style
classifications.
E. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI 1010, "Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-
Water Coolers," for water coolers and with ARI's "Directory of Certified Drinking Water
Coolers" for type and style classifications.
F. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of
Refrigerants," for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant, unless
otherwise indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Description: ASME A112.6.1M, water cooler carriers. Include vertical, steel uprights with feet
and tie rods and bearing plates with mounting studs matching fixture to be supported.
1. Supports for Accessible Fixtures: Include rectangular, vertical, steel uprights instead of
steel pipe uprights.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before fixture installation. Verify that sizes and locations of piping and types of
supports match those indicated.
B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
B. Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view. Plain
copper tube, fittings, and valves may be used in concealed locations.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install fixtures level and plumb. For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Use ball valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached
for operation. Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing
Piping."
C. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage
system.
D. Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern
escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Escutcheons are specified in
Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
E. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant,
silicone sealant, as approved by A/E (white). Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are
specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
A. Water Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with
requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
1. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.
3.7 CLEANING
A. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt,
and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. Piping Material Certification: Signed by Installer certifying that medical compressed-air piping
materials comply with NFPA 99 requirements.
E. Brazing certificates.
A. Installer Qualifications:
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the vacuum piping testing indicated, that is a member of the Medical Gas
Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Qualify testing personnel according to ASSE Standard #6020 for inspectors and
ASSE Standard #6030 for verifiers.
C. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications," or AWS B2.2, "Standard for Brazing
Procedure and Performance Qualification."
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
E. ASME Compliance:
1. Comply with ASME B31.1, "Power Piping," for laboratory compressed-air piping
operating at more than 150 psig.
2. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for laboratory compressed-air
piping operating at 150 psig or less.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate compressed-air service connections with other service connections. Vacuum service
connections are specified in Division 22 Section "Vacuum Piping for Laboratory and
Healthcare Facilities."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Copper Medical Gas Tube: ASTM B 819, Types K and L, seamless, drawn temper, that has
been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for medical gas service or according to CGA G-
4.1 for oxygen service. Include standard color marking "AIR" in green for Type K tube and in
blue for Type L tube.
1. General Requirements for Copper Fittings: Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged
for oxygen service according to CGA G-4.1.
2. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type or MSS SP-73, with
dimensions for brazed joints.
3. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123, wrought copper or cast-copper alloy.
A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-
duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 VALVES
A. General Requirements for Valves: Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged according to
CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service.
D. Zone Valves: MSS SP-110, 3-piece-body, brass or bronze ball valve with gage.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
F. Pressure Regulators: Bronze body and trim; spring-loaded, diaphragm-operated relieving type;
manual pressure-setting adjustment; rated for 250-psig minimum inlet pressure; and capable of
controlling delivered air pressure within 0.5 psig for each 10-psig inlet pressure.
G. Automatic Drain Valves: Stainless-steel body and internal parts, rated for 200-psig minimum
working pressure, capable of automatic discharge of collected condensate. Include mounting
bracket where wall mounting is indicated.
7. Unaflex.
8. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan Co.
B. Description: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to
inner tubing.
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
2.6 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General Requirements for Escutcheons: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor
plates, with ID to closely fit around pipe and tube and OD that completely covers opening.
E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated
finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: With concealed-rivet hinge, set screw or spring clips,
and chrome-plated finish.
2.7 NITROGEN
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning of Medical Gas Tubing: If manufacturer-cleaned and -capped fittings or tubing are
not available or if precleaned fittings or tubing must be recleaned because of exposure, have
supplier or separate agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction perform the following
procedures:
1. Clean medical gas tube and fittings, valves, gages, and other components of oil, grease,
and other readily oxidizable materials as required for oxygen service according to
CGA G-4.1, "Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service."
2. Wash medical gas tubing and components in hot, alkaline-cleaner-water solution of
sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate in proportion of 1 lb of chemical to 3 gal. of
water.
B. Laboratory Air Piping: Use one of the following piping materials for each size range:
1. NPS 4 and Smaller: Type L, copper medical gas tube; wrought-copper fittings; and
brazed joints.
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
compressed-air piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, air-compressor sizing, and other design considerations.
Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
F. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
G. Install air and drain piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow.
H. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than
system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
J. Install branch connections to compressed-air mains from top of main. Provide drain leg and
drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.
K. Install thermometer and pressure gage on discharge piping from each air compressor and on
each receiver. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for
Plumbing Piping."
Q. Connect compressed-air piping to air compressors and to compressed-air outlets and equipment
requiring compressed-air service.
R. Install unions in copper compressed-air tubing adjacent to each valve and at final connection to
each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.
A. Install shutoff valve at each connection to and from compressed-air equipment and specialties.
B. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of compressed-air flow from compressed-air
equipment.
C. Install safety valves on compressed-air receivers where required by NFPA 99 and where
recommended by specialty manufacturers.
E. Install automatic drain valves on equipment, specialties, and piping with drain connection. Run
drain piping to floor drain so contents spill over or into it.
F. Install flexible pipe connectors in discharge piping and in inlet air piping from remote air-inlet
filter of each air compressor.
A. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside of cleaned tubing and fittings before assembly.
C. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"
"Brazed Joints" Chapter. Continuously purge joint with oil-free dry nitrogen during brazing.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to tube end. Join copper tube and
fittings according to ASTM B 828.
B. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
C. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof
slabs using galvanized-steel pipe.
1. Wall Penetrations: Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
E. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
F. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements
in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.
b. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast
brass with polished chrome-plated finish, stamped steel with set screw, stamped
steel with set screw or spring clips, or stamped steel with spring clips.
c. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with
polished chrome-plated finish, stamped steel with set screw, stamped steel with set
screw or spring clips, or stamped steel with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished
chrome-plated finish, stamped steel with set screw, stamped steel with set screw or
spring clips, or stamped steel with spring clips.
e. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-
plated finish, stamped steel with set screw, stamped steel with set screw or spring
clips, or stamped steel with spring clips.
A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices.
1. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers.
E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
A. Install identifying labels and devices for nonmedical laboratory compressed-air piping, valves,
and specialties. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment."
A. Testing Agency: Engage qualified testing agency to perform field tests and inspections of
compressed-air piping in nonmedical laboratory facilities and prepare test reports.
B. Perform tests and inspections of compressed-air piping in nonmedical laboratory facilities and
prepare test reports.
1. Piping Leak Tests for Compressed-Air Piping: Test new and modified parts of existing
piping. Cap and fill general-service compressed-air piping with oil-free dry nitrogen to
pressure of 50 psig above system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig. Isolate
test source and let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required,
to test pressure; hold for two hours with no drop in pressure.
2. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
3. Inspect filters and pressure regulators for proper operation.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Actual Air: Air delivered at air-compressor outlet. Flow rate is compressed air delivered and
measured in acfm.
C. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or
for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.
D. Standard Air: Free air at 68 deg F and 1 atmosphere before compression or expansion and
measured in scfm.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For compressed-air equipment to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications:
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the compressed-air equipment testing indicated, that is a member of the
Medical Gas Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL and that is acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Qualify testing personnel according to ASSE 6020 for inspectors and ASSE 6030 for
verifiers.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label receivers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Control Panels: Automatic control station with load control and protection functions. Comply
with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
C. Receivers: Steel tank constructed according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, Division 1.
D. Mounting Frame: Fabricate base and attachment to pressure vessel with reinforcement strong
enough to resist packaged equipment movement during a seismic event when base is anchored
to building structure.
1. Atlas Copco.
2. California Air Tools.
3. CompAir, Ltd.
4. Ingersoll-Rand.
5. Gardner Denver.
6. Gardner Denver; Champion Pneumatic.
7. Quincy Compressor.
C. Air Compressor(s): Single- or Multi-stage, oil-free, scroll type of construction that prohibits oil
from entering compression chamber.
3. Air/Coolant Receiver and Separation System: 150-psig-rated steel tank with ASME
safety valve, coolant-level gage, multistage air-coolant separator element, minimum
pressure valve, blowdown valve, discharge check valve, coolant stop valve, full-flow
coolant filter, and thermal-bypass valve.
4. Capacity Control: Capacity modulation between 0 and 100 percent air delivery, with
operating pressures between 50 and 100 psig. Include necessary control to hold constant
pressure. When air demand is zero, unload compressor by using pressure switch and
blowdown valve.
5. Mounting: Freestanding.
D. Sound-attenuation enclosure.
2.3 MOTORS
A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 22 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical
devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean compressed-air equipment, accessories, and components that have not been cleaned for
oxygen service and sealed or that are furnished unsuitable for laboratory air applications,
according to CGA G-4.1, "Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for water-supply piping specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic
Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Comply with requirements for drain piping specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste
and Vent Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
3. Equipment Verification: Comply with requirements in ASSE 6020, ASSE 6030, and
NFPA 99 for verification of medical compressed-air equipment.
4. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
5. Testing Certification: Certify that specified tests, inspections, and procedures have been
performed and certify report results. Include the following:
a. Inspections performed.
b. Procedures, materials, and gases used.
c. Test methods used.
d. Results of tests.
E. Components will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
6. Check safety valves for correct settings. Ensure that settings are higher than air-
compressor discharge pressure but not higher than rating of system components.
7. Check for proper seismic restraints.
8. Drain receiver tanks.
9. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
10. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Division 11 Section "Laboratory Fume Hoods" for vacuum outlets in laboratory fume
hoods.
2. Division 12 Section "Laboratory Casework" for vacuum outlets in casework.
3. Division 22 Section "Vacuum Equipment for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities" for
laboratory vacuum producers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. Piping Material Certification: Signed by Installer certifying that medical vacuum piping
materials comply with NFPA 99 requirements.
E. Brazing certificates.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For vacuum piping specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Medical Vacuum Piping Systems for Laboratory Facilities: Qualify installers according
to ASSE Standard #6010.
2. Extruded-Tee Outlet Procedure: Qualify operators according to training provided by T-
DRILL Industries Inc., for making branch outlets.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the vacuum piping testing indicated, that is a member of the Medical Gas
Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Qualify testing personnel according to ASSE Standard #6020 for inspectors and
ASSE Standard #6030 for verifiers.
C. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications," or AWS B2.2, "Standard for Brazing
Procedure and Performance Qualification."
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
E. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for vacuum piping in laboratory
facilities.
F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 99, "Health Care Facilities," for medical vacuum
system materials and installation in healthcare facilities.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate medical vacuum service connections with other service connections. Medical
compressed-air service connections are specified in Division 22 Section "Compressed-Air
Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Copper Medical Gas Tube: ASTM B 819, Type L, seamless, drawn temper that has been
manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for medical gas service or according to CGA G-4.1
for oxygen service. Include standard color marking "VAC." in blue.
1. General Requirements for Copper Fittings: Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged
for oxygen service according to CGA G-4.1.
2. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type or MSS SP-73, with
dimensions for brazed joints.
3. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123, wrought copper or cast-copper alloy.
C. Extruded-Tee Outlets: ASTM F 2014 procedure for making branch outlets in copper tube.
A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-
duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 VALVES
A. General Requirements for Valves: Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged according to
CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service.
1. Exception: Factory cleaning and bagging are not required for valves for WAGD service.
D. Zone Valves: MSS SP-110, 3-piece-body, brass or bronze ball valve with gage.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
B. Description: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to
inner tubing.
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
2.6 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General Requirements for Escutcheons: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor
plates, with ID to closely fit around pipe and tube and OD that completely covers opening.
E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated
finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: With concealed-rivet hinge, set screw or spring clips,
and chrome-plated finish.
2.7 NITROGEN
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning of Medical Gas Tubing: If manufacturer-cleaned and -capped fittings or tubing are
not available or if precleaned fittings or tubing must be recleaned because of exposure, have
supplier or separate agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction perform the following
procedures:
1. Clean medical gas tube and fittings, valves, gages, and other components of oil, grease,
and other readily oxidizable materials as required for oxygen service according to
CGA G-4.1, "Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service."
2. Wash medical gas tubing and components in hot, alkaline-cleaner-water solution of
sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate in proportion of 1 lb of chemical to 3 gal. of
water.
B. Nonhealthcare Laboratory Low Vacuum Piping: Use one of the following piping materials for
each size range:
1. NPS 4 and Smaller: Type L, copper medical gas tube; wrought-copper fittings; and
brazed joints.
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of vacuum
piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, air-compressor sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
F. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
G. Install vacuum and drain piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow.
H. Install nipples, unions, and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher
than piping pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
I. Install eccentric reducers, if available, where vacuum piping is reduced in direction of flow,
with bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush.
J. Provide drain leg and drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.
K. Install thermometer and vacuum gage on inlet piping to each vacuum producer and on each
receiver and separator. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages
for Plumbing Piping."
N. Install fittings for changes in direction and for branch connections. Extruded-tee branch outlets
in copper tubing may be made where specified.
O. Install medical vacuum piping to medical vacuum service connections specified in this Section
and to equipment specified in other Sections requiring medical vacuum service.
P. Install medical vacuum service connections recessed in walls. Attach roughing-in assembly to
substrate; attach finishing assembly to roughing-in assembly.
Q. Connect vacuum piping to vacuum producers and to equipment requiring vacuum service.
R. Install unions, in copper vacuum tubing adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each
piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.
A. Valves for Copper Vacuum Tubing: Use copper alloy ball and bronze check types.
A. Install shutoff valve at each connection to and from vacuum equipment and specialties.
C. Install safety valves on vacuum receivers, where required by NFPA 99, and where
recommended by specialty manufacturers.
D. Install automatic drain valves on equipment, specialties, and piping with drain connection. Run
drain piping to floor drain, so contents spill over or into it.
E. Install flexible pipe connectors in suction inlet piping to each vacuum producer.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside of cleaned tubing and fittings before assembly.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
E. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"
"Brazed Joints" Chapter. Continuously purge joint with oil-free dry nitrogen during brazing.
F. Extruded-Tee Outlets: Form branches in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014, with tools
recommended by procedure manufacture.
G. Flanged Joints:
1. Copper Tubing: Install flange on copper tubes. Use pipe-flange gasket between flanges.
Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure.
B. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
C. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof
slabs using galvanized-steel pipe.
1. Wall Penetrations: Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
E. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
F. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements
in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.
b. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast
brass with polished chrome-plated finish, stamped steel with set screw, stamped
steel with set screw or spring clips, or stamped steel with spring clips.
c. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with
polished chrome-plated finish, stamped steel with set screw, stamped steel with set
screw or spring clips, or stamped steel with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished
chrome-plated finish, stamped steel with set screw, stamped steel with set screw or
spring clips, or stamped steel with spring clips.
e. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-
plated finish, stamped steel with set screw, stamped steel with set screw or spring
clips, or stamped steel with spring clips.
A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices.
1. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers.
E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
A. Install identifying labels and devices for laboratory vacuum piping, valves, and specialties.
Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
A. Testing Agency: Engage qualified testing agency to perform field tests and inspections of
vacuum piping in nonmedical laboratory facilities.
1. Piping Leak Tests for Vacuum Piping: Test new and modified parts of existing piping.
Cap and fill vacuum piping with oil-free, dry nitrogen. Isolate test source and let stand
for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required, to test pressure; hold
for two hours with no drop in pressure.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Packaged, oil-sealed, rotary, sliding-vane vacuum pumps.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Actual Air: Air delivered at vacuum producer inlet. Flow rate is air measured in expanded cfm.
C. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or
for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.
D. Standard Air: Free air at 68 deg F and 1 atmosphere before compression or expansion and
measured in scfm.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For vacuum equipment to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications:
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the vacuum equipment testing indicated, that is a member of the Medical
Gas Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1. Qualify testing personnel according to ASSE 6020 for inspectors and ASSE 6030 for
verifiers.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label receivers and separators to comply with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Control Panels: Automatic control station with load control and protection functions. Comply
with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
C. Receivers: Steel tank constructed according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section VIII, Division 1; bearing appropriate code symbols.
1. Atlas Copco.
2. Allied Healthcare Products, Inc.; Chemetron Div.
3. Allied Healthcare Products, Inc.; Oxequip Health Industries.
4. BeaconMedaes.
5. Becker Pumps Corp.
6. EMSE Corporation.
7. Gast Manufacturing Inc.
8. Rietschle Thomas Hanover, Inc.
9. Squire-Cogswell/Aeros Instruments, Inc.
10. Travaini Pumps USA, Inc.
11. Tri-Tech Medical.
12. Tuthill Corporation; Tuthill Vacuum & Blower Systems.
2.3 MOTORS
A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 22 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical
devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean vacuum equipment, accessories, and components that have not been cleaned for oxygen
service and sealed or that are furnished unsuitable for laboratory vacuum applications,
according to CGA G4.1, "Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen Service."
A. Equipment Mounting: Install vacuum producers on concrete bases using vibration isolators as
recommended by unit manufacturer. Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in
Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for water-supply piping specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic
Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Comply with requirements for drain piping specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste
and Vent Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Comply with requirements for vacuum piping specified in Division 22 Section "Vacuum Piping
for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,
fittings, and specialties.
E. Connect vacuum piping to vacuum equipment, accessories, and specialties with shutoff valve
and union or flanged connection.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
3. Equipment Verification: Comply with requirements in ASSE 6020, ASSE 6030, and
NFPA 99 for verification of laboratory vacuum equipment.
4. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
5. Testing Certification: Certify that specified tests, inspections, and procedures have been
performed and certify report results. Include the following:
a. Inspections performed.
b. Procedures and materials used.
c. Test methods used.
d. Results of tests.
E. Components will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
B. Verify that vacuum equipment is installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and written
installation requirements in Division 26 Sections.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Above and below ground acid waste and vent piping.
2. Acid neutralization tanks.
B. Delegated Design: Design seismic restraints for aboveground piping, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For chemical-waste specialties and neutralization tanks and
maintenance manuals.
A. Deliver and store piping and specialties with sealing plugs in ends or with end protection.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Neutralization-Tank Limestone: Equal to 200 percent of amount required for tank sump
initial charge. Furnish limestone in 50-lb bags.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACID WASTE AND VENT PIPING – “AW” or “AV” (Below Grade)
A. Acceptable manufactures for acid resistant sanitary waste vent and piping and fittings: Enfield,
Orion, George Fisher, Zurn and Spears schedule 40 polypropylene pipe. Installation and testing
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
1. All piping below grade shall be joined with electric fusion or no hub pipe and fittings.
2. Mechanical joint piping is not acceptable.
2.2 ADIC WASTE AND VENT PIPING – “AW” or “AV” (Above Grade)
A. Acid resistant sanitary waste and vent piping and fittings shall be “PVDF” Polyvinylidene
Fluoride thermoplastic scheduled 40 drainage pipe and fittings rated and UL listed for
installation in return air plenums and through fire walls per UL 723 mechanical joint.
Applicable testing includes ASTM D 635. UL 94, ASTM E119, ASTM E814, ASTM E84, and
ASTM 2843.
B. Polypropylene, Schedule 40, mechanical or glued joint pipe and fittings, may be used above
floor locations outside of the return air plenums and outside of concealed spaces, in these
spaces, provide electric fusion or no hub pipe and fitting connections. (Refer to Drawings for
return air plenum locations.)
A. Couplings: Assemblies with combination of clamps, gaskets, sleeves, and threaded or flanged
parts; compatible with piping and system liquid; and made by piping manufacturer for joining
system piping.
B. Adapters and Transition Fittings: Assemblies with combination of clamps, couplings, adapters,
gaskets, and threaded or flanged parts; compatible with piping and system liquid; and made for
joining different piping materials.
C. Flanges: Assemblies of companion flanges and gaskets complying with ASME B16.21 and
compatible with system liquid, and bolts and nuts.
2.4 ACID NEUTRALIZATION TANKS – Refer to the plumbing drawings for design basis model
number and capacity information.
e. Spears
f. Zurn
g. RFC Plastics
2. Description: Corrosion-resistant plastic materials; with removable, gastight cover;
interior, sidewall, dip-tube inlet; vent; and threaded or flanged, sidewall pipe connections.
a. Material: ASTM D 4101, PP.
b. Tank Capacity: Refer to Plumbing Equipment Schedule on Plumbing Drawings
for this information.
c. Dip Tube: On outlet pipe instead of inlet pipe.
d. Extension: PP.
e. Limestone: Chips or lumps, with more than 90 percent calcium carbonate content
and 1- to 3-inch diameter.
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Cast Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure
pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc-coated, plain
ends.
B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or stainless steel.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to
sealing elements.
2.7 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General Requirements for Escutcheons: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor
plates, with ID to closely fit around pipe and tube and OD that completely covers opening.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching,
and backfilling.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or MSS Type 42, riser clamps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment" for installation of supports.
D. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.
G. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PVDF piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1. All Sizes: Install continuous support for piping with liquid waste at temperatures above
140 deg F.
2. NPS 1/2 inch and Smaller: 30 inches with 3/8 inch rod.
3. NPS 3/4 inch to NPS 1-1/2 inch: 36 inches with 3/8 inch rod.
4. NPS 2: 36 inches with 3/8 inch rod.
5. NPS 2-1/2 inch and NPS 3: 42 inches with 1/2 inch rod.
6. NPS 4 inch and NPS 5 inch: 48 inches with 5/8 inch rod.
7. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4 inch rod.
H. Install supports for vertical PVDF piping NPS 1-1/2 inch every 48 inchesnd NPS 2 inch and
larger every 72 inches.
I. Install hangers for borosilicate glass piping with types and spacing per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
B. Make connections to existing piping so finished Work complies as nearly as practical with
requirements specified for new Work.
C. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for acid waste and vent piping branch
connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and
encase entire wye fitting plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-
day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
D. Protect existing piping to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making connections.
Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.
A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment" for labeling of equipment and piping.
A. Inspect interior of sewerage piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has
occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place and again at completion
of Project.
1. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between inspection
points.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or
cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Hydrostatic Tests for Drainage Piping:
1) Close openings in system and fill with water.
2) Purge air and refill with water.
3) Disconnect water supply.
4) Test and inspect joints for leaks.
2. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
3. Submit separate reports for each test.
B. Replace leaking sewerage piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within
allowances specified.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Use procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if not prescribed, use
procedures described below:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Clean piping by flushing with potable water.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Welding certificates.
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
C. Sheet metal accessories shall include air distribution outlets, air filters, sound attenuators and
ductwork accessories.
D. Store all insulation, ductwork, and sheet metal accessories indoors, or in a storage trailer. Do
not store outdoors. Any insulation, ductwork, or accessories stored outdoors will be rejected,
and shall be removed from the project site by the Contractor.
F. Do not run air systems prior to ductwork being insulated, in order to prevent condensation from
occurring on the ductwork.
H. Air handling units shall be shipped fully crated or shrink-wrapped from the factory for
protection of the equipment from the weather.
I. Equipment shall be stored at the site indoors, or outdoors on pallets. Do not set units directly on
grade.
J. Equipment shall be fully protected from moisture while being stored. Use heavy tarps with tie
down straps or other means to protect the units from moisture and outdoor weather conditions.
K. All air side devices such as air handling units, VAV terminals, coils, fans, terminal heating
devices, ductwork and ductwork accessories shall be shipped, received and stored in such a
manner that moisture is not allowed to be exposed to any portion of the equipment. Any
equipment that is found to have or have had moisture present shall be removed from the job site
and replaced.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for HVAC installations.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors in walls, ceilings, and floors for HVAC
items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors for
building components are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." Access
doors for ductwork are specified in Section 233300 – Air Duct Accessories.
D. Coordinate with the Division 26 Contractor regarding the location of all Switchboards and
Switchgear. Piping shall not be run over or near any Switchboard or Switchgear. Piping or
ductwork foreign to the electrical installation whose malfunction would endanger the operation
of the electrical system shall not be routed through the Main Electrical Room, shall not be
routed through the Main Emergency Equipment Room, and shall not be routed through the
Emergency Generator Room. The exception would be statutorily required fire protection
piping.
1. Piping should be avoided over any wall mounted electrical panel with a voltage of 120
volts or higher. Obtain written approval from Owners Representative before routing
piping above an electrical panel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face
or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's
Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-
cement-joint end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Eslon Thermoplastics.
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include
brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
1. Manufacturers:
a. NIBCO INC.
b. NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div.
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to
sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.7 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
2.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed or exposed-rivet hinge, set screw or spring
clips, and chrome-plated finish.
H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.9 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping in general location
as indicated in Contract Documents unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination
Drawings. Minor offsets, lowering or raising the piping shall be routed to accommodate field
conditions at no expense to the project.
C. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated
finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-
brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type
with polished chrome-plated finish.
g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel
type and set screw.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
polished chrome-plated finish.
i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with
hinge and set screw.
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.
k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw.
l. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate
type.
2. Existing Piping: Use the following:
a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.
b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet
hinge and spring clips.
c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-
brass type with chrome-plated finish.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate,
stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips.
e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass
type with chrome-plated finish.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel
type with concealed hinge and set screw.
g. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with
polished chrome-plated finish.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with
concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.
i. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type.
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with set screw
or spring clips.
k. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate
type.
E. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
F. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
G. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve
for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
H. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
I. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07
Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
E. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
F. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to
pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Install ductwork according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying
ductwork systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
ductwork systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size ductwork and
calculate friction loss, expansion, fan sizing, and other design considerations. Install ductwork
in general location as indicated in Contract Documents unless deviations to layout are approved
on Coordination Drawings. Minor offsets, lowering or raising the ductwork shall be routed to
accommodate field conditions at no expense to the project.
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.6 PAINTING
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor
HVAC materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
3.10 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
base plates, and anchors.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in
HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above
sea level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads
at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,
and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
I. Insulation: Class F.
K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor
frame sizes smaller than 324T.
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection
requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,
suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and
tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by
pulse-width modulated inverters.
2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected
motors.
5. All motors driven by a variable frequency controller shall include a maintenance free,
circumferential, conductive microfiber shaft grounding ring (AEGIS-SGR) to discharge
shaft currents to ground.
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and
equipment:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Equipment supports.
5. Structural roof curbs.
6. Pipe curbs.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval
from authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Manufacturers:
1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.
2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports.
3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
5. Empire Industries, Inc.
6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
8. Grinnell Corp.
9. GS Metals Corp.
10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
12. PHS Industries, Inc.
13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
14. Tolco Inc.
E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
B. Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
3. GS Metals Corp.
4. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
5. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
6. Tolco Inc.
7. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
A. Roof curbs with vibration isolators and wind or seismic restraints are specified in Division 23
Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment”.
C. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factory-
installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards.
1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
a. Materials: ASTM C1071, Type I or II.
b. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches.
2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal
surface of curb.
a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C916, Type I.
b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner
when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in
cabinet.
c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a
temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric
depending on service air velocity.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C916, Type I.
e. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer’s standard, removable, fabricated of same
metal and finish as equipment support. Coordinate with roofing contractor.
f. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to
conform to roof profile.
g. Fabricate equipment supports to minimum height of 12 inches unless otherwise
indicated.
h. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate each support with height
to accommodate roof slope so that tops of supports are level with each other.
Equip supports with water diverters or crickets on sides that obstruct water flow.
A. Pipe curb shall consist of a heavy gauge galvanized steel roof curb, unitized construction, with
integral base plate, 3 pound density insulation, and 2 by 2 nailer. Curb shall be covered with a
thermoplastic cover, fastening screws, graduated step boots with stainless steel adjustable
clamps.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes,
NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-
center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For
suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
11. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel
pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with
steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
16. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes,
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion
support and cast-iron floor flange.
17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2
rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if
small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to
NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition
to expansion and contraction.
G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
6. Swivel connections shall be utilized for attachment to sloping structure. Threaded rod
shall not be bent.
I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed
1-1/4 inches.
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress
from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include
auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These
supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to permit
freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger
and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten
inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building
services piping) are not exceeded.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
SECTION 230548 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for HVAC piping and
equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and
seismic restraints.
C. Welding certificates.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-mounting systems to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are
more stringent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
C. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert
in compression.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced
cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support
spring coil.
C. Lower Support Assembly: Formed sheet-metal section containing adjustable and removable
steel springs that support upper frame. Upper frame shall provide continuous support for
equipment and shall be captive to resiliently resist wind forces. Lower support assembly shall
have a means for attaching to building structure and a wood nailer for attaching roof materials,
and shall be insulated with a minimum of 2 inches of rigid, glass-fiber insulation on inside of
assembly.
D. Spring Isolators: Adjustable, restrained spring isolators shall be mounted on 1/4-inch- thick,
elastomeric vibration isolation pads and shall have access ports, for level adjustment, with
removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall be located so they are
accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the installation without interfering with
the integrity of the roof.
1. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with wind
restraint.
a. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops and adjustable equipment
mounting and leveling bolt.
b. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of
the spring at rated load.
c. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
d. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
e. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
2. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading
over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory
cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.
a. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant.
E. Snubber Bushings: All-directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch thick.
F. Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to upper support
frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and counterflashed over
roof materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation devices for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof
curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
3.4 ADJUSTING
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during
normal operation.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Duct labels.
5. Valve tags.
6. Warning tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.4 COORDINATION
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8
inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2
by 3/4 inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2
inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal
lettering.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
instructions.
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate
both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
C. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2
by 3/4 inch.
D. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2
inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal
lettering.
E. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
F. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-
inch numbers.
1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped
holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or
space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
B. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction, may be
provided instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1
inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of
required identification.
C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of
50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering
hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use
fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
1. Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
b. Variable-air-volume systems.
c. Exhaust systems.
2. Laboratory fume hood airflow balancing.
3. Exhaust hood airflow balancing.
4. Space pressurization testing and adjusting.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce
fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and
terminals, according to indicated quantities.
C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and
ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors,
and other pollutants.
D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high
air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn
from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
I. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a
closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
J. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause
reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
K. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a
fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was
performance tested.
M. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the
distribution system.
O. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting TAB procedures.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on
approved forms certified by TAB firm.
A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB.
B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the
following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified
and referenced in this Specification.
C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and
Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems," NEBB's "Procedural Standards
for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," or SMACNA's "HVAC
Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
E. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently
if required by instrument manufacturer.
1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the
name of party performing instrument calibration.
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to
support and assist TAB activities.
B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
1.8 WARRANTY
B. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in
completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the
Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions:
1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract
Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation
limits.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data including fan curves. Relate performance data to Project
conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted
conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect
factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions
different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To
calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and
Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5
and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.
H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as flow-control devices and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their
locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.
I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased,
belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
K. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe
penetrations and other holes are sealed.
M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
N. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Conditioning Systems", NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
of Environmental Systems", or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing" and this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum
extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing,
close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore
vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.
C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-
control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
D. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers,
through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel
must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical
connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full
heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required
brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors
and the dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure.
2. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressure versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
3. Obtain approval from A/E for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated
speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections
to accommodate fan-speed changes.
4. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full
heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required
brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
D. Adjust air devices for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated
values. Make adjustments using volume dampers.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper
operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers,
and nameplate data.
A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic
temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive
eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature
settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
A. Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each kitchen hood. For kitchen hoods designed with
integral makeup air, measure and adjust the exhaust and makeup airflow. Measure airflow by
duct Pitot-tube traverse. If a duct Pitot-tube traverse is not possible, provide an explanation in
the report of the reason(s) why and also the reason why the method used was chosen.
1. Install welded test ports in the sides of the exhaust duct for the duct Pitot-tube traverse.
Install each test port with a threaded cap that is liquid tight.
C. Visually inspect the hood exhaust duct throughout its entire length in compliance with
authorities having jurisdiction. Begin at the hood connection and end at the point it discharges
outdoors. Report findings.
1. Check duct slopes as required.
2. Verify that duct access is installed as required.
3. Verify that point of termination is as required.
4. Verify that duct air velocity is within the range required.
5. Verify that duct is within a fire-rated enclosure.
D. Report deficiencies.
A. Before performing laboratory fume hood testing, measure, adjust and record the supply airflow
and airflow patterns of each supply air outlet that is located in the same room as the hood.
Adjust the air outlet flow pattern to minimize turbulence and to achieve the desired airflow
patterns at the face and inside the hood. Verify that adequate makeup air is available to achieve
the indicated flow of the hood.
B. Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each laboratory fume hood by duct Pitot-tube traverse
with the laboratory fume hood sash in the design open position.
1. For laboratory fume hoods installed in variable exhaust systems, measure, adjust, and
record the hood exhaust airflow at maximum and at minimum airflow conditions.
2. For laboratory fume hoods designed with integral makeup air, measure, adjust, and
record the exhaust and makeup airflow.
C. For laboratory fume hoods that are connected to centralized exhaust systems using automatic
dampers, adjust the damper controller to obtain the indicated exhaust airflow.
A. Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each exhaust hood. Measure airflow by duct Pitot-
tube traverse. If a duct Pitot-tube traverse is not possible, explain why, in the report, and
explain the test method used.
A. Before testing for space pressurization, observe the space to verify the integrity of the space
boundaries. Verify that windows and doors are closed and applicable safing, gaskets, and
sealants are installed. Report deficiencies and postpone testing until after the reported
deficiencies are corrected.
B. Measure, adjust, and record the pressurization of each room, each zone, and each building by
adjusting the supply, return, and exhaust airflows to achieve the indicated conditions.
C. Measure space pressure differential where pressure is used as the design criteria, and measure
airflow differential where differential airflow is used as the design criteria for space
pressurization.
1. For pressure measurements, measure and record the pressure difference between the
intended spaces at the door with all doors in the space closed. Record the high-pressure
side, low-pressure side, and pressure difference between each adjacent space.
2. For applications with cascading levels of space pressurization, begin in the most critical
space and work to the least critical space.
3. Test room pressurization first, then zones, and finish with building pressurization.
D. To achieve indicated pressurization, set the supply airflow to the indicated conditions and adjust
the exhaust and return airflow to achieve the indicated pressure or airflow difference.
E. For spaces with pressurization being monitored and controlled automatically, observe and adjust
the controls to achieve the desired set point.
1. Compare the values of the measurements taken to the measured values of the control
system instruments and report findings.
2. Check the repeatability of the controls by successive tests designed to temporarily alter
the ability to achieve space pressurization. Test overpressurization and
underpressurization, and observe and report on the system's ability to revert to the set
point.
3. For spaces served by variable-air-volume supply and exhaust systems, measure space
pressurization at indicated airflow and minimum airflow conditions.
F. In spaces that employ multiple modes of operation, such as normal mode and emergency mode
or occupied mode and unoccupied mode, measure, adjust, and record data for each operating
mode.
G. Record indicated conditions and corresponding initial and final measurements. Report
deficiencies.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.
F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and
correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input
changes.
I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates
on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.15 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
3.16 REPORTING
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
1. Fan curves.
2. Manufacturers' test data.
3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings
and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the
final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of TAB firm.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated
values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
g. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
3. Terminal units.
4. Position of balancing devices.
F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
I. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in
central-station air-handling units, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil identification.
d. Capacity in Btuh.
e. Number of stages.
f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz.
g. Rated amperage.
h. Airflow rate in cfm.
i. Face area in sq. ft.
j. Minimum face velocity in fpm.
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Heat output in Btuh.
b. Airflow rate in cfm.
c. Air velocity in fpm.
d. Entering-air temperature in deg F.
e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
f. Voltage at each connection.
g. Amperage for each phase.
J. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
2. Motor Data:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
g. Number of belts, make, and size.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.
K. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data:
a. System and air-handling unit number.
b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.
d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.
e. Duct size in inches.
f. Duct area in sq. ft.
g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm.
h. Indicated velocity in fpm.
i. Actual airflow rate in cfm.
L. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand-alone
refrigerant compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled condensing units, include
the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Unit make and model number.
d. Compressor make.
e. Compressor model and serial numbers.
f. Refrigerant weight in lb.
g. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg F.
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg.
b. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg.
c. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F.
d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F.
e. Condenser entering-water temperature in deg F.
f. Condenser leaving-water temperature in deg F.
g. Condenser-water temperature differential in deg F.
h. Condenser entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig.
i. Condenser leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig.
j. Condenser-water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
k. Control settings.
l. Unloader set points.
m. Low-pressure-cutout set point in psig.
n. High-pressure-cutout set point in psig.
o. Suction pressure in psig.
p. Suction temperature in deg F.
q. Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig.
r. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F.
s. Oil pressure in psig.
t. Oil temperature in deg F.
u. Voltage at each connection.
v. Amperage for each phase.
w. Kilowatt input.
x. Crankcase heater kilowatt.
y. Number of fans.
z. Condenser fan rpm.
aa. Condenser fan airflow rate in cfm.
bb. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.
cc. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection.
dd. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.18 INSPECTIONS
A. Initial Inspection:
1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check
measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance
readings documented in the Final Report.
2. Randomly check the following for each system:
a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.
b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.
c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the
reading to the set point.
d. Measure sound levels at two locations.
e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations.
f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.
B. Final Inspection:
1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing
and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a
final inspection be made by Engineer.
2. TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Owner
and/or A/E.
3. Engineer shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be
rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements
recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour
business day.
4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the
final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as
"FAILED."
5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be
considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report
and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report.
7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall
contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in
accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the
final payment.
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that
balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak
summer and winter conditions.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Cellular glass.
b. Flexible elastomeric.
c. Mineral fiber.
2. Fire-rated insulation systems.
3. Insulating cements.
4. Adhesives.
5. Mastics.
6. Sealants.
7. Factory-applied jackets.
8. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.
9. Field-applied cloths.
10. Field-applied jackets.
11. Tapes.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and
jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct
Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation
application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain
clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and
for space required for maintenance.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be
applied.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,
hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-
Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF.
b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.
2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.
3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1.
6. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
H. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK
jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.
I. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide
insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation with
factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-
Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.
b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.
d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.
f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
B. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is
tested and certified to provide a 2-hour fire rating by a NRTL acceptable to authority having
jurisdiction.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; FlameChek.
b. Johns Manville; Firetemp Wrap.
c. Nelson Firestop Products; Nelson FSB Flameshield Blanket.
d. Thermal Ceramics; FireMaster Duct Wrap.
e. 3M; Fire Barrier Wrap Products.
f. Unifrax Corporation; FyreWrap.
g. Vesuvius; PYROSCAT FP FASTR Duct Wrap.
2.4 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers.
E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
2.5 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient
services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40.
f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-30.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-35.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-25.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 501.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-10.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Encacel.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 60-95/60-96.
c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 570.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-70.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-10.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35-00.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one
of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45.
c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.
f. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
2. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers.
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
5. Color: White.
6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
7. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers.
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing
membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a
rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white or
stucco-embossed aluminum-foil facing.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Polyguard; Alumaguard 60.
2.9 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.
b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.
d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.
b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK.
d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 6.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive.
Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555.
b. Compac Corp.; 130.
c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape.
d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
2. Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 6 mils.
4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.
5. Elongation: 500 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including
fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system
schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gauges, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,
and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the
connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing
sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-
steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation
pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-
discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure
laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c.
Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier
mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-
barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the
insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.
At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6-inch wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-
discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks
and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and
supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.
B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.
3.10 FINISHES
A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket
Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09
painting Sections.
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket
material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
A. Concealed, rectangular, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
B. Concealed, rectangular, round and flat-oval, exhaust-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
C. Concealed, Type I, Commercial, Kitchen Hood Exhaust Duct and Plenum Insulation: Fire-rated
blanket or board; thickness as required to achieve 2-hour fire rating.
D. Exposed, rectangular, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation in unconditioned spaces
shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
E. Exposed, rectangular, round and flat-oval, exhaust-air or relief air duct insulation shall be the
following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the
field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Piping, Exposed:
1. PVC: 30 mils thick.
2. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60 mil thick.
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The temperature control contractor shall furnish and install a web based fully integrated building
automation system with a building graphical user interface that will be comprised of a network of
interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers communicating on an open protocol communication
network residing on/or through the school’s Ethernet system. Anyone with approved password
shall be capable of viewing and changing setpoints through any computer connected to the
schools based on multiple assigned supervisory levels from read only up to full access. Supply
the Engineer and Commissioning Agent passwords to monitor the BAS system. The installing
contractor shall certify, in writing, that the equipment manufacturer has prepared the shop
drawings and that the equipment manufacturer shall certify, in writing, that their company
prepared the shop drawings and that all temperature control equipment was installed under their
direct supervision. System shall be based on BACnet controllers.
B. All temperature control contractor shall furnish and install a fully integrated building automation
system, incorporating direct digital control (DDC) for energy management, equipment
monitoring and control, and subsystems as herein specified. The installation of the control
system shall be performed under the direct supervision of the controls manufacturer with the shop
drawings, flow diagrams, bill of materials, component designation or identification number, and
sequence of operation all bearing the name of the manufacturer. The installing manufacturer
shall certify, in writing, that the shop drawings have been prepared by the equipment
manufacturer and that the equipment manufacturer shall certify, in writing, that the shop
drawings were prepared by their company and that all temperature control equipment was
installed under their direct supervision.
D. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured for the
specified system. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in
actual use of at least 2 years.
3. Providing of control devices, valves, instruments, and the like, as herein specified and as
required to comply with required sequences of automatic control.
4. Providing of wiring for secondary control devices, relay switches, safety low limit
controls, etc., and such interlock wiring required.
5. Furnishing adequate supervision on Work performed for him by others to insure proper
operation and the neatest and best possible arrangement.
6. Testing, maintenance of system as herein specified.
F. The temperature control contractor shall read all other Drawings and Specifications, become
familiar with requirements and scope of the Project, and include such coordination work as may
be required.
G. Associated Services: Cooperate with test and balance contractor performing required tests,
inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as
requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel.
Provide the following:
1. Access to the work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests, inspections, and recalibration.
3. Provide access password in controls system.
A. The software licensing shall have no restrictions on which brand of JACE, Supervisor or System
Programming tools can interact with the system. Station Compatibility must = All and Tool
Compatibility must = ALL.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Control Diagrams
1. Prior to installation and as required in Section 01330, submit to the A/E a complete
system diagram, showing control connections and devices and their connection to other
equipment, together with a clearly written description of the system and an outline of its
function under conditions of operation.
2. Submittals shall be prepared on, or folded to, 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch size and bound in
brochure form.
3. DDC logic and control diagrams shall be included for all equipment and sequences of
control.
4. Upon completion of the Work, provide the complete, accurate, and approved
diagrammatic blueprinted layouts on the automatic control system specified herein and
as installed. Layouts shall show all control equipment including job installation changes,
and the function of each system shall be indicated. Layouts and descriptions shall be
included in the project record set and in the operating and maintenance manuals.
5. Points list to be provided prior to controls programming
B. Equipment
1. Submit shop drawings for the A/E's approval on all, but not limited to, the following
equipment and components indicating arrangements, capacities, range, voltage,
horsepower, construction.
a. Valves
b. Thermostats
c. Relays
d. Panels
e. Gauges
f. Sensors
g. Dampers
h. Switches
i. Pressure Controllers
j. DDC microprocessor
k. Unitary DDC controllers
l. Actuators
D. Controls Graphics
1. Equipment Graphics must have written approval from A/E and Owner. Contractor is
responsible to initiate a meeting with A/E and Owner’s Representative. A minimum of
10 days notice must be given prior to meeting. Items to be addressed include:
a. All major equipment and components controls graphics.
b. Labels of all units, panels, actuators, and sensors to match the as-built drawings.
c. Set-points, alarms, and sensors to match as-built drawings.
d. Adjustable and non-adjustable set-points display.
2. Temperature Control Contractor to submit print-out of proposed graphics for each piece
of equipment for approval. Graphics to be submitted within one month following shop
drawing submittal approval.
A. Submit three copies of record (as-built) documents upon completion of installation for approval
prior to final completion. Each building shall be submitted independently. Submittal shall
consist of :
1. Project Record Drawings. As-built versions of submittal shop drawings provided as
AutoCAD 2004 (or newer) compatible files on optical disk (file format: .DWG, .DXF,
.VSD, or comparable, and .PDF) and 6 prints of each drawing on 11" x 17" paper.
2. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual. Printed, electronic, or online help
documentation of the following:
a. As-built versions of submittal product data.
b. Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of installing contractors and service
representatives for equipment and control systems.
c. Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems: logging on
and off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding
computer control, and changing setpoints and variables.
A. The temperature control contractor shall be responsible for final design drawings, installation of
all control wiring and control devices in accordance with National Electric Code. The
temperature control contractor shall also be responsible for startup and complete checkout of the
systems.
B. This Contractor shall furnish complete drawings, component lists, specification sheets and
sequences of operation to the Engineer for approval before start of installation.
C. After corrections and any job installation changes, 6 sets of full drawings, parts lists, specification
sheets, and operation and maintenance manuals are to be furnished to the mechanical contractor
for delivery to the Owner.
D. All DDC logic diagrams shall be updated as built and included in the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals for the Owner.
E. The temperature control contractor is responsible to use all room numbers developed and
approved by the school district in the development of the temperature control system for this
building.
F. This Contractor shall assist the Test and Balance Contractor as required to complete his work.
A. Duct accessories:
1. Automated dampers
1.9 PRODUCTS NOT FURNISHED OR INSTALLED BUT INTEGRATED WITH THE WORK OF THIS
SECTION
E. Smoke detector supplied by electrical contractor and installed by others. Detector shall
include dry contact for building automation system.
F. Occupancy sensors supplied by electrical contractor. Sensors shall include dry contact for
building automation system. All wiring between VRF units and LACS system to occupancy
sensor by Temperature Control Contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. All approved systems must integrate to an acceptable open protocol, web browser system.
B. The temperature control system shall be bid and installed by an authorized office of the
manufacturer.
E. The temperature control contractor shall have 10 years experience in the installation of the same
size of control system as proposed.
2.2 DAMPERS
A. Dampers intended for automatic control, unless part of a factory made unit, shall be furnished by
the temperature control contractor.
1. Dampers, unless otherwise specified, shall be "low leakage" dampers, and shall be
designed for tight shut-off such that for a 1500 FPM damper, leakage does not exceed 1
percent at 6 inches W.G. Silent closing replaceable butyl and neoprene seals shall be
provided on each blade and on all four sides of the frame. Louver linkage to be
concealed in frame channel outside of the air stream. Bearings to be nylon bushings or to
be oil impregnated sintered iron. Rigid blade construction of not lighter than double #22
gauge and 6 inch maximum blade width; frames to have welded corners and be
diagonally braced.
2. Modulating dampers shall be opposed blade type.
3. Whenever practicable, damper size shall be based on 1000 to 1500 FPM air velocity.
4. Automatic dampers installed in unitary equipment furnished by the Equipment
Manufacture shall be checked for proper size and design by the Temperature Control
Contractor. Should any features of these dampers appear to be unsatisfactory, full details
shall be given to the Engineer, in writing, and suggestions made for necessary
corrections.
A. Damper Operators
1. Damper operators shall be electronic, spring return, low voltage (24VAC), and shall be
properly sized so as to stroke the damper smoothly and efficiently throughout its range.
Actuator response shall be linear in response to sensed load.
a. Damper operators on outside air intakes shall be spring return closed.
2. Operators shall have ample power to overcome damper linkage friction and 200 percent
of the torque required. Provide not less than one damper operator for each 25 square feet
of damper area.
2.4 RELAYS
A. Electric
1. Where required, provide relays for energizing or re-energizing the various branch
circuits, in response to master control panels. Relays shall be UL labeled and sized for
not less than 140 percent of the connected amperage load. Relays shall be rated for the
system voltage and have proper throw and poles.
D. Electric Thermostats
1. Electric thermostats shall be line voltage type of single-pole, single-throw design.
2. Sensing element shall be liquid-filled.
3. Thermostat shall include an accessible adjustment knob for setting temperature setpoints.
4. Covers and base plates shall be of standard design and finish.
F. Sensor Guards
1. Provide guard of almond colored, mounted with back frame to wall using screws where
denoted on drawings with a sub "G".
2. Guards shall be made of durable material to withstand abuse.
I. Humidity Sensors
1. Shall be a "Current Type" humidity transducer. Sensor shall produce a linear 4-20mA
current representing the span of the sensor. This signal shall be produced by the sensor
itself through a current convertor supplied with the sensor.
2. Outdoor air humidity sensor shall be enclosed in a weathertight enclosure and shall be
located in a place to provide best representation of outdoor air relative humidity. Sensor
span shall be 10 to 90 percent relative humidity and shall be accurate within + 2 percent
of span.
3. Space humidity sensor shall be enclosed in a durable enclosure for mounting in interior
zones. Sensor shall have a range of 0 to 100 percent relative humidity and shall be
accurate with + 2 percent of span.
4. Duct humidity sensor shall be a probe type with all wiring enclosed in an electrical box.
Sensor shall have a range of 0 to 100 percent with an accuracy of + 3 percent of span.
B. Provide direct communication between the DDC/BAS system and the variable frequency
controller (VFC). VFC fan control data as well as drive power data (minimum voltage, current,
and frequency) shall be available for data collection and trending at the DDC/BAS operator’s
workstation.
1. The control cabinet/enclosure shall be required to house devices not enclosed as a part of
the DDC building automation system panels. Prewire with internal wiring terminated at
labeled terminal strips. Thermometers and switches shall be mounted on the cover of the
panel. Relays, transformers, and components shall be mounted inside the panel.
Devices, whether interior or exterior, shall be provided with legend plates of engraved
formica or equal. Cabinets shall be located as approved by the A/E or as indicated on
the Drawings.
2. Where two or more control items or accessories (thermostats, thermometer, relay, etc.)
are to be mounted at a single location, such equipment shall be mounted in a suitable
cabinet. Cabinets shall be located as approved by the A/E or indicated on the Drawings.
3. Local type panels need not contain graphic representations or symbols, unless specified
below, but must contain approved nameplates, legends, etc., for each device.
4. Where panels contain any wiring, panels shall be UL approved cubicles.
A. General
1. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall be comprised of a network of
interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers, a computer system, graphical user interface
software, portable operator terminals, printers, network devices and other devices as
specified herein. The installed system shall provide secure password access to all
features, functions and data contained in the overall BAS.
2. The system shall reside on/through the campus Ethernet system.
a. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of
origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 5 seconds for network
connected user interfaces.
b. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of
origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 60 seconds for remote or
dial-up connected user interfaces.
C. Networks
1. The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be either a 10 or 100 Megabits/sec Ethernet
network supporting BACnet, Java, XML, HTTP, and CORBA IIOP for maximum
flexibility for integration of building data with enterprise information systems and
providing support for multiple Network Area Controllers (NACs), user workstations and,
if specified, a local host computer system.
2. Local area network minimum physical and media access requirements:
a. Ethernet; IEEE standard 802.3
b. Cable; 10 Base-T, UTP-8 wire, category 5
c. Minimum throughput; 10 Mbps, with ability to increase to 100 Mbps
D. Network Access
1. Remote Access
a. For Local Area Network installations, provide access to the LAN from a remote
location, via the Internet. The owner shall provide a connection to the Internet
to enable this access via T1 Line or via the customer’s Intranet to a corporate
server providing access to an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Owner agrees to
pay monthly access charges for connection and ISP.
b. Where no Local Area Network exists, FMCS supplier shall provide the
following:
1) 8 Port Ethernet hub (3Com, or equal)
2) Ethernet router (Cisco or equal)
d. Flash memory for long term data backup (If battery backup or flash memory is
not supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte
storage capacity)
e. The NAC must be capable of operation over a temperature range of 0 to 55°C
f. The NAC must be capable of withstanding storage temperatures of between 0
and 70°C
g. The NAC must be capable of operation over a humidity range of 5 to 95% RH,
non-condensing
3. The NAC shall provide multiple user access to the system and support for ODBC or
SQL. A database resident on the NAC shall be an ODBC-compliant database or must
provide an ODBC data access mechanism to read and write data stored within it.
4. The NAC shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall
support a minimum of 16 simultaneous users.
5. Event Alarm Notification and actions
a. The NAC shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and
analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application
specific controllers.
b. The NAC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location
whether connected to a local network or remote via dial-up, telephone
connection, or wide-area network.
c. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and
acknowledgement requirements including but limited to:
1) To alarm
2) Return to normal
3) To fault
d. Provide for the creation of an unlimited number of alarm classes for the purpose
of routing types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc.
e. Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node.
f. Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and /or event counts for
equipment maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count
values with appropriate password control.
6. Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated.
7. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user:
a. Screen message text
b. Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability
to route and email alarms based on:
1) Day of week
2) Time of day
3) Recipient
c. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message.
d. Building graphical display with flashing alarm objects/areas.
e. Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer.
8. The following shall be recorded by the NAC for each alarm (at a minimum):
a. Time and date
b. Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.)
c. Equipment (air handler #, accessway, etc.)
d. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement.
e. Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement.
9. Alarm actions may be initiated by user defined programmable objects created for that
purpose.
10. Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types
or classes of alarms defined by the user.
11. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NAC and/or a server (if configured in the
system) and shall be available for review by the user.
12. Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters.
13. A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be
provided and available for review by the user.
14. An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and
available for review by the user.
G. Audit Log
1. Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities performed on the NAC.
Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive log based
on time or when the log has reached it’s user-defined buffer size. Provide the ability to
archive the log locally (to the NAC), to another NAC on the network, or to a server. For
each log entry, provide the following data:
a. Time and date
b. User ID
c. Change or activity: i.e., Change setpoint, add or delete objects, commands, etc.
2. The GUI shall employ browser-like functionality for ease of navigation. It shall include
a tree view (similar to Windows Explorer) for quick viewing of, and access to, the
hierarchical structure of the database. In addition, menu-pull downs, and toolbars shall
employ buttons, commands and navigation to permit the operator to perform tasks with a
minimum knowledge of the HVAC Control System and basic computing skills. These
shall include, but are not limited to, forward/backward buttons, home button, and a
context sensitive locator line (similar to a URL line), that displays the location and the
selected object identification.
3. Real-Time Displays. The GUI, shall at a minimum, support the following graphical
features and functions:
a. Color graphic floor plan displays for each building, floor and zone controlled as
well as system schematics for each piece of mechanical equipment, including
rooftop units, VRF units, terminal units, unitary equipment, exhaust fans,
laboratory airflow control systems, shall be provided by the temperature control
contractor to optimize system performance analysis and speed alarm
recognition. Rooms shall be color coded on the floor plan. The room color shall
change based on temperature compared to the setpoint.
b. The temperature control contractor is responsible to use all room numbers
developed and approved by the school district in the development of the
temperature control system for this building. The room numbers shall match
room signage.
c. The sequence of operations shall be located as a pull down feature at each piece
of equipment.
d. The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics
and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection or text-based
commands. Dynamic temperature values, flow values and status indication shall
be shown in their actual respective locations and shall automatically update to
represent current conditions without operator intervention.
e. Graphic screens shall be developed using any drawing package capable of
generating a GIF, BMP, or JPG file format. Use of proprietary graphic file
formats shall not be acceptable. In addition to, or in lieu of a graphic
background, the GUI shall support the use of scanned pictures.
f. Graphic screens shall contain objects for text, real-time values, animation, color
spectrum objects or “thermo-graphics”, logs, graphs, HTML or XML document
links, schedule objects, hyperlinks to other URL’s, and links to other graphic
screens.
g. Graphics shall support layering and each graphic object shall be configurable
for assignment to a layer. A minimum of six layers shall be supported.
h. Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set
points shall be accomplished in a graphical manner.
1) Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without
requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.
2) Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring
any keyboard entry from the operator.
i. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the
selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu.
No entry of text shall be required.
2. The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration
that is supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific machine
requirements in terms of processor speed, memory, etc., in order to allow the Web
browser to function with the FMCS, shall not be acceptable.
3. The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics,
schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is
provided by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that
require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be
permitted.
4. The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions:
a. User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized
user attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using Java
authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall
be implemented.
b. Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the
Web browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI
shall be supported by the Web browser interface.
c. HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on
a Web page. HTML editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires
a specific look or format.
d. Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Network Area Controller (NAC),
without requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. Systems that
require graphics storage on each client are not acceptable.
e. Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without
requiring a manual “refresh” of the Web page.
f. User’s shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the
access privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following:
1) Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and
set points in a graphical manner.
a) Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider,
without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.
b) Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without
requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.
2) Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-
clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command
from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required.
3) View logs and charts
4) View and acknowledge alarms
g. The system shall provide the capability to specify a user’s (as determined by the
log-on user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user
to just their defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or
pages in the system shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator.
h. Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to
other locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform
Resource Locator (URL) for the desired link.
M. System Programming
1. The Graphical User Interface software (GUI) shall provide the ability to perform system
programming and graphic display engineering as part of a complete software package.
Access to the programming functions and features of the GUI shall be through password
access as assigned by the system administrator.
2. A library of control, application, and graphic objects shall be provided to enable the
creation of all applications and user interface screens. Applications are to be created by
selecting the desired control objects from the library, dragging or pasting them on the
screen, and linking them together using a built in graphical connection tool. Completed
applications may be stored in the library for future use. Graphical User Interface screens
shall be created in the same fashion. Data for the user displays is obtained by
graphically linking the user display objects to the application objects to provide “real-
time” data updates. Any real-time data value or object property may be connected to
display its current value on a user display. Systems requiring separate software tools or
processes to create applications and user interface display shall not be acceptable.
3. Programming Methods
a. Provide the capability to copy objects from the supplied libraries, or from a
user-defined library to the user’s application. Objects shall be linked by a
graphical linking scheme by dragging a link from one object to another. Object
links will support one-to-one, many-to-one, or one-to-many relationships.
Linked objects shall maintain their connections to other objects regardless of
where they are positioned on the page and shall show link identification for
links to objects on other pages for easy identification. Links will vary in color
depending on the type of link; i.e., internal, external, hardware, etc.
b. Configuration of each object will be done through the object’s property sheet
using fill-in the blank fields, list boxes, and selection buttons. Use of custom
programming, scripting language, or a manufacturer-specific procedural
language for configuration will not be accepted.
c. The software shall provide the ability to view the logic in a monitor mode.
When on-line, the monitor mode shall provide the ability to view the logic in
real time for easy diagnosis of the logic execution. When off-line (debug), the
monitor mode shall allow the user to set values to inputs and monitor the logic
for diagnosing execution before it is applied to the system.
d. All programming shall be done in real-time. Systems requiring the uploading,
editing, and downloading of database objects shall not be allowed.
e. The system shall support object duplication within a customer’s database. An
application, once configured, can be copied and pasted for easy re-use and
duplication. All links, other than to the hardware, shall be maintained during
duplication.
N. Object Libraries
1. A standard library of objects shall be included for development and setup of application
logic, user interface displays, system services, and communication networks.
2. The objects in this library shall be capable of being copied and pasted into the user’s
database and shall be organized according to their function. In addition, the user shall
have the capability to group objects created in their application and store the new
instances of these objects in a user-defined library.
3. In addition to the standard libraries specified here, the supplier of the system shall
maintain an on-line accessible (over the Internet) library, available to all registered users
to provide new or updated objects and applications as they are developed.
4. All control objects shall conform to the control objects specified in the BACnet
specification.
5. The library shall include applications or objects for the following functions, at a
minimum:
a. Scheduling Object. The schedule must conform to the schedule object as
defined in the BACnet specification, providing 7-day plus holiday & temporary
scheduling features and a minimum of 10 on/off events per day. Data entry to
be by graphical sliders to speed creation and selection of on-off events.
b. Calendar Object. . The calendar must conform to the calendar object as defined
in the BACnet specification, providing 12-month calendar features to allow for
holiday or special event data entry. Data entry to be by graphical “point-and-
click” selection. This object must be “linkable” to any or all scheduling objects
for effective event control.
c. Duty Cycling Object. Provide a universal duty cycle object to allow repetitive
on/off time control of equipment as an energy conserving measure. Any
number of these objects may be created to control equipment at varying
intervals
d. Temperature Override Object. Provide a temperature override object that is
capable of overriding equipment turned off by other energy saving programs
(scheduling, duty cycling etc.) to maintain occupant comfort or for equipment
freeze protection.
e. Start-Stop Time Optimization Object. Provide a start-stop time optimization
object to provide the capability of starting equipment just early enough to bring
space conditions to desired conditions by the scheduled occupancy time. Also,
allow equipment to be stopped before the scheduled un-occupancy time just far
enough ahead to take advantage of the building’s “flywheel” effect for energy
savings. Provide automatic tuning of all start / stop time object properties based
on the previous day’s performance.
6. The library shall include control objects for the following functions. All control objects
shall conform to the objects as specified in the BACnet specification.
a. Analog Input Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet
standard for data sharing. Allow high, low and failure limits to be assigned for
alarming. Also, provide a time delay filter property to prevent nuisance alarms
caused by temporary excursions above or below the user defined alarm limits.
b. Analog Output Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet
standard for data sharing.
c. Binary Input Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet
standard for data sharing. The user must be able to specify either input
condition for alarming. This object must also include the capability to record
equipment run-time by counting the amount of time the hardware input is in an
“on” condition. The user must be able to specify either input condition as the
“on” condition.
A. The existing campus temperature control workstation(s) and devices shall be utilized for control
of new systems.
1. Critical alarms shall be reported via e-mail and/or cell phones to the maintenance
department employees.
2. All existing workstations and devices shall include the ability to access the temperature
control system via the Owner’s Ethernet wide area network or the internet. User
interface shall be seamless and the user shall be capable of performing all functions that
can be performed locally.
B. All existing workstations and devices shall be used for command entry, information management,
network alarm management, and data base management functions. All real-time control
functions shall be resident in the standalone DDC panels to facilitate greater fault tolerance and
reliability.
A. Wiring in air plenums shall be open wired UL listed plenum cable or shall be installed in conduit.
B. Conduit shall be 1/2 inch minimum size and shall be furnished and installed by the temperature
control contractor.
C. Concealed wiring and wiring in non-plenum ceiling cavities, which is operating under 100 volts,
may be open wired if in compliance with Article 725, NFPA-70 (NEC). Open wiring shall be
secured with plastic tie wraps to the permanent building structure as approved by the A/E.
E. Wire and conduit not indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications, but required by the
controls supplier, shall be paid for by the Temperature Control Contractor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. DDC Global Control Panel for network control and building interface shall be located shown on
the Drawings.
B. Control of the rooftop units, variable refrigerant flow, exhaust fans, and laboratory airflow
control system shall be accomplished through DDC control.
C. Control of the cabinet unit heaters and unit heaters shall be accomplished through local electric
thermostats.
D. All sensors and devices shall be labeled. All labels and designations shall match designations in
controls software and as-built drawings.
A. Zone control shall include all units designated in sequence of operation. All zones to include
capabilities through the Building Automation System for override setting to full occupied cycle
during unoccupied cycle.
1. All zones shall include computer controlled overrides.
3.4 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY
A. It is intended that the Temperature Control Contractor include as part of his bid one (1) year full
service warranty. All labor and material shall be guaranteed against defects in workmanship for
the one (1) year period from the date of Substantial Completion as determined by A/E and/or
Owner. Any material proving defective shall be repaired or replaced during that period. This
shall not, however, apply to material that has been damaged due to willful negligence.
B. The Contractor will provide hardware and software support during the first year guarantee after
the date of acceptance. Hardware support includes replacing of any major or minor components,
relays, sensors, etc., that fail to operate properly. Software support includes upgrading of
software during warranty period such that system is loaded with latest available revision at end of
warranty period.
C. Support is also defined to include Owner personnel training needed to operate the system
effectively as outlined in this Specification. Explicitly included is the training needed to analyze
a building's operation with a view to minimizing energy costs.
3.5 COMPLETION
A. Prior to final inspection, this Contractor shall perform the following service work, including, but
not limited to, the following items:
1. Check and oil electric motors furnished under control system.
2. Lubricate damper bearings as required.
3. Check damper travel, adjust and tighten set screws.
4. Lubricate valve stems, as required, check packing; repair as required.
5. Calibration of instruments.
6. Check and verify circuitry.
7. Calibrate and checkout controllers, fusing, etc.
8. Test and debug microprocessor and software.
3.6 When the work is completed, and at a time directed by the Owner or the A/E, the Contractor shall
carefully adjust all parts of the equipment and systems. This includes adjustment of automatic controls
and safety devices, proper setting of adjustable devices, dampers and valves, and other necessary
operations so the systems are fully operable and automatic in operation. Upon completion of the Work,
notify the Owner, and/or A/E that system is ready for final tests and inspection.
A. At the time of final inspection, this Contractor shall be represented by a person with the proper
authority, who shall demonstrate, as directed by the A/E, that his Work fully complies with the
purpose and intent of the Specifications and Drawings. Labor, services, instruments, and tools
necessary for demonstrations and tests shall be provided by the Contractor.
B. The Contractor shall test and adjust each instrument specialty and equipment furnished by him,
prior to final acceptance. The Contractor shall demonstrate, for approval by the A/E, that
subsystems operate as a coordinated and properly functioning, integrated system.
C. The Contractor shall furnish labor, provide adjustments and incidentals necessary to obtain the
desired and intended results.
D. The Contractor shall turn over a printed copy and electronic copy of the completed and debugged
operating software to the Owner at the conclusion of the first year warranty.
PART 1 GENERAL
A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections included under
Division 1, General Requirements, and Section 15050 of this Division are included as a part of
this Section as though Bound herein.
B. Refer to Section 012300 for Alternates that may affect the Work of this Section.
C. Refer to the details and schedules on the Drawings for additional requirements.
F. Refer to section 23 74 13 for Packaged, Outdoor, Central Station Air Handling Unit
requirements.
A. This Section includes the sequences of operation for the HVAC equipment and systems.
B. The Temperature Control Contractor shall read all other Drawings and Specifications, become
familiar with requirements and scope of the Project, and include such coordination work as may
be required.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals are required and shall include detailed descriptions of the proposed sequence of
operations for all HVAC systems specific to the project.
C. Any variations from proposed sequences to be submitted in writing for approval by A/E.
A. All set points and other variables noted in the sequences are to be adjustable from the web
accessible graphical user interface so that the owner does not have to go to the school or open any
programming software to change the settings. Access to the adjustable settings shall be password
protected and an audit log shall track who made what changes and when they were made.
Winter Design:
Occupied Mode Unoccupied Mode
68 deg. F (adj.) 55 deg. F (adj.)
Summer Design:
Occupied Mode Unoccupied Mode
75 deg. F (adj.), 50% RH 85 deg. F, (adj.)
C. Cabinet Heaters
1. A line-voltage, electric thermostat shall cycle the unit fan and electric heating coil on a
call for heating.
F. Exhaust Fans
1. Exhaust fans as scheduled shall operate through the LACS fume hood controller.
2. Exhaust fans as scheduled shall operate with the commercial kitchen hood operation.
3. See Exhaust Fan Schedule on the Drawings.
H. Kitchen Hood
1. Provide necessary contacts to enable roof top unit when kitchen hood fan is in operation.
J. Humidity Control
1. A space mounted humidity sensor shall send an alarm to the BAS system to override the
dehumidification unit into maximum dehumidification cycle at the air handling unit.
Close the outside air dampers and open the recirculation dampers, activate the DX and
reheat system as required. The unit shall return to normal once humidity levels are
acceptable. Humidity sensors are shown as indicated on the temperature control
drawings.
L. Smoke Detection
1. Temperature Control Contractor shall wire between smoke detector and unit to shut-
down unit on smoke detection.
M. Day/Night Zones
1. Zone control shall include all mechanical equipment. All zones to include capabilities
through the direct digital controller for override setting to full occupied cycle during
unoccupied cycle.
2. Zones: Refer to temperature control drawings for zone information.
N. Fire Alarm
1. Coordinate with Division 26 Electrical Contractor and provide necessary contacts to shut
down all mechanical equipment during a fire alarm. The system shall be capable of
restarting equipment globally upon a “no alarm signal” from the fire alarm panel.
O. Emergency Generator
1. Monitor status of emergency generator through the BAS.
P. Snow Day
1. A “snow day” routine shall be provided to return all systems to unoccupied mode upon
indication by system operator.
Q. Critical Alarms
1. Critical alarms shall dial personal cell telephones, personal home telephones, and/or send
email messages to school district employees as determined by the school district. The
following will be considered critical alarms:
a. Any supply units manual low-limit alarm or fan failure.
b. Any space temperature dropping below 40 degrees F. (adj.)
c. Rooftop unit failure.
d. VRF outdoor unit failure
e. VRF condensate alarm.
f. Emergency generator operation.
g. Any other alarm deemed critical by school district and/or A/E
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. A Laboratory Airflow Control System (LACS) shall be furnished and installed under this section.
The LACS shall be capable of operating as a standalone system or as a system integrated with the
Building Management System (BMS).
1.3 REFERENCES
B. Reference Standards
1. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ARI 880 Performance Rating of Air Terminals
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers / American
National Standards Institute
ASHRAE/ANSI Standard 130, Methods for Testing Air Terminal Units
3. American National Standards Institute / American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air
Conditioning Engineers
ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2012: BACnet® - A Data Communication Protocol for Building
Automation Systems (including Standard and all published Addenda)
A. Coordination
1. The LACS representative shall coordinate all details of the installation with the successful
mechanical contractor. This effort shall include complete coordination of the sheet metal
layout drawings to assure that the ductwork layout and sizing is based on the actual sizes of
the airflow control valves for this project.
B. Preinstallation Meetings
1. The LACS representative shall review the proper installation of the system with the sheet
metal contractor and the building management system (BMS) contractor.
2. Project Installation Phase – The LACS representative shall make periodic visits to the project
jobsite to assure that the system is being installed properly to assure optimal performance
and that the location and orientation of the control valves is consistent for proper operation
and future owner maintenance. Any discrepancies shall first be brought to the attention of
the appropriate subcontractor. If no action is taken by said contractor, the representative
shall bring these issues to the project manager, engineer or owner’s representative for
resolution.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit listed Submittals in accordance with Conditions of the General Contract and
Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section. LACS submittals shall contain, at a minimum, the
following information:
1. Product Data Sheets
2. Equipment Schedule Sheets containing room number, tag, min/max flows, model number and
other configuration data as required to provide fully engineered LACS.
3. Installation Instructions
4. Project-specific wiring diagrams
5. Points lists
B. Closeout submittals:
1. Operation and maintenance manuals, including as-built wiring diagrams and component lists,
shall be provided as closeout submittals.
A. Certifications
1. The laboratory airflow system provider shall be an entity that designs, develops,
manufactures and sells products and services to control the environment and airflow of
critical spaces using a Quality Management System registered to ISO 9001:2008.
A. The ambient environmental conditions during installation and operation shall comply with LACS
product specifications as shown on the product data sheets within the submittals.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. The Warranty shall commence upon the date of shipment and extend for a period of 60 months
for all airflow control devices and 36 months for all other control system components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. A LACS shall be furnished and installed to control the airflow into and out of laboratory rooms
in addition to other spaces in the building. The exhaust flow rate of a laboratory fume hood shall
be controlled precisely to maintain a constant average face velocity into the fume hood at either a
standard/in-use or standby level. The laboratory control system shall vary the amount of make-
up/supply air into the room and general exhaust air out of the room to operate the laboratories at
the lowest possible airflow rates necessary to achieve minimum ventilation rates and maintain
space pressurization in relation to adjacent spaces (positive or negative). The LACS shall be
capable of operating as a standalone system or as a system integrated with the Building
Management System (BMS).
2.2 COMPONENTS
shut off valves). The pressure independent springs shall be a spring-grade stainless steel.
All shaft bearing surfaces shall be made of a PP (polypropylene) or PPS (polyphenylene
sulfide) composite. Sound attenuating devices used in conjunction with general exhaust
or supply airflow control devices shall be constructed using 24 gauge galvanized steel or
other suitable material used in standard duct construction. No sound absorptive materials
of any kind shall be used.
a. Class B—The airflow control device for corrosive airstreams, such as fume hoods and
biosafety cabinets, shall have a baked-on, corrosion-resistant phenolic or heresite
coating. The device's shaft shall be made of 316 stainless steel with a Teflon coating.
The shaft support brackets shall be made of 316 stainless steel. The pivot arm and
internal “S” link shall be made of 316 or 303 stainless steel. The pressure independent
springs shall be a spring-grade stainless steel. The internal nuts, bolts and rivets shall be
stainless steel. All shaft bearing surfaces shall be made of PP (polypropylene) or PPS
(polyphenylene sulfide) composite.
10. Actuation
a. For electrically actuated VAV operation, a CE certified electronic actuator shall be
factory mounted to the valve. Loss of main power shall cause the valve to position itself
in an appropriate failsafe state. Options for these failsafe states include: normally open-
maximum position, normally closed-minimum position and last position. This position
shall be maintained constantly without external influence, regardless of external
conditions on the valve (within product specifications).
b. Non-Laboratory spaces will be provided with venturi airflow control valve describe
herein and as denoted on the drawings. The actuators for these rooms do not require
high speed actuators with one second speed of response to airflow quantity changes. An
integral pressure independent assembly shall respond and maintain specific airflow
within one second of a change in duct static pressure irrespective of the magnitude of
pressure and/or flow change or quantity of airflow controllers on a manifolded system.
These systems fail in the last position.
c. Constant volume valves do not require actuators.
11. The controller for the airflow control devices shall be microprocessor based and operate
using peer-to-peer control architecture. The room-level airflow control devices shall function
as a standalone network.
12. The room-level control network shall utilize a BACnet or LonTalk communications
protocol.
13. There shall be no reliance on external or building-level control devices to perform room-
level control functions. Each laboratory control system shall have the capability of
performing fume hood control, pressurization control, and implement occupancy and
emergency mode control schemes.
14. The LACS shall be integrated with the BMS.
15. NIST Accreditation
a. Each airflow control device shall be factory characterized on air stations NIST
Accredited to ISO/IEC 17025:2005 standards.
b. Each airflow control device shall be factory characterized to the job specific airflows as
detailed on the plans and specifications using NIST accredited air stations and
instrumentation having a combined accuracy of no more than ±1% of signal (5,000 to
250cfm), ±2% of signal (249 to 100cfm) and ±3% of signal (199 to 35cfm). Electronic
airflow control devices shall be further characterized and their accuracy verified to ±5%
of signal at a minimum of 48 different airflows across the full operating range of the
device.
c. Each airflow control device shall be marked with device-specific factory characterization
data. At a minimum, it should include the room number, tag number, serial number,
model number, eight-point characterization information (for electronic devices), date of
manufacture and quality control inspection numbers. All information shall be stored by
the manufacturer for use with as-built documentation. Characterization data shall be
stored indefinitely by the manufacturer and backed up off site for catastrophic event
recovery.
b. Alarm Muting option, which silences the audible alarm for an adjustable time period
when the mute button is pushed. If another alarm is generated during the mute period, the
new alarm will override the mute delay and the alarm will sound again.
c. Auto Alarm Muting option, which sets the alarm to mute automatically after 20 seconds.
d. Emergency Exhaust button with LED, which activates an emergency exhaust mode. In
this mode, the exhaust air is at its maximum flow. When activated, the alarm will sound
and the LED will flash. To activate emergency exhaust mode, push the button. Push the
button again to cancel emergency exhaust mode.
e. Flow Alarm LED, which illuminates to indicate an unsafe airflow condition. The audible
alarm will also activate and may be muted.
f. Broken retracting cable alarm, an audible alarm with a flashing LED that indicates
whether a vertical sash sensor cable is detached, thereby ensuring the fume hood users’
safety.
g. Energy waste alarm option, which generates a local visual and audible alarm to notify
when the fume hood sash is open beyond its minimum flow position and the lights in the
room are off. When activated, the LED display will show “ENRG” and the audible alarm
will sound until the sash is closed. The light levels at which the alarm is both initiated
and cancelled shall be configurable.
h. Fume hood decommissioning option, which commands the exhaust flow through the
fume hood to the minimum allowed by the exhaust valve when the sash is fully closed
and no chemicals are present in the hood. The mode shall be initiated by either a
pushbutton sequence on the fume hood monitor, external momentary switch input to the
fume hood monitor, or a network command. When activated, the LED display will show
“OFF,” and the exhaust valve will move to its minimum position or shutoff position and
the associated fume hood exhaust fan will be diabled. Safety shall be built into the
decommission option, whereby opening the fume hood sash will automatically return the
fume hood exhaust to an in-use operating volume as determined by the sash sensor.
Fume hood decommissioning shall be a point that can be integrated to the BMS system.
A. Each dedicated LACS shall support a minimum of 20 network controlled airflow devices.
B. The LACS shall employ individual average face velocity controllers that directly measure the
area of the fume hood sash opening and proportionally control the hood’s exhaust airflow to
maintain a constant face velocity over a minimum range of 20% to 100% of sash travel. The
corresponding minimum hood exhaust flow turndown ratio shall be 5 to 1.
C. The hood exhaust airflow control device shall respond to the fume hood sash opening by
achieving 90% of its commanded value within one second of the sash reaching 90% of its final
D. The LACS shall maintain specific airflow (±5% of signal within one second of a change in duct
static pressure) regardless of the magnitude of the pressure change, airflow change or quantity of
airflow control devices on the manifold (within 0.6" to 3.0" wc).
E. The LACS shall use volumetric offset control to maintain room pressurization. The system shall
maintain proper room pressurization polarity (negative or positive) regardless of any change in
room/system conditions, such as the raising and lowering of any or all fume hood sashes or rapid
changes in duct static pressure. Systems using differential pressure measurement or velocity
measurement to control room pressurization are unacceptable.
F. The LACS shall maintain specific airflow (±5% of signal) with a minimum turndown to ensure
accurate pressurization at low airflow and guarantee the maximum system diversity and energy
efficiency.
A. The airflow control devices shall utilize peer-to-peer, distributed control architecture to perform
room-level control functions. Master-slave control schemes shall not be acceptable. Control
functions shall include, at a minimum, volumetric offset pressurization, as well as respond to
occupancy and emergency control commands.
B. Volumetric Offset Pressurization Control
1. The laboratory control system shall control supply and auxiliary exhaust airflow devices in
order to maintain a volumetric offset (either positive or negative). Offset shall be maintained
regardless of any change in flow or static pressure. This offset shall be field adjustable and
represents the volume of air, which will enter (or exit) the room from the corridor or adjacent
spaces.
2. The pressurization control algorithm shall sum the flow values of all supply and exhaust
airflow devices and command appropriate controlled devices to new set points to maintain
the desired offset. The offset shall be adjustable.
3. The pressurization control algorithm shall consider both networked devices, as well as:
a. Up to three non-networked devices providing a linear analog flow signal.
b. Any number of constant volume devices where the total of supply devices and the total
of exhaust devices may be factored into the pressurization control algorithm.
C. Volumetric offset shall be the only acceptable means of controlling room pressurization. Systems
that rely on differential pressure as a means of control shall not be acceptable.
D. Occupancy Control
1. The laboratory control system shall have the ability to change the minimum ventilation set
points, based on the occupied state, in order to reduce energy consumption when the space is
not occupied. The occupancy state may be set by either the BMS as a scheduled event or
through the use of a local occupancy sensor or switch. The laboratory control system shall
support a local occupancy override button that allows a user to override the occupancy mode
and set the space to occupied for a predetermined interval. The override interval shall be
configurable from one to 1440 minutes. The local occupancy sensor/switch or bypass button
shall be given priority over a BMS command.
5. The fume hood airflow control device shall respond to changes in sash position and user
presence within one second, in order to provide a constant 100-feet-per-minute face velocity
when the fume hood is in use.
H. The laboratory control system shall be segregated into subnets to isolate network
communications to ensure room-level control functions and BMS communications are carried
out reliably. Each laboratory space or pressurization zone shall be its own subnet. Commercially
available routers shall be used to provide this isolation.
I. The LACS shall support at least 20 networked devices in each pressurized zone.
J. Refer to the BMS specification for the required input/output summary for the necessary points to
be monitored and/or controlled.
A. All points shall be available through the interface to the BMS for trending, archiving, graphics,
alarm notification and status reports. LACS performance (speed, stability and accuracy) shall be
unaffected by the quantity of points being monitored, processed or controlled.
B. The LACS network shall have the capability of digitally interfacing with the BMS. The required
software interface drivers shall be developed and housed in a dedicated interface device
furnished by the LACS supplier. Coordinate specific requirements with BMS Contractor.
C. LACS critical environment integration shall support distributed network architecture from room
level BACnet MS/TP segment or LON FTT-10 bus to a dedicated BACnet MS/TP segment,
building BACnet/Ethernet, or BACnet/IP building backbone using single or multiple IP
addresses. Backbone communication protocol must be field selectable/upgradable.
D. Integration must also support the ability to have a single point of access in the case that multiple
IP addresses are not acceptable.
1. Each LACS room integrator shall support up to 20 high speed devices or 32 low speed
devices per network channel. There shall be up to 2 network channels per room integrator.
E. Communication between devices in a room or zone will operate independent of building level
communications maintaining integrity of the airflow. LACS Building level communication, or
loss of, will not disrupt the communication between devices in a room or zone.
F. LACS critical environment integration shall provide an easy means to access room level device
health status at a room-by-room or building wide level via web page. The system health pages
shall provide information to assist in diagnostics for:
1. Online/Offline status for the room level integration appliance
2. Runtime information such as heap memory usage and CPU usage
3. Communication channel online/offline and configuration data
4. Device level online/offline information
5. Device level alarm information
6. Device level Configuration errors
G. The LACS shall provide a Lab Verification feature. This feature shall allow field technicians to
perform field acceptance for one pressurization zone at a time.
I. LACS critical environment integration shall provide an easy means to access a Test and Balance
function tool at a room-by-room or building wide level via web page. This tool shall be available
to field technicians and air balancers to assure proper and timely system startup. Password
protection shall be provided for this functionality.
J. The LACS shall provide a Test and Balance feature. Test and balance functions shall include:
1. Ability to several spaces in full heating or cooling to enable the air balancer to check out full
air handling systems.
2. Allow air balancers to enter and save measured field data for use in their reports
3. Manually override the outputs for testing purposes
4. Adjust airflow to meet field acceptance tests
K. LACS critical environment integration shall support SQL database for long term data storage.
L. LACS critical environment integration shall provide optional software to manage local backup
and restore, entire site device management, building wide test and balance functions, building
wide diagnostic tools, and building wide configuration tools. Software shall be field upgradable
to support graphical dashboard displays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The LACS contractor shall install the sash sensors, interface boxes, and fume hood monitor on
the fume hood. Reel-type sash sensors and their stainless steel cables shall be hidden from view.
Bar-type sash sensors shall be affixed to the individual sash panels. Sash interface boxes with
interface cards shall be mounted in an accessible location.
B. The LACS shall provide an appropriately sized and fused 24 VAC transformer suitable for NEC
Class II wiring.
C. All cable shall be furnished and installed by the BMS contractor. The BMS contractor shall
terminate and connect all cables as required. The BMS shall utilize cables specifically
recommended by the laboratory airflow controls supplier.
D. The mechanical contractor shall install all airflow control devices in the ductwork and shall
connect all airflow control valve linkages.
F. Each pressurization zone shall have either a dedicated, single-phase primary circuit or a
secondary circuit disconnect.
B. The LACS contractor must have a minimum of three (3) factory certified technicians in the Ohio
area.
C. The LACS startup shall include assisting the balancing contractor in the final air balance of the
facility The balancer shall be responsible for final verification and reporting of all airflows.
A. Training
1. The LACS supplier shall furnish a minimum of eight hours of owner training by factory
trained and certified personnel. The training will provide an overview of the job specific
airflow control components, verification of initial fume hood monitor calibration, general
procedures for verifying airflows of air valves and general troubleshooting procedures.
2. Training sessions shall be distributed throughout the warranty period as determined and
agreed to by the Owner.
3. Operation and maintenance manuals, including as-built wiring diagrams and component lists,
shall be provided for each training attendee.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include
pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:
1. Thermostatic expansion valves.
2. Solenoid valves.
3. Hot-gas bypass valves.
4. Filter dryers.
5. Strainers.
6. Pressure-regulating valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and
fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil
traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show
interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.
1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot.
2. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design
actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes
to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between
compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and
compliance with warranties of connected equipment.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in
maintenance manuals.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."
A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior
and exterior are clean when installed.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper
socket fittings on copper pipe.
F. Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced
protective jacket.
2. End Connections: Socket ends.
3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch-
long assembly.
4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
B. Packed-Angle Valves:
1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.
2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.
3. Operator: Rising stem.
4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.
5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap.
6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.
7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
C. Check Valves:
1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.
2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.
3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat.
4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel.
5. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.
6. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig.
7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
D. Service Valves:
1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.
2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.
3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Copper spring.
5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.
2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location
with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24, 115, or 208-V ac coil.
6. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
8. Manual operator.
F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled
by an NRTL.
1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal.
2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
5. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.
6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
H. Hot-Gas Bypass Valves: Comply with UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Ductile iron or steel.
2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.
4. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
5. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
6. Equalizer: External.
7. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location
with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24, 115, or 208-V ac coil.
8. End Connections: Socket.
9. Set Pressure: As required by system.
10. Throttling Range: Maximum 5 psig.
11. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
12. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
I. Straight-Type Strainers:
1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel.
3. End Connections: Socket or flare.
4. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
J. Angle-Type Strainers:
1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze.
2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug.
3. Screen: 100-mesh monel.
4. End Connections: Socket or flare.
5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
K. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:
1. Body: Forged brass.
2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by
filter screen.
3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm.
4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.
5. End Connections: Socket or flare.
6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
N. Mufflers:
1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
2. End Connections: Socket or flare.
3. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
2.3 REFRIGERANTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper,
Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.
B. Suction Lines NPS 2 to NPS 4 for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type
ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with joints.
C. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications NPS 1-1/2 and
Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed
or soldered joints.
D. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications NPS 2 and Larger:
Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered
joints.
E. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-
copper fittings with soldered joints.
B. Install service valves for gauge taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if
they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.
C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor
suction connection.
D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet side of filter
dryers.
F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install
solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
H. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe
safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.
I. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or
at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.
J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an
integral assembly for device being protected:
1. Solenoid valves.
2. Thermostatic expansion valves.
3. Hot-gas bypass valves.
4. Compressor.
K. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve.
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
J. Refer to Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of
Operation" for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of operation.
K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and
specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or
panels as specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment
requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.
N. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical
injury.
P. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve
stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply
heat near expansion-valve bulb.
R. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping."
S. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between
pipes for insulation installation.
T. Install sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness
insulation.
U. Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants"
for materials and methods.
V. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 23 Section "Identification for
HVAC Piping and Equipment."
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing, to prevent
scale formation.
D. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook."
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and
Tube."
1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper
pipe.
2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and
Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6. NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
7. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
8. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the
pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.
b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gauge throughout duration of
test.
c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount
of soap and glycerin solution over joints.
d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
3.8 ADJUSTING
B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating
suction pressure.
D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to
manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.
2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.
3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.
E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow
rates and pressures are established.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes solid-state, PWM, VFCs for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage
induction motors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
C. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs, all installed devices, and components to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified
in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Routine maintenance requirements for VFCs and all installed components.
b. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain VFCs of a single type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs,
minimum clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with
indicated maximum dimensions and clearances.
A. Store VFCs indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.
Protect VFCs from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full
load without derating, under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40 deg C.
2. Humidity: Less than 90 percent (noncondensing).
3. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet.
C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs,
including clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with
indicated maximum dimensions.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of VFCs with other construction including conduit, piping,
equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required
clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are
specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
C. Coordinate features of VFCs, installed units, and accessory devices with pilot devices and control
circuits to which they connect.
D. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each VFC and each installed unit with ratings
and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor
and load.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFC; listed and labeled as a complete unit and
arranged to provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3-phase induction motor by
adjusting output voltage and frequency.
1. Provide unit suitable for operation of premium-efficiency motor as defined by
NEMA MG 1.
B. Design and Rating: Match load type such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection
used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.
C. Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage
range.
E. Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an 11:1 speed range.
1. Electrical Signal: 4 to 20 mA at 24 V.
2. Pneumatic Signal: 3 to 15 psig.
H. Multiple-Motor Capability: Controller suitable for service to multiple motors and having a
separate overload relay and protection for each controlled motor. Overload relay shall shut off
controller and motors served by it when overload relay is tripped.
I. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempts three restarts after controller fault or on return of power after
an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction. Bidirectional
autospeed search shall be capable of starting into rotating loads spinning in either direction and
returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without damage to controller, motor, or load.
J. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the
minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.
K. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output
frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.
N. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators shall indicate the following conditions:
1. Power on.
2. Run.
3. Overvoltage.
4. Line fault.
5. Overcurrent.
6. External fault.
O. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches with manual
speed control and elapsed time meter.
P. Indicating Devices: Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in
controller door and connected to indicate the following controller parameters:
1. Output frequency (Hz).
2. Motor speed (rpm).
3. Motor status (running, stop, fault).
4. Motor current (amperes).
5. Motor torque (percent).
6. Fault or alarming status (code).
7. PID feedback signal (percent).
8. DC-link voltage (VDC).
9. Set-point frequency (Hz).
10. Motor output voltage (V).
R. Communications: Provide an RS485 interface allowing VFC to be used with an external system
within a multidrop LAN configuration. Interface shall allow all parameter settings of VFC to be
programmed via BMS control. Provide capability for VFC to retain these settings within the
nonvolatile memory. Coordinate protocol with BMS installer. Comply with the following BMS
protocol[s]:
1. ASHRAE; BACnet.
2. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc; APOGEE BMS.
T. Remote Indication Circuit Terminals: Mode selection, controller status, and controller fault.
2.3 ENCLOSURES
2.4 ACCESSORIES
B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type.
C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a factory-
applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position with
control circuit open.
D. Standard Displays:
1. Output frequency (Hz).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs for compliance with requirements,
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before
VFC installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each VFC to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and
motor; required control sequence; and duty cycle of motor, controller, and load.
3.3 INSTALLATION
B. Install wall-mounted VFCs to steel slotted support system specified in Division 26 Section
"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
A. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 26 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection, except optional tests,
stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3.8 ADJUSTING
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution
systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg. Metal ducts include the
following:
1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Single-wall, round, and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings.
3. Double-wall, round, and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings.
4. Duct liner.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and -
distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of
duct system must be specifically approved in writing by A/E. Accompany requests for layout
modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design
results without increasing system total pressure.
B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Drawn to 1/4 inch equals 1 foot scale. Show fabrication and installation
details for metal ducts.
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,
and attachments to other work.
2. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes.
3. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts.
4. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
5. Fittings.
6. Reinforcement and spacing.
7. Seam and joint construction.
8. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
9. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
10. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels.
11. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, vibration
isolation, and seismic restraints.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts.
3. Ceiling- and wall-mounting access doors and panels required to provide access to
dampers and other operating devices.
4. Ceiling-mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
5. In general, the piping and ductwork shown on the drawings shall be considered as
diagrammatic for clearness in indicating the general run and connections required, and
may not be shown in its true position. The piping and ductwork equipment may have to
be offset, lowered, or raised as required to accommodate field conditions.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel," for hangers and supports, AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for
aluminum supporting members, and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint
and seam welding.
B. NFPA Compliance:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
C. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations," Ch. 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G60 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed
to view.
D. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled, matte
finish for exposed ducts.
E. Stainless Steel: ASTM A480, Type 304 and having a No. 20 finish for concealed ducts, and a
finish to match kitchen or dishwasher hoods for exposed ducts.
F. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts
and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
H. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124.
1. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group.
b. Johns Manville International, Inc.
c. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
d. Owens Corning.
2. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent
erosion of glass fibers.
a. Thickness: 1 inch.
b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or
mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.
1. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers.
B. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and
modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable,
airtight seal.
C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when
cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.
E. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted
with zinc-chromate primer.
B. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
C. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are
electrolytically separated from ducts.
D. Contractor may use load rated cable suspension system. Suspension system shall have a
specified manufacturers safe working load and supplemental safety factor of at least five times
the safe working load.
1. Suspension system shall be verified by SMACNA Testing and Research Institute to be in
compliance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards Guidelines (1995 CH.4).
A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and
complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod
applications, and joint types and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity
class required for pressure class.
2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger
and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are
lined.
A. The net free area of the duct dimensions on the Contract Documents shall be maintained.
Increase metal duct dimensions as necessary to compensate for addition of the liner.
B. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct
liner is prohibited.
C. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.
D. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
E. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge
overlapping.
F. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
G. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm
H. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12
inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches
longitudinally.
I. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either
channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the
following locations:
1. Fan discharges.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than 2500
fpm or where indicated.
J. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane
assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means
are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.
A. Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a
circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.
B. Round, Longitudinal- and Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
C. Flat-Oval, Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
D. Duct Joints:
1. Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before
and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.
2. Ducts 21 to 72 Inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint consisting of two
internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket.
3. Ducts Larger Than 72 Inches in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per
SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2.
4. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped, EPDM
rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer's
tolerances.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2) Lindab Inc.
5. Flat-Oval Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of two flanges and one
synthetic rubber gasket.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2) McGill AirFlow Corporation.
3) SEMCO Incorporated.
E. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for
longitudinal-seam straight ducts.
F. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess
material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.
G. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die-
formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow
construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg:
a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.
b. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.
c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.
d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.
3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg:
a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.
b. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.
c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.
d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.
4. Flat-Oval Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with same metal thickness as
longitudinal-seam flat-oval duct.
5. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for material-
handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit
using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.
6. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and
90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
7. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for
30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
8. Round Elbows Larger Than 14 Inches in Diameter and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate
gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows.
9. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches in Diameter and All Pressures 0.040 inch
thick with 2-piece welded construction.
10. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.
11. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal-seam flat-oval duct specified
above.
12. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches in Diameter and Pressures through 10-Inch
wg: 0.022 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following:
1. Supply Ducts: 2-inch wg.
2. Supply Ducts (before Air Terminal Units): 3-inch wg.
3. Supply Ducts (after Air Terminal Units): 2-inch wg.
4. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.
5. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg.
A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet unless interrupted by fittings.
D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure
couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of
3 screws in each coupling.
F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions
unless specifically indicated.
J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts,
and similar finished work.
K. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward
to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts
or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings
on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
N. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke
dampers are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials
and installation methods are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
O. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to equipment,
seismic force required by applicable building codes. Refer to SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint
Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems" or NUSIG.
P. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow
SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."
Q. Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches upstream of registers and
grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible galvanized-steel
primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting
Sections.
R. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.
Comply with SMACN's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction,"
Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."
A. Install ducts to allow for thermal expansion through 2000 deg F temperature range.
B. Install ducts without dips or traps that may collect residues unless traps have continuous or
automatic residue removal.
C. Install access openings at each change in direction and at intervals defined by NFPA 96; locate
on sides of duct a minimum of 1-1/2 inches from bottom; and fit with grease-tight covers of
same material as duct.
A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated and in compliance with ASHRAE/IESNA
90.1.
1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints.
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible," Chapter
5, "Hangers and Supports," unless otherwise noted.
B. Support horizontal ductwork runs on 6 foot centers and within 24 inches of each elbow and
within 48 inches of each branch intersection. Where duct weight for the 6 foot length is less
than 40 pounds, support hangers may be on 8 foot centers.
D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of
failure (proof-test) load.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 Section "Air
Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct
Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports:
1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing
and for compliance with test requirements.
2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section
being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system
design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.
Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round
and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower than
and equal to 2-inch wg (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Class 6 for
pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg.
4. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum
allowable.
A. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and perform
cleaning before air balancing.
B. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.
1. Create other openings to comply with duct standards.
2. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
3. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process.
C. Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removed from
HVAC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other points of
entry into building.
D. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply
and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive
assemblies.
3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section,
condensate drain pans, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4. Coils and related components.
5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical
equipment rooms.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
F. Cleanliness Verification:
1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.
2. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and reinspect ducts.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.
2. Barometric relief dampers.
3. Manual volume dampers.
4. Fire dampers.
5. Ceiling dampers.
6. Smoke dampers.
7. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
8. Flange connectors.
9. Turning vanes.
10. Duct-mounted access doors.
11. Flexible connectors.
12. Flexible ducts.
13. Duct accessory hardware.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for duct-mounted fire and smoke
detectors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for
concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
E. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
E. Frame: 0.063-inch thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners and mounting flange.
F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025-inch thick, roll-formed
aluminum with sealed edges.
I. Blade Axles:
1. Material: Aluminum.
2. Diameter: 0.20 inch.
M. Accessories:
1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.
3. Electric actuators.
4. Chain pulls.
5. Front of rear screens.
6. 90-degree stops.
E. Frame: 0.063-inch thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners and mounting flange.
F. Blades:
1. Multiple, 0.025-inch thick, roll-formed aluminum.
2. Maximum Width: 6 inches.
3. Action: Parallel.
4. Balance: Gravity.
5. Eccentrically pivoted.
L. Accessories:
1. Flange on intake.
2. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressures.
5. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade.
b. Parallel-blade design.
c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
7. Bearings:
a. Oil-impregnated bronze or molded synthetic.
b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
E. Jackshaft:
1. Size: 1-inch diameter.
2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on
supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in
multiple-damper assembly.
F. Damper Hardware:
1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch thick zinc-plated steel,
and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.
2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
D. Frame: Curtain type with blades inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch thick
galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
C. Frame: Multiple-blade type; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch thick galvanized steel;
with mitered and interlocking corners.
D. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place
of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.
H. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall
or floor application.
J. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical
devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
3. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear
trains.
4. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated.
Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating
of 150 in. x lbf.
5. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed
to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal
operation at minus 40 deg F.
6. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running
torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.
7. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
B. Type: Static; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S by an NRTL.
D. Frame: Multiple-blade type; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch thick galvanized steel;
with mitered and interlocking corners.
F. Frame: Multiple-blade type; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch thick galvanized steel;
with mitered and interlocking corners.
G. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place
of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.
K. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall
or floor application.
M. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical
devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
3. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear
trains.
4. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated.
Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating
of 150 in. x lbf.
5. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed
to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal
operation at minus 40 deg F.
6. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running
torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.
7. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
N. Smoke detector shall be provided and installed by Division 26. Division 23 shall install
ductwork sleeve as required for installation of detector. Coordinate with Division 26
Contractor.
B. Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars
perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"
and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."
1. Door:
a. Double wall, rectangular.
b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct
pressure class.
c. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
d. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
3. Number of Hinges and Locks:
a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.
b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression
latches with outside and inside handles.
d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression
latches with outside and inside handles.
7. Latches: Cam.
8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber.
9. Insulation Fill: 1-inch thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon or 0.0428-inch stainless steel.
D. Fasteners: Carbon or stainless steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.
E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for
minimum 2000 deg F.
D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2
strips of 2-3/4-inch wide, 0.028-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch thick aluminum
sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,
synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd..
2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.
H. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in
compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan
discharge and duct.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of
30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at
start and stop.
B. Low Pressure Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate
supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-
barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in
galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and
aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers at discharge of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to
exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend
from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with
hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
1. Coordinate subparagraphs below with Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."Install steel
volume dampers in steel ducts.
2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
I. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining
accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1. On both sides of duct coils.
2. Downstream from control dampers and equipment.
3. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.
Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure
relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream
from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.
4. At all backdraft damper locations.
5. At all airflow measuring stations.
6. Elsewhere as indicated.
L. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.
N. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with
loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
O. Flexible duct shall not be acceptable for use in exhaust system or negative pressure applications.
P. Connect diffusers to low-pressure ducts with maximum 4 foot lengths of flexible duct clamped
or strapped in place.
R. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach
thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start
and stop of fans.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
6. Roof curbs.
7. Fan speed controllers.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of
the items involved:
1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.
2. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 COORDINATION
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Description: Direct- or belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,
bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.
C. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece,
aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward,
with rain and snow drains and grease collector.
2. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and
maintenance.
E. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.
F. Accessories:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50
percent.
2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside
fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;
factory set to close when fan stops.
G. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch thick, rigid, fiberglass
insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof
opening and fan base.
1. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange.
2. Overall Height: 12 inches, 18 inches for kitchen hood exhaust fan(s).
3. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.
H. Finish
1. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer’s
standard finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry
film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat and an overall minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
a. Color and Gloss: Standard color as selected from manufacturer chart.
B. Description: Direct or belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,
bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and accessories.
C. Housing: Fabricated of galvanized steel with side sheets fastened with a deep lock seam or
welded to scroll sheets.
1. Housing Discharge Arrangement: Vertical stack.
D. Fan Wheels: Single-width, single inlet; welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun-steel
inlet cone, with hub keyed to shaft.
1. Blade Materials: Steel or aluminum.
2. Blade Type: Backward inclined, or forward curved, or airfoil.
3. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99.
E. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
F. Shaft Bearings: Pre-lubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings with
ABMA 9, L50 of 200,000 hours.
G. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5.
2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use
with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range
at fan design conditions.
3. Belts: Oil resistant, non-sparking, and non-static; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
4. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.
H. Accessories:
1. Inlet and Outlet: Flanged.
2. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing.
3. Backdraft Dampers: Gravity actuated with counterweight and interlocking aluminum
blades with felt edges in steel frame installed on fan discharge.
4. Access Door: Gasketed door in scroll with latch-type handles.
5. Scroll Dampers: Single-blade damper installed at fan scroll top with adjustable linkage.
6. Inlet Screens: Removable wire mesh.
7. Drain Connections: NPS 3/4 threaded coupling drain connection installed at lowest point
of housing.
8. Weather Hoods: Weather resistant with stamped vents over motor and drive
compartment.
9. Mounting curb specifically designed for fume jet fan, provided by unit manufacturer.
2.3 MOTORS
A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment."
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Support in-line units using restrained spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch.
Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
C. Secure roof-mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Refer to Division 07
Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.
D. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers or
spring hangers having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified in
Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section
"Air Duct Accessories."
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and
adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Adjust belt tension.
6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to
indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.4 ADJUSTING
C. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing,
adjusting, and balancing procedures.
E. Lubricate bearings.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
a. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc.
b. Anemostat; a Mestek Company.
c. Carnes.
d. Dayus Register & Grille.
e. Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Hart & Cooley Div.
f. Krueger.
g. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc.
h. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.
i. Price Industries.
j. Titus.
k. Tuttle & Bailey.
D. Baked white enamel or powder paint white finish for ceiling installation. Provide wall mounted
and exposed duct mounted installation with primed finish for field painting.
A. All 18 gauge steel diffuser, 24 inch by 24 inch module size, 18 inch by 18 inch face panel.
C. Solid face panel with curved back pan designed for VAV usage. Face panel shall be easily
removed.
D. Back pan shall be one-piece die-formed with smooth surfaces and no corner joints.
F. Provide blank-off plates to convert diffuser to 2-way or 3-way blow where indicated on
Drawings.
A. Pattern controllers shall be one piece extruded aluminum, 24 inches long maximum, positioned
between spring loaded spacers. Pattern controllers shall allow the airstream to be directed flat
against the ceiling in either direction or downward, as well as allowing throw reduction every
two feet along the entire length of the linear slot diffusers. The airstream shall be maintained at
the ceiling plane and shall not dump when volume is reduced. Pattern controllers shall be field
adjustable from the face of the diffuser.
B. Material shall be minimum wall thickness 0.062 extruded aluminum. Spring steel retainers
shall be used under the spacers to hold the slot diffusers assembly tightly together.
C. Factory mounted plenums shall be minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel and lined inside with
black matte fiberglass insulation.
D. Flanges exposed to view shall be painted factory standard white. All other surfaces shall be
painted flat.
E. For lay-in ceiling, provide hanger wire support clips that are integral with the linear slot diffus-
ers allowing the linear slot diffusers to be supported from the building structure with ceiling
wire.
F. Slot width, number of slots, diffuser length and inlet collar size shall be as scheduled on the
Drawings.
E. Refer to reflected ceiling plans for border style appropriate to diffuser location.
E. Refer to reflected ceiling plans for border style appropriate to diffuser location.
A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,
"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make
final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling
panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict
with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Listed Hood: A hood, factory fabricated and tested for compliance with UL 710 by a testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Standard Hood: A hood, usually field fabricated, that complies with design, construction, and
performance criteria of applicable national and local codes.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
requirements for drain connections. Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to
illustrate fire-suppression nozzle locations.
a. Piping Diagram Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Coordination Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot.
2. Suspended ceiling assembly components.
3. Structural members to which equipment will be attached.
4. Roof framing and support members for duct penetrations.
5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
f. Moldings on hoods and accessory equipment.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D 1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports; and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding
Code," for joint and seam welding.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate equipment layout and installation with adjacent Work, including lighting fixtures,
HVAC equipment, plumbing, and fire-suppression system components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with
oiled, exposed matte finish.
1. Minimum Thickness: 0.0478 inch.
D. Zinc-Coated Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36, zinc coated according to ASTM A 123 requirements.
E. Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Elastomeric sealant shall be NSF
certified for commercial kitchen hood application. Sealants, when cured and washed, shall
comply with requirements in 21 CFR, Section 177.2600, for use in areas that come in contact
with food.
1. Color: As required to match hood finish.
2. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene, in diameter larger than joint width.
G. Gaskets: NSF certified for end-use application indicated; of resilient rubber, neoprene, or PVC
that is nontoxic, stable, odorless, nonabsorbent, and unaffected by exposure to foods and
cleaning compounds, and that passes testing according to UL 710.
A. Welding: Use welding rod of same composition as metal being welded. Use methods that
minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metal. Make ductile
welds free of mechanical imperfections such as gas holes, pits, or cracks.
1. Welded Butt Joints: Full-penetration welds for full-joint length. Make joints flat,
continuous, and homogenous with sheet metal without relying on straps under seams,
filling in with solder, or spot welding.
2. Grind exposed welded joints flush with adjoining material and polish to match adjoining
surfaces.
3. Where fasteners are welded to underside of equipment, finish reverse side of weld
smooth and flush.
4. Coat concealed stainless-steel welded joints with metallic-based paint to prevent
corrosion.
5. After zinc-coated steel is welded, clean welds and abraded areas and apply SSPC-
Paint 20, high-zinc-dust-content, galvanizing repair paint to comply with
ASTM A 780/A 780M.
B. For metal butt joints, comply with SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines."
C. Where stainless steel is joined to a dissimilar metal, use stainless-steel welding material or
fastening devices.
D. Form metal with break bends that are not flaky, scaly, or cracked in appearance; where breaks
mar uniform surface appearance of material, remove marks by grinding, polishing, and
finishing.
E. Sheared Metal Edges: Finish free of burrs, fins, and irregular projections.
F. In food zones, as defined in NSF, fabricate surfaces free from exposed fasteners.
G. Cap exposed fastener threads, including those inside cabinets, with stainless-steel lock washers
and stainless-steel cap (acorn) nuts.
H. Fabricate pipe slots on equipment with turned-up edges sized to accommodate service and
utility lines and mechanical connections.
I. Fabricate enclosures, including panels, housings, and skirts, to conceal service lines, operating
components, and mechanical and electrical devices including those inside cabinets, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Weld all joints exposed to grease with continuous welds, and make filters/baffles or grease
extractors and makeup air diffusers easily accessible for cleaning.
1. Fabricate hoods according to NSF 2, "Food Equipment."
2. Hoods shall be listed and labeled, according to UL 710, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Hoods shall be designed, fabricated, and installed according to NFPA 96.
4. Include access panels as required for access to fire dampers and fusible links.
5. Duct Collars: Minimum 0.0598-inch thick steel at least 3 inches long, continuously
welded to top of hood and at corners.
6. Duct-Collar Fire Dampers: Hood shall be listed and labeled according to UL 710 without
fire dampers.
E. Filters/Baffles: Removable, stainless-steel. Fabricate stainless steel for filter frame and
removable collection cup and pitched trough. Exposed surfaces shall be pitched to drain to
collection cup. Filters/baffles shall be tested according to UL 1046, "Grease Filters for Exhaust
Ducts," by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Lighting Fixtures: Recessed, LED fixtures and lamps with lenses sealed vaportight. Wiring
shall be installed in conduit on hood exterior. Number and location of fixtures shall provide a
minimum of 50 fc.
1. Light switches shall be mounted on front panel of hood canopy.
2. Lighting Fixtures: LED complying with UL 1598.
B. Description: Engineered distribution piping designed for automatic detection and release or
manual release of fire-suppression agent by hood operator. Fire-suppression system shall be
listed and labeled for complying with NFPA 17A, "Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems," by a
qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade A, Schedule 40,
plain ends.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.
3. Piping, fusible links and release mechanism, tank containing the suppression agent, and
controls shall be factory installed. Controls shall be in stainless-steel control cabinet
mounted on hood or wall. Furnish manual pull station for wall mounting. Exposed
piping shall be covered with chrome-plated aluminum tubing. Exposed fittings shall be
chrome plated.
4. Liquid Extinguishing Agent: Noncorrosive, low-pH liquid.
5. Furnish electric-operated gas shutoff valve; refer to Division 23 Section "Facility
Natural-Gas Piping."
6. Furnish manual reset, electric-operated gas shutoff valve with clearly marked open and
closed indicator for field installation.
7. Fire-suppression system controls shall be integrated with controls for fans, lights, and
fuel supply and located in a single cabinet for each group of hoods immediately adjacent.
8. Wiring shall have color-coded, numbered terminal blocks and grounding bar. Spare
terminals for fire alarm, optional wiring to start fan with fire alarm, red pilot light to
indicate fan operation, and control switches shall all be factory wired in control cabinet
with relays or starters. Include spare terminals for fire alarm, and wiring to start fan with
fire alarm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
equipment installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Install hoods and associated services with clearances and access for maintaining, cleaning, and
servicing hoods, filters/baffles, grease extractor, and fire-suppression systems according to
manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Make cutouts in hoods where required to run service lines and to make final connections, and
seal openings according to UL 1978.
D. Securely anchor and attach items and accessories to walls, floors, or bases with stainless-steel
fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Install trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant. Fasten with stainless-
steel fasteners at 48 inches o.c. maximum.
G. Install sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint backing,
unless otherwise indicated. Provide airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, sanitary joints.
H. Install lamps, with maximum recommended wattage, in equipment with integral lighting.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Connect ducts according to requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Weld
exhaust-duct connections with continuous liquid-tight joint.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare
test reports.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For vents, breechings, chimneys, and stacks. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, methods of field assembly, components, hangers, and location and size of
each field connection.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain listed system components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Certified Sizing Calculations: Manufacturer shall certify venting system sizing calculations.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. Metal-Fab, Inc.
3. Selkirk Inc.; Selkirk Metalbestos and Air Mate.
4. Z-Flex; Flexmaster Canada Limited.
5. Van-Packer Company, Inc.
B. Description: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 1738 and rated for 480 deg F
continuously, with positive or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211.
C. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least a 1/2-inch airspace.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination
heights according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent.
B. Seal between sections of positive-pressure vents and grease exhaust ducts according to
manufacturer's written installation instructions, using sealants recommended by manufacturer.
C. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all
accessories, without exceeding appliance loading.
D. Slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest
point piped to nearest drain.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
B. Clean breechings internally, during and after installation, to remove dust and debris.
C. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings, chimneys, and stacks that are not completed
or connected to equipment.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units (rooftop units) with
the following components and accessories:
1. Direct-expansion cooling.
2. Gas furnace.
3. Economizer outdoor- and return-air damper section.
4. Energy recovery
5. Integral, space temperature controls.
6. Roof curbs.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
C. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the outdoor-air stream to reject heat during
cooling operations and to absorb heat during heating operations. "Outdoor air" is defined as the
air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the
system.
D. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant-Coil Fan: The outdoor-air refrigerant-coil fan in RTUs. "Outdoor air"
is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated
through the system.
E. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, outdoor,
central-station air-handling units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is
mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground.
F. Supply-Air Fan: The fan providing supply air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as
the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.
G. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply-air stream to absorb heat (provide
cooling) during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating
operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or
ventilating apparatus.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities,
dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Coordination Drawings: Plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Structural members to which RTUs will be attached.
2. Roof openings
3. Roof curbs and flashing.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
A. ARI Compliance:
1. Comply with ARI 210/240 and ARI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for
RTUs.
2. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs.
B. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety.
2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils.
3. Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 for minimum efficiency of heating and cooling.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fan Belts: One set for each belt-driven fan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 CASING
A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double-wall insulated
panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints
between sections sealed.
B. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory-painted finish, with pitched roof panels
and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs.
1. Exterior Casing Thickness: 0.052 inch thick.
D. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I.
2. Thickness: 1 inch.
3. Liner materials shall have air-stream surface coated with an erosion- and temperature-
resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric.
4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
E. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of stainless-steel sheet, a minimum of 2 inches deep,
and complying with ASHRAE 62.
1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal
moisture tight.
2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple.
2.3 FANS
B. Belt-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently
lubricated, single-speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the
casing. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls.
E. Fan Motor: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment."
F. All motors driven by a variable frequency controller shall include a maintenance free,
circumferential, conductive microfiber shaft grounding ring (AEGIS-SGR) to discharge shaft
currents to ground.
2.4 COILS
A. Compressor: Hermetic, scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and
high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater.
B. Refrigeration Specialties:
1. Refrigerant Charge: R-410A.
2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.
3. Refrigerant filter/dryer.
4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch.
5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch.
6. Minimum off-time relay.
7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload.
8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines.
A. Energy recovery heat exchanger shall be constructed of an aluminum housing and an aluminum
heat transfer surface. Housing corner profiles shall be aluminum and housing endplates shall be
aluzinc. Heat exchanger must have aluminum framing and minimum 0.008 inch thick 99.5
percent pure aluminum plates. Plates shall be corrugated for increased turbulence and
maximum effectiveness, occurring without any stagnation points and speed changes. Plates
shall be sealed with silicone-free sealant. Provide drain pans under entire heat exchanger.
Terminate drain pan connections through the side of the unit. Drain lines must be properly
trapped by the installing contractor.
B. Heat exchanger performance and pressure drops shall be as specified on equipment schedule.
The heat exchanger shall be capable of withstanding up to 10 inches of differential pressure
without deformation and shall operate at temperatures up to 400 degrees Fahrenheit. Heat
exchanger shall be rated in accordance with ARI.
A. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value
(MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
1. Pleated: Minimum 90 percent arrestance, and MERV 13.
A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with ANSI Z21.47 and
NFPA 54.
1. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA.
D. Power Vent: Integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve.
E. Safety Controls:
1. Gas Control Valve: Modulating.
2. Gas Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing
pilot solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff.
2.9 DAMPERS
A. Outdoor-Air Damper: Linked damper blades, for 0 to 100 percent outdoor air, with motorized
damper.
A. Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible
from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection.
2.11 CONTROLS
C. DDC Controller:
1. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup.
2. Safety Control Operation:
a. Smoke Detectors: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if smoke is detected.
Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel.
b. Fire Alarm Control Panel Interface: Provide control interface to coordinate with
operating sequence described in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm."
c. Low-Discharge Temperature: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if supply air
temperature is less than 40 deg F.
d. Defrost Control for Condenser Coil: Pressure differential switch to initiate defrost
sequence.
3. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on 365-day.
4. Unoccupied Period: Unit Off
a. Heating Setback: 55 deg F.
b. Cooling Setback: 85 deg F.
c. Override Operation: Two hours (adj.).
5. Supply Fan Operation:
2.12 ACCESSORIES
B. LED service lights in sections with access doors. Include transformer if required. Lights shall
be energized even if main disconnect is open.
D. Filter differential pressure switch with sensor tubing on either side of filter. Set for final filter
pressure loss.
A. Roof curbs with vibration isolators and wind restraints are specified in Division 23 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs.
B. Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before
equipment installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure, level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low-Slope
Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop
Air Handling Units and Ducts." and ARI Guideline B. Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate
roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Division 07 Section "Roof
Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete
base with anchor bolts.
B. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural curbs or pilings. Coordinate wall penetrations and
flashing with wall construction. Secure RTUs to structural support with anchor bolts.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest
roof drain or area drain.
C. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb.
2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking
under entire roof curb.
3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23
Section " Air Duct Accessories."
4. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure.
B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do
the following:
1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.
2. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.
3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans.
4. Inspect internal insulation.
5. Verify that labels are clearly visible.
6. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.
7. Verify that controls are connected and operable.
8. Verify that filters are installed.
9. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris.
10. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris.
11. Connect and purge gas line.
12. Remove packing from vibration isolators.
13. Inspect operation of barometric relief dampers.
14. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings.
15. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and
binding.
16. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
17. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
a. Start refrigeration system.
b. Do not operate below recommended low-ambient temperature.
c. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.
18. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences.
A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and air-
distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate
evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or
concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static
pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-
system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Product Requirements."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Cabinet: High strength molded plastic with manufacturer’s standard finish, filter access, and
discharge drain pans with drain connection.
B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
D. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment."
1. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and
permanent lubrication.
A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable
panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base.
Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gauge ports on exterior of casing.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation.
Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor,
relay, and contactor.
1. Compressor Type: Scroll.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
D. Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
B. Thermostat: Low voltage or wireless infrared to control compressor and evaporator fan.
1. Compressor time delay.
2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.
3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,
operating mode, and fan speed.
4. Fan-speed selection, including auto setting.
D. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
E. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install
tubing to allow access to unit.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
1. Water Coil Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic
Piping." Connect to supply and return coil with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange
on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return
connection.
2. Remote Water-Cooled Condenser Connections: Comply with requirements in
Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return with shutoff-duty
valve and union or flange on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and
union or flange on the return connection.
3. Steam Coil Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Steam and
Condensate Heating Piping." Connect to steam piping with shutoff valve and union or
flange; for condensate piping, starting from the coil connection, connect with union or
flange, strainer, trap, and shutoff valve.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
D. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring,
switches, and motor controls.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes multiple evaporator, direct expansion, air cooled, variable capacity, split
system units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components.
Units are designed concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
12. Advanced Diagnostics – Systems shall include a self diagnostic, auto-check function to
detect a malfunction and display the type and location.
13. Each system shall be capable of integrating with open protocol BACnet and LONworks
building management systems. Coordinate with Temperature Controls Contractor.
14. Low Sound Levels – Each system shall use indoor and outdoor units with quiet operation.
See schedule for sound level requirements
15. VFD Inverter Control – Each condensing unit shall use a high efficiency, variable speed
“inverter” compressor coupled with inverter fan motors for superior part load
performance.
a. Compressor capacity shall be modulated automatically to maintain a constant
suction pressure, while varying the refrigerant volume for the needs of the cooling
or heating loads.
b. VRV INDOOR UNITS shall use PID control to control superheat to deliver a
comfortable room temperature condition.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static
pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.
1. Heating Capacities shall be submitted @ -4F.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VRV units to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
F. The equipment supplier shall submit as part of the equipment data package outdoor unit data
sheets. Data sheets to include the following:
Capacities: Cooling
Cooling (Btu/h)
Power Supply:
Maximum Circuit Amps (MCA)
Maximum Fuse Amps (MFA)
Maximum Starting Current (MSC)
Total Over Current Amps (TOCA)
Outdoor Fan Motor
Refrigerant:
Refrigerant Type/Charge
Unit Data:
Max. Number of Indoor Units
Sound Pressure Level at 3ft. (dBA)
Weight (lbs)
Dimensions
The equipment supplier shall guarantee the performance of their system and all published data
submitted. Performance shall be based on the design criteria below.
The equipment supplier shall submit with bid, indoor unit data sheets. Data sheets to include the
following:
Capacities:
Cooling (Btu/h)
Heating (Btu/h) @ 0F
Air Flow (CFM)
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of VRV units
and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product
Requirements."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of roof mounted equipment rails. Roof mounted equipment rails
are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
E. Access shall be provided to each unit for serviceability, filter change, and electrical connection
code clearance access.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
A. The system must be installed by a factory trained contractor. The Variable Refrigerant Volume
System Manufacturer is responsible for including 4 days of Training for the installing contractor
in their equipment proposal. The mechanical contractor’s installation price shall be based on the
systems installation requirements. The mechanical contractor is responsible for evacuating and
pressure testing the refrigerant lines according to VRV manufacturers requirements. The
mechanical contractor is responsible for contacting the Variable Refrigerant Volume system
manufacturer prior to bid to coordinate installation training requirements.
A. The system (VRV INDOOR /Outdoor units) must be started and inspected/approved by the
Variable Refrigerant Volume Manufacturer. The mechanical contractor is responsible for
providing refrigerant and charging the variable refrigerant volume system under direction of the
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
14. The outdoor unit shall be capable of heating operation at 0°F dry bulb ambient
temperature without additional low ambient controls.
15. VRV OUTDOOR UNITS to be factory tested at the factory prior to shipping.
B. Unit Cabinet:
1. The outdoor unit shall be completely weatherproof and corrosion resistant. The unit shall
be constructed from rust-proofed mild steel panels coated with a baked enamel finish.
C. Fan:
1. The condensing unit shall consist of one or more propeller type, direct-drive, variable-
speed fans.
2. The fan shall be a vertical discharge configuration.
3. Nominal sound pressure levels shall be as scheduled on the documents.
4. The fan motor shall have inherent protection and permanently lubricated bearings and be
completely variable speed.
5. The fan motor shall be provided with a fan guard to prevent contact with moving parts.
D. Condenser Coil:
1. The condenser coil shall be manufactured from copper tubes expanded into aluminum
fins to form a mechanical bond.
2. The heat exchanger coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and rifled bore tube design to
ensure high efficiency performance.
3. The heat exchanger on the condensing units shall be manufactured from Hi-X seamless
copper tube with N-shape internal grooves mechanically bonded on to aluminum fins to
an e-Pass Design.
4. The fins are to be covered with an anti- corrosion acrylic resin and hydrophilic film type
E1.
5. The pipe plates shall be treated with powdered polyester resin for corrosion prevention.
The thickness of the coating must be between 2.0 to 3.0 microns.
E. Compressor:
1. The inverter scroll compressors shall be variable speed controlled which is capable of
changing the speed to follow the variations in total cooling and heating load as
determined by the suction gas pressure as measured in the condensing unit. In addition,
samplings of evaporator and condenser temperatures shall be made so that the high/low
pressures detected are read every 20 seconds and calculated. With each reading, the
compressor capacity (INV frequency or STD ON/OFF) shall be controlled to eliminate
deviation from target value.
2. The inverter driven compressor in each condensing unit shall be of highly efficient
reluctance DC (digitally commutating), hermetically sealed scroll with a maximum speed
of 7,980 rpm.
3. Neodymium magnets shall be adopted in the rotor construction to yield a higher torque
and efficiency in the compressor instead of the normal ferrite magnet type. At complete
stop of the compressor, the neodymium magnets will position the rotor into the optimum
position for a low torque start.
4. The capacity control range shall be as low as 16% to 100%.
5. Each non-inverter compressor shall also be of the hermetically sealed scroll type.
6. Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater, high pressure safety switch,
and internal thermal overload protector.
7. Oil separators shall be standard with the equipment together with an intelligent oil
management system.
8. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.
9. compressors shall be balanced by means of the Duty Cycling Function, ensuring
sequential starting of each module at each start/stop cycle, completion of oil return,
completion of defrost or every 8 hours.
F. Electrical:
1. The power supply to the outdoor unit shall be 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz
2. The control voltage between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be 16VDC non-shielded,
stranded 2 conductor cable.
3. The control wiring shall be a two-wire multiplex transmission system, making it possible
to connect multiple indoor units to one outdoor unit with one 2-cable wire, thus
simplifying the wiring operation.
c. The airflow of the unit shall have the ability to shut down one or two sides
allowing for simpler corner installation.
d. Fresh air intake connection flange shall be provided, as denoted on drawings.
e. A branch duct knockout shall exist for branch ducting supply air, where required
on drawings.
f. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and
polyethylene insulation.
5. Fan:
a. The fan shall be direct-drive turbo fan type with statically and dynamically
balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available.
b. The fan motor shall operate on with electrical requirements as scheduled on the
drawings.
c. The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings.
d. The fan motor shall be thermally protected.
6. Filter:
a. The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter with mildew
proof resin.
7. Coil:
a. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded
into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
b. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube
design to ensure highly efficient performance.
c. The coil shall be a 2-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 17 FPI design
completely factory tested.
d. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 1
-1/4 inch outside diameter PVC.
e. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil.
f. A condensate pump with a 21 inch lift (minimum) shall be located below the coil
in the condensate pan with a built in safety alarm.
g. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.
8. Electrical:
a. A separate power supply will be required, as scheduled on the drawings.
b. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air prior to
shipment from the factory.
c. All refrigerant lines must be individually insulated between the outdoor and indoor
units.
d. The indoor units shall be equipped with an integral condensate pump and
condensate alarm switch.
e. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor.
f. The indoor unit will be separately powered with voltages as scheduled on the
drawings.
4. Unit Cabinet:
a. The cabinet shall be space saving and shall be located in the ceiling plenum.
b. Include a ducted discharge collar in front and a mixed air inlet ducted collar in
back of unit.
c. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and
polyethylene insulation.
5. Fan:
a. The fan shall be direct-drive turbo fan type with statically and dynamically
balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available.
b. The fan motor shall operate on with electrical requirements as scheduled on the
drawings.
c. The airflow rate shall be available in high and low settings.
d. The fan motor shall be thermally protected.
6. Filter:
a. The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter with mildew
proof resin.
7. Coil:
a. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded
into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
b. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube
design to ensure highly efficient performance.
c. The coil shall be a 2-row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 17 FPI design
completely factory tested.
d. The refrigerant connections shall be flare connections and the condensate will be 1
-1/4 inch outside diameter PVC.
e. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil.
f. A condensate pump with a 21 inch lift (minimum) shall be located below the coil
in the condensate pan with a built in safety alarm.
g. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.
8. Electrical:
a. A separate power supply will be required, as scheduled on the drawings.
2.4 CONTROLS
A. The unit shall have controls provided to perform input functions necessary to operate the fully
functioning system.
B. Controller with LCD display to be provided by unit manufacturer, with wall mounted
thermostat/ controller capable of individually displaying temperature set point, space
temperature, time of day, and fan speed. Refer to Temperature Control drawings for wall
mounted locations.
C. The unit shall be compatible with interfacing with connection to BacNet networks or interfacing
with connection to BAS system. Consult manufacturer prior to applying controls. Coordinate
with Temperature Controls Contractor.
D. Controls
1. Unit manufacturer shall provide a microprocessor based direct digital control system that
shall provide the following:
a. Direct digital controller interface.
b. Occupied-unoccupied control.
c. Necessary operating interlocks.
d. Interface requirements with the Building Automation System.
1) Communicate with BACnet, Lon, or TCP/IP.
2) Accept occupied/unoccupied scheduling from the BAS.
3) Send alarms to BAS.
2. Sequence of Operation
a. An electronic room temperature sensor provided by the unit manufacturer shall,
through a DDC unitary controller, control the electronic expansion valve as
required to maintain setpoint temperature.
b. The supply fans shall run continuous during occupied mode.
c. During unoccupied mode. The fan shall be off, and shall cycle on in coordination
with the electronic expansion valve as required to maintain night setback
temperature.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
B. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
1. To be used only between VRV Refrigerant Controller and VRV Indoor Units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Install VRV INDOOR UNITS using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
C. Install ground-mounting, VRV OUTDOOR UNITS on 4-inch thick, reinforced concrete base; 4
inches larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete
base.
D. Install VRV OUTDOOR UNIT components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum
static deflection of 1 inch. Refer to Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC Piping and Equipment."
E. Install and connect pre-charged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install
tubing to allow access to unit.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
1. Refer to Drawings for General Refrigerant Piping Details.
2. Manufacturer is required to provide description and quantity of all pipe fittings,
refrigerant controllers, etc. to provide a complete, fully functioning system.
C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Metal
Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply ducts to VRV
INDOOR UNITS with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in
Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
D. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
E. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring,
switches, and motor controls.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
4. Perform additional tests as required by system manufacturer. All tests to be witnessed by
A/E, CM, CA, and/or Owners Representative. Contractor must provide 10 days notice to
CM prior to testing. Testing must be signed-off prior to system start-up.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cabinet unit heaters with centrifugal fans and electric-resistance heating coils.
2. Propeller unit heaters with electric-resistance heating coils.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories for each product indicated.
B. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, drawn to scale,
on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from
installers of the items involved:
1. Suspended ceiling components.
2. Structural members to which unit heaters will be attached.
3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
6. Perimeter moldings for exposed or partially exposed cabinets.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Cabinet Unit Heater Filters: Furnish one spare filter for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
C. Coil Section Insulation: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be aluminum-foil
facing or erosion-resistant coating to prevent erosion of glass fibers.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
2. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. at 75 deg F mean temperature.
3. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed
index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
4. Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916 and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
D. Cabinet: Steel with baked-enamel finish with manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected
by Architect.
1. Vertical Unit, Exposed Front Panels: Minimum 0.0528-inch thick, galvanized, sheet
steel, removable panels with channel-formed edges secured with tamperproof cam
fasteners.
2. Horizontal Unit, Exposed Bottom Panels: Minimum 0.0528-inch thick, galvanized, sheet
steel, removable panels secured with tamperproof cam fasteners and safety chain.
3. Recessing Flanges: Steel, finished to match cabinet.
4. Control Access Door: Key operated.
5. Base: Minimum 0.0528-inch thick steel, finished to match cabinet, 4 inches high with
leveling bolts.
6. Extended Piping Compartment: 8-inch wide piping end pocket.
7. False Back: Minimum 0.0428-inch thick steel, finished to match cabinet.
E. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1 and a minimum efficiency reporting
value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
1. Glass Fiber Treated with Adhesive: 80 percent arrestance and MERV 5.
F. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise
and hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized-steel housing; with fuses in terminal box
for overcurrent protection and limit controls for high-temperature protection. Terminate
elements in stainless-steel machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware.
H. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single field connection.
1. Disconnect switch.
2. Motor speed controller.
B. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in vertical or horizontal
discharge configuration with adjustable discharge louvers.
E. Cabinet Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel applied to factory-assembled and -tested
propeller unit heater before shipping.
F. Discharge Louver: Adjustable fin diffuser for horizontal units and conical diffuser for vertical
units.
1. Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit
controls for high-temperature protection of heaters.
2. Wiring Terminations: Stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant material.
H. Fan: Propeller type with aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan venturi.
I. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment."
1. Motor Type: Permanently lubricated, multispeed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit
heater installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
C. Suspend cabinet unit heaters from structure with elastomeric hangers. Vibration isolators and
seismic restraints are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC Piping and Equipment."
D. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with all-thread hanger rods and elastomeric or
spring hangers. Hanger rods and attachments to structure are specified in Division 23 Section
"Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Vibration hangers are specified in
Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
E. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks of Substantial Completion.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
D. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and
electrical connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
3.5 ADJUSTING
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. The party performing the Work under this Section hereinafter referred to as the Contractor, shall
furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment, services, and related accessories for a complete
installation of all electrical work as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications. Items omitted
from either the Specifications or the Drawings, but shown or described in the other, and all items
necessary to make the electrical system functional and complete per required codes, shall form a
part of the Work. No "extras" will be allowed.
C. All work, material, and equipment shall comply with all requirements of the latest editions and
interim amendments of the National Electrical Code (NEC), National Electrical Safety Code,
National Fire Protection Association, OSHA, Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and all
applicable federal, state, and local laws and ordinances. All electrical equipment provided under
this Contract shall be new (except where otherwise noted) and shall comply with the requirements
of the Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) and bear the UL label.
D. Any discrepancies within Drawings and Specifications shall be promptly brought to the attention
of the engineer for clarification during the bidding period. No allowance shall subsequently be
made to the Contractor by reason of his failure to have brought said discrepancies to the attention
of the Engineer during the bidding period or of any error on the Contractor's part.
E. The Contractor shall check all existing field conditions (or Civil, Structural, Architectural and
Mechanical trades work) for possible interference caused by conditions in the field before bid is
made. No allowance shall subsequently be made to the Contractor by reason of his failure to have
made such examinations or of any error on his part.
F. The Contractor shall be held to have examined the premises and site to as to compare them with
the Contract Documents and to have satisfied himself as to the conditions of the premises, the
site, any obstructions, the actual levels, access panels, and all other existing conditions. The
Contractor shall verify all dimensions in the field, shall check location of and connection to
existing facilities, and shall assume all responsibility for same.
G. Should any changes in the Drawings and Specifications be required to conform to the above
regulations, the Contractor shall notify the Owner or his representative at the time of submitting
his bid. After entering into the Owner-Contractor Agreement, the Contractor shall be held to
complete all Work necessary to meet these requirements without additional expense to the
Owner.
H. The Contractor shall receive, store, uncrate, protect, and install Owner-furnished equipment with
all appurtenances required to place the equipment in operation, ready for use. The Contractor
shall be responsible for the equipment when received, as if he had purchased the equipment
himself.
I. The Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits and inspections required for the Work.
J. The Contractor shall not allow or cause any of the Work to be covered up or enclosed until it has
been inspected. Any Work that is enclosed or covered up before such inspection and test shall be
uncovered at the Contractor's expense; after it has been inspected, the Contractor shall restore the
Work to its original condition at his own expense.
K. All general trades and mechanical drawings shall be checked before installing any outlets, power
wiring, etc. For purposes of these drawings and specification, the word “provide” shall mean
furnish and install.
L. The Contractor shall turn over all certificates of approval for inspections of electrical work to the
Owner promptly when received. These certificates must be received before payment will be made
for the Work involved.
M. The Contractor shall keep an up-to-date record of all deviations from the Contract Documents.
At completion of this Project, the Contractor shall deliver a set of As-Built Drawings and
Specifications showing these deviations to the Owner. Refer to Section 01200, "Field
Procedures."
N. All work shall be done in accordance with the Contract Documents, in a neat and workmanlike
manner consistent with recognized good practice, and shall be subject to the approval of the
Owner or his representative.
O. Certain areas require the Contractor to remove, add to, or relocate portions of existing Work. It
shall be the Contractor's responsibility to remove ceilings, portions of walls, etc., in a manner so
that he may install new Work. The Contractor shall then patch, repair and/or replace ceilings,
walls, etc., to match existing conditions. The above applies to all areas not specifically indicated
on Architectural Drawings as work to be performed by General Trades Contractor(s).
P. If the Contractor fails to do any required patching or repair any damage resulting from the
installation of the electrical Work, such patching or repairing shall be done by the Owner and the
cost shall be paid by the Contractor.
Q. All equipment furnished with finished surfaces from manufacturer are not to be defaced in any
way and shall be cleaned to original finish at time of completion of Work except where otherwise
noted.
R. The Contractor shall conduct such tests and adjustments of equipment as required to verify
equipment performance. Such tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner or his
representative.
S. The Contractor shall remove all debris resulting from the Work, as well as all tools, equipment,
etc., from the site upon completion of this contract. All equipment, including lighting fixtures and
lenses shall be clean and free from dirt, grease, finger marks, etc., before final acceptance.
T. All equipment furnished and work performed under the Contract Documents shall be guaranteed
against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of final
acceptance. Any failure of equipment or work due to defects in materials or workmanship shall be
corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
U. During building operations some existing installation may be exposed that will have to be
changed, altered, re-routed, removed, and/or abandoned. Any such Work which in the trade
comes under the jurisdiction of the Electrical Contractor shall be done by this Contractor without
extra cost to the Owner as though fully detailed and/or described on Plans and in Specifications.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.
2. Substitutions
3. Sleeves for raceways and cables.
4. Sleeve seals.
5. Grout.
6. Common electrical installation requirements.
7. Plywood backing panels.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer Division 01, Section 012500, Substitution Procedures for contractual requirements
B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed
the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. Submission of the
“Substitution Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation must accompany
requests for A/E’s approval. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project
Manager and Specification Department at least ten days prior to bid due date. If a manufacturer
substitution is approved and allowed, it will be issued by Addendum.
C. It is the Contractors responsibility to prove that the product submitted for substation is equal or
exceeds the requirements. The Engineer’s decision will be based on samples submitted and
technical literature presented. If the information provided is not adequate, then the substation
shall be denied.
1.5 COORDINATION
2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other
installations.
3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of
obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
B. Equipment, furnished by others but installed by Division 26 shall include, but is not limited to:
variable frequency controllers, variable speed controllers, motor starters, pump controllers,
disconnect switches, flow switches, pressure switches and other control devices. Refer to
Mechanical system drawings and specifications, such as Division 23, which shall require
equipment to be furnished by them, but installed by others. Division 26 Contractor shall review
those documents and make provisions to install that equipment. Refer to specification section
26 29 13 for additional requirements.
C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete,
masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished
surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section
"Access Doors and Frames."
E. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section "Firestopping."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
sleeve and raceway or cable.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or
conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required
to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.3 GROUT
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-
retardant treated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.
1. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27.
a. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Fire retardant treated wood products shall be free of halogens, sulfates, amononium
phosphate, and formaldehyde.
2. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and wall-mounting
items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange
and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with
these requirements.
A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate
concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall.
E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable,
unless indicated otherwise.
H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry
1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed
surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.
I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and
raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply
with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-
type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for
1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve
seals.
N. Interior Sleeves for Fiber Optical and Voice and Data Communications Cables: Construct of
4-inch metallic conduit, unless otherwise indicated, with insulated bushings on each end.
1. Length: 12 inches longer than width of wall.
2. Location: Install 12 inches above finished ceiling.
3. Manufacturer and model number: Hilti Speed Sleeves
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable
material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve
seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against
pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
C. Paint plywood backing panels with two coats of fire-retardant paint. Do not paint over
classification marking of testing and inspecting agency.
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical
installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and
installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Firestopping."
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for electrical field testing and inspecting of all electrical
systems for this project. Each Division 26 Section shall reference components that require
testing. The detailed requirements shall be defined in this section, including but not limited to
the following:
1. Qualifications of testing agencies and their personnel.
2. Suitability of test equipment.
3. Calibration of test instruments.
4. Coordination requirements for testing and inspecting.
5. Reporting requirements for testing and inspecting.
B. Test Equipment Suitability: Comply with NETA ATS, Acceptance Testing Specification,
Section 5.2.
C. Test Equipment Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS Acceptance Testing Specification,
Section 5.3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
b. After installing transformers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test
for compliance with requirements.
c. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test
parameters.
d. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
2. Test Reports: Prepare written reports to record the following:
a. Test procedures used.
b. Test results that comply with requirements.
c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective actions taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.
3. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified
above.
4. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and
signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
F. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform infrared scan of the following equipment. Remove front and rear panels
so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
piece of equipment tested, 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
2. Instrument: Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
B. Test and Inspection Reports: In addition to requirements specified elsewhere, report the
following:
1. Manufacturer's written testing and inspecting instructions.
2. Calibration and adjustment settings of adjustable and interchangeable devices involved
in tests.
3. Tabulation of expected measurement results made before measurements.
4. Tabulation of "as-found" and "as-left" measurement and observation results.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW, THHN-THWN, XHHW
1. Provide No. 6 AWG and smaller conductors with color-coded insulation.
2. Tape conductors larger than No 6 AWG with the appropriate color tape for a minimum of 6
inches starting from the termination. Each conductor of multi-conductor cables shall be
color coded the same as single conductors. Color coding shall be as shown below.
C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC.
A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
E. Voltage drop shall not exceed 3 percent from panelboard to farthest outlet.
1. Maximum permitted length of 20 amp, 120, 208, and 240 volt circuits using No. 12 AWG
copper wire is 100 feet.
2. Maximum permitted length of 20 amp, 120, 208, and 240 volt circuits using No. 10 AWG
copper wire is 140 feet.
3. Maximum permitted length of 20 amp, 277 and 480 volt circuits using No. 12 AWG copper
wire is 170 feet.
4. Maximum permitted length of 20 amp, 277 and 480 volt circuits using No. 10 AWG copper
wire is 250 feet.
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway; or Type XHHW, single
conductors in raceway.
B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway; or Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type -THWN, single
conductors in raceway; or Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
D. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or
better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Closeout Documents:
1. Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in Part 3
"Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:
a. Test wells.
b. Building Ground rods.
c. Ground rods at light poles
d. Connections to building steel
e. Connections to roof steel
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
B. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, unless
otherwise indicated; with insulators.
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and other items connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type,
with at least two bolts.
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
C. All cable to cable, cable to rod, cable to steel connection shall be welded connectors: Use
exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined
and installation conditions. Exothermic welds shall use powdered copper oxide and aluminum
to form a molded homogeneous copper joint connection between the copper conductor and the
material being bonded to.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
B. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Install bus on insulated spacers 1 inch, minimum, from wall 18 inches above finished
floor, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Dimensions: 0.25 inches-by-2 inches-by-24-inches.
3. Copper
4. Conductors leading to ground ring around transformer pad shall be exothermically
welded to ground bus, all others shall be bolted connections.
B. Grounding Power Feeder Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through bottom of handhole ,
close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above bottom. If necessary, install
ground rod before handhole is placed. Connect ground rod to building ground ring or to ground
wire in duct bank when applicable.
C. Provide Grounding Triangle. This will consist of 3 ground rods spaced 10 feet apart, connected
with a #2/0 bare copper conductor, exothermically bonded to each rod. The Grounding Triangle
shall be connected to the building ground ring.
D. Pad-Mounted Transformers, Switches, and Generators: a ground ring of #4/0 AWG bare copper
conductors shall be provided around the transformer pad. Ground rods shall be placed
approximately 3 ft. outside each corner of the pad. Two #4/0 AWG conductors shall be brought
up into the transformer enclosure for equipment grounding. The transformer neutral shall only
be grounded inside the service entrance (SE) equipment in the building. A #4/0 AWG ground
conductor shall extend from the outdoor ground ring to underground to the main electric room
ground bus.
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with feeders and branch circuits. Equipment
and grounding electrode conductors (all bolted conductors) shall be labeled. Labeling shall
utilize embossed brass metal tags with nylon tie wraps
B. Ground conductors brought through the floor or walls shall be in PVC conduit sleeves.
D. Water Heater: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water
heater. Bolt conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
E. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate
insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with
branch-circuit conductors. Provide a Copper-clad steel ground rod; 5/8-inch-diameter by 8 feet
in length at each light pole in excess of 12 feet tall. Bond ground rod to a ground lug in the
lighting pole with a minimum #6 bare solid conductor routed up through a ½ “ PVC conduit.
A. Voice and Data Communication Equipment: For telephone, video, voice and data, and other
communication equipment.
1. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical
Protection" Chapter.
2. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
3. IT Room: Install 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch copper TMGB. Bond TMGB to the following:
a. Electrical service entrance grounding bus with No. 3/0 AWG TMBC.
b. Structural steel with No. 2 AWG insulated grounding conductor.
c. Cable trays and metallic pathways.
B. Signal and Communication Equipment: For sound, alarm, security, and other communication
equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from
grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central
equipment location.
3.5 INSTALLATION
B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
C. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and
UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system
ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical
service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode
conductor, and install in conduit.
D. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if
any.
2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length
from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes,
and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.
3. When ground rod cannot be driven vertically due to shallow bedrock, drive at 45 degree
angle so that the top if 12 inches below grade.
4. When D2 and D3 cannot be installed, bury ground rods as deep as possible but 30
inches minimum to top.
5. When D2, D3, and D4 cannot be installed, use electrolytic ground rod shall be 2 inch
diameter, hollow Type K copper tube, drilled 12 feet deep into rock, straight shaft with
No. 4/0 copper conductor exothermically welded to tube, 12 inches from top end.
Conductor length shall be as required to run to main grounding bus bar in buildings.
Tube shall have weep holes drilled in sides near ends and shall be prefilled with
metallic salts. Provide protective access box shall be 10 inches diameter, 12 inches
deep, hollow precast concrete with cast iron cover. Provide backfill material shall be as
recommended by manufacturer.
E. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service, unless otherwise indicated. Install
with removable cover at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test
well flush with finished grade or floor.
F. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance,
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to
penetrate any adjacent parts. Install at expansion joints.
2. Catwalks: Bond straps directly to catwalks and basic structure, taking care not to
penetrate any adjacent parts.
3. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install
so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
4. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type
connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
H. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner
column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.
A. Ensure that VFC and motor frame are properly bonded to the grounding conductor and that
equipment grounding conductor is provided in the feeder conduit to the VFC and motor.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify voice and data communications equipment grounding components, complying with
TIA/EIA-606-A.
A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test
wells. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.
a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of
reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground rod
assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order,
and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and
their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena
that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values above, notify
A/E promptly. Provide additional grounds rods connected to the building ground ring or offer
recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated
or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied
force.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are
specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
1. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.
2. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.
3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for
types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes,
and bars; black and galvanized.
G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their
supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Not permitted.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials in which used.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached
structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
8. Wire Rope Systems: Galvanized steel wire rope with spring-loaded, key-releasable locking
device with the following rated strength:
a. 0.059-inch (1.5-mm): 44 pounds.
b. 5/64-inch (2-mm): 100 pounds.
c. 1/8-inch (3-mm): 200 pounds.
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions
of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel
shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring
friction action for retention in support channel.
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC
may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will
be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum
static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus
200 lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless
otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.
5. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
6. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers,
and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-
restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
F. Exposed Conduits: Use one-hole or two-hole straps 8 feet or less AFF. Conduit clamps and
hangers that project past the conduit wall are limited to above 8 feet AFF.
G. Do not use wood plugs, perforated metal bands, chain, or wire to support electrical equipment,
unless otherwise indicated.
H. Open-Web Joists: Install supports only at panel points. Fasten supports to top of bottom chord of
joist. Do not exceed 100 pounds working load per panel point.
I. Roof and Elevated Floor Decks: Do not fasten supports to roof decks or elevated floor decks.
A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-
fabricated metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge
of the base. Chamfer edges 1 inch.
1. Base Height: 3.5 inches, unless indicated otherwise.
A. Construct concrete curbs of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than outline of electrical enclosures above, so conduits will be a minimum of 2 inches
from edge of the base. Chamfer edges 1 inch.
1. Base Height: Match finish wall base material, but not less than 3.5 inches.
3.7 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup
painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous
metal.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-
repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes conduits, fittings, boxes, outlet boxes, floor boxes, high capacity floor
boxes enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. The term raceway shall also apply to conduit
and boxes.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Voice and Data Communications Pathways: Install conduit, raceways, and boxes according to
BICSI TDMM, "Horizontal Distribution Systems" Chapter, and comply with NECA 568.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. HVAC Control and Monitoring: Verify locations of temperature control panels with Building
Management System installer.
B. MC/ER and TR: Verify locations of backboards, cable trays, equipment cabinets and racks, and
conduit stub-outs with Voice and Data Communications Cable installer
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:
NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and
environment in which installed.
1. Die-cast type, pot-metal type, and indenter type fittings are not permitted.
2. Fittings for EMT: Steel, compression type.
G. Joint Compound for RMC or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and
compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance
their conductivity.
B. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
E. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.
F. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
C. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular; one, two, or three gangs as
indicated.
1. Slabs-on-Grade: Threaded hubs to accommodate at least four 1-inch conduits.
a. Minimum Box Height: 3.19 inches without base screws.
b. Minimum Depth of Pour: 3.75 inches.
2. Elevated Floor Slabs: Threaded hubs to accommodate at least four 3/4-inch conduits.
a. Minimum Box Height: 2.00 inches without base screws.
b. Minimum Depth of Pour: 2.00 inches.
A. General Description: Conduit bodies specifically designed to maintain the required bend radius
for data and communications cabling, complying with BISCI TDMM “Horizontal Distribution
Systems” Chapter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
C. Minimum RMC, EMT, Size: 3/4-inch trade size, unless indicated otherwise.
D. Minimum FMC or LFMC Size: 3/4-inch trade size, unless indicated otherwise.
E. Conduit Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. RMC: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. EMT Fittings shall be compression type. No set screw fittings shall be allowed.
F. All raceways shall follow the color scheme listed below. All existing conduits that are reused
shall have their boxes, couplings, and fittings hand painted by brush to match the color scheme
below using the PPG number shown.
A. Flush Boxes in Masonry Walls and Partitions: Use masonry boxes at least 3.5 inches deep.
B. Flush Boxes in Gypsum-Board Partitions: Use square boxes at least 2.125 inches deep with
raised box covers.
C. Flush Device Boxes in Ceilings: Use square boxes at least 2.125 inches deep with raised box
covers.
D. Flush Outlet Boxes in Ceilings: Use 4-inch round or octagonal boxes at least 2.125 inches deep.
E. Surface Boxes: Use cast-metal type with matching cover. Provide knock-out plugs in unused
openings.
F. Technology boxes: back boxes for technology equipment, wireless access points and data drops
shall have a 5 inch square back box.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements applicable to products
specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
D. Support conduits as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems."
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and below floors, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Arrange conduits to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.
3. Do not embed conduits in concrete slabs.
H. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
K. Install conduit sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed conduits, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install conduit
sealing fittings at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.
2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
L. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located
where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length
that exceeds 25 feet.
1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and
quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.
2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of
length of straight run per deg F of temperature change.
3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the
time of installation.
M. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and
semi recessed lighting fixtures.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
2. Equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and
motors shall use LFMC and be limited to 36 inches unless in air plenum.
N. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Coordinate work with masonry contractor. Saw-cut opening
for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Box shall be
vertically plumb and flush with plane of wall, or slightly recessed. All boxes installed improperly
will be replaced at Contractors expense. Provide oversized plate for all boxes that have exposed
joints.
O. Recessed Boxes in Gypsum-Board Partitions: Coordinate work with drywall contractor. Box shall
be vertically plumb and flush with plane of wall, or slightly recessed. All boxes installed
improperly will be replaced at Contractors expense. Provide oversized plate for all boxes that
have exposed joints.
P. Metal Floor box installations: Install all conduit and boxes level prior to pouring concrete. If
owner representative is not present before the concrete is poured, take a minimum of 3 digital
photograph of typical installation. Verify finished floor surface prior to pour. When installed in
tile or finished concrete floor, ensure that final surface fitting and plate will be flush and not
protrude above the finished plane. Install trim kit after floor is poured to fit flush with finished
surface.
Q. Conduits less than 3-inch trade size may be field bent, unless indicated otherwise. Use factory
45 and 90 degree, and special radius elbows for conduits 3-inch and larger.
R. Conduits for Feeders: Electrically continuous, terminated with grounding and insulating
bushings.
T. Finished Spaces: Provide escutcheons where conduits penetrate surfaces of finished spaces.
Match finish of adjacent surfaces.
U. Conduits for Optical Fiber and Voice and Data Communications Cable: Install raceways,
metallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:
1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet.
2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.
3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway
unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or
terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these
requirements.
4. Elbows: Use factory elbows. Field bent elbows are not permitted for optical fiber and
communications cables.
a. Radii of Elbows for Conduits 1-1/2-inches and Larger: At least 10 times inside
diameter of conduit.
5. Conduit Bodies: Use telecommunications conduit bodies.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cable trays to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
A. Aluminum cable tray may be stored outside without cover, but shall be loosely stacked, elevated
off the ground, and ventilated to prevent staining during storage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance only when allowed in Section
260050, General Electrical Requirements.
A. Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Aluminum, complying with NEMA VE 1, Aluminum
Association's Alloy 6063-T6 for rails, rungs, and cable trays, and Alloy 5052-H32 or Alloy 6061-
T6 for fabricated parts; with chromium-zinc, ASTM F 1136, splice-plate fasteners, bolts, and
screws
B. Sizes and Configurations: Refer to Part 3 Article "Cable Tray Schedule" for specific
requirements for types, materials, sizes, and configurations.
A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and
finishes as cable tray.
B. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
F. Where cable tray would penetrate wall (4) 4” Hilti Speed sleeves shall be used.
G. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers with re-enterable fire-rated pathways according
to Division 07 Section "Firestopping." Provide quantity to match cross sectional area of cable
tray:
H. Workspace: Install cable trays with enough space to permit access for installing cables.
1. Cable tray will be the lowest system in the ceiling space
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground cable trays according to manufacturer's written instructions and Division 26 Section
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
A. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for compliance
with requirements. Perform the following field quality-control survey:
1. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in cable
tray, vibration, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or have
caused damage.
2. Verify that there is no intrusion of such items as pipe, hangers, or other equipment that
could damage cables.
3. Remove deposits of dust, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any
blockage of tray ventilation.
4. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical continuity.
Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in suspect
areas.
5. Check for missing or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with
specified hardware.
6. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that all
takeoff raceways are bonded to cable tray.
7. Fabrication in the field, other than the shortening of a single straight section per each
straight run to meet field conditions, will not be permitted. Corners, intersections, and tee
units shall be standard manufactured units for this purpose; modification of straight sections
to meet these needs will not be permitted. Where vertical space permits, and as approved by
the Project Manager, tees and intersections can be in the form of two separate, straight tray
sections at differing elevations; minimum spacing between these sections in the vertical
direction shall be 6 in.
8. Cable trays are to be routed near the side of the utility or pedestrian corridor wherever
possible. Cable tray locations shall be coordinated with adjacent utilities so that the tray will
be accessible for adding or removing cables in the future. Routing shall also be adjusted so
as not to obstruct access to other utility items that would routinely require access for
maintenance or adjustment.
3.4 PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITION
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings for Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures: Include plans,
elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories, including the following:
1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.
2. Reinforcement details.
3. Frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings.
4. Ladder details.
5. Grounding details.
6. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons, and sumps.
7. Joint details.
B. Shop Drawings for Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete:
Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details,
including the following:
1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.
2. Cover design.
3. Grounding details.
4. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons.
2. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete and handholes, as
required by ASTM C 858.
3. Source quality-control test reports.
4. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent
bending, warping, and deforming.
B. Store precast concrete and other factory-fabricated underground utility structures at Project site as
recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings
are visible.
C. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other
utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field.
B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into handholes, and boxes with final
locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with other utilities,
underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those
indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to and handholes,
and as approved by A/E.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT
A. Rigid Galvanized.Steel Conduit: Comply with ANSI C80.1. Use RGS when noted in this
specification or where required on drawings.
B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer
as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.
A. Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 6 & 8, Type EB-20-PVC, ASTM F 512,
UL 651A, with matching fittings by the same manufacturer as the duct, complying with
NEMA TC 9.
B. Duct Accessories:
1. Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and sizes
of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacings indicated while
supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling.
2. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Division 260553 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and
aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a
combination of the two.
C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded,
fiberglass-reinforced, polyester resin enclosure joined to polymer concrete top ring or frame.
D. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers of
fiberglass.
2.4 PRECAST
A. Comply with ASTM C 858, with structural design loading as specified in Part 3 "Underground
Enclosure Application" Article and with interlocking mating sections, complete with accessories,
hardware, and features.
1. Duct Entrances in Manhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each
entering duct.
a. Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated.
b. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near interior
corners of to facilitate racking of cable.
B. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability
properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with
the ground-water level at grade.
2.5 CAST-IN-PLACE
B. Materials: Comply with ASTM C 858 and with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037.
B. Nonconcrete Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of and boxes for
compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.
1. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency
or the manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by
manufacturer.
2. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with
ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EB-20-PVC, in concrete-
encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. A feeder is defined as any circuit shown on the
one line diagram or any circuit with an overcurrent device in excess of 150 amperes.
Underground feeders below concrete slab on grade shall be excluded from the requirement of
concrete encasement.
B. Underground Ducts for any electrical feeder or branch that is part of the Emergency System or
Optional Standby System or Legally Required Standby System: RNC, NEMA Type EB-20-PVC,
in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in direct-buried duct
bank, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Underground Ducts for Telephone, Communications, or Data Utility Service Cables: RNC,
NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, installed in direct-buried duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Underground Ducts for Telephone, Communications, or Data Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-
40-PVC, in direct-buried duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Install underground ducts for telephone, communications, or data utility service cables at least
24 inches from underground ducts for electrical feeders or branch circuits.
G. Underground Ducts Crossing Paved Paths, Walkways, Driveways, and Roadways: RNC, NEMA
Type EPC-40-PVC, encased in reinforced concrete.
A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less, Including Telephone, Communications, and Data
Wiring:
1. Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17,
H-20 structural load rating.
2. Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional,
Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Use one of the following:
a. Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.
b. Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.
c. Fiberglass enclosures with polymer concrete frame and cover, SCTE 77, Tier 15
structural load rating.
3. Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading
by Vehicles: Use one of the following:
a. Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-10 structural load rating.
b. Polymer concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.
c. Heavy-duty fiberglass units with polymer concrete frame and cover, SCTE 77, Tier 8
structural load rating.
4. Units Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin
or high-density plastic, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf vertical
loading.
5. Minimum Dimensions for Telephone, Communications, and Data Wiring Handholes: 30 by
42 by 36-inches deep.
3.3 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Division 31 Section "Earth Moving," but do not use
heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.
B. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward and handholes and away from
buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two to drain in both
directions.
C. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use
manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches, both horizontally and
vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in
same plane.
E. Duct Entrances to Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced
approximately 10 inches o.c. for 5-inch ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.
1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet from the end bell without
reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.
2. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.
F. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at
least 10 feet outside the building wall without reducing duct line slope away from the building,
and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition.
Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Division 26 Section "Common Work
Results for Electrical."
G. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare
ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig hydrostatic
pressure.
H. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- test nylon cord in ducts, including spares.
9. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment
and at building entrances through the floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase
coupling with 3 inches of concrete.
b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend
steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of base. Install insulated
grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
1) Where steel conduit stub-ups are prohibited by the electrical utility company, use
manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups. Extend concrete encasement throughout
the length of the elbow
10. Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning
tape directly above line at approximately 8 inches below finished grade. As a minimum,
bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above concrete envelope. Align tape parallel
to and within 3 inches of the centerline of duct bank. Provide multiple tapes where width of
multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.
Space additional tapes 12 inches apart, horizontally.
b. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a
minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated
grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
1) Where steel conduit stub-ups are prohibited by the electrical utility company, use
manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups. Extend concrete encasement throughout
the length of the elbow
11. Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning
tape directly above line at approximately 8 inches below finished grade. As a minimum,
bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above ducts. Align tape parallel to and within
3 inches of the centerline of duct bank. Provide multiple tapes where width of multiple lines
installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches overall. Space additional tapes 12 inches
apart, horizontally.
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with
connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box
extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as
recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from
1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.
C. Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade.
Set covers of other handholes 1 inch above finished grade.
D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line, 30 inches below grade.
E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators,
as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm
lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve
adequate working clearances in the enclosure.
F. Field-cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written
instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for
terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.
G. For enclosures installed in asphalt paving and subject to occasional, nondeliberate, heavy-vehicle
loading, form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with, enclosure and with top
surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on compacted earth.
1. Concrete: 3000 psi , 28-day strength, complying with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete," with a troweled finish.
2. Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep.
3.6 GROUNDING
A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of
underground ducts and utility structures.
2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-of-
round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated,
remove obstructions and retest.
3. Test manhole and handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and
bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Division 26
Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
3.8 CLEANING
A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts.
Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout
ducts.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and
Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use
consistent designations throughout Project.
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1
to 2 inches wide.
B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
B. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with
colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.
D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -
EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN
FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq.
in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.
A. All labels required below in Part 3.0 shall meet the following requirements.
1. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic, melamine label or metal. Mounted with
corrosion-resistant screws or permanent adhesive.
2. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic, melamine label or metal. Mounted with
corrosion-resistant screws.
3. Nameplates shall have a white background with black engraved letters and numbers
4. Nameplates for emergency systems or power transfer equipment shall have a red
background with white engraved letters and numbers.
5. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
6. Do not use Kroy labels, paper labels
7. Do not use double stick tape to attach laminated labels.
B. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting
Sections.
C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Raceways and Duct Banks More Than 600 V Concealed within Buildings: 4-inch- wide black
stripes on 10-inch centers over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and
is 12 inches wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with
3-inch high black letters on 20-inch centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following
finished surfaces:
1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that is
in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in the
building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
B. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables More Than 600 V: Identify with "DANGER-HIGH
VOLTAGE" in black letters at least 2 inches high, with snap-around labels. Repeat legend at 10-
foot maximum intervals.
C. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Fire Alarm Systems: Identify junction boxes by painting
boxes and covers red.
D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors No. 4 AWG and
larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use marker tape. Identify
source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase
in addition to the above.
E. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: All branch circuits shall be marked in every accessible
junction box, pull box, wireway, panelboard, disconnect switch, motor control center, surface
mounted raceway, hand hole, etc.
F. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source and
circuit number.
G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and
signal connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull
points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by
manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
H. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power,
lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install as required in Div 26
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
I. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply
with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply baked-enamel or metal-backed, butyrate warning signs.
Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door,
cover, or other access.
1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment
including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise
indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar
equipment in finished spaces.
J. Instruction Signs:
1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs
with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red
background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment
used for power transfer.
K. Factory installed nameplates. All equipment shall have a factory installed nameplates. Do not
install nameplates inside of the equipment. Nameplate shall be metal. Provide the following
information on the exterior of panel or inside the door.
1. UL listing.
2. Name of manufacturer
3. Ampere and voltage rating and phasing
4. Short circuit rating
L. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that
is consistent with drawings, wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its
own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. All electrical equipment shall have nameplates identifying the name of the piece of
equipment or the name of the equipment served (disconnects, starters, etc.). Where the
equipment is remote from its electrical source under the equipment name in smaller
letters the words FED FROM followed by the source panel or riser name shall be
included
b. Nameplates shall be laminated phenolic legend plates with black letters on white
surround for normal power, white letters on a red surround for emergency power and red
letters on a white surround for stand‐by power.
c. Nameplates shall have minimum 0.25 in. high letters for small equipment and
disconnects, 0.5 in. high for medium‐sized wall mounted equipment such as panel boards
and individual Size 2 starters and above, and 2 in. high for freestanding equipment such
as large panel boards, switchgear, and transformers.
d. The nameplates shall be attached with stainless steel screws.
e. All devices, switches, and receptacles shall be labeled with panel and circuit number that
serves them. Labels shall be made from clear label tape with 1/8” high black text. Label
shall be adhered to the front face of the device plate.
f. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
g. (For example) PANEL 1AL1, 1AL2. [Line 2] FED FROM MSB1
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.
b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
c. Electrical switchgear and switchboards.
d. Transformers.
e. Electrical substations.
f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
g. Disconnect switches.
h. Motor starters.
i. Push-button stations.
j. Power transfer equipment.(Identify “Emergency” and “Optional Standby”)
k. Contactors.
l. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
m. Power-generating units.
n. Uninterruptible power supply equipment.
o. Junction boxes and pull boxes with covers larger than 5-by-5-inches.
3. For wiring devices: On front of cover plate, write the panel name for energy source and
circuit number with permanent, indelible ink.
4. For small Pull Boxes, and small Junction Boxes (less than 5-by-5-inches): On front of
cover plate, write the panel name for energy source and circuit number with permanent,
indelible ink.
M. Nominal System Voltage Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique
nominal system voltage and color-coding label that is consistent with drawings, wiring diagrams,
schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 3/8-
inch- high letters on 3/4-inch- high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels
1.5 inches high.
b. (For example) 208/120 V, 3 PH-4W
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards.
b. Electrical switchgear and switchboards.
c. Motor-control centers.
d. Safety switches used for service entrance disconnecting means or in mechanical
rooms.
e. Power transfer equipment
f. Generators
N. Combined equipment labels. When required above a single nameplate can be created for all
required information. The equipment identification label MUST appear on the first line and shall
be notably larger font than the rest of the information, and all information shall appear on a
separate line. (For example)
PANEL 1AL1
208/120 V, 3 PH-4W
FED FROM MAIN SWITCHBOARD MSBL
O. Main Service Entrance Panels or Switchboards AIC Label: Provide an engraved nameplate
adjacent to the manufacturers nameplate that dispalys the AIC withstand, with the following data.
1. Maximum available calculated 3 phase fault current. (or single phase when applicable)
2. Current date.
P. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide type-written or laser printed circuit directory on heavy
card stock. Arrange in two columns with odd numbered circuits on left and even numbered
circuits on right. Include panelboard identification at the top and installation date. Indicate spare
circuit breakers: “SPARE”. Install in metal frame with clear plastic cover over directory.
Handwritten directories are not acceptable. Indicating the load description for all circuit numbers
installed.
Q. Feeder and Branch Circuit Load Identification Labels: On each overcurrent protective device,
install unique load designation label that is consistent with drawings, wiring diagrams, schedules,
and Operation and Maintenance Manual.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide type-written or laser printed circuit directory
on heavy card stock. Arrange in two columns with odd numbered circuits on left and
even numbered circuits on right. Include panelboard identification at the top and
installation date. Indicate spare circuit breakers: “SPARE”. Install in metal frame
with clear plastic cover over directory. Handwritten directories are not acceptable.
Indicating the load description for all circuit numbers installed.
b. Lighting and Appliance Branch-Circuit Panelboards: Use room names and numbers
furnished by Owner for the actual room numbers. Do not use room names and
numbers indicated on Contract Drawings. Load description shall identify each circuit
number with its clear, evident, and specific purpose. Load description shall include
sufficient detail to allow each circuit to be distinguished from all others.
2. Distribution Panels and Switchboards: Provide a load identification nameplate adjacent to
each overcurrent protective device. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text
with 3/8-inch high letters on 3/4-inch high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use
labels 1.5 inches high.
a. Label shall identify each circuit number with its clear, evident, and specific purpose.
Load description shall include sufficient detail to allow each circuit to be distinguished
from all others. Do not use paper labels. Use room names and numbers furnished by
Owner for the actual room numbers. Do not use room names and numbers indicated
on Contract Drawings.
R. GFI receptacles: Provide a self adhesive, factory furnished label on receptacles cover plate,
“Protected from ground fault device” (or words to that effect). Apply for all standard receptacles
that are fed from a ground fault circuit interrupting breaker or fed downstream from a ground
fault circuit interrupting receptacle (as a thru feed device).
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Attach signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and
substrate.
E. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 09 painting
Sections.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
B. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the
course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used
therein.
C. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes
the affected portion from the system.
E. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to
the wiring system of the premises served.
B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices
submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form.
1. Short-circuit study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
2. Short-circuit study and equipment evaluation report; signed, dated, and sealed by a
qualified professional engineer.
a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution
equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in
equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary
submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and
associated characteristics is satisfactory.
b. Revised single-line diagram, reflecting field investigation results and results of
short-circuit study.
B. Product Certificates: For short-circuit study software, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.
A. Studies shall use Easy Power or SKM Power Tools. Software algorithms shall comply with
requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are
unacceptable.
C. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
capability to adjust overcurrent devices and to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member
company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
C. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall have the capability
to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.
A. Executive summary.
B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and
guide for interpretation of the computer printout.
C. One-line diagram, showing the following from the utility transformer to all three phase
electrical equipment:
1. Protective device designations, ampere ratings, and settings.
F. Short-Circuit Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article in the
Evaluations.
H. Results of the short circuit study are to match the AIC ratings of each piece of electrical
equipment on this project. Coordinate with gear supplier on AIC ratings of equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support the short-circuit study. Comply with
recommendations in IEEE 551 as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the
field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in
charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds
NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification.
1. Product Data for Project's overcurrent protective devices involved in overcurrent
protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent
with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals,
input and output data, and recommended device settings.
2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service.
3. Power sources and ties.
4. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,
impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.
5. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and
impedance.
6. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of
breaker, type of trip, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.
7. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated
kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.
8. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and
conductor material.
9. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.
10. Cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or
nonmagnetic).
A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399.
E. Begin short-circuit current analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent
protective devices as follows:
F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout
electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and
alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.
G. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous
motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase
ac systems. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address the
asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment.
1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as
defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.
H. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault at each
of the following:
1. Electric utility's supply termination point.
2. Incoming switchgear.
3. Unit substation primary and secondary terminals.
4. Low-voltage switchgear.
5. Motor-control centers.
6. Control panels.
7. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches.
8. Branch circuit panelboards.
9. Disconnect switches.
3.3 ADJUSTING
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's operating and maintenance personnel in the use of study results.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
B. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the
course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used
therein.
C. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes
the affected portion from the system.
E. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to
the wiring system of the premises served.
B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices
submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form.
1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
2. Study and equipment evaluation reports.
3. Overcurrent protective device coordination study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a
qualified professional engineer.
a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution
equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in
equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary
submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and
associated characteristics is satisfactory.
B. Product Certificates: For overcurrent protective device coordination study software, certifying
compliance with IEEE 399.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the overcurrent protective devices to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"
include the following:
a. The following parts from the Protective Device Coordination Study Report:
1) One-line diagram.
2) Protective device coordination study.
3) Time-current coordination curves.
b. Power system data.
A. Studies shall use Easy Power or SKM. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of
standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are unacceptable.
B. Coordination Study Software Developer Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets
computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude
on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.
1. The computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional
engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development
Professional certification.
D. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
capability to adjust overcurrent devices and to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member
company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Software Developers:
1. Easy Power
2. SKM Power Tools
C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the
capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in
IEEE 399.
A. Executive summary.
B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms and
guide for interpretation of the computer printout.
C. Coordination Study shall be performed from secondary of utility transformer and for all 3 phase
electrical equipment.
I. Recommended circuit breaker settings from this study are to be applied to the applicable circuit
breaker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical
distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.
1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been
assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved
prior to coordination study may not be used in study.
A. Comply with IEEE 242 for calculating short-circuit currents and determining coordination time
intervals.
C. The study shall be based on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.
E. Begin analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent protective devices as
follows:
1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less.
F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout
electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and
alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.
H. Motor Protection:
1. Select protection for low-voltage motors according to IEEE 242 and NFPA 70.
2. Select protection for motors served at voltages more than 600 V according to IEEE 620.
I. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-
32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and protection recommendations in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that
equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping
time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine
temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed
standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.
K. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous
motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase
ac systems. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address the
asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment.
1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as
defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.
L. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault and
single line-to-ground fault at each of the following:
1. Electric utility's supply termination point.
2. Switchgear.
3. Unit substation primary and secondary terminals.
4. Low-voltage switchgear.
5. Motor-control centers.
6. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches.
7. Branch circuit panelboards.
A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the overcurrent protective device study.
1. Verify completeness of data supplied in the one-line diagram on Drawings. Call
discrepancies to the attention of Architect.
2. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action
submittals and information submittals for this Project.
3. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated obtain required electrical distribution
system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and
engineers. The qualifications of technicians and engineers shall be qualified as defined by
NFPA 70E.
B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study. The list below is a
guide. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 551 for the amount of detail required to be
acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the
engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative
who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III
certification.
1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved
in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags
that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective
device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.
2. Electrical power utility impedance at the service.
3. Power sources and ties.
4. Short-circuit current at each system bus, three phase and line-to-ground.
5. Full-load current of all loads.
6. Voltage level at each bus.
7. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,
impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.
8. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and
impedance.
9. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of
breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker
settings.
10. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated
kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.
11. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios,
potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.
12. Maximum demands from service meters.
13. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and
conductor material.
14. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.
15. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material, and conduit material
(magnetic or nonmagnetic).
16. Medium-voltage cable sizes, lengths, conductor material, and cable construction and
metallic shield performance parameters.
17. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with
tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:
a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting
and stopping.
b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush
current, and overload capability.
c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of
start, and thermal-damage curve.
d. Generator thermal-damage curve.
e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.
f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility
company.
g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.
h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere
or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range,
and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.
i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range,
instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for
overcurrent relays.
j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and SCCR in amperes
rms symmetrical.
k. Identify series-rated interrupting devices for a condition where the available fault
current is greater than the interrupting rating of the downstream equipment. Obtain
device data details to allow verification that series application of these devices
complies with NFPA 70 and UL 489 requirements.
A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings provided by
the coordination study. Field adjustments shall be completed by the engineering service division
of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.
C. Testing and adjusting shall be by a full-time employee of the Field Adjusting Agency, who
holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III
certification.
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform
NETA tests and inspections for all adjustable overcurrent protective devices.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage the Coordination Study Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in the
following:
1. Acquaint personnel in the fundamentals of operating the power system in normal and
emergency modes.
2. Hand-out and explain the objectives of the coordination study, study descriptions,
purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for
interpreting the time-current coordination curves.
3. Adjust, operate, and maintain overcurrent protective device settings.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes a computer-based, arc-flash study to determine the arc-flash hazard distance
and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical
equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the
course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used
therein.
B. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes
the affected portion from the system.
D. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to
the wiring system of the premises served.
B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following submittals after the approval of system
protective devices submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form.
1. Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
2. Arc-flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution
equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in
equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary
submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and
associated characteristics is satisfactory.
B. Product Certificates: For arc-flash hazard analysis software, certifying compliance with
IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.
A. Studies shall use Easy Power or SKM Power Tools. Software algorithms shall comply with
requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are
unacceptable.
C. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
capability to adjust overcurrent devices and to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member
company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Software Developers:
1. Easy Power
2. SKM Power Tools
C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the
capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in
IEEE 399.
A. Executive summary.
C. One-line diagram, showing the following from the utility transformer to all three phase
electrical equipment:
1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings.
2. Cable size and lengths.
E. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short Circuit Study Output" Paragraph in "Short-
Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 26 05 72 "Overcurrent Protective Device
Short-Circuit Study."
I. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a definition of
terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.
K. UV resistant labels for each piece of equipment and field applied to that equipment.
B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH
HAZARD," and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc-flash hazard
analysis:
1. Location designation.
2. Nominal voltage.
3. Flash protection boundary.
4. Hazard risk category.
5. Incident energy.
6. Working distance.
7. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals. Proceed with arc-flash study only
after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that
have not been submitted and approved prior to arc-flash study may not be used in study.
A. Comply with NFPA 70E and its Annex D for hazard analysis study.
B. Preparatory Studies:
1. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short-Circuit Study Output" Paragraph in
"Short-Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 26 05 72 "Overcurrent
Protective Device Short-Circuit Study."
2. Protective Device Coordination Study Report Contents: As specified in "Protective
Device Coordination Study Report Contents" Article in Section 26 05 73 "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study."
D. Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in the electrical
distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts.
E. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based on the calculated
arc-flash boundary, considering incident energy of 1.2 cal/sq.cm.
F. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when
performing arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall
take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or
decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented as
follows:
1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond three to five
cycles.
2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed to match
the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g., contributions from permanent
magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to three per unit after 10 cycles).
G. Arc-flash computation shall include both line and load side of a circuit breaker as follows:
1. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure.
2. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location.
H. Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap maximum
clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B.1.2.
A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the arc-flash hazard analysis.
1. Verify completeness of data supplied on the one-line diagram on Drawings. Call
discrepancies to the attention of Architect.
2. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action
submittals and information submittals for this Project.
3. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated, obtain required electrical distribution
system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and
engineers.
B. Electrical Survey Data: Gather and tabulate the following input data to support study. Comply
with recommendations in IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E as to the amount of detail that is required
to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control
of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its
representative who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing
Level III certification.
1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved
in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags
that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective
device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.
2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service.
3. Power sources and ties.
4. Short-circuit current at each system bus, three phase and line-to-ground.
5. Full-load current of all loads.
6. Voltage level at each bus.
7. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,
impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in per cent, and phase shift.
8. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating and impedance.
9. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of
breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker
settings.
10. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated
kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.
11. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios,
potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.
12. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and
conductor material.
13. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.
14. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material
(magnetic or nonmagnetic).
15. Medium-voltage cable sizes, lengths, conductor material, and cable construction and
metallic shield performance parameters.
3.4 LABELING
A. Apply one arc-flash label for 600-V ac, 480-V ac, and applicable 208-V ac panelboards and
disconnects and for each of the following locations:
1. Motor-control center section.
2. Low-voltage switchboard.
3. Switchgear section.
4. Medium-voltage switch section.
5. Control panel.
A. Install the arc-fault warning labels under the direct supervision and control of the Arc-Flash
Study Specialist.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage the Arc-Flash Study Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in the potential
arc-flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment and the significance of the
arc-flash warning labels.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for responsibilities of
Contractor, Owner, and Commissioning Authority.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Contractor shall perform commissioning requirements specified in Section 010800 and other
sections referenced in Section 010800.
b. Switchboards
c. Power and lighting panelboards
3. Grounding systems
4. Ground fault detection systems
5. Emergency Power Systems
a. Generator Set
b. Automatic Transfer Switch
6. Thermal Imaging of all power and lighting panels to be included in the electrical scope of
work.
C. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
1. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after
Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so
joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
2. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
3. Instruments and Equipment:
a. Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect
significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
A. Standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and required
functional performance testing shall be provided by the Contractor for the equipment being
tested. For example, the electrical contractor shall ultimately be responsible for standard testing
equipment for the electrical system, except for equipment specific to and used by Commissioning
Authority in their commissioning responsibilities.
B. Special equipment, tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a piece of
equipment) required for testing equipment, according to these Contract Documents shall be
included in the base bid price to the Contractor and left on site, except for stand-alone
datalogging equipment that may be used by the Commissioning Authority.
C. Datalogging equipment and software required to test equipment will be provided by the
Commissioning Authority, but shall not become the property of the Owner.
D. Testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and measure system
performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke
detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where title below introduces lists, the following requirement applies for
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance only when allowed in Section
260050, General Electrical Requirements.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Intermatic, Inc.
2. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls.
3. TORK.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Intermatic, Inc.
2. Leviton Mfg. Co., Inc.; Lighting Control Division.
3. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls.
4. TORK.
B. Description: Solid state, with SPST or DPST dry contacts as required for application, rated for
1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or
microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A.
1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off
levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of photocell to prevent fixed light
sources from causing turn-off.
2. Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation.
3. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor, complying with IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2,
and IEEE 62.45 for Category A1 locations.
4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or
stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Sensor Switch, Inc.; an Acuity Brands company.
B. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit,
complying with NEMA WD 7.
1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, self adjusting to turn lights on when covered area is
occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, manually
adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.
2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.
Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.
3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A
tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc,
150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.
a. Provide dry contact for integration with building management system in addition to
contact required for lighting control.
4. Mounting:
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.
b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical
enclosure.
c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged
door.
5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation
of the sensor.
6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.
7. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; keep lighting off when
selected lighting level is present.
C. Dual-Technology Type (Plan Type “CT”): Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a
combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology
or combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by
operating controls on unit.
1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.
2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a
human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in, and detect a person of average
size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at
an approximate speed of 12 inches/s .
3. (Plan Type “CT”) 360 Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere
within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.
4. (Plan Type “CT”) 180 Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere
within a half circular area of 1200 sq. ft. (min.) when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.
Provide with ceiling mounting bracket if not supplied as standard with sensor
D. Wall Mounted Dual-Technology Type (Plan Type “WT”): Wall mounting; detect occupancy by
using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular
technology or combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the
field by operating controls on unit.
1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.
2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a
human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in, and detect a person of average
size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at
an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.
3. Detection Coverage: Detect occupancy anywhere within a 180 degree area of 1200 sq. ft.
(min.) when mounted at 96-inches above finish floor.
4. Mounting: Articulating mounting base.
F. Power Pack: Self-contained power pack with transformer and relay (an ON/OFF switch
controlled by a circuit) compatible with the supplied occupancy sensors designed for low-voltage
24 VDC occupancy sensors.
1. Universal voltage input (100–277 VAC; 50/60Hz).
2. Automatic voltage detection.
3. Electrical load switching capability: maximum of 20 Amps.
4. Regulated 24 VDC current; 150mA output; short circuit protected.
5. Zero Arc Point Switching.
6. Plenum rated.
7. Suitable for mounting inside or outside a junction box, or inside a ballast or driver cavity.
8. UL and cUL listed
A. Manufacturers:
1. Sensor Switch, Inc.; an Acuity Brands company.
B. Performance Requirements: Suitable for operation in ambient temperatures ranging from minus
40 to plus 130 deg F, rated as raintight according to UL 773A.
1. Operation: Turn lights on when sensing infrared energy changes between background and
moving body in area of coverage; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a
minimum range of 1 to 30 minutes.
2. Mounting:
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outdoor junction box.
b. Relay: Internally mounted in a standard weatherproof electrical enclosure.
c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged
door.
3. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.
4. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 1 to 20 fc ; keep lighting off during
daylight hours.
D. Individually Mounted Sensor: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with
UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.
1. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A
tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc,
150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.
2. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation
of the sensor.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Daylight Sensors: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate relay unit,
to detect changes in lighting levels that are perceived by the eye. Cadmium sulfide photoresistors
are not acceptable.
1. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated relay, complying with UL 773A.
Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.
2. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A
tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc,
150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.
3. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 10 to 200 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off
levels within that range.
4. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds to prevent cycling, with deadband
adjustment.
5. Indicator: Two LEDs to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2. Square D; Schneider Electric.
B. Description: Electrically operated and electrically held, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and
UL 508.
1. Current Rating for Switching: 30-A LED lighting rating,
2. Contacts: Two through 12 poles, field-convertible contacts.
3. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the
point of installation.
4. Control Circuit: 120 or 277V Coil as shown on drawings: Provide integral control power
transformer, with integral primary and secondary fusing. With sufficient capacity to operate
connected load plus 100 percent spare capacity.
5. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1.
6. Provide with the following control and pilot devices, matching the NEMA type specified for
the enclosure:
a. Hand/Off/Automatic selector switch in cover.
b. Green pilot light to indicate contacts are energized.
B. Whole Circuit Emergency Transfer Devices: When the facility has an emergency generator,
provide a field mounted, emergency transfer switch unit, adjacent to emergency panel as shown
on drawings.
1. Comply with UL 924.
2. Provide 120 or 277 V, 60 Hz operation as indicated.
3. Provide threaded hub to attach to electrical box.
4. Provide temperature rating from minus 4 deg F to 131 deg F.
5. Provide device capable of switching 20 amps, minimum, electronic fluorescent or
incandescent load.
6. LED lamp(s) as intended shall display Normal Mode Operation: Normal AC power is
present. AC load controlled by wall switch.
7. LED lamp(s) as intended shall display Emergency Mode Operation: Normal AC power
fails. Emergency transfer device senses normal AC power failure and automatically
switches to emergency AC power, bypassing wall switch. When normal AC power is
restored, emergency transfer device switches system back to normal mode operation.
8. Provide external push to test button.
9. Provide one device per each emergency circuit, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not
smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than
No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Provide occupancy sensors, power packs, and all associated accessories, backboxes, conduit,
wiring, etc. for a complete installation of occupancy sensor controlled lighting for rooms
indicated as requiring occupancy sensor control on the Drawings
B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas
indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: Adjust each sensor to suit occupied conditions. Adjust time delay on
all occupancy sensors to its maximum setting, 30 minutes or longer. Adjust sensitivity to quickly
pick up motion or presence of a person. Coordinate any required adjustments of occupancy
sensors (as applicable for selected manufacturer) with the Owner and make any adjustments as
directed.
E. Wire occupancy sensors per manufacturer’s recommendations to allow for both sensor and
manual control of lighting as indicated on the Drawings.
F. Power packs shall be provided in the quantity required to serve occupancy sensor(s) with the
switching and branch circuiting schemes indicated on the Drawings. Power pack
locations/quantities are not indicated on the Drawings. Power packs shall be plenum rated.
Install power pack on local branch circuit junction box serving local area lighting.
A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and non-power-
limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.
2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each
sensor.
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
adjust and test for compliance with requirements.
2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays.
B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-
site assistance in adjusting the angle of any luminaire that had not been properly aimed. Provide
up to one visit to Project during the evening hours for this purpose.
B. Adjust all Photoelectric switches so that they are not directed toward artificial light source which
will provide a false off signal. Aim all devices toward the North sky exposure. Calibrate so that
they will only energize luminaire in darkness of 1.5 to 3 footcandles.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with
capacities up to 1000 kVA:
1. Distribution transformers.
2. High efficiency transformers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-
bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where title below introduces lists, the following requirement applies for
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2. Square D; Schneider Electric.
B. Comply with NEMA ST 20 and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
G. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: Two 5 percent taps below normal full capacity.
H. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent taps
below normal full capacity.
I. Insulation Class for Transformers Rated 14 kVA and Smaller: 180 deg C, UL-component-
recognized insulation system with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient
temperature.
M. Terminal Boards: Provide top or bottom mounted terminal boards for transformers rated 25 kVA
and larger. Loose leads are not acceptable.
N. Equipment lugs: Provide a mechanical ground lug to the transformer enclosure. In addition,
provide a separate ground bar inside the transformer enclosure from termination of all grounding
conductors. Refer to grounding details on drawings for location of neutral bonding jumper and
method of installation for separately derived systems.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2. Square D; Schneider Electric
B. Description: Comply with Candidate Standard Level CSL 3 as defined by the Office of Energy
Efficiency and Renewable Energy, Department of Energy in Advance Notice of Proposed Rule
Making; 10 CFR Part 430, Energy Conservation Program for Commercial and Industrial
Equipment: Energy Conservation Standards for Distribution Transformers; newest edition.
B. The surge protective device shall be 3 phase with neutral and ground conductor leads. (High
Energy), MOV, low-voltage distribution-class surge arrester, designed to provide surge protection
at distribution transformer secondary bushings. Externally mounted with thread hud. Conductor
leads must be as short as possible.
C. The surge protective device must pass all design tests for light duty distribution class arresters per
IEEE Std C62.11™ -1993 standard.
D. Manufacturer shall be Cooper Power Systems Storm Trapper H.E. The Storm Trapper H.E. or
Engineer approved equal.
A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted with
corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for
each transformer.
B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by
NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where
transformers will be installed.
D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5
ohms at location of transformer.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer
manufacturer.
C. Install and anchor floor-mounting transformers level on concrete bases, 4-inch nominal thickness.
Concrete base is specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems,"
and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 03.
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base.
2. For floor-mounting transformers, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to floor-mounting
transformers.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.
D. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed
"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy
period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.
Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than
nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap
settings as test results.
B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
C. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
b. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device.
2. Extra Materials: Receipt for extra materials.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of panelboards
and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product
Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F.
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Surge Protective Devices: Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Keys: Six spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
E. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with main
service disconnect switches.
A. Short-Circuit Current Rating: Refer to drawings for RMS symmetrical, ampere AIC ratings.
1. Series-connected ratings are not permitted.
A. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. Omit for fused-switch
panelboards.
D. Circuit Identification: Distribution panelboards shall have each circuit number permanently
identified, factory installed label, adjacent to breaker. Identification shall stamped into trim or
installed engraved circuit numbers or paper labels. If paper labels are used, they must be covered
with a continuous, clear, self adhesive, protective plastic sheet.
A. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
D. Circuit Identification: Panelboards shall have each circuit number permanently identified, factory
installed label, adjacent to breaker. Identification shall stamped into trim or installed engraved
circuit numbers or paper labels. If paper labels are used, they must be covered with a continuous,
clear, self adhesive, protective plastic sheet.
A. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
D. Surge Protective Device: IEEE C62.41, integrally mounted, solid-state, parallel-connected, sine-
wave tracking suppression and filtering modules.
1. Maximum Continuous Operation Voltage (MCOV) Rating: Not less than 115 percent of
nominal system operating voltage.
2. UL 1449 Application Designation: Type 1 or Type 2.
3. Short-Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): 100,000 A RMS symmetrical.
4. Nominal Discharge Current (In) Rating: 20 kA.
5. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
6. Audible alarm activated on failure of any surge diversion module.
7. Minimum Single-Impulse Current Ratings:
a. Line to Neutral: 50,000 A.
b. Line to Ground: 50,000 A.
c. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.
8. Protection modes shall be as follows:
a. Line to neutral.
b. Line to ground.
c. Neutral to ground.
9. Maximum UL 1449 voltage protection rating (VPR) shall not exceed 700 V, line to neutral
and line to ground on 120/208 V systems; 1200 V, line to neutral and line to ground on
277/480 V systems.
10. Provide integrally mounted three pole disconnecting device with overcurrent protection
properly sized for the SPD provided.
A. When show n on drawings, provide a fused panelboard to serve electrical circuits required on the
Life Safety Branch. UL 67 listed.
C. 120/208 Volt three phase or 277/480 Volt three phase panels shall be fusible type for
coordination requirements, Nema 1 construction, amperage and circuit number as indicated on
drawings.
D. Provide with main lug only or main fusible switch panelboards with replaceable fuses as
indicated on drawings.
G. Provide 20 % spare fuses or modules in each panel. Minimum 5 spare 20 amp fuses. “Bussman
CUBEFuse.
H. When a Surge Protective Device is required as shown on drawings, provide an internal, factory
supplied SPD per paragraph above.
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault
currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting
for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted,
field-adjustable trip setting.
3. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5-mA trip sensitivity.
B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and
number of poles.
1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials.
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and
time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
4. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated
voltage.
C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D. Mount top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts
uniformly flush with wall finish.
H. Flush Panelboards: Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling
space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into
raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
J. Panelboards shall not be used as junction boxes, auxiliary gutters, or raceways for conductors
feeding through or tapping off to other switches or overcurrent devices. Splices shall not be
allowed in any panelboard. Phase conductors shall terminate on breakers and then leave the
panelboard either grouped in three phase configuration or with associated neutrals and routed into
the branch circuit conduit out to the load.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Refer to Division 260533 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." Provide all
identification for field-installed conductors in panels, labels, nameplates, warning signs, etc.
including, but not limited to:
1. Equipment Identification Label
2. Nominal System Voltage Identification Label
3. Electrical Energy Source Identification Label
4. Panelboards shall have circuit Directories
5. Distribution Panelboards shall have Load Identification Labels for each Feeder and Branch
Circuit
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS,
Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3.5 CLEANING
B. Vacuum interior of panels to remove dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Electrical Service Connections: Coordinate with utility companies and components they furnish
as follows:
1. Comply with requirements of utilities providing electrical power and communication
services.
2. Coordinate installation and connection of utilities and services, including provision for
electricity-metering components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Install equipment for utility company metering. Install raceways and equipment according to
utility company's written requirements. Provide empty conduits for metering leads and extend
grounding connections as required by utility company.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers'
packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one
source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and
associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.6 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B. All wiring devices in this building shall be supplied from the same manufacturer. Use of multiple
manufactures of wiring devices in the same building is not allowed.
2. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article, "Pediatric
Locations" Section.
B. Description: duplex receptacle with two USB Type 2.0 ports, Type A rated 3.0 Amps (minimum)
at 5 Volts DC, integral AC/DC transformer, compatible with USB 2.0/3.0 devices, compliance
with battery charging specification USB BC1.2, capable of charging two devices simultaneously.
Decorator style thermoplastic body and tamper resistant sliding doors will prohibit insertion of
objects that are not an electrical plug. Provide device in color to match other supplied wiring
devices.
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Arrow Hart; AH1221 (single pole), AH1222 (two pole), AH1223 (three way),
AH1224 (four way).
b. Hubbell; HBL1221 (single pole), HBL1222 (two pole), HBL1223 (three way),
HBL2224 (four way).
c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four
way).
d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1 (single pole), PS20AC2 (two pole), PS20AC3 (three
way), PS20AC4 (four way).
c. Hubbell; HBL1557.
d. Leviton; 1257.
e. Pass & Seymour; 1251.
A. Dimmer Switches: Sensor Switch: WSXD for office spaces and SPODMRD when used in
conjunction with ceiling mounted occupancy sensors.
B. Control: Continuously adjustable button type with networked switching as required. Comply
with UL 1472.
C. Contractor shall verify voltage and lamp source for the luminaire that is to be dimmed. Select
from the following options and provide the matching required wall dimmer.
1. For LED luminaires: 0 to 10 volt dimmers for solid sate luminaires. Verify the
maximum quantity of luminaires in each space that can be controlled from one dimmer.
Provide each space with the required quantity of dimmers to control all luminaires in that
space.
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-
resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
B. Description: 115 V, 35 A, 60 Hz, spring retractable electric cord reel with latch, solid steel
construction, abrasion and corrosion resistant baked on powder coat finish, nylon roller cable
guides, adjustable cord stop, under-hung ceiling mounted.
1. Provide 25 foot cord with No. 10 AWG stranded-copper conductors, rubber insulated, with
green insulated grounding conductor, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide two GFCI duplex receptacles, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide cast aluminum or non-metallic portable outlet box, listed and labeled for “wet
locations.”
4. External Cable Grip: Provide woven wire-mesh, cord strain relief grip, made of high-
strength galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter and with corresponding
attachment connector, and the device end.
A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of
equipment being connected.
1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with
green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30
percent.
Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for
connection.
2.12 FINISHES
A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. Color as
defined by NEMA WD 1 unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White, unless otherwise indicated or
required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: life safety-standby which shall be
red nylon or non-life safety standby which shall be gray.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs
that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
5. Connect grounding terminals of devices to device box and equipment grounding conductor
using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length with factory-crimped flanged spade
and ring terminals.
6. When using side wiring with binding-head screw terminals, use solid conductor pigtails.
Wrap conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.
7. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.
8. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
9. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
10. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device
mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
11. Install device boxes so that finish plates do not span different types of building finishes.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the left.
F. Device Plates:
1. Install blank device plates on unused device boxes.
2. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush
or do not cover rough wall opening. Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates, unless
approved by engineer.
G. Dimmers:
H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical
and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,
multigang wall plates.
I. Securely install multioutlet assemblies with screws and anchors. Comply with Division 26
Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
J. GFCI Receptacles: Where double-duplex GFCI receptacles are indicated, provide one duplex
GFCI receptacle and feed-through to standard straight blade convenience receptacle in same
device box.
1. Unless indicated otherwise, do not feed-through to receptacles in other device boxes.
K. Utilization Equipment: Refer to Shop Drawings for mounting height of special purpose devices
serving, but not limited to, the following:
1. Commercial kitchen equipment.
2. Commercial clothes washers and dryers.
3. Drinking water coolers.
4. Sensor operated wash fountains and lavatories.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Refer to Division 26 Section “Electrical
Testing” for requirements.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for emergency power and optional standby
supply with the following features:
1. Natural Gas Engine fuel supply system.
2. Engine cooling system.
3. Engine control and monitoring.
4. Outdoor enclosure
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over
the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the
parameter.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other
components specified.
2. Design Calculations: Computer generated load summary indicating starting kVA and
voltage-dip for each load step for loads indicated.
a. Demonstrate compliance with NFPA 70 Article 695 15 percent voltage drop
requirement for fire pumps.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready
access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.
2. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
3. Extra Materials: Receipt for extra materials.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one
source from a single manufacturer.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
H. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.
J. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Cast anchor-bolt
inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance only when allowed in Section
260050, General Electrical Requirements.
D. Generator-Set Performance:
1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no
load to full load.
2. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step-
load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state
operating band within three seconds.
3. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no
load to full load.
4. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the
rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational
band and no hunting or surging of speed.
5. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-load
increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating
band within five seconds.
6. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral
shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence
factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.
7. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output
terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load current for not
less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator
system components.
8. Excitation System: Provide permanent magnet excitation for power source to voltage
regulator.
9. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.
2.3 ENGINE
1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller
while passing full flow.
2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature.
Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.
3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container
with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.
C. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system.
Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.
E. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator-
set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.
1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with
anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.
2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to
110 percent load condition.
3. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow
automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine
manufacturer.
4. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer
covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.
a. Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F , and
noncollapsible under vacuum.
b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment
connections.
F. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with
exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements.
1. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz.
2. Sound level measured at a distance of 10 feet from exhaust discharge after installation is
complete shall be 85 dBA or less.
G. Air-Intake Filter: Standard-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element
and "blocked filter" indicator.
6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal
insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above
10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in Part 1
"Project Conditions" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries in
place.
7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation
and 35-A minimum continuous rating.
8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit shall
comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:
a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after
battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery
terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode
and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.
b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for
variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent
overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.
c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input
voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.
d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging rates.
e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing
low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery
voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall
close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control
and monitoring panel.
f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet.
A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control
and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate
automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector
switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch
initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment
failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of
a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.
B. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and
engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the
generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration.
C. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system,
and the following:
1. AC voltmeter.
2. AC ammeter.
3. AC frequency meter.
4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).
5. Engine-coolant temperature gage.
6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage.
7. Running-time meter.
8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es).
D. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include
wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine
or generator, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm
conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each
alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual
indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will
reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush-
mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated.
F. Remote Emergency-Stop Button: Provide one switch inside weather proof enclosure and one
switch wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled. Push button shall be protected
from accidental operation.
B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated
integrally with generator rotor.
D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other
voltages if required.
E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed
up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.
F. Enclosure: Dripproof.
H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.
1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent
adjustment of output-voltage operating band.
B. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components
within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient
temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions.
1. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable louvers
prevent entry of rain and snow.
2. Muffler Location: Within enclosure.
2.8 FINISHES
A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-
resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.
A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of
identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.
1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator
performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of
connections before packaged engine-generator installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
D. Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints and connect to engine muffler. Install
thimble at wall. Piping shall be same diameter as muffler outlet. Flexible connectors and steel
piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic
Piping."
1. Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full size of drain connection with a
shutoff valve, stainless-steel flexible connector, and Schedule 40, black steel pipe with
welded joints. Flexible connectors and piping materials and installation requirements are
specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping."
E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not
specified to be factory mounted.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping and specialties.
B. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator
to allow service and maintenance.
D. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector.
1. Natural-gas piping, valves, and specialties for gas distribution are specified in Division 23
Section "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."
2. LP-gas piping, valves, and specialties for gas piping are specified in Division 23 Section
"Facility Liquefied-Petroleum Gas Piping."
E. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
F. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping
and Equipment" and Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and
mechanical inspectionfor "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems" specified in
NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to
those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.
3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Record individual cell voltages.
a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-
charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity
under both conditions.
b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a
capacity load test for the battery.
c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge.
d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.
4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-
charging conditions.
5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of
each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air,
exhaust, and fluid leaks.
6. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure
voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases,
and verify that performance is as specified.
7. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and
at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits.
8. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set
installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at four locations
on the property line, and compare measured levels with required values.
C. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.
D. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of
NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records
available for examination on request.
E. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
F. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation.
G. Test and adjust controls, breaker trip settings and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to
each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
END OF SECTION 26 32 13
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:
1. Automatic transfer switches.
2. Nonautomatic transfer switches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum
clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material
lists for each switch specified.
C. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.
b. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,
including software, where applicable.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain transfer switches through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system
transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere
rating, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective
devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing
according to UL 1008.
1. Fault-current closing and withstand ratings which require specific circuit breakers or fuse
classes to be used are not acceptable.
C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better
over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.
G. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings,
either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations.
Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated.
2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom
entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.
3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.
H. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources
energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically
disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.
D. In-Phase Monitor: Factory-wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs only when the two
sources are synchronized in phase. Relay compares phase relationship and frequency difference
between normal and emergency sources and initiates transfer when both sources are within 15
electrical degrees, and only if transfer can be completed within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer is
initiated only if both sources are within 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent or more of
nominal voltage.
A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure
proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for
compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with
NEMA ICS 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
f. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time
delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and
shutdown.
6. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power
delivery from both sources.
a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.
C. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component
indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes SPDs for low-voltage power equipment installed external to power
equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For surge protective devices to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
2. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain suppression devices and accessories through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, dimensional requirements, and electrical performance
of suppressors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Product Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
A. Service Conditions: Rate surge protection devices for continuous operation under the following
conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Operating Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 140 deg F.
2. Humidity: 5 to 95 percent, noncondensing.
3. Altitude: Less than 12,000 feet above sea level.
1.7 COORDINATION
1.8 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance only when allowed in Section
260050, General Electrical Requirements.
A. Products:
1. Eaton Corporation; Electrical Sector; SPD series.
2. ERICO International Corporation; CRITEC TDXM series.
3. LEA International, Inc.; PowerVantage PV Plus series.
4. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson; Interceptor II series.
5. Thomas & Betts Power Solutions LLC; Current Technology Products; TransGuard series.
B. Surge Protective Device Description: Solid-state, parallel-connected, modular design with field-
replaceable modules, sine-wave-tracking suppression and filtering, with individually fused or
thermally protected MOVs matched to within 1 percent, and the following features and
accessories:
1. MCOV Rating: Not less than 115 percent of nominal system operating voltage.
Note 2: According to Current Technology product data sheet. Product is also listed on Intertek
ETL Listed Directory without performance data.
Note 3: Values listed are with typically specified features –alarm, form “C” contact which appear
to only be available in a Type 2 configuration. Type 1 unit with only LED monitoring UL 1449
VPRs are 1200/1200/1200/1800 V.
D. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 480Y/277, 3-
phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 1800 V.
2. Line to Ground: 1800 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 1800 V.
4. Line to Line: 2500 V
Note 2: According to Current Technology product data sheet. Product is also listed on Intertek
ETL Listed Directory without performance data.
Note 3: Values listed are with typically specified features – alarm, form “C” contact which appear
to only be available in a Type 2 configuration. Type 1 unit with only LED monitoring UL 1449
VPRs are 700/700/700/1000 V.
E. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 208Y/120, 3-
phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V.
2. Line to Ground: 1200 V.
A. Products:
1. Eaton Corporation; Electrical Sector; SPD series.
2. ERICO International Corporation; CRITEC TDXM series.
3. LEA International, Inc.; SP Plus series.
4. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson;AccuVar II series.
5. Thomas & Betts Power Solutions LLC; Current Technology Products; CurrentGuard Plus
series.
(Note 2)
Note 1: From LEA product data sheet. UL.com does not list VPR for N-G mode.
Note 2: From Current Technology product data sheet. Product not listed on UL.com. Does not
appear to be listed on Intertek ETL Listed Directory either.
D. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 480Y/277, 3-
phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V.
2. Line to Ground: 1200 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 1200 V
4. Line to Line: 2000 V.
(Note 2)
Note 1: From LEA product data sheet. UL.com does not list VPR for N-G mode.
Note 2: From Current Technology product data sheet. Product not listed on UL.com. Does not
appear to be listed on Intertek ETL Listed Directory either.
E. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 208Y/120, 3-
phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 700 V.
2. Line to Ground: 700 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 700 V.
4. Line to Line: 1200 V.
F. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for 240/120-V, single-phase, 3-wire circuits shall be as
follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 700 V.
2. Line to Ground: 700 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 700 V.
4. Line to Line: 1200 V.
A. Products:
1. ERICO International Corporation; CRITEC TDXM series.
2. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson; LPGE series.
3. Thomas & Betts Power Solutions LLC; Current Technology Products; EGPE2 series.
B. Surge Protection Device Description: Panelboard extention module-type that isolated surge
protection device from panelboard interior, matching width, depth, trim and finish of panelboard.
2.5 ENCLOSURES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Install devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service entrance
ground.
B. Install devices for panelboard and auxiliary panels with conductors or buses between suppressor
and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed manufacturer's
recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.
1. Provide multipole, 30-A circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnect for suppressor or
ampacity and configuration is recommended by the manufacturer, unless otherwise
indicated.
A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment or panelboards to their sources until surge
protection devices are installed and connected.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast and driver housing if provided.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
c. Solid-state lighting Drivers. Submit product data sheets marked or highlighted for the
specific ballast or solid-state lighting driver manufacturers/models for applicable
products being provided from Part 2 of this Section ”Generic” or “manufacturers
choice” solid-state lighting drivers are not acceptable. Submittals missing this
information will be Rejected.
d. Energy-efficiency data.
e. Life, output, energy-efficiency data. Submit product data sheets marked or highlighted
for the lamp manufacturer/models for applicable products being provided from Part 2
of this Section. Submittals missing this information will be Rejected.
f. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture
type, outfitted with solid-state lighting drivers, and accessories identical to those
indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.
1) Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current
accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program
(NVLAP) for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
2. Field quality-control test reports.
B. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in
operation and maintenance manuals.
2. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
3. Extra Materials: Receipt for extra materials.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for solid-state lighting Luminaires and solid-state lighting Drivers:
Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of lighting unit agrees to repair or replace
components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Solid-state lighting Luminaires and Solid-State Lighting Drivers: 5
years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty for Drivers: Manufacturer's standard form in which solid-state lighting driver
manufacturers agree to repair or replace ballasts and solid-state lighting drivers that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Solid-State Lighting Drivers for Solid-State Lighting Luminaires: Five
years from date of Substantial Completion.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
2. Solid-State Lighting Drivers: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
3. LED Packages, Arrays and Modules: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed.
Furnish at least one of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In the Luminaire Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the
following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance only when allowed in Section
260050, General Electrical Requirements.
A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.
E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent
doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping
and when secured in operating position.
F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
H. Trim Work: Provide solid aluminum or solid brass bar work, finials, and similar trim on wall
sconces and decorative pendent lighting fixtures. Steel or hollow tubes are not permitted.
I. Tap Connections (Fixture Whips): Not longer than 6 feet, constructed of No. 12 AWG copper
conductors.
B. Electronic Drivers: Comply with ANSI C82.11, NEMA SSL 1, and UL 935 in addition to the
requirements contained in UL Subject 8750; UL Class 2 listed power supply, isolated output, and
designed for type and quantity of LEDs served.
1. Input Rating: 120 to 277 V, 60 Hz, plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Output Rating: 12 or 24 V dc, based on lumen output with minimum of 350 mA, plus or
minus 5 percent.
3. Sound Rating: Class A.
4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
6. Minimum Operating Temperature: minus 40 deg F.
7. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher.
A. Selected luminaires as shown on the drawings shall have a transfer device installed at the factory,
or a whole circuit device installed in the field, to automatically transfer the branch circuit from a
normal source to an emergency source. Refer to Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices"
for additional details.
A. Description: Comply with UL 924; Comply with NEMA EM 1; for sign colors, visibility,
luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. LED Luminaires: Photometric data complying with IES LM-79, Energy Star rated by the U.S.
Department of Energy, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 4000 K, white light produced by
binary complementary wavelength conversion. Color mixing red, green, and blue LEDs is not
acceptable.
1. LED Packages, Arrays, and Modules:
a. Binned for color consistency per NEMA SSL 3; and B50, L70 rating of at least 50,000
hours when tested according to IES LM-80.
b. LED packages, arrays or modules shall be field replaceable without having to replace
the entire luminaire.
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and
angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish
same as fixture.
C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single
fixture. Finish same as fixture.
E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
G. Air-Craft Cable: 3/32-inch stainless steel cable with adjustable cable holder, adjustable plus or
minus 6 inches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Protect all luminaires from dust, moisture and debris during construction with plastic or other
suitable barriers. Clean all luminaire that are dirty.
C. Luminaires: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each
luminaire.
D. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by A/E, to use permanent luminaires for
temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When
construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean
thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.
E. Remote Mounting of Ballasts and Solid-State Lighting Drivers: Distance between the ballast or
solid-state lighting driver and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by ballast or solid-state
lighting driver manufacturer. Verify, with ballast and solid-state lighting driver manufacturers,
maximum distance between ballast or solid-state lighting driver and luminaire.
H. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
I. Install wire guards to exit signs and emergency lighting units in gymnasia, milt-purpose rooms,
shops, and stage areas.
J. Install manufacturers bonding jumpers at all splice joints and non-continuous runs on entire cable
tray system.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply
with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
A. Selected luminaires as shown on the drawings shall have emergency transfer capability and
sensors installed. Refer to Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for all adjustments
and tests required on these luminaires.
B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance
with standards.
A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by
Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least
100 hours at full voltage.
3.5 ADJUSTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
D. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast and SSL driver housing if provided.
E. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.
A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, and supporting
structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-5.
C. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire, calculated and applied as stated in
AASHTO LTS-5.
1. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet or less in height is 90 mph.
a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
2. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
3. Extra Materials: Receipt for extra materials.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation.
Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.
C. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For
poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for SSL Luminaires and Drivers: Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer of lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for SSL Luminaires and Drivers: 5 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type.
2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: 10 for every 100 of each type
and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
3. Ballasts and SSL Drivers: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
4. Globes and Guards: 10 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one
of each type.
5. LED Packages, Arrays and Modules: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed.
Furnish at least one of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists,
the following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance only when allowed in Section
260050, General Electrical Requirements.
A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations
by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for
luminaires.
D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and
support to prevent warping and sagging.
E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform
in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.
F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent
doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping
and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing
lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast and SSL driver when door opens.
H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and
UV radiation.
I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light
distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.
J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion
lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.
L. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel and Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal
Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," or
SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and
other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a
smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying
with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of electro-statically coated
urethane polyester thermosetting powder at least 3.0 mils thick, cured in a convection oven
at 400 degrees F.
a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors.
b. Color: Match A/E's sample of custom color.
c. Color: As selected by A/E from manufacturer's full range of standard and optional
colors.
A. Selected luminaires as shown on the drawings shall have a photoelectric relay installed at the
factory, to automatically de-energize the luminaire after a period of time when there is sufficient
daylight and the luminaire does not need to operate. Refer to Division 26 Section "Lighting
Control Devices" for additional details.
A. Selected luminaires as shown on the drawings shall have an integral occupancy sensor installed at
the factory, to automatically de-energize the luminaire, after an adjustable period of time, when
the area is not occupied. Refer to Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for additional
details.
A. Selected luminaires as shown on the drawings shall have a transfer device installed at the factory,
or a whole circuit device installed in the field, to automatically transfer the branch circuit from a
normal source to an emergency source. Refer to Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices"
for additional details.
B. Electronic Drivers: Comply with ANSI C82.11, NEMA SSL 1, and UL 935 in addition to the
requirements contained in UL Subject 8750; UL Class 2 listed power supply, isolated output, and
designed for type and quantity of LEDs served, listed for damp or wet locations according to
application.
1. Input Rating: 120 to 277 V, 60 Hz, plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Output Rating: 12 or 24 V dc, 350 mA, plus or minus 5 percent.
3. Sound Rating: Class A.
4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
6. Minimum Operating Temperature: minus 40 deg F.
7. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher.
B. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit
operation without reduction of average lamp life. Include the following features unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F.
3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F.
4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current
ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer.
C. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type with solid-state igniter/starter and capable
of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Igniter/starter shall have an
average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C.
1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F.
B. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), CCT color temperature
1900 K, and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum.
C. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, CRI 65 (minimum), and CCT color temperature
4000 K, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig ;
1-piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall.
1. Shape: [Round, tapered] [Round, straight] [Square, tapered] [Square, straight].
2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation.
C. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in
Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching
grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through
handhole.
D. Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable
and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor.
F. Vibration Dampening: Units selected by manufacturer to limit induced harmonic pole vibration.
A. Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6
with access handhole in pole wall.
1. Shape: [Round, tapered] [Round, straight] [Square, tapered] [Square, straight].
2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway support.
B. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch (13-mm) threaded lug, complying with
requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for
attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible
through handhole.
C. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, with pole and adapter fittings of cast aluminum. Adapter
fitting welded to pole and bracket, then bolted together with stainless-steel bolts.
1. Tapered oval cross section, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire.
2. Finish: Same as luminaire.
D. Aluminum Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
2. Color: Match finish process and color of luminaire.
E. Vibration Dampening: Units selected by manufacturer to limit induced harmonic pole vibration.
A. Poles: Designed specifically for supporting luminaires, with factory-formed cable entrance and
handhole. Not less than 65 percent fiberglass, with resin and pigment making up the remainder.
1. Resin Color: [Dark bronze] <Insert color>; provide uniform coloration throughout entire
wall thickness.
2. Surface Finish: Surface layer of pole inherently UV inhibited.
B. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and
nuts. Finish same as pole.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
D. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric
device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources.
A. Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their
mounting provisions on the pole.
B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and
underground features, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:
1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches.
2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet.
3. Trees: 15 feet.
C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by
pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level
recommended by pole manufacturer.
1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and
approved by manufacturer.
2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout
firmly packed to fill space.
3. Install base covers, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch-diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange to
drain condensation from interior of pole.
E. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete Paved Areas: Install poles with minimum of 6-inch-
wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of adjacent concrete slab.
Fill unpaved ring with pea gravel to a level 1 inch below top of concrete slab.
F. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).
B. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at bollard location.
Cast conduit into base, and shape base to match shape of bollard base. Finish by troweling and
rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Division 03
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
A. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at luminaire location.
Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials,
installation, and finishing are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a
dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.
B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch-thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied
with a 50 percent overlap.
3.6 GROUNDING
A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and
Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1. Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding
system.
B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1. Install grounding electrode for each pole.
2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector.
3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires
and energizing circuits with normal power source.
1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.
C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance
with standards.
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire-alarm control unit.
2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.
3. System smoke detectors.
4. Heat detectors.
5. Notification appliances.
6. Magnetic door holders.
7. Remote annunciator.
8. Addressable interface device.
9. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.
10. System printer.
11. Fire alarm wire and cable.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Noncoded addressable system, with automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors and
multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work. Submit simultaneously with Product Data. Include the following as a
minimum shop drawing requirement.
1. Submit to authorities having jurisdiction for approval, submittals reviewed and marked “No
Exceptions Taken” by Architect.
2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.
b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum.
c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of
Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.
4. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.
C. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"
Chapter in NFPA 72.
b. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent
Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"
Chapter.
c. Record copy of site-specific software.
d. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article
of the same name and include the following:
1) Frequency of testing of installed components.
2) Frequency of inspection of installed components.
3) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.
4) Manufacturer's user training manuals.
e. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.
f. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.
2. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
a. Software operating and upgrade manuals.
b. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data
files.
c. Device address list.
A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation
of units required for this Project.
1. Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level II technician.
2. Distributors shall also be certified by the manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from
single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an
extension of existing system.
C. Fire Alarm Wire and Cable Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new
equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN
SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service and
label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.
B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing disconnected
fire-alarm equipment and wiring.
B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two
years.
C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program
software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised
licenses for use of software.
1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system.
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount
installed, but no fewer than 1 unit.
2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than
1 unit.
3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type
installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.
4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer
than 1 unit of each type.
5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components.
6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.
7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed
the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. The “Substitution
Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation must accompany requests for A/E’s
approval. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification
Department at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be
issued by Addendum.
A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:
1. Manual stations.
2. Heat detectors.
3. Smoke detectors.
4. Duct smoke detectors.
5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
6. Fire-extinguishing system operation, including kitchen hoods.
7. Water flow switches
8. Fire standpipe system.
C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Valve supervisory switch.
2. Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system.
3. Elevator shunt-trip supervision.
4. Kitchen equipment shunt-trip supervision.
D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.
2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating
devices.
3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.
4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits.
5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.
6. Break in standby battery circuitry.
7. Failure of battery charging.
8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.
9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.
10. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.
E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at
fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. Record the event on system printer.
B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at
fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and
supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming
and control menu.
1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 2 line(s) of 40 characters, minimum.
2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control
commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of
smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.
C. Circuits:
1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B.
a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style A.
b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Y.
c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 4.
d. Install no more than 70 percent rated capacity of addressable devices on each signaling
line circuit.
e. Install no more than 70 percent rated capacity of notification appliances on each
notification appliance circuit.
2. Serial Interfaces: Two RS-232 ports for service modem and printer.
D. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smoke
barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.
H. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating
devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm
communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.
1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-
supply module rating.
I. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and
automatic transfer switch.
1. Backup Battery: Premium, valve-regulated, recombinant-sealed, lead-calcium battery; spill
proof; with a warranty per PART 1 above. Provide a single-stage, constant-voltage-current,
limited battery charger, comply with battery manufacturer's written instructions for battery
terminal voltage and charging current recommendations for maximum battery life.
2. Backup Power Supply Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72, but not less than 24 hours normal
and 30 minutes alarm operation.
J. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass
cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate
response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under
normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be
finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show
visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as
surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to
communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
3. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top
to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.
B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate
of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or
trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating
mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of
90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test
protocol.
C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or
nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is
engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output: 110 cd, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.
3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined
with guards in place.
4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.
5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.
D. Weatherproof Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24-V dc, under-dome type; with provision for housing
operating mechanism behind bell. Bells shall produce a sound-pressure level of 94 dBA,
measured 10 feet from bell. 10-inch size, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating
devices, notification appliances, trouble signals, and supervisory signals shall be powered by 24-
V dc source.
1. Alarm current draw of entire notification appliance circuit power supply unit shall not
exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating.
D. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and
automatic transfer switch.
1. Backup Battery: Premium, valve-regulated, recombinant-sealed, lead-calcium battery; spill
proof; with a full 1-year warranty and a pro rata 19-year warranty. With single-stage,
constant-voltage-current, limited battery charger, comply with battery manufacturer's
written instructions for battery terminal voltage and charging current recommendations for
maximum battery life.
2. Backup Power Supply Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72, but not less than 24 hours normal
and 30 minutes alarm operation.
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products:
1. Simplex
B. Description: Units are equipped for wall mounting complete with matching doorplate.
1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force.
2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted at least 2.375-inches deep, with maximum 1.625-inch
deep pin-pivoted door armature. The use of ball-jointed catches and extension links on door
armatures is not permitted.
3. Rating: 120-V ac.
A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm,
supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm
control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.
1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.
B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights
shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and
test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.
1. Graphic Annunciator:
a. Backbox: Cold rolled steel with welded and ground seams, finished with black
polyester powder coating.
b. Door: Satin finished stainless steel or brushed aluminum, with concealed piano hinge,
secured by a key lock with no other visible fasteners.
c. Graphic: Reversed printed polycarbonate lexan laminated to aluminum, with full color
image, and LEDs indicating alarm, trouble, or supervisory condition, and fire alarm
device type. Building detail shall be selected and color-coded as directed by Owner
and A/E.
d. Provide keyed lamp test switch.
e. Provide "power-on" LED indicator.
f. Wiring: LED and switch wiring shall be neatly harnessed to designated terminal
blocks located in annunciator backbox.
g. Install alphanumeric display in face of graphic.
h. Install graphic annunciator adjacent to alphanumeric display.
2. Graphic Map:
a. Graphic: Full color image printed on the reverse side of a 10 mil polycarbonate Lexan
laminated to a 1/8-inch rigid backing with a removable adhesive for future
replacement.
b. Frame: Black anodized aluminum frame with concealed security hanging system to
prevent unauthorized removal.
c. Location of fire-alarm control unit, main graphic map and other graphic maps shall be
shown in red with "YOU ARE HERE" printed in red. Detection devices,
nomenclature, and building detail shall be color coded as selected by Owner and A/E.
d. Mounting: Adjacent to remote annunciator.
A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address
for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.
C. Voltage Sensing Relay: Capable of detecting presence of 120 V ac for supervision of control
power for shunt-trip circuit breakers.
A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall
comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL.
B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-
alarm control unit and automatically capture two telephone lines and dial a preset number for a
remote central station. When contact is made with central station, signals shall be transmitted. If
service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local
trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm
receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone
service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter
shall initiate the local trouble signal.
C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the
following:
1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.
2. Programming device.
3. LED display.
4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.
5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.
E. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.
A. Smoke dampers, when shown on drawings or in other specifications, shall be provided by others.
Provide 120 volt A.C. power circuits, fire alarm interface device, smoke dampers, remote alarm
indicator and control wiring as required to operate smoke dampers as required in system
operational description above.
2.14 PATHWAYS
A. Support of Open Cabling: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent
degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.
1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.
2. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.
3. Straps and other devices.
4. Cable Ties: Comply with Division 26 Section “Identification of Electrical Systems.”
B. Cable Trays: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Cable Trays for Electrical
Systems."
C. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for
Electrical Systems."
1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.
A. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70,
Article 760.
B. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than No. 18 AWG.
A. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating
adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
for installation of conduits and wireways.
B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes
for Electrical Systems," and cable tray except as follows: within consoles, cabinets, desks, and
counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces where unenclosed wiring method may be used.
Use NRTL-listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal
raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. All vertical cable exposed to abuse, inside walls
or surface mounted up to 12 feet above finished floor, shall be in conduit.
D. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or
equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
E. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power
wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Color-
code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different
colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers
red.
F. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the fire alarm control
panel and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting
wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.
C. Equipment Mounting: Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 72
inches above the finished floor.
D. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before
making changes or connections.
1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building.
2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station.
3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control and monitoring equipment as necessary to
extend existing control and monitoring functions to the new points. New components shall
be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of
either system.
E. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser on return-air opening.
F. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they
extend the full width of duct.
1. Provide for air-handling units with capacity of 2000 cfm or greater.
2. Provide for variable air volume type fan-powered terminal units served by return air
plenums with capacity of 2000 cfm or greater.
3. Provide within 5 feet of smoke dampers.
G. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler
rating and location.
H. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-
flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.
1. Install flush in ceiling below duct smoke detectors, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install in public space near device they monitor. Do not install in normally unoccupied
spaces.
I. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells
and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a
grille.
J. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6
inches below the ceiling.
K. Notification Appliance Circuit Power Supply Units: Provide quantity of units required for
notification appliances indicated.
1. Provide system smoke detector at each group of units.
2. Provide 120 V, 20 A circuit to each unit.
L. Mechanical Equipment Rooms and Kitchens: Provide 190 deg F fixed heat detectors.
M. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
N. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above
the finished floor.
O. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.
Q. Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter: Where digital alarm communicator transmitter is not
installed in fire-alarm control unit, provide 1-inch conduit between fire-alarm control unit and
digital alarm communicator transmitter.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. For fire-protection systems related to overhead coiling fire doors and coiling counter fire doors in
fire-rated walls and partitions and in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 08
Section "Overhead Coiling Fire Doors" and Division 08 Section "Coiling Counter Fire Doors."
Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.
1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this
Section before making connections.
B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and
systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an
addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system
being controlled.
1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-handling duct systems.
2. Air-handling unit controllers of designated air-handling systems.
3. Variable air volume type fan-powered box controllers of designated air-handling systems.
4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.
5. Release magnetic door holders.
6. Activate circuit breaker shunt-trip to elevator controller.
7. Activate circuit breaker shunt-trip to designate kitchen equipment.
8. Alarm-initiating connection to building management system of designated air-handling duct
system.
9. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components.
10. Alarm-initiating connection to activate theatrical lighting control.
11. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.
12. Alarm-initiating connection to overhead coiling fire doors and coiling counter fire doors.
13. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.
14. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system.
15. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker.
16. Supervisory connections at kitchen equipment shunt trip breakers.
17. Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase or phase-
reversal condition.
18. Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.6 FIRESTOPPING
3.7 GROUNDING
A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. An equipment
grounding conductor shall be installed in the branch circuit from the main service ground to fire-
alarm control unit.
C. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or
replaced devices and appliances.
D. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly,
quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
G. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm
system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms
developed for initial tests and inspections.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Comply with all applicable City, State and Federal requirements regarding materials,
methods of work and disposal of excess and waste materials.
B. Obtain and pay for all required inspections, permits and fees. Provide notices re-
quired by governmental authorities.
A. Locate and identify existing underground and overhead utilities in areas of work. If
utilities are to remain, provide adequate means of protection during site work opera-
tions. Repair utilities damaged during site work operations to satisfaction of utility
owner and at Contractor's expense. Call local utilities protection service 72 hours pri-
or to beginning work on site.
B. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted underground piping or other utilities be en-
countered during site work operations, notify the applicable utility company and the
Owner immediately for procedure directions. Cooperate with the applicable utility
company in maintaining active services in operation.
C. Locate, protect and maintain benchmarks, monuments, control points and project en-
gineering reference points. Re-establish if disturbed or destroyed at Contractor's ex-
pense.
D. Conduct site work operations and the removal of excess and waste materials to as-
sure minimum interference with streets and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
Comply with City and State requirements for trucking of materials, including standing,
parking, traffic routes and covering of open trucks.
E. Do not close or obstruct streets and adjacent facilities without permission of authori-
ties having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic
ways when required by governing authorities.
F. Control dust caused by the Work. Moisten surfaces as required. Comply with pollu-
tion control regulations of governing authorities.
G. Protect existing buildings, paving and other services or facilities, except items desig-
nated for removal, on site and adjacent to the site, from damage caused by site work
operations. Cost of repair and restoration of damaged items at Contractor's expense.
H. Protect and maintain streetlights, utility poles and services, traffic signal control boxes,
curb boxes, valves and other services, except items designated for removal. Provide
for temporary relocation when required to maintain facilities and services in operation
during construction work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Clear areas only as required for access to new construction, site excavation and per-
formance of the work. Refer to the drawings for contract limits.
B. Examine existing trees and plants; suitably identify trees and plants to remain.
C. Remove trees, brush, plants, undergrowth, other vegetative matter and debris from
areas to be cleared and grubbed within contract limits. Strip weeds, lawns and
heavy grass.
1. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside the drip line of trees designated to
remain. Strip existing grass plant materials to a maximum depth of 1 inch under
tree canopies and carefully till or scarify existing grade to a maximum depth of 1
inch.
2. Remove stumps 4” in diameter and larger to their full depth; remove 3 in. and
larger roots to a depth of 2 ft. below finish grade; and remove 3 in. and larger
roots within 5 ft. of an underground structure, utility line, footings, and paved
areas.
D. Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place, against un-
necessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning or bruising of roots and
bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated material
within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line.
Fires not permitted under or near trees and vegetation to remain.
1. Protect designated trees to remain with 48-inch high wood or orange plastic
snow fence enclosure. Trees grouped together may be fenced together; see
site plan.
Trunk Diameter Distance From Edge of Trunk to Outer Edge of Fencing
greater than 10” 10’
2. Planting beds to be installed under trees to remain must be hand dug and roots
2” in diameter and larger shall be protected from damage.
3. Water trees and other vegetation as required to maintain their health during the
course of construction operations.
4. The Owner’s Representative may remove interfering branches of trees subject
to direction and approval.
5. Repair or replace trees and any other vegetation damaged by construction op-
erations, in a manner acceptable to the Owner’s Representative. Repair dam-
aged trees promptly to prevent progressive deterioration.
6. The Owner shall receive a monetary settlement for damage to tree(s) designat-
ed to remain, which are damaged by the work of the Contractor. The amount of
the settlement shall be the value of the tree(s) prior to construction, less the val-
ue of the tree(s) or their replacements at project acceptance. The monetary
value of trees shall be as determined by the Shade Tree Valuation Handbook of
the International Shade Tree Conference, latest edition. Repair and replace-
ment of trees significantly damaged due to lack of adequate protection during
work operations shall be at Contractor’s expense.
3.2 DEMOLITION
A. Perform all work and provide materials necessary to disconnect and remove or relo-
cate existing utilities as indicated. Record existing piping termination prior to dis-
connection or relocation.
B. Information on the drawings relating to existing utilities services and other structures
is from the best sources presently available. All such information is furnished only
for information and is not guaranteed. Excavate test pits as required to determine
exact locations.
C. Completely fill pipes indicated to be plugged with an 8-inch thick concrete plug or
A. Stockpile, haul from site and legally dispose of waste materials and debris.
B. Maintain street and disposal routes clear, clean and free of debris.
C. On-site burning of combustible cleared materials.
1. There will be no on-site burning permitted.
3.6 CLEANING
A. At completion of work, clean entire area within designated limits and leave site clear,
clean and free of rubbish and debris ready for excavating, filling and grading.
END OF SECTION 31 10 00
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Protect existing trees, plants, lawns and other features designed to remain as
part of the Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All topsoil, fill and backfill material subject to inspection, testing and approval.
B. All materials must comply with minimum requirements of authorities having juris-
diction.
C. Imported Topsoil:
4. Provide fertile, friable, native, surface soil, reasonably free of subsoil, clay
lumps, brush, weed and other litter and free of roots, stumps, stones, and
other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth.
5. Topsoil shall be a sandy loam or loam soil as defined by the Soil Conserva-
tion Service U.S.D.A. Soil Classification System.
6. Mechanical analysis shall fall within the following particle ranges:
Average percentage Range
Sand (0.05-2.0 mil dia. range) 30-70% 50%
Silt (0.002-0.05 mil dia. range) 20-50% 35%
Clay (less than 0.002 mil dia. range) 5-20% 15%
95% of topsoil shall pass a 2.0 mil sieve.
7. Provide topsoil free of stones one inch in longest dimension, earth clods,
plant parts and debris.
8. Topsoil shall possess from 5% to 12% organic matter.
D. On-site fill: Clean soil or soil-rock mixture free of foreign materials, organic mate-
rial and debris. Suitable excavated materials removed to accommodate new
construction may be used for fill, subject to approval.
E. Imported fill: Clean, natural sandy-clay subsoil or soil-rock mixture, free of foreign
matter, organic material, debris, or expansive soils. Designate borrow area. Ma-
terial subject to approval.
F. Geogrid or Geotextile Fabrics: ODOT 712.09 geotextile fabric, Type D. Spun or
woven, strong, rot-proof polymeric fiber fabric, manufacturer certified to meet
ODOT specification requirements or equivalent.
G. Granular backfill: AASHTO M 43 #10 crushed stone or gravel grits, except as
otherwise indicated on drawings.
H. Granular backfill for subgrade stabilization: ODOT #304 crushed aggregate.
I. Pipe bedding and cover fill: Clean natural river sand, bank sand, or red sand free
of rubble and rocks of 1” diameter or more, or material as recommended by pipe
manufacturer. Bedding subject to approval.
J. On-Site topsoil: Natural topsoil stripped from the project site.
K. Other materials required for proper completion of work: As selected by Contrac-
tor, subject to the Architect’s approval.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed.
B. Consult the Soils Report for subsurface findings and earthwork recommendations
in areas of existing, unsuitable sub-soils.
C. Consult the records and drawings of adjacent work and of existing utilities and
their connections for conditions which may affect the work under this Section.
B. Establish extent of grading and excavation by area and elevation; designate and
identify datum elevation. Set required lines and levels.
C. Do not cover or enclose work of this Section prior to obtaining required inspec-
tions, tests and approvals and location recording.
D. Where conduit must be routed through an area of existing tree roots, boring shall
be used under the limits of the tree canopy to minimize disturbance of the root
zone except as approved in writing by the Owner’s Representative.
E. Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and
walkways.
3.2 UTILITIES
A. Before starting grading and excavation, verify the location and extent of under-
ground utilities in the work area. Exercise care to protect existing utilities during
earthwork operations. Perform excavation work at utilities by hand and provide
necessary shoring, sheeting and supports as the work progresses.
B. Maintain, protect, re-route or extend as required existing utility lines to remain
which pass through the work area. When such work is not shown on the draw-
ings, costs for re-routing or extending existing utility lines (unless covered by the
utility companies) will be paid for as a change in work. Obtain Owner's written au-
thorization prior to performing extra work.
C. Protect active utility services uncovered by excavation.
D. Remove abandoned utility service lines from areas of excavation. Cap, plug or
seal such lines and identify at grade.
E. Accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility lines re-routed or ex-
tended on Project Record Documents.
A. Perform grading within contract limits, including adjacent transition areas, to new
elevations, levels, profiles and contours indicated. Insure subgrade surfaces are
parallel to finished surface grades. Provide uniform levels and slopes between
new elevations and existing grades.
B. Grade to assure areas drain away from structures and to prevent ponding of sur-
face drainage. Provide subgrade surface free from irregular surface changes and
as follows:
1. Rough grading: plus or minus 0.10 ft. subgrade tolerance. Degree of finish
required will be that ordinarily obtained from either blade grader or scraper
operations.
2. Subgrade surface shall be free of exposed boulders or stones exceeding 4
inches in greatest dimension in paved areas; 2 inches in lawn areas.
3. Fill all areas of settlement to proper grade prior to subsequent construction.
4. Planting areas: Allow for 12 in. depth at planting areas (shrub beds). Hand
excavate around existing trees to remain to attain new finished grades. Con-
sult with Owner’s Representative prior to this portion of the work.
5. Paved Areas: Shape surface of subgrade areas to line, grade and cross-
section indicated. Provide compacted subgrade suitable to receive paving
base materials. Subgrade tolerance plus 0, minus ½ in.
C. It is not intended that the earthwork be balanced on site. The Contractor shall
provide additional imported fill or remove excess excavated material as required
to achieve the grades shown on the drawings. (Dispose of excess excavated
material in a manner described further in the Section.)
A. Rock: Material that cannot be removed with ¾ cubic yard capacity power shovel
without drilling or blasting or solid boulders with a volume of more than ½ cubic
yard.
B. Rock Excavation: Material excavation of buried boulders and rock in excess of ½
cubic yard that required continuous and systematic drilling and blasting or contin-
uous use of a ripper or other special equipment. All other excavation shall be
classified as earth excavation.
C. Contractor will be paid for cost of rock excavation as a change in work. Obtain
Owner’s written authorization prior to performing rock excavation work.
D. Cut away rock in bottom of excavations to form level beds that follow natural stra-
ta. Form with sharp steps. In utility trenches, excavate to 6 in. below invert eleva-
tion to pipe and 24 in. wider than pipe diameter.
A. Provide necessary pumps, hose and drainage lines and maintain all excavations,
including footings and pits, free from water, ice and snow at all times during exca-
vation, concrete work and paving work.
B. Maintain ground water in the bearing soil strata at a safe level at all times by
methods which prevent loss of fines and other disturbance to these strata. If the
methods employed prove inadequate and the bearing value of the soil is reduced,
the disturbed soil shall be removed as directed and replaced with concrete at the
Contractor's expense.
pact as specified.
E. Concrete backfill trenches that carry below or pass under footings and that are
excavated within 18 inches (450 mm) of footings. Place concrete to level of bot-
tom of footings.
F. Where pipe is specially coated for protection against corrosion, exercise care to
avoid damage to the coating.
G. Do not backfill against drainage structures until services have been inspected.
Concrete shall have been in place for at least 7 days. Mortar joints and plaster
coating of masonry structures and mortar joints of precast manhole sections shall
be thoroughly set and shall have been in place at least 3 days. Backfill shall be
deposited in horizontal layers, not over 8 inches in compacted thickness uniformly
spread and compacted to the specified density. Take special precautions to pre-
vent wedging action against the walls of structures.
H. When compacting by rolling or operating heavy equipment parallel with the pipe,
exercise care to prevent displacement of, or injury to, the pipe. Movement of
construction machinery over drainage lines at any stage of construction shall be
at the Contractor's risk. Any pipe impaired or damaged shall be replaced or re-
paired as directed by the Architect at Contractor's expense.
A. Minor fills of 6 inches or less: Remove vegetation within drip-line perimeter. Fill
with single layer of uncompacted topsoil; hand grade to required finish grade ele-
vation.
B. Carefully hand grade at all existing trees to remain..
3.11 COMPACTION
A. Provide compaction control for all fill and backfill. Field compaction tests and re-
lated laboratory analysis shall be performed by a qualified independent laborato-
ry, a member of the American Society for Testing and Materials, under the super-
vision of a registered Professional Engineer specializing in soils engineering.
Soils proposed for fill and backfill shall be analyzed by the Soils Engineer.
B. Compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of fill or backfill material at
foundations, retaining walls, building slabs and paved areas to a density of 98%
at optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D 698 Standard Proctor
Method.
C. Compact top 6 in. of subgrade and each layer of fill or backfill material at lawns
and unpaved areas to a density of 90% at optimum moisture content in accord-
ance with ASTM D 698 Standard Proctor Method.
D. Compact fill and backfill material for utility trenches within building and pavement
areas and extending minimum five feet beyond building and pavement areas to a
density of 98% at optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D 698
Standard Proctor Method.
E. Compact fill and backfill material for utility trenches within lawn areas to a density
of 90% at optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D698 Standard
Proctor Method.
F. Puddling or jetting of fill and backfill material as a compaction method is not per-
mitted.
A. Uniformly distribute and spread topsoil in areas designated on plan. Use topsoil
in loose dry state. Do not use frozen or muddy topsoil. Place during dry weather.
B. Fine grade all topsoil areas eliminating rough and low areas to ensure positive
drainage. Maintain levels, profiles and contours of subgrades. Finish grade shall
not vary more than 1" from the plan grade.
C. Remove stone, roots, weeds and debris while spreading topsoil materials. Pro-
vide surfaces suitable for soil preparation provided under planting work.
3.13 MAINTENANCE
A. Protect graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded and damaged areas.
B. Where completed areas are disturbed by construction operations or adverse
weather, scarify surface, reshape and compact to required density.
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatis-
factory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner’s property.
B. Excess topsoil shall remain the property of the owner. The Contractor shall move
it out of the immediate project area and to a permanent stockpile location as di-
rected by the Owner.
B. Maintain disposal routes clear, clean and free of debris.
3.15 TESTING
END OF SECTION 31 20 00
SECTION 31 25 00
EROSION CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the NPDES Storm Water Program and
documentation as regulated and governed by National, State and local agencies of the
EPA.
B. Surrounding neighbors: Do not disturb any dirt or vegetation on any land adjacent to the
site being developed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide construction materials that achieve the intended function of the
device.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1. PREPARATION
1 If excavated materials intended for device include unsatisfactory soil materials and
rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil
materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water
but prevent soil from draining away. Cover to prevent windblown dust. Temporary soil
stabilization shall be applied if stockpile materials are to be left for a long period of time.
3.6 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly for each device to help stabilize the
site.
3.7 GRADING
A. Uniformly grade areas for the devices to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface
changes. Comply with all earthwork and grading requirements.
3.8 CONSTRUCTION
1. Clearing and grubbing for those areas necessary for the installation of erosion and
sediment perimeter control measures.
2. Install erosion and sediment control measures.
3. Grading and stripping of the remaining areas of the development site or project
area.
4. Install storm water management systems.
5. Temporary vegetative stabilization of erosion and sediment control measures.
6. Grading of roads, streets, or parking areas, etc.
7. Installation of all utilities.
8. Site construction.
9. Final grading, stabilization and landscaping.
10. Removal of erosion and sediment control measures.
B. General construction notes:
1. The installation of the specified water management and sediment control measures
shall be accomplished in accordance with the standards and specifications
contained in the latest edition of “Water Management and Sediment Control for
Urbanizing Areas” handbook (unless otherwise specified herein.). A copy of the
handbook may be obtained from the local county engineer’s office.
2. The contractor shall install temporary erosion and sedimentation devices as shown
and required by these plans. Sediment basins and traps, perimeter dikes, sediment
barriers and other measures intended to trap sediment on site shall be constructed
as a first step in grading and be made functional before upslope land disturbance
takes place. Earthen structures such as dams, dikes, and diversions shall be
seeded and mulched within seven (7) days of completion of installation.
3. Erosion and any sedimentation from work on this site shall be contained on the site
and not allowed to collect in any off-site drainage course, whether natural or man-
made.
4. All earth changes shall be constructed and completed in a manner, which shall limit
the exposed area of any disturbed land for the shortest period of time.
5. Clearing and stripping are to be limited to areas in which construction will proceed to
completion. Areas not to be improved presently are to remain undisturbed.
6. Disturbed soils shall be stabilized as quickly as practicable with temporary
vegetation and/or mulching to protect exposed critical areas during development.
7. The permanent final vegetation and structural erosion control and drainage
measures shall be installed as soon as practical in the development.
8. The contractor shall make daily inspections of the site to insure effectiveness of
erosion and sedimentation control measures, and will immediately make necessary
repairs.
9. Permanent soil stabilization shall be installed on denuded areas within seven (7)
days after final grade is reached on any portion of the site. Application practices
include vegetative establishment, mulching, and the early application of gravel base
on areas to be paved. Soil stabilization measures should be selected to be
appropriate for the time of year, site conditions, and estimated time of use.
10. Temporary soil stabilization shall be established on any denuded areas, which will
not be regraded for longer than thirty (30) days. Temporary soil stabilization shall
be applied within seven (7) days after rough grading.
11. A permanent vegetative cover shall be established on denuded areas not otherwise
permanently stabilized after final grading. Permanent vegetation shall not be
considered established until a ground cover is achieved which is mature enough to
control soil erosion and to survive severe weather conditions.
12. All construction traffic shall enter and leave by the designated entrance. The
contractor shall instruct all vehicles to clean and promptly remove soil,
p. Stabilize all graded areas with vegetation, crushed stone, riprap, or other ground
cover as soon as grading is completed or if work is interrupted for 21 working
days or more.
q. Use mulch to stabilize areas temporarily where final grading must be delayed.
r. Stockpiles, borrow areas and spoil areas shall be shown on the plans and shall
be stabilized to prevent erosion and sedimentation.
17. Minimize Disturbance and Buffer Strips
a. Designate areas of no disturbance. Clearly show on the plans, and flag in the
field areas of no disturbance and construction vehicle exclusion.
b. Designate trees and shrubs that are to be preserved
c. Designate watercourse buffer-filter strips on the site design plan.
d. Maintain and preserve riparian and naturally vegetated buffer strips along
watercourses.
e. The width of a buffer strip between a road and the stream is recommended to
be 50 feet plus four times the slope of the land in percent, measured between
the road and the top of stream bank.
18. Temporary Seeding
a. Timing: The proper time to seed is dependent upon the climate of the area.
b. Seed Mixes: Select plants appropriate to the season and site conditions.
1) The seeding rates are based on a minimum acceptable pure live seed (PLS)
of 80%. When PLS is below 80% adjust rates accordingly.
2) Legumes should be inoculated with the proper rhizobium bacteria before
planting. Pellet inoculated seed can be purchased or inoculation can be
done in the field. Use only fresh, age dated inoculate specifically labeled for
use with the legume you are using.
c. Site Preparation
1) Grade as needed and feasible to permit the use of equipment for seedbed
preparation.
2) Install needed erosion control practices, such as sediment basins, diversion
dikes and channels, prior to seeding. Divert concentrated flows away from
seeded areas.
3) Soil tests should be done to determine the nutrient and pH content of soil.
Depending on the results of soil tests, soil management may be necessary
to adjust the pH to between 6.5 and 7.0 (for most conditions). All lime,
fertilizer and other soil amendments should be addressed following sound
soil management practices.
4) Surface roughening: If the area has been recently loosened or disturbed,
no further roughening is required. When the area is compacted, crusted or
hardened the soil shall be loosened with discing, raking or harrowing.
Tracking with bulldozer cleats is very effective on sandy soils.
5) Hydroseeding and hydraulic planting generally require less seedbed prep.
6) Generally, slopes steeper than 2:1 that cannot have good seedbed
preparations with equipment, and will sometimes require hydraulic planting
techniques.
7) Seed to soil contact is the key to good germination. Prepare a 3-5 inch (76-
127 mm) deep seedbed, with the top 3-4 inches (76-102 mm) consisting of
topsoil. Note that the earth bed upon which the topsoil is to be placed
should be at the required grade.
8) The seedbed should be firm but not compact. The top 3 inches (76 mm) of
soil should be loose , moist and free of large clods and stones. For most
applications, all stones larger than 2 inches (51 mm) in diameter, roots, litter
and any foreign matter should be raked and removed.
9) The topsoil surface should be in reasonably close conformity to the lines,
grades and cross sections shown on the grading plans.
d. Planting
A. The aggregate size for construction of the pad shall be 2-3 inch (51-76 mm) stone.
Place the gravel to the specific grade and dimensions shown on the plans, and smooth
it.
B. The thickness of the pad shall not be less than 6 inches (0.2 m). Use geotextile fabrics,
if necessary, to improve stability of the foundation in locations subject to seepage or
high water table.
C. The width of the pad shall not be less than the full width of all points of ingress or egress
and in any case shall not be less than 12 feet (3.6 m) wide.
D. The length of the pad shall be as required, but not less than 50 feet (15.2 m).
E. Locate construction entrances and exits to limit sediment leaving the site and to provide
for maximum utility by all construction vehicles. Avoid entrances which have steep
grades and entrances at curves in public roads.
F. The entrance shall be maintained in a condition that will prevent tracking or flowing of
sediment onto public rights-of-way. This may require periodic top dressing with
additional stone as conditions demand, and repair and/or maintenance of any measures
used to trap sediment.
G. All sediment spilled, dropped, washed or tracked onto public rights-of-way shall be
removed immediately.
H. Provide drainage to carry water to a sediment trap or other suitable outlet.
I. When necessary, wheels shall be cleaned to remove sediment prior to entrance onto
public rights-of-way. When washing is required, it shall be done on an area stabilized
with crushed stone that drains into an approved sediment trap or sediment basin.
J. All sediment shall be prevented from entering any storm drain, ditch or watercourse
through use of sand bags, gravel, straw bales, or other approved methods.
K. The fill material around the pipe spillway shall be placed in 4-inch (101 mm) layers and
compacted under the shoulders and around the pipe to at least the same density as the
adjacent embankment. A minimum of 2 feet (0.6 m) of compacted backfill shall be
placed over the pipe spillway before crossing it with construction equipment.
L. Steel base plates shall have at least 2 1/2 feet (0.8 m) of compacted earth, stone or
gravel over them to prevent flotation.
M. The emergency spillway shall not be installed in fill. Elevations, design width, and
entrance and exit channel slopes are critical to the successful operation of the
emergency spillway.
N. Baffles shall be constructed of 4 inch (101 mm) by 4 inch (101 mm) posts and of 4 foot
(1.2 m) by 8 foot (2.4 m) - 1/2inch (12.7 mm) exterior plywood. The posts shall be set
at least 3 feet (0.9 m) into the ground, no further apart than 8 feet (2.4 m) center to
center, and shall reach a height 6 inches (.2 m) below the riser crest elevation.
O. The embankment and emergency spillway shall be stabilized with vegetation
immediately following construction.
P. Construction operations shall be carried out in such a manner that erosion and water
pollution will be minimized.
Q. Local and state requirements shall be met concerning fencing and signs warning the
public of hazards of soft sediment and floodwater.
A. The height of a silt fence shall not exceed 36 inches (0.9 m). Storage height and
ponding height shall never exceed 18 inches (0.5 m).
B. Stakes for silt fences shall be four (2) inch square wood or 1.33 lbs./lin. ft. steel with a
minimum length of four feet.
C. The fence line shall follow the contour as closely as possible.
D. If possible, the filter fabric shall be cut from a continuous roll to avoid the use of joints.
When joints are necessary, filter cloth shall be spliced only at a support post, with a
minimum 6 inch (0.2 m) overlap and both ends securely fastened to the post.
E. Posts shall be spaced a maximum of 10 feet (3.1 m) apart and driven securely into the
ground (minimum of 12 inches (0.3 m)). When extra-strength fabric is used without the
wire support fence, post spacing shall not exceed 6 feet (1.8 m).
F. Turn the ends of the fence uphill.
G. A trench shall be excavated approximately 4 inches (101 mm) wide and 6 inches (0.2
m) deep along the line of posts and upslope from the barrier.
H. When standard-strength filter fabric is used, a wire mesh support fence shall be
fastened securely to the upslope side of the posts using heavy duty wire staples at
least 1inch (25.4 mm) long, tie wires or hog rings. The wire shall extend into the trench
a minimum of 2 inches (51 mm) and shall not extend more than 36 inches (0.9 m)
above the original ground surface.
I. The standard-strength filter fabric shall be stapled or wired to the fence, and 6 inches
(0.2 m) of the fabric shall extend into the trench. The fabric shall not extend more than
36 inches (0.9 m) above the original ground surface. Filter fabric shall not be stapled to
existing trees.
J. When extra-strength fabric is used in conjunction with closer post spacing, the fabric
can be stapled directly to the posts with eight (8) inches of fabric extending into the
trench.
K. The trench shall be backfilled and the soil compacted over the toe of the filter fabric.
L. Silt fences placed at the toe of a slope shall be set at least 6 feet (1.8 m) from the toe in
order to increase ponding volume.
M. Silt fences shall be removed when they have served their useful purpose, but not
before the upslope area has been permanently stabilized and any sediment stored
behind the silt fence has been removed.
3.13 MAINTENANCE
A. Inspection reports: Per NPDES requirements, the contractor will directly perform
erosion & sediment control inspections or will engage a qualified independent agency
to perform field quality-inspection reports. Inspection reports to be submitted and
maintained by the contractor.
B. Erosion and sediment control devices shall be checked regularly and after each rainfall
(that exceeds 0.5 inches in 24 hours) for weather-related or other damage.
1. Any necessary repairs shall be made immediately.
2. If the device becomes clogged with sediment so that it no longer adequately
performs its function, the device must be pulled cleaned and/or replaced.
3. Close attention shall be paid to the repair of damaged devices and the undercutting
of the devices by runoff.
C Sediment deposits must be removed when the level of deposition has reached
approximately one-half the height of the device. The device shall be restored to its
original construction requirements and dimensions. The sediment shall be properly
discarded offsite or placed in such a manner that it will not erode from the site. The
sediment shall not be deposited downstream from the embankment or in or adjacent to
a stream or floodplain
D. Any acceptable sediment deposits, remaining in place after the device is no longer
required, shall be dressed to conform to the existing grade, prepared, and seeded.
E. Structures shall be removed and the area stabilized when the remaining drainage area
has been properly stabilized.
F. Newly seeded areas need to be inspected frequently to ensure the grass is growing.
Areas which fail to establish cover adequate to prevent sheet and rill erosion will be
reseeded as soon as such areas are identified. Spot seeding can be done on small
areas to fill in bare spots where grass did not grow properly. If the seeded area is
damaged due to concentrated runoff, additional practices may be needed. Temporary
vegetated areas will be maintained until permanent vegetation or other erosion control
practices can be established.
A. Inspection reports: Per NPDES requirements, the contractor will directly perform
erosion & sediment control inspections or will engage a qualified independent agency
to perform field quality-inspection reports.
1. Inspections shall be weekly and after every rainfall that exceeds 0.5 inches in 24
hours.
2. Inspection reports to be submitted and maintained by the contractor.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Disposal: Remove erosion and sediment control practices (surplus and temporary) and
waste material (including unsatisfactory trash and debris) and legally dispose of it off
Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 31 25 00
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Included are all concrete formwork and related items necessary for
concrete work related to building construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION 32 11 00
SECTION 32 12 00
FLEXIBLE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The extent of asphaltic concrete paving work is shown on the drawings. Asphaltic Concrete
paving shall include:
1. Prepare subgrade to receive base course materials for asphaltic concrete pavements.
2. Place and compact base course materials (ODOT #304).
3. Plane existing asphalt surfaces to accommodate transition to resurfaced asphalt
pavement surface as called for on the drawings (ODOT #254).
4. Tack existing asphalt pavement areas to receive surface course (ODOT #407).
5. Intermediate course asphaltic concrete (ODOT # 448).
6. Surface course asphaltic concrete (ODOT # 448).
7. Joints filled.
8. Pavement markings (ODOT #642).
B. RELATED WORK
1. Section 31 20 00: Earth Moving
A. Comply with materials and methods of construction requirements of the Ohio Department of
Transportation Construction and Material Specifications, (ODOT), referenced sections only.
B. Provide asphalt materials furnished by bulk asphalt concrete producer regularly engaged in
production of hot-mix, hot-laid asphalt concrete paving materials.
C. Tolerances:
1. In-place compacted thickness:
a. Intermediate course: 2 inch plus, minus 0.
b. Surface course: 1/4 inch plus, minus 0.
2. Finished surface smoothness.
a. Intermediate course: Maximum 3/8 inch in 10 feet.
b. Surface course: Maximum 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit data identifying types, sources and installer of materials proposed for the work.
A. Establish and maintain required lines and grade elevations for each course, including cross
slopes as required.
B. Protect adjacent work from damage, soiling, and staining.
C. Provide temporary barriers and warning lights as required for protection of project work and
public safety.
A. Apply tack coat only when the ambient temperature in the shade is above 50 deg. F and when
the temperature has not been below 35 deg. F for twelve hours immediately prior to
application. Also do not apply when the base surface is wet or frozen or contains an excess of
moisture which would prevent uniform distribution.
B. Construct asphalt concrete surface course only when atmospheric temperature is above 50o F,
when the underlying base is dry, and when weather is not rainy. Intermediate course may be
placed when air temperature is not below 40o and rising, when acceptable to Landscape
Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1 inch 100
3/4 inch 90- 100
1/2inch 65 - 90
No. 4 35 - 65
No. 16 15 - 45
No. 50 3 - 22
No. 200 0-8
Bitumen (Percent of total mix) 4.0 - 12.0
2. Surface Course (ODOT # 448): Course limestone aggregate (No. 8) and fine aggregate
shall be combined in a blend as follows:
Sieve Total Passing, % by Weight
2 inch 100
3/8 inch 90 - 100
No. 4 45 - 75
No. 16 15 - 46
No. 50 3 - 22
No. 200 0-8
Bitumen (Percent of total mix) 4.5 - 12.0
A. Angular pit run crushed natural carbonate stone; free from shale, clay, and friable materials
and debris; graded within following limits: (ODOT # 304)
Sieve Total Passing, % by Weight
2 inches 100
1 inch 70 - 90
3/4 inch 50 - 85
No. 4 25 - 60
No. 40 7 - 30
No. 200 0 - 15
A. Pavement Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed,
non-bleeding traffic paint complying with FS TT-P-1952, with drying time of less than 3
minutes.
1. Color: White.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. All areas shown on drawings to receive new asphaltic concrete paving shall receive the
following treatment:
1. Grade and compact subgrade as required. Before placing base course and paving,
check subgrade and do all necessary rolling and compacting to obtain firm, even
surface. Fill and consolidate any dented or depressed areas. Remove non-
compactable material, replace with clean fill and compact solidly.
2. Install crushed aggregate base in uniform courses; depth and number of courses
required shall be as shown on the drawings.
3. Compact each course of crushed aggregate in accordance with ODOT 304, until a
satisfactory, firm sound base course has been established.
4. Install asphaltic concrete intermediate course (ODOT #448) and asphaltic concrete
surface course (ODOT #448) of the required depth (when compacted) to all asphaltic
concrete pavement areas as shown and detailed on the drawings.
5. Care shall be taken to neatly finish exposed edges and surfaces of asphalt paving to
conform to lines and grades shown on drawings.
6. Joints shall be sealed where asphaltic concrete pavement abuts concrete pavement,
concrete curbs and drainage or manhole structures. The Contractor shall fill any
resulting joints with sand to within 2" of surface of pavement. The upper 2" shall be
filled with bituminous material. Care shall be taken in filling this joint so that no
bituminous material comes in contact with exposed concrete surfaces.
7. Laying temperature of all asphaltic concrete shall be 300o +/- 20oF.
B. All areas shown on the drawings to receive asphaltic concrete resurfacing shall receive the
following treatment:
1. Plane tapered transitions between areas shown to be resurfaced and areas not to be
resurfaced to achieve flush joints, as indicated on the drawings.
2. Remove areas with excessive cracking as directed by the Landscape Architect. Repair
these areas as specified for new asphaltic concrete paving.
3. Clean all areas to be resurfaced to remove all loose material.
4. Patch all depressions, and low areas by applying tack coat and a “scratch coat” of
asphaltic concrete surface course material (ODOT #448) to bring the pavement to a
uniform surface.
5. Apply tack coat (ODOT #407) to all areas to be resurfaced.
6. Install asphaltic concrete surface course (ODOT #448) minimum 1 ½” thick (compacted
thickness) to all areas to be resurfaced. Coordinate this installation with installation of
surface course on adjacent new asphaltic concrete paving.
7. Care shall be taken to neatly finish exposed edges and surfaces of asphalt resurfacing.
8. Joints shall be sealed where asphaltic concrete pavement abuts concrete pavement,
concrete curbs and drainage or manhole structures. The Contractor shall fill any
resulting joints with sand to within 2" of surface of pavement. The upper 2" shall be
filled with bituminous material. Care shall be taken in filling this joint so that no
bituminous material comes in contact with exposed concrete surfaces. Seal joints
between resurfaced asphalt and existing asphalt.
9. Laying temperature of all asphaltic concrete shall be 300o +/- 20oF.
A. Begin rolling operation soon after placing when the mixture will bear the weight of the roller
without excessive displacement. Do not suddenly change the line or direction of rolling.
B. Compact the mixture with hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in all areas inaccessible
to rollers.
C. Do not permit heavy equipment, including rollers, to stand on the finished surface before it has
thoroughly cooled or set.
A. Do not apply pavement marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified
with the Architect.
B. Allow paving to age 30 days before starting pavement marking.
C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions
indicated, with uniform, straight lines. Apply at manufacturer’s recommended rates, to provide
a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.
3.4 PATCHING
A. Remove and replace mixtures that become mixed with foreign materials and all defective
areas. Cut out such areas and fill with fresh, hot asphalt concrete. Compact by rolling to the
required surface density and smoothness.
B. Remove deficient areas for the full depth of the course. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel to
the direction of traffic with edges vertical. Apply a tack coat before placing asphalt concrete
mixture.
A. Protect asphalt paving from construction and vehicular damage until project acceptance.
B. Sweep asphalt paving and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other foreign material
immediately prior to project acceptance.
END OF SECTION 32 12 00
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated with color selection chart. Color to be
selected by Landscape Architect.
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing
time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 degrees F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths
are less than that allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until
contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by joint sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
1. Closed cell backer rod by Noamco or equal, sized to fit the joint width.
2.3 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Product recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-
substrate tests and field tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
joint-sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by
joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto
adjoining surfaces.
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable
to products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. Apply ½”
minimum sealant depth.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials.
3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
D. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite
such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated
joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the
original work.
END OF SECTION 32 13 73
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The extent of the stone paving work including all labor and materials is shown on the
drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
END OF SECTION 32 14 40
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A Included is all steel bar, welded wire fabric reinforcing, and related items necessary
for concrete work related to building construction. Reinforcing steel shall be
detailed, fabricated and placed in accordance with codes and requirements specified
herein.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail reinforcing steel in accordance with ACI-315-74, “Manual of Standard
Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures”. Show sizes and
dimensions for fabrication and placing reinforcing steel and accessories.
Indicate bar schedules, tie and stirrup spacing, and diagrams of bar bends.
2. Before submittal to the Engineer, shop drawings shall be checked and
approved by the Contractor to verify that bar details are in conformity with the
design drawings and are consistent with the anticipated concrete pours.
3. Submit 5 copies of shop drawings to the Engineer that show the approval by
the Contractor. Do not fabricate reinforcing steel until approval of the
Engineer has been obtained.
A. Deliver reinforcement to project site in bundles marked with metal tags indicating bar
size and length. Handle and store materials to prevent contamination or
deterioration. Handle welding electrodes in accordance with AWS D 12.1.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All bar reinforcement shall be intermediate or hard grade billet or rail steel, ASTM
A615 or A616, Grade 60 or 40 and conforming to A-305. All #3 and #4 Ties and
Stirrups to be Grade 40. All other to be Grade 60 unless shown otherwise on plans.
B. Welded wire fabric reinforcing shall conform to ASTM A185.
C. All accessories to be of standard types as called for in ACI 315-74. Accessories are
to plastic coated, stainless steel or galvanized, where surface on which they rest is
exposed.
D. Other Supports: Concrete brick may be used to support reinforcing in foundation to
obtain proper clearances from the earth.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Bars shall be prefabricated to detail and delivered to the job plainly tagged and
ready to set. Bends and hooks shall conform to ACI Specifications. Beam stirrups
and column ties shall not have dimension errors more than one bar diameter and the
depth of truss bends shall not be in error more than ½ bar diameter.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Reinforcing for one day’s pour shall be completely placed and inspection made by
the Engineer prior to pouring.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Reinforcement shall be securely tied at all intersections with #18 black annealed wire
and be carried on spaces of sufficient weight and number to properly support bars.
B. Placement:
1. Bar Supports: CRSI 65
2. Reinforcing Bars: CRSI 63
C. Steel Adjustment:
1. Move within allowable tolerance to avoid interference with other reinforcing
steel, conduits or embedded items.
2. Do not move bars beyond allowable tolerances without concurrence of the
Engineer.
3. Do not heat, bend, or cut bars without concurrence of the Engineer.
D. Splices:
1. Lap Splices: Tie securely with wire to prevent displacement of splices during
placement of concrete.
2. Splice Devices: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written
instructions.
3. Welding: Perform in accordance with AWS 12.1.
END OF SECTION 32 20 00
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Crushed aggregate base: Angular pit run crushed natural carbonate stone; free from shale,
clay, and friable materials and debris; graded within the following limits:
A. Formwork: Matched, tight fitting and adequately stiffened to support weight of concrete with-
out deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of concrete.
B. Joint Filler: One half inch thick, asphaltic impregnated vegetable fiber and finely divided min-
eral filler, ASTM D1751.
C. Curing Compound: VOC compliant , rapid decomposing resin curing compound shall be
Safe-Cure Clear as manufactured by ChemMasters, Inc. or approved equal.
D. Concrete Sealer (non-colored concrete): A water-based silane/siloxane water repellent such
as Weather Seal Siloxane WB as manufactured by Prosoco, Spall Guard WB 10% by
ChemMasters, Inc., or approved equal.
E. Concrete Stain for colored concrete: Lithochrome Tintura Stain (non acid stain) as manufac-
tured by Scofield Systems or approved equal. Colors as selected by the Landscape Architect.
F. Sealer for colored concrete: Selectseal-W (water based/low VOC) as manufactured by Sco-
field Systems or approved equal.
A. Mix and proportion to produce minimum 4000 psi concrete at 28 days with maximum slump of
4 inches and 6 percent plus or minus 1-1/2% air entrainment, ASTM C94.
B. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when acceptable to Landscape Architect.
Use of admixtures shall not relax cold weather placement requirements. Do not use calcium
chloride nor fly ash.
C. Use set-retarding admixtures during hot weather only when acceptable to Landscape Archi-
tect.
2.5 SAMPLE
A. The Contractor shall provide a 3’ x 3’ sample slab of each required concrete finish for the
Landscape Architect’s approval, to insure the desired texture and appearance. Once a sam-
ple has been approved, this shall become the standard for the remainder of the job.
B. The materials including mix design and finishing techniques proposed for use on the job will
be those used in the sample. Also the same curing and sealing methods proposed for use on
the job should be used for the approved sample
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Place and level crushed aggregate base over prepared sub-grade to a compacted depth of 4
inches (or as shown on the drawings) true to lines and levels. Compact until no further in-
crease in density is obtainable.
3.3 FORMING
A. Form vertical surfaces to full depth and securely position to required lines and levels.
B. Ensure form ties are not placed so as to pass through finished faces of concrete work, unless
otherwise approved by the Landscape Architect
C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit easy dismantling and stripping, and to prevent
damage to concrete during formwork removal.
A. Reinforce concrete pavement and structures as shown on the drawings. Allow for minimum
1-1/2 inch concrete cover.
B. Do not extend reinforcing through expansion joints.
3.5 JOINTS
A. Construct expansion, control and construction joints true-to-line with face perpendicular to
surface concrete. Where possible, make joints of curbs coincide with joints in walks. When
sidewalks abut building, and other vertical stationary structures, provide continuous joint filler.
B. Provide control joints, sectioning concrete into areas indicated. Construct joints for a depth
equal to at least one-fourth (1/4) of the concrete thickness.
1. Broom finish concrete walks: Provide hand tooled control joints in pattern indicated.
Do not allow edges of tooled joint to become depressed below adjacent concrete sur-
face.
C. Provide construction joints at the end of all pours and at locations where placement opera-
tions are stopped for a period of more than one-half hour, except where such pours terminate
at expansion joints.
1. Construct joints with standard keyed-section forms.
D. Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, man-
holes, inlets, structures, walks and other fixed objects.
1. Locate expansion joints as indicated on the drawings, or as specified herein; set per-
pendicular to longitudinal axis of walks, curbs and paving. Align expansion joints in
abutting curbs and walks.
2. Extend joint fillers full-width and depth of joint. Maintain top edge not more than 1/8
inch below finished surface. Recess top edge ½ inch if joints are to be sealed.
3. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for the full width being placed, whenever pos-
sible. Where more than one length is required, clip joint filler sections together.
4. Protect the top edge of the joint filler during concrete placement.
A. Testing of concrete will be performed by an independent testing laboratory employed and paid
for by the Contractor and acceptable to the Landscape Architect and the Owner. All work
shall be in accordance with Section 01410. Testing and inspection will be performed so as to
minimize disruption to Work.
B. Compressive Strength Testing: Test cylinders sets shall be made from concrete delivered to
the job site.
1. One (1) twenty-eight (28) day test and one (1) seven (7) day test equals one set of
tests. Provide one set of test cylinders for each fifty (50) cubic yards of concrete de-
livered to the job site.
2. Test specimens shall be taken and tested in accordance with ASTM Specifications for
“Compression Test of Concrete”. Results of tests shall immediately be submitted to
the Landscape Architect.
3. Where the ultimate 28 days compressive strength of concrete in any test cylinder falls
below the strength for the class of concrete tested, or below proportional minimum
seven day strengths, that portion of concrete shall be removed and replaced at no
additional cost to the Owner.
C. Air and Slump Testing:
1. A minimum of one test each (air and slump) shall be made for each load of concrete
delivered to job site and each test cylinder set taken. Results of air and slump tests
shall be referenced to test cylinder sets when applicable. Results of tests shall im-
mediately be submitted to the Landscape Architect.
2. Do not obtain samples from the very first or last portions of the batch.
D. Failure to detect any defective work or materials shall not in any way prevent later rejection
when such defect is discovered, nor shall it obligate the Owner or Landscape Architect for fi-
nal acceptance.
A. Place concrete, screed and wood float surfaces to a smooth and uniform finish, free of open
texturing and exposed aggregate.
B. Avoid working mortar to surface. Finishing operations shall be kept to an absolute minimum
for exterior work and where broom finishes are required, normally no troweling is required.
No working of the concrete will be allowed while bleed water is on the surface as this tends to
weaken the surface and significantly contributes to potential scaling.
C. Provide applicable concrete finishes as follows:
1. Broom finish: (for all standard flatwork unless otherwise noted on the drawing).
a. Provide exterior pavement surfaces with a medium broom textured finish.
b. Ramps: provide a non-slip heavy broom finish
c. Curbs: smooth brushed finish
d. Steps: Medium broom textured finish.
D. Round all edges, including edges of dummy and expansion and contraction joints, with ½ ra-
dius edging tool.
E. Ensure finished surfaces do not vary from true lines, levels, or grade by more than 1/8 inch in
10 feet when measured with straight edge.
F. Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid any segregation of planes between pours and shall
be vibrated or puddled as required to provide a smooth surface free from honeycomb or seg-
regation. After forms are removed, all tie holes or honeycomb shall be pointed and exposed
surfaces shall have fins removed by rubbing with carborundum and water to produce a
smooth, even surface.
G. Apply curing compound on all concrete finished surfaces immediately after placement. Apply
in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
H. Apply concrete sealer after the concrete has cured at least twenty eight days. Concrete sur-
faces must be clean and dry prior to application. Remove all stains and curing compound res-
idue prior to sealing. Temperature of the concrete shall be not less than 45 degrees F. Apply
in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
I. Provide for heating of concrete materials and the wet concrete during freezing or near freez-
ing weather. No frozen materials or materials containing ice shall be used. All concrete ma-
terials and all reinforcing forms, fillers and ground with which the concrete is to be in contact
shall have a temperature of between 70 degrees and 80 degrees F., and adequate means
shall be provided for maintaining a temperature of not less than 70 degrees F. for three days
or 50 degrees F. for five days after concrete is poured. Follow recommended ACI-305 prac-
tice for hot weather concreting. Admixture for the purpose of accelerating or retarding set
shall be utilized only upon the approval and instructions of the Landscape Architect. Water
reducing admixture may be used to improve workability or reduce water content upon prior
approval of the Landscape Architect. Concrete shall be placed within one and one-half hours
from the time it is batched.
achieve this end, suitable hoppers, spouts with restricted outlets and tremies shall be used as
required.
B. During and immediately after depositing, concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by means of
internal type mechanical vibrators or other tools, spading to produce required quality of finish.
Vibration shall be done by experienced operators under close supervision and shall be carried
on only enough to produce homogeneity and optimum consolidation without permitting segre-
gation of constituents or “pumping” of air. Vibrators used for normal weight concrete shall op-
erate at speed at no less than 8,000 rpm and be of suitable capacity. Do not use vibrators to
move concrete. Vibration shall be supplemented by proper wooden spade puddling to re-
move included bubbles and honeycomb adjacent to visible surfaces. At least one vibrator
shall be on hand for every 10 cubic yards of concrete placed per hour, plus one spare. Vibra-
tor shall be operable and on site prior to starting placement.
C. Vertical lifts shall not exceed 18 inches. Vibrate through successive lifts to avoid pour lines.
Vibrate first lift thoroughly until top of lift glistens to avoid stone pockets, honeycomb, and seg-
regation.
D. Concrete shall be deposited continuously, and in layers of such thickness that no concrete will
be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams and
planes of weakness within section. If section cannot be placed continuously between planned
construction joints, as specified, field joint and additional reinforcement shall be introduced so
as to preserve structural continuity. Architect shall be notified in any such case.
E. Cold joints, particularly in exposed concrete, including “honeycomb”, are unacceptable. If
they occur in concrete surfaces exposed to view, Architect will require that entire section in
which blemish occurs be removed and replaced with new materials at Contractor’s expense.
A. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic for at least 14 days.
When construction traffic is permitted, maintain walks and pavement as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
B. Repair defective concrete to match color and texture of adjacent surfaces.
C. Sweep concrete sidewalks and pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt and
other foreign material immediately prior to project acceptance.
END OF SECTION 32 30 00
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Obtain Owner’s approval for each type of stone and gravel required prior to delivery
to site. Landscape Architect will assist in selection of stone for walls.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
END OF SECTION 32 40 00
SECTION 32 90 00
PLANTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide trees, plants and ground cover as shown and specified. Work includes:
1. Trees, plants and ground cover.
2. Soil amendments, planting soil mixtures and accessories.
3. Provide additional topsoil as required for planting soil backfill in plant pits and planting
beds, or as noted on the drawings.
4. Provide maintenance of all plants and transplants until final acceptance.
B. A plant list, including a schedule of sizes, quantities and other requirements, is provided on
the drawings.
C. Related work:
1. Section 31 10 00: Site Clearing
2. Section 31 20 00: Earth Moving
3. Section 32 92 00: Turf and Grasses
A. Plants shall conform to names indicated on the drawings and plant list and to the nomencla-
ture listed in the American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature’s “Standardized
Plant Names”, latest edition.
B. Size, quality, handling, planting and maintenance of plant materials shall be in accordance
with “USA Standard of Nursery Stock”, American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. Minimum
acceptable sizes of plants, measured before pruning with branches in normal position, shall
conform to measurements specified in the plant list.
C. Plants shall be subject to the Landscape Architect’s inspection and approval at place of
growth or upon delivery for conformity to specification requirements. Such approval shall
preclude neither right of inspection upon delivery at the site or during progress of work, nor
right of rejection at the site due to damage suffered in handling or transportation.
D. Contractor will provide and pay for materials testing. Testing agency shall be acceptable to
the Landscape Architect.
1. Test representative samples of materials proposed for use. Materials used in the work
shall be the same materials as tested. Do not use proposed materials in the work until
test reports have been reviewed by the Landscape Architect and approval obtained to
proceed with plant excavations.
E. Test reports: Provide the following information:
1. Topsoil:
a. Mechanical analysis
b. Percentage of organic content
c. Recommendations on the type and quantity of soil nutrient additives required to
bring nutrients to a satisfactory level for specified plants.
d. Recommendations on the type and quantity of soil additives required to bring the
pH of soil to a value of 6.5-7.0 (unless otherwise noted).
2. Peat Moss:
a. Loss of weight by ignition
b. Moisture absorption capacity
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit complete written maintenance instructions at least 10 days prior to end of mainte-
nance period. Include all requirements for proper care, development and maintenance of
plantings.
B. Submit samples of proposed mulch used in planting beds for approval.
C. Submit certificate of inspection of plant material by state or federal authorities.
D. Submit a label from the manufacturer’s container certifying fertilizer content.
E. Submit material test reports and soil nutrient additive recommendations.
A. Prepare, transport and handle plants to ensure protection against injury. Cover all plants
while transporting to and from the site.
B. Deliver plants with legible waterproof identification labels.
C. Temporary storage of new material:
1. No new plants shall remain in temporary storage over the winter or summer. Plants that
are not planted immediately shall be protected as follows:
a. Plants shall remain on the site of the work no longer than three days prior to being
planted or placed in storage.
b. The earth balls shall be kept moist and their solidity carefully preserved. To pre-
vent drying out or freezing, store plants in a compact group with a suitable mulch
material placed around and between the balls so they are completely covered. The
duration of storage, method of storage of plants and mulch material shall be ac-
ceptable to the Landscape Architect.
D. Do not deliver or use topsoil in frozen or muddy condition.
A. Install plant materials during time periods indicated. Planting operations conducted at other
times are at the option and full responsibility of the Contractor and without additional compen-
sation, except as otherwise agreed to by the Landscape Architect and Owner.
1. Deciduous materials:
a. March 1 to June 1
b. October 1 to December 1
2. Evergreen material:
a. April 1 to June 1
b. September 1 to October 15
3. Ground Cover: Spring only, unless otherwise authorized.
4. When planting operations vary, plant early in the day. When planting occurs in the
summer, apply anti-desiccant spray to plantings after leaves become full size.
B. Weather limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather condi-
tions permit.
C. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after finish grades are established and be-
fore planting lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Landscape Architect.
1. When planting trees and shrubs after lawns, protect lawn areas and promptly repair
damage caused by planting operations.
2. When hydroseeding is used, protect shrubs, trees and other site improvements from
hydroseed overspray. Any improvements damaged by overspray will be repaired or re-
placed by the responsible contractor.
1.6 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee unconditionally labor and plant materials for a period of one year after Landscape
Architect’s acceptance. Replace at Contractor’s expense all plant materials which die during
guarantee period, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or
abuse by Owner. At end of guarantee period, replace all plant materials that are more than
25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition.
B. During guarantee period, replace plants that die or are, in the Landscape Architect’s opinion,
in an unhealthy, unsightly, or badly impaired condition. Make no replacements in any season
unfavorable for planting. Provide replacement plants of the same kind and size as specified
in the plant list, and meeting all requirements of these specifications.
C. Initial inspection of planting will be made by Landscape Architect at completion of planting.
Guarantee period shall begin at date of acceptance.
D. The Contractor shall make as many periodic inspections as necessary during the guarantee
period at no additional cost to the Owner, to determine if the Owner’s maintenance program is
providing satisfactory care for the new plant materials. Submit in writing to the Owner all rec-
ommended changes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Plant Materials:
1. Provide healthy, sound, vigorous plant materials, free from plant diseases, insect
pests, or their eggs, with healthy well-developed root systems; freshly dug, nursery-
grown, well-branched, densely foliated when in leaf, and well-proportioned, particular-
ly with respect to the width-height relationship, hardy under climatic conditions similar
to those of the project.
2. Damaged or broken branches, broken ball, and loose top in ball are not acceptable.
Provide balled and burlapped plants, designated B&B, adequately balled with firm
natural balls as set forth in the ASNS. Firmly wrap balls with burlap or approved cloth
secured in place.
3. Obtain the Landscape Architect’s specific written approval for substitution of plants
other than those named in the plant list. Proposed substitutes shall have essentially
the same characteristics as plants specified in appearance, ultimate height, shape,
habit of growth, general soil and other requirements. Average cost and value of sub-
stituted plants shall be no less than cost and value of plants specified. Plants of
greater value may be accepted without additional cost to the Owner.
4. Provide container-grown stock with root system sufficiently developed to hold soil to-
gether, firm and whole. No plants shall be loose in containers; nor pot-bound.
5. Size range and measurement of height and caliper of all material shall be as specified
in the ASNS.
B. Guying and Staking Material:
1. Tree stakes: 2” x 2” x 8’ hardwood.
2. Hose: High quality braided rubber or plastic hose, ¾ inch diameter and suitable
length. (Color Black)
3. Wire: 12 gauge galvanized steel.
4. Guying cable: Galvanized steel, #9 gauge. Thimbles and nicroress clips shall be
used for connections and splices.
5. Turnbuckles: Galvanized or zinc dip painted with an 8 inch length-wise opening fitted
with eyebolts and spot welded or fitted with a locking device to prevent vandalism.
6. Guying stakes: 2” x 2” x 33”, notched hardwood.
7. Deadman: Sound lumber 4” x 8” x 36”.
C. Mulch:
1. Paygro or equal, shredded bark mulch or wood chips, containing no sticks larger than
¼” in diameter, stones, clay or other foreign material that will prevent eventual decay
of the mulch necessary for its complete effectiveness.
2. Gravel mulch as noted on the plans shall be washed river rock, size as noted. It shall
be inert, durable stone free of material deleterious to plant growth. Submit sample to
Landscape Architect for approval.
D. Wrapping material for tree trunks: Two thickness’ of crinkled paper cemented together with
bituminous material, in strips 4” to 6” wide, laced in place.
E. Anti-desiccant: “Wilt-Pruf”, Nursery Specialty Products, Inc., New York or equal. Use accord-
ing to manufacturer’s instructions.
F. Tree Paint: Cabot Tree Paint or equal.
G. Peat moss used in planting soil preparation: High quality pure Canadian sphagnum peat with
a pH value not less than 3.5 nor greater than 6.0 at 25 degrees C. The ash content shall be
not more than 10 percent and water holding capacity shall be not less than 800 percent.
H. Water: Free of substances harmful to plant growth.
I. Fertilizer mixture: At the time of plant installation, add fertilizer mixture into the planting soil.
100 lb. of fertilizer mixture consists of the following:
3 pounds chelated iron (Sequestrene)
5 pounds aluminum sulfate
7 pounds finely ground sulphur
10 pounds steamed bonemeal
75 pounds complete fertilizer, such as 8-32-16
J. Topsoil:
1. Provide fertile, friable, surface soil, reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush,
weeds and other litter and free of roots, stumps, stones, and other extraneous or toxic
matter harmful to plant growth.
2. Topsoil shall be a sandy loam or loam soil as defined by the Soil Conservation Ser-
vice U.S.D.A., Soil Classification System.
3. Mechanical analysis shall fall within the following particle ranges:
Average percentage Range
Sand ().05-2.0 mil dia. Range) 30-70% 50%
Silt (0.002-0/05 mil dia. Range) 20-50% 35%
Clay (less than .002 mil dia. Range) 5-25% 15%
95% of topsoil shall pass a 2.0 mil sieve.
4. Provide topsoil free of stones one inch in longest dimension, earth clods, plant parts
and debris.
5. Topsoil shall possess from 5% to 12% organic matter.
K. Landscape Mat: When specified on the drawings, landscape mat shall be DeWitt Pro 5
Weed Barrier polypropylene fabric mat 4.8 oz. per square yard as manufactured by DeWitt
Company, phone: (800) 325-0950 or approved equal. Joints shall be lapped 4”-6” with care
taken not to puncture or tear mat.
A. Planting soil mixture: For all planting operations, provide 4 parts topsoil and 1 part peat moss
by volume.
B. Planting soil shall have a pH value range of 6.5 to 7.0. If the topsoil used in making the plant-
ing soil mixture does not fall within the pH range specified, amend with limestone or aluminum
sulphate to bring topsoil within the specified limit.
C. Test topsoil to be used in making planting soil mixture for nutrients. When testing indicates a
deficiency of nutrients, apply fertilizer at rates recommended by testing.
D. Apply fertilizer recommended by testing within a ten day period prior to installing plants.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the work is to be performed. Provide the re-
quired additional topsoil in all planting areas. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfacto-
ry conditions have been corrected.
B. Locate plants as shown or as approved in field by Landscape Architect after staking by Con-
tractor.
A. Unless otherwise directed by the Landscape Architect, incorporate 5 pounds of specified ferti-
lizer mixture per cubic yard of planting soil mixture.
B. Test drain plant beds and pits by filling with water twice in succession. Conditions permitting
retention of water in planting beds for more than 24 hours shall be brought to the Landscape
Architect’s attention. Notify Landscape Architect in writing of condition considered detrimental
to growth of plant materials, and submit proposal for correcting condition, if feasible, including
change in cost, if any.
C. Excavate plant pits with vertical sides. Make tree pits 2 ft. greater in diameter than ball of
earth or spread of roots of trees and deep enough to allow for depth of ball. Make shrub pits
1 ft. greater than spread of roots and 12” deep minimum, below finished grade. Adjust depth
of planting beds to permit a minimum of 4” of tamped topsoil beneath ball or roots of all
plants. Set plants at finished grade.
D. Remove all rock or other underground obstruction encountered in any plant pit excavation to a
depth of not less than 3 ft. below grade and not less than 6” below bottom of ball or roots.
A. Set plants in center of pits plumb and straight and at such a level that after settlement, plants
will bear same relation to finished grade of surrounding ground as to grade of ground from
which plants were dug. In setting balled and burlapped trees and shrubs, compact topsoil
around bases of ball to fill all voids. Remove ropes, wires or strings.
B. Thoroughly compact and water topsoil around balls. To compensate for shrinkage, fix fin-
ished grade of topsoil prior to watering at an elevation 10% of fill depth higher than desired fin-
ished grade. To facilitate watering, form shallow saucer approximately 3” deep around each
plant by placing a ridge of topsoil around the edge of each filled-in pit. After planting, cultivate
soil in shrub beds between shrub pits, rake smooth and neatly outline.
C. Wrap all trees immediately after planting. Wrap tree trunks spirally from bottom to top and
entirely cover trunk from ground to height of second branches neatly and snugly. Overlay ap-
proximately 2”. Stake or guy as shown on drawings.
D. Prune each tree and shrub in accordance with the American Association of Nurserymen’s
Standard to preserve natural character of plant. Remove all dead wood or suckers and all
broken or badly bruised branches. Remove ¼ to 1/3 of wood by thinning out and shortening
branches to balance root loss due to transplanting. Make all cuts flush, leaving no stubs.
Paint cuts over 1” diameter with tree paint, covering all exposed cambium and other exposed
living tissue.
E. Within 2 days after planting, cover all tree shrub and ground cover pits and beds with a mini-
mum 3” layer of mulch. Limit of mulch for trees shall be area of pit, and for shrubs and
ground cover in beds, entire area of bed. Where gravel mulch is specified, avoid contaminat-
ing gravel with other materials. Temporary edging material, where shown on the drawings,
shall be removed after adjoining ground cover materials have become established.
A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant is planted and shall continue until final
acceptance with the following requirements: Maintenance of new planting shall consist of
pruning, watering, cultivating, weeding, mulching, tightening, and repairing of guys, resetting
plants to proper grades and upright position, restoration of guys, resetting plants to proper
grades and upright position, restoration of the planting saucer, and furnishing and applying
such sprays as are necessary to keep the plantings free of insects and disease.
B. Planting areas and plants shall be protected at all times against trespassing and damage for
the duration of the maintenance period. If any plants become damaged or injured, they shall
be treated or replaced as directed by the Landscape Architect at no additional cost to the
Owner.
A. The work will be inspected upon Contractor’s written request submitted at least 10 days be-
fore anticipated date of inspection. Repairs or replacements deemed necessary after inspec-
tion, shall be completed before acceptance is made by the Landscape Architect.
B. The work may be accepted in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner’s best interest to do
so, and when permission is given to the Contractor in writing to complete the work in parts.
C. The guarantee period for trees and shrubs shall begin at the date of acceptance. All plant
material shall be guaranteed by the Contractor, for a period of one year from the date of ac-
ceptance to be in good, healthy and flourishing condition. When the work is accepted in
parts, the guarantee periods shall extend from each of the partial acceptances to the terminal
date of the last guarantee period. Thus, all guarantee periods terminate at one time.
D. The Contractor shall replace, without cost to the Owner, and as soon as weather conditions
permit and within a specified planting period, all dead plants and all plants not in a vigorous,
thriving condition, as determined by the Landscape Architect during and at the end of the
guarantee period. The plants shall be free of dead or dying branches and branch tips, and
shall bear foliage of a normal density, size and color. Replacements shall closely match adja-
cent specimens of the same species. Replacements shall be subject to all requirements stat-
ed in this specification. The Contractor shall make all necessary repairs due to plant re-
placements. Such repairs shall be done at no extra cost to the Owner. The Guarantee of all
replacement plants shall extend for an additional period of one year from the date of their ac-
ceptance after replacement. In the event that a replacement plant is not acceptable during or
at the end of the said extended guarantee period, the Owner may elect subsequent replace-
ment or credit for each item.
A. Upon completion of planting and prior to acceptance, remove excess soil and debris from site
and repair all damage to structures and site improvements, resulting from planting operations.
B. Sweep and hose down paved surfaces affected by planting operations.
END OF SECTION 32 90 00
SECTION 32 92 00
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Deliver materials in the original unopened containers showing weight, analysis and the name
of the manufacturer and store in a dry, weatherproof location.
A. The lawn and specialty seed bidder shall be, and have been actively and directly engaged in
the installation of seeded lawn and wetlands for a period of two or more years. Provide proof
of 5 or more successful wetland seed installations.
B. The bidder shall possess specialized equipment for working in and around water, including a
small boat, hip waders, and floatation life preservers to be worn while working in water.
C. Wetland seed may be hydroseeded into the mud, utilizing enough water to ensure good
contact of seed with soil.
1.6 GUARANTEE
A. Examine the area and conditions under which the work is to be performed. Do not proceed
with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Guarantee a good stand of grass by watering, mowing, regrading and reseeding and re-
mulching eroded areas and otherwise maintaining seeded areas to the satisfaction of the
Landscape Architect, until final acceptance. Any areas which fail to show a uniform stand
shall be reseeded and re-mulched at Contractor’s expense with the same seed mixture
originally specified. Reseed as required until all affected areas are accepted by the
Landscape Architect.
A. Perform lawn work only after other work affecting ground surface has been completed.
B. Do not seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph.
C. Restrict traffic from lawn areas until grass is established. Erect temporary signs and barriers
as required.
D. Normal lawn seeding shall be performed between April 1 through June 15 and August 15
through October 1.
E. Specialty seed areas shall be planted between April 20 and July 1 except as otherwise noted
for a specific seed mix.
F. If the site is prepared at any other time of the year, the site shall be stabilized with the
following seed mix:
Rate:
Seed Oats – (Avena sativa) 64 lbs. per acre
Annual Rye – (Lolium multiflorum) 25 lbs. per acre
G. All native seed shall be refrigerated for at least 90 days prior to installation.
H. Areas adjacent to specialty seed areas shall have no pre-emergent herbicide application
within the six months prior to or in the first year following installation.
I. Surrounding turf areas shall be stabilized prior to prairie grass seeding.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.2 ACCESSORIES
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Apply glyphosate herbicide approved for use around water if vegetation exists on the site
to be planted:
1. In areas to be seeded or overseeded, apply at least three days prior to installation
of all actively growing vegetation.
2. In wetland and shoreline areas, apply two weeks prior to installation of wetland
plantings.
B. Verify Soil shall be cultivated to provide a firm seed bed, 4” deep, smooth, friable, fine
textured and free of clods. In areas adjacent to water, till as close to the shoreline as
moisture conditions permit. No heavy objects, except necessary lawn making equipment,
shall be moved over the area after the soil is prepared unless it is again loosened and
graded.
C. Provide lawn areas smooth and with a continual grade between existing or fixed controls,
such as walks, elevations at steps or buildings. Roll, scarify, rake and level as necessary
to obtain true, even lawn surfaces. Correct irregularities in the surface resulting from
tillage operations to prevent formation of depressions or water pockets.
D. Distribute ground limestone evenly by machine over whole area and incorporate
thoroughly into topsoil.
E. Drill seed when soil is sufficiently dry to avoid soil sticking to the packer wheels.
F. Verify proper calibration of the drill to ensure even coverage of the area with the specified
amount of seed.
G. If seed bed has become muddy, hard or excessively dry, re-till to a smooth, friable,
uniform condition, free from stones or lumps. Regrade all settling prior to seeding. Seed
immediately after bed preparation.
A. Just prior to seeding, apply fertilizer at the rate specified. Incorporate into seed bed to a
depth of 1”. Fertilizer may be applied with grass seed if hydroseeding is used.
B. Prior to seeding small areas of detailed seeding, mark out limits of seeding areas with
string or hose and secure Landscape Architect’s approval of layout before sowing seed.
C. Sow seed immediately after preparation of seed bed.
D. Sow lawn seed evenly by mechanical spreader seeding equipment. If seed is broadcast
with a mechanical spreader, rake surface of soil slightly with a fine toothed rake to
incorporate seed into ¼” of soil. Firm soil over seed with a cultipacker or lawn roller to
insure good seed/soil contact. Do all seeding when soil is dry and wind does not exceed
5 mph velocity.
E. Sow the seeds of sedges, and extremely small or chaffy grass seed by using the following
method:
1. Mix the required seed mix with a larger volume of inert matter such as sawdust,
peat moss, vermiculite, or sand. The inert matter should be slightly damp, so that the
seeds will stick to it. For each 1000 square foot of seeding, use about two bushels of
inert material. Mix the seed evenly into the inert material.
2. Take one-half of the total mix and hand spread it evenly across the area. Fling
the seed in a broad arc to scatter it widely and evenly across the area.
3. Spread the remaining half of the seed mix evenly across the same area, walking
perpendicular to the direction used when spreading the first half of the mix.
4. Rake or drag the seed into the soil so that it is lightly covered, one quarter to one
half inch deep.
5. Roll the site with a roller or drive across it with tractor tires to firm the seed into
the soil. Soil must be dry to avoid soil compaction.
F. Oat straw mulch shall be used in areas to receive sedge seeding:
1. Place mulch on seeded areas within 48 hours after seeding.
2. Place mulch uniformly in a continuous blanket at rate of one and one half bales
per 1,000 square feet and wet down to prevent displacement. Areas subject to
extreme wind shall be treated with asphaltic emulsion applied uniformly at rate of
not less than 100 gallons per acre. A mechanical blower may be used to apply
mulch, provided the machine has been specifically designed and approved for
this purpose.
3. Where size of areas mulched precludes use of equipment, mulch may be
anchored by use of a light covering of topsoil or other approved means.
4. Protect buildings, pavements and plantings and non-seeded areas from asphaltic
emulsion overspray.
G. Hydraulic seeding equipment may not be used.
H. Install jute matting to areas as indicated on the drawings in accordance with ODOT Item
671.
I. Water as required to maintain adequate moisture in the upper 4” of soil to promote proper
root growth. Maintain watering and mowing as necessary until acceptance of lawn areas,
but not less than 30 days.
END OF SECTION 32 92 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
A. Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water Systems Components – Health Effects,” for
materials for potable water.
B. Comply with NFPA 24, “Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their
Appurtenances,” for materials, installation, tests, flushing and valve and hydrant
supervision.
C. Water main testing shall be performed in accordance with local agency jurisdiction.
Pressure testing – comply with AWWA (American Water Works Association)
guidelines.
Project 16018 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 0330500-1
AIA/MCS March 3, 2017
Project No. WSU-160027
Agricultural Education and Water Quality Building
Wright State University, Lake Campus
F. Steel Piping Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and that certification is current.
G. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing
angles of identification devices.
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of
dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
1.6 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers specified.
B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal
or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product.
Requests for A/E's approval must be accompanied by the Substitution Request Form”
and complete technical data for evaluation. All materials for evaluation must be
received by the Project Manager and Specification Department at least 10 days prior to
bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum.
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by
piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
A. Transition Fittings, General: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to
and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
E. Description: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be
joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.
2.4 SLEEVES
A. Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations are specified in Division 22 Section
"Common Work Results for Plumbing."
C. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized,
plain ends.
E. Molded PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
G. Molded PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface
with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.5 GROUT
A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove piped utility systems, equipment, and components
indicated to be removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and
cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on the Coordination
Drawings.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas
at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
J. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and
fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number
PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138
Appendix.
F. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean
cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain-End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
A. Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
base plates, and anchors.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: General utility services, including but not limited to the following:
1. Storm sewer pipe and tube.
2. Concrete structures.
3. Drainage castings.
4. Water main piping
5. Natural gas piping
6. Sanitary sewer piping.
7. Rip rap.
8. Catch basins.
9. Manholes.
10. Inlets.
11. Manhole frames and covers.
12. Field verification.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 31 Section “Site Clearing”.
2. Division 31 Section “Earth Moving”.
3. Division 33 Section “Common Work Results for Utilities”.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The term utilities as hereinafter stated or indicated is that part of the water, storm,
sanitary system beginning 5 feet from the outer face of the outside building wall, and
conveying it to the local utility mains or other disposal terminals.
1. Provide waterline to building as indicated on the plans
2. Provide sanitary to building as indicated on the plans.
B. Site sanitary sewer work includes, but is not limited to, the following: Sewer drainage
piping and fittings, rodding holes, manholes, sewer structures, and related materials
and labor adjunct to the completion of the sanitary sewer system.
C. Site drainage work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Providing stormwater drainage pipe and fittings outside the buildings, new
stormwater culverts, manholes, catch basins, perforated plastic underdrain
systems, and related materials and labor adjunct to the completion of site
drainage work.
2. The Contractor for the Work under this Section will be responsible for
installing or constructing special sewer structures that are a part of the storm
drainage system.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Utility Compliance: Comply with local regulations pertaining to the site work. Include
all costs in bid associated with the utilities installation.
D. Install pipe and fittings in strict accordance with best, acceptable practice to insure
proper functioning, freedom from trouble, and neatness of appearance.
E. Provide proper fittings for the installation of, and connection to, sewer lines. Where an
underground branch connection is required, provide a "Y" branch and 30 degree curve
type fitting. Connections made by cutting holes in pipe will not be permitted.
F. Prior to final observation flush sewers with water in sufficient volume to obtain free flow
through each line. Remove all obstructions and correct defects discovered.
B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
B. Concrete Structures
1. Manholes and catch basins shall be constructed with components of precast
concrete.
C. Drainage Castings
1. Castings shall be of uniform quality, free from blowholes, porosity, hard
spots, shrinkage distortion, or other defects. Castings shall be smooth and
well cleaned by shot blasting and shall be coated with coal tar epoxy (SSPC
Paint 16).
2. Castings shall be equal to those as manufactured by Neenah Foundry
Company, Neenah, Wisconsin; East Jordon Iron Works, East Jordan,
Michigan; or Zurn, Sanford, North Carolina.
3. Furnish only the following castings for installation under Division 03 Section
“Cast-In-Place Concrete”.
G. Riprap: Sound and durable rock shall be free of soil and placed as a rock fill for the
protection of slopes so denoted on the Drawings. Thin, slablike pieces shall not be
used. Rock shall consist of sizes such that the amount of material passing a 3 inch
sieve shall not be more than 15 percent by weight of the total material, and the amount
of material passing a 6 inch square opening shall not be more than 50 percent by
weight of the total material.
B. The top section shall be flat or tapered to the size required to make a proper base for
the cover and frame called for (see plan for type required). The bottom section shall
have openings cast therein to receive sewer lines that are to be connected thereto. In
the event that a sewer line empties into the manhole at an elevation above the first
section, it shall have an opening cast therein to receive such lines.
C. The manufacturer shall cast openings in the sections of the manholes to receive
standard rungs of proper design to permit access to the structure without the use of a
ladder. Openings for these rungs shall be located in such a way that they will permit
the installation of the rungs in a straight, vertical line. The manufacturer shall furnish
shop drawings showing the location and size of openings to receive sewer lines, the
location of the holes for the access rungs in relation to the openings, the height of the
special section, if and when required, to achieve the necessary elevation for the
manhole cover and frame, and the contour of the tapered section required to fit the
frame called for.
D. All structures shall be provided with size and shape to receive all pipe shown on the
Drawings and maintain structure integrity.
E. All pipe connections to the structure shall be ground both inside and outside of the
structure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. The term field verify or similar as related to the utilities shall be defined as a complete
exposure of the pipe, manhole or other utility related item. Take field survey
measurements to determine the top and invert elevations. Determine the existing
material type and/or all other related field features.
B. The Contractor shall locate and expose the existing utility line prior to commencing the
general trench excavation for the installation of the new utility lines.
C. The Contractor shall report to the Architect and Construction Manager the existing
depth, size, material type, and invert elevation of the utility line.
D. The information determined in the field shall be coordinated with the new utility lines
prior to commencing with the general trench excavation.
E. The Architect shall use the additional information obtained in the field and verify the
compatibility of the existing utility with the new utility.
G. In the event the existing utility is not compatible with the new utility, adjustments to the
Drawing or contract will be made in accordance with the General Conditions.
3.2 LAYOUT
A. The Work under this Section shall include the making of a complete layout on the site
of storm sewer lines indicating the location of sewer structures, in accordance with the
design drawings. Carefully check this layout against the finished grades and other
improvements called for on the Drawings. Call conflict or deviation from drawing
requirements to the Architect's attention for instructions before proceeding with the
Work. Perform layout in cooperation with other Contractors in establishing the exact
routing, crossings, and points of connection with the Work of other Contractors.
B. Verify the location, as close as possible, of existing and new utilities prior to
excavation. Exercise the utmost care to avoid contact and injury to electrical
underground cables and underground utilities. Proper protection of said services must
be maintained.
A. Excavating, trenching, backfilling, grading, and related work shall follow the
Specifications as outlined in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” and as hereinafter
noted.
B. Exercise care in trenching, preparation of the bedding, and installation of the piping
materials so that the pipe will be held in a straight line, conforming to the gradients
called for on the Drawings.
D. Maintain a dry trench to avoid sediment entry into the system and to achieve a firm and
secure bed. Protect joint work as the Work progresses. When required, perform
piping and bailing to meet this requirement.
E. Place a properly designed stopper in the open end of each pipeline when work is not in
progress. Where "Y" branches are installed, locate as close as possible to the points
shown on the Drawings. Place secure, temporary caps or plugs in branch openings,
pending the installation of branch sewers.
H. After the manhole has been properly constructed, grout the rungs into the openings
provided, so as to achieve a permanent and substantial attachment to the manhole.
I. Make sure that the ends of sewer lines and fittings, which connect into sewer
structures, are properly positioned and held in position at the proper elevation and
location, so the connections may be constructed as called for on Drawings or in
accordance with best trade practice.
J. Where pipe is introduced into manholes or sewer structures after it has been
constructed, use methods and take all precautions necessary to insure a watertight,
permanent connection. Use a hot poured bituminous compound at such points of
connection.
K. Sewer pipe terminating in manholes or sewer structures, installed before such structure
is built, shall be completely coated with a uniform layer of hot mix bituminous
compound just prior to the construction of the structure and its base, so that a
watertight connection will be achieved.
L. Wherever sanitary manholes have inlets with the invert 2 feet or more above the flow
line of the outlet base of effluent invert, provide a drop pipe and fittings from the top
flow grade to empty onto the floor of the manhole. Encase the drop pipe and fittings in
concrete, bonded to the exterior of the manhole and extending from the manhole base,
so as to completely encase the drop line and fittings. Provide necessary opening at
the bottom of the manhole to permit the incoming water to flow to the outlet. Provide a
flow channel from the opening in the manhole connected to the outlet channel. Provide
additional width of concrete base to support the drop pipe and enclose.
N. Verify the location of existing and new utilities prior to excavation. Exercise the utmost
care to avoid contact or injury to electrical underground cables and underground
utilities. Proper protection of said services must be maintained.
O. When tying in new sewer lines which are required to take the place of existing sewer
lines, maintain service and make the new tie-in in such a way that there will be no
interruption of service through existing sewage lines.
P. When existing sewers are encountered, whether indicated on the Drawings or not,
make adequate provisions for diverting the flow of such existing sewers so that the
excavation will be kept dry during the progress of construction. Reroute such existing
sewers as required to maintain proper functioning. Before completion of the
construction work, restore the existing sewers as called for on the Drawings or
otherwise provide with an adequate outlet, as directed by the Architect. Under no
conditions abandon or plug an underground line before making sufficient tests to
indicate that it is not a functioning line, and then only when directed by the
Architect/Engineer in writing.
R. When the storm sewer system is complete, and except at the building connection
where care must be exercised to achieve a uniform grade and straight alignment, make
a light test by flashing a light from manhole to manhole or from the manhole to the
cleanout connection.
Where a cleanout connection is used, use an appropriate mirror for this test. If the
view through the pipe does not show a vertical axis on full pipe diameter and a
horizontal axis on at least 3/4 of the pipe diameter, remove and relay the pipe as
necessary to meet these requirements. Conduct the light test in the presence of the
Architect/Engineer or his representative.
1. The light test is the responsibility of the Contractor including all items
required and scheduling the test.
S. The Contractor under the supervision of the governing agency shall test all PVC and
other flexible pipe used for sanitary sewers for deflection. Tests shall not be conducted
until at least 60 days after final full backfill has been placed. Maximum allowable
deflection shall be 5%. If test is to be accomplished by pulling a mandrel through the
pipe, no mechanical equipment shall be used to assist. Sewers that fail this test shall
be relayed and re-tested to meet this requirement.
T. All sanitary sewer manholes shall be vacuum tested using the following procedures
from ASTM C-1244: All lift holes shall be plugged. All pipes entering the manhole
shall be temporarily plugged taking care to securely brace the pipes and plugs to
prevent them being drawn into the manhole. The testing equipment shall be placed in
the casting to allow the joint between the casting and manhole to be tested. A vacuum
of 10” of mercury shall be drawn on the manhole. The valve on the vacuum line of the
test head closed and the vacuum pump shut off. The time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to 9” of mercury. The manhole shall pass the test if the time for the
vacuum reading to drop from 10” of mercury to 9” of mercury is greater than one
minute. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made by an
approved method. The manhole shall be re-tested until a satisfactory test is obtained.
A. Buried concrete pipe shall rest on a firm bearing, undisturbed earth surface along the
entire length of the pipe. Bell or grooved ends shall lay upgrade in a hollowed out bed.
A. Buried PVC pipe shall rest on a firm bearing, bedding material along the entire length
of the pipe. Bell or grooved ends shall lay upgrade in a hollowed out bed.
C. Line or grade changes and junction shall be made with a proper fitting.
D. Contractor must strictly adhere to Uni-Bell UNI-B-5, recommended practice, except that
natural compaction is not allowed for the installation of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe.
(Water main and force main piping)
A. Install drainage pipe pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5
percent, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Provide ell's at 90-degree turns, adapters, tees, and transitions as noted or required.
Cap laterals at open-end terminals.
A. The concrete base shall not be less than 4 inches thick, reinforced. The base shall sit
on a minimum 3 inch thick gravel base placed over an undisturbed or thoroughly
compacted earth excavation. Carefully establish the entire height of the unit so as to
meet the top elevation of the inlet lid and as denoted on the Drawings.
A. The concrete base shall not be less than 6 inches thick, reinforced as denoted, and
shall extend a minimum of 4 inches beyond the exterior wall of the barrel. The base
shall sit on a minimum 3 inch thick gravel base placed over an undisturbed or
thoroughly compacted earth excavation. Carefully establish the entire height of the unit
so as to meet the top elevation of the catch basin lid and as denoted on the Drawings.
B. Set the barrel section on the base with a heavy consistency of approved bituminous
material so as to provide watertight connections.
C. Grout the top section cover pad to sit level and to meet grade elevations as denoted on
the Drawings.
A. Verify the location of utilities prior to excavation. After properly preparing the
excavation, cast the concrete base for each manhole or structure in accordance with
the following:
1. The concrete used shall be of 2500-pound strength. It shall be reinforced
with welded wire road mesh not less than 6 by 6-6/6. The concrete base
shall be not less than 6 inches thick and extend a minimum of 4 inches
beyond the exterior walls of the structure. The height of the base thus
prepared shall be carefully established so as to meet the invert elevation
requirements of the manholes.
2. After the base has sufficiently set, place the first section of the manhole with
the grooved side up. Coat the inside of the manhole for a distance of
approximately 6 inches above the base with a heavy consistency of approved
bituminous material, so as to provide a watertight connection between the
precast manhole and the sewer floor.
3. After the first section has been properly placed and oriented, pour the floor of
the manhole, using concrete similar to the quality called for above. The
manhole floor shall be not less than 4 inches thick or greater, if the size of
the sewers entering same so requires, in order to permit formation of the flow
channels hereinafter specified, and so as to maintain not less than 2 inches
of concrete below the bottom of flow channels. Form flow channels in the
floor of the manhole and locate so as to conform to the sewer lines entering
and leaving same. Smoothly finish such flow channels and provide
semi-circular section, conforming to the inside diameter of the connecting
sewers. The depth of such flow channels shall be approximately 75 percent
of the inside diameter of the sewers they connect. Make changes in size or
grade gradually. Where changes of direction are required, work them out to
form true curves. Provide such channels for connection sewers in each
manhole.
4. Continue setting the subsequent sections, using a heavy consistency of
asphalt cement at each joint. The channel or groove in the bottom section is
to be completely filled with this cement and the tongue of the section above
is to be placed in such a way that a watertight connection will be achieved.
5. As the top section of the structure is prepared for setting, carefully check the
top elevation and if it fails to conform to the required elevation, it is to be
adjusted as may be necessary and approved by the Architect/Engineer so
that the finished grade of the manhole frame and cover will occur at the
correct elevation, as called for on the Drawings, and to meet job
requirements.
A. After concrete subbase is prepared, accurately set castings in position with top
surfaces, coinciding with proposed elevations of concrete slabs and connect as
required to storm sewer.
A. The Contractor is responsible for the procurement and placement of riprap where and
as so denoted on the Drawings.
A. All water mains shall be pressure tested and disinfected in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C600-93 and C651-92 standards and local jurisdictions requirements for
cleaning, testing, and disinfecting of the water main piping.
B. Install ductile iron piping in a manner similar to that of cast iron soil pipe, except that
joints as fittings shall be mechanical joints, with installation as recommended by the
manufacturer.
D. Firmly anchor fittings at bends with concrete thrust blocks and suitably rod to adjacent
connecting lines to prevent fittings from being blown off the lines when under service.
Provide anchors and yokes at fittings exceeding a turn equivalent to a 1/16 bend.
E. Clamps shall be of the type approved by the National Board of Fire Underwriters.
Clamps, rods, washers, and nuts shall be coated with bitumastic coating.
F. Coat exposed threads after nuts are tightened. Tighten bolts to a torque range as
follows: 5/8-inch bolt, 40-60 ft.lbs. with 8 inch wrench; 3/4 inch bolt, 60-90 ft.lbs. with
10- inch wrench; 1 inch bolt, 70-100 ft.lbs. with 12 inch wrench, and 1-1/4 inch bolt, 90-
120 ft.lbs. with 14 inch wrench. Tighten in a manner so that the gland is brought up
toward the pipe flange evenly.
G. Where water mains cross sewers, install the water main above the sewer whenever
possible. Provide one full length of water main centered over the sewer so that both
Project 16018 UTILITIES SERVICES 330510 – 12
AIA/MCS March 3, 2017
Project No. WSU-160027
Agricultural Education and Water Quality Building
Wright State University Lake Campus
joints will be as far from the sewer as possible. Lay water mains with a cover of not
less than 5'-0" from top of pipe to finish grade.
H. Use a permanently pliable waterproof material. Special wall sleeve fittings with soft
rubber seals are approved. Provide a swing joint on water lines just outside the
building to compensate for pipe movement. Anchor lines entering the building to keep
fittings from sliding off.